JP6661180B1 - Game console - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table having a characteristic of an illuminator panel, regarding a game table such as a ball game machine (pachinko machine) or a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine). A front transparent member 703f and a rear transparent member 703r are arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device with a space of 1 mm. The rear transmissive member 703r is provided with a protrusion 703t2 for preventing the plate surface of the front transmissive member 703f and the plate surface of the rear transmissive member 703r from coming into contact with each other. The protrusion 703t2 is provided at a position which is visible to the player in a front view and overlaps with an image such as a decorative pattern which is being variably displayed in the front-rear direction. The light emitting modes of the LED elements 704LE2 and 704LE4 attached to the back surfaces of the first LED substrate 704cbE1 and the second LED substrate 704cbE2 and the LED elements 704LE1 and 704LE3 attached to the front surface may be different. [Selection diagram] Fig. 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a torso game machine (slot machine).

  In gaming tables such as pachinko machines, the game area of the game board is provided with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall, prize holes where game balls can be won, start ports, variable prize holes, etc. General. When a game ball wins, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, among such game consoles, those equipped with an illumination panel are known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the illumination panel.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming table having a characteristic illumination panel.

A game console of the present invention that solves the above object,
Display means;
Multiple illuminated panels,
An LED substrate provided with a plurality of LEDs,
A gaming table with
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a first illumination panel,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a second illumination panel,
One of the plurality of LEDs is a first LED for displaying a pattern on the first illumination panel,
One of the plurality of LEDs is a second LED for displaying a pattern on the second illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are arranged with a gap in the front-rear direction,
A projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illuminated panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel is provided on the first illuminated panel,
The first illuminated panel is arranged behind the second illuminated panel,
The projection is provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view,
The certain position is a position that overlaps the image displayed on the display means in the front-back direction,
The light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be different light emitting modes,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic illumination panel.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the contents of a success / failure judgment table. It is a figure explaining the contents of a special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-controller timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part image control processing. It is a figure of an example of the specific structure of the transmission part 700 which concerns on this invention, (a) is a front view, (b) is the state which made the pattern emit light in the transmission area of the transmission part 700 shown to (a). (C) is a diagram showing a state in which light is applied to the transmission region shown in (b). (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern made to emerge differ by making the light source of a different position emit light in the structure shown in FIG. (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern made to emerge differ by making the light source of a different position emit light in the structure shown in FIG. 14A and 14B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmission region in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 14A illustrates the direction of the light source, and FIG. It is a figure which expands and shows a location. In the configuration shown in FIG. 14, regarding the lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing the pattern and the direction of the light source, and FIG. It is a figure which expands and shows a location. It is a figure explaining an example of composition of a permeation part concerning the present invention, and is a schematic diagram which looked at game board 200 from the front. It is a figure explaining an example of composition of a permeation part concerning the present invention, and is a schematic diagram which looked at game board 200 from which a plurality of transmissive members can be piled up and which can perform a luminescence effect from the front. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a transmission unit 700. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining a structure of a transmission unit 700. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the light emission effect by the transmission part 700, (a) shows the aspect of the light emission effect by the front transmission member 703f, (b) shows the mode of the light emission effect by the rear transmission member 703r. Is shown. It is a figure which shows typically another mode of the transmission part 700, (A) is a front view of the transmission part 700, (B) is a left view of the transmission part 700. It is a figure which shows typically the modification of the transmission part 700, (A) is a left view which shows the 1st modification of the transmission part 700, (B) is the 2nd of the transmission part 700. It is a left view which shows a modification, (C) is a left view which shows the 3rd modification of the transmission part 700, (D) is a front view which shows the 4th modification of the transmission part 700. It is. It is a figure which shows typically the modification of the transmission part 700, (A) is a left view which shows the 5th modification of the transmission part 700, (B) is the 6th of the transmission part 700. It is a left view which shows the modification, (C) is a left view which shows the 7th modification of the transmission part 700, (D) is a left side which shows the 8th modification of the transmission part 700. It is a figure, (E) is a front view showing the 9th modification of transmission part 700. FIG. 27 is a diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the transmission unit 700. As shown in FIG. It is a front view which shows the example of the shielding apparatus 246 of an aspect different from the shielding apparatus 246 shown in FIG. 3, (a), (b), and (c) are figures which show a mode that the door of the shielding apparatus 246 moves. . FIGS. 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating a structure of a shielding device 246 illustrated in FIG. 3, wherein FIG. 3A is a plan view, FIG. 4B is a front view of a state where left and right LEDs emit light, and FIG. It is a front view of the state where light emission was carried out, and (d) is a front view of the state where left and right and upper and lower LEDs emit light. It is the schematic which shows the structure of the shielding apparatus 246 shown in FIG. 3, (a) is a front view which shows the pattern given by lens cut to each door, (b) is a top view, (c) is It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED as a light source provided in the frame part, (d) is a front view in the state which emitted the upper and lower LED provided in the edge, (e) is a left and right LED and a center upper and lower part. FIG. 4 is a front view of a state in which the LED of FIG. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining the production example applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 33. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 34 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 35 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a view illustrating a continuation of the specific effect example illustrated in FIG. 37; It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 67. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 69 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 69. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a display of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 77 is a view illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 80 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 80. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production following from FIG. 80 (24). It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 83. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 85 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 85. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 87. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 90 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 90. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91. FIG. 94 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 93. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 93 to 94. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 98 to 99. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 100 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 103. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 103 to 104. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 105. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 105 to 106. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the production following from FIG. 109 (18). FIG. 110 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 109 to 110. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of the production in the big hit game performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows step by step about the example of a display when an error display is displayed in the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 122 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 121. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 122. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 124. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 126 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 126. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 128. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 131 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 131. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 135 is a view illustrating a step-by-step example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 133. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 135. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 136 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 141. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 143. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 145. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of the timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 151. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of a reservation notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 154. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 156. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of the timer notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, wherein (a) is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol that is lost without entering the reach state. FIG. 6B is a timing chart for explaining a flow of a variation display of a decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a loss after the reach state is reached. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment from the front side (the player side). It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on a main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a figure explaining the composition of a variable winning device. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. It is an example of the display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging whether or not to accept a figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the tables for judging whether the figure is a special figure 1.2 or (c). It is a figure showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for use. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-controller timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the dip switch substrate. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 has a big hit during the special figure 1 change, and (b) is a timing chart illustrating that the special figure 2 has a small hit during the special figure 1 change. 6 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an operation when the operation has been performed. (A) is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation in each symbol display device in the normal game state, and (b) illustrates an example of an operation in each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart explaining a 1st setting suggestion effect execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the continuous notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (c) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the initial normal big hit re-lottery selection, and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first probability change big hit re-lottery selection. It is a figure explaining the contents of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table, (a) is a figure showing an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4, (b) is a figure It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for 5, and (c) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 6. (A) is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation in each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hitting game in the normal game state, and (b) is a small timing chart in the normal game state. It is a timing chart explaining an example of operation in each symbol display device when it hits. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning a decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect in a big hit game centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect in a probable game state centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a re-lottery production centering on a decoration design display. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in a big hit game state centering on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a continuous announcement effect centering on a decorative design display. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an endowment effect centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a pre-reading notice effect centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect regarding the display of the total acquired prize ball centering on the decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect regarding the display of the total acquired prize ball centering on the decorative design display device in steps. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine applicable to this invention from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the gaming table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the holding machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which stores the electronic data which implements this invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors. When the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected. Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is also provided with a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-pitched loudspeaker that outputs high-pitched sounds) and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. Have been. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold-cathode tube, may be referred to as a lamp. Is equivalent to

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish was opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guides the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball release button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player; A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for hitting a ball into the game area 124 of the game board, and an effect button 136 (chance button 136) for changing the effect of the effect device 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player. , A chance button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and emits the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade. A ball lending operation button 140 for performing, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the balance of the player, a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit, Is provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is provided. The operation key unit 137 includes, as cross keys, up and down keys of an up key and a down key, and left and right keys of a left key and a right key, and an enter key in the center of the cross key. I have. Further, a cancel key is also arranged below and below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball firing handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.
The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include a door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open to the main body 104. Also, if the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance Button lamp 138. The effect by the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), the display of the ball rental display section, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142, and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the lower plate full detection sensor can be performed.
Further, in this embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 moves the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed in a state where the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided. The ball firing handle 134 has a firing stop switch (not shown) for disabling the shooting (ejecting) of a game ball in accordance with the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by a player's operation, and the player touching the ball firing handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed in a state where the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball firing handle 134 has been operated from the non-operated state while the demo screen is being displayed, a special effect may be performed. . For example, there are an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emitting effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame). The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, or may be performed by one or more effect means. In addition, even if the production means are of the same type, there may be production means for performing a special production and production means for not performing the production. (For example, the stage production movable body performs a dedicated production, but the game board production movable body does not perform the special production, or the production board production movable body A performs the special production, but the game board production movable body B Does not perform a special effect, etc. This example is applicable to other effect means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing a control process of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls) FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by operation of a game clerk, and launching of a game ball. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control section 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric game machines, A power board case 184 for housing a power board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on; Also, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is stored, the first sub-board case 162 in which the first sub-board 160 is stored, and the second sub-board case 166 in which the second sub-board 164 is stored. A power supply including a payout board case 172 in which a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 is housed, a firing board case 176 in which a firing board 174 is housed, a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 The power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. Further, below the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, , A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a “common symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs an effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is provided as a fourth decorative symbol next to the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The fourth symbol is provided with two of a fourth symbol 219 for special figure 1 for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol 221 for special figure 2 for special figure 2, and the effect display area 208d (for example, At the bottom). The fourth symbol displays fluctuation / stop. For example, black indicates stop display, and gray indicates fluctuation display.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a plurality (for example, two) of LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in the present embodiment, are each configured by a plurality (for example, eight) of LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. Note that the ordinary figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 may be configured by 7-segment LEDs. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the predetermined first variable game held (a general figure variable game described later in detail). (For example, four) can be reserved.

  The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the predetermined second variable game held (a special figure variable game, which will be described later in detail). In the embodiment, it is possible to suspend a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “suspending” here means suspending the start of various determination processes (lottery process and the like) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is configured to provide a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and not to indicate the current symbol control state thereafter. I have. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state returns to the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off. Although the symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time-saving state (electric support state), and a probable change state. It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In the present specification, the description will be made using a word indicating a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the wording of the control state includes a concept of a so-called gaming state.

  Around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the ball to be paid out to the player as consideration for winning may be referred to as “prize ball”, and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as “ball rental”. And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to set a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball to the upper plate. At the same time, the special-figure changing game by the first special-figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 232 a is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 232a is closed, and the state in which the pair of blade members 232a is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the player wins the general fluctuating game and the general graphic display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 232a are open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 232a are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special figure starting ports may be provided, and one second special figure starting port may be provided. Conversely, one first special figure starting port may be provided. And two second special figure starting ports may be provided. When only one special figure display device is provided, the three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, one variable winning opening 234 is provided at the lower center part and the lower right part of the gaming board 200. That is, in the present embodiment, two variable winning openings 234 are provided. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening, and a door member 234a that can freely open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 234a changes the state from one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 234a is on the player side of the gaming board 200 on the player side. It is a stationary state that matches the plane. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 234a is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game, which will be described later, is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is repeatedly changed between the open state and the closed state. In addition, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as the winning of the game ball is achieved by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the big hit symbol after winning the special figure change game, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Note that the ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, two variable winning ports are provided, but a mode in which only one variable winning port is provided may be employed. Further, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The ball accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and has a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. (The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the winning port, the winning port or the starting port without any prize, or passing through the general figure starting port 228, the out port 240 To reach. Note that an out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensors of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed the sensors of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230 and second special figure starting opening 232). It is a sensor configured to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. Note that the sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a stage movable body 224 is arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warping device 242 discharges a game ball that has entered a warp entrance 242a provided at a position slightly below the left center of the rendering device 206 from a warp exit 242b provided on a stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on a game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244 which is a rolling area, the game ball which has entered the receiving hole 244b is discharged from the discharging hole 244a which is a discharging portion, and the discharged ball is easily put into the first special figure starting port 230.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not shown, the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and the forearm of the right arm of a human are provided. There is also provided an arm unit as an effect movable body 224 having a forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the 224b. The arm unit is moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by an upper arm motor and a forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes lattice-shaped left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d, respectively. That is, the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d move left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are closed, the shielding devices 246 overlap with each other, and shield the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. When the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Everything is visible. Further, the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively. For example, the decorative symbols are designed so that the player can identify which decorative symbol is the displayed decorative symbol. Can be shielded. Note that the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 located behind the grid holes to be visible, or a sash part of the grid holes may be translucent. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the lattice hole may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be completely closed. You may make it invisible.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative design display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the gaming board 200, a specification sticker indicating the specification of the gaming table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in the program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two built-in counters). It is equipped with. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a bottom plate full sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 and the (2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the general-purpose holding lamp 216, the special-purpose holding lamp 218, the special-purpose holding lamp 220, and the high-accuracy middle lamp 222; Driving means, for example, a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included therein. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is stored in the value storage register. Similarly, when receiving a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number value generating circuit 318 also calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 via an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the game machine.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, a configuration in which the ROM 406 is provided in the basic circuit 402 may be employed. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246. , A sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 detects various types of movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and detects pressing of various buttons constituting the production button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a CPU 504. (Video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU, generates a display image using a work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on decorative design display device 208. And, is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental game. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 receives prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge unit Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 fluctuating game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detecting sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. (Fluctuating game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats “all the seven segments lighting and one central segment lighting” “variable display of special figure 2” ( Special figure fluctuating game). When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 5A shows nine types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure I”. In FIG. 5A, a white portion in the figure indicates a location of a segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a location of a segment to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as the special symbol stop symbols. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) big hit symbol, and is a 15R certain variable big hit pattern in which it is possible to expect a winning in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit pattern. Therefore, while it is possible to expect winning in five out of fifteen rounds, the remaining round is a real 5R probability variable jackpot symbol in which no winning is expected, and the “special figure C” is a 15R jackpot symbol. There is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the “special figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds while it is expected to obtain a ball in one round. It is a real 4R-RUB in which it is possible to expect to obtain a ball in four rounds of the und, but not to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds. Fig. G "is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability change or hidden probability change in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a winning is expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit is specified. This is a big hit in which the player is inspired to determine whether or not a round in which it is possible to obtain a payout will continue when the third round or the ninth round) is reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of a software random number. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game in the normal state than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-purpose fluctuating game is 1/100 in the general-purpose low-probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose fluctuating game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal-figure variation). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (the electric chew open period is extended). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, the blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, a wing member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and restarts for 2 seconds) Open). By extending the power chew opening period or increasing the number of times the power chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in a big hit game, and if the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there is a case where a disadvantage is caused to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure change, the general figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, game balls are less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state (the normal figure high probability state) is continued until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and the “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, and after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 100 times. Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without an electric support ("Tokuzu G") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is over. When the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  In this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hitting game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of only 0.1 second per operation. In addition, in the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) at the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (the predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If so, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing count and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed and shifted. Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. 5B shows six types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure f”, of which five special figures are big hits (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds. The "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get balls in all rounds of the round, and the “special figure c” is a 15R big hit symbol, and is expected to get balls in eight out of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB in which the remaining round cannot be expected to obtain a ball, and the “Tokuzu d” is a 15R jackpot design, and it can be expected to obtain a ball in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a payout, and the “special figure e” is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, separately from the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the real 5R probability variable jackpot (“special figure B”), the 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and the 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns of the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "). When notifying the 15R sure-change jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. A combination of decorative patterns (eg, “decoration 1-decoration-decoration 1”, “decoration 4—decoration—decoration 4”) that is a decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”), which is the 2R big hit, is notified, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure f”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the decorative symbol variable display. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 5 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. In this embodiment, there are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Primary symbol B". On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 displays all seven segments and one central segment. Performing the “floating display of the ordinary figure” (the ordinary figure fluctuating game) that repeats lighting. Then, after the elapse of the fluctuation time, one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5D as well, a white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates the location of the segment to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of the ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as the “floating display of the ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, and a special figure design decision random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information in a set in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and WDT 314 , And setting of initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the voltage value of the power Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). If the power supply does not return to the state before the power failure (the case where the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized) )), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that an operation has been performed). Is determined, that is, whether or not the RAM clear is required. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all the areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In the initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command, the normal return command returns to step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Sent to one sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the value range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once about every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (set) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (do not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed about once every about 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor presence / absence of the detection signals. It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. In the case of using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area immediately before the second detection provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the ball detection sensors, and this information is read out in the above-described previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals of the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the match is made with the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the general figure starting port 228 Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 234, 226 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting port 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing following the prize in the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the subsequent process of winning the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated. Update the random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value are stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. Is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various kinds of timers, including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a timer for measuring a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end production period, and the like. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning opening 234, 226 or the starting opening 230, 232, the value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to a winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, this indicates that the command is transmitted for the first time after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state update process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes in addition to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, in the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, two seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 2321 in an open state. And the information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure variable game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is ON, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating. In the ordinary figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing-related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal map variable game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made, and if a win is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to obtain a general-purpose timer random value from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random number value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, and first, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in a special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any of the special map a, the special map b, the special map c, and the special map d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure f is on when the loss flag is on. The 7-segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), the 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and the losing symbol ( One of the symbols in the special figure f) is confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not, turn off the time reduction flag. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the existence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image that informs the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning port 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. A signal for holding the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Is set to indicate the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing of the end, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of an effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect standby period. Also, if the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the big hit game. Turns on the saved time reduction flag. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Furthermore, the opening time of one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is more likely to be longer in the high figure probability state than in the low figure probability state (electric tube extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 is more likely to open in the state of high probability of public figure than in the state of low probability of general figure. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable prize openings 234 will be set in the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the big hit game until the game balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases due to the entry of the ball and the gambling property is increased, and this is intended to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special drawing 2 are not performing the variable game, and the special drawing 2 is in a non-operating state and the special drawing 2 is suspended. The process is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area, with the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more as a start condition. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and the special figure 1 is suspended. Assuming that the number of variable games is one or more, the execution is performed using the first special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variable Even when the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, when the reserved number of the special figure 2 variable game is one or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the reservation of the special figure 1 variable game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. The lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game having a high degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over the special figure variable game having a low degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, there may be a case where it is easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Is determined using the hit / fail judgment table stored in (1) to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the obtained special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main controller 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is similarly performed. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 2 priority change is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started in preference to the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 priority change which is digested prior to the reservation may be used. In addition, without giving priority to any of the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage and the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, the special figure variable game related to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be started at the opening prize. The starting opening winning order may be changed in order. In the starting opening winning order change, the upper limit of the number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper-limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed in accordance with the state of one special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process and the special drawing related lottery process may be performed independently for each of the special figures 1 and 2 so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In the case where a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the number of the big change flag, the small hit flag, the missed flag, the special figure probability change flag, and the like. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes the device information, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the prize in the variable special prize ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area described later, and a stop symbol stored in a prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data contains the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the timer number selected in the 2-related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various large hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above described special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the command information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, and advance notice information (prior advance notice information, false information) Advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main controller timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 52, a special figure prefetching process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading processing, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information that has been increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and preliminarily determines the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination processing. The figure prefetch result is stored in a prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 1 and the number of the special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, every time the special figure 1 prefetch number is reduced by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetch result of the highest rank (earliest) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted. Are processed such that the rank of the data is moved up by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 1 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch result is written in the next order of the data of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 2 and the number of the special figure 2 prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit, each time the special figure 2 prefetch number is decreased by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining data of the special figure 2 prefetch result are ranked. Are processed to be moved up one by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 2 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch result is written in the order next to the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank.

  In the special figure pre-reading process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is made, for example, by storing the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in the special figure 2. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number becomes the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303. When it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random number storage area. Further, the processing in step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 10, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game according to the start information is specially determined. The preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S229) in FIG. In the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. 54 to be described later, the preliminary determination of the special symbol 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery processing S708. In addition, this preliminary determination processing may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the forefront free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the procedure moves to step S307.

  In step S307, main controller 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. Whether the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing or not is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, by storing the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the main control unit is started. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not a non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that non-electric support is not being performed (electrical support is being performed (normally high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not a non-electric support is being performed. However, it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the processing in step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of the success / failure determination, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is determined by the special figure 1 related lottery. A preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 54 to be described later, the preliminary determination of the special symbol 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this preliminary determination processing may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In step S315, the pre-read result of the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-fetched without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. The copy is stored in the first available area. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In this embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the prefetch result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the pre-reading results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to read ahead the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-read result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-read notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not a non-electric support is being performed), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always performed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state where the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to retention 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, “special symbol I” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “special symbol I” as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area “hold 2”. (Outlier) is stored in the storage area “hold 3”, and “special figure A” (15R probability variable hit) is stored as stop symbol information, and “special figure I” is stored in the storage area “hold 4” as stop symbol information. (Out) is stored.

  FIG. 9B illustrates an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 2 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to reservation 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9B, “special figure f” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the pre-read result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “undetermined” information instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stopped symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described stop symbol information, a determination is made in advance as to whether or not a hit / fail determination result and a special figure fluctuation time are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Can be sent.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination high probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination low probability table. In the case of performing the determination of the special figure 1 in the special figure high probability state, the special figure high probability state shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the special figure high probability state, and in the special figure low probability state in the special figure low probability state. 10 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred winning / failing determination table and the obtained random number value, the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination. It should be noted that the present invention is also applicable to a win / fail judgment table used in the special drawing per lottery process in step S801 in FIG.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the special figure high probability state in the special figure 2 determination, the special figure high probability state is referred to the special figure high probability table shown in FIG. In this case, the low-probability determination table shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred hit / fail judgment table and the acquired random number, the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 fluctuating game, a big hit or a loss is selected as a result of the hit determination.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the big hit determination is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit determination table and the obtained random number value. Then, the result of the special figure small hit lottery determination is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery hit / fail determination (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the hit / failure determination result, and a loss is made with a probability of 63536/65536. The small hit is not selected if the result of the lottery winning / non-performing judgment (lottery result) per special figure is special figure 2. Note that the present invention is also applicable to a small hit determination table used in the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 in FIG.

  Next, the stop performed based on the result of the determination as to whether the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a) is referred to, and the special figure 1 is determined based on the success / failure result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected. When the result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and if the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The lottery of the stop symbol of Toku-zu 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected. When the result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display device is set.

  The special figure determination table of this example may be used for the symbol determination in the special figure state update processing of FIG. 54 (a). In the display symbol lottery processing of step S708, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is used. When the determination is made, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. Select the design symbol data of the special figure 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 subsequent to step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control processing, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is transmitted to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation in accordance with the detection result. A process of changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, when the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the various lamps 442 and 452, the command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. I do.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the setting for outputting this control command is performed. Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S419), and other update processing of the random number value for effect And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 subsequent to step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative design display device 208) corresponding to the command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the VDP 516, the command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-controller main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing such as updating of the effect random number value is performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. Otherwise (step S553: No), it waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 determines information on image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of rendering of the image. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  14A and 14B are diagrams illustrating an example of a specific configuration of the transmission unit 700 according to the present invention. FIG. 14A is a front view, and FIG. 14B illustrates a pattern in the transmission region of the transmission unit 700 illustrated in FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which made it emit light, and (c) is a figure which shows a mode that a transmissive area shown in (b) is irradiated with light.

  The transmissive portion 700 illuminates light from the side of the transmissive member 703 and a transmissive member 703 that performs, for example, a lens cut at a position corresponding to the smile mark pattern in the transmissive regions 703b and 703c to function as a direction changing unit. The light emitting means 701, the outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, the inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, and the outer glass 705, the transparent member 703 and the inner glass 706. And a glass unit frame 704 to be fitted.

  The light emitting means 701 includes light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G, and 702H, for example, LEDs, and a connector 708 for supplying power to the light sources 702A to 702H is provided on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704. It is exposed. When the light sources 702A to 702H emit light, the light is changed to the player side by the lens cuts made on the transmissive regions 703b and 703c of the transmissive member 703, and the pattern of the smile mark is emitted.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining that the light source at a different position emits light in the configuration shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the light of the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703ba in the transmission area 703b is realized by causing the light sources 702A and 702E to emit light. When the light sources 702A and 702E emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ba may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, light emission of the smile mark pattern (for example, face outline) 703bb in the transmission area 703b is realized by light emission of the light sources 702B and 702F. When the light sources 702B and 702F emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703bb may emit light.

  As described above, among the smile mark patterns in the transmission area 703b, for example, by changing the direction of the lens cut partially, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to cause light emission.

  Light emission of the smile mark patterns 703ba and 703bb in the transmission area 703b is realized by emitting light from the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F. When the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the patterns 703ba and 703bb may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the light of the smile mark pattern (for example, the outline of the face) 703ca in the transmission area 703c is realized by the light sources 702C and 702G. When the light sources 702C and 702G emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ca may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the light of the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703cb in the transmission area 703c is realized by causing the light sources 702D and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702D and 702H emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703cb may emit light.

  As described above, among the smile mark patterns in the transmission area 703c, for example, by changing the direction of lens cut partially, the light source to be reflected is changed, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to cause light emission.

  Light emission of the smile mark patterns 703ca and 703cb in the transmission region 703c is realized by emitting light from the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H. When the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the patterns 703ca and 703cb may emit light.

  17A and 17B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmission region in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 17A illustrates the direction of the light source, and FIG. It is a figure which expands and shows the part enclosed with square A.

  Light sources 702A to 702H are arranged around the side of the transmitting member 703 so as to emit light toward the center of the transmitting member 703. In each region of the transmissive member 703, the intensity of light received from the light source differs depending on the distance from the light source and the difference in the direction with respect to the light source. Here, the relationship between the region and the light source will be described for each of the regions B, C, D, and E in FIG. 17B so that a uniform light emission effect can be achieved in each region. The light output from each of the light sources 702A to 702H has directivity, and the light that goes straight to the center in the direction facing the light source is the strongest, and the light that goes weaker than the center goes straight in the oblique direction.

  The region B is irradiated with light from two upper and lower light sources (for example, the light sources 702A and 702E). In this area B, both the directions of the upper and lower light sources are directly opposed, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light sources, but the light is attenuated because the distance from the upper and lower light sources is long. Therefore, in this area B, it is possible to secure the amount of light required for the effect by receiving the light from the upper and lower light sources.

  The region C is irradiated with light from one lower light source (for example, the light source 702E). In this area C, the direction of the lower one light source is directly opposite, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light source, and the distance from the lower one light source is short. Therefore, in this area C, it is possible to secure the light quantity necessary for the effect by receiving the light from the lower one light source.

  The region D is short in distance from one light source (for example, the light source 702E), but is located in an oblique direction with respect to this one light source, and receives less light than in the case where it is directly opposed. Therefore, in this area D, light from another neighboring light source (for example, the light source 702E) is also received, so that it is possible to secure a light amount necessary for the effect.

  The region E is short in distance from the light source (for example, the light sources 702D and 702E), but is located largely obliquely with respect to the light source, so that light hardly reaches the light source.

  18A and 18B are diagrams illustrating a lens cut forming a pattern that emits light in a transmissive region in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. It is a figure which expands and shows the part enclosed with the ellipse F.

  The transmission region 703d of the transmission member 703 has a lens cut so that a smile mark pattern can be emitted. Referring to the enlarged view of FIG. 18B, lens cuts 703 da, 703 db, 703 dc, 703 dd, and 703 de are applied to portions surrounded by an ellipse F. Each of the lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de has a different cut angle in accordance with the direction of light emitted from the light source. For example, the lens cut 703dc has a cut facing the light source 702F, and the lens cut 703de has a cut facing the light source 702E.

  Note that, as described above, performing the pattern lens cut on the transmission portion and performing light emission display of the pattern by directing light from the light source to the player side will be referred to as “transmission portion (or transmission member)”. Light-emitting display of applied pattern ".

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic diagram of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, light from the light sources 702l and 702r is directed to a predetermined area 720 of the transmission section 700 by a direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 19A) so that the traveling direction is changed to the player side. And a predetermined pattern is displayed by light emission. In FIG. 19A, the light sources 702l and 702r emit light to display the Sabohani character 703SH as a predetermined pattern.

  The region 720 includes a first region 720a that performs bright light emission display and a second region 720b that performs light emission display darker than the first region 720a.

  The direction changing means is provided in an area overlapping with an area through which the game ball 101 does not pass, but may be provided in an area overlapping with an area through which the game ball 101 passes. Further, in a region overlapping with a region through which the game ball 101 passes, a direction changing unit may be provided so as to emit light smaller than the diameter of the game ball 101. In an area overlapping with the area where the game ball 101 passes, a predetermined pattern may be displayed brightly, and a direction changing means may be provided so as to shine thicker (for example, like a solid color) than the diameter of the game ball 101. is there.

  The area through which the game ball 101 passes includes, for example, the vicinity of the launch rails 202 and 204, the vicinity of the nail to which the game ball 101 first hits, the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, The figure may include a start port 228 and a windmill 236.

  There is a case where the direction changing means is not provided even in an area overlapping with an area where the game ball 101 does not pass (can not pass). For example, the direction changing unit may not be provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 208 or the movable object 224 provided in the game area 124.

  In addition, the direction changing means displays an area of a device for displaying information related to the game (for example, an area where special figure display devices 212 and 214, a general figure display device 210, a holding lamp 216, etc. are arranged, and a fourth symbol). May not be provided in the vicinity of the game area. In this case, the state of the game (symbol change, stop, hold, stored, high probability, big hit, right strike period) , Etc.) can always be made visible so that it can be prevented from affecting the progress of the game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19B, the light from the light source 702 is directed to the predetermined area 720 of the transmission section 700 by the direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 19B) so that the traveling direction is changed to the player side. And a predetermined pattern is displayed by light emission. In FIG. 19B, the panda character 703PD is displayed as a predetermined pattern by causing the light sources 702u and 702d to emit light.

  As described above, in the transmitting section 700 shown in FIG. 19, a cut pattern is applied so that a different pattern is displayed by changing the light emitting direction. That is, depending on the angle formed by the cut pattern, when light from the light sources 702u and 702d is irradiated, the light is reflected to the front side (player side), but even when light from the light sources 702l and 702r is irradiated, the light is reflected to the front side (player side). While light is not reflected to the player side), when light from the light sources 702l and 702r is irradiated, light is reflected to the front side (player side), but light from the light sources 702u and 702d is irradiated. Even if it is done, it is possible to prevent the light from being reflected on the front side (player side), and as a result, the pattern displayed on the transmission unit 700 may be changed depending on the light source to emit light. That is, in some cases, a plurality of patterns can be displayed by the cut pattern applied to the transmission unit 700.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of a game board 200 capable of performing a light emission effect by overlapping a plurality of transmission members as viewed from the front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission unit 700. The same components as those of the gaming board 200 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. In addition, the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 20 may perform an effect of moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 20 to approximately the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then moving to the initial position. .

  As shown in FIG. 21, the transmission section 700 according to the present embodiment includes two flat transmission members 703f and 703r having different lens cut modes arranged at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 mm) in the front-rear direction. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the transmitting member may be called an illuminated panel. In the state shown in FIG. 20, light is applied to the transmission member 703r arranged on the rear side of the two transmission members, and a smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed in the transmission region 703b. ing. That is, the light is reflected forward (to the player side) by the cut pattern of the rear transmission member 703r, and the reflected light is transmitted through the front transmission member 703f so that the smile mark pattern 703SM is visually recognized by the player. Becomes Note that the cut pattern of the front transmission member 703f is formed such that when light is irradiated on the front transmission member 703f, a heart mark pattern 703HE (see FIG. 23) is displayed. In addition, the transmission section 700 of the present embodiment is provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 and on the back side of the game board 200, but may be provided on the front side of the game board 200. . Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 244 operates, a light emission effect may be performed by at least one of the two transmissive members 703f and 703r, thereby enlivening the game effect.

  By the way, the transmission members 703f and 703r are molded by an appropriate molding method such as injection molding or extrusion molding with a resin such as acrylic, but slight warpage or sink may occur due to a manufacturing error. Alternatively, the transmission members 703f and 703r may be warped due to the installation environment of the pachinko machine 100 or a dimensional error at the time of installation. In such a case, in a part of the transmissive members 703f and 703r, the interval between the front transmissive member 703f and the rear transmissive member 703r may be smaller than a predetermined interval, and a curvature may occur. Then, when a pattern is displayed by irradiating light to the transmissive members 703f and 703r, concentric stripes (Newton rings) may be visually recognized, which may cause the effect of the transmissive portion 700 to be reduced. is there. In addition, there is a case where the two transmissive members 703f and 703r come into contact with each other and the light incident on the transmissive members 703f and 703r is not normally reflected, and a display mode is disturbed.

  Therefore, the transmission portion 700 according to the present embodiment includes projections 703t1 to 703t5 for holding the two transmission members 703f and 703r at a constant interval on the rear transmission member 703r (or the front transmission member 703f). Are appropriately provided at positions inside the outer edges of the transmission members 703f and 703r. Although the detailed configuration of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 will be described later, the provision of the protrusions 703t1 to 705t5 enables the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 to be formed even if warpage occurs in the transmission members 703f and 703r due to a manufacturing error, installation environment, or the like. By the action of 703t5, the interval between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r may be kept at least at a predetermined interval to make it difficult to generate a Newton ring. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect produced by the transmission unit 700. In the following description, it may be stated that the plate surface (panel surface) of the transmission member (illumination panel) does not contact, but actually, only the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 of the rear transmission member 703r are provided. It is to be added that the state may be in contact with the transmission member 703f on the front side.

  Since the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 are configured to protrude from the plate surfaces of the transmission members 703f and 703r, the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 may be visually recognized by a player, and thus are disposed at positions that are relatively inconspicuous for the player. . Specifically, the first protruding portion 703t1 is provided so as to protrude to the front side at the lower right portion of the rear transmission member 703r, and is located at a position overlapping the rear surface of the stage 244. In other words, it can be said that the first protrusion 703t1 overlaps the stage 244. Therefore, the first protrusion 703t1 is difficult to visually recognize in front view due to the stage 244. In addition, the second protrusion 703t2 is protruded from the front side at the upper right portion of the rear transmission member 703r, and is located at a position overlapping the rear surface of the decorative member of the effect device 206. In other words, it can be said that the second protrusion 703t2 overlaps with the decorative member of the effect device 206. Therefore, the second protrusion 703t2 is difficult to visually recognize in a front view due to the decorative member of the effect device 206. In the present embodiment, the second protrusion 703t2 is arranged on the back side of the effect device 206. However, as described later, the second protrusion 703t2 is displayed by the front transparent member 703f. And overlaps with the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed by the rear transparent member 703r, and also overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, the display device 206 is not disposed on the front side of the second protrusion 703t2 because the second protrusion 703t2 can be made less noticeable by displaying any or all of them. It may be an aspect. In this case, the second protrusion 703t2 may be provided at a position overlapping only the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed by the front transmission member 703f, or the smile mark pattern displayed by the rear transmission member 703r. It may be provided at a position overlapping only the 703SM. The second protrusion 703t2 may be provided at a position overlapping both the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed by the front transmission member 703f and the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed by the rear transmission member 703r. In addition, the second protrusion 703t2 may be provided at a position overlapping both the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed by the front transmission member 703f and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the rear transmission. It may be provided at a position overlapping both the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed by the member 703r and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second protrusion 703t2 may be provided at a position overlapping only the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is any image such as a background image, a character image appearing in the effect display, a hold display, a decorative design in a variable display, a decorative design in a stop display, and the like. included. Further, the third protrusion 703t3 is provided on the front upper side at the center upper portion of the rear transmission member 703r, and overlaps the rear side of the initial position of the effect movable body 224 with the character "Giya". It has become. In other words, it can be said that the third protrusion 703t3 may overlap with the effect movable body 224. For this reason, the third protrusion 703t2 is difficult to visually recognize in a front view at least when the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position. The fourth protrusion 703t4 is provided on the front side at the upper left portion of the rear transmission member 703r and does not overlap with any member. However, the fourth protrusion 703t4 is located near the decorative member of the rendering device 206, Since it is arranged at the corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be visually recognized by the user, it is less noticeable. Further, the fifth protrusion 703t5 is protruded from the front side at the center left portion of the rear transmission member 703r, and is located at a position overlapping the rear surface of the warp device 242. In other words, it can be said that the fifth protrusion 703t5 is overlapped by the warping device 242. For this reason, the fifth protrusion 703t5 is difficult to visually recognize in front view due to the warping device 242.

  Also, a plurality of ribs 703u are provided on the left and lower edges of the rear transmission member 703r so as to project forward. Each of the ribs 703u has a square shape, and the protrusion amount is set to, for example, 1 mm so that the two transmission members 703f and 703r can maintain a predetermined interval. Note that the protrusion amount of the rib 703u is not limited to 1 mm, and may be set to any value as long as the distance between the two transmission members 703f and 703r can be appropriately maintained. For example, the protrusion amount may be set to 1.2 mm. Further, since the rib 703u is formed at the end of the rear transmission member 703r, it is a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the rib. For this reason, the outer peripheral length of the base end of the rib 703u is set larger than the outer peripheral length of the base end of the first protrusion 703t1 to the fifth protrusion 703t5. The length may be smaller than the length of the outer periphery of the base end of each of the first protrusion 703t1 to the fifth protrusion 703t5. The rib 703u is not necessarily provided as long as the two transmissive members 703f and 703r can maintain a predetermined interval by another member or an assembling mode.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the transmitting section 700 is attached to the glass unit frame 704 such that two transmitting members 703f and 703r are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval (for example, 1 mm). The glass unit frame 704 includes a front frame 704f arranged on the front side (ie, the player side) and a rear frame 704r arranged on the rear side (ie, the decorative design display device 208 side). The front frame 704f, the front transmission member 703f, the rear transmission member 703r, and the rear frame 704r are arranged side by side in this order, and are screwed into screw holes provided at appropriate places from the rear frame 704r side. Are assembled to form the transmission section 700. Here, in the transmission members 703f and 703r, screw insertion holes 703fh1, 703fh2, 703rh1, and 703rh2 are opened at the upper left and right ends, respectively. 704f and the rear frame 704r.

  In the present embodiment, the outer shape of the front transmitting member 703f is different from that of the rear transmitting member 703r. Specifically, a first cutout 700ct1 is formed at the upper right corner of the front transmission member 703r in a front view, and a second cutout 700ct2 is formed near the lower end of the right side. This makes it easy to distinguish between them and prevents mistakes in the order of assembly. In the present embodiment, the notch is provided in the front transmission member 703f. However, the notch may be provided in the rear transmission member 703r. Notches may be provided on both sides. In this case, the location where the notch is formed may be different between the two transmissive members 703f and 703r so that the front and rear arrangements can be recognized. Further, the positions and the numbers of the cutouts are not limited to those described above, and an appropriate number may be provided at an appropriate place. Further, an aspect in which a notch is not provided may be employed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, identification information 703fm for identifying the front transmission member 703f is provided at the lower right corner of the front surface of the front transmission member 703f when viewed from the front. This identification information 703fm is represented in a form in which the letter “F” indicating the initial letter of “Front” is circled. The identification information 703fm is a portion where the patterns of the two transparent members 703f and 703r are not formed, and is formed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize or difficult from the front. For example, it may be formed at a position where the protrusion 703t1 is formed, at a position near the outer periphery of the transmission member 703f on the front side, or the like. The position that is invisible or difficult to see from the front means a state in which the decorative information, the staging device, the winning device, or the like provided on the game board 200 is arranged in front of the identification information 703fm, so that the identification information 703fm is invisible or difficult. Is the position where In the present embodiment, the identification information 703fm is formed integrally when the front transmission member 703f is molded. For example, the identification information 703fm is stamped by hot melt processing or the like after the front transmission member 703f is molded. , A seal may be attached. Alternatively, a two-dimensional code or a three-dimensional code may be provided and read by a reader to identify the front and rear of the transparent member.

  Also, identification information 703rm for identifying the rear transmission member 703r is provided at the lower left corner of the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r when viewed from the front. The identification information 703rm is represented in a form in which a letter “R” indicating an initial of “Rear” is circled. The identification information 703rm is a portion where the patterns of the two transparent members 703f and 703r are not formed, and is formed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize or difficult from the front. For example, it may be formed at a position where the protrusion 703t1 is formed, at a position near the outer periphery of the rear transmission member 703f, or the like. In the present embodiment, the identification information 703fm is integrally formed when the rear transmission member 703r is molded. However, for example, the identification information 703fm is stamped by hot-melt processing or the like after the front transmission member 703f is molded. Alternatively, a seal may be provided. Alternatively, a two-dimensional code or a three-dimensional code may be provided and read by a reader to identify the front and rear of the transparent member.

  In this embodiment, characters such as "F" and "R" are added to facilitate the specification of the arrangement position of the two transmissive members 703f and 703r. However, identification for identifying the arrangement position is performed. The information may be in any form as long as the object can be achieved. For example, the information may be “A”, “B”, or “before” or “after”. . In addition, although the characters are used as the identification information, the arrangement position may be specified by using symbols or figures.

  A first LED substrate 704cb1 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the rear frame 704r so as to extend in the left-right direction, and the second LED substrate 704cb2 extends in the vertical direction on the right side of the front surface of the rear frame 704r. Is attached. When the front frame 704f, the rear frame 704r, and the two transmitting members 703f, 704r are assembled as described above, the first LED substrate 704cb1 has its lower edge sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f, 704r. You. Note that the first LED substrate 704cb1 may not be sandwiched between the two transmission members 703f and 703r, but may be configured to be interposed with a clearance. Thus, the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r may be able to maintain a predetermined interval at the end where the first LED substrate 704cb1 is provided. With this configuration, when the two transmitting members 703f and 703r are assembled to the glass unit frame 704, the two transmitting members 703 are formed by the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5, the rib 703u, and the LED substrates 704cb1 and 704cb2. , 703r are held at predetermined intervals.

  The first LED substrate 704cb1 extends in the left-right direction and has a rectangular shape, and a plurality of LED elements are respectively directed downward along the longitudinal direction on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the first LED substrate 704cb1. They are arranged side by side to emit light. That is, the plurality of LED elements are arranged side by side so as to emit light toward the upper end edge of the front transmission member 703f. With this configuration, light from the LED element of the first LED substrate 704cb1 enters from the upper end edge of the front transmission member 703f and is directed to the player side in a cut pattern formed on the back surface of the front transmission member 703f. The reflection causes a pattern to be displayed on the transmission member 703f on the front side. These LED elements can emit light in full color, and function as light sources for performing light emission display on the front transmission member 703f. Note that an LED element that can emit light only in a single color (for example, red or white) may be applied. In the present embodiment, the first LED substrate 704cb1 has the LED elements arranged only on one surface. However, the first LED substrate 704cb1 is arranged on both surfaces, and the upper end of the front transmissive member 703f is arranged by the LED elements arranged on one surface. The light may be emitted toward the edge, and emitted toward the upper edge of the rear transmission member 703r by the LED element arranged on the other surface.

  When the front frame 704f, the rear frame 704r, and the two transmitting members 703f, 704r are assembled as described above, the second LED substrate 704cb2 has its left edge sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f, 704r. You. Note that the second LED substrate 704cb2 may not be sandwiched by the two transmissive members 703f and 703r, but may be configured to be interposed with a clearance. Thereby, the interval between the two transmissive members 703f and 703r may be able to maintain a predetermined interval at the end where the second LED substrate 704cb2 is provided.

  The second LED substrate 704cb2 is arranged to extend in the up-down direction, and has a trapezoidal upper end and a rectangular shape following the lower end thereof. The second LED board 704cb2 has a plurality of LED elements arranged side by side on a front surface (a surface on the player side) so as to respectively emit light in the left direction when viewed from the front, and a rear surface (the side opposite to the player). ), A plurality of LED elements are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction so as to emit light in the left direction when viewed from the front. That is, the plurality of LED elements arranged on the front surface of the second LED board 704cb2 are arranged side by side so as to emit light toward the right edge of the front transmission member 703f, and the plurality of LED elements arranged on the rear face of the second LED board 704cb2. Are arranged side by side so as to emit light toward the right edge of the rear transmission member 703r. With this configuration, light from the LED element disposed on the front surface of the second LED substrate 704cb2 enters from the right edge of the front transmission member 703f, and the cut pattern formed on the rear surface of the front transmission member 703f. , And a pattern is displayed on the transmission member 703f on the front side. Further, light from the LED element arranged on the rear surface of the second LED substrate 704cb2 enters from the right edge of the rear transmission member 703r, and is cut by the player on the side of the cut pattern formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 703f. , A pattern is displayed on the rear transmission member 703f. These LED elements can emit light in full color, and the LED elements disposed on the front surface of the second LED board 704cb2 function as light sources for performing light emission display on the front transmissive member 703f, and the rear face of the second LED board 704cb2. Are functioning as light sources for performing light emission display on the rear transmission member 703r. Note that an LED element that can emit light only in a single color (for example, red or white) may be applied. Further, in the present embodiment, the second LED substrate 704cb2 arranges the LED elements on both surfaces, but the LED elements may be arranged only on one of the front surface and the rear surface. As described above, in the present embodiment, the rib 703u is provided on the edge of the two transmission members 703f and 703r on the side opposite to the side on which the LED substrates 704cb1 and 704cb2 are disposed. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the light from the LED substrates 704cb1 and 704cb2 from interfering with the rib 703u and disturbing the displayed image.

  Protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 are provided on the front surface (player side) of the rear transmission member 703r so as to protrude toward the front (player side) inside the outer edge thereof. It is formed in a shape. The protrusion amount of each of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 is 1.2 mm, which is slightly larger than 1 mm, which is a design value of the interval between the front transmission member 703f and the rear transmission member 703r. Thus, for example, even if warpage occurs in at least one of the two transmission members 703f and 703r due to a manufacturing error or the like, the protrusion 703t1 to 703t5 prevents the gap from being less than 1 mm. May be possible. As a result, image disturbance such as the occurrence of the Newton ring described above may be able to be suppressed. In the present embodiment, all of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 are provided on the rear transmission member 703r, but a part or all of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 are formed on the rear surface of the front transmission member 703f. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion amount of each of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 is set to 1.2 mm. However, for some or all of the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5, the protrusion amount is set to two transparent members 703f. , 703r, may be set to 1 mm.

  FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram for explaining the structure of the transmission unit 700 described above. Note that the configuration of the transmitting unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 22 is simplified for ease of description, and there are some parts that are changed (for example, three transmitting members are arranged).

  The LED 717f mounted on the LED board 704cb1 is arranged on the side of the transparent member 703f. The transparent member 703f has a lens cut 713a for emitting a pattern, and the light emitted from the LED 717f is reflected to the front side (player side) by the lens cut 713a.

  The LED 717c mounted on the LED board 704cb1 is arranged on the side of the transparent member 703c. The transparent member 703c is provided with a lens cut 714a for emitting a pattern, and the light emitted from the LED 717c is reflected to the front side (player side) by the lens cut 714a.

  The LED 717r mounted on the LED board 704cb1 is arranged on the side of the transparent member 703r. The transparent member 703r is provided with a lens cut 715a that emits a pattern, and the light emitted from the LED 717r is reflected toward the front side (player side) by the lens cut 715a.

  The LED substrate 717 has LEDs 717f, 717c, and 717r corresponding to the transparent members 703f, 703c, and 703r, respectively, and controls which one of the transparent members 703f, 703c, and 703r by selectively controlling the LEDs to emit light. It is possible to perform various effects by selecting whether to emit light.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B are diagrams illustrating a mode of a light emission effect by the above-described transmission unit 700. FIG. 23A illustrates a mode of a light emission effect by the front transmission member 703f, and FIG. 3 shows a mode of a light emission effect according to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, since the configuration is as described above, when the LED elements provided on the first LED board 704cb1 and / or the second LED board 704cb2 emit light and irradiate the front transmission member 703f with light, As shown in FIG. 23 (A), a light emitting image of a heart mark pattern 703HE is displayed. When the LED element provided on the second LED substrate 704cb2 emits light and irradiates the rear transparent member 703r with light, an emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed as shown in FIG. Is done. The LED elements provided on the first LED board 704cb1 and / or the second LED board 704cb2 can emit light independently from each other by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, among the two transmission members 703f and 703r, Only the heart-shaped pattern 703HE may be displayed by irradiating light only to the front transmission member 703f, or only the smile-mark pattern 703SM may be displayed by irradiating light only to the rear transmission member 703r. The heart-shaped pattern 703HE and the smile-marked pattern 703SM may be displayed in the same light-emitting mode by using the same light-emitting mode of the LED element that irradiates each of the two transmission members 703f and 703r. It can also be done. In addition, by using a full-color LED, the light-emitting color and the light-emitting mode are made different between the two transmissive members 703f and 703r, the heart mark pattern 703HE and the smile mark pattern 703SM are displayed in a colorful manner. Good.

  FIGS. 24A and 24B are diagrams schematically illustrating another aspect of the transmission unit 700, where FIG. 24A is a front view of the transmission unit 700 and FIG. 24B is a left side view of the transmission unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, a player's viewable area VA in the transmission section 700 is an area surrounded by a dashed line. The outside of the viewable area VA is hidden by the effect device 206 or the like in the game board 200, and is difficult to view. Therefore, part of the light emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed on the front transmission member 703f and part of the light emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed on the rear transmission member 703r become difficult to see. ing. Note that the whole of at least one of the light-emitting image of the heart mark pattern 703HE and the light-emitting image of the smile mark pattern 703SM may be displayed in the viewable area VA so that the whole can be viewed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, a first projection 703t1 to a fifth projection 703t5 are provided on the front side of the rear transmission member 703r. These protruding portions 703t1 to 703t5 are arranged inside the outer edge of the rear transmission member 703r, but are arranged at positions that are hardly noticeable to the player. The first to fifth protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 shown in FIG. 24 each have a protrusion amount set to 1 mm. The third protrusion 703t3 shown in (1) is usually when the effect movable body 224 is located at the initial position of the effect movable body 224 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. May be invisible to the player because it is hidden behind. The fourth protrusion 703t4 shown in (2) is usually arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is arranged at the upper left corner of the display area, so that it is conspicuous. It can be difficult. The second projection 703t2 shown in (3) is normally arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the area where the light-emitting image of the heart mark pattern 703HE is displayed. Since the area in which the luminescent image of the smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed overlaps with the area in which the luminescent image of the smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed, at least one of the luminescent image of the heart mark pattern 703HE and the luminescent image of the smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed. When displayed, the luminescent image may make the image less noticeable. The fifth protrusion 703t5 shown in (4) is disposed at a position overlapping the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is located at a position overlapping the back side of the warp device 242 as shown in FIG. Since they are arranged, they may not be noticeable. Since the first protrusion 703t1 shown in (5) is arranged outside the viewable area VA, it may be difficult to view it. That is, as shown in FIG. 20, it may be difficult to visually recognize the stage 244, the starting port unit, the decorative member, the attacker unit, and the like, because they are located on the back side thereof.

  Further, the glass unit frame 704 in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 24 has a front transmission member 703f and a rear transmission member 703r attached thereto, and is sandwiched between the front transmission member 703f and the rear transmission member 703r. Rib 704RB is provided so as to protrude. The thickness of the rib 704RB is set to 1.2 mm, which is slightly larger than the interval (1 mm) between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, but is set to 1 mm similarly to the interval between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r. May be. At this time, screw holes through which screws can be inserted are formed in the front transmission member 703f, the rear transmission member 703r, and the rib 704RB, and these screw holes are aligned (overlap). Then, the two transmission members 703f and 703r are attached to the glass unit frame 704 by inserting and screwing these screw holes.

  In the present embodiment, the front transmission member 703f and the rear transmission member 703r have the same shape, but may have different sizes or different outer shapes. Further, in the present embodiment, both the front-side transmission member 703f and the rear-side transmission member 703r are formed in a square shape, but may be formed in a shape other than a square shape, and an effect device provided on the game board 200. The shape can be appropriately set according to the shape of the 206, the shape / arrangement of the LED board to be mounted, the mounting mode of the decorative design display device 208, and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the transmission members 703f and 703r are configured, but may be configured by three or more transmission members. Further, in the present embodiment, since the front-side transmission member 703f and the rear-side transmission member 703r have the same shape, the two transmission members 703f and 703r are configured so as to overlap in all regions. However, the configuration may be such that at least a part of the region does not have the two transmissive members 703f and 703r overlapping each other. Further, in the present embodiment, both the light emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed on the front transmission member 703f and the light emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed on the rear transmission member 703r are decorative design display devices. Although the image is displayed so as to protrude from the display area 208, the light emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed on the front transmission member 703f and the light emission of the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed on the rear transmission member 703r are displayed. At least one of the images may be displayed in a range narrower than the display area of the decorative design display device 208.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B are diagrams schematically illustrating a modified example of the transmitting unit 700. FIG. 25A is a left side view illustrating a first modified example of the transmitting unit 700, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a left side view showing a second modification of the transmission section 700, (C) is a left side view showing a third modification of the transmission section 700, and (D) is a fourth modification of the transmission section 700. FIG. FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams schematically illustrating a modification of the transmission unit 700. FIG. 26A is a left side view illustrating a fifth modification of the transmission unit 700, and FIG. It is a left view which shows the 6th modification of the part 700, (C) is a left view which shows the 7th modification of the transmission part 700, (D) is 8th of the transmission part 700. It is a left side view showing a modification, and (E) is a front view showing the 9th modification of transmissive part 700. Note that, in the modified examples described below, an example is shown in which the LED elements are arranged in the up-down direction of the transmissive members 703f, 703r. Nor. It is also possible to apply two or three or more of the following modifications in combination.

  In a first modification example shown in FIG. 25A, one or more of the plurality of protrusions formed on the rear transmission member 703r are different in size from other protrusions. It is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25A, the diameter of the base end of the first protrusion 703t1 shown in (5) is larger than the diameter of the base end of the other protrusion. That is, the length of the outer circumference of the base end of the first protrusion 703t1 is longer than the length of the outer circumference of the base end of the other protrusion. As described above, since the first protrusion 703t1 is hidden behind the stage 244 and is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the base end of the protrusion is enlarged, visibility is affected. It may be difficult. Note that, in this example, an example is shown in which the size of the base end of the first protrusion 703t1 is larger than that of the other protrusions. However, the size of the base end of the protrusion at another position is also described. It can be changed as appropriate in consideration of the arrangement position and the relationship with the members arranged around. In addition, although the protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 in the present embodiment are formed in a cylindrical shape with an R-shaped tip, they may be formed in other shapes, for example, may be formed in a prismatic shape, or may have a star-shaped cross section. The shape may be designed to have a design effect such as a column shape or a heart-shaped column shape, and the shape can be easily specified to give a decorative effect.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 25B, the amount of protrusion of one or more of the plurality of protrusions formed on the rear transmission member 703r is made different from that of the other protrusions. Things. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the protrusion amounts (1.2 mm) of the fourth protrusion 703t4, the second protrusion 703t2, and the fifth protrusion 703t5 shown in (2) to (4) are determined. , Larger than the protrusion amount (1 mm) of the third protrusion 703t3 shown in (1) and the first protrusion 703t1 shown in (5), it is more effective that the two transmissive members 703f and 703r come close to each other with a sled. It is intended to suppress it. That is, the protrusion of the two transmission members 703f and 703r near the center is larger than the other protrusions. In addition, the protrusion amount of the protrusion at another position can be appropriately changed in consideration of the position of the protrusion and the relationship with the members disposed at the periphery. Further, the protrusion amount may be set in consideration of the warp of a warp or the like generated when the transmission members 703f and 703r are formed.

  In the third modified example shown in FIG. 25C, one or more of the plurality of protrusions are provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the front (player side) transparent member 703f. Things. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25C, the fourth protrusion 703t4 ′ shown in (2) and the fifth protrusion 703t5 ′ shown in (4) are not provided on the rear transmission member 703r. 703f are formed so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the front transmission member 703f. The number of protrusions formed on the front-side transmission member 703f may be one or three or more, and all of the plurality of protrusions are formed on the front-side transmission member 703f. You may do so. In this case, since the cut pattern is usually formed on the back surface of the transmissive member, it is preferable to form the cut pattern on the front transmissive member 703f, for example, in a place where the cut pattern is not formed. In addition, at the position where the luminescent image is displayed, the shape is intentionally specified by giving a design to the protrusion (for example, forming the protrusion in a star-shaped cross section or a heart-shaped cross section). You may make it easy and have a decoration effect. Note that the first projection 703t1 shown in (5) has a larger outer peripheral length of the proximal end than the outer peripheral length of the proximal end of the other projection, as shown in FIG. , But may be the same.

  The fourth modified example shown in FIG. 25D shows a modified example of the arrangement of the LED boards in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. That is, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 21, the transmission section 700 is arranged so as to extend along the upper end edge and the right side edge of the transmission members 703f and 703r in a front view, but the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in addition to the LED boards 704cb1 and 704cb2 arranged along the upper edge and the right edge, LED boards 704cb3 and 704cb4 extending along the lower edge and the left edge are provided. With this, not only the light from the upper edge and the right edge, but also the light from the lower edge and the left edge can be emitted, so that the luminance of the luminescent image can be improved, and the luminous effect can be effectively performed. May increase.

  The fifth modified example shown in FIG. 26A is one in which the shape of the glass unit frame 704 is changed. Specifically, in the upper side of the glass unit frame 704, a substantially central portion is concave when viewed from the left side. To allow the first LED substrate 704cbA1 to be arranged so that the plate surface thereof is in the front-rear direction, and a space is formed for accommodating the LED element 704LA1 attached to the front side of the first LED substrate 704cbA1. . At this time, the LED element 704LA1 is directed downward, and emits light from the upper end edge of the transmission member 703f on the front side. In addition, the first LED substrate 704cbA1 has its lower edge sandwiched by two transmissive members 703f and 703r, and holds the two transmissive members 703f and 703r at least at a predetermined interval. At this time, the LED element 704LA1 is at a position where it does not enter between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. That is, the thickness of the first LED substrate 704cbA1 is equal to or slightly larger than the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r.

  On the other hand, on the lower side of the glass unit frame 704, a recess is formed so that the second LED substrate 704cbA2 is disposed on the back side of the rear transmission member 703r, and the second LED substrate 704cbA2 is formed together with the lower end edge of the rear transmission member 703r. It is configured to be accommodated. At this time, the LED element 704LA2 disposed on the front side of the second LED substrate 704cbA2 is disposed on the lower end side of the rear transmission member 703r so as to face upward, and emits light from the lower edge of the rear transmission member 703r. Irradiation. Further, the glass unit frame 704 has a rib 704RB formed by projecting upward at a position between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, and is sandwiched between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r. The thickness of the rib 704RB is set to 1.2 mm, which is slightly larger than the interval (1 mm) between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, but is set to 1 mm similarly to the interval between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r. May be.

  The sixth modified example shown in FIG. 26B shows another mode in which the shape of the glass unit frame 704 is changed. Specifically, the upper side of the glass unit frame 704 is viewed from the left side. A space for accommodating the LED element 704LB1 mounted on the front side of the first LED board 704cbB1 while allowing the first LED board 704cbB1 to be arranged so that the plate surface thereof is in the front-rear direction by forming a substantially central portion in a concave shape. And a space for accommodating the LED element 704LB2 attached to the rear surface side of the first LED board 704cbB1. At this time, the LED element 704LB1 attached to the front side of the first LED board 704cbB1 is directed downward, and emits light from the upper edge of the front transmission member 703f. On the other hand, the LED element 704LB2 attached to the rear surface side of the first LED substrate 704cbB1 is directed downward, and emits light from the upper edge of the rear transmission member 703r. In addition, the first LED substrate 704cbB1 has a lower edge sandwiched by the upper ends of the two transmissive members 703f and 703r, and holds the two transmissive members 703f and 703r at least at a predetermined interval. At this time, the LED elements 704LB1 and 704LB2 are at positions where they do not enter between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. That is, the thickness of the first LED substrate 704cbB1 is equal to or slightly larger than the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r.

  On the other hand, the lower side of the glass unit frame 704 is substantially symmetric with the upper side of the glass unit frame 704. That is, on the lower side of the glass unit frame 704, a substantially central portion is formed in a concave shape in a left side view so that the plate surface of the second LED board 704cbB2 can be arranged so as to be in the front-rear direction, and the front side of the second LED board 704cbB2. And a space for accommodating the LED element 704LB4 attached to the rear side of the second LED board 704cbB2. At this time, the LED element 704LB3 attached to the front side of the second LED board 704cbB2 is directed upward, and emits light from the lower end edge of the front transmission member 703f. On the other hand, the LED element 704LB4 mounted on the rear side of the second LED board 704cbB2 is directed upward, and emits light from the lower edge of the rear transmission member 703r. The second LED substrate 704cbB2 has an upper edge sandwiched by lower ends of two transmissive members 703f and 703r, and holds the two transmissive members 703f and 703r so that an interval between them is at least a predetermined interval. . At this time, the LED elements 704LB3 and 704LB4 are at positions where they do not enter between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. That is, the thickness of the second LED substrate 704cbB2 is equal to or slightly larger than the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r.

  The seventh modification example shown in FIG. 26C changes the shape of the glass unit frame 704, changes the arrangement of the LED boards, and shows an example of a mode of forming the ribs of the transmission member. Specifically, the upper side of the glass unit frame 704 is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the left side, and a space is formed above the two transmission members 703f and 703r. One LED board 704cbC1 is disposed with its plate surface facing up and down. That is, the substrate surface is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the plate surfaces of the two transmission members 703f and 703r. The LED element 704LC1 is disposed downward on the lower surface of the first LED substrate 704cbC1 at a position facing the upper end of the front transmission member 703f so that light is emitted from the upper end edge of the front transmission member 703f. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 26C, one or a plurality of ribs 703u are formed at appropriate positions on the upper edge of the rear transmission member 703r, and the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r is at least a predetermined interval. It is held so that it becomes. The thickness of the rib 703u can be appropriately set as long as the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r is at least a predetermined interval. In this example, the thickness is set to, for example, 1.2 mm. Note that the distance may be set to 1 mm, which is the same as the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r.

  On the other hand, the configuration of the lower side of the glass unit frame 704 is the same as that of FIG. That is, on the lower side of the glass unit frame 704 shown in FIG. 26C, the rib 704RB is not formed on the glass unit frame 704, and one or more ribs 703u are formed on the lower end edge of the rear transmission member 703r at appropriate locations. The two transmission members 703f and 703r are held at least at a predetermined interval. The thickness of the rib 703u can be appropriately set as long as the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r is at least a predetermined interval. In this example, the thickness is set to, for example, 1.2 mm. Note that the distance may be set to 1 mm, which is the same as the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r.

  The eighth modification shown in FIG. 26D has the same configuration as that of the seventh modification shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 26C, an example is shown in which the ribs 703u are formed at the upper and lower ends of the rear transmission member 703r of the two transmission members 703f and 703r. In the example shown in FIG. 7, a rib 703u is provided on the rear surface of the front transmission member 703f above the transmission unit 700, and a rib 703u is provided on the surface of the rear transmission member 703r below the transmission unit 700. It has become. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the seventh modification example shown in FIG. 26C may be obtained.

  The ninth modified example shown in FIG. 26E is similar to the fourth modified example shown in FIG. 25D, in which the upper edge, the lower edge, the left edge, and the right edge of the two transmission members 703f and 703r are provided. The LED board is arranged along each of the edges, but the LED element is not arranged at a position facing the rib 703u arranged at an appropriate position on the outer edge of the two transmitting members 703f, 703r. The effect of reducing the effect of displaying a display image is suppressed. Specifically, at a position facing two ribs 703u formed on the left edge of the rear transmission member 703r, the LED board 704cb arranged along the left edge is not arranged. , LED elements are prevented from being arranged. Also, at positions opposed to the four ribs 703u formed on the upper edge of the rear transmission member 703r, the LED elements are arranged by not disposing the LED substrate 704cb arranged along the upper edge. Have been avoided. In addition, at a position facing two ribs 703u formed on the right side edge of the rear transmission member 703r, the LED element 704cb disposed along the right side edge is not disposed, so that the LED element is not disposed. To avoid being placed. Also, at positions opposed to the three ribs 703u formed on the lower end edge of the rear transmission member 703r, the LED elements are arranged by not disposing the LED board 704cb arranged along the lower end edge. Have been avoided. Note that the LED substrate may be integrally formed corresponding to each edge, and may be configured so as to avoid disposing the LED element at a position facing the rib 703u. Further, it is preferable that the rib 703u formed on the rear transmission member 703r is arranged so as to be shifted from the opposite edge. In this way, for example, in a portion where there is no light irradiation from one edge, light irradiation from the LED element is possible at the other edge, so that light irradiation can be followed. In some cases, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the production.

  FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams schematically illustrating another aspect of the transmission unit 700, where FIG. 27A is a front view of the transmission unit 700, and FIG. 27B is a left side view of the transmission unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the player's viewable area VA in the transmission section 700 is an area surrounded by a dashed line. The outside of the viewable area VA is hidden by the effect device 206 or the like in the game board 200, and is difficult to view. Therefore, part of the light emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed on the front transmission member 703f and part of the light emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM displayed on the rear transmission member 703r become difficult to see. ing. Note that the whole of at least one of the light-emitting image of the heart mark pattern 703HE and the light-emitting image of the smile mark pattern 703SM may be displayed in the viewable area VA so that the whole can be viewed. . In the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 27, the lower edge of the first LED board 704cbE1 disposed on the upper side is sandwiched by the upper sides of the two transmission members 703f and 703r, and the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. Are held at least at a predetermined interval (for example, 1.0 mm). On the other hand, the upper edge of the second LED substrate 704cbE2 disposed on the lower side is sandwiched by the lower sides of the two transmission members 703f and 703r, and the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r is at least a predetermined interval. keeping. Also, in the mode shown in FIG. 27, a state is shown in which identification information 700fm that can identify a transmission member disposed on the front side in the front-rear direction is provided at the lower right portion of the front transmission member 703f. . Although not shown in FIG. 27, identification information 700rm (see FIG. 21) for identifying the transmission member disposed on the rear side in the front-rear direction is also attached to the lower left portion of the rear transmission member 703r. I have.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, a first projection 703t1 to a fifth projection 703t5 are provided on the front side of the rear transmission member 703r. These protruding portions 703t1 to 703t5 are arranged inside the outer edge of the rear transmission member 703r, but are arranged at positions that are hardly noticeable to the player. The first to fifth protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 shown in FIG. 24 each have a protrusion amount set to 1 mm, which is the distance between the two transparent members 703f and 703r. Note that, as shown in FIG. 25B and described above, a part or all of the first to fifth protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 is determined by the distance between the two transparent members 703f and 703r. May be set larger, for example, at 1.2 mm. In the present embodiment, as described later, the first protrusion 703t1 to the fifth protrusion 703t5 are set at a height equal to or greater than the thickness of the first LED board 704cbE1 or the second LED board 704cbE2. The arrangement positions of the first projection 703t1 to the fifth projection 703t5 are the same as those shown in FIG. 24 and described above. In particular, the second projection 703t2 shown in (3) is the same as that of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol is arranged at a position overlapping the display area, and the decorative symbol is arranged at a position overlapping with the decorative symbol during the stop display or the variable display. It should be noted that the image may be overlapped with an image displayed other than the decorative design, or may overlap with another image without overlapping with the decorative design. Here, as the image overlapping the protruding portion, in addition to the decorative pattern during the variable display or the stop display, for example, a notice display, an effect display in various game states, an icon display such as a hold display, or the like. Good. As described above, the second protrusion 703t2 includes the display image including the decorative pattern variation display, the heart mark pattern 703HE displayed on the front transparent member 703f, and the smile mark 703SM displayed on the rear transparent member 703r. Can be said to be a protrusion that may overlap with all or a part of. The same applies to other projections (fourth projection 703t4 and fifth projection 703t5) arranged at positions overlapping the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. Such protrusions may correspond to all the protrusions formed on the transmission member, or may correspond to only some of the protrusions. May be one or plural. When at least one protrusion has the above-described configuration, the above-described operation and effect may be exhibited.

  In the mode shown in FIG. 27, the upper side of the glass unit frame 704E is formed to have a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the left side, and the first LED substrate 704cbE1 is disposed so that the plate surface is in the front-rear direction. A space for accommodating the LED element 704LE1 attached to the front side of the 704cbE1 and a space for accommodating the LED element 704LE2 attached to the rear side of the first LED board 704cbE1 are formed. At this time, the LED element 704LE1 attached to the front side of the first LED board 704cbE1 is directed downward, and emits light from the upper end edge of the front transmission member 703f. On the other hand, the LED element 704LE2 attached to the rear side of the first LED board 704cbE1 is directed downward, and emits light from the upper edge of the rear transmission member 703r. In addition, the first LED substrate 704cbE1 has a lower edge sandwiched by two upper ends of the transmissive members 703f and 703r, and holds the two transmissive members 703f and 703r at least at a predetermined interval. At this time, the LED elements 704LE1 and 704LE2 are at positions where they do not enter between the two transmissive members 703f and 703r. That is, the thickness of the first LED substrate 704cbE1 is equal to or slightly larger than the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 27, for example, a first connector 704CE1 for connecting a harness HN for electrically connecting to the first sub-control unit 400 is attached to the rear surface of the first LED board 704cdE1 toward the rear. At least an opening is provided on the rear surface of the glass unit frame 704E where the first connector 704CE1 is provided. Thereby, the thickness of the transparent portion 700 in the front-rear direction may be reduced in some cases.

  On the other hand, the lower side of the glass unit frame 704E is arranged so that the plate surface of the second LED substrate 704cbE2 is formed in a concave shape at the substantially central portion when viewed from the left side, and the front side of the second LED substrate 704cbE2. A space for accommodating the LED element 704LE3 attached to the second LED board 704cbE2 and a space for accommodating the LED element 704LE4 attached to the rear side of the second LED board 704cbE2 are formed. At this time, the LED element 704LE3 attached to the front side of the second LED substrate 704cbE2 is directed upward, and emits light from the lower edge of the front transmission member 703f. On the other hand, the LED element 704LE4 attached to the rear side of the second LED substrate 704cbE2 is directed upward, and emits light from the lower edge of the rear transmission member 703r. The second LED substrate 704cbE2 has its upper edge sandwiched by the lower ends of the two transmissive members 703f and 703r, and holds the two transmissive members 703f and 703r at least at a predetermined interval. . At this time, the LED elements 704LE3 and 704LE4 are at positions where they do not enter between the two transmissive members 703f and 703r. That is, the thickness of the second LED substrate 704cbE2 is equal to or slightly larger than the interval between the two transmission members 703f and 703r. A lower end portion on the front side of the glass unit frame 704E shown in FIG. 27 projects rearward, supports the second LED board 704cbE2 from the front, and performs positioning. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 27, for example, a second connector 704CE2 for connecting a harness HN for electrically connecting to the first sub-control unit 400 is attached to the rear surface of the second LED board 704cdE2 toward the rear. At least an opening is provided on the rear surface of the glass unit frame 704E where the second connector 704CE2 is provided. Thereby, the thickness of the transparent portion 700 in the front-rear direction may be reduced in some cases.

  In the present embodiment, the first LED board 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2 are sandwiched between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, and the intervals at the ends of the two transmitting members 703f and 703r are maintained at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the rib 703u as shown in FIG. 21 is not provided at the edge of the rear transmission member 703r, but the rib 703u may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the first connector 704CE1 and the second connector 704CE2 are provided on the rear surfaces of the first LED board 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2, respectively. However, the first connector 704CE1 and the second connector CE2 are respectively provided on the first LED board. The aspect provided on the front side of the 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2 may be adopted. Further, the first connector 704CE1 and the second connector CE2 may be provided on both surfaces of the first LED board 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2, respectively. In the present embodiment, the first connector 704CE1 and the second connector 704CE2 are provided on the rear surfaces of the first LED board 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2, respectively, so that the wiring may be easily arranged.

  FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of a shielding device 246 in another mode different from the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3. FIGS. FIG.

  The shielding device 246 is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and has a left door 246f and a right door 246g. The left door 246f and the right door 246g can be moved left and right by a moving mechanism such as a motor (not shown).

  The left door 246f has a transmission part 246fa, and a pattern 246faa is formed on the transmission part 246fa by lens cutting. The left door 246f has LEDs 720a, 720b, and 720c on the left side. The pattern 246faa emits light when the LEDs 720a, 720b, and 720c emit light.

  The right door 246g has a transmission part 246ga, and a pattern 246gaa is formed in the transmission part 246ga by lens cutting. The right door 246g has LEDs 721a, 721b, and 721c on the right side, and the pattern 246gaa emits light when the LEDs 721a, 721b, and 721c emit light.

  In this embodiment, since the left door 246f and the right door 246g are provided with an LED as a light source, as shown in FIGS. Even if is moved in the left-right direction, the positional relationship between the light source and the transmissive portion does not change, and the light emission effect can be stably and reliably performed.

  FIG. 29 is a schematic view showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3, (a) is a plan view, (b) is a front view of a state where left and right LEDs emit light, and (c) is It is a front view of a state where upper and lower LEDs emit light, and (d) is a front view of a state where left and right and upper and lower LEDs emit light.

  The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end, and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

  LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d, which are light sources, are provided in the frame portion 246A, and the LEDs 722a, 722b, and 722c are in the frame portion 246A. Are provided on the right side of the frame 246A, the LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, and 724d are provided on the upper side of the frame 246A, and the LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d are provided on the frame 246A. It is provided on the lower side of the part 246A.

  The left door 246b has a transparent portion 246ba, and patterns 246baa and 246bab are formed in the transparent portion 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmissive portion 246da, and patterns 246daa and 246dab are formed in the transmissive portion 246da by lens cutting.

  The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects light from the left and right directions and emits light. Then, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 60 (b)).

  The pattern 246bab of the left door 246b and the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d are formed by lens cutting that reflects light from above and below and emits light. By emitting light, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 29C).

  When only the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, and 723c emit light, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b and the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 29B), and the LEDs 724a, 724b, When only 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d emit light, the pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 29C).

  When all of the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d emit light, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b, the pattern 246ab of the right door 246d, and the left door The pattern 246baa of 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d all emit light, and the crest of Aoi Tsubasa emerges in a circle (see FIG. 29D).

  FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3, (a) is a front view showing a pattern formed by lens cutting on each door, (b) is a plan view, (C) is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs as light sources provided in a frame portion, (d) is a front view in a state where upper and lower LEDs provided at an end emit light, and (e) is a front view of left and right. It is a front view of the state which emitted LED and the LED of the upper and lower center.

  The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end, and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

  LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, 725d, 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 728a, 728a , 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c, and 729d are provided on the frame portion 246A, the LEDs 722a, 722b, and 722c are provided on the left side of the frame portion 246A, and the LEDs 723a, 723b, and 723c are provided on the right side of the frame portion 246A. The LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, and 724d are provided near the center of the upper portion of the frame 246A, and the LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d are provided at the center of the lower portion of the frame 246A. LED 726a and 726b are provided above the left door 246a near the upper left of the frame 246A, and LEDs 726c and 726d are provided above the left door 246b near the upper left of the frame 246A. The LEDs 727a and 727b are provided above the right door 246c near the upper right of the frame 246A, the LEDs 727c and 727d are provided above the right door 246d near the upper right of the frame 246A, and the LEDs 728a and 728b are LEDs 728c and 728d are provided below the left door 246b near the left side of the lower side of the frame portion 246A, and LEDs 729a and 729b are provided near the lower left side of the lower portion of the frame portion 246A. The LED 7 is provided below the right door 246c near the right side of the lower part of the 246A. 9c and 729d are provided on the bottom of the right door 246d near the right side of the lower portion of the frame portion 246A.

  The left door 246a has a transmitting portion 246aa, and a pattern 246aaa is formed on the transmitting portion 246aa by lens cutting. The right door 246c has a transmitting portion 246ca, and a pattern 246caa is formed in the transmitting portion 246ca by lens cutting.

  The pattern 246aaa of the left door 246a is formed by a lens cut that reflects light from above and below and emits light, and emits light by causing the LEDs 726a, 726b, 728a, and 728b to emit light (FIG. 30D). reference). The pattern 246caa of the right door 246c is formed by a lens cut that reflects light from above and below and emits light, and emits light by emitting LEDs 727a, 727b, 729a, and 729b (FIG. 30D). reference).

  The left door 246b has a transparent portion 246ba, and patterns 246baa, 246bab, and 246bac are formed in the transparent portion 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmitting portion 246da, and patterns 246daa, 246dab, and 246dac are formed in the transmitting portion 246da by lens cutting.

  The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects light from the left and right directions and emits light. Then, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 29B).

  The patterns 246bab and bac of the left door 246b and the patterns 246dab and 246dac of the right door 246d are formed by lens cuts that reflect light from above and below and emit light, and the LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, Light emission effects are performed by causing 725c, 725d, 726c, 726d, 727c, 727d, 728c, 728d, 729c, and 729d to emit light (see FIGS. 29C and 30D).

  As shown in FIG. 30D, the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward, and the pattern 246bac of the left door 246b is below the LEDs 726c and 726d, and the pattern 246dac of the right door 246d is below the LEDs 727c and 727d. In this state, the LEDs 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 727d, 728a, 728b, 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c, and 729d emit light, so that the transmission portions 246aa and 246ba are emitted. Light emission effects of the patterns 246aaa and 246bac can be performed in the overlapping portion, and light emission effects of the patterns 246caa and 246dac can be performed in the portion where the transmission portions 246ca and 246ca overlap. Also, at this time, the patterns 246bab and 246dab may be configured to emit faint light in response to weak light from the upper and lower diagonal directions, or may not emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward and abutted, and the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724c, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d. , The pattern 246bab of the left door 246b, the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d, the pattern 246baa of the left door 246b, and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d produce light emission, and the crest of the three-leaf Aoi emerges in a circle (FIG. 30 ( e)).

  Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 31A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 31B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion is covered by a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

  In the decorative design display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a hold frame. This reserved frame can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The fluctuating icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed, it indicates that the symbol fluctuating is being displayed. In addition, in the case of the symbol confirmation display (during symbol stop), the change icon h0 is not displayed. On the right side of the change icon h0, a navigation character YM, which is a character of the lord, is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and performs, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. Note that the stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the change icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. The navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, N pre-reading notices, N notices of the design change display, and suspension of the pattern change display are stored. May be displayed at the time of an effect or the like that is sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by user setting. In FIG. 31A, since four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are both displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round blank pattern and white display mode). May change. As a result, it is possible to perform a notice display and a pre-read notice display. Here, the change icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol change display. Further, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the change icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The change icon is an icon that is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure change game is started, that is, an icon corresponding to the special figure change game, in other words, an icon related to the symbol change display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, if the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a change icon, or even if the change icon is expressed as moving Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the change icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. The change icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuating icon is capable of giving a notice (whether the fluctuating notice) of the feasibility of the change depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at a timing when the result of the feasibility of the fluctuating is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be regarded as an icon relating to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before, a same timing as, or a timing after the timing at which the result of the change is notified. Note that the change icon h0 may not be displayed.

  Further, at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Also, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, a 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. A part (1 or 2 decorative patterns match) or all of the pattern combinations may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number displays (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). Is also good. In addition, the second reserved number display may display the reserved number of only one special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 or may display the reserved number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 Is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (a normal game state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, a time saving state, and the like) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the result of pass / fail determination. Also, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, the display is changed in the order of background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A →...). In the case of collapse, a big jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice) may be provided.), And the order may be changed at random regardless of the order.

  Further, a crest actor 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be moved up and down or rotated according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 31A, the family crest role object 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest role item 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the crest role object 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

  Also, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-panel behavioral actor 224Ga with a character of "large" and a second with a character of "panel" A large-sized board role 224Gb, a third large-sized boarded role 224Gc provided with a character “M”, and a fourth large-sized boarded role 224Gd provided with a character “M” are arranged. Each of the first and second large-sized behavior elements 224Ga to 224Gd can rotate around the center and move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd have light-emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light-emitting modes according to the effect contents.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand-box box 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and is configured to be able to move up and down in accordance with the effect contents. . Thousand-box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a light emitting means such as a full-color LED is built in the Senryo Box Role 224H, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the content of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest actor 224E, the first large actor 224Ga to the fourth actor 224Gd, and the thousand box actor 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative design display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a part of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol by, for example, the light emission mode of the LED. Note that the fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The drive of the fourth symbol display device 284 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed. It is to be noted that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed off while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a display region has a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion corresponding to the left edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide up and down along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not need to be configured to be able to perform all, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (ie, may be fixed). The effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. The effect operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a staging operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate that the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device. It is added here, just in case, because it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Also, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. Can be displayed, or a plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured so that the front side of the outer peripheral portion is covered by a decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a hold frame. This reserved frame can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the first UI unit 280, a change icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a state of being placed on the pedestal, thereby notifying that the symbol change display is being performed. On the right side of the change icon h0, a navigation character YM, which is a character of the lord, is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the change icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 31B, since four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area. In FIG. 31 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round blank pattern and white display mode). The display mode may change according to the progress. As a result, it is possible to perform a notice display and a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Also, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, a 7-segment, LED, or dot matrix display device). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. A part (1 or 2 decorative patterns match) or all of the pattern combinations may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second reserved number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the reserved icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed on different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). May be done. In addition, the second reserved number display may display the reserved number of only one special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 or may display the reserved number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 Is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (a normal game state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, a time saving state, and the like) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the result of pass / fail determination. Also, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, the display is changed in the order of background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A →...). In the case of collapse, a big jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice) may be provided.), And the order may be changed at random regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each have a frame (bezel) provided on the outer periphery, but may have a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate according to the effect content. . In the example shown in FIG. 31B, the family crest role 224E is located at the initial position. However, the initial position of the family crest role 224E shown in FIG. 31B is at the upper end of the family crest role 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  Above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryo Box Role 224H is arranged, and is configured to be able to move up and down in accordance with the effect contents. Thousand box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps with the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role item 224E, and the Senryo box role item 224H. The movement of each of the production movable bodies can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 31B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a) or (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an effect example applicable in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 32 (A1) to 32 (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 32 (A1), when the first large-bodied behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied behavior actor 224Gd and the one-hundred-box actor 224H operate, the state shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is obtained. More specifically, the first large-panel behavioral actor 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavioral actor 224Gd are arranged until the characters “large”, “panel”, “shake”, and “mai” face the front. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps substantially at the center. Here, Thousand Box Characters 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large plate behavior character 224Ga to the fourth Large Plate Behavior character 224Gd. It is considered that it is more difficult to visually recognize compared to the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. In addition, you may be comprised so that 1000 box | box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large-board behavior combination 224Ga-the 4th large-box behavior combination 224Gd. In addition, the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand box character 224H, and may be configured to overlap with the thousand character box character 224H.

  In FIG. 32 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  FIGS. 32 (C1) to (C4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (C1) to FIG. 32 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the crest role object 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa lighter, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can perform an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion, for example. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and a posture extending in the horizontal direction is an initial posture of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built into the tip of the lifting arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting control of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array on the basis of versa data, which is a type of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light occurs on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd and the thousand-square box character 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 32 (C1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  FIG. 32 (C2) shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the raising / lowering arm, and the LED array overlaps the substantially central front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to view than in the case where the POV displays 224I are not overlapped.

  FIG. 32 (C3) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating the rotation from a low speed to a high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 32 (C4) shows a state in which the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, characters of "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. Note that the image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the above-described one, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Also, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative design display device 208 is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Is also good. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display.

  In FIG. 32 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more easily visible.

  FIGS. 32 (E1) to (E2) show a state in which the family crest role object 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32 (E1), the family crest role item 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps with the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, It is more difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM than when they do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (E2), the family crest role item 224E is rotating clockwise (CW direction). Note that the family crest role object 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the crest role object 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b). Specifically, a state is shown in which the thousand box accessory 224H has moved from the initial position to a position overlapping the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (F1), the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state due to the overlap of the thousand box characters 224H. In this effect example, when the thousand-car box character 224H operates, the family crest character 224E is not operated so as not to interfere with the thousand-car box character 224H and the crest character 224E. In addition, there may be a case in which both the thousand box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E are in operation. Further, when the thousand-box actor 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest actor 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 32 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the slide movement is performed such that the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is also performed. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that is visible when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move. Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Display can no longer be performed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward, so that the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides upward. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 32 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state in which the image is displayed over the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuating icon h0 and the holding icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed over the two display devices. For example, only the enlarged left symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  FIGS. 32 (I1) to 32 (I2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (I1) to FIG. 32 (I2), the above-described POV display 224I is provided instead of the family crest combination 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 32 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps the substantially central front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and a certain rotation is performed. It shows a state in which the speed is reached and the rotation is made at a constant speed, and the letters "heat" are displayed.

  In FIG. 32 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, a state is shown in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform different display from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 32 (K1) to (K4) show an operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 32 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 32 (K1) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at the initial positions.

  FIG. 32 (K2) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slid to a position close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display has been made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjust the image of the overlapping portion, which is the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, according to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, a display with a sense of unity can be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (K2), the family crest role item 224E moves downward from the initial position to the retreat position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 32 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. In addition, when the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the operation of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed, the family crest role item 224E may rotate at the initial position, may vibrate, You may vibrate while rotating.

  In FIG. 32 (K3) to FIG. 32 (K4), in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It shows a state in which it rotates integrally in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 32 (K4) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display which rotates in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N is performed. As a result, the player may see the displayed image as not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 32 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (L1), the sub-display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the crest role item 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub-display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. At least part of the lower end portion overlaps. On the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays on the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part of the character SBH is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, It is more difficult to view the display device 208S than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 32 (L1 ′), a display image (such as a background image or the character SBH of Sabohani) may be displayed across the decorative design display device 208 and the sub-display device 208S.

  FIG. 32 (M1) illustrates the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large-panel behavior 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavior 224Gd. In other words, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd are respectively rotated to the positions where the characters “large”, “panel”, “shake”, and “mai” are in front, and then the decorative pattern display device 208 Has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side in the approximate center. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined announcement effect or a pre-reading announcement effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 33 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol holding. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31A, but it is also possible to apply the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 31B. In the following, illustrations of the crest actor 224E, the first large-story behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-story behavior actor 224Gd, the thousand-story box actor 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33A, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. The background here is not displayed, but, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 31A is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4−decoration 1−decoration 7” in accordance with the stop display of the first decoration symbol. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special map 1. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side is the hold icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 33 (1), the two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281. The two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are both default display modes. (A circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 33 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 33A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are represented by a broken line for ease of description, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 33A, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the change of the design of the special figure is as follows: the start of the change in the special figure display device; It is performed in the order of the start of the change of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 33 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. The pattern has not changed yet. Note that the symbol change and the fourth symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 may simultaneously start, or the fourth symbol change display after the symbol change starts on the first special figure display device 212. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  FIG. 33 (3) shows a state in which the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol has started. Note that the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decoration symbol may be performed simultaneously, or the change of the second decoration symbol may be performed after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second hold number display may be performed after the change display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 33D, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 31). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

  In FIG. 33 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 33 (6), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the base hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the holding icon, which was the second holding icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11, and thereafter, the change of the first decorative symbol Display starts. Note that when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the moving animation has ended, The moving animation may be ended after the variable display of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 33 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (8), a state in which the navigation character YM gives a navigator notice is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navi character notice is started, a balloon in which the character of "opportunity" is displayed is displayed near the navi character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation of the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (9), a state in which the conversation notice starts while the navigation character notice is being performed is shown. When the conversation notice is started, a conversation image CI1 of the lord displaying a character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. This display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is determined that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in a state where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navi-chara notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “opportunity” to the character display of “no”, thereby notifying that the sense of expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) of elevating from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “hot fever”) is not performed. . In addition, the navi-chara notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a pre-read notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice is performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the performance of the pachinko machine 100). Or a description of the stage of the production, or a tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather displaying the operation promotion notification image together with the character of the grandfather is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) during the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. And a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (10), the operation validity period has not been started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, and the like. May be possible. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than in the non-overlapping state. It is determined that the display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, in the navi-chara notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “No” to the character display of “hot”, and it is reported that the expectation of the big hit is considerably high. The display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “hot”, or the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed after the conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to “hot”, or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “hot”. As described above, in this effect example, a big hit is more likely to occur when a conversation notice is given than when no conversation notice is given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord need not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display of the same size as that in FIG. 33 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high degree of expectation for the big hit is displayed in this conversation image. The size may be different (large or small) from conversation notice B, which has a lower degree of expectation of a big hit than notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. By operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 33 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation validity period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. The user is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (12), the navi-chara notice has ended and the display of the balloon has been deleted. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed during the operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 33 (14), the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is replaced with the operation promotion notification image and "I'm intensely heated." May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as “I'm going to have a fever” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed even when the operation validity period has elapsed without being operated.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is made easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (16), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 7 "is stopped and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (17) to FIG. 33 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the start of the reach. In the animation at the start of the reach in this effect example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. Note that an appropriate display mode of the animation at the start of the reach can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 33 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward, respectively. While leaving the frame below the display area while leaving the icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14 (the holding icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . Note that the start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be at the same timing. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol starts, frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts in, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (22), the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral character 224Gb, and are thus difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are at least partially overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are thus difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd may operate. The reliability may be made different depending on the number of the four large board behavioral objects 224Gd operating. In addition, the first large-scale behavior combination 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior combination 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33 (23), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light in some cases. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-scale behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior actor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large behavior is performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light guide plate IL does not emit light, or only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large plate behavior members 224Ga to the fourth large plate role The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (25), the first large plate behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large plate member 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. Note that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-panel behavior 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavior 224Gd return to the initial position, respectively, or the first large-panel behavior 224Ga to the second large-panel behavior 224Gd may be terminated. The movement start of the four large-panel behavioral objects 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIG. 33 (22) to FIG. 33 (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-bodied behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied behavior actor 224Gd and the light guide plate IL are performed in a series. You may comprise so that it may become a big hit more easily than the case where an effect is not performed.

  FIG. 34 (26) shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 34 (30) shows that the operation effective period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation validity period, a cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed as shown in FIG. A preview performance is performed. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be more difficult to see than when the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. May be displayed even when the operation validity period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (33), a state is shown in which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the second button effect has been started after developing into super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (35), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player can be accepted.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 34 (36) shows that the gauge is decreasing due to the start of the operation validity period. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. Note that the operation validity period in the second button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button production after the development of the super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the second button effect after the development of the super reach may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button production after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed during the operation validity period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224 Gd makes it more difficult to visually recognize compared to the case where they are not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are at least partially overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are thus difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd may operate. The reliability may be made different depending on the number of the four large board behavioral objects 224Gd operating. The effect shown in FIG. 34 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd is performed. When both the display of the effect image and the operations of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd are displayed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior role 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large-scale behavior role 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role 224Gd is started, or the effect image may be displayed. May be started simultaneously with the operation of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation validity period, the effect display may be performed without performing the effect illustrated in FIG. 34 (38), and a loss display may be performed. After the effect display is performed, the resurrection effect may be displayed to display a large hit effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 34 (38) is started, the displayed change icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 34 (39), the thousand box actor 224H moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board actor 224Ga to the fourth large board actor 224Gd. Is shown. Further, FIG. 34 (40) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light thereafter. The order in which the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral object 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-sized box character 224H, and the order in which light emission of the light guide plate IL starts is limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-bodied-behavior role 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied-behavior role 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-and-two-box behavior 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the copy is not performed.

  FIG. 34 (41) shows a state where light emission of light guide plate IL has been completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (42), the thousand box role object 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 34 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. Has begun. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the change icon h0 has also been restarted.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene is continued until FIG. 34 (46). In FIG. 34 (46), the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 34 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to inform that a big hit will be made. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 35 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be non-display, a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or the same background image as before super-reach is performed. . Further, at this time, the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, the display of the navigation character YM is not performed, but the display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol has been fixed, the swinging fluctuation is continuing in the first decorative symbol, and the fluctuation is still being displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. 35 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the main control unit 300 transmits a winning effect start command to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. Display starts. In this case, since this is a jackpot game started as a jackpot with a combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”, “special bonus” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, It is reported to a person that it is a 15R probability change big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (52), mini-right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini-right-hand display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 35 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of decorative designs when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is being done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, the display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the extended play may be displayed.

  After that, when the big hit game is exhausted and the fifteenth round is started, as shown in FIG. 35 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The display of “15R”, which is the current round, is performed.

  FIG. 35 (56) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The big hit game this time is a big hit game started with a 15R probable big hit. After the big hit game ends, the game state becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (a probable state with electric support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probable change state with the electric support.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (57), a display (alert display) for alerting the user of forgetting to take the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) is performed. In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that has become a big hit in the gaming state where the electric hit is not performed, or regardless of the situation of the big hit, It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 35 (58) shows a state before the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the probable change state with the electric support, and the first symbol change display is started. In the probable change state with the electric support, the background image is the background image for the probable change state with the electric support, and the decorative pattern has a display mode different from that of the normal game state (the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is formed in the lower center part of the display screen, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 2 is a square, plain pattern and white display mode. Can be identified at first glance. Note that the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same. In FIG. 35 (58) to FIG. 35 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are displayed. The icons are indicated by dashed lines. Further, in FIGS. 35 (58) to 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy description, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probable change state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (58), a mini-right-hand display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive games are displayed below the mini-right display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, the display of “bonus × 1” indicating that fact has been made.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (60) instructs the player to right-hand. Right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the character "Please right-handed" is displayed on the translucent belt image. The right strike notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and it is considered that the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative symbol does not overlap. The right strike notification is displayed only in the power support state in which the first big hit game is completed and shifted, but may be displayed in the power support state in which the big hit game other than the first big hit game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Also, after shifting to the power support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when left-handed is detected. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that a left-hand drive has been performed, and a right-hand drive notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (61), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started is shown. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the right-handed notification is not displayed. Note that the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

  FIG. 35 (63) shows a state where the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is suspended four times. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 is held, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. Also, in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

  FIG. 36 (49a) shows another effect example following FIG. 34 (48). 33 to 34, the case where the “decoration 7” is in the reach state and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. The case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol swings in a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be non-display, a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or the same background image as before super-reach is performed. Further, at this time, the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, the display of the navigation character YM is not performed, but the display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and has not determined that the symbol change has been stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. 36 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each the decoration of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols are stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that any of the 5R probability variable hits, the 5R normal hits, and the 2R normal hits has been achieved.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game starts and the main control unit 300 transmits a winning effect start command to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. Display starts. In this case, since this is a jackpot game started as a jackpot with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 6−decoration 6−decoration 6”, “bonus” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player Is reported to be either a 5R probability variable hit, a 5R normal hit, or a 2R normal hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (52a), a mini right-hand display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 36 (38b) shows another effect example following FIG. 34 (37). FIG. 36 (38b) shows a state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the medium symbol, and it is notified that a loss has occurred. At this time, the display of the change icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the protagonist of the hero loses to the enemy swordsman, and thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 35 (40b), the fluctuating icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Leave and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 36 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (43b), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and has not determined that the symbol change has been stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. 36 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each the decoration of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (45b), a variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the variation icon erasure animation display, the animation display in which the variation icon h0 gradually decreases and finally the variation icon h0 disappears as shown in FIG. 36 (46b) is performed. The changing icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure stops.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 to FIG. 45 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step examples of modifications of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 37 to 45, the first special figure display 212, the second special figure display 214, the general figure display 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 37 to 45 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a device having a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 37. It is. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a combination of lost decoration symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode, while the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Savohani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, in this effect example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not displayed, but these may be displayed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37B, the reservation (first reservation) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the reservation icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is changed to the reservation icon h11 of the first special figure 1. The display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the change icon may be, for example, the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37C, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37D, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (e), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. −decoration 5−decoration 7 ”is determined and displayed in a combination of the lost decorative patterns.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 37 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol. Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (g), a step-up notice has been started. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order. Is displayed. The magnitude of the numerical value of the number of steps is a display indicating the degree of reliability of the big hit. For example, when the display reaches step 5, the development to the super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, there is a case where the display is not performed even if the display is performed up to Step 5, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when it is displayed up to step 5, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. As the number of steps increases, the size of the display also increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 37B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of Step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a first stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (k), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (reduction reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right part of the display area. The mini-game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super-reach effect display, and the super-reach effect display is more difficult to visually recognize than when the mini-game display area MN1 is not displayed. I have. In the mini-game in this production example, the mission is to repeatedly hit the production button 136 during the operation valid period, and finally to derive "Daichi". That is, the mini game in this effect example requires a plurality of operations of the effect button 136 to derive the result. FIG. 37 (m) shows a state in which the mini game is started, and a description of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "" is repeatedly displayed together with the button image 136a, thereby prompting the user to repeatedly perform the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below it, the character display of "Is it possible to be a very hot announcement in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is foretold that the derivation of "Daikichi" may generate a highly reliable announcement. It explains the mission contents and the results of the mission achievement. Note that the mini game display area MN1 may not be partitioned by the frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (o), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Nakayoshi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. The display of "Nakayoshi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Koyoshi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. The display of "Koyoshi" is partially overlapped with the display of "Nakayoshi".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (q), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi", and the effect button 136 It has been notified that the reception of the continuous tapping operation has been started.

  FIG. 37 (r) shows a state in which the player has performed the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  FIG. 38 (a) subsequent to FIG. 37 (r) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a star effect image is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of times of operation increases due to continuous hits. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hit of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but may not be reduced. At the timing shown in FIG. 38A, four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Koyoshi" is deleted by performing the operation of the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the possibility that “Nakayoshi” or “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini-game has increased. Note that, in this effect example, if the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of “Koyoshi” once deleted may be displayed again, but once deleted, the display is not displayed again. Is also good.

  FIG. 38 (c) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (c), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is not changed, and the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Nakayoshi" are continued. In place of the button image 136 and the display of the character "continuous hit", the character "2 seconds" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining.

  FIG. 38D shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 38D, the number of the effect images of the stars displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is not changed, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakayoshi” are continued. In addition, the display for notifying the operation valid period is "one second remaining", and it is reported that the operation valid period is one second remaining.

  FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display for notifying the operation validity period. By performing the operation 136, the display of "Nakayoshi" is erased, and it is reported that the possibility that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game is increased. In this example of production, if the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the production button 136, the display of "Nakayoshi" once deleted may be displayed again. Is also good.

  FIG. 38 (f) shows a state in which "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 performed by the player. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense notice will appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of “Daikichi”, a notice may be given that the intense hot preview is necessarily executed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is deleted at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (g), the super reach effect is restarted. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (g), the button announcement effect has been started, the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and “Push” is displayed together with the button image 136a. Is displayed to show that the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted once. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating while the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it only vibrates, may be displayed in a mode in which it only rotates, or may be displayed in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. There may be cases. In this effect example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode in which the button image 136a vibrates and rotates, the final image is displayed more than when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode in which at least one of the vibration and the rotation is not performed. It is configured such that the big hit symbol is easily fixed and stopped. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of times of operating the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect relating to the variable display of the decorative pattern). Further, in this example of the effect, in the mini-game, the effect is performed by the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, and in the main effect, the effect is performed by operating the effect button 136 once. However, in the mini-game as well, the effect button is operated in the main effect. The effect by the continuous hitting operation of 136 may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 38 (h), it is shown that the super reach effect is continuously performed and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation valid period starts, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of “Push”, and the gauge is displayed in a manner in which the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 38 (h), as shown in FIG. The cut-in image including the balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the strong cut-in image CI1a in which a number (for example, nine) of the chiefs are arranged around the character of “game” in the balloon, and this is the miniature cut-in image described above. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in accordance with the result of achieving the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “Daikichi” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, a weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 38 (i ′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that is smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the number leader face is not arranged around the character of “game” in the balloon. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission is not achieved in the mini game. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super-reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super-reach is more effective than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is considered difficult to see. The strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with a decorative pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .

  Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). , One variation game of the special map ends.

  In this production example, the mini-game requires a continuous operation of the production button 136 in order to achieve a mission, while the main production requires a single operation of the production button 136 in order to make a notice appear. The mini-game may require one operation of the effect button 136, and the main effect may require a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

  Also, when the result of the mini-game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in the effect example, the execution time of the mini-game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 39 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 39 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state where the reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the device has developed into a super reach (reduction reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 39C, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the mini game is started, and the explanation of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "" is repeatedly displayed together with the button image 136a, thereby prompting the user to repeatedly perform the operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below it, the character display of "Is it possible to be a very hot announcement in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is foretold that the derivation of "Daikichi" may generate a highly reliable announcement. It explains the mission contents and the results of the mission achievement. On the other hand, a button operation effect requesting operation of an effect button has also been started in the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the characters "Push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and once the effect button 136 is pressed. It is shown that the operation is promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating while the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it only vibrates, may be displayed in a mode in which it only rotates, or may be displayed in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Daikichi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period in the main effect has not started, and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relationship between the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1 and the main effect.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Nakayoshi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. The display of "Nakayoshi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of "Koyoshi" is partially overlapped with the display of "Nakayoshi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "repeated hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi". It has been notified that the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has been started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts to hit the effect button 136 repeatedly. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. Thus, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, a button operation for a mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping with the main effect is preferentially accepted. Note that the button operation for the main effect that is overlapped with the mini game display area MN1 may be preferentially received.

  FIG. 39 (h) shows a state in which the player has performed the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, a state is shown in which the number of star effect images increases according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (i), the display of “Koyoshi” is erased by performing the operation of the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and “Nakayoshi” or “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game. It is reported that the likelihood has increased. Note that the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 39 (j) shows a state in which the player repeatedly performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. In addition, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "continuous hit", the character of "2 seconds remaining" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 39 (k) shows a state where the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player has been interrupted. Then, the effect images of the stars displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (k), the number of the effect images of the stars in the mini-game display area MN1 becomes zero. The situation has been shown. In addition, the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Nakayoshi" continue to be performed, but the display for informing the operation validity period is "one second remaining", and the operation validity period is one second remaining. Has been informed.

  FIG. 39 (l) shows a state in which the operation validity period of the mini game has elapsed, and “Nakayoshi” has been derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Originally, if the continuous hitting operation was performed continuously, “Daikichi” would have been derived, but the mission was not achieved because the number of operations of the effect button 136 was insufficient. It is due to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini-game is ended, the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, the super-reach effect is resumed, and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is used. Decrease display is started. Thereby, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has been started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game is not “Daichi”. At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. In the case where it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, if it is determined in advance to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, FIG. As shown in o '), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation state (operation state) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. If it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of “Daikichi” may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 39 (q), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops (decision-displays) the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. , One variation game of the special map ends. As described above, the result of the success / failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the success / failure is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle thereof may be appropriately changed. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 40 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 40 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of evolving into a super reach (reduction reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (b), a mini-game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which the mini-game is started in the mini-game display area MN1 is shown. . Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 once. In addition, below that, the character display of "Get out of Daikichi and intense heat appears in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is announced that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving "Daikichi", The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Nakayoshi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. The display of "Nakayoshi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is performed. The display of "Koyoshi" is partially overlapped with the display of "Nakayoshi".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi" and "Kokichi" is started. Then, a character "push" is displayed below the button image 136a together with the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the reception of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires a continuous hit operation of an effect button has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the characters "repeat" are displayed together with the button image 136a. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating while the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it only vibrates, may be displayed in a mode in which it only rotates, or may be displayed in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, in the main effect, an effect requesting a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and in a mini game, an effect requesting a single operation with the effect button 136 is performed. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is smaller than the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. In this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in a superimposed manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the gauge display by the button reception time meter MT is started and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are performed simultaneously. Note that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, or the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Note that, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. Thus, in this effect example, the same operation means (effect button 136) can be operated for both the main effect and the mini-game effect. Therefore, for example, in the case where the effect in which the reception of the operation is prioritized is an effect requiring a continuous hitting operation, and the effect in which the reception of the operation is non-priority is the effect in which the operation is requested once, the operation means is used to generate a continuous hit. A result may be derived for a non-priority effect, and an effect in which operation acceptance is prioritized is an effect requiring one operation, and an operation in which operation acceptance is non-priority is a continuous hit operation. In the case of the requested effect, since the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, there is a case where the result can be reliably derived even with respect to the effect which has priority.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the character "achieved" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is received prior to the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Then, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (i) according to the continuous operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, so that the button reception time meter MT is in a state in which the button reception time meter MT is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “mission completed” indicating that the mission in the mini game has been completed scrolls from the right end to the left end. This notifies that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continued. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, as a result of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 performed by the player, as shown in FIG. 40 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the weak cut-in image CI1b with the strong cut-in image CI1a, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of the mission achievement in the mini game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when it is displayed and becomes full. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a should not be displayed, the continuous hitting gauge may not be filled even if the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (k), in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to "mission completed" instead of "mission complete". "Super hot announcement notice" is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is the super hot announcement, has been displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), the mission of the mini game is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 40 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by continuous operation of the effect button 136. However, thereafter, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to, for example, a case where the player stops the continuous hit operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 40 (j ′). In some cases. That is, as in this effect example, even if the mission has been achieved, there may be a case in which a law break in which no intense hot announcement appears does occur depending on the operation state of the effect button 136. In order to match the mini-game mission, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation state of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. A super hot notice may be displayed. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a center is displayed. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 40 (m), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops (decision-displays) the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. , One variation game of the special map ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in is performed when the operation number of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this effect example, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" can be derived. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, in the button continuous hit operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed if the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b. It may be. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the continuous button operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image may be displayed. Although CI1b can be displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 41 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 41 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state where the reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (b) shows a state in which the device has developed into a super reach (reduction reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41C, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area. FIG. 41C shows a state in which the mini game is started, and a description of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "Please give Daikichi with repeated tapping" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 41C has a larger size than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. However, they may be the same size. In addition, the small size button image 136a and the large size button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of the mission achievement may be varied depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. . That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily accomplished than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In the lower part of the display, the character display of "Okichi's strong cut-in occurred" is displayed, and it is announced that the strong cut-in notice with high reliability of the big hit will be generated by deriving "Okichi". Of the mission and the results of the mission achievement.

  Thereafter, the description of the play of the mini-game displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. The display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi" and "Kokichi" are displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" is overlapped with the display of "Nakichi", and the display of "Nakichi" is displayed as "Kokichi" Is displayed so as to overlap with the display of.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the reception of the continuous tapping operation by has been started. On the left side of the mini game display area MN1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner in which the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this effect example, it is shown that the display relating to the mini-game is also performed in an area other than the mini-game display area MN1.

  FIGS. 41F to 41G show a state in which the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini-game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of continuous hits of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result corresponding to the number of continuous hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 41 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game, and the word "mission accomplished" is displayed below the result, informing that the mission of the mini-game has been achieved. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result that “Daikichi” is derived and the mission is achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed at the center. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 41 (k), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops (decision-displays) the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. , One variation game of the special map ends.

  On the other hand, after the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (e), as shown in FIGS. 41 (f ′) to (g ′), the number of times the effect button 136 is operated However, if the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 41 (h ′), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, As "Koyoshi" is derived, the character "Mission failed" is displayed below it to inform that the mini-game mission has not been achieved. In addition, the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the determination of the success or failure.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is based on the result that “Koyoshi” was derived and the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (j ′), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist of the hero has lost to the enemy swordsman and lost, and at the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the decoration is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". You.

  Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 41 (k ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying (decision display) the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Then, one special figure floating game ends.

  FIG. 42 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 42 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (d). In the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Savohani, that is, is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 42 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which a mission as a main effect has been started. Specifically, the character “mission activation” is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. At the lower edge of the display area, "cut out" and "big hit" are displayed together with the image of the face of the bancho, and the content of the mission is notified. In other words, it is reported that if the image of the boss's face appears during the mission, the mission is achieved and the big hit is confirmed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a first stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “mission is ongoing” indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (e), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, the message “during mission” is also displayed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that evolves into a super reach (a suppression reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. Note that the display of "during mission" is continued even after the development of Super Reach.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini-game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which the mini-game is started is shown. In this effect example, a state is shown in which a mission as a main effect and a mission in a mini game are being performed at the same time. In other words, a state is shown in which the mission of the mini game is performed while being overlaid on the mission as the main effect. Here, in this effect example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 42 (g) to (l) are shown in FIGS. 41 (c) to (FIG. 41) except that the display of “during mission” indicating that a mission is being performed is performed. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 42 (j) to (k), a part of the display of “during mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT, and is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is said that the display of "during mission" is more difficult to recognize than when the overlap is not made.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (l), “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game, and after the mission is achieved, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (m). Is displayed as the strong cut-in image CI1a. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result that “Daikichi” is derived and the mission is achieved as a result of the mini game described above. It should be noted that the mission is continued during the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the display of “during mission” is continuously performed. However, the strong cut-in image CI1a is overlapped with the strong cut-in image CI1a. It is more difficult to view the image than when it does not overlap with CI1a.

  As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a speech balloon in which a number of face-length faces are arranged around the character of "game". Therefore, the appearance of the bancho's face, which is a mission in the main effect, has been achieved, so that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (n), the character display of “mission accomplished” overlies the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is reported that the jackpot is determined by the achievement of the mission in the main effect. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect has been achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 42 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). , One variation game of the special map ends.

  FIG. 43 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (k) are the same as FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (k), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (l), when “Koyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game, the character “Mission failed” is displayed below the mini game, and the mission of the mini game was not achieved. Is notified. In this effect example, the result of the hit determination is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini-game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance so that a value other than "Daichi" is always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission has not been achieved as a result of the mini game described above. It should be noted that the mission is continued even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display of “during mission” is continuously performed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, the display of “during mission” is displayed in the strong cut-in image, although it is considered that the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than that of the strong cut-in image. It is easier to visually recognize when overlapping with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when overlapping with the CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face with the longest number. For this reason, since the appearance of the bancho face, which is a mission in the main effect, was not achieved, the character display of "mission failed" is displayed on the weak cut-in image CI1b in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. They are displayed overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord lost to the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed. The “decoration 6” to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 43 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). , One variation game of the special map ends.

  FIG. 44 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. Note that FIGS. 44 (a) to (i) are the same as FIGS. 42 (a) to (i), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the acceptance of the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (i), as shown in FIGS. 44 (j) to (k), the number of times the effect button 136 is operated is reduced. If the operation validity period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 44 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, the result of the mini game is “Koyoshi”. Is derived, and the character “MISSION FAILED” is displayed below, to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. In this effect example, the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as a result of the mini game. However, since the operation validity period has elapsed without the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 being less than the predetermined number, “Dokichi” is derived instead of “Daikichi”. If the mini-game has started but the operation button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived. . When it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived, “Daikichi” may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission has not been achieved as a result of the mini game described above. It should be noted that the mission is continued even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display of “during mission” is continuously performed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, the display of “during mission” is displayed in the strong cut-in image, although it is considered that the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than that of the strong cut-in image. It is easier to visually recognize when overlapping with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when overlapping with the CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the result of the mission is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face with the longest number. For this reason, the appearance of the bancho face, which is a mission in the main effect, has not been achieved, so that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (n), the character display of “mission failed” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b. They are displayed overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this effect example, the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (o), a screen in which the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and displayed a victory on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In addition, "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed at substantially the center of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the ornamental symbol of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" It is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 44 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). , One variation game of the special map ends. That is, in this effect example, the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the mini-game is insufficient, and the mission of the mini-game fails. The state where the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination is shown.

  FIG. 45 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 45, the state of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super-reach (reduction reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (b), a button operation effect requesting a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 has been started as a main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating while the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge display by the button reception time meter MT is started to be displayed, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Have been. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45D, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 once. In addition, below it, the character display of "Is it possible to be a very hot announcement in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is foretold that the derivation of "Daikichi" may generate a highly reliable announcement. The contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of the achievement of the mission are explained. Thus, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Nakayoshi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game is performed. The display of "Nakayoshi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daichi". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In addition, in this example of the production, the production movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit notice. For example, when the production movable body 224 operates, it is announced that the possibility of achieving the mission in the mini game is high. Alternatively, it may be announced that there is a high possibility of achieving the mission in the main effect. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Koyoshi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Koyoshi" is partially overlapped with the display of "Nakayoshi". Also, the display of "Koyoshi" is overlapped on the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is thus difficult to see. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (g) responds to the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side thereof so as not to overlap the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi" and "Kokichi" is started. Then, a character "push" is displayed below the button image 136a together with the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the reception of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. Note that the display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm part 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is thus difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect of requesting a continuous hit operation of an effect button is continued. In this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in a superimposed manner. In this case as well, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued, but when the reception of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 becomes the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted prior to the operation of the operation 136, the result of the mini game is derived, for example, in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the dashed line. Is configured. Note that a single operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, or may be received as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation of the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the character "achieved" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the word "achieved". At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has elapsed, and the player has ended the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. For this reason, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the character of "achieved" indicating that the mission of the mini-game has been achieved is also easily visible. Note that the timing at which the mission in the main effect ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main effect is finished and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 may move. After the forearm portion 224b moves to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (k) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of the mission achievement in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the display is not performed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times of the operation of the effect button 136. You may do so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". . After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (fixed display), and one fluctuation game of the special figure ends.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 46 to FIG. 50 are diagrams illustrating stepwise modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 46 to 50, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure Illustration of the holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 46 to 50 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a device having a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 46, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 are also shown.

  FIG. 46A shows a state in which the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this effect example, the mini-game is performed without being divided by regions. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, at the approximate center of the display area, "SP Reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and when the main character's lord appears from the treasure chest, it is informed that the system will shift to super reach (SP reach). In the upper part of the display area, "select with cross key" and "determine with button" are displayed, and the treasure chest selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure chest selected with the effect button 136 are determined as a treasure chest to be opened. It is reported that can be. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operation means is performed is shown. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the mini game is played using an area wider than the effect relating to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46B, a state in which the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has been started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is indicated that the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is the selected treasure box. Also, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the center right side of the display area, and “3” indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Have been. FIG. 46B also shows a state where the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (c), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR, and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. . The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 46D, the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. The treasure box image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure box image BXL is reduced and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 46D, the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “1”, which indicates that the operation valid period is one second remaining. In addition, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, a display for determining the treasure box to be opened when the operation valid period has elapsed may be displayed. Further, when the operation validity period has elapsed without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as a treasure box to be opened, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation validity period has elapsed without any operation, none of the treasure boxes is selected, and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, in some cases, the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 can be improved.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (f) shows the appearance of the hero's main character YSM appearing from the right treasure box image BXR, and the mini-game mission has been achieved. Thus, the shift to the SP reach is announced in advance. Note that a pre-reading notice may be given by the appearance of the main character's main character YSM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h) shows a state of developing into SP reach. As described above, in this effect example, when the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined based on the result of the hit determination is to shift to SP reach, in the mini-game performed before shifting to SP reach, It is configured to be able to display a character YSM of the protagonist's lord who foretells a shift to SP reach. As a result, the appearance of the main character YSM in the mini-game may make it possible to notify the transition to SP reach.

  In this example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the main character YSM appears and the transition to SP reach is not performed regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. If it is determined in advance, the configuration may be such that the main character YSM does not appear regardless of which of the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL is selected. On the condition that the shift to SP reach is determined in advance, it is determined at random whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure box image determined to be hit is selected. In such a case, the main character YSM may appear. In addition, in the case where the fluctuation time during which the SP reach can be executed is selected, which of the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL is to be hit is determined, and the treasure box image determined to be hit is selected. The character YSM of the lord is configured to appear, and if the character YSM of the lord appears, then it develops into SP reach, but if the character YSM of the lord does not appear, then the SP reach The reach may be configured to perform a hit with a lower hit reliability than SP reach such as a normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, whether or not the main character YSM appears at the timing when the treasure box image is selected may be randomly selected. Further, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to SP reach. In this case, the rule may be broken, and the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 47, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 are also shown.

  FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, at the approximate center of the display area, "SP Reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and when the main character's lord appears from the treasure chest, it is informed that the system will shift to super reach (SP reach). In the upper part of the display area, "select with cross key" and "determine with button" are displayed, and the treasure chest selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure chest selected with the effect button 136 are determined as a treasure chest to be opened. It is reported that can be. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47A, the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and none of the treasure box images is displayed in a selected state. Have been.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed at the center right of the display area. You. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (b), "3" indicating that the operation validity period is 3 seconds is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (c), in the state where none of the operations is performed after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display shows “2”, indicating that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected in any of the treasure box images, and is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (d), in the state where none of the operations is performed after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display shows "1" and the operation validity period is one second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected in any of the treasure box images, and is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (e), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation validity period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected in any of the treasure box images, and is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL. As a result, as shown in FIG. 47 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state is not selected and none of the treasure boxes is opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived. Will be migrated to.

  In this production example, when the shift to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if no treasure chest is selected, but the result and the time of the change display of the change of the decorative symbol are as follows. If no treasure chest is selected, the SP reach is not performed because no treasure chest is selected based on the result of the pass / fail determination, and, for example, a reach such as a normal reach, which is less reliable than the SP reach, is executed. It may be. According to this, in some cases, the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 can be improved.

  FIG. 48 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 48, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 are also shown. 48 (a) to (d) are the same as FIGS. 46 (a) to (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 48D, the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure box image BXL is reduced and displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), an error display of “game ball is clogged” or “call the attendant” is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error Notification) is performed, and it is reported that a ball clogging error in which a game ball is clogged in the payout route has occurred. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the prize ball or the lending ball is satisfied and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 and the like) is driven, but the payout of the game ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, (3 times) If the payout of the game ball is not detected despite the repetition, the ball clogging error is notified. Since such an error allows the game to be continued, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while performing error notification. In addition, when the elimination of the error that is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 152 is normally performed), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display.

  FIGS. 48 (f) to 48 (h) are the same as FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (h), except that an error display is performed, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is continued if the error does not interrupt the game.

  FIG. 49 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 49, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 are also shown. In this effect example, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits a magnetic detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, stops the game, and becomes inactive. Control is performed. After the deactivation, it is configured not to be able to return until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic detection command outputs, for example, an error sound from the speaker 120, or uses a variety of lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game frame lamp 542 in a predetermined error mode. The lamp can be flickered, or a predetermined error can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, FIGS. 48A to 48C are the same as FIGS. 46A to 46C, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (c) shows a state surrounding the right treasure box image BXR. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  Thereafter, for example, when a player performs a fraud using a magnet and the magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), the decorative design display device 208 displays “Magnet” on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the character "sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 46 (d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased, and also, as shown in FIGS. 46 (d) to (h). The effect display is scheduled to be performed, but the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is turned off without visually recognizing these effect displays (FIGS. 49D to 49H). )). The magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 49 differs from the error display shown in FIG. 48 in that the area overlapping the mini-game effect is different. In other words, it can be said that the effect display of the mini-game has a different area overlapping the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

  FIG. 50 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 50 (a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 37 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state where the reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of evolving into bowling reach, which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as the main production. When shifting to the bowling reach, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays small decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c in the upper left corner, respectively, and displays ten boring lines arranged in a pyramid shape. An effect display in which the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is performed, and in the upper right part of the display area, the character `` Striking big hit '' is displayed, and if you complete the mission called strike, it will be a big hit Has been informed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c) shows that the ball has reached a position close to the ten bowling pins and is about to fall down. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area, and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. . In the mini game display area MN1, a description of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini-game shown in FIG. 50 (c), the dice “1” is displayed and the “release” is displayed below the “mini-game” display. It is described that after the start of the game, the effect button 136 is operated to perform a mission of stopping and displaying the roll of the number “1”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (d) shows a state where the nine bowling pins have fallen. That is, a state in which one bowling pin remains without falling down is shown. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, the design of the dice may be variably displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e) shows a state where the effect button 136 is operated and the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since no strike occurred in the bowling reach, the character of "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the game is lost. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, when the effect button 136 is operated, the result of the mini-game is that the roll of “1” is stopped, and the mission is achieved. The display of “+1” is given to notify that the book will collapse.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (f), the mini-game display area MN1 is deleted, and the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini-game and the reward of the mission achievement “ After the display of "+1" is performed, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), one remaining bowling pin which has not fallen down has fallen, and a strike has been shown. That is, a state in which an effect that is a resurgence jackpot from a loss is being performed is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops (decision-displays) the decoration symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". , One variation game of the special map ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game affects the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 51 to FIG. 58 are diagrams illustrating stepwise modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 51 to 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure Illustration of the holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 51 to 58 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a device having a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 51 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a), “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” that is a combination of lost decoration symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. Is displayed. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-function display area MF1 partitioned into a substantially square shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can perform the above-described tutorial display, notice display, effect display of a mini game, and the like. In addition, in this effect example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not displayed, but these may be displayed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51B, the reservation (first reservation) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the reservation icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is changed to the reservation icon h11 of the first special figure 1. It is displayed, the third holding icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed as the second holding icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this time, the change icon may be displayed as described above.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51C, a state is shown in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a message "The mini game starts at various timings" is displayed, suggesting the timing at which the mini game starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. −decoration 5−decoration 7 ”is determined and displayed in a combination of the lost decorative patterns.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the decorative icon display device 208 changes the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 to the first special figure 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (f), a state in which the tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th general" is displayed, and information on the hero's lord is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, a “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game is started as a mini-game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice and a display of “hold on 1UP” are performed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by one rank. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the roll of the dice “1” as a mission is derived, so that it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Becomes

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (j), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (j), as shown in FIG. 51 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of achieving the mission. The display is derived and displayed in such a manner as to indicate the result of “1”, and “1 UP confirmed” is displayed to indicate that the reward is a mission achievement. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest number is also displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 51 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Note that the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game may be displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (1) is derived and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (l), a third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first-stage display mode of the prefetch notice. Has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. Also in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot is high in the order of red> green> blue in the order of red, green and blue. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In addition, instead of the dice game as the mini game described above with reference to FIGS. 51 (g) to (k), a fortune game may be started. Here, FIG. 51 (g ′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 51 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 51F is interrupted, and the mini-game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 as shown in FIG. 51G. Be started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the "fortune game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the boss, and it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started. Is done. Note that, in this effect example, even when different types of mini-games are started, the face image BCH of the same number length is displayed. In other words, in this effect example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of mini-games by causing the same character (the image BCH of the face of the boss) to appear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (h '), in the multi-function display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the bancho, and "Hold 1UP" is displayed. It is described that when "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by one rank. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the fortune of “Nakayoshi” as the mission is derived, so that it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (i '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. In the mini-game in this effect example, no operation is performed by operating means such as the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (j ′), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure chest is changed to a display in an open state, and a fortune of "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure chest is deleted, and “1 UP fixed” indicating that the reward is a mission achievement is displayed. I have. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face with the longest number is still displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 51 (k ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the timing of the stop display of the right symbol may be the same as the timing at which the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (l ′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first-stage display mode of the prefetch notice. Has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 51 illustrates an example in which different types of mini-games can be performed when the mini-game start condition is satisfied. In the mini-game of the dice game, the operation of the effect button 136 is required, and in the mini-game of the fortune game, no operation is required by the operation means. Are the same (both have changed the first reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1). That is, FIG. 51 shows an example of an effect in which the same effect is applied to the main effect as a result in any mini game. In this example of production, whether to execute the dice game or the fortune game may be determined at random or may be determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the fortune game is executed than when it is executed.

  Further, as in this effect example, in a mini-game, in a character smaller than a character appearing during the execution of the variation display of the decorative pattern (may be referred to as a “small character”), or in an effect such as a tutorial display, for example. A character that appears (may be referred to as “navi character”) may appear. When the mini-game is not performed, these characters may be displayed in a tutorial display, another notice, or the like, or may appear only in the mini-game. Further, these characters may be always displayed. Further, it is preferable that there is a visual difference between the character appearing in the mini-game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, the character may be different in size, or may be different from the 3D character and the deformation. There may be a difference in expression, such as a character.

  In this effect example, the fortune game (second mini game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini-game uses at least a certain display area (the multi-function display area MF1 where the first mini-game is performed), and further uses another display area (the multi-function display area MF1 is an enlarged display area). ) May also be configured to be used.

  FIG. 52 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. FIGS. 52A to 52E are the same as FIGS. 51A to 51E, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (f), a state in which a mini game start notice is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. More specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the number one's face, and a notice is given that a mini game will be started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, a “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game is started as a mini-game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, on the right side of the face image BCH of the bancho, a display indicating a roll of “3” on the dice and a display of “hold on 3UP” are performed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of “3” on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by three ranks. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the roll of the number “3” of the dice as a mission is derived, so that it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Becomes Moreover, in this effect example, the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (j), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (j), as shown in FIG. 52 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the achievement of the mission. The display is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the result of "3", and the display of "3UP fixed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest number is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Note that the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game may be displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (1) is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (l), a third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third-stage display mode of the pre-reading notice. Has been changed to a circular and red display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In addition, when the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 52 (g '), when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 displays the number in the multi-function display area MF1. The "fortune game" is displayed together with the face image BCH, and it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiyoshi” is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and “On hold 3UP” is displayed. It is described that when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by three levels. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the fortune of “Daikichi” as the mission is derived, whereby it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Moreover, in this effect example, the contents of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than the fortune game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (i '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to a display in an open mode, and a fortune of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure chest is deleted, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that the reward is a mission achievement is displayed. I have. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face with the longest number is still displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (k ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the timing of the stop display of the right symbol may be the same as the timing at which the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (l ′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third-stage display mode of the pre-reading notice. Has been changed to a circular and red display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 52, an example is shown in which the contents of a mission and the reward for achieving the mission can be made different even in the same type of mini game. It should be noted that the contents of the mission may be the same and the rewards for achieving the mission may be different, or the contents of the mission may be different and the reward for achieving the mission may be the same.

  FIG. 53 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 53 (A1) to 53 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the old woman mode, and FIGS. 53 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. I have. In addition, the old woman mode and the princess mode are the names of the effect modes, respectively, and each mode is configured such that the effect unique to the mode is performed. Note that, for example, at least one of the old woman mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, whether to shift to the old woman mode or the princess mode may be determined at random, or may be determined based on a game state. For example, in the normal game state (the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state), it is easy to shift to the old-fashioned mode. By making it easier, the player may be able to estimate the current playing state.

  FIG. 53 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the old woman mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (A1), the display of “Grandmother mode” is performed in the upper center of the display area, and the Grandmother character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the old woman mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini-game has been started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started. In this effect example, in the grandfather mode, the dice game is configured to be started more easily than the fortune game. Here, when the mini-game is executed in the old woman mode, the dice game may always be started and the fortune game may not be started. 53 (A2) to 53 (A6) are the same as FIGS. 52 (h) to FIG. 52 (l) except that the display of the grandma mode and the display of the grandma character BA are performed. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 53 (B1) shows a state where the effect mode is the princess mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (B1), a “princess mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game has been started, the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the boss, and it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started. In this effect example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is configured to be started more easily than the dice game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the princess mode, the fortune game may always be started and the dice game may not be started. FIGS. 53 (B2) to 53 (B6) are the same as FIGS. 52 (h ′) to (1 ′) except that the display of the princess mode and the display of the princess character HM1 are performed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 54 (A1) to 54 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the old woman mode, and FIGS. 54 (B1) to FIG. 54 (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. I have.

  FIG. 54 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the old woman mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (A1), the display of “Grandpa mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and the Grandpa character BA is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the old woman mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini-game has been started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started. In this effect example, the type of mini-game to be executed is determined based on the content of a notice to be executed in the main effect. For example, when it is determined that the step-up notice is to be executed, in the symbol variation display, the dice game is easier to be started than the fortune game as the mini game, and it is determined that the pseudo ream is to be executed. In this case, the symbol variation display is configured such that a fortune game is more easily started as a mini game than a dice game. In addition, when it is determined that the step-up notice is to be executed, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and when it is determined that the pseudo ream is to be executed, the The symbol change display may be configured so that the fortune game is always started as a mini game. Further, in this effect example, the type of the mini-game to be executed without depending on the current effect mode is determined. However, the type of the mini-game to be executed depending on the effect mode may be determined.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, on the right side of the image BCH of the number-long face, a display indicating a roll of “3” on the dice and a display of “hold on 3UP” are performed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of “3” on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by three levels. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. In addition, even if the timing at which the display of the roll of “3” of the dice and the display of “hold at 3UP” are started in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU1 is started are the same. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be displayed or the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the number "3" of the dice and the indication of "hold 3UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “hold 3UP” at the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (A3), “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Note that the timing at which the display of the button image 136a and “press” in the multi-function display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or the timing in the multi-function display area MF1 may be the same. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the start of the display of the step-up notice SU2, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 may be displayed. And "press" may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (A4), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (A4), as shown in FIG. 54 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the achievement of the mission. The display is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the result of "3", and the display of "3UP fixed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest number is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (A5), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 54 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. It should be noted that the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may be ended. After the completion of the process, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third-stage display mode of the pre-reading notice. Has been changed to a circular and red display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 54 (B1) shows a state where the effect mode is the princess mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (B1), “Princess mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game has been started, the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the boss, and it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (B2) shows a temporary stop at the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”. In this effect example, for example, it is reported that a pseudo-run may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”. That is, there is a case where the combination of the decorative patterns of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3” becomes a chance. In addition, you may make it display a pseudo-sequence symbol and notify the start of a pseudo-sequence. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiyoshi” is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the bancho along with “Retention 3UP”, and when “Daiichi” is derived and displayed in the mini-game, the holding icon is displayed. It is described that the display mode is ranked up by three levels. Note that the timing at which the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "hold at 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Hold 3UP” are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the “Daikichi” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be temporarily stopped. May be started and the display of "hold on 3UP" may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and a state in which the first pseudo consecutive variable display is performed is shown. Here, you may make it display the number of times that the pseudo run was performed. Note that the start of the display of the decoration symbol (pseudo-ren) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS after the display of the decoration symbol (pseudo-ren) starts. May be started, or after the display of the treasure box BXS is started, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol (pseudo series) may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to a display in an open mode, and the fortune of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, so that the mission is achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and informs that the pseudo-run may be further performed. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, After the result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure chest is deleted, and “3UP fixed” indicating that the reward is a mission achievement is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face with the longest number is still displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and a state in which the pseudo variable second variable display is being performed is shown. In addition, the start of the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ren) and the timing of the start of the display of the reward of the mission achievement may be the same, or after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (the pseudo-ren) is started. The display of the reward for the achievement of the mission may be started, or the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ren) may be started after the display of the reward for the achievement of the mission is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 Has been changed from the default display mode to a circular and red display mode as a display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and reports that the combination has been lost. Here, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a pseudo run may be further performed. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In this example, the mini game results are described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-ream is started may be announced, or the increase in the number of the pseudo-reels may be announced.

  In addition, as a result of the mini-game, as a reward for accomplishing the mission, a step-up notice may be given, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be given, The increase in the number may be notified.

  FIG. 55 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 55 (A1) to 55 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the old woman mode, and FIGS. 55 (B1) to 55 (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. I have.

  FIG. 55 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the old woman mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (A1), the display of “Grandpa mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and the Grandpa character BA is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the old woman mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this effect example, the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed in place of the image BCH of the face of the boss, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the character image SBH of the Sabohani. A state in which the start of the dice game is notified is shown. The Sabohani character image SBH is an image that may be displayed only in a dice game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in a fortune game, but may be displayed in a fortune game as well. In this effect example, it is configured such that the reward for the mission achievement in the dice game is more advantageous when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, compared to the case where the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. The third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the pre-reading advance notice is easy to be performed, and when the image BCH of the bancho's face is displayed, the mission is more difficult than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice in which the display form of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the first stage of the pre-reading notice (blue display form) is likely to be given. More specifically, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the result of the mini-game is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the appearance of “1” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. Further, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the mission may be configured to be more easily accomplished than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. 55 (A2) to FIG. 55 (A6) are the same as those in FIG. 54 (A2) except that the image BCH of the longest face displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced by the character image SBH of Savohani. Since this is the same as FIG. (A6), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 55 (B1) shows a state where the effect mode is the princess mode. More specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (B1), the “princess mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this effect example, a princess character image HM2 is displayed in place of the bancho face image BCH, and a "fortune game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2. It is shown that the fortune game is being started. The princess character image HM2 is an image that may be displayed only in the fortune game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game. However, the princess character image HM2 may also be displayed in the dice game. In this effect example, the reward for completing the mission in the fortune game is more advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, compared to the case where the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. It is easy to give a notice in the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed, the mission is more performed than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice in which the display form of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the first stage of the pre-reading notice (blue display form) is likely to be given. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, "Daikichi" is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the bancho face image is displayed. When the BCH is displayed, “Nakayoshi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. Note that, as in this effect example, the characters displayed in the mini game may be the same as the characters displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character (princess character HM1) displayed in the princess mode and the character (princess character image HM2) displayed in the mini game are the same. Further, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily accomplished than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. Also, FIGS. 55 (B2) to 55 (B6) show FIG. 54 (B2) except that the image BCH of the longest face displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. Since this is the same as FIG. (B6), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 56 (A1) to FIG. 56 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the normal game state (the special figure low probability general figure low probability state), and FIG. 56 (B1) to FIG. 56 (B6) An example of an effect performed in a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure high probability state) is shown. In this effect example, the manner in which the types of mini-games started depending on the current game state are different is shown. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, a dice game is easily started as a mini game, and in the positive change state, a fortune game is easily started as a mini game. In the normal gaming state, the dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in the positive change state, the fortune game may be started as a mini game. In addition, the appearance frequency of the mini-game may be changed depending on the playing state. For example, in the probable change state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini-game may be higher than that of the normal game state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state. Further, the mini game may be executed only in the probable change state, or the mini game may be executed only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. May occur, or may appear only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probable change state, may be higher in the probable change state than the normal game state, or may appear only in the probable change state. There may be a case, or a case may appear only in the normal game state.

  FIG. 56 (A1) shows a state where the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (A1), the display of the “normal mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state. Have been. 56 (A1) to FIG. 56 (A6), except that the display of the grandma mode and the display of the grandma character BA are in the normal mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. A1) to (A6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (B1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (B1), a “probable change mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the probable change state. ing. In addition, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "right-handed" is displayed, and a hitting suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, a multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the gaming state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game has been started, the "fortune game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started. 56 (B1) to FIG. 56 (B5) show that the gaming state is the princess mode effect mode in a surely changing state, and the reserved display of the special figure 1 is the reserved display of the special figure 2. 55 (B1) to FIG. 55 (B5), except that the number of reserved displays is different, the position of the reserved display and the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 are switched. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (B5), after the display of “3UP decision” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed in the multi-function display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 56 (B6) is performed. In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the pre-reading notice. Is changed to a circular and red display mode as a display mode of the third stage. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and reports that the combination has been lost. Thus, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

  FIG. 57 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 57 (A1) to (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded. FIGS. 57 (B1) to (B6) show that the multi-function display area MF1 is An example is shown in which a hold display area for displaying a hold icon is also used. In FIG. 57, a dice game as a mini game has been described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to the fortune game described above.

  FIG. 57 (A1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (A1), the display of the “normal mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state. Have been. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. A multi-function display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini-game has been started, the "die game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini-game is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, showing a state where the area is enlarged. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, so that the visibility is improved. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, a display indicating a roll of "3" on the dice and a display of "HOLD ON 3UP" are displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Savohani, and the production button is displayed after the mini game is started. It is described that, when the user operates 136 and stops the display of the number "3" on the dice, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by three ranks. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of Sabohani and the number "3" on the dice is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multi-function display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. Note that the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or the step-up after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The display of the advance notice SU1 may be started, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the start of the display of the step-up notice SU1. Further, even when the display of the roll of “3” of the dice and the display of “hold 3UP” are started in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display start of the step-up notice SU1 are the same. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be displayed or the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the number "3" of the dice and the display of "hold 3UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “hold 3UP” at the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. In addition, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “hold at 3UP” are started in the multi-function display area MF1. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the number “3” of the dice and the display of “hold 3UP” at the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the die appearance of “3” and the display of “hold on 3UP” in the function display area MF1 are started. In addition, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded or may not be expanded. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini-game is started in the probable change state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini-game is displayed in the normal gaming state. When the multi-function display area MF1 is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded, or when the mini game is started in the normal game state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is started in the probable change state. In such a case, the multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 does not overlap with the decorative pattern. However, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative pattern, or the expanded multi-function display area MF1. It may overlap with the function display area MF1. Further, the multifunction display area MF1 that has not been expanded may overlap with the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may overlap with the multifunction display area MF1 that has not been expanded.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, along with the button image 136aL displayed in a large size, "press" is displayed over the button image 136aL, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. Is notified that the operation validity period has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. The step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed in an expanded manner, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice when the multi-function display area MF1 is not displayed in an expanded manner. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and the "press" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started. After the display of the button image 136aL and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the start of the display of the step-up notice SU2, the button image 136aL in the multi-function display area MF1 may be displayed. And "press" may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, which affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 overlaps the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Have been. The button reception time meter MT is also displayed in an enlarged manner. Therefore, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The speed of decreasing the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game, The decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (A4), as shown in FIG. 57 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the expanded dice indicates the mission achievement. Is displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of "3", and "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. In the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. It should be noted that the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may be ended. After the completion of the process, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 has been reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third-stage display mode of the pre-reading notice. Has been changed to a circular and red display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the result of the mini-game is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, May be deleted, or the multi-function display area MF1 may return to the default size after the result of the mini game is deleted.

  FIG. 57 (B1) shows a state where the gaming state is a normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (B1), the “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state. Have been. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this effect example, a multi-function display area MF2 is formed over the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, a hold icon is displayed in addition to the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini game effect display, and the like. The hold icon of Toku-zu 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 57 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, a hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. On the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, the mini game is started using the display area of the reserve icon of the special figure 2, and the “die game” is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the mini game is displayed. That the dice game is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display indicating a roll of “3” on the dice and a display of “hold 3UP” are displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Savohani. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the roll of the number "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is raised by three ranks. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Note that the timing at which the display of the roll of the die “3” and the display of “hold at 3UP” are started in the multi-function display area MF2 is the same as the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU1 is started. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be displayed or the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the number "3" of the dice and the display of "hold 3UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF2. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of the die “3” and the display of “hold 3UP” in the multifunction display area MF2 may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Note that the timing at which the display of the button image 136a and “press” in the multi-function display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, or the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed may be the same. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the start of the display of the step-up notice SU2, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2. And the display of “press” may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (B4), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (B4), as shown in FIG. 57 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the dice symbol is the outcome of achieving the mission. The display is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the result of "3", and the display of "3UP fixed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed. In the multi-function display area MF2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (B5), the step-up notice has been completed. It should be noted that the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may be ended. After the completion of the process, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (B6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third-stage display mode of the prefetch notice. Has been changed to a circular and red display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini-game and the timing of confirming the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorating symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini-game is erased, The result of the mini-game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 58 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows a state where the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (a), the "normal mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state. Have been. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default t display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58A, a step-up notice as a main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), a step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58B, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Also in this case, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN2 is formed. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, the mini game has been started, the "die game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed. Then, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (c), the decorative symbol during the variable display is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, the mini-game display area MN2 is erased, and the mini-game effect is produced. A state in which the display is greatly enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Specifically, the display of the number “3” on the dice and the display “3 on hold” are greatly enlarged and displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the Sabohani character, and are produced after the mini game is started. It is described that, when the button 136 is operated and the roll of the number “3” on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is deleted in at least a part of the period in which the mini game is being played. If the mini-game was not started, the step-up notice was supposed to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3; Has been censored. Note that, even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without terminating the notice. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed so as to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be displayed so as to overlap the step-up notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58D, a first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged displayed button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in such a manner as to be performed. The button reception time meter MT is also displayed in an enlarged manner. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is "3" which is the outcome of the mission achievement. Is derived and displayed in such a manner as to indicate the outcome of "." At this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with a "3". In addition to notifying that the information has been displayed, the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that the reward is a mission achievement is displayed. In the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Note that the timing of the derivation display of the mini game result and the timing of the redisplay of the mini game display area MN2 may be the same, or the mini game display area MN2 may be displayed after the derivation of the mini game result. The result may be displayed again, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the size of the decorative pattern has returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position has also returned to the default display position. At the end of the mini-game, the mini-game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to a circular and red display mode as a third-stage display mode for pre-reading notice. Has been changed to the display mode. Note that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the final display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 and the timing of confirming display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be deleted after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini game display area MN2 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the display mode of the hold icon may change after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini-game display area MN2 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 58, the dice game is described as an example of the mini game, but the present invention is also applicable to the fortune game described above.

  In addition, the dice game and the fortune game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the decorative symbol variable display is performed as the mini game described above, but the configuration is such that the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed on a different display device. May be done.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 59 to FIG. 66 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step examples of modifications of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 59 to 66, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure Illustration of the holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. 59 to 66 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a device having a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 59 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (a), a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. This customer waiting demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the special figure change display is not performed, and is an effect display for promoting the player's willingness to play the game. In the lower part of the display area, "display a menu with a push button" is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demonstration display. Is operated, a menu screen is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 59 (c). On the menu screen, items of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini-game, and end are displayed in a column, and below the direction key operation promotion image 137p, "selection" is displayed. In addition, the character display of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. By operating the button 137e or the effect button 136, the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed.

  Here, when the item “member registration” is executed, the screen shifts to a member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. The two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the first registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode, such as recording a game history or customizing an effect. The player reads the two-dimensional code and obtains the URL of the first registration page using a portable terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function, for example. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) is information based on an individual identification number unique to a mobile terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When a password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

Further, when the item of “two-dimensional code issuance” is executed, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will select the two-dimensional code when ending the game in the state where the original mode is set.
The two-dimensional code mentioned here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in a range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells] in 4-cell units. Can be. As a typical example of the two-dimensional code, a QR code (registered trademark) is known. Note that a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used instead of the two-dimensional code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases and cannot be memorized by humans or cannot be written down. Therefore, by notifying with a two-dimensional code, the burden can be reduced.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information indicating the result of the current game, the achievement status of the mission, and the accumulated value of the original mode points. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for shop identification, information peculiar to a game console, operation status, number of errors, and the like may be included in the special figure starting port (230, 232). Information indicating the result of this game, the achievement status of the mission, the accumulated value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the operation server.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when a two-dimensional code is issued, and a warning is given to the player that information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.
When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the barcode reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, “http: //www.~/jp” representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the operation server is displayed with the personal identification information (ID) and the like included in the two-dimensional code. A URL to which an argument indicating history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted from the read two-dimensional code by the barcode reader function, the history information previously stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is The history information included in the argument is updated. In this embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game console as it is, the history information stored in the game console at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is deleted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The history information may be deleted based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued, or if the player does not delete the history information, the game can return to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, when the item of “game history” is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, and the like to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

  When the item of “mini game” is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  Further, when the item of “end” is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended, and a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “member registration”, the cursor CSL is changed to “as shown in FIG. 59 (d). When "2D code issuance" is instructed and the down button 137b is operated once more, the cursor CSL instructs "game history" and the down button 137b is operated once more as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (f), the cursor CSL indicates "mini-game".

  Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f), the mini-game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 59 (g). Specifically, the title "Today's fortune-telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left of the display area, and the direction is displayed on the right side of the display area. The character of "selection" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character of "decision" is displayed below the key operation promotion image 137p together with the button image 136a. The cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction keys of the operation key unit 137. The user is instructed to select any one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) and operate the effect button 136 to open the treasure box designated by the cursor CSL. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure chest BX1 at the upper left. In this mini game, a player selects one of the four treasure boxes and notifies the contents of the selected treasure box. The contents of the treasure chest are the result of fortune-telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakayoshi, Kokichi, evil, etc.) indicating the fortune, and a plurality of types are prepared. Furthermore, in this production example, one-word advice is added together with the result of the fortune telling. Note that the result of the fortune telling and the short advice are not related to the result of the determination. In other words, it does not at least indicate the necessity of determining whether or not to judge. Which result is associated with each treasure box is determined at random. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure chest is selected, the contents change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (h), the cursor CSL points to the treasure box BX2 at the lower left as shown in FIG. 59 (i).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (i), as shown in FIG. 59 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The upper left treasure box BX1, the upper right treasure box BX3, and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. Thus, it is notified that the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is determined as a treasure box to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of the fortune-telling Is displayed, and as a single piece of advice, "moderately ..." is displayed, indicating that the user is alerted not to be too absorbed in the game. That is, in this effect example, “Kokichi” and the grandmother character BA are associated with each other, and by looking at the grandmother character BA, it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling was “Kokichi”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (l), a character display "other result is this" is displayed, and it is foretold that the contents of the treasure chest that has not been opened will be notified. The content of the character display shown in FIG. 59 (l) differs depending on the character that has appeared. For example, when a princess character HM3 described later appears, a character display such as “other results are here” is displayed. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (m), a princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, an image BCH of the longest face appears from the upper right treasure box BX3, and from the lower right treasure box BX4. The appearance of an image PND of a panda face is shown. Note that the princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the bancho face is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and an image PND of a panda face is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character may be changed every time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (k1), a princess character HM3 appears in the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Daikichi" Is displayed, and as a short advice, a message "Presentation of big catch today" is displayed to give a sense of expectation that a large number of balls may be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 59 (k2), the image BCH of the bancho's face appears from the treasure chest, and “Nakayoshi” is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and as a piece of advice, “If you stick, it will be some day Is displayed to give a sense of expectation that there may be something that should be done over time to sit down and play the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (k3), the image PND of the face of the panda appears from the treasure chest, and “fortune” is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and “Goooo” and “danger of indentation” are given as one-word advice. May be displayed to alert the player not to be too absorbed in the game.

  In addition, for example, a result of a mini-game that can appear according to the setting contents of the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. If the setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to become, as shown in FIG. It may be changed to a display that "Premier notice is easy to appear." That is, it may be a description of an effect related to the result of the validity determination, such as a suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and a result irrespective of the result of the validity determination may be displayed. According to this, in some cases, it is possible to make the player think as if he or she is indirectly related to the influence of the determination of success or failure. Even if the appearance rate of the notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 59 (k4) may be displayed. As described above, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as one-word advice, may be changed.

  Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display such as a game description or a model character description may be performed instead of the one-word advice.

  FIG. 60 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 60 (A1) to 60 (A6) show an effect subsequent to FIG. 59 (f), and show another effect example of a mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (A1) displays "Today's fortune-telling-Daikichi- Is displayed, and a mini game in which the mission is to select a treasure chest inside "Daikichi" is started. Note that FIGS. 60 (A1) to 60 (A4) are the same as FIGS. 59 (g) to FIG. 59 (j) except that the titles are displayed differently, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60 (A5) shows a state where the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (A5), the treasure chest at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest and as a result of the fortune telling. "Daichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini-game has been achieved by the display of "Daichi", the display of "mission accomplished" to that effect is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (A6), instead of the display of “mission accomplished”, a display of “a feeling of good performance today” is displayed as one-word advice, and the player is asked to obtain a winning ball. I try to give them a sense of expectation. This one-word advice can be said to be a display that is not related to the result of the success / failure determination.

  FIGS. 60 (B1) to 60 (B6) also show the effect following FIG. 59 (f), in which the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 60 (B1) has the same display as FIG. 60 (A1).

  Then, when the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure chest BX3 as shown in FIG. 60 (B3).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (B3), as shown in FIG. 60 (B4), the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL on the decorative symbol display device 208. , The upper left treasure chest BX1, the lower left treasure chest BX2, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right part. Thereby, it is notified that the treasure box BX3 in the upper right is determined as the treasure box to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. Is displayed. Since "Daikichi" was not displayed, the mission of the mini game was not achieved, and "To be achieved ..." is displayed to that effect.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", the display of "moderate ..." An alert is shown to prevent over-indentation.

  FIG. 61 is a view showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 61B, a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 61C. On the menu screen shown in FIG. 61 (c), items of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed in a column, and below the item, "selection" is displayed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. Is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the character is displayed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. By moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137, the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed.

  Here, when the item of “customization” is executed, customization of various settings can be performed. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

  Further, when the item of “Personal data clear” is executed, information indicating the result of the current game, the achievement status of the mission, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent data from being accidentally cleared.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates "member registration", the cursor CSL is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (d). Indicates “customize”. Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL indicates "customize", the screen shifts to a customize menu screen as shown in FIG. 61 (e).

  On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, tutorial display on / off setting are displayed in a column, and the direction is displayed below. The character display of "selection" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "decision" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. The upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting specified by the cursor CSL can be changed.

  Here, the “auto button mode” is an effect mode in which the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the button operation timing is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous hitting operation effect that requires a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, control is performed such that the button operation is automatically performed at appropriate timings (for example, every 200 ms). In this example, when the "auto button mode" is set to ON, the buttons are set to full auto, in which various buttons are automatically operated without operating the buttons. The button may be set to a long-press auto mode in which a button is automatically operated by a long press. Here, the long press auto means that in an effect (including a mini game) that requires a plurality of operations of the operation means, when a long press operation is performed by the operation means, a plurality of operations are continuously performed. A pseudo operation that has been performed. In this case, when the operating means is operated for a long press, it is treated as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hitting operation effect is executed, control is performed such that the continuous hitting operation is performed by holding down the effect button 136 for a long time. In addition, the full auto is an operation in which the operation of the operation unit is performed in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation unit, even when the operation unit is not operated.

  In the “eco mode”, for example, when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the driving of one or a plurality of driving devices is limited, such as turning off various lamps 418 in order to reduce power consumption. Alternatively, the mode is a stop mode. In this embodiment, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied after the eco mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, and the like. The device whose drive is to be restricted or stopped can be set as appropriate.

  Also, the “Premier notice appearance rate” indicates the appearance rate of the notice in which it is guaranteed that the big hit symbol will be finally displayed by appearance, and if set to “Normal”, the first A normal announcement table in which a premiere notice appears with a probability is used, and a lottery of the appearance of a premiere notice is performed, and if set to `` high '', a premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability Is controlled so that the lottery of the appearance of the premiere notice is performed using the high probability table.

  When “Tutorial” is set to off, control is performed so that the above-described tutorial display is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates the “auto button mode”, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), “off” Is set to "ON".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), if the OK button 137e is operated once while the setting of the "auto button mode" is "on", the setting of the "auto button mode" is set to "on". Is determined. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen shifts to a menu screen as shown in FIG. When the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the setting of the "auto button mode" is set to "on", the result of the setting of the "auto button mode" is not reflected. The screen may shift to the menu screen, or the screen may shift to the menu screen after reflecting (fixing) the result of the setting of the “auto button mode”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “customize”, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the cursor CSL is changed to “ Mini game ".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL indicates “mini game”, the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 61 (j). You. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the chief of the game is displayed, and the name of the mini-game "Bancho Awakening Game" is displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this mini-game, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 and the mission is achieved on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the bancho's clothes are broken. Display a message to inform you of the achievement of the mission.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (k), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the number-long character, and the character display of "START" is displayed above it. , A state in which the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this production example, as described above, although the setting of the “auto button mode” is set to “on” and set to full auto, in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective, and the production button 136 is configured not to be performed automatically. In addition, when the setting of the “auto button mode” is set to “ON” and the long press auto is set, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the long press auto setting is not effective, and Only one manual operation is valid, and thereafter the automatic operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. In this effect example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini-game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. For example, as in this effect example, it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the changing speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. Further, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display May be the same as the change speed of the display mode. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display is smaller than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode). (For example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be the same.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (l) to FIG. 61 (n), when the operation effective period elapses without any pressing operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the clothes of the character of the bancho was not achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (o), the display of “bancho awakening game” and “end” is performed, and it is notified that the mission has ended.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

  In this effect example, the configuration may be such that the player can select the execution of the mini-game, for example, whether or not the mini-game can be executed is set on a customized menu screen which is shifted from the menu screen. Or a type of a mini-game that can be executed may be selected.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini-game. For example, if the effect is such that an effect with a very low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini-game Can be improved in some cases.

  FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 are views showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  FIGS. 62 (A1) to 62 (A6) show an effect subsequent to FIG. 61 (i), and show a state where the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly operating the effect button 136. FIGS. 62 (A1) to 62 (A2) are the same as FIGS. 61 (j) to 62 (k), and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a number of star effect images corresponding to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. As shown in FIG. 62 (A3) to FIG. 62 (A5), as the number of operations increases, the number of displayed star effect images also increases. As shown in FIG. 62 (A5), an effect image of a star having a large size is displayed. After that, the effect button 136 is further hit repeatedly, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today's in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

  FIGS. 62 (B1) to 62 (B6) show an example of the effect following FIG. 61 (i), in which the long press auto is enabled in the mini game. This shows that the mission has been achieved as a result of a pseudo repeated hit operation. FIGS. 62 (B1) to 62 (B2) are the same as FIGS. 61 (j) to FIG. 61 (k), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (B2), the effect button 136 is long-pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the operation of pressing the effect button 136. However, the pseudo repeated tapping operation has not been started yet. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, one press operation is desired. To prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of a pseudo continuous hit, the effect button 136 is long pressed. When a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the start of the operation, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, as compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (A3), the number of times the effect button 136 is operated is small, and the effect image of the star is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the manner of changing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ between the case where the player performs a normal continuous hitting operation and the case where the pseudo continuous hitting operation performed by the long press auto is performed. .

  When a pseudo continuous hit operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the long press of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B4) to 62 (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of displayed effect images of stars increases, and when the number of operations for achieving the mission is approached, as shown in FIG. 62 (B5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, a pseudo repeated tapping operation using the effect button 136 is further performed, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character's clothes are torn, and the display of "Awakening Bancho" and "It's in great shape today" is displayed to inform that the mission has been achieved.

  FIGS. 63 (C1) to (C7) are effects subsequent to FIG. 61 (i), and show an example in which the long press auto is invalidated in the mini game. It is shown that no operation has been performed and as a result, the mission has not been achieved. FIGS. 62 (B1) to 62 (B2) are the same as FIGS. 61 (j) to FIG. 61 (k), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (C2), the effect button 136 is long-pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the operation of pressing the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is invalid, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (C4), the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, so that not only the effect image of the star does not increase but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) since the effect button 136 was last operated. ) Elapses, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (C6), when the operation reception period elapses, as shown in FIG. 63 (C7), the display mode of the longest character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the longest character is performed. Indicates that it was not achieved. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (C7), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed, and it is notified that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 64 is a view showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. FIG. 64 shows that an effect (including a mini game) requiring one operation or a plurality of operations of one button enables a fully automatic (or long press auto) function, but the operation key unit 137. The effect (including the mini-game) that requires selection by using is described with respect to an example in which the full auto (or long press auto) function is invalidated.

  FIG. 64 (A1) to FIG. 64 (A6) show an example of the effect following FIG. 61 (i) in which full auto is enabled in the mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. This shows that the mission has been achieved as a result of a pseudo repeated operation of the effect button 136. Note that FIGS. 64A1 to 64A2 are the same as FIGS. 61J to 61K, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (A2), full auto functions, and a pseudo repeated hit operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a number of star effect images corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. 64 (A3) to FIG. 64 (A5), the number of displayed effect images of the star increases as the number of operations performed by the pseudo operation increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches, As shown in FIG. 64 (A5), an effect image of a star having a large size is displayed. Thereafter, the simulated operation of the effect button 136 is further continued, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed, the clothes worn by the bancho character are torn, and the display of "wakening bancho" and "today is in excellent condition" is performed to inform that the mission has been achieved.

  FIG. 64 (B1) shows an effect subsequent to FIG. 59 (f) and shows an example of another mini game effect. That is, when the mini-game is started, the title "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" is displayed at the top of the display area on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A mini game is started in which the mission is to select a treasure chest. In this mini-game, the treasure chest to be opened is determined by operating the buttons of the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL and operating the effect button 136, and the mini-game is operated by operating a plurality of buttons. Is performed, the full-auto function is disabled. For this reason, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless one of the buttons is operated.

  On the other hand, in such a mini-game, full auto may be made to function. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (B1 ′), when the mini-game starts, the full auto functions immediately and the effect button 136 is activated. Is operated in a pseudo manner, and the upper left treasure chest is automatically selected as shown in FIG. 64 (B2 ′). That is, in such a mini game in which the treasure chest is selected by each button of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure chest to be opened by the staging button 136 is operated, when the full auto is operated, the treasure chest indicated by the cursor CSL first is displayed. Is determined as a treasure chest to be opened without permission, and the operation intention of the player may not be reflected at all.

  In the present embodiment, the mini-game for deriving a result irrespective of the result of the success / failure determination is performed in the standby state. However, for example, in an effect started when a predetermined time is reached by RTC (Real Time Clock) (standby state) And at least one of the symbol variation display) may be executed in a mini-game executed, or may be executed at any time irrespective of the game state for the purpose of killing the time of the player. .

  FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are views showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the state in which the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown. In the effect examples shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, a state in which the mini game is started during execution of the big hit game is shown. The mini-game may be started during the execution of the big hit game, or may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (a), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, and a big hit is shown. In addition, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth Each of the hold icons h24 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, in this effect example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not displayed, but these may be displayed. .

  FIG. 65 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and shifted to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit start” to notify that the big hit game has been started, and displays in the upper right corner of the display area that the first round of the big hit game has occurred. "1R" and "0GET" indicating the current number of acquired prize balls in the current big hit are also displayed. In addition, you may make it display the total number of acquired prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the series. In the number of acquired prize balls, the number of prize balls in the variable prize opening 234 in one round reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) and the prize is won (over prize) just before the variable prize opening 234 is closed. The number of prize balls based on game balls may or may not be included. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (b), a child panda character may appear, perform a comical effect, and entertain the player in some cases. In the case where the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing right-handed may be performed.

  FIG. 65C shows a state where the fifth round of the big hit game is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “5R” indicating the fifth round of the jackpot game and a display of “735 GET” indicating the number of acquired award balls are performed at the upper right of the display area. ing. The number of acquired prize balls is based on the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (c), a message "The mini game will start in the next round" is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (the sixth round). I foretell that.

  FIG. 65D shows a state where the sixth round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “6R” indicating the sixth round of the big hit game and “750 GET” indicating the number of acquired award balls in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of acquired prize balls is based on the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (d), a display "I'll start the mini game" is displayed, and it is foretold that the mini game will start.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character indicating the number of the chief appears, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice, and a display indicating “if the character comes out, a character action UP” is performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that if the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is forewarned that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 will operate is high. The acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. I have. Note that if the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is assured that the holding extended residence will occur. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game can be regarded as an example of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the dice symbol starts to fluctuate, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. Is displayed, and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. Note that the acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. I have.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (g), as shown in FIG. 65 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice with the symbol of "3" is displayed. The display is stopped in the mode shown in the figure, indicating that the achievement of the mission has not been achieved. The number of acquired prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 65 (h). The number of acquired prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (i), the display indicating the outcome of “3” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is not achieved. The display of "sorry" to inform is performed. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and no notification is made as to whether or not the holding extended villa is performed. In addition, in this effect example, if the result of the pre-reading is that the reservation is extended, the mission is always achieved in the mini game, and the effect movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate. Moreover, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may always operate, or may not operate. The number of acquired prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display based on is performed.

  After that, when the big hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 65 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit end” to notify the player that the big hit game has ended. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “16R” indicating the 16th round and a display of “2400GET” indicating that the number of acquired award balls is 2400 are displayed. I have.

  In the mini-game of this production example, the production is performed by operating the production button 136 once. For example, when the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. 61 is started and a mission is achieved, a privilege is given. (For example, a notice of the operation of the effect movable body 224) may be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a state where a mission is achieved in a mini-game performed during execution of the big hit game will be described. FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (d) are the same as FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (e) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character indicating the number of the chief appears, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice, and a display indicating “if the character comes out, a character action UP” is performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that if the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is forewarned that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 will operate is high. Here, the character of the chief is displayed in a form in which the clothes are broken, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the mission will be achieved. The acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. I have.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the dice symbol starts to fluctuate, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. Is displayed, and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. Note that, in this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which the button image 136a rotates and vibrates, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be completed. Further, the acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. I have.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (g), as shown in FIG. 66 (h), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is "1". The stop display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. The acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 66 (h). The number of acquired prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (i) enlarges the display indicating the outcome of “1” derived as a result of the mini game and informs that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. Is displayed. In addition, "attention to the arm" is displayed below it, and a notice is given that there is a possibility that the effect movable body 224 may operate. Note that the number of acquired prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (i) is “840 GET”, and that 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display based on is performed.

  FIG. 66 (j) shows a state where the seventh round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “7R” indicating the seventh round of the jackpot game and “900 GET” indicating the number of acquired award balls in the upper right of the display area. The display based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the start of the big hit is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image of a number of stars, and displays such that the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. I have. Note that the acquired prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 61 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. I have.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (l), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “holding extended-village confirmation” and informs that the symbol variation display that will be a big hit is suspended. In other words, the pre-reading notice is given by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of “holding-condominium-confirmation” in FIG.

  Note that, in this effect example, it may be notified that the reservation of the extended villa has been confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini-games described above can be executed in combination.

  In the embodiments described above, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

  In addition, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be displayed using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). Other production means (for example, movable means such as production movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, and game frame lamp 542, etc. Other devices).

  Further, the above-described mini game may be performed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Further, when the mini game is started as in the above-described mini game, it is preferable that the result is always informed, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the case of the symbol variation display in which the number of suspensions of the variation display of the special figure is four, the variation time may be generally short, and in such a case, it appears that the mini game has started, and the result is displayed. It is also possible to stop without reporting. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the performance of the game lively.

  In addition, the above-mentioned mini game may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden hit (for example, a combination of decorative patterns of a big hit is displayed without going through a reach effect) is displayed. Mini-game when an error such as a fluctuation display pattern that occurs, an RTC effect starts, an effect display being executed is switched to a display such as a wipe, or a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs. May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini-game and the mini-game is interrupted, the big hit suddenly occurs during the period of looking forward to the result of the mini-game, giving the player unexpectedness and joy. You may be able to give. In the case where the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, there is a case where the link on the effect with another game console by the RTC effect can be enjoyed.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the position and size of the display area where the mini-game is executed change depending on the gaming state, the effect mode, and the stage.

  Further, as the operation mode required in the above-described mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, a timing operation, or the like can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  When the mini game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini game may be started before reaching the reach. Since the effect of the symbol variation display tends to be noticed when the user reaches the reach, the effect of the effect before the reach may be enhanced by starting the mini-game before the reach.

  In addition, although the reward for accomplishing the mission in the mini-game is to notify that a notice is given, the reward for achieving the mission in the mini-game may be a notice or a pre-read notice. For example, the change notice or the pre-reading notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol change display, and the pre-reading notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the big hit game.

In the above description,
"Operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative design change display [for example, the button announcement effect shown in FIGS. 38 (g) to (i)].
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game [for example, a button announcement effect shown in FIGS. 37 (m) to 38 (f) or the like],
The first effect display includes a first operation prompting display [for example, display of the vibration and rotating button image 136a and “Push” shown in FIGS. 38 (g) to (h)). It is a production display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation prompting display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 37 (r) to FIG.
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display includes a big hit notice (hereinafter, “first notice [for example, a strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 38 (i) or a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 38 (i ′)]. Display, etc.]) is performed.
The second effect display includes a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as a “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. Is an effect indication that may be derived.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in a mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where attention can be paid to the second notice which affects the first notice.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the operating means can be positively operated in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect displays may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative design variable display, or may be related to other than the decorative design variable display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative design variable display, or may not be related to the decorative design variable display.

  The first effect display may include only the first operation prompting display, or may include a display other than the first operation prompting display. Further, the first effect display may always include the first operation prompting display, or may not include the first operation prompting display in some cases.

  Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation prompting display, or may include a display other than the second operation prompting display. In addition, the second effect display may include the second operation prompting display, or may not include the second operation prompting display.

  Further, the first effect display may be such that only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. In the first effect display, the first notice may be always executed, or the first notice may not be executed in some cases.

  In addition, the second effect display may be such that only a notice related to the first notice may be derived, or may be derived other than a notice related to the first notice. There may be some. In the second effect display, a notice related to the first notice may be derived without fail, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state where both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter,“ a first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (c) to FIG. , A state in which both the button announcement effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.]].)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be informed that the first notice and the second notice are related.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first state is set, a case where the state is other than the first state, a case where the first state is indispensable, and a case where the first state is set. It may not always be the case.

In addition, it is configured such that, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIGS. 39 (g) to (l), when the staging button 136 is repeatedly operated in a state where both the button announcement effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived. ],
When the operation of the operation means is performed after the second notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. If the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in ()), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result of the mini game as shown in FIG. etc],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where attention can be paid to the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, there is a case where the operation means can be positively operated for the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operating means is operated in the state described above, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be always executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, only when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed also in cases other than the case where the operation means is operated in.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice according to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the notice is started, a notice other than the first notice according to the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice may be always executed, or the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, the first notice according to the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be performed. The configuration may be such that only the first notice in accordance with the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated after the start of the operation.

Further, it is configured that, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed,
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operating means is operated in the state of, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. If the operation of the operating means is performed in the state of the above, it may be configured to execute a notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice, or in the first state When the operation means is operated, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice among the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be always executed, or the first notice may be executed. In such a case, when the operation means is operated in the state of, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, only when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated in the state.

  Also, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, Notices other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. In addition, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may always change, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice is executed. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

  In addition, only after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

Also, "in the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, attention may be paid to the effect display on the mini-game side, which is the advance notice of the first advance notice, and the expectation for the first advance notice may be increased.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the mini-game side can be prioritized in chronological order.

  Further, according to this gaming table, a notice that affects a notice that may occur in the future is preferentially displayed, so that even if the operation means overlaps, it may be easy to understand.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, or in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. The display may be overlapped. Also, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap the second effect display, or in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap the second effect display. There may be cases.

  Also, only in the first state, the first effect display may be overlapped with the second effect display, and even in a state other than the first state, the first effect display is the second effect display. May overlap.

Further, when the operation means is operated during a second valid period [for example, an operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 41 (e) to (g) and the like], The second notice is started,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second validity period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 41 (e) to 41 (g) and the like],
The second validity period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of the second validity period [for example, as shown in FIGS. The display of the time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation reception time, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the second validity period, it is possible to cause the player to quickly derive the result of the mini game, so that the first notice may be noticed in some cases. .

  Here, when the operating means is operated during the second validity period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated during the second validity period, A notice other than the second notice may be started. Further, when the operating means is operated during the second validity period, the second notice may be started without fail, or when the operating means is operated during the second validity period, the second notice may be issued. A configuration in which the second notice may not be started may be adopted.

  Also, the second notice may be started only when the operating means is operated during the second validity period, or when the operating means is not operated during the second validity period. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started.

  The second effect display may include only the second validity period display, or may include a display other than the second validity period display. The second effect display may include the second validity period display, or may not include the second validity period display.

Also, "the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b or the like illustrated in FIG. 39 (o)],
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [eg, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 38 (i) and the like]
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the case where the first notice is executed in the second mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first mode. Is composed of
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is easier to be executed in the second mode than when the second effect display is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the first notice can be expected by the start of the mini game.

  Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in an aspect other than the plurality of modes. The first notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  Further, the first notice may be executable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be executable in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. Is also good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

  Further, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice is executed in the second mode. In such a case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is always definitely displayed.

  Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may be configured not to be executed in the second mode, or when the second effect display is started, the second mode may be configured. May be configured to always execute the first notice.

Also, "the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, a display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 43 (l) or the like],
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect [for example, a display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 42 (l) or the like],
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, a big hit symbol is finally displayed and configured,
When the first notice is executed in the second mode (for example, the display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 42 (n)), the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. Is configured to be
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first mode is the second mode in the first notice, so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed, so that the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice is further improved. May be able to.

  Here, the second notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in an aspect other than the plurality of modes. The second notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  Further, the second notice may be executable only in the third and fourth aspects, or may be executable in aspects other than the third and fourth aspects. Is also good. The second notice may be always executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

Also, "the first notice is a pre-read notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol change display being held,
The first notice is a notice performed by changing a display mode of the hold icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
[A gaming table equipped with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game [for example, a dice game shown in FIGS. 51 (g) to (l)].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a fortune game shown in FIGS. 51 (g ′) to (l ′)),
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG.
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having characteristics in mini games.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display area of the mini-game is fixed to “a certain display area”, so that the player may be able to easily understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the display means may be configured to always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  The display means may be constituted by one display means or may be constituted by two or more display means. In the case of two or more display means, the decorative pattern change display may be performed only on some display means, or the decorative pattern change display may be performed on all display means. May be used.

  Further, only a plurality of types of mini-games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than the plurality of types of mini-games may be configured to be executable. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of mini-games are always executed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed.

  Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or a mini game other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. Further, the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be always executed, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed in some cases. .

  Further, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. In addition, the first mini-game may be one that is always displayed using a certain display area, or one that is displayed without using a certain display area.

  Further, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the second mini-game may be one that is always displayed using a certain display area, or one that is displayed without using a certain display area.

In addition, it is provided with “notification means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in a blue display mode of a hold icon shown in FIG. 51 (l) or (l ′)],
The first mini game is referred to as a result indicating that the first notice is to be given (hereinafter, “first result [for example, display of“ 1 UP fixed ”shown in FIG. 51 (k))”. ) Is a mini game that can derive
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of “1 UP determined” shown in FIG. 51 (k ′)).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the relationship such as a notice can be easily understood while the variation of the mini game is enjoyed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing something other than the plurality of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute the plurality of notices.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. In addition, the notice means may always execute the first notice, or may not execute the first notice.

  Further, the first mini game may be such that only the first result can be derived, or a result other than the first result may be derived. In the first mini game, the first result may always be derived, or the first result may not be derived.

  In the second mini game, only the first result may be derived, or a result other than the first result may be derived. In the second mini game, the first result may always be derived, or the first result may not be derived.

In addition, one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in a red display mode of a hold icon shown in FIG. 52 (l) or FIG. 52 (l ′)]. ,
The case where the second notice is performed than the case where the first notice is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
The first mini game is referred to as a result suggesting that the second notice is performed (hereinafter, “second result [for example, display of“ 3UP fixed ”shown in FIG. 52 (k))”. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini game is a mini game from which the second result [for example, the display of “3UP determined” shown in FIG. 52 (k ′) or the like] can also be derived.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that a result indicating that the second notice is performed by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. In addition, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

  Further, the first mini game may be such that only the second result can be derived, or a result other than the second result may be derived. In the first mini game, the second result may always be derived, or the second result may not be derived.

  In the second mini game, only the second result may be derived, or a result other than the second result may be derived. In the second mini game, the second result may always be derived, or the second result may not be derived.

Also, the “first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of the longest face shown in FIG. 51 (g)] may be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, a face image BCH of the longest face shown in FIG. 51 (g ′) or the like] may be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the same notice may be given even if the type of the mini game is different, so that the player may be given various expectations.

  Here, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or one in which characters other than the first character may be displayed. . Further, in the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

  In the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or a character other than the first character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

Also, the “first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of the longest face shown in FIG. 51 (g)] may be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, a face image BCH of the longest face shown in FIG. 51 (g ′) or the like] may be displayed,
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, the character SBH of Savohani shown in FIG. 55 (A1)] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 55 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where expectations for the second result can be given depending on the type of characters appearing in each mini game.

  Here, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or one in which characters other than the first character may be displayed. . Further, in the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

  In the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or a character other than the first character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or a character other than the second character may be displayed. In the first mini-game, the second character may be always displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

  In the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or a character other than the third character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the third character may be always displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

  Note that the third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  Further, in the first mini game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, or when the second character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. May be necessarily derived.

  Further, in the second mini game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, or when the third character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. May be necessarily derived.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the grandfather mode shown in FIGS. 53 (A1) to 53 (A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIGS. 53 (B1) to 53 (B6)].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative design variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. Etc. are displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative design variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. Etc. are displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini-game [for example, fortune game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the effect performed in the main and the mini game can be associated with each other.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of types of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative design variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative design variable display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative design change display, or may be displayed in some cases during the execution of the decorative design change display.

  Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative design change display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative design change display. There may be. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative design change display, or may be not displayed during the execution of the decorative design change display.

  The first mini-game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be always executed during the display of the first effect display.

  The second mini-game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be always executed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first game state and the second game state have different probabilities of executing the plurality of types of mini-games,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the gaming state, so that the sense of expectation of the mini-game being executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to states other than the plurality of gaming states. In addition, the game state may be configured to always transition to a plurality of game states, or the game state may not always transition to a plurality of game states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not be shifted to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Further, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be higher in the first game state, or may be higher in the second game state. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

  In addition, while the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state is the first game state, the special figure high-probability ordinary figure low-probability state (including the latent probability change, the same applies hereinafter), the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state At least one of the state and the special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second game state, whereas the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state. The special figure high probability state may be the second game state, or the special figure low probability general figure high probability state may be the first game state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second game state. The figure high probability state may be the second game state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the low probability state of the general figure may be the first game state, and the high probability state of the general figure may be the second game state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the ordinary figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first game state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second game state.

  Further, a configuration may be such that a plurality of types of mini-games are not executed in the first game state, or a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed in the second game state.

Also, "the probability of executing the plurality of types of notices differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

Also, "the probability of executing the first mini game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

Also, "the probability of executing the second mini game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

Also, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

Also, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. (A1) to (A6), the dice game is more easily executed in the normal game state than in the probable change state, etc.],
The second mini-game [for example, fortune game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [for example, FIG. As shown in (B1) to (B6) in FIG. 6, the fortune game is more easily executed in the probable change state than in the normal game state, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the gaming state may be associated with the type of the mini game.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to states other than the plurality of gaming states. In addition, the game state may be configured to always transition to a plurality of game states, or the game state may not always transition to a plurality of game states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not be shifted to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  In addition, while the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state is the first game state, the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second game state, or the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state, whereas the special figure high probability state general figure height The probability state may be the second game state, or the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability general figure high probability state is the second game state. It may be in a state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the low probability state of the general figure may be the first game state, and the high probability state of the general figure may be the second game state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the ordinary figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first game state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second game state.

  Also, the first mini game may not be executed when in the second gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

  Also, the second mini-game may not be executed when in the first gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state) etc.]] and the second gaming state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high-probability state)] And the probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games is different.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the gaming state, so that the sense of expectation of the mini-game being executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. May have a high probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games.

In addition, "the first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a general low probability state or the like],
The second gaming state is an electric support state [for example, a normal figure high probability state or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, when a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 51A or the like] does not display any of the plurality of types of mini-games, a non-mini-game effect is produced in the certain display area. A display [for example, a tutorial display that "mini game starts at various timings" shown in FIG. 51 (c), a tutorial display "Yoshimune is the 8th general" shown in FIG. 51 (f)] is displayed. May be
The non-mini-game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini-games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed is deleted [see, for example, FIGS. 51 (f) to 51 (g)]. As shown, if the mini game is started while “Yoshimune is the eighth general” is displayed, the “Yoshimune is the eighth general” is erased, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a non-mini-game effect display can be performed using a certain display area from a normal time, so that a player may be easily noticed.

  Here, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of a plurality of types of mini-games are displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini-game effects may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area when none of the mini-games is displayed. In addition, when none of a plurality of types of mini-games are displayed in a certain display region, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a certain display region, or any of a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display region. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a display area where the display is not displayed.

  A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of a plurality of types of mini-games are displayed in a certain display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area other than when none of the games is displayed.

  Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area When one of them is started to be displayed, the display other than the displayed non-mini-game effect display may be deleted. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be always deleted, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area When one of them is started to be displayed, the displayed non-mini-game effect display may not be deleted.

  Further, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted only when one of a plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area may be deleted. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may also be deleted in cases other than when one of the displays is started.

  Here, as the display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a display of an original mode parameter (LV display, etc.), a display of a remaining time until the start of RTC, or the like is adopted. It is possible.

Also, "the certain display area is defined by a frame [for example, an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 37 (m), an outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 41 (a), etc.]" Is the area that is partitioned,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be partitioned by only a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than a frame.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 51A, the multi-function display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Formed in the right half of the lower end part],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area that is extended in connection with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 Etc. are expanded in relation to
The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the second mini game,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain display area is expanded and displayed so that the player can pay attention to the mini game.

  Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini game. Good. In addition, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

  In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in connection with the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in connection with something other than the start of the second mini game. . In addition, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini game.

  In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, may not be expanded in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may be configured to The expansion may be performed only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

Also, “the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the mini-game is executed on the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, so that the mini-game may be more noticeable.

  Here, the certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

Also, a display means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second display means [e.g., the second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.") different from the display device [e.g., the first decorative symbol display device 208L]. Prepared,
The certain display area is an area formed in a display area of the second display unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In the above description,
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, the decorative design display device 208 etc.]
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of displaying a mini-game display,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 41 (i)].
The case where the second notice is performed than the case where the first notice is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
The mini-game is a game from which a plurality of results can be derived,
One of the plurality of results is a first result [for example, a display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 41 (h ′) or the like],
One of the plurality of results is a second result [for example, a display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 41 (h)).
The second notice is easier to be performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notice means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic of the notice means can be provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having characteristics in mini games.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game in order to derive the second result.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing something other than the plurality of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute the plurality of notices.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini-game, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the display of the mini-game. Further, the display means may always display the mini-game, or may not display the mini-game.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. . In addition, the advance notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  When the first notice is given, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. In the case where the second notice is given, the big hit symbol is always finally displayed. It may be constituted so that it may be.

In addition, it is preferable that "the result of the mini-game is derived before the result of the mini-game is derived and the second result is at least suggested that the second notice is easily performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the mini-game is started, the display of “Daiyoshi's strong cut-in has occurred” is displayed in the mini-game display area MN1] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where attention can be paid to the trend of the mini game toward the occurrence of an advantageous notice.

  In addition, by incorporating a so-called mission effect into the mini-game, there are cases where the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment can be increased.

  Here, before the result of the mini-game is derived, it is configured to at least suggest that the derivation result of the mini-game becomes the second result, so that only the second notice is likely to be performed. Also, before the result of the mini-game is derived, at least it is suggested that the derived result of the mini-game becomes the second result, so that a notice other than the second notice is likely to be made. It may be configured. In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured such that the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result, thereby at least indicating that the second notice is necessarily performed. And, before the result of the mini-game is derived, the derivation result of the mini-game may be configured to be a second result, which at least indicates that the second notice is not performed. You may.

  In addition, before the result of the mini-game is derived, it may be configured to notify in advance that the second notification is likely to be performed by the derived result of the mini-game being the second result. .

  In addition, the mode of the suggestion is, for example, a mode in which at least the effect of the mission achievement is suggested, such as "If succeeded in ...", "Get out of ...", or "If ... is stopped". Then, any of the embodiments can be applied.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the effects of the missions shown in FIGS. 42 (c) to (n)).
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol change display [for example, the mission effects illustrated in FIGS. 42 (c) to (n) are decorative symbols. Etc. during the fluctuation display of
The first effect display is an effect display from which a plurality of effect results can be derived,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [for example, a display such as “mission failure” shown in FIG. 43 (n)).
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, a display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 42 (n) or the like]
Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, at least it is suggested that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result. [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as "put out the cut-in" and "get big hit" are displayed],
In the mini-game, the second effect result [for example, in the first effect display, compared to the case where the second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 41 (h)] is derived, When the “display of“ mission accomplished ”shown in FIG. 42 (n) or the like] is derived, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, a so-called mission effect other than the mini-game is adopted to increase the number of scenes where the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where variations in mission effects can be increased by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the difference between the mission of the main effect and the mission of the mini game may be clarified in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying something other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display. In addition, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative design variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative design variable display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative design change display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative design change display.

  Further, the first effect display may be such that only a plurality of effect results can be derived, or a result other than the plurality of effect results may be derived. Further, the first effect display may be one that always derives a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

  Also, the first effect display may be such that only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, or the effect result other than the first effect result and the second effect result may be derived. It may be possible. Also, the first effect display may be one that always derives the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. Is also good.

  In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to be notified in advance that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result. You may.

  In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini-game, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the big hit symbol is always definitely displayed. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a fixed manner, or the second effect result may be derived in the first effect display. In such a case, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, it is configured that, when the second effect result is derived, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the division of mission effects can be clarified.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, the big hit symbol may be configured to be finally confirmed and displayed, or even in a case other than the case where the second effect result is derived. The big hit symbol may be configured to be finally displayed.

In addition, “a state where both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (g) to FIG. Such as a state in which both the effect and the mini game are displayed]].)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to the gaming table, the player may be informed that the result of the mini game is related to the result of the first effect display.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first state is set, a case where the state is other than the first state, a case where the first state is indispensable, and a case where the first state is set. It may not always be the case.

Also, "the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, it is provided with an operation means [for example, an effect button 136 and an operation key unit 137 etc.] provided at a position operable by the player,
When the operating means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 42 (g) to FIG. 42 (l) and FIG. 43 (g). As shown in FIG. 1 (l), if the staging button 136 is repeatedly operated in the mini game, “Daikichi” or “Kokichi” is derived, etc.],
If the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
When the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [eg, FIG. Weak cut-in image CI1b etc. shown in FIG.
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is easier to be performed than the first notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. .

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the result of the mini-game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini-game, or the mini-game may be derived in a case other than the operation of the operation means in the mini-game. May be configured to be derived. Further, the configuration may be such that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the result of the mini game is not derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or when the operation means is not operated in the mini game other than when the operation means is not operated. The game result may not be derived. Further, the configuration may be such that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is not obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

  In addition, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be more easily performed than the second notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game may not be derived. In such a case, the first notice may not be performed more easily than the second notice.

  In addition, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be performed.If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always performed. It may be constituted so that it may be performed.

  In addition, only when the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice, or other than when the result of the mini-game is derived. In such a case, the second notice may be more easily performed than the first notice. Further, when the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini-game is derived, You may be comprised so that a 2nd notice may not be performed more easily than a 1st notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be performed, or when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be performed without fail. May be configured.

In addition, even if the second notice is scheduled to be performed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [For example, in the case where the result of the mini game is not derived even though it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. .

  Also, according to this gaming table, the advance notice does not affect the decision of success or failure, so even if a notice different from the schedule occurs, the result of the decision of success or failure is not affected, and the notice that is forcibly scheduled No need to do. Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to participate in a mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, The first notice may also be provided in cases other than when the result of the game is not derived. In addition, even in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be provided without fail. If the result is not derived, the first notice may not be performed.

In addition, a “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode or the like],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a green display mode or the like],
The first notice is a notice performed by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is performed by displaying a hold icon in a blue display mode, etc.],
The second notice is a notice performed by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a pre-read notice is performed by displaying a hold icon in a green display mode, etc.],
In the state where the first hold icon is displayed, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol change display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon changes to the second holding icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, a conventional effect in which a button holding icon is displayed and an effect in which the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation unit is monotonous, but according to this game console, the display mode of the holding icon is changed. Later, since the status may further change, the expectation in the change display of the hold icon may be further enhanced.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. May be something. In addition, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  Further, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made other than by displaying the first hold icon. You may. In addition, the first notice may be always performed by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be performed by displaying the first hold icon. .

  Further, the second notice may be made only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be made other than by displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be always performed by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be performed by displaying the second hold icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started only during execution of a certain symbol change display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon may be displayed. In such a state, it may be configured such that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol change display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol change display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol change display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon may be displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol change display.

  Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon may be configured not to change to a holding icon other than the second holding icon. Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to always change to the second hold icon, and in the first case, If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon may be changed to the second holding icon.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, Even in cases other than when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon may be configured not to change to the second holding icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon may be configured not to change to the second holding icon, or other than the first case. Also in this case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon may not be changed to the second holding icon.

  Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case In the above, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be changed to a holding icon other than the second holding icon. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be configured to always change to the second holding icon, or in the first case, In the above, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may not be changed to the second holding icon.

  In the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be configured to change to the second holding icon, or in the first case In the miniature game, the first holding icon may be changed to the second holding icon even in a case other than when the second result is derived in the mini game. In addition, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be configured to change to the second holding icon, or in the first case In other cases, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be changed to the second holding icon.

In addition, a “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode or the like],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a green display mode or the like],
The first notice is a notice performed by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a pre-read notice is performed by displaying a hold icon in a blue display mode, etc.],
The second notice is a notice performed by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a pre-read notice is performed by displaying a hold icon in a green display mode, etc.],
In the state where the first hold icon is displayed, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol change display,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon changes to the second holding icon during execution of the certain symbol change display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of the certain symbol change display, and the certain symbol is not changed. During the execution of the symbol change display started after the change display, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold icon can be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the relationship between the notice and the reliability can be maintained even when the player does not finally participate in the mini game.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. May be something. In addition, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  Further, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made other than by displaying the first hold icon. You may. In addition, the first notice may be always performed by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be performed by displaying the first hold icon. .

  Further, the second notice may be made only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be made other than by displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be always performed by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be performed by displaying the second hold icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started only during execution of a certain symbol change display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon may be displayed. In such a state, it may be configured such that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol change display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol change display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol change display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon may be displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol change display.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon is configured to change only to the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display. Alternatively, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon changes to a holding icon other than the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display May be configured. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol change display. Also, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may not change to the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display May be configured.

  Further, in the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon is configured to change to the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display. Also, in the first case, even when the second result is not derived in the mini game, the first holding icon changes to the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display It may be configured as follows. In addition, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon is configured to change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display. Alternatively, even in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon changes to the second holding icon during execution of a certain symbol change display It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and is higher than the certain symbol change display. It may be configured to change only from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived If the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, the first hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display started after the certain symbol change display It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and is higher than the certain symbol change display. It may be configured to always change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived If the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, the first hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display started after the certain symbol change display It may be configured so that there is a case where the icon does not change to the second hold icon.

  Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and is higher than the certain symbol change display. It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon only during the execution of the symbol change display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In the case where the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, the first May be configured to change from the hold icon to the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and is higher than the certain symbol change display. You may be comprised so that it may change from the 1st holding icon to the 2nd holding icon without fail during the execution of the symbol change display started later.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and a certain symbol change display May also be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display that is started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In the case where the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except during the execution of a certain symbol change display, the first hold icon does not change during the execution of the symbol change display started after the certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the hold icon to the second hold icon. In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not always change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the certain symbol change display May be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the May also be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display that is started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In other cases, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon. Also, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the May be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during the execution of the symbol change display that is started later, or in a case other than the first case, the result of the mini game Is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon.

In addition, “the player has an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (i) to (l), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the number of operations is reduced. When the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived. However, as shown in FIGS. 44 (i) to (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, “Daiyoshi” is obtained. Kokichi "is derived],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In addition, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation unit, or the derivation result other than the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation unit. . Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, “the player has an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini-game, the same result may be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (i) to (l). As described above, if it is determined in advance that “Nakayoshi” is derived, “Koyoshi” is derived even if the staging button 136 is repeatedly operated or not, and the like.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Also, in the mini game, only the same result may be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game A result other than the same result may be derived between the case where the operation means is not operated and the case where the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may be always derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is operated in the mini game. The same result may not be derived in some cases.

  Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or when the operating means is operated in other than the mini game. In some cases, the same result may be derived when the operation unit is not operated.

In addition, the display means includes a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N or the like] ] Means comprising:
The first display means and the second display means are different display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display unit may be configured to include only the first display unit and the second display unit, or may include a display unit other than the first display unit and the second display unit. May be constituted. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be something.

In the above description,
"Operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
The display means displays a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 59 (g) to (m) and the mini game shown in FIGS. 61 (j) to (o)]. Possible means,
The mini-game is a game from which a plurality of types of results can be derived,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (g) to 59 (k), a treasure chest is operated by the operation key unit 137. When the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is selected, an old woman character BA appears from the treasure box, and "Koyoshi" is displayed as a result of fortune-telling, or FIG. 62 (A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the staging button 136 is repeatedly hit, the appearance that the character of the bancho character is breaking is shown, and a display such as "bancho awakening" or "today is in excellent condition" is performed. ,
One of the plurality of types of results is derived in accordance with the operation state of the operation unit. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (A1) to 60 (A6), When the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, but FIG. 60 (B1) As shown in FIG. (B6), when the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the staging button 136, the grandmother character BA appears and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Koyoshi" Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 62 (A1) to 62 (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the condition of the number of operations is satisfied, When the clothes worn by the character are torn, "Bancho Awakening" or "Today is in excellent condition" is displayed, and the staging button 136 is repeatedly operated, but the number of operations is not satisfied. As shown in FIG. 63 (C7), the “Bancho awakening game” ends without breaking the clothes worn by the Bancho character, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is a third result [for example, the display of the aunt character BA and “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 59 (k), and the bancho shown in FIG. 63 (C7). Display that the clothes worn by the character cannot be broken, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least indicate the result of the hit / fail determination (for example, the hit / fail determination of at least one of the hit / fail determination of the special figure and the common figure),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having characteristics in mini games.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases in which a player can be entertained in addition to a pure game.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini-game, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the display of the mini-game. Further, the display means may always display a mini-game display, or may not display a mini-game display.

  In addition, the mini-game may be one that can derive only a plurality of types of results, or one that can derive other than a plurality of types of results. In the mini game, a plurality of types of results may be always derived, or a plurality of types of results may not be derived.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that only the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means, or the result other than the result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operation means. May be done. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operation means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operation means. You may.

  Further, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation state of the operation unit, or the plurality of types of results of the plurality of types A configuration other than any one may be derived. Further, it may be configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation state of the operation unit, or any one of the plurality of types of results according to the operation state of the operation unit. It may be configured such that one of them is not derived.

  In addition, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving a result other than the third result. In the mini game, the third result may always be derived, or the third result may not be derived.

  Further, the third result does not indicate the result of the determination as to whether it is correct or not, and does not notify the result.

In addition, “The mini-game is a game for deriving a certain result among the plurality of types of results. [For example, the mini-game shown in FIG. 60 (A1) to FIG. The mission is to select the treasure chest inside the
The certain result can be derived according to the operation status of the operation means. [For example, in the case shown in FIGS. When the determination is made with the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears, and “Daikichi” is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, a certain result may be only one, or may be two or more.

  Further, only a certain result may be derived according to the operation state of the operation means, or a result other than a certain result may be derived according to the operation state of the operation means. In addition, a configuration may be such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operation unit, or a configuration may be such that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operation status of the operation unit.

Also, "the decorative symbol display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of executing the decorative symbol variable display. Prepare,
The mini-game is started in a first period [for example, a period of a standby state in which the change display of the special figure is not performed (including a state in which the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed) or the like] "The first case") is a game,
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol change display is not suspended (for example, a period in which the suspension of any of the special figures 1 and 2 is 0 or the like),
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where a mini game can be enjoyed during the first period.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the operation of the operation unit is actively performed during the original game by prompting the operation of the operation unit in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

  The mini game may be started only during the first period, or may be started during a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be started without fail during the first period, or may not be started during the first period.

  Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative design variable display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variable display. Is also good.

  Further, the first period may be a period during which only the decorative design variable display is not executed, or a period other than the decorative design variable display (for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device). 214 etc.) may also be a period during which there is something that has not been executed.

In addition, the automatic operation of the operation means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,
The mini game is configured so that the auto operation cannot be executed in the first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (g) and FIG. 61 (j) to FIG. Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the automatic operation of the effect button 136 is not performed in the bancho awakening game, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the first case, since the mini game is not related to the determination of success / failure, the auto operation cannot be executed and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only the automatic operation of the operation unit may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operation unit may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operation unit may be configured to be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operation unit may not be executed.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that only the automatic operation cannot be executed, or an operation other than the automatic operation may not be executed. In the first case, the mini-game may be configured such that the automatic operation cannot be executed, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be executed.

  Also, the mini game may be configured so that the auto operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or may be configured so that the auto operation cannot be executed even in cases other than the first case. Is also good.

The mini game is a game that may be started in a second period (hereinafter, referred to as a “second case”) [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d) to 162 (l)]. The mini game shown in FIGS. 37 (m) to 38 (f) and the mini games shown in FIGS. 51 (g) to (k) are started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. And the mini-games shown in FIGS. 66 (e) to (i) are started during execution of the big hit game, etc.],
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period,
The second period is a period including at least one of during the execution of the decorative symbol change display and during the execution of the big hit game,
In the mini-game, the third result is more easily derived in the first case than in the second case,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain a mini game even during a game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only during the second period, or may be started during a period other than the second period. Further, the mini game may be started without fail during the second period, or may not be started during the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Is also good.

Also, the type of the mini-game started in the first case and the second case is configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 59 (g) to (m). Fortune-telling and the bancho awakening game shown in FIGS. 61 (j) to 61 (o) are mini-games to be started in the standby state, and the dice games and figures shown in FIGS. The fortune game shown in FIG. 51 (g ′) to FIG. 1 (l ′) is a mini-game started during the variation display of the decorative symbols, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easy to distinguish between a notice and a mere game depending on the type of the mini game.

  Here, only the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case may be different. It may be configured so that there is a different type other than the type. Further, the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be always different, and the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case may be configured. May not be different.

Also, "In the mini game started in the first case, a first valid period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 61 (k)] is displayed. It is configured to be
In the mini game started in the second case, a second valid period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 42 (i)] is displayed. Is composed of
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 61 (k) to 61 (n)]. As described above, the button reception time meter MT indicates that the display mode changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136],
The second validity period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 42 (i) to 42 (k)]. As described above, the button reception time meter MT indicates that the display mode changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136],
In the first valid period display and the second valid period display, the speed at which the display mode changes is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the type of the mini game may be distinguished by looking at the validity period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first You may be comprised so that the validity period display other than a validity period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first validity period display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be performed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Also, the first validity period display may be configured to be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, or in a mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case. , The first validity period display may be displayed.

  Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be performed. You may be comprised so that the validity period display other than a period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second validity period display may be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second validity period display may be performed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

  In addition, the second validity period display may be configured to be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, and also in the mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. , The second validity period display may be displayed.

  In the first validity period display, the display mode may be changed only according to the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid, or may be other than the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid. The display mode may be changed in accordance with this. The first validity period display may be such that the display mode always changes in accordance with the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation unit is made valid, or the first effective period display may be such that the operation of the operation unit is made valid. There may be a case where the display mode does not change accordingly.

  In the second validity period display, the display mode may be changed only in accordance with the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid, or may be other than the lapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid. The display mode may be changed in accordance with this. The second validity period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is made valid, or the second effective period display may be such that the operation of the operation unit is made valid. There may be a case where the display mode does not change accordingly.

  Further, one of the first valid period display and the second valid period display may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the display speed of the first validity period display may change faster, or the second validity period display may be faster than the display mode. The speed of change of may be high.

  Further, the first valid period display and the second valid period display may have different display modes or may have the same display mode. Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the size of the first validity period display may be larger, and the size of the second validity period display may be larger. Alternatively, the sizes of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may be the same.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a displayed in the bancho awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] are displayed,
In the mini-game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. It is configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [for example, one or the like] of display patterns [for example, a default display mode or the like],
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two or the like] of display patterns [for example, a default display mode and a display mode in which vibration and rotation are performed],
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the mini game started in the second case, there may be a case where the sense of expectation to the big hit can be increased by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, An operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or may be configured in a mini game other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation An operation promotion display other than the promotion display may be displayed. Also, in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, and also in the mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. , A second operation prompting display may be displayed.

  Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation unit, or a display prompting other than the operation of the operation unit. The first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that does not always prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  The second operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation unit, or a display prompting other than the operation of the operation unit. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that does not always prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be one that can be displayed only in the first number of display patterns, or one that can be displayed in a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation promotion display may be always displayed in the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed in the first number of display patterns.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be one that can be displayed only in the second number of display patterns, or one that can be displayed in a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may be always displayed in the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed in the second number of display patterns.

  Further, the first number may be one, or two or more.

  Further, between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, or the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have the same size.

  Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least some of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a first result [for example, display of“ Koyoshi ”shown in FIG. 43 (l) or the like],
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail determination [for example, the display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 43 (l) is the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 43 (m). At least suggest the label],
In the second case, the first result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the mini-game may be such that only the first result can be derived, or a result other than the first result may be derived. In the mini game, the first result may be always derived, or the first result may not be derived.

  Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the validity determination, or may at least suggest something other than the result of the validity determination. In addition, the first result may always indicate at least the result of the validity determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the validity determination.

  Further, the first result may indicate the result of the right / wrong determination or may notify the result of the right / wrong determination.

  In the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be derived in the mini game.

The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol change display is a notice or a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 46 (a) to FIG. ), In the mini-game performed during the change display of the decorative pattern, the hero's main character YSM appears from the treasure box, so that a notice or a look-ahead notice is performed],
The first result derived in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is a look-ahead notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where a mini game can be made to function as a notice.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative design change display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 39 (c) to (o)].
The first effect display may be an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 39 (o)] or the like]” may be executed. And
A notice related to the first notice may be executed as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol change display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. c) to (l), the display of “Nakayoshi” derived in the mini-game started during the change display of the decorative symbol foretells the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative design variable display, or may be related to other than the decorative design variable display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative design variable display, or may not be related to the decorative design variable display.

  Further, the first effect display may be such that only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. In the first effect display, the first notice may be always executed, or the first notice may not be executed in some cases.

  In addition, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display, only a notification related to the first notification may be executed, or a decoration symbol may be executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol change display, a notice related to the first notice may be necessarily executed, or the execution of the decorative symbol change display As a first result derived in the case where a mini game is started, a notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

Also, “one of the plurality of types of results is a second result [for example, a display of“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. 42 (l) and the like].
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail determination [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 42 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 42 (m). At least suggest the label],
In the second case, the second result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case,
If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as the result of the mini game, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the right / wrong determination or a result notifying the result of the right / wrong determination in advance.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini-game, or in the second case, the second result may be derived in the mini-game. Good.

  In addition, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may not be finally determined and displayed, and when the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol may be finally determined. It may be configured to be displayed.

Also, in the first case, the mini-game only shows the third result [for example, the results of the mini-game shown in FIG. 59 (k), (k1) to (k4) in FIG. 59). The game to derive,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. 59 (k1) or the one shown in FIG. 62 (A6). Display of a mode in which the clothes worn by the bancho character are torn, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail determination (for example, at least one of the hit / fail determination of a special figure and the hit / fail of a general figure),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the result of the mini game can be given a variation.

  Further, the mini-game may be such that only the third result and the fourth result can be derived, or a result other than the third result and the fourth result may be derived. . In the mini game, the third result and the fourth result may always be derived, or the third result and the fourth result may not be derived.

  In addition, the fourth result does not indicate the result of the validity determination, nor does it inform the user.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiment described below is applicable to any of the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 67 to FIG. 120 are views showing in stages the effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 67 to 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 67 to 120, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but as illustrated in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is provided. It may be. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 68 shows a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. 67. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 67 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 67 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are in a default display mode. (A circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 67 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 67 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. Will be displayed as In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (3), a state in which a navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM together with the character of “chance”, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. The character “continuation” is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-run will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (8), the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and then the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo-ren is started. ing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” indicating the number of times the second variation display of the decorative pattern has been started by the pseudo run is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (11), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a Sabohani group notice in which a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN cross is made. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the jackpot, and a strong Sabohani group notice in which the number of Sabohani characters SBHN is a second number, and a number of Sabohani characters SBHN are the first number. (A smaller number than the second number) may be executed. The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 67 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that evolves into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (16), the button announcement effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode. In this button announcement effect, a button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation validity period.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (17), as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character “J” is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the number face is not decorated around the character of "game of a match" in the balloon, and has a bigger hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Implies that the reliability of is low.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (19) subsequent to FIG. 67 (18), a screen in which the protagonist of the hero lost the enemy swordsman and lost is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornamental symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of a timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 69. is there. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 69 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started five seconds after the countdown starts. Here, the timer notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal portion of less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (4), “04:25” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . That is, a state in which 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Pseudo-Length” is displayed, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that the pseudo-learn may be performed. I have.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:52” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (7). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (8), the character “continuation” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-run is to be performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (8).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (9), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" near the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo run is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display is started by the pseudo-ream. 2 "is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 69 (11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 67 (10) to (17), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (18), as shown in FIG. 70 (19) following FIG. , A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the word “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a number of (for example, nine) face-length faces are arranged around the character “game” in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is This suggests that the jackpot is more reliable than displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, a big hit may be always made (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (21) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed more than when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed. Note that, in this effect example, even if a timer announcement effect is performed and a pseudo-ream starts, a loss may occur.

  FIG. 71 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 71 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 69 (1) to (4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that the pseudo run is performed is a false advance. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased during the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect (pseudo-run) is not performed. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed when the true timer notice effect is performed than when the false timer notice effect is performed. In the present embodiment, even when a false timer announcement effect is performed, a big hit may occur.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (6), a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased is shown. In response to this, a character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-run as a result of the timer announcement effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, the character “Sorry” displayed near the navigation character YM has been deleted.

  After that, the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 71 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the navigation character YM. The display of “reach” is displayed in the vicinity, and it is notified that the state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In this example of the effect, the pseudo-announcement by the timer announcement effect is a false announcement. However, the transition to the reach may function as a reach announcement.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHNs is performed than in the strong Sabohani group notice described above. The weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than the case where the Sabohani group notice is not performed, but the reliability is lower than the case where the strong Sabohani group notice is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach is developed. Has been informed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 71 (11) to FIG. 17 (17) are the same as those in FIG. 67 (15) to FIG. 68 (21), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another display example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 72 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 69 (1) to (6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), after “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 72 (7), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00: At the timing of "00", the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. As described above, the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to “00:00” after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. And the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the same time as the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (8), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and the character “Continuation” is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the pseudo-run is performed. It should be noted that the character "CONTINUE" may be displayed after the timer notice TM1 is deleted, the timer notice TM1 may be deleted after the character "CONTINUE" is displayed, or the timer notice TM1 may be deleted. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the word “continuation” is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (9), the character “Ikuze” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the second decorative pattern variation display by the pseudo run is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 72 (7a) to FIG. 72 (9a), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo run starts. Until the display, the timer notice display TM1 may be maintained without being erased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (9b), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "done" may be displayed on the TM1 to notify that the timer announcement effect has succeeded and the pseudo-run as a certain effect has started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (9c), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second decorative symbol change display by the pseudo-ream starts. The characters "pseudo-run" may be displayed on the TM1 to notify that the timer announcement effect was successful and the pseudo-run as a certain effect was started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (9c), by displaying the icon BCHO of the face of the chief on the timer notice display TM1, it is produced that the pseudo-ream as a certain production has been started. Is also good.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 73 (1) to (3) are the same as FIGS. 69 (1) to (3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (4), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is being performed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "04:25". Further, in this effect example, the character “reach may be” is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reach may occur.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuing, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (6), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (6).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “00:52” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Notice is given. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect is shown. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be regarded as an example of an effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (10) to 17 (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 73 (10) to 17 (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 69 (15) to 70 (22), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thus, in this production example, when the timer notice production is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, the symbol fluctuation display is performed more than when the timer notice production is performed and the strong Savohani group notice is not started. In (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, in this effect example, even when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, a loss may occur.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. 74 (1) to FIG. 74 (8) are the same as FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 73 (8), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 74 (8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. An example where no notice is given is shown. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is a false notice that the false notice is false is given. . In other words, it can be said that a state in which a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) is not performed even when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the vehicle has developed into a super reach.

  Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 74 (11) to 17 (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 73 (11) to 17 (17), and thus description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in this effect example, although an example in which the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is false and there is a case where a big hit occurs even if a certain effect is not started, a loss may occur.

  FIG. 75 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 75 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 73 (1) to (8), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 75 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 75 (9), the weak Sabohani group notice Is performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a notice (a weak Sabohani group notice) different from a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, a state in which another effect (weak Savohani group notice) is performed differently from a certain effect (strong Savohani group notice), This timer announcement effect can also be called a false timer announcement effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 75 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 75 (11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. In addition, in this example of the effect, an example in which the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is false and the effect different from a certain effect is started may be a big hit, but a loss may occur. is there.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 77 shows a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. 76. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 76 (1) and FIG. 76 (2) are the same as FIG. 67 (1) and FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, the timer announcement display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, so that the timer announcement effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a highly reliable display mode that indicates that the possibility of being a false timer notice is lower than the default display mode. When the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be always executed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode is displayed (the big hit design is displayed. To make it easier to do). "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which indicates that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the start of the countdown.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (4), “00:24” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . That is, a state in which 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “change on hold”, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It has been suggested. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a pre-read notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (5), a state is shown in which the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A has been completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A has become “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (6), a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the display mode becomes the prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1A is shown. In addition, the character “Atsu” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display to be started next. Note that the character display of “first hot” may be displayed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the first display of the character “first hot” has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of “first hot” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (10), a third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character of “Atsuto” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, changes to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the advance display mode regarding the symbol change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (14), a state in which a navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navi character notice is started, the character “hot” is displayed near the navi character YM, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, and a state in which the timer notice effect has started is shown. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which indicates that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the timer display time displayed when the countdown is started is “20:00”, which is a long time, and the reliability of the big hit is greater than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is started thereafter.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is continued, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (19) following FIG. 76 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “15:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (19). Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the Savohani character SBHN constituting the strong Savohani group notice. At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a plurality of timer notice displays are performed in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Then, it indicates that a certain production is started. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is shorter. Is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later is consumed earlier. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is thereafter started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “14:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (20). Also, the timer notice display TM1, which is started to be displayed later, continues to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (20), “4:25” is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 77 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “10:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (21). Also, the timer notice display TM1, which is started to be displayed later, continues to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (20), "1:25" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (22), when the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 which is started to be displayed later becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed, a button notification effect is started, and the button image is displayed. 136a is shown in a default mode. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is consumed before the timer notice display TM1A which is started to be displayed first. In this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is not the start of the button notice effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect. Is performed as a result of the performance, and in this production example, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in advance, but the occurrence of the button preliminary performance itself is predicted. You may.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (24). On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 for which the countdown has already been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated to display the cut-in image. In addition, when the countdown is completed, “0:00” is displayed, and the button announcement effect starts, it may be deleted. In this production example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is a false notice that the false cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It can be said that a certain state is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, a state where an effect different from a certain effect (display of strong cut-in image CI1a) (display of weak cut-in image CI1b) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect is shown. In other words, it is shown that when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1b) is performed. It can be said that this timer announcement effect is a fake timer announcement effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (25) shows a state where the timer notice display TM1 which has been started to be displayed later is deleted. Note that, in the timer notice display TM1A that has been started earlier, the countdown is continuing, and “5:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (26), a screen where the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “3:77” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (27), a state is shown in which the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and “2:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (28), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continued, and “1:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (29), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and a character BC3 whose clothes have been torn along with the character “Resurrection” appears, and the navigation character YM An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity, showing that the player is surprised by the sudden appearance of the character of the bancho. Then, three decoration patterns of “decoration 5” are displayed, and it is notified that all three “decoration 5” will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, there is shown an example in which a resurrection effect for notifying a big hit as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1A is performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (31), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5” is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the display of the fluctuating icon h0 and the character of “Yataraze” are also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the resurrection effect is started, the symbol change display (the symbol change effect) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the resurrection effect is not started. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

  In the present example, when the timer notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to “3:00” or “20:00”. When displaying the advance notice in the high-reliability display mode or the special display mode, the time displayed first in the timer display is set in the timer display when the timer advance display is displayed in the default display mode. May be configured to be a time (second time) longer than the time (first time) to be displayed. As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

  FIG. 78 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 78 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “change in hold”, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the hold It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a pre-read notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains “03:00”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is a false notice that is false. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (6), a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased is shown. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, at this time, the character of "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM has been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 80 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 80. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 79 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (3) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are respectively framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are both default display modes. In the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. I have. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "45:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain notice effect is started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. are doing. In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start counting down at the same time, there is a certain notice effect at both 10 seconds and 45 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain announcement performance that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain announcement performance that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same, May be different. The timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a face icon BCHO added thereto, indicating that there is a possibility that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a notice effect. . It should be noted that the fact that the reliability of the big hit has been improved may be notified by adding the icon BCHO of the face of the boss. A plurality of types of icons to be added to the timer notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the added icon, or a type of a certain notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1L, TM1R is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (4), the timer advance display TM1L displayed on the left side includes "9: 25 "is displayed, and" 44:25 "is displayed in the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, a state in which 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (5), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (5), “9:00” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (6). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (6), “8:75” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (7), “4:00” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (8), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues in the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (8), “3:67” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character “starting action” is displayed, showing that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Have been. Thereby, in the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this effect example, the appearance of the princess character HME indicates that a pseudo-run will be performed as a certain effect. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the princess character HME is a pseudo-announcement item (may be referred to as an “announcement icon”). At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown is continued. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown is continued. Note that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side need not be added. In this embodiment, in this way, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is performed, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until “0:00”).

  Thereafter, the mini-game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (10), the character “preparing for effect” is displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and a pseudo-run is performed. It has been announced in advance. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “pseudo-ream” is displayed, and the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is also given here. The countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (10), “1:33” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (11) shows a state in which the countdown in the timer announcement effect continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, the princess character HME is displayed in an added form, that is, by displaying the notice item of the pseudo-ream, it is visually indicated that the pseudo-ream is performed. May be easier to understand. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (11), “1:00” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown in the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R is continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (12), the timer display of the timer advance notice TM1L displayed on the left side becomes "0:00". When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 5-replay symbol RP-decorative 6”. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown is continuing, and “40:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (12).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo run is started. Here, after the timer notice display TM1L has been erased, the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo-ream is started, the timer may be started. The notice display TM1L may be deleted, or the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo-run may be started at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is deleted. Further, at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character HME is displayed, and the fact that the pseudo ream has been performed is notified by the display of the icon. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and “39:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (13).

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed more than when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a new timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is a default display mode. For example, a frame is entered from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation. In the timer notice display TM1N, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts counting down after the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown was started earlier, but the timer notice display displayed on the right side The countdown is completed earlier than the TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown is continuing, and “38:15” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (15), a state is shown in which the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (15), “9:25” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and “37:25” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40 "is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which 0.75 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (16), a state in which the second mini game is started is shown. When the mini game is started, similarly to the above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. BXR are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Select with cross key” is displayed. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notices TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (16), “9:00” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (17). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. Also, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (17), “8:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (18), “4:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (19) following FIG. 79 (18), the effect of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and is selected. The missing left treasure box image BXL is deleted. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notices TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (19), “3:67” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (20), the grandmother character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character “Uhihi” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has failed. ing. Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a false timer notice effect. The countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notices TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 80 (20), “1:67” is displayed in the timer advance notice TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (21), the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect will be performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1N is erased during the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect is not performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and “29:49” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (21). Further, “× 2” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the number of times the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed by the pseudo run is two times. When the princess character HME is displayed, “× 2” does not have to be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (22), a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely deleted. In response to this, a character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-run as a result of the timer announcement effect is not performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (22), “27:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (23), the “decorative 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to reach the reach state, and “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM. Then, it is notified that the state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R has moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. At least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the Savohani character SBHN constituting the strong Savohani group notice. Note that the strong Savohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Savohani group notice may be started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Savohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the strong Savohani group notice is started. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R starts. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “25:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach is developed. Has been informed. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “24:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (26), a state is shown in which the display screen darkens and a blackout effect is traversed by lightning. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “21:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (26).

  When the blackout effect ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (27) shows a state in which the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the character of "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, and a state in which the mini game by the amiduji has been started is shown. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face number who has been added to the timer notice display TM1R moves to the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho added to the timer notice display can be said to be an advance notice of the start of the mini game based on the lottery. In addition, a character “select” is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the bancho face. . In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “21:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (27).

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (28) displays the number of the player who was located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is continuing, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, and the operation validity period elapses, the timing of the game lottery shown in FIG. The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either “○” indicating success or “X” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "o" is displayed at the right end point. ing. Note that the number of displayed “○” may be two or more, or “、” may be displayed at all end points. At this time, the countdown is continued in the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (29).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the number icon face BCHO moves on the line in accordance with the rule of the lottery. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “17:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (30).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (31) shows a state in which the number icon face BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, a state in which the result of the mini game based on the lottery is derived is shown. In this production example, the icon of the bancho's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where "O" is displayed, and the character of "Confirmed strong cut-in" is displayed. It is notified that the display of CI1a has been confirmed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (31).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that evolves into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed to notify the type of super reach. Also, a state in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to a high-reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA) is shown, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit is improved is shown. I have. In the timer notice display TM1RA, the countdown is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (32), “9:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (33), a state in which the button announcement effect has started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode is shown. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00”, indicating that the countdown has been completed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RA is a timer notice effect regarding the button effect, and is a timer notice effect regarding the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a result of the button effect. . The timer notice display TM1RA at "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated to display the strong cut-in image CI1a. However, after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be deleted before is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (34), as shown in FIG. 80 (35), the decorative design display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. Thereafter, the timer notice display TM1RA is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (36), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (37) following FIG. 80 (36), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5”. It is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Note that the display of the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the fluctuating icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are made visible. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  Note that, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a timer notice effect is performed, a pseudo-ream is started, a timer notice effect is performed, a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and a big hit symbol is finally displayed. However, it is configured so that there may be a loss.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect following FIG. 80 (24). The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 82 (25a) to 28 (28a) are the same as FIGS. 80 (25) to 28 (28), but in this effect example, in the blackout effect in FIG. 82 (26a), the countdown display is performed. The difference is that the timer notice display TM1R in the middle is temporarily hidden.

  When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation validity period elapses, the effect of the lottery is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (29a). Be started. In this effect example, at this time, three icons are displayed at three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, and a bancho icon indicating that the mini game has succeeded is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and an icon of Sabohani indicating that the mini game has been greatly successful is displayed at the end point on the right side. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be a case where there is no icon having the first number, two icons, or all icons having the first number. Further, there may be a case where there is no icon of Sabohani, there may be two icons, or all icons of Sabohani may be used. At this time, the countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (29a).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the number icon face BCHO moves on the line according to the rule of the lottery. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “17:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (30a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (31a), a state is shown in which the number icon face BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, a state in which the result of the mini game based on the lottery is derived is shown. In this production example, the icon of the bancho's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the icon of Sabohani is displayed, and the character of "Confirmation of strongest cut-in" is displayed. It is notified that the display of the cut-in image CI1v has been confirmed. Also, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (31a).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen where the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront the super-reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed to notify the type of super reach. Also, a state in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to a high-reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA) is shown, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit is improved is shown. I have. Further, in this effect example, the character "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" is displayed together with the character of Sabohani at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the notice that the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed. Informing. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the countdown is continuing, and “9:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (32a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (33a), a state in which the button announcement effect has started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode is shown. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00”, indicating that the countdown has been completed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 82 (35a). At this time, the display of the character of Sabohani and the character of "Preparing for strongest cut-in" have been deleted. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes, in addition to an image of the character's up, a balloon image in which the word “game” is arranged in the balloon, and a surrounding area surrounded by a number of Sabohani characters. It is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit may be determined. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is a notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain announcement effect, or may be displayed as another announcement effect different from the certain announcement effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (36a), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle part of the decorative pattern display device 208 is located substantially in the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (37a) shows a state in which temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Note that the display of the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the fluctuating icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are made visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (38a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 83 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect starts when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "10:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains "10:00". The timer announcement effect in this example of the effect is a timer announcement effect indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo-run may be performed as a certain announcement effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (5), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (8), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character of “pseudo-ream stock” is displayed. It has been notified that the operation will be performed. Thus, in the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1, it is notified that a pseudo-run as a certain announcement effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (10), the display mode of the timer advance display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer advance display TM1A). This shows that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game. Further, a princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice that a pseudo-ream will be performed is given. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful is shown. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains at "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the symbol confirmation display, and a princess character HME as a notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays are displayed over the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1A and the display of the princess character HME are displayed as preliminary look-ahead notices of the pseudo continuous production. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains at "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A remains at "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14), “06:44” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1A. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer announcement display TM1A becomes “0:00”, and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo continuous symbol. The state where the symbol RP is stopped and displayed is shown. After that, the second display of the decoration pattern by the pseudo-run is started in the manner described above.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed more than when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 83. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 84 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 83 (1) to (8), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (9), a grandmother character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. . Thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 is a false timer notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (10), the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is to be performed is a false announcement. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

  Thereafter, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. Temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6−decoration 6”. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this effect example, since the mini-game failed, the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 was a false notice and ended halfway, resulting in a state where the pre-reading notice was not performed. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (16), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. Is performed, and then the display is fixed and displayed in a combination of the lost decorative patterns of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 6”.

  Note that, in this effect example, even if the mini-game fails and the pre-reading notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, a big hit may occur in the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-read notice.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 86 shows stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. 85 (1) and FIG. 85 (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and FIG. 67 (2), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (3), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (4), a state is shown in which the timer announcement effect has started during the period in which the mini game has been started and the selection operation by the player has been accepted. In this effect example, the timer notice effect starts when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "10:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (7), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (8), the icon BCF of the longest face appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “strong cut-in determined” is displayed, and the mission of the mini game is achieved. , The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. At this time, the icon BCF of the face of the chief is reduced and displayed (stocked) near the navigation character YM. The prefetching notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a is given by the stock of the county face icon BCF. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the appearance of the bancho face icon BCF as the notice item is also shown. . That is, these displays are displayed over the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the icon BCF of the bancho face are displayed as the prefetch notice. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (12), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the display mode of the notice. The change of the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is performed by, for example, a pending change animation, but the display mode may be changed by switching display without performing the pending change animation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (13), the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (14), “9:95” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is to be performed is a false announcement. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased during the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect is not performed. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1, which is a false notice, is displayed across a plurality of symbol change displays. In addition, the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1 in this example of the production is a timer announcement effect relating to the execution of a pseudo-run as a certain announcement effect, that is, by deleting the timer announcement display TM1, the pseudo-announcement is performed. It may be recognized that it will not be done. Before the animation of disappearance of the timer notice display TM1 is started, a draw effect may be performed to that effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (16), a state where the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (19) following FIG. 85 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. You. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach is developed. Has been informed. Here, since the icon of the bancho face BCF is also displayed near the navigation character YM, the display of “SP development” is overlapped with the icon of the bancho face BCF, and the icon of the bancho face BCF is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not done.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 86 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (23), a button announcement effect has been started, and a state in which the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode is shown.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 86 (25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that the notice is given by the icon BCF of the longest face displayed near the navigation character YM. In other words, it can be said that a state is shown in which the result of the mini game is a look-ahead notice of a notice effect performed in the symbol change display performed later. Also, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini-game, and has nothing to do with the timer notice effect started at the same time. That is, it is shown that the mini-game and the timer notice effect are related to each other, and in fact, only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is a true notice effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (27), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5” is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this example of the effect, when the miniature game results in the appearance of the head face icon BCF and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the head face face icon BCF appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a. Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where is not displayed. However, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed with the appearance of the icon BCF of the longest face, there is a possibility that the game may be lost. Is also good.

  FIG. 87 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 87 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is likely to be displayed.

  Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (4), “0:24” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . That is, a state in which 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the display of the character “hold change”, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a pre-read notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 has become “0:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (6), a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the display mode becomes the prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. In addition, the character “Atsu” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display to be started next.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (10), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character of “Atsuto” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 87. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 88 (1) and FIG. 88 (2) are the same as FIG. 87 (1) and FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (3) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. Further, this effect example is different from the effect effect shown in FIG. 87 (3) in that the icon BCHO of the number head face is not added to the timer notice display TM1. This suggests that the possibility that a certain announcement effect is displayed is lower than when the bancho face icon BCHO is added.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (4), “0:24” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . That is, a state in which 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the display of the character “hold change”, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer notice effect may be a pre-read notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (5), the countdown in the timer advance display TM1 is completed, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is "0:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (6), a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  However, as shown in FIG. 88 (7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is indicated that the effect is a false timer notice effect in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is not performed. ing. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the timer announcement effect was a fake effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. At this time, the character "Sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM has been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character of “Atsuto” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 89 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 89 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 71 (1) to (6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 89 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (7) shows that the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and displayed again. It is shown. Also, at this time, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face is added, indicating that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-run as a certain announcement effect is displayed. That is, it is shown that the lost timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 related to the false timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. Also, it is shown that when the timer notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the timer notice display TM1 is stepping up. From another viewpoint, it can be said that a plurality of timer announcement effects are performed for the same certain effect. Here, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again, the execution of a certain notice effect (pseudo series) performed as a result of the timer notice effect may be determined. In addition, the character “Pseudo-Length” may be displayed again near the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 89 (7), “03:00” is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and it is notified that a pseudo-run may be performed three seconds later.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “02:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (9).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (10). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (11), the character “continuation” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-run is to be performed. Note that, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “00:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (11).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (12), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" near the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo run is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times the second decorative symbol variation display has been started by the pseudo-ream. 2 "is displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream starts, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed more than when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 91 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 90. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 90 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 67 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "25:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started when 25 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “CHANGE IN SP DEVELOPMENT” is displayed, and a mission effect has been started that indicates that the degree of expectation of the jackpot will increase dramatically by developing into super reach. Is also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance effect produced as a result of the timer advance effect. Therefore, by shifting to the super reach, it may be possible to expect that the strong cut-in image CI1a will appear.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 90 (4), “23:00” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . That is, a state in which two seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (6), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuing, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (7).

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 90 (8) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (10).

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (11) shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. The strong Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high degree of reliability of the jackpot, and it shifts to super reach with a high probability. For this reason, due to the occurrence of the strong Sabohani group notice, the expectation for the mission achievement may be dramatically increased. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 90 (11), the Savohani character SBHN constituting the strong Savohani group notice overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN. You may. Also, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed. Thereby, it may be recognized that the mission is achieved. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (12).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that has developed into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, a character of “timer attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain notification effect are improved. Note that the display mode of the timer advance display TM1 may change (demotion) to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit or the execution probability of a certain advance effect is reduced.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the decorative notice display device 208 changes the display form of the timer notice display TM1 from the default display form to the special display form (timer notice display). TM1B), showing a state of step-up, showing that the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved. The timer notice display TM1B in the special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of a big hit is higher than the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode. That is, when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the timer notice display TM1B is high. The big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display of the reliability display mode is displayed. In addition, when the timer notice display of the special display mode is displayed, the big hit may be determined. In addition, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed, thereby informing that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (15).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (16) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission is shown. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (18) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (19) following FIG. 90 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 92 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 90 (1) to (9), the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and does not shift to super reach. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (11), since the system does not shift to the super reach, the timer advance display effect by the timer advance display TM1 is shown to be a false advance, and the disappearance animation of the timer advance display TM1 starts. Is done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is performed is false. In other words, since the mission was not accomplished before the timer notice display TM1 became “00:00”, the countdown was erased during the countdown, indicating that a certain effect was not performed. it can. In addition, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer notice display TM1. In some cases, it is recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

  Then, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased as shown in FIG. 92 (12), as shown in FIG. 92 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. 92, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (14), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". Is determined and displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In addition, in this effect example, even if the timer advance effect is not completed and the timer notice effect is finished, there may be a case where a big hit occurs.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, and FIG. 94 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect shown in FIG. 93. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 93 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 90 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "5:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect will be started five seconds after the start of the countdown. This effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 90 (3) in this point. In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “CHANGE IN SP DEVELOPMENT” is displayed, and a mission effect has been started that indicates that the degree of expectation of the jackpot will increase dramatically by developing into super reach. Is also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance effect produced as a result of the timer advance effect. Therefore, by shifting to the super reach, it may be possible to expect that the strong cut-in image CI1a will appear. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 93 (4) to (13) are performed. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 93 (4) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 90 (4) to 90 (4) except that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not changed at “5:00”. Since it is the same as FIG. 14, the description is omitted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer advance display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer advance display TM1B). It shows a state in which it has been changed and stepped up, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved. In addition, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed, thereby informing that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown has not yet started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (15), it remains at "5:00".

  Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (16), “4:11” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1B. . As described above, the timer announcement effect in this effect example does not start the countdown of the timer display when started, but starts counting down the timer display when the mission is achieved.

  When the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (17) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission is shown. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (19) following FIG. 93 (18), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final symbol in a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 93 to 94. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 95 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 93 (1) to (9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (10), the middle symbol is stopped at “decoration 6” during normal reach, does not shift to super reach, and is lost in “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5”. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (11), since the display does not shift to the super reach, the timer advance display effect by the timer advance display TM1 is shown to be a false advance, and the disappearance animation of the timer advance display TM1 starts. Is done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is performed is false. In other words, the display of the timer notice display TM1 was started, but the mission was not achieved before the countdown was started, so that the display was erased before the countdown was started, and a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. In addition, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer notice display TM1. In some cases, it is recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

  Then, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased as shown in FIG. 95 (12), as shown in FIG. 95 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. A temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative patterns of “.”, And then, as shown in FIG. 95 (14), the decorative pattern display device 208 loses the decorative pattern of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Is determined and displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 96 (1) to (14) are the same as FIGS. 90 (1) to (14), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display form to the special display form (timer notice display TM1B). , A step-up state is shown, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit is greatly improved is shown. In addition, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed, thereby informing that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 90 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to “5:00”. At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. In this way, in this effect example, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer advance display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer advance display can be easily understood. ing. In addition, after the mission is completed, a state is shown in which the display mode of the timer advance display is stepped up to a highly reliable display mode, and the timer display in the timer advance display is reset to an appropriate time. It can also be said that.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1B is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 96 (16), “4:32” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1B. . After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 96 (17) to 97 (20) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 96 (17) to 97 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 90 (16) to 91 (19), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 99 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 98 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 69 (1) to (9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 upon completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1, for example, as shown in FIG. The appearance of the disappearing animation is shown.

  However, as shown in FIG. 98 (11), not only is the timer notice display TM1 not deleted, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “22:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Is displayed. In other words, it is clear that the animation performed in FIG. 98 (10) is not a vanishing animation but a timer notice added animation that is the same animation as the vanishing animation. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect has been started using the same timer notice display TM1. In this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer notice display. It should be noted that the timer notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation of the decorative pattern is being performed by the pseudo run is performed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (13), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (14).

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 98 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (17).

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (18) shows a state where a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (19) subsequent to FIG. 98 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It is reported that it will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 99 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that evolves into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, a character of “timer attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of the timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the disappearing animation described above. That is, it can be said that the part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer advance display is the same as the part of the animation that erases the timer advance display. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is set to the default display mode. The mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B), showing a step-up state, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved. In addition, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed, to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is being performed, and “4:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (22).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (23) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1B in this example of the effect is a timer announcement effect regarding the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain announcement effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (25) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, a timer announcement effect was performed, a pseudo-ream was started, and a timer announcement effect was performed, a strong cut-in image CI1a was displayed, and finally the big hit symbol was finally displayed. A timer announcement effect may be performed to start a pseudo-run, and further, a timer announcement effect may be performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 98 to 99, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 100. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 100 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 98 (1) to (9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (10), the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 indicates that the disappearance animation is being performed in order to delete the timer notice display TM1. I have. This vanishing animation has at least a part of the same display mode as the vanishing animation described above with reference to FIG. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation of the decorative pattern is being performed by the pseudo run is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (13), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 100 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (18) shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice is given. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (19) subsequent to FIG. 100 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It is reported that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 101 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops to super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 99 (20).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (22), a screen where the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and lost is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in a middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and the user is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 71. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 102 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 71 (1) to (4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (5), the timer notice addition animation which is an effect similar to the disappearing animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 displays the same effect as the disappearing animation. The state where the effect is displayed is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, the possibility that the advance notice that the pseudo-run will be performed is a false announcement is notified. As a result, the player may be able to delete the timer notice display TM1 and make it think that it is a false notice.

  However, as shown in FIG. 102 (6), not only is the timer notice display TM1 not deleted, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “20:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Is displayed. That is, it is clear that the animation performed in FIG. 102 (5) is not a vanishing animation but a timer notice added animation which is the same animation as the vanishing animation. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-run will be performed as a certain effect. is there. In this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer notice display. It should be noted that the timer notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (7), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “hot” is displayed, indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (8), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (9).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Also, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “13:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display of “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character YM. Has been informed. Also, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (11).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “4:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (13) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement effect according to the timer announcement display TM1 in this example of an effect is a timer announcement effect regarding the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain announcement effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  In this effect example, addition of the timer display is performed, and a timer notice effect relating to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. You may.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (14), the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and the user is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". As described above, even when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance effect as a result of the timer advance effect, a loss display result may occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 104 shows stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 103. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 5−decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 103 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the change icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are respectively framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is a default display form, while the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is a special display form. In both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display. When three seconds elapse from the start of the countdown, a certain notice is given. This suggests that the production will begin. In addition, the timer notice icon TM0R displayed on the right side of the timer notice display TM1R indicates that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. In addition, in these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the timer display is maintained at “03:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. At the approximate center of the display screen, the character "Picture is strong and timer is activated" is displayed, and the appearance of the princess character from the treasure box causes the advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB to appear. It is informed that the timer notice effect will be performed by the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display. Note that the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "33:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "33:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (7), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "33:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (8), a grandmother character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “I was bad” is displayed, indicating that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is reported that the mission of the mini game has failed by the navigation character YM. Note that the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (9), the character “Kotja” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right timer advance display of the two timer advance displays TM1L and TM1RB is the right side. Shows that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in (1) is deleted is started, and the timer notice display TM1RB is deleted. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which at least the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. . Note that both of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1RB may be erased, and the timer advance effect related to either of the timer advance notices may not be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (10), a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely deleted, and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even during the symbol confirmation display. That is, the timer notice display TM1L is displayed over the next symbol change display. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (14), the disappearance animation for the timer notice display TM1L is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, because of the failure in the mini-game, a notice effect is not performed in any of the two timer notice displays, and the result is a false notice.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (15) shows a state where the timer notice display TM1 is completely deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 104 (19) following FIG. 103 (18). Then, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, although the mini game has failed and any of the timer announcement effects has been terminated halfway and the lost symbol has been finally displayed, a big hit may occur.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 103 to 104, and FIG. 106 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 105. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 105 (1) to (7) are the same as FIGS. 103 (1) to (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (8), a princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters “Expect” are displayed, showing that the mini-game mission has been achieved. This is different from the effect shown in FIG. 103 (8). In addition, the character "chance" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. Note that the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (9), the character “Kotja” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer announcement which is not the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcements TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. The timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which at least the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, as compared with the effect shown in FIG. 103 (9), a timer announcement effect that is more likely to be performed in a certain effect is performed, thereby improving a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed. May be possible. Note that both of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and a timer advance effect associated with either timer advance display may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely deleted, and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Also, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not been started yet.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the symbol confirmation display. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over the next symbol change display. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not deleted, and the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (14), “02:76” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, a character of "attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (15), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is continuing, and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (15).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (16), at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Savohani display mode. Changes to a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1RB is shown. Note that after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or After the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1RB may be “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer advance display TM1RB may be “ At the timing of “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Note that the hold icon in the display mode of Savohani has a higher hit reliability than the panda hold icon described above. In addition, when the suspension icon of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice of the jackpot determination.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is deleted due to the completion of the countdown, then the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. . In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (19) following FIG. 105 (18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (20). Then, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols “decoration 6−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 105 to 106, and FIG. 108 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 107 (1) and FIG. 107 (2) are the same as FIG. 105 (1) and FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (3) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, FIG. 105 (3) is the same as FIG. 105 (3) except that the timer display in the timer advance display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer advance displays TM1L and TM1RB is “18:00”. This is the same as the effect shown in ()). In this way, by making the time indicated by the timer indication different between the two timer notice indications TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice indication corresponds to a certain notice indication, and the game is monotonized. May be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 107 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 107 (4) to (7) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 105 (4) to (7) in the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Are the same except that they are different, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters “Expect very much” are displayed, showing that the mini-game mission has been achieved. It is shown. In addition, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 105 (8) in that the character display of “Please expect very much” indicates that a special privilege is given. In addition, the character "chance" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. The timer notice TM1L displayed on the left of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB remains "03:00", and the timer notice TM1RB displayed on the right is the same as the timer notice TM1RB. "18:00" is kept, and the countdown is not started in any case.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (9), the character “Two are present” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. A timer display selection animation in which the timer advance display TM1L displayed on the left side, which is the timer advance display, is erased is started, and the timer advance display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which at least the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is not erased and the timer display selection animation is performed, and as a result, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is displayed. Has been changed from the default display mode to the high-reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), showing a step-up state, and showing that the possibility of performing a certain effect has been improved. Have been. In addition, the characters “Expect both” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, suggesting that there is expectation in any of the two timer announcement displays TM1LA and TM1RB. Note that the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1LA and TM1RB have not yet started counting down.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the character display displayed near the fluctuating icon h0 and the navigation character YM is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even during the symbol confirmation display. That is, these timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are displayed over the next symbol change display. The timer notice TM1LA displayed on the left of the two timer notices TM1LA and TM1RB remains at "33:00", and the timer notice TM1RB displayed on the right is "18:00" remains, and the countdown has not been started in any case.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Further, in this effect example, the character "attention to the left" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer advance displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. Indicates that a countdown is about to begin. Note that the countdown has not yet started in any of the timer indications in the two timer notice indications TM1LA and TM1RB.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (14), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer advance displays TM1LA and TM1RB is performed. Be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (14), “02:76” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down. In addition, a character of "attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (15), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the countdown continues, and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (15). I have. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (16), at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode. The display mode changes to the display mode of Sabohani, and the display mode of the prefetching is performed. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect by the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side is shown. After the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, or After the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1LA may be “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer advance display TM1LA may be “00:00”. At the timing of “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is deleted because the countdown is completed. Thereafter, a first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (19) following FIG. 107 (18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (20). Then, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 6−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Is done. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the symbol confirmation display. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over three symbol change displays. Note that the timer notice display TM1RB remains at "18:00", and the countdown has not been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (22), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. Here, the display mode of the change icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, that is, the display mode of Savohani. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (25), “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Note that, in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and is kept at "18:00".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (26), normal reach is performed, and a state in which the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed is shown. Note that, in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and is kept at "18:00".

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1RB is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (27), “17:75” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1RB. .

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (28) shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is continuing, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, a character of “timer attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1RB. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (30).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (31) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a certain advance effect produced as a result of the timer advance effect relating to the timer advance display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Note that the timer notice display TM1RB has been deleted due to the completion of the countdown.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (33) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (34), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final symbol with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  In this effect example, a plurality of timer announcement effects are performed, and each example corresponds to another certain effect.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 110 shows stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 109 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 103 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (5). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (7), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “start action” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved. Have been. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (10), the holding change animation is started at the second holding icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second holding icon h12 may change. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to holding” is displayed to urge attention to a change in the display mode of the holding icon. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. To the display mode of the pre-reading. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. After the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, After the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 may be “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer advance display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when “00:00” is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, first, the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed, and thereafter, the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, when the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and thereafter, at a timing when the countdown is completed (that is, “00:00”), there is a certain timing. It can be said that a pending change effect as an effect is being performed. The order in which the effects are started is not limited to the above. For example, after the mini-game is started, the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed, and after the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started, The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (12), the timer notice display TM1 has been deleted due to the completion of the countdown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the word “button hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that the second hold icon h12, which is a button hold display mode, does not change its display mode and remains in the button hold display mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (16), a state in which the mini game is started using the entire display screen is shown. More specifically, the character of "CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, and a state in which the mini game by the amidaku is started is shown. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the bancho face appears in the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, a character “select” is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the bancho face. . In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Ganbare" is displayed, and it is shown that the player is being encouraged.

  After that, after the mini-game based on the lottery is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (17) shows a state in which a new timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, a timer notice effect is started when a new timer notice display TM1N enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started five seconds after the start of the countdown.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (18), “04:77” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1N. .

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (19) following FIG. 109 (18), the middle of three options in the amida field is displayed. Moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, and the operation validity period elapses, the timetable shown in FIG. The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "press", which is the start of the button-holding operation effect, or "x", which indicates failure, is displayed. Specifically, "push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. ing. It should be noted that the number of displayed “push” may be one, or “push” may be displayed at all end points. At this time, the countdown is continued in the timer notice display TM1N, and “03:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (20).

  Thereafter, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line in accordance with the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 110 (21), in the decorative design display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is one of three end points. Is shown as having reached the end point on the left side of. That is, a state in which the result of the mini game based on the lottery is derived is shown. In this effect example, it is shown that the bancho's face icon BCHO has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission has succeeded, and the operation effect of button hold is started. It has been reported that this has been confirmed. In the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and “00:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (21).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (22), in response to the result of the mini game, at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the first hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode is displayed as “ It is informed that the character “press” is added and the operation effect of holding the button is started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Yoshisha” is displayed, celebrating the player. After the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the character “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11, or “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11. May be added to the timer notice display TM1N after the character is added, or the first hold may be performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00". The character “push” may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and a certain notice effect produced as a result is performed for the same hold icon.

  FIG. 110 (23) shows a state in which the operation validity period related to the button-hold operation effect has been started due to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N being “00:00”, and the decorative symbol display In the device 208, the timer notice display TM1N is not erased, and the characters "Press and hold change" are displayed to explain the game.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 110 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1N, the characters "extremely hot hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has become a highly reliable display mode. In addition, a character “next hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the next symbol variation display is high.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the button-hold operation effect is started, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the button-hold operation effect is not started. In the change display (symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and, as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N has been deleted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect following FIG. 109 (18). The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (19a) following FIG. 109 (18), it is shown that the number icon face BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. I have. In the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is continuing, and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (19a).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, and the operation validity period elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. The production starts. At this time, "x" is displayed at the left end point among the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. . At this time, the countdown is continued in the timer notice display TM1N, and “03:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (20a).

  After that, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line in accordance with the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 111 (21a), in the decorative design display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is one of three end points. Is shown as having reached the end point on the left side of. That is, a state in which the result of the mini game based on the lottery is derived is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the bancho's face icon BCHO has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, and the mission has failed, and the operation production of button hold has not been started. Will be notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continued, and “00:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (21a).

  As shown in FIG. 111 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearing animation during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1N, and erases the timer notice display TM1N. It is shown. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the operation effect of holding the button as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N, it is notified that the notice that the operation effect of holding the button is performed is a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM1N is erased during the countdown before “00:00”, indicating that a certain effect (button holding operation effect) was not performed. it can.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (23a), a state where the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (24a), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 changes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (25a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the button hold display mode to the default display mode is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, since the mini-game failed, the operation effect of holding the button was not performed, and the operation failed. In the case where the operation effect of the button hold is not performed and a misfire is ended, a loss easily occurs in the symbol change display based on the hold of the button hold target, but a big hit may be caused.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 111 (26a), the temporary symbol due to the swing fluctuation is determined by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. A stop is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (27a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 109 to 110. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 112 (1) to (7) are the same as FIGS. 109 (1) to (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (8), the grandmother character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character “Uhihi” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has failed. . In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and thereby, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 is a false timer notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (9), the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is to be performed is a false announcement. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (10), a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased is shown.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 finalizes and displays the lost decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (14), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode, and the display mode is the prefetch display mode. In this effect example, the result of the mini-game was a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain advance effect was not changed by the timer advance effect, but the display mode of the hold icon was not dependent on the timer advance effect. Is performed, and even if the result of the mini game is a failure, the result of the effect (the holding icon changes to the holding icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 110 and described above, when the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, the mini game is switched to the mini game as shown in FIG. 112 and described above. Although a big hit is made more likely than in the case where the display failed but the display mode of the hold icon has changed, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is performed. At this time, a character of “next hot ze” is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the next symbol change display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 113 (1) and FIG. 113 (2) are the same as FIG. 103 (1) and FIG. 103 (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (3) shows a state in which the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character with the longest character appears, and a display indicating the roll of “1” on the dice Is displayed, and the display state of the hold icon changes when the appearance of the die "1" is stopped and displayed after the mini-game is started. In this mini-game, the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (5), a state is shown in which the symbol of the dice has started to fluctuate.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the symbol of the dice in a mode indicating a roll of "3", indicating that the roll has not become a roll for accomplishing the mission. ing. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is notified that the advance notice that a certain advance effect is to be performed is a false announcement. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown starts, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 and erases the timer notice display TM1. ing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (8) shows a state in which the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. As shown in FIG. 113 (9), the temporary symbol due to the swing fluctuation is determined by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. A stop is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In the example of the effect, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. However, the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the case where the result is derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, there is a possibility that a certain announcement effect is performed compared to the case where the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, and the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 114 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 114 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in a default display mode. Also, in this effect example, a 7-segment display device SEG composed of 4-digit 7-segments is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is configured to emit light in full color for each segment. Further, the 7-segment display device SEG is provided, for example, on the front frame door 106, but may be provided on the ball storage door 108 and the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 114 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the change icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (3) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, indicating that a certain notice effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. Also, the timer notice display has been started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and “0300” is displayed in a white light emission mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (5). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (7), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “start action” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved. Have been. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed, thereby notifying that the timer countdown of the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started. Also, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and “0275” is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer announcement effect is performed by each of the plurality of devices is shown. Here, when the timer announcement effect by a plurality of devices is performed at the same time, a certain effect may be more easily started than when the timer announcement effect by one timer announcement display is performed, and the reliability of the big hit may be improved. The degree may be high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (10), the holding change animation is started at the second holding icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second holding icon h12 may change. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to holding” is displayed to urge attention to a change in the display mode of the holding icon. In the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (10), “01:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. “0175” is displayed on the segment display device SEG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (11), at the timing when the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed to the default display mode. Changes from the display mode to the button hold display mode, and becomes the display mode of the pre-reading. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. . After the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. Alternatively, at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. It may change. In this effect example, two timer advance displays are performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. However, the timer advance display is performed by only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. May be performed. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain announcement effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are performed. When the timer notice display is performed only in one of the above, a certain notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the big hit may be increased as the number of displayed timer notice displays increases. For example, when there is one timer advance display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain advance effect, and when there are two timer advance displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is as a certain advance effect. If the number of timer advance notice displays is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the word “button hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 116 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. 115 (1) and FIG. 115 (2) are the same as FIG. 114 (1) and FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (3), the state after the timer notice display TM1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and the timer notice effect is started is shown. This display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display form, and at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (3), “09:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. In this effect example, the time set in the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, “10:00”. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer notice display has not been started, and the display is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “09:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (4).

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (5). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “06:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (5). At this time, the timer notice display has been started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and “3000” is displayed in a red light emission mode. Here, when the light emission mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed as compared with the case where the light emission mode is white, a certain announcement effect is more easily started. Note that in this effect example, the timer notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a prefetch notice, and a certain notice effect is different from the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “04:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (7), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “03:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “start action” is displayed, indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved. Have been. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed, and thereby, it is notified that a certain notice effect to be performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started. . In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “03:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (9) shows that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (10), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to holding” is displayed to urge attention to a change in the display mode of the holding icon. In the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (11), at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the Savohani display mode. Changes to a pre-read display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is deleted when the countdown is completed. Further, a character of "hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol change display.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 116 (13) following FIG. 115 (12), the decorative symbol of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7” The temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the display of characters and the change icon h0 displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display maintains “3000”.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (16), “2978” is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (17), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size at the upper center. Specifically, the character of "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, and a state in which the mini game by the amiduji has been started is shown. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the bancho face appears in the Amida field and is located on the right side of the three options. In addition, a character “select” is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the bancho face. . Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2833” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (17).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2580” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (18).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left of the three options in the Amida field is selected, and the operation validity period elapses, the effect of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either “○” indicating success or “X” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "o" is displayed at the right end point. ing. Note that the number of displayed “○” may be two or more, or “、” may be displayed at all end points. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rule of the lottery. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still counting down, and “2411” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (20), a state is shown in which the number icon face BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, a state in which the result of the mini game based on the lottery is derived is shown. In this example, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face reaches the end point on the right side where “○” is displayed, and the character “Yataze” is displayed near the navigation character YM. However, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is determined to be displayed. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2236” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (20).

  Thereafter, the mini-game ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “waiting for intense heat” is displayed, and it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a with a high reliability of the big hit appears. In addition, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2185” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the “decoration 5” is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 116 (22), the ornament symbol display device 208 lowers the center of the display screen. Is displayed, and it is notified that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “2005” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (22).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. Also, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “1927” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (23).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG has changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode that changes to a multicolor. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is more easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed or a certain effect may be started. In addition, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “1737” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 (25) following FIG. 116 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the main character, and the enemy swordsman confront each other, in the super-reach (swordsman reach). Is done. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “1010” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (26), the button continuous hitting effect has been started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “0500” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (26). After that, the operation validity period of the effect button 136 starts.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button continuous hit effect. The strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to success as a result of the mini-game by the Ami lottery. It is displayed, and it is reported that the sense of expectation of the jackpot is dramatically increased. At this time, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed. In addition, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and “0200” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (27).

  Then, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “0000”, the character whose length is broken and the character “Premier” appear on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. Then, the state of the premiere notice is being shown. This informs the player that the big hit has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, a certain target effect is different between the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol change display from the start to the end, but the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is two symbol change effects. This shows that the operation is performed over the display. It should be noted that the target notice display may be different between the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be performed over a big hit game and a symbol change display performed after the big hit game is finished. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed by the 7-segment display device SEG, a premium notice as a certain notice effect was performed. A fake timer announcement effect to be performed may be performed. Further, a fake timer announcement effect in which a certain announcement effect is not performed may be performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premium notice is performed, the symbol change display (the symbol change display) is performed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the premium notice is not performed. Display), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (29), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist of the hero defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative pattern display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to congratulate the big hit. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Premier Appears” is displayed to inform that the premiere notice has been given.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (30), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5” is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

  FIG. 118 is a view stepwisely illustrating an example of the effect in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 118 (1) is, for example, an effect example subsequent to FIG. 117 (31), and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to combine the large decorative symbols of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5”. Shows the state that is confirmed and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (2) shows a state in which a big hit game has been started and a big hit start effect has been performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 5" which is a big hit symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a copanda character with a fan is celebrating the big hit in the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. In the 7-segment display device SEG, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all segments in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG. For example, “7777” may be displayed, or a number string for word matching may be displayed. Such a display may be performed to, for example, give a notice of a reserved villa in which a big hit occurs in the hold, or give a notice that the state will change to a certain state after the big hit game is over.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (3) shows a state where the third round has started. The character "LED attention" is displayed on the right side of the copanda character, suggesting that a notice effect will be performed.

  Then, in FIG. 118 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off in front, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. , A mini game is started. In this mini game, the result according to the game state after the big hit game can be displayed, and if the game state after the big hit game becomes a certain change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), an effect is produced. As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, there is a case where an effect is achieved in which the mini-game is successful because the bancho's clothes are broken. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation validity period for accepting a button continuous tapping effect is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, “1000” is displayed, and it is notified that the continuous hit of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation effective period) starts. This timer display starts the countdown when the operation valid period starts after the transition to the fourth round. The display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, but may be a mode in which light is emitted in another color. You may make it different. Also, for example, a timer display (for example, a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") indicating another time is performed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation validity period. By doing so, a premiere notice that the mini-game is always successful may be given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (6), a state in which the process is shifted to the fourth round is shown. In the fourth round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "" is displayed together with the button image 136a to urge the user to repeatedly press the effect button 136. In addition, the operation valid period for receiving the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 starts, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (6), “0800” is displayed, indicating that two seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation validity period. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display sometimes functions as a timer notice effect, and indicates that the timer notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. Note that the timer announcement effect and the mini game need not be started at the same time.

  FIG. 118 (7) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the staging operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to “0500”, and it is notified that the remaining time of the operation effective period is 5 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (8), the characters “sorry” and “next time saving” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. Thus, after the end of the big hit game, it is notified that the game shifts to the time saving state (the special figure low probability general figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability change state.

  FIGS. 118 (5a) to (8a) show another effect example following FIG. 118 (4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (5a), a state in which the above-described mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the mini game is likely to succeed. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer ("1000") is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for receiving a button continuous-stroke effect is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 118 (6a) to (7a) are performed. Note that FIGS. 118 (6a) to (7a) are the same as FIGS. 118 (6) to (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (8a), while the clothes of the character of the chief character can be broken, the characters "awakening of the chief character" and "probable change next time" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. Accordingly, it is informed that the state will be shifted to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing step by step a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 119 is a special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, and the reserved icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reserved state of the special figure 1 Is displayed. In the reserved icon display area, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in a default display mode (circular solid pattern). And a white display mode). On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed.

  Also, in this effect example, an error display "Please remove the ball" (bottom plate full error display ERR1) is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a bottom plate full error occurs. It is reported that you are doing. Since such an error allows the game to be continued, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while performing error notification. In addition, when it is detected that the error which is the target of the error notification is eliminated (for example, when the lower plate full detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full error is eliminated), the lower plate full error display ERR1 is displayed. Is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. Will be displayed as In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (2), the lower plate full error has not been eliminated, and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started five seconds after the countdown starts. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (3), the lower plate full error has not yet been resolved, and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. For this reason, the player may hurry to remove the ball from the lower plate while watching this display state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM1 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (4), “04:25” is displayed in the timer advance display TM1. . In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Pseudo-Length” is displayed, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that the pseudo-learn may be performed. I have. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (4), the lower plate full error has not been eliminated yet, the lower plate full error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full error display ERR1. Have been.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (5). Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (5), the lower plate full error has not been solved yet, the lower plate full error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full error display ERR1. Have been.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (6), since the lower plate has been removed by the player, the lower plate full error has been eliminated and the lower plate full error display ERR1 has been erased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 119 (7) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 119 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 69 (7) to FIG.

  In the timer announcement effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed by counting down the timer display is displayed.For example, when a timer announcement effect is performed, the timer display in the timer announcement display is displayed as “ 00:00 ", and display such as" May be on hold change at "33:00" "or" Generate strong cut-in at 25:00 ", and count up the timer display. A certain effect may be configured to be performed when the designated time has come.

  Further, in the timer announcement effect described above, as a certain effect, a description has been given of an example of a hold change effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, display of a cut-in image, and a jackpot confirmation notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect that enters a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice effect, or the like may be used.

  Further, in the timer announcement effect described above, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is changed by changing the color of the timer announcement display. In this case, for example, red> green> yellow> blue> white When the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be determined. In addition, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain announcement effect may be necessarily performed. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, the big hit expectation is obtained in a relationship of blue <white. Alternatively, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the seven-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the seven-segment display device SEG is larger. May be made more reliable.

  Also, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit symbol is more visible than when the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. For example, the combination of the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may greatly improve the reliability of the big hit, such as the case where the fixed display is easily performed. Further, the color of the timer notice display in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. Compared with the case (the former), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the timer notice display, the timer display is performed only on the 7-segment display device SEG, and when the emission color is red (the latter), the latter is performed. May be higher in the reliability of the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, an example of a display mode of a timer advance display displayed when the timer advance effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the timer notice display.

  FIG. 120A shows an example in which “7:77” is displayed as the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 when the timer advance effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of jackpot decoration patterns, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (a) starts the timer notice effect. If it is displayed occasionally, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice to determine a big hit. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120A is displayed, a combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” may be displayed as a notice to be derived. When the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to a certain change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended play will occur.

  FIG. 120B shows an example in which “99:99” is displayed as the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 when the timer advance effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shorter than the symbol change time. However, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. Is longer than the time from the start of the display to the stop display of the symbol, and the time during which the countdown is recognized as not being completed during the fluctuation. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premium timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to the certainty change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended mansion will occur.

  The timer display shown in FIG. 120 (b) is the largest numerical value that can be represented by a decimal number, but as shown in FIG. 120 (c), displays the largest numerical value that can be represented by a hexadecimal number. You may do so. In this case, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 120B may be expected.

  FIG. 120D shows an example in which “7:58” is displayed as the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 when the timer advance effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of a word match for "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. , A premium timer display can be used as a notice to determine the big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to the certainty change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended mansion will occur.

  FIG. 120 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) reminiscent of a word match for “Mt. Fuji” which is the highest mountain in Japan. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 displayed when the timer notification effect is started, “0” is displayed for all digits shorter than one second, The timer display is characterized in that digits of less than one second are also displayed. It should be noted that the timer display displayed as the premium timer display is not limited to the above, and various ones can be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 120 (f) shows an example in which “hit” is displayed as a timer display of the timer advance display TM1 when the timer advance effect is started. When the timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that the big hit has been confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, the timer notice display TM1 can be used as a premium timer display as a notice to determine a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to the certainty change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended mansion will occur.

  FIG. 120 (g) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode in which the timer notice effect may be changed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display form of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (g) is a rainbow display form in which the display is changed in multiple colors, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display form, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to the certainty change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended mansion will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premium timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

  FIG. 120 (h) shows a timer notice display TM1 of a display mode that may be displayed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 120 (h) is a display mode in which the character SBHN of Savohani is added to the four corners. When the timer advance display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to the certainty change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a held extended mansion will occur.

  In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display a timer display in a square frame, the timer notice display TM1 having a display mode with a different frame shape may be displayed as the premium timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in a circular frame may be the premium timer display.

  In addition, the timer notice display TM1 of the above-mentioned premium timer display may start the display and then perform a countdown, but may end the timer notice effect without performing the countdown, The big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed during the countdown, and the timer announcement effect may be ended. In addition, when the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 of the premium timer display is started, a certain notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mini-game for notifying whether the timer notice effect is true or false based on the derivation result has been described, but this mini-game may be applied to any of the timer notice effects described above. Can be.

  FIG. 121 to FIG. 167 are views showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 121 to 167, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 121 to 167, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated. However, as illustrated in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. 121. And FIG. 123 are views showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 122. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (1), a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 5−decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 121 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 121 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and all three of the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are: It is displayed in a default display mode (a round, blank, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 121 is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), so that the power chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 121 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. , The third holding icon h13 moves to the display position of the second holding icon h12, and is displayed as the second holding icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal portion of less than 1 second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “timer activation” is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (5) shows that the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that a certain effect will be started three seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal fraction of less than 1 second. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “09:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (5). In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (6), “01:25” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display is also continued in the first timer notice display TM11, and “07:25” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (7), when the countdown in the second timer advance display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display in the vicinity of the navigation character YM occurs. , "Attention to hold" is displayed to alert the user to a change in hold, and a hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, so that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can change. Is reported. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes "00:00". Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continuing, and “06:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the display mode is the prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “change on hold” is displayed, and it is notified that a pre-reading notice due to the change on hold has been performed. Note that the character display of “hold change” may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the character display of “hold change” has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of “hold change” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is still continuing, and “05:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (8). Note that the second timer notice display TM12 has been deleted. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon starts. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is to be changed) than in the case where it is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (9), a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (9), “05: 11 "is displayed. In addition, at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “pending change completed” indicating that the pending change has been performed is displayed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer notice effect is reported by the icon is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Yamaru” is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that the notice display by the timer notice effect may be further performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which inspires a sense of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (12), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Then, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-ream!” Is displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo-ream will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 has been completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance effects are overlapped, and one timer advance display (second timer advance display TM12) is functioning as a prefetch advance notice. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 has been deleted. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 has been erased, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo run may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo run is started. Then, the first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second decorative symbol change display by the pseudo run may be started at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (14), a state is shown in which the pseudo-random display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Then, a replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous production has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of "timer notice by SP development" is displayed, and a mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing to super reach is being started. Are also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is completed, the timer announcement effect is started, and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to expect that the timer announcement effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (19) following FIG. 121 (18), a state in which normal reach is continuously performed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and does not shift to the super reach. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of symbols. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL have been erased, and the character “Sorry” displayed near the navigation character YM has also been erased. Note that the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the swinging of the decorative symbol starts, or the swinging fluctuation of the decorative symbol after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decoration symbol starts. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one sequentially.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, changes to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the advance display mode regarding the symbol change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (24), a state in which two timer announcement effects are started simultaneously is shown. In this effect example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. In the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 30 seconds elapse after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, in the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown, a certain effect is started. Suggests that In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds and 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Has been suggested to be initiated. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Is also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer advance display respectively start countdown (subtraction display). At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (25), the third timer advance display TM13 displays "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, a state in which 0.55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "attention to timer" is displayed, and a warning for a timer announcement effect is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (26), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the third timer notice TM13 and the fourth timer notice TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (26), "28:02" is displayed in the third timer notice TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, "08:02" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (27), "27:75" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, "06:75" is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (28), “25:23” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, "05:23" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (29), a state in which normal reach is started and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed is shown. In addition, the character "Now is coming" is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display in the fourth timer announcement display TM14 may count up and the announcement effect may start soon. Have been. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (29), "23:16" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. In the fourth timer notice display TM14, "03:16" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (30), a state in which normal reach is continuously performed is shown. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown is still continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (30), "21:80" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, a large number of characters SBHN of Sabohani cross on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohani group notice is given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (31), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be regarded as an example of an effect. Incidentally, the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (31).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (32), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 has been deleted. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “18:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (33), a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other, developing into super reach (swordsman reach). At the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “12:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “timer attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (34).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (35), the timer notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display in the third timer notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Have been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (36), the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is reduced, and “03:00” is displayed in the third timer advance display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, by changing the timer display while the countdown is being displayed, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect performed by the timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (37) following FIG. 122 (36) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. . In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance effects overlap, and both of the timer advance displays (the third timer advance display TM13 and the fourth timer advance display TM14) are the symbol fluctuations during execution. A state in which the display functions as an advance notice (the advance notice of the change) is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". In addition, in this effect example, an example is described in which an effect (advance effect) that is executed as a result of performing the timer advance effect may not be notified by an icon. Here, the fact that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been executed may be notified by an icon.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (39) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. 124. is there. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 124 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 121 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (3) shows a state in which the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice displays start simultaneously. Is done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display, and it is indicated that a certain effect starts when three seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Suggests. In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect occurs both when 3 seconds and 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 3 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may be started when 16 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Is also good.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (4), “14:75” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. "01:75" is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state in which 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timing at which the countdown in the second timer advance display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes “00:00”. , A character of “entering prefetch mode” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a state in which the prefetch mode is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12, the prefetch mode is executed as a certain effect. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 124 (6), the second timer notice display TM12 is erased, and a "prefetch mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is reported to have entered. In addition, at this time, the character of "entering pre-reading mode" displayed near the navigation character YM has been deleted. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “12:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer announcement display TM11, the countdown continues, and “08:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 4”. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “05:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (10).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (11). Note that the prefetch mode is continued even after the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (12), the character “attention to holding” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11. That the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 124 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (13), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the first timer advance display TM11 is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “change in hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, the pre-reading notice due to the change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is shown. Furthermore, in this effect example, the target of the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the target of the pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice effect are the same symbol variation. An example in which display is performed is shown. Note that, in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes “00:00”, or the first timer notice display TM11 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. May be “00:00”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. In addition, the character of “suspended change” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 4”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (19) subsequent to FIG. 124 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol change display on the display device 212 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, changes to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the advance display mode regarding the symbol change. The pre-reading mode is continued even after the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (23) shows a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby developing into super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that evolves into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with an image of the character's character being up. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the number face is not arranged around the character of “game” in the balloon, and has a larger hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it indicates that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with “chance”, indicating that the degree of expectation of the big hit is increasing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (27), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (27), a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 increases by one. The number display is “1”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (28) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of the plurality of timer notice effects is started simultaneously, and both timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) function as the pre-read notice. Is shown. Further, a state is shown in which both of the timer advance notices (the first timer advance notice TM11 and the second timer advance notice TM12) function as prefetch notices for the same symbol variation display.

  Also, in this effect example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes “00:00”, but instead at “00:00” when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect In some cases, the relationship with can be clarified.

  In this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects was started at the same time. However, the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed to a symbol change display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. May be started after the start. In other words, the timing of starting the display of the timer notice display of the plurality of timer notice effects is the same, but the timing of starting the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

  Also, in this effect example, a prefetch notice (display of a pre-read mode, display of a hold icon in a prefetch display mode) as a certain effect is started in each of the different symbol variation displays. The notice may be started.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 127 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 126. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 126 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 121 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (3) shows a state in which the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice displays start simultaneously. Is done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started six seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, since the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect occurs both when 6 seconds and 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 6 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Is also good.

  Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 and the second timer advance display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 126 (4), the first timer advance display TM11 is displayed. , "05:75" are displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (5), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the center of the display screen, the character of "item get when princess appears" is displayed, and when a princess character appears from the treasure chest, a notice item (sometimes referred to as "notice icon") may be obtained. It is suggested that you can. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Select with cross key” is displayed, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and select a treasure box. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (5), “05:60” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer In the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (6). , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM11, the countdown is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 126 (6), "04:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11 and the second timer “08:37” is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character “SET RIGHT” is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (7), "03:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “07:00” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (8), the effect of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. Will be erased. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Open" is displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (8), "02:50" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11 and the second timer "06:50" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character of “item get” is displayed. "Taze" is displayed, and it is reported that the mini-game was successful and the notice item was acquired. This suggests that in the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11, it is assured that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME indicates that the announcement item has been obtained as a certain production. At this time, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (9), “01:50” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. In the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is performed, and the effect may be enlivened by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until “00:00”).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (10), when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as a super reach notice item on the first timer notice display TM11. Is added to the first timer notice display TM11. By displaying the super-reach notice item in this way, the execution of super-reach may be visually easy to understand. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect. The swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed after the swordsman character KNG is displayed. The timer display may be “00:00”. Note that the countdown is continued in the second timer notice display TM12, and “04:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (10).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from “00:00” to “SP waiting”, and this display starts super reach. Continue until In other words, whether the super reach corresponding to the display of “SP waiting” and the display of the swordsman character KNG as the notice item in the first timer notice display TM11 occurs in the symbol change display at this time, It is said that it is difficult to determine whether or not it will occur in the next and subsequent symbol change displays. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “03:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (12), the character of “attention to holding” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11. That the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “01:80” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (13), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “change in hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “hold change”, a panda character PND is added, and the hold icon A state in which the display mode has been changed is shown. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect is reported in the timer advance display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, the character of “suspended change” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 4”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (19) following FIG. 126 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol change display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special map 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, changes to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the advance display mode regarding the symbol change. Note that the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer notice display TM11 in which the character of the swordsman KNG is added and the character "SP waiting" is displayed is displayed. Has been continued. That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11 was a pre-reading announcement that super-reach would be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. At this time, the character “hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically increased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. At this time, in the first timer notice display TM11, it is notified that the digestion animation is started, and that the character KNG of the swordsman as a notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Note that the animation for digesting the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digestion animation for the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Then, the digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (23) shows a state where a strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and near the navigation character YM, the character of "strong cut-in" is displayed. This indicates that CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (27), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 includes "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 127 (28) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a plurality of timer advance effects are all executed as a pre-reading advance, and a certain event executed as a result of at least one timer advance effect being performed. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a pre-read notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is known when the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading, is performed as a pre-reading advance notice targeting any of the same symbol variation displays, so that the same symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the anticipation of a big hit can be drastically increased by performing the target pre-reading notice in combination.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 129 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 128. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 128 (1) to (15) are the same as FIGS. 126 (1) to (15), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. You. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (18), in the first timer notice display TM11, the digestion animation is started, and the swordsman character KNG as the notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Is done. In other words, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this effect example has functioned as a notice that super reach will be executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer notice effects functions as a prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, an example is described in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of performing each of the plurality of timer advance effects is a prefetch notice or an advance notice in the symbol variation display. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (19) following FIG. 128 (18), “SP development!” Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that it will develop into super reach. I have. In addition, in this example of production, the Sabohani group notice was not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 is silently erased upon shifting to super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added along with a “chance” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Suggests that it is up.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (22), the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer notice effects is executed as a pre-read notice, and the other is the notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display to be the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, there is a case where the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased in any of the symbol variation displays that have been subjected to the timer announcement effect.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 130 (1) and FIG. 130 (2) are the same as FIG. 121 (1) and FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice displays start simultaneously. Is done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started six seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display, and it is indicated that a certain effect is started two seconds after the countdown is started. Suggests. In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds and 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer advance notices TM11 and TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (4), “05:75” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. "01:75" is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (5), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (5), "05:20" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "01:20" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (6), when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (7), in the second timer notice display TM12, the display of “Hold + 1UP” is performed instead of the display of “00:00”, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It is notified that the display mode has changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (8), the holding change animation is further started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may further change. You. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (9), when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display of the number length. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of the look-ahead stepped up from the display mode of the panda. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect in which the display mode of the held icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is performed as a certain mode performed as a result of the timer advance mode by the first timer advance display TM11. Have been. Also, in this effect example, it is shown that certain effects executed as a result of the execution of the two timer announcement effects are both performed on the same symbol variation display. Note that, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon changed from the default display mode is further changed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11. There may be. Further, a hold icon for changing the display mode as a result of the timer advance display effect on the first timer advance display TM11 and a display mode as a result of the timer advance display effect on the second timer advance display TM12 are changed. The hold icons may be different. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, "Hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of the display of "00:00", and the notification and the notification in the second timer notice display TM12 are performed. In addition, it is reported that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (13), a third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed. As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 4”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon for the same symbol change display was performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (7) following FIG. The holding change animation is started for the second holding icon h12 in addition to the first holding icon h11, and the display mode of both the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 may change. May be notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (9 ′), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the number length. While changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and further, a display mode of another hold icon. An example in which an effect of changing is performed is shown.

  In this effect example, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in two stages as a result of each of the two timer announcement effects in the same symbol change display. A change effect of the display mode may be performed.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 132 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 131. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 131 (1) and FIG. 131 (2) are the same as FIG. 121 (1) and FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (3) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. Thus, in this effect example, the contents of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect are suggested by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “timer activation” is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (5) shows that the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “04:00” is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12, indicating that a certain effect is started when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, a panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “09:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (5). In addition, a character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “08:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (7), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice and a display indicating “hold change”. Is performed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, when the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “mini game start” is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (7), “08:60” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “03:60” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. Note that the button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (9), as shown in FIG. 131 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a roll of “1”, and the character “Success” is displayed, indicating that the roll has been achieved in the mini-game. Is reported. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Ya-taze” is displayed to inform that the mini-game has been successfully performed. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed. Note that the countdown is still continuing in the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (10), “06:00” is displayed in the first timer advance notice TM11 and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “02:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (11), the character of “attention to holding” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11. That the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is still continued in the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "01:88" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display length. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character "Hot" is displayed, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a highly reliable display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “05:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “Heavy hot hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the big hit. A state in which the display mode has been changed to a high display mode is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “04:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (14). . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention to right timer" is displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (15) shows that the mini game has been started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right at the center of the display screen, and a cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. ing. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is performed. In addition, a character “Get a Princess” is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that a princess character may appear in a treasure chest to display a notice. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “04:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (15).

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The right treasure box image BXR is shown. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “02:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (16).

  After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has elapsed, the character “Select Right” is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the image BXR has been selected as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at "02:50". However, the countdown may be continued.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (18), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “pseudo-ren” is displayed. "Success" is displayed to inform that the mini game was successful. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and “01:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (19) subsequent to FIG. 131 (18), the character “pseudo-ream” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a notice is given that the pseudo-ream will be started. . Also, at this time, the decorative design is enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “00:78” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (19).

  Then, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (20), and when “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped simultaneously, and “decoration 5” -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "is displayed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In this way, in this effect example, for example, when it is determined that the pseudo-run is to be performed, the game is smoothly stopped by displaying the three symbols simultaneously without stopping and displaying the decorative symbols one by one. May be allowed to proceed. Also in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (21), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. In addition, in the first timer notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", the display of "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (22), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (23), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which normal reach is performed and the medium symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (26) shows a state in which normal reach is continuously performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (27), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during the normal reach, and the fluctuation is caused by the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”. A temporary stop has been performed. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the character will be lost.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 that has notified that the pseudo-run has been performed is also deleted. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the commander, the display of "extreme hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer is notified according to the result (success) of the mini game.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 134 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 133. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 133 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 131 (1) to (9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (9), as shown in FIG. 133 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the appearance of "3", and the character of "regret" is displayed, and the achievement of the mission in the mini-game is not achieved. Is reported. That is, it is reported that the mission has failed. In addition, the character of “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, according to the result of the mini game, the display mode of the hold icon is changed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12. Gives different results. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (10), “06:00” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “02:00” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (11), the character of “attention to holding” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, That the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown is still continuing in the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (11), “05:88” is displayed in the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. "01:88" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. In addition, the character "slightly hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a little higher reliability. That is, it can be said that it is suggested that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the commander, but higher than the default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “05:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “chance hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. A state in which a change has been made to the display mode of the prefetch notice is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “04:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (14). . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention to right timer" is displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (15) shows that the mini game has been started. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 133 (15) to (17) are different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 131 (15) to (17) in the display mode of the first hold icon h11. , Except that the display content of the second timer notice display TM12 is different, and therefore the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (18), the grandmother character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the character “Uhihi” is displayed, and “Sorry” is also displayed near the navigation character YM. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 131, when the mini game fails, it is indicated that the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11 was a false notice effect. It is suggested that pseudo-sequence production as a production is not performed. In the first timer notice TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (18). When the mini-game fails, the reach effect may be performed instead of performing the pseudo continuous effect in the reach state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 134 (19) subsequent to FIG. 133 (18), the decorative symbol is shown enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen. Note that, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “00:78” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (20), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and “decoration 5” A decoration pattern combination of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is displayed, and a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. −Decoration 4 ”is determined and displayed in a combination of the lost decorative patterns. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In this way, in this effect example, for example, when it is determined that the pseudo-run is not performed and the loss is determined, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, and the three symbols are simultaneously stopped and displayed. In some cases, the game can proceed smoothly. Also in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 136 stepwise shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 135. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 135 (1) and FIG. 135 (2) are the same as FIG. 121 (1) and FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the timer notice effect is started when the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “08:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect will be started eight seconds after the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-run will be started as a certain effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (4), “07:75” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “timer activation” is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (5) shows that the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “04:00” is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12, indicating that a certain effect is started when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, a panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “07:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (5). In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "06:75" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (7) shows a state in which the dice mini game has been started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice and a display indicating “hold change”. Is performed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, when the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “mini game start” is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (7), "06:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, “03:60” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (8), the variable symbol display is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and it is notified that the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the game is started. The user is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. In this example, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

  FIGS. 135 (9) to (10) show a state in which the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the dice mini game is continued. That is, a state is shown in which the dice mini game has been started but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (10), “04:35” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (11) shows a state in which the symbol of the dice during the variable display and the button image 136a move to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that another effect is performed overlapping with the running dice mini-game. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. "01:22" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (12), another mini game (treasure box mini game) starts while the dice mini game is being executed. When the treasure box mini game is started, a left treasure box image BXL and a right treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and a cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 and moving the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is performed. In addition, a character “Get a Princess” is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that a princess character may appear in a treasure chest to display a notice. The dice mini-game is continuously performed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also effective. Further, the countdown is still continued in the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (12), “04:00” is displayed in the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “01:00” is displayed.

  Thus, in this production example, during the period in which one mini-game related to one of the two timer advance productions is being played, one mini-game related to the other timer advance production is performed. It is shown that there is a period in which a plurality of mini-games are performed at the same time as a result. In other words, at least a period during which one mini-game related to one timer notice production among a plurality of timer notice productions is performed and a period when one mini game related to another timer notice production is performed. Partial overlap is shown.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (13), as shown in FIG. 135 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (14), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a roll of "1", and it is notified that the dice has been rolled out in the mini game. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed. In this example of the effect, the result of the mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the dice symbol. However, the character display of “success” is displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. May be displayed. On the other hand, the countdown is still continuing in the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (14), "03:75" is displayed in the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer “00:75” is displayed in the notice display TM12. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is also continuously performed, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (15), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 changes. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown is interrupted. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (15), the first timer advance notice TM11 remains "03:75" and the second timer In the notice display TM12, “00:75” remains. Also at this time, the treasure chest mini game is continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

  After that, the countdown of the timer display in the two timer advance displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted, and when the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the number, and the display mode of the look-ahead with high reliability is obtained. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (16), it is “03:00”. Also at this time, the treasure chest mini game is continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “Heavy hot hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the big hit. A state in which the display mode has been changed to a high display mode is shown. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (17). Also, at this time, a state is shown in which the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR have moved to the left with the end of the dice mini game. In addition, the treasure box mini game is continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (18) to 136 (26) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 135 (18) to 136 (26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 131 (16) to 132 (24), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 136 (26), the strong symbol of Sabohani group notice is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (27). At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (28), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops to super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 136 (32) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (33), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 138 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 137. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 137 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 121 (1) to (9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “04:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo-run”, which excites the expectation that a pseudo-sequence effect will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “02:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (11). In addition, the character “NO!” Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is denied that the pseudo-run is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect according to the first timer notification display TM11. It has been suggested that

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (12), the timer notice change animation (timer notice addition animation) is started during the countdown display in the first timer notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark has been added together with the character of “group notice”, and as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, It has been suggested that a Sabohani herd rather than a pseudo-run could be given. Thus, in this effect example, the possibility that a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11 is not a pseudo-sequence but another effect is notified. As a result, the player may be able to have an expectation that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is completed will be an effect having a higher reliability of the big hit than the pseudo-run.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (13), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added, and “15:03” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, a question mark is added to the character “group notice” near the navigation character YM, suggesting that a Sabohani group notice may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-run will be performed as a certain effect. is there. In addition, even if the timer notice change animation is performed, there is no change in the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display, and eventually, a pseudo-run may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, an example has been described in which the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added. However, the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 may be added. Further, the timer display may not only be added, but also subtracted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo consecutive symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this demonstration example, the pseudo-sequence effect in which the pseudo-sequence symbol is stopped and displayed is a different effect from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect performed on the first timer notice display TM11. It has been. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Yes!” Is displayed so as to respond to the display of “Group notice” in FIG. 137 (13), and a timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11. Is notified that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the execution is a Sabohani group announcement. In this production example, although the pseudo production is performed in spite of the fact that a certain production is not a pseudo production, the pseudo production may not be performed. However, a pseudo continuous production may be always performed. In addition, a certain effect is a pseudo continuous effect, and by adding a timer display, another effect (Savohani group notice) may be a certain effect, which corresponds to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of effects to be performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “14:60” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (15), the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “14:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “06:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:13” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (18).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (19) following FIG. 137 (18), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a strong signal. Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is performed instead of a pseudo-run as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 is shown. Note that the Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. As shown in FIG. 138 (19), when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the panda icon PND is ended.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a Sabohani icon SBH is displayed to notify that a Sabohani group notice has occurred.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and near the navigation character YM, the character “strong cut-in” is displayed. This indicates that CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

  Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (24) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 139 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 121 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (3), a state where the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, two timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer notice displays simultaneously start. Is done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "60:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, by displaying "60:00" on the first timer notice display TM11, it is suggested that super reach has occurred. For example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is displayed as a cut-in image. Is suggested. In other words, the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11 looks as if it functions as an announcement relating to the currently-running symbol variation display. In the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display, and it is indicated that a certain effect is started two seconds after the countdown is started. Suggests. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (4) to (7) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (4) to (7) in the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 by 54 seconds. Are the same except for, and the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (8), a character of “timer attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice display TM11 is alerted. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “56:85” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (8).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (9), the timer notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display in the first timer notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (10), the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 is reduced, and “02:00” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. As described above, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is assumed that the timer notice effect is being executed as a prefetch notice, and in fact, the symbol change display being executed is actually displayed. There is a production that turns out to have been performed as a notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (11), the holding change animation is further started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may further change. You. Note that the countdown continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “01:20” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (11).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display of the number length. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of the look ahead stepped up from the display mode of the panda. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect in which the display mode of the held icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is performed as a certain mode performed as a result of the timer advance mode by the first timer advance display TM11. Have been. Also, in this effect example, it is shown that certain effects executed as a result of the execution of the two timer announcement effects are both performed on the same symbol variation display. Also, in this effect example, at the beginning of the effect, the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 are executed as notice effects for different symbol change displays. After that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM11 performed on the same symbol variation display thereafter. Since it is determined that the game is a game, it may be possible to make the game surprising. In other words, from the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, at the beginning of the display, it is suggested that a notice to be performed during the super-reach has occurred, but the timer display is shortened. In addition, the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display as that of the second timer announcement display TM12 is performed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, so that the pre-reading advance for the same symbol variation display is performed in combination. As a result, there is a case where the degree of expectation for the big hit can be drastically improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, "Hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of the display of "00:00", and the notification and the notification in the second timer notice display TM12 are performed. In addition, it is reported that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (11) to (14), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12 both function as look-ahead notices for the same symbol variation display. Either of them may function as a notice for the symbol change display being executed. In any case, a combined notice is given for the same symbol change display, so that the reliability of the big hit may be further enhanced.

  In addition, the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11 and the timer announcement effect according to the second timer announcement display TM12 may be executed for different symbol variation displays. For example, one of the timer announcement effects may be executed. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and may function as a notice about the symbol change display during the other timer notice effect is being executed. In this case, the expectation for the big hit is more than when combined with the same symbol change display. May be dispersed. Further, one of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11 and the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 may be a false timer advance effect.

  FIG. 140 is a view showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 140 (1) and FIG. 140 (2) are the same as FIG. 121 (1) and FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (3), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (4), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, "60:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (5), “58:12” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.88 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) on the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb production has started. I'm done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is determined to be more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first timer notice display TM11 does not overlap with the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, a display is made to ignite the fuse wire extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM, and a display in which the fuse wire is shortened in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (7), a state in which the bomb effect continues is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (7), a state immediately before the fuse wire reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character "What", which indicates that some effect is started as a result of the bomb effect.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (8) shows a state in which the bomb image BOM explodes and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. . In this case as well, the first timer notice display TM11 is determined to be difficult to view because the effect image overlaps the first timer notice display TM11.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, a second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and a state in which two timer notice effects are started is shown. . In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “timer increase” is displayed, and it is notified that two timer announcement effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00" by resetting the timer display, and "02:00" is displayed as the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12. The first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect, and a new timer notice effect is started. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (10) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (4) to (6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, in the manner as shown in FIG. 121 (9) to FIG. 122 (36), the symbol variation display ends, the next symbol variation display starts, and after the super reach is performed, In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown at 140 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 123 (38) to (40), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 142 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 141. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 141 (1) to (3) are the same as FIGS. 140 (1) to (3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (4), a state in which the timer notice effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started three seconds after the start of the countdown.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and “02:12” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (5). Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.88 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb production has started. I'm done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is determined to be more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first timer notice display TM11 does not overlap with the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, a display is made to ignite the fuse wire extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM, and a display in which the fuse wire is shortened in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (7), a state in which the bomb effect continues is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (7), a state immediately before the fuse wire reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character "What", which indicates that some effect is started as a result of the bomb effect. In the first timer notice display TM11, the bomb image BOM makes it difficult to visually recognize, but the timer display is "00:00".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (8) shows a state in which the bomb image BOM explodes.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, a second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and a state in which two timer notice effects are started is shown. . In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “timer increase” is displayed, and it is notified that two timer announcement effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00" by resetting the timer display, and "02:00" is displayed as the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12. The first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed on the first timer notice display TM11, the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect, and two timer notice effects are newly started. I have.

  In this effect example, after the bomb image BOM explodes, as shown in FIG. 141 (9 ′), the letters “SP waiting” are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the super reach notice is displayed. An effect in which a swordsman character KNG as an item is added and an effect in which a new timer notice effect is started in the second timer notice display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "item get" is displayed, and it is notified that the notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11, two announcement effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which an announcement item is displayed, and the other is a new timer announcement effect. May be started.

  As described above, when the lower plate full error occurs after the explosion of the bomb image BOM and the start of the two timer announcement effects, a new display is performed as shown in FIG. 141 (9 ″). A ball removal error display "Please remove the ball" may be displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front sides of the started first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12. Good. According to this, there is a case where a ball emptying error can be quickly eliminated to make the timer notice display easily visible. It should be noted that the ball missing error display may be overlapped with the first timer notice display TM11 or the second timer notice display TM12.

  It should be noted that, other than the ball-off error display, for example, another error display such as a door open display or the like may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. Since the error display is an important notification content for the player, it may be possible to notice that an error has occurred by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (10) following FIG. 141 (9), the second timer advance display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" are displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display has not been started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer advance effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the second timer notice TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (11), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “01:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains at "60:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. It changes to a mode, and it becomes a display mode of a look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. In addition, the character “Hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the big hit reliability for the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is increased. Suggests improved. In the present example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes “00:00”. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes “00:00”, or the second timer notice display TM12 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. May be “00:00”. Thereafter, the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains at "60:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, respectively, and after temporarily stopping at the combination of the missing decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. , Is displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (14), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, changes to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the advance display mode regarding the symbol change.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (15), “59:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed over a plurality of symbol change displays is shown.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 143. It is. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 143 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 143 (1), one suspension icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the suspension icon display area, and is displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. Further, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed in the lower center, and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 143 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a display mode composed of one bomb, and the character “TIMER” is added above. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "Timer is on hold" is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the advance notice of the timer advance effect is displayed by displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 143 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 143 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 143 (7). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first holding icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the floating icon h0 that is the advance notification display mode of the timer advancement effect related to the symbol change is displayed. Become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (9), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when seven seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. In addition, in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, the display of “TIMER” is erased, and a state in which the head of the squib is ignited is shown. .. "Is displayed to indicate that a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed after seven seconds may be performed. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may be changed after the first timer advance display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the change icon h0 changes.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (10), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice TM11 is warned. Further, the length of the fuse wire of the change icon h0 is also reduced according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (11). In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which inspires a sense of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (12). In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character of “pseudo-run”, suggesting that a pseudo-sequence effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. are doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (13), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Then, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, the fluctuation icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, explodes, and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “pseudo-run” is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-run will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 has been completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (14), the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo run is started. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and the fluctuating icon h0 further includes “2” indicating the number of times the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run. Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, when the pseudo notice effect is performed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect, the fact that the pseudo successive effect is performed with the fluctuating icon h0 is reported. The situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 143 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 143 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (18), a strong Sabohani group notice is made. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (19) subsequent to FIG. 143 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed and “SP development!” Is displayed near the navigation character YM. , Has been reported to develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 144 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and near the navigation character YM, the character “strong cut-in” is displayed. This indicates that CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (23) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Note that, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is executed only once for one bomb display. However, even if one bomb is displayed, the timer notice effect may be executed multiple times. Is also good. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes (for example, colors and shapes) of the bombs may be prepared, and the number of timer announcement effects to be executed may be changed depending on the display modes. In this case, the timer announcement effect of the number of times corresponding to the display mode does not have to be performed. For example, the configuration may be such that the maximum number of times of execution is three, but the number of times is one.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 146 stepwise illustrates a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 145. FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (1), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 145 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 145 (1), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. Will be displayed as In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect will be started five seconds after the countdown is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (3), a mini game has also been started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, a decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, a display indicating a roll of “1” on the dice and a display of “changed on hold” are performed, and the mini game is played. After the start, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, when the roll of "1" on the die is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is foreseen to change. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “mini game start” is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. Note that the mini-game may start after the timer notice effect starts, the timer notice effect may start after the mini game starts, and the timing at which the timer notice effect starts and the mini-game starts The timing of the execution may be the same.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (4), the variable display of the dice symbol is started, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In addition, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby prompting the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the normal-sized button image 136a is displayed, that is, the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) has started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 145 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "04: 37 "is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.63 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 145 (5), as shown in FIG. 145 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (6), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a roll of “1”, and the character “Yoshi” is displayed, which is a roll of the achievement of the mission in the mini game. Is reported. That is, based on the result of the mini-game, it is determined that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11 is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “02:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 145 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (7), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 changes. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “01:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 145 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (8), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the bomb display. The character "TIMER" is added above the character, and the character "Timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 is changed to the bomb display form. It is reported that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon of the bomb display mode for announcing the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect is displayed. The state where the change effect of the mode is performed is shown. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 143, instead of displaying the hold icon of the bomb display mode at the time of starting winning, the display mode of the bomb is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example in which the display mode is changed to the hold icon is shown. A replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb, and the result of the timer notice effect performed in relation to the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb is performed. It has been suggested that a pseudo continuous production may be performed as a certain production. That is, it can be said that the preliminary announcement of the pseudo continuous production (pre-reading advance announcement) is being performed. In this example, at the timing when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to correspond to the display of the bomb, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change to the bomb display mode later, or the timer display may change to “00:00” after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the bomb display mode. ".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, a third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first holding icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the floating icon h0 that is the advance notification display mode of the timer advancement effect related to the symbol change is displayed. Become. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 145 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 145 (13) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (9) to (13), except that a replay icon is displayed in the change icon h0. The description is omitted because it is the same. Here, the timer announcement effect executed in FIGS. 145 (13) to (17) is a timer announcement effect relating to the second timer announcement display TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (18), a state is shown in which the display mode has changed to the replay display mode after the fluctuation icon h0, which is the bomb display mode, has exploded. As described above, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect is performed and the pseudo consecutive effect as a certain effect is performed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the pseudo continuous production has been performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (19) following FIG. 145 (18), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (23), a strong Sabohani group notice is made. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner and the hold icon display area is deleted, but the change icon display area remains displayed together with the change icon h0. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this effect example, one Sabo-Hani character constituting the strong Sabo-Hani group notice stumbles on the fluctuating icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is performed. That is, in this effect example, a situation is shown in which the sabotani group notice is given, which may affect the fluctuating icon h0.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 146 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the bomb displayed in a large size. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "New timer!" Is displayed. That is, the advance icon indicating that the timer advance effect according to the third timer advance display TM13 is started is displayed by the change icon h0. In addition, the character “Atsuatsu” is displayed above the change icon h0 after this change, suggesting that there is a possibility that an effect with a high reliability of a big hit may be executed as a certain effect. . In addition, a cut-in icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon h0, and as a result of the timer announcement effect of which the execution is announced, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. In this effect example, since the character "Atsuatsu" is displayed, it can be said that the possibility that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is high.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops to super reach (swordsman reach), in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the change icon h0 has been deleted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (26) shows a state in which the timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect three seconds after the start of the countdown.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer advance display TM13 starts, and at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (27), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer advance display TM13. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (28). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (30) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the change icon h0 is displayed again, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 147 (1) to (12) are the same as FIGS. 143 (1) to (12), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (13), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol instead of the replay symbol RP, and the character "Fail" is displayed near the navigation character YM. It is shown that the notice effect was a fake timer notice effect. Note that the timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display becomes "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 has been deleted. The change icon h0 has changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, the hold icon is displayed in a bomb display mode, but an example in which a fake timer notice effect is performed is shown, but a fake timer notice effect may not be performed, That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the bomb display mode, the timer announcement effect may be always performed.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 148. It is. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIG. 148 (1) and FIG. 148 (2) are the same as FIG. 143 (1) and FIG.

  FIG. 148 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is in a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one lump, and the character “TIMER × 3” is added above. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "Timer is on hold" is displayed. In this effect example, a state is shown in which a notice icon indicating that three timer notice effects are to be performed is displayed by displaying a hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are massed. . The display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are collectively displayed, or a display mode in which four or more bombs are displayed in one block May be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (7). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first holding icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are bundled together moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer announcement effects relating to the symbol variation are executed. A change icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the change.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (9) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when seven seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-run will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variation icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are massed, the display of “TIMER × 3” is deleted, and the tip of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. A state is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "something is displayed after 7 seconds" is displayed, and a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed after 7 seconds. Has been suggested. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may be changed after the first timer advance display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the change icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer advance display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at a timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer advance display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (10), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer advance display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice TM11 is warned. Further, the length of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 is also reduced according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (11) shows a state where the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that a certain effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variation icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are bundled together indicates that the tip of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse wire of the bomb disposed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (11), “05:75” is displayed. In addition, the character of "attention" is continuously displayed near the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (12), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display is also continued in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:95” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (12) shows a state where the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Some group announcement is confirmed when appears" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been reported that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure chest, the Sabohani group notice is performed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to the mini game” is displayed, and a warning about the mini game is given together with the timer announcement effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (13), a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed is shown. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the character SBHN of Savohani appears from the inside, and the character “Success!” Is displayed near the character SBHN. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-ze-ze" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game has succeeded. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (13), “03:51” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "17:76" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer advance display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer advance display TM12 is displayed. The added icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a form of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. When the display mode changes to the high-reliability display mode, the strong Sabohani group notice may be always executed, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the “pseudo-run”, and as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11, a pseudo-sequence effect can be performed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (14), “01:37” is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "15:62" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (15), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are bundled together. Bomb explodes and effects appear. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6” is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-re!” Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-repeated effect is to be performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (15).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (16), the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. Also, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous production has been performed. The display of the replay icon RPL may be started after the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo ream after the display of the replay icon RPL is started. The change display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the second change display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 has changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side has been deleted. As described above, in this effect example, the bomb is reduced by one each time the timer notice effect is performed once. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown is continuing, and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (19) following FIG. 148 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. You. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “02:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (19).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (20), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are bundled together is displayed. The bomb on the left explodes, an effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the suspended icon display area is deleted, but the displayed state of the variable icon display area is maintained. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the second timer notice display TM12 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (21), a state in which the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed is shown. At this time, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL to inform that the Sabohani group notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 has been deleted. Furthermore, in this effect example, since the effect display is switched to the super reach display, the fluctuating icon h0 displayed in the fluctuating icon display area is deleted. The fluctuating icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer notice TM12 is deleted, the second timer notice TM12 may be deleted after the changing icon h0 is deleted, or the second The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 149 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area has been deleted. Further, in this effect example, in correspondence with the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb that is the remaining one of the three, the “standby” is displayed together with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer announcement effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, a state is displayed in which the display of the fact that the timer notice effect is on standby is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (23), a state where the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect three seconds after the start of the countdown. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been deleted. Note that the replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer advance display TM13 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 149 (24), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer advance display TM13. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (25). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 149 (27) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the change icon h0 is displayed again, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, the timer notice effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is performed, but the number of times is not the same as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer announcement effect is executed or the maximum number of times the timer announcement effect can be executed.

  In addition, when a timer announcement effect is executed as many times as the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon (that is, when the mission is achieved), the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. May be configured.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 150 (1) to (10) are the same as FIGS. 143 (1) to (10), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “06:36”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (11) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Have been. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "02:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, indicating that a certain effect is started two seconds after the start of the countdown.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (12), “01:00” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which one second has elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues in the first timer notice display TM11, and “05:36” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (12), the explosion effect starts even though the change icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb does not indicate “00:00” in any of the timer notice displays. Have been.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (13), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda. Then, a pre-read display mode is obtained. In addition, the character “icon change” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the change icon h0 has changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (14), the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. In addition, the character of “suspended change” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted. In the first timer announcement display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (15). In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which inspires a sense of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (16). In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character of “pseudo-run”, suggesting that a pseudo-sequence effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. are doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (17), the third stop is completed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Then, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-ream!” Is displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo-ream will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 has been completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which a plurality of timer advance effects are performed using the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb indicating one timer advance effect is shown.

  FIG. 151: is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment, and FIG. 152 is a figure which shows the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151 step by step. It is. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 151 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 143 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 151 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the number of hold of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 has a display mode of a bomb, but has a display mode of a large bomb larger in size than that shown in FIG. 143 (3). In addition, a replay icon, a Sabohani icon, and a bancho icon are displayed on the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb is displayed. As a result of the timer announcement effect executed in relation to the above, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-sequence effect, a Sabohani group announcement and a cut-in image are displayed as certain effects. In other words, it can be said that the pseudo continuous production, the Sabohani group notice, and the notice of the cut-in image (read ahead notice) are being performed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character "Large timer pending" is displayed. In this effect example, three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, so that an advance notice indicating that three timer advance effects are executed. Is being performed. Note that the number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four. The above icons may be displayed in some cases.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “Oni-Hatsu” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit for the symbol change display of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the large bomb is extremely high. are doing.

  FIG. 151 (5) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the number of hold of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "2". Here, a part of the second holding icon h12 is overlapped with the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of the large bomb, and it is considered that the second holding icon h12 is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the second holding icon h12 is not overlapped. I have. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Standby on standby" is displayed, and the start of the symbol change display on the first hold icon h11 indicating that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high is displayed. Notifies you that you are waiting.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 151 (7), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 151 (8). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (9), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb is displayed as an advance notice that three timer advance notice effects related to the symbol change are executed by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The change icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is displayed. In addition, in response to the start of the symbol change display relating to the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the character “Demonstration is changing” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the big hit notice is displayed. It has been done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (10), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when seven seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variation icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb indicates that the tip of the fuse is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something is displayed after 7 seconds" is displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed after seven seconds. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decoration symbol is changed, or the display position of the decoration symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notification display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (11), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice TM11 is warned. Further, the length of the fuse wire in the change icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the display mode of the replay icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer notice effect corresponding to the replay icon has started. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (12) shows a state where the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that a certain effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice is started as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (12). In addition, the character of "attention" is continuously displayed near the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given. At this time, for example, the Sabohani icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 may be displayed in a blinking manner or the like to change the display mode to notify that the timer announcement effect corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. .

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (13), "19:20" is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display is also continued in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:95” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (13), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Some group announcement is confirmed when appears" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been reported that when a Sabohani character appears from a treasure chest, a Sabohani group notice is given. Here, the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the character display of “set a group notice when it comes out,” but the character display may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. . In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to the mini game” is displayed, and a warning about the mini game is given together with the timer announcement effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (14) shows a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and a character of "Succeed!" Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed, indicating that the mini game has been successfully performed. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (14), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "17:76" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display form of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display form to the high-reliability display form, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a form of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. When the display mode changes to the high-reliability display mode, the strong Sabohani group notice may be always executed, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. In addition, in the change icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini game has been successfully performed and the execution of the Sabohani group notice has been confirmed, the mark of "Done" is displayed so as to overlap the Sabohani icon. Note that the “Done” mark may be displayed after the Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the “pseudo-run”, and as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11, a pseudo-sequence effect can be performed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer "15:62" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (16), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop at the same time, and “decoration 5” -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "is displayed. Although the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb partially overlaps the replay symbol RP, the replay symbol RP may overlap the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-re!” Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-repeated effect is to be performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (16).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (17), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. Also, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous production has been performed. Furthermore, in this effect example, since the pseudo consecutive effect was performed as a result of the timer notice effect, the “repeated” icon was set so as to overlap the replay icon displayed on the change icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown is continuing, and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (19) subsequent to FIG. 151 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 152 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “02:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (20).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the suspended icon display area is deleted, but the displayed state of the variable icon display area is maintained. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (22) shows a state in which the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL to inform that the Sabohani group notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 has been deleted. Furthermore, in this effect example, after that, the effect display is switched to the super-reach display. However, when the fluctuation icon h0 is in the display mode of the large bomb, the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, and even if the process shifts to the super reach. The displayed state is maintained, but the change icon may be deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (24) shows a state in which the timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect three seconds after the start of the countdown. Note that the replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (25), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (26), and thereafter, FIG. 152 (27). As shown in (3), the third timer notice TM13 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the strong cut-in image CI1a was displayed as a result of the timer notice effect, so that the icon was overlapped with the number icon displayed on the change icon h0 of the large bomb display mode. Mark is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (28), since the effects corresponding to all the icons indicated by the change icons h0 in the display mode of the large bomb were respectively performed, the effect in which the change icon h0 explodes starts. Have been. Then, as shown in FIG. 152 (29), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the advance display by the change icon h0 is performed. Here, the change icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the display mode of the panda. For example, when the change mode is changed to the display mode of the number, the big hit symbol is changed than when the display mode is changed to the panda display mode. May be easily displayed. Further, the display mode may change to the default display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 has been deleted together with the variable icon display area, but may not be deleted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 152 (31) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step an example of a pending announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 153 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 143 (1) and (2), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 153 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special map 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character "I appeared!" Is displayed, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I appeared!" May be started after the display of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is started, or the display of the character "I appeared!" After the start, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or "I appeared! May be displayed. In addition, in addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the hold of the grandfather representing the character of the grandfather and the display mode of the hold of the grandmother representing the character of the grandfather. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “next fluctuation expectation” is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first suspension icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension is high. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 153 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the first icon h11 becomes the variable icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “SP determined!” Is displayed, and it is informed that a transition to super reach will be made. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of the jackpot and also functions as a pre-reading notice of the super reach. The display of the character “SP determined!” May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character “SP determined!” May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHNs is performed than in the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice. The weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than the case where the Sabohani group notice is not performed, but the reliability is lower than the case where the strong Sabohani group notice is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the super reach can be developed. Has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 153 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront the super-reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (15) shows a state in which the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (16), a screen where the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. In addition, the change icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed again, and the change icon h0 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 154. It is. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 154 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 143 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 154 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special map 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold which represents the character of the lord, but the character of the lord holding the bomb is displayed. This is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold as shown, and is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the lord character, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group announcement may be performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect It suggests. Also, the character "I appeared!" Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is reported that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. Note that the display of the character "I appeared!" May be started after the display of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is started, or the display of the character "I appeared!" Is started, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed, "I The display of the character "Sama appeared!" May be started. In addition, in addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon in the display mode of the grandmother bomb hold representing the character of the grandfather or the display mode of the grandmother bomb hold representing the character of the grandmother May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer announcement effect may differ depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Expect next change” is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 154 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 153 (7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" has been switched to the character display of "have", that is, the message "have something" is displayed from these character displays. Can be said. This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Oni-Hatsu” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display on the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the character "Onigetsu" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character "Oni-heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (9), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when 12 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (10), “11:86” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.14 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (11), a state is shown in which the first timer notice display TM11 is switched from the timer display to the character display of “waiting for group generation”. At this time, an icon of Sabohani is added to the left side of the character display of “Waiting for group occurrence”, and it is notified that the Savohani group announcement is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. That is, in this effect example, an explanation display (tutorial display) is shown in the timer advance display while the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display is being performed (during subtraction). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (12), the display is switched from the character display of "waiting for group generation" to the timer display again. In this production example, the timer display and the character display of “waiting for group generation” in the first timer notice display TM11 are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). After the countdown is started, the process is performed until a reach state described later is reached. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (13), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued and the alternate display described above is also continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (13), “04:35” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (14), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 154 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (16), the alternate display in the first timer notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (16).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the pending icon display area is deleted, but the variable icon display area remains displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed by the first timer notice display TM11, a state in which the Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (18) shows a state in which the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. The change icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension that the bomb has been deleted. That is, in this effect example, the fluctuating icon (holding icon) of the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of the validity determination (look-ahead notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (the look-ahead notice), is executed by the timer notice effect. Then, after the function is performed, an example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension having only the function of the notice of the validity determination (pre-reading notice). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (18), the first timer notice display TM11 is also deleted. Note that the first timer notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the change icon h0 may change after the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the change icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 155 (19) following FIG. 154 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the main character, and the enemy swordsman confront each other, in a super-reach (swordsman reach). Is done. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the fluctuating icon h0 has been deleted together with the fluctuating icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 may be deleted after shifting to super reach, the change to super reach may be performed after the change icon h0 has been deleted, or the change icon h0 may be changed at the timing of shifting to super reach. It may be deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM. This indicates that CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 155 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (22) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. In addition, the change icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again, and the change icon h0 is also displayed again in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 157 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 156. It is. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (1), the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 156 (1), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. Will be displayed as In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 156 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the number of reserved figures of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one lump, and the character “TIMER × 3” is added above. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "Timer is on hold" is displayed. In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 148, by displaying the hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are bundled together, an advance notice indicating that three timer advance effects are to be executed is performed. Is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 156 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 156 (7). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The icon is moved to be displayed as the change icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and displayed as the first reserved icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (9) shows a state where the timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect will be started five seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the icon SBH of Savohani is added to the first timer notice display TM11. In this effect example, as described later, the result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. Suggests that a Sabohani character may appear from the treasure box image BOX in the mini-game. Further, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are bundled together indicates that the tip of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged at the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM Is displayed in the vicinity of, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed after five seconds. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or the first hold icon may be displayed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 starts. The display mode of h11 may change, or the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer advance display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at a timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Note that, in this effect example, the character display of “TIMER × 3” additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (10), “04:06” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.94 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, the length of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged at the center in the first holding icon h11 is also reduced according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (11), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character of "If you come out, intense notice" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been reported that when a Sabohani character appears from a treasure chest, a notice with extremely high reliability of a big hit is executed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “mini game” is displayed, and a warning about the mini game is given.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (12), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened after moving to the center, and the character SBHN of Sabohani appears in a large size from the inside, and " The character "Group Notice Confirmation" is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatase" is displayed to inform that the mini-game has succeeded and the Sabohani group notice is to be executed. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the result of the mini-game is derived as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, as a result of the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11, it can be said that a state is shown in which the pre-reading announcement notification that the Sabohani group announcement is performed as a certain effect is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (13), the word “Under preparation” is displayed near the navigation character YM together with the icon SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given that the Sabohani group notice is to be performed. I have. At this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center has been deleted and two bombs are represented as one block. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed after the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of “in preparation” are started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed. After that, the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of “Under preparation” may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 may be displayed at the timing when the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of “Under preparation” is started. The display mode may change. When the mini-game is successful, the strong Sabohani group notice may be always executed or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. A group notice is always executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 156 (14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6−decoration 2−decoration 5”. What is happening is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (16), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode has been changed as described above is moved to the variable icon display area in the state of the changed display mode, so that the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are made. The change icon h0 is a notice display mode that the effect is executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (17), a state in which two timer announcement effects are started simultaneously is shown. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are both default display modes. In addition, a replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 7 seconds after the countdown is started, In other words, it is suggested that the pseudo continuous production may be started seven seconds after the start of the countdown of the timer display. Also, “08:00” is displayed as a timer display in the third timer notice display TM13, which indicates that a certain effect is started when eight seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. In addition, it is not clear which effect is a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the third timer advance display TM13. In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start countdown at the same time, a certain effect starts when both 7 seconds and 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested that In addition, the fluctuating icon h0 in a display mode in which two bombs are bundled together shows that the heads of both fuse wires of the two bombs are ignited in response to the start of the two timer announcement effects.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 start countdown (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (18), the second timer advance display TM12 , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. That is, a state in which 0.73 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (19) subsequent to FIG. 156 (18), the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the two bombs are displayed as one lump. Both bombs in the variation icon h0 of the mode explode, and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6” is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and “01:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (19).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (20), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. Also, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous production has been performed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and “00:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (20).

  Thereafter, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and “00:00” is reached, the decorative icon display device 208 shown in FIG. Is changed to the display mode of the panda, and the display mode of the notice related to the symbol variation display is displayed. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the third timer advance display TM13 is shown. In this effect example, the content of a certain effect was not clear from the question mark icon QST, but the content of a certain effect was clarified for the first time after the countdown was completed and a certain effect was performed. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon, which has been started to be displayed in a display mode in which three bombs are united, is displayed as a hold icon, a timer notice effect is performed as a pre-read notice and is displayed as a fluctuating icon. After that, a state in which a timer announcement effect is also performed as an announcement about the symbol variation display is shown. That is, a state is shown in which, when a hold icon in a display mode for notifying that a plurality of timer advance effects are performed is displayed, the timer advance effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variable displays. Specifically, a state is shown in which the Sabohani group announcement, the pseudo continuous production, and the change production of the fluctuation icon h0, which are performed as a result of the execution of the timer preview production, are performed in different symbol fluctuation displays. Furthermore, in this effect example, the target of the advance notice performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the object of the notice regarding the symbol change display performed as a result of another timer notice effect are performed on the same symbol change display. An example is shown. In this effect example, two timer announcement effects are started at the same time, but a state is shown in which the contents of the effect performed as a result of the execution of each timer announcement effect are different.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is deleted, a panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and a notice with the change icon h0 is given. It is reported that the notification has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, the icon SBH of Sabohani and the display of “Under preparation” displayed near the navigation character YM are deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (26), a strong Savohani group notice is performed so as to correspond to the Savohani icon SBH displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and the display of “Under preparation”. . At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the suspended icon display area is deleted, but the displayed state of the variable icon display area is maintained. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this effect example, one Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the change icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the change icon h0 is performed. That is, in this effect example, a situation is shown in which the sabotani group notice is given, which may affect the fluctuating icon h0.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (27), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the large number displayed. Then, a state in which the notice display mode by the change icon h0 is stepped up to one having higher reliability is shown.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen that develops into super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area has been deleted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (29) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 157 (31) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Also, a state is shown in which the change icon h0 is redisplayed in a display mode of a large number. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 158 (1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 145 (1) and (2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 158 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the number of reserved figures of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in a button hold display mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by operating the effect button 136 has been started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (4), the character "PUSH" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification to promote the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode To the bomb display mode, and a state where the timer display is displayed above the second hold icon h12 in which the display mode has changed is shown. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 158 (6), “10:00” is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. I have. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display can be specified by the hold icon. In addition, in this effect example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol change display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol change display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in a suspended state, that is, in a state displayed as a suspended icon. In this case, for example, when the timing at which a certain effect is started, such as the timing after the symbol change display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may make it. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “pseudo-ream”, and as a result of the timer notice effect, a pseudo-result effect may be executed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 158 (6), a lower plate full error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps (overlaps) a part of the second hold icon h12 with the front side. 2), the error message "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, there is a case where a ball emptying error can be quickly eliminated to make the timer notice display easily visible.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (7), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. 158 (6), and the second symbol HOLD on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (7), the countdown of the timer display is started in the timer notice display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. : 32 "is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. In this way, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display is performed by the change icon h0 is shown. Further, it can be said that the fluctuation icon display area in which the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “attention” character is displayed, and a warning for a timer announcement effect is given.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is completed, and “00:00” is displayed, “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6” Is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous production is performed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (5), there is a case where “30:00” is displayed as a timer display as shown in FIG. 158 (6 ′). Have been. That is, the effect example shown in FIG. 158 (6 ′) suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character “group notice”, and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a certain effect. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (7 ′), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. 158 (6 ′), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed, and the symbol change display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 158 (7 ′), the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is such that “30:00” which is the timer display at the start of the countdown is continuously displayed. When the countdown of the timer display is started, after the first timer notice display TM11 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer display countdown is performed in the first timer notice display TM11. Will be That is, in this effect example, the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer announcement display is displayed so as to be identifiable by the hold icon (change icon), and the timer announcement display is displayed separately from this. In the timer notice display, a state in which the countdown of the timer display is being performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 158 (7 ′), “27:32” is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed 27.32 seconds later. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “attention” character is displayed, and a warning for a timer announcement effect is given.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (8 ′), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Savohani group notice. Is shown. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed without being erased. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  In this way, the hold icon may be displayed in the button hold display mode first, and then changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

  In addition, in the effects described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 49 and FIGS. 66 to 158, the types of certain effects performed as a result of the execution of the timer announcement effect, the effect contents of the timer announcement effect, and the contents of the mini game It goes without saying that various effects described with reference to the drawings before FIG. 121 and various effects described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 167 described later can be applied.

  159 to 167 are diagrams illustrating an example of a timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A18) show a state in which a reservation notice effect is performed in a display mode of Yoshimune reservation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 159 (A1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A18) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 159 (A1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode (circular blank pattern and white color). Display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round white hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 159 (A1) is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), the power chute is difficult to open and the prize to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not won. This is because it is difficult.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. Further, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed in the lower center, and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 159 (A3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special map 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character "I appeared!" Is displayed, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I appeared!" May be started after the display of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is started, or the display of the character "I appeared!" After the start, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or "I appeared! May be displayed. In addition, in addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the hold of the grandfather representing the character of the grandfather and the display mode of the hold of the grandmother representing the character of the grandfather. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “next fluctuation expectation” is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first suspension icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension is high. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (A7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the first icon h11 becomes the variable icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “SP determined!” Is displayed, and it is informed that a transition to super reach will be made. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of the jackpot and also functions as a pre-reading notice of the super reach. The display of the character “SP determined!” May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character “SP determined!” May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (A12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHNs is performed than in the strong Sabohani group notice described above. The weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than the case where the Sabohani group notice is not performed, but the reliability is lower than the case where the strong Sabohani group notice is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 159 (A13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 159 (A14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other in the super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A15) shows a state in which the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A16), a screen where the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and lost is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. The scheduled “decoration 6” is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (A17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. I have. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. In addition, the change icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed again, and the change icon h0 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also displayed again. Note that the change icon h0 may be displayed again in a default display mode, instead of the display mode of the Yoshimune hold. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (A18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in this effect example, an example in which a loss is displayed is shown, but a big hit may occur.

  FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B12) show an example of an effect in which the hold display displayed in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold changes to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. The effects shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A3), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B4), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper center. In this example, when the mini-game is started, a treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "" is displayed when timer comes out, together with a bomb icon BOMB on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. Is displayed, and it is reported that when the bomb icon BOMB appears from the treasure chest, the execution of the timer notice effect is stocked. Note that the mini game may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed after the mini game is started, or the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed. The mini game may be started at the timing of the change.

  Thereafter, the result of the mini game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B5). Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the bomb icon BOMB appears in a large size from the inside, and the word “stock determined” is displayed near the icon. Is displayed to inform that the execution of the timer notice effect is stocked.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B6), the bomb icon BOMB collides with the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of holding Yoshimune, and the hold change animation is displayed on the first hold icon h11. It is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (B7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the Yoshimune hold to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and is set to the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect. . That is, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the display form of the Yoshimune hold. Also, near the navigation character YM, the word “timer hold” is displayed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, indicating that the execution of the timer notice effect has been stocked. Has been informed. The display of the character “timer hold” may be started after the display mode is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, or the first hold icon h11 may be displayed after the display of the character “timer hold” starts. The display mode may be changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, or the display of the character of “timer hold” may be started at the timing when the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In addition, when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the character of the lord may change to another character. For example, the display mode of the grandfather bomb hold indicating the grandfather character or the grandfather character may be changed. The display mode may be changed to the display mode of the old woman bomb hold. In addition, the display color of the Yoshimune hold display mode or the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode composed of the character of the lord is changed from the default color to another color (for example, red), and the reliability of the big hit increases (ranks up). You may do so.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 159 (B8), a state is shown in which the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen. In addition, the character of "timer hold" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Expect next change” is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B11), a third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 159 (B12). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Hereinafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 154 (8) to 155 (23) are performed. In this case, the result of the loss may be displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice of the timer notice effect as a result of the mini game, and the timer notice effect is performed in addition to the prefetch notice of the jackpot. Is shown in advance.

  Note that, in this demonstration example, an example is shown in which the display form of the Yoshimune bomb is displayed in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the display form of the Yoshimune hold, for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (B7 ′). As described above, the bomb icon BD 'may be arranged and displayed above the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and may be displayed separately from the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold. In this case, the bomb icon BD 'is displayed at a position corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11, so that it is easy to recognize which hold icon the bomb icon BD' corresponds to. May be possible.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (B7 ″), a bomb icon BD ′ may be arranged and displayed above the fluctuation icon h0. In this case, it may be possible to make it difficult to understand which bomb icon BD 'corresponds to which pending icon or fluctuating icon.

  Also, the display mode may be changed to a display mode of the hold icon as shown in FIG. 159 (B7 ''). More specifically, the display BD ″ of the bomb is displayed and displayed as a function of a look-ahead notice of a timer notice effect, and a character icon (for example, an icon of a panda different from the lord character) is used as a look-ahead notice for a big hit. The hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that the PD) is displayed along with the display of the bomb.

  FIGS. 160 (B3a) and (B7a) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 159 (B3) and (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (B3a), when a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 increases by one, the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is changed. In the figure, a state is displayed in which the display mode is different from the hold icon in the default display mode. Note that a display mode different in color from the default display mode may be used. For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 160 (B3a), the display mode is displayed in a circular blue display mode. As a result, a prefetch notice regarding the big hit is given. In the case of performing the pre-reading notice by changing the color of the hold icon, the reliability may be made different depending on the color. For example, in this example of production, the reliability is set in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> green color> blue color. In this case, in the case of a rainbow color, it may be possible to notify the decision of the big hit. Thereafter, the mini-game is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 159 (B4) to (B6), and as a result of the mini-game, if the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. 159 (B7a) ), A fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 160 (B3a) to change to the display mode of the timer notice, which is the display mode of the bomb. In this case, the form of the hold icon may also be changed, for example, the display form may be changed from a circular blue display mode to a circular red display mode. That is, the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit may be increased (two-step increase). In this case, the reliability may increase by one stage, the reliability may increase by two or more stages, the reliability may increase by only one stage, or twice. It may be increased only by the above-mentioned specific number of stages. In this way, the display mode of the prefetch notice in the hold icon may be ranked up.

  FIGS. 160 (B3b) and (B7b) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 159 (B3) and (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (B3b), when a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 increases by one, the display mode is not the Yoshimune hold display. In the figure, a state is displayed in which the display mode is different from the hold icon in the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 160 (B3b), the state is displayed in a circular shape in a red display mode, and a state in which a prefetch notice regarding a big hit is being performed. Thereafter, the mini-game is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 159 (B4) to (B6), and as a result of the mini-game, if the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. 159 (B7b) As shown in FIG. 160B), a fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 160 (B3b) to change the display mode to the timer hold display mode. In the effect example shown in FIG. 160 (B3b), the form of the hold icon does not change, and the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is maintained as it is. In this effect example, a pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notification effect is added in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, and it can be said that the display mode of the pre-reading notice on the hold icon is ranked higher.

  FIGS. 160 (B3c), (B7c) and (B8c) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 159 (B3), (B7) and (B8), respectively. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B3c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B3a), and thus the description is omitted. Thereafter, the mini-game is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 159 (B4) to (B6), and as a result of the mini-game, if the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. 160 (B7c) As shown in ()), the display mode of the hold icon does not change, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer notice effect may be started. At this time, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. I have. Note that, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 has not started, and the word “waiting” is displayed below the first timer notice display TM11, and the countdown of the timer display starts. Is reserved. As described above, the present invention can also be realized by displaying the timer notice display in a mode in which the countdown is not performed in an area different from the hold icon display area. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (B8c), the decorative symbol is shown enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is still in a standby state. Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In this effect example, as a result of the mini-game being performed, a display mode that does not include the advance notice display of the timer advance effect (such as the display mode of the Yoshimune hold or the display mode of the blue hold) includes a display that includes the advance notice display of the timer advance effect. Although the mode has been shown to change to the mode (display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, display mode of the red timer hold, etc.), the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by performing the above-described hold change animation. .

  FIG. 160 (C1) to FIG. 161 (C23) are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 160 (C1) to FIG. (C2) are the same as FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG.

  FIG. 160 (C3) shows a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the reserved number of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and is a display mode of a pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect. Also, the character "I appeared!" Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is reported that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Expect next change” is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Has been suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C6), a third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (C7). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" has been switched to the character display of "have", that is, the message "have something" is displayed from these character displays. Can be said. This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Oni-Hatsu” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display on the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the character "Onigetsu" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character "Oni-heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C9), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when 12 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “attention” is displayed, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (C10), “11:86” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.14 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C11), a state is shown in which the first timer notice display TM11 is switched from the timer display to the character display of "waiting for group generation". At this time, an icon of Sabohani is added to the left side of the character display of “Waiting for group occurrence”, and it is notified that the Savohani group announcement is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. That is, in this effect example, an explanation display (tutorial display) is shown in the timer advance display while the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display is being performed (during subtraction). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (C12), the display is switched again from the character display of "waiting for group generation" to the timer display. In this production example, the timer display and the character display of “waiting for group generation” in the first timer notice display TM11 are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). After the countdown is started, the process is performed until a reach state described later is reached. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “10:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (C12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C13), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued and the alternate display described above is also continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 160 (C13), "04:35" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 160 (C14), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (C15), on the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (C16), the alternate display in the first timer notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (C16).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (C17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the strong symbolic group announcement is made in the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the pending icon display area is deleted, but the variable icon display area remains displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed by the first timer notice display TM11, a state in which the Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C18), a state in which the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed is shown. The change icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension that the bomb has been deleted. That is, in this effect example, the fluctuating icon (holding icon) of the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of the validity determination (look-ahead notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (the look-ahead notice), is executed by the timer notice effect. Then, after the function is performed, an example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension having only the function of the notice of the validity determination (pre-reading notice). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (C18), the first timer notice display TM11 is also deleted. Note that the first timer notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the change icon h0 may change after the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the change icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 161 (C19) following FIG. 160 (C18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. Is done. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the fluctuating icon h0 has been deleted together with the fluctuating icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 may be deleted after shifting to super reach, the change to super reach may be performed after the change icon h0 has been deleted, or the change icon h0 may be changed at the timing of shifting to super reach. It may be deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (C20), while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. This indicates that CI1a has been displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (C21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 161 (C22), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5” is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. In addition, the change icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again, and the change icon h0 is also displayed again in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (C23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this example, the main character displayed the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode with a bomb. However, the main character was something other than a bomb (for example, a replay icon or a sabohani icon). ) May be displayed in a display manner, and a pre-reading advance notice of an executed advance effect may be performed.

  FIG. 161 (D1) to FIG. 161 (D18) are views showing step by step another example of the hold announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D7) are the same as FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A7), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the first icon h11 becomes the variable icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "Oni-Hatsu" is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension is extremely high. I have.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 161 (D9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 161 (D10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (D11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (D12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display of “SP reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is reported. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (D14) to (D18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 161 (D14) to (D18) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (A14) to (A18), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In this case, a big hit may occur.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, the display mode with the bomb added (the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect). In the case of displaying with, the timer notice effect is more easily performed, and in the case where the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed, the display is performed in the display mode with the bomb added (the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold) Shows an example in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where it is displayed in the display mode in which no bomb is added (the display mode of holding Yoshimune).

  FIG. 161 (E1) to FIG. 162 (E19) are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 161 (E1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (E1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 161 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 161 (E1), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. Will be displayed as In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 161 (E3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the number of reserved figures of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a round blue display mode, that is, is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E4), a first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E6), a third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, FIG. 161 (E7) As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (E9), a state is shown in which a roulette effect has started and a start effect is being performed. In this effect example, when a roulette effect is started and a start effect is started, three icons (for example, a timer notice icon, a replay icon, and a Sabohani icon) are displayed in a triangle above the first hold icon h11. , And one of the three icons is displayed in a state surrounded by an elliptical cursor. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (E9), the cursor surrounds the icon of the timer notice, and in response to this, the character of “timer” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the timer notice icon may stop and a timer notice effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E10), a state in which the start effect is continuously performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 162 (E10), the cursor moves to surround the icon of Sabohani, and in response to this, the character of “icon” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the icon of Sabohani may stop and a notice effect corresponding to the stopped icon may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E11), a state in which a start effect is continuously performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 162 (E11), the cursor moves and surrounds the replay icon, and in response to this, a character of “pseudo ream” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is displayed. As a result, the replay icon is stopped, suggesting that a pseudo-sequence may be performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E12) shows a state in which the start effect has been completed and the cursor has started moving at high speed (high-speed fluctuation). In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "What will come out" is displayed, so that a sense of expectation can be given as to which of the three icons will stop.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E13), the character "KONDA" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the icon of the timer notice, thereby producing a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the icon of the timer notice has been derived and displayed. Note that the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed after the character of “this is” is displayed, or the character of “this is” may be displayed after the result of the roulette effect is derived and displayed. Then, the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed at the timing when the character of “this” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E14), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from a round and blue display mode (that is, the display mode of the pre-reading notice) to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Then, the display mode changes to a bomb display mode. That is, the display mode changes to the display mode of the blue timer holding which is the display mode of the bomb in blue. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “timer hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. Note that the character display of “timer hold” may be displayed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the character display of “timer hold” has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of “timer hold” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 162 (E16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 162 (E18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and then, as illustrated in FIG. 162 (E19). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 143 (8) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 145 (12) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 147 (8) or later, the effects shown in FIG. The effects and the like shown after 151 (9) are performed.

  FIGS. 162 (E13a) to (E15a) show other patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E13a), the character “KONDA” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the icon of Sabohani to display the roulette effect. As a result, it is reported that the icon of Sabohani has been derived and displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E14a), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E15a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from a circular blue display mode (display mode of the advance notice) to a display mode of the Sabohani character. That is, a state in which the pre-reading notice of the Sabohani group notice is being performed is shown. Thereafter, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, it is notified that the strong Sabohani group notice may be performed. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 that is the display mode of the Sabohani character, a Sabohani group announcement may be made as a result of the timer announcement effect (for example, FIG. 69 to FIG. 70, etc.), the Savohani group notice may be performed without performing the timer notice effect (for example, the effects illustrated in FIGS. 67 to 68). In addition, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, the weak Sabohani group notice may be performed, or the Sabohani group notice may not be performed. You may. Then, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, since there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice is performed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the transition to the super reach. May be possible.

  FIGS. 162 (E13b) to (E15b) show other patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E13b), the character “KONDA” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the replay icon to display a roulette effect. As a result, it is reported that the replay icon has been derived and displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E14b), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E15b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains in a round and blue display mode, but the replay icon appears above the change icon h0. In other words, a state in which the preliminary look-ahead of the pseudo-sequence is being performed is shown, and there is a possibility that the pseudo-sequence effect may be performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice Be informed. In addition, in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, a pseudo consecutive effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed (for example, FIGS. 69 to 70). ), And a pseudo continuous effect may be performed without performing the timer notice effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 68). In addition, in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the pseudo continuous effect may not be performed in some cases.

  FIGS. 162 (E8c) to (E12c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 161 (E7). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 162 (E8c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 161 (E8), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E9c), a state in which the present holding effect has been started is shown. In the present hold effect, a small treasure box TRG, which is a small treasure box, is displayed above the hold icon (or change icon), and one of a plurality of types of results (contents or options) is derived, and the hold icon (change) This is an effect in which the display mode of the icon may change.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E10c) shows how the result of the present hold effect is derived. Specifically, the petit treasure box TRG is opened, a timer notice icon appears from the inside, and it is notified that a timer notice effect may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E11c), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (E12c), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 162 (E8c), and the display mode changes to a timer-hold display mode, and the color changes from blue to red. Is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of “timer hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. That is, a state is shown in which the addition of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice and the rank-up of the pre-reading notice are performed by the same effect. Further, in this effect example, a timer display icon displaying "10:00" as an initial display time is added above the bomb, and when 10 seconds elapse after the timer display countdown is started, a certain effect is produced. It is suggested that this is done. As shown in FIG. 162 (E12c '), a fuse may be added to the display form of the pre-reading notice to change to the display form of the timer notice, but the color of the hold icon may remain unchanged in blue. . In addition, the countdown time of the timer display may be different. For example, in FIG. 162 (E12c ″), a timer notice icon displayed as “60:00” is added as the initial display time, It is suggested that a certain effect is performed 60 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started. In this case, for example, the higher the rank of the hold icon, the easier it may be to display the icon of the timer display indicating a longer time. Specifically, the hold icon is displayed in red than in the case where the hold icon is displayed in blue. When the icon is displayed, “60:00” may appear more easily than “10:00” as the initial display of the time indicated by the timer display. At this time, in the opening scene of the petit treasure box TRG shown in FIG. 162 (E10c), the time may be different from the initial display time indicated by the icon of the timer notice that appears (for example, “10:00” from the petit treasure box TRG). May appear, but after the change in the display mode of the hold icon, a timer display icon indicating "60:00" may be added. The same may be applied (for example, a small treasure box) A timer display icon indicating “60:00” may appear from the TRG).

  In this example of the effect, the appearance of the timer notice icon from the petit treasure box TRG shows that the function of the pre-read notice of the timer notice effect is added to the hold icon of the prefetch notice regarding the jackpot. , An icon other than the timer notice icon may appear. For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (E10c '), a replay icon appears from the petit treasure box TRG, and a pre-read notice of a pseudo-sequence may be performed. You may.

  As described above, in this effect example, if one of the contents (one of the options) appearing from the petit treasure box TRG includes one related to the timer notice effect, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 162 (E9c). The state in which the petit treasure box TRG is displayed in addition to the above is also an example of a timer hold functioning as a pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 163 (F1) to FIG. 163 (F22) are views showing in a stepwise manner an example of a pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 163 (F1) to (F8) are the same as FIGS. 161 (E1) to (E8), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F9) shows a state in which the “Yoshimune Kankan Game”, which is one of the mini games, has started. When the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” is started, the symbol DC of the dice is displayed as a symbol “1” on the right side of the navigation character YM, and the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. In the upper center of the display screen, an explanation display of “Attention to Yoshimune!” And “Tear by continuous hits” is displayed, and the effect button 136 is hit repeatedly within the validity period of the operation to make the die appearance (design) more advantageous. It is shown that the mission is to make a high roll (large roll), and the display mode of the hold icon may change to a more advantageous mode depending on the degree of achievement of the mission. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 163 (F9), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon is a pre-reading advance notice regarding the big hit and remains the blue display mode. When no change is made (no change) and the roll of the dice is increased by one rank to “3”, the display mode of the hold icon is the same as the display mode of the look-ahead notice for the big hit, but the display mode of the hold icon is When the color rises from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red hold) and the number of dice rolls up by two ranks to "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a look-ahead notice for the big hit In addition to this, a pre-reading notice of a timer notice is added, and the color of the hold icon is also raised from blue to red (changed from blue hold to red timer hold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 163 (F10), the display indicating the die roll and the corresponding result (ie, the display mode of the post-change holding icon) moves to the left side of the display screen. In addition to the display, in the center of the display screen, the character "READY" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hitting operation reception is started. Also, a state in which the navigation character YM is preparing to pull out the sword is shown.

  FIG. 163 (F11) shows a state where the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. When the operation valid period starts, the character “READY” displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to “GO!”, And the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. , Is shown to promote repeated hits.

  FIG. 163 (F12) shows a state where the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. A state is shown in which the navigation character YM slashes the dice pattern in response to a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the player. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period.

  FIG. 163 (F13) shows a state where the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F13), the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), so the number of dice rolled up from "1" to "3". That is, it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has been determined to change from blue hold to red hold.

  FIG. 163 (F14) shows a state in which the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the right side of the dice symbol, and the effect by the player is performed. A state in which the pattern of the dice is slashed with a small knife in response to a continuous tapping operation of the button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 163 (F15) shows a state in which the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the left side of the dice symbol, and is displayed by the player. A state is shown in which the pattern of the dice is pierced with a spear according to the continuous operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the character “GO!” Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to “continuous hit!”, Prompting further continuous operation of the effect button 136.

  FIG. 163 (F16) shows a state in which the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F16), the character of "continuous hit!" Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to "one more breath!" It is suggested that it becomes.

  Thereafter, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F17), the roll of the dice ranks up from “3” to “5” and is displayed along with the button image 136a. The character of “More breath!” Is switched to “I did it!” And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the number of dice rolled up to the highest rank of "5" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan Game", and the desired purpose has been achieved. At this time, the navigation character YM has been deleted, but may be kept displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 163 (F18), the dice of the finally derived “5” is displayed at the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F19), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (F20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect is added.

  Thereafter, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, and then, as shown in FIG. 163 (F21), the third stop is performed, the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (F22), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 2−decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 143 (8) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 145 (12) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 147 (8) or later, the effects shown in FIG. The effects and the like shown after 151 (9) are performed.

  Note that, in this effect example, a predetermined result (a die roll) is derived by performing the operation of the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. Even if the predetermined number of operations of the effect button 136 are not performed and the predetermined result is not derived, the predetermined result (the result of the dice) is finally derived (rewritten). Alternatively, a result (a result corresponding to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated) different from the predetermined result may be derived. For example, as a result of a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the result of the dice does not rank up and is “1”, but the predetermined result is the result of “5” which is two ranks up. If the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the die roll may be "5".) In response to the red timer hold, the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon causes the timer to change. A notice effect may be performed, or in response to the derivation result, for example, when a die roll is “1”, a timer notice effect is performed in a symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon. It may not be done.

  Note that, in this production example, the state in which the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” is shown, but any of the mini-games shown so far in the present specification is shown. , The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be increased.

  Further, in this effect example, when the result is derived without changing the roll of the dice with “1”, the display mode of the hold icon remains blue and the rank is not improved. For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (F9 ′), regardless of which result is derived, the display state of the hold icon is always ranked up (that is, the display of the hold icon is performed at the time when the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” is executed). The promotion of the mode may be determined). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (F9 ′), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the default display mode is a display mode of a look-ahead notice regarding a big hit (blue display mode). When the precedent notice of the timer notice is added (change from the default to the blue timer hold), and the number of the dice increases by one rank to “3”, the display mode of the hold icon is: The default display mode is changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice for the big hit, and the color of the hold icon is also red, and the look-ahead notice of the timer notice is added (change from the default to the red timer hold), and the die roll is reduced. When the rank is increased by 2 to “5”, the display mode of the hold icon changes from a default display mode to a display mode of a prefetch notice regarding a big hit. Moreover with the color becomes red pending icon, a timer notice prefetch notice is added, further, that the magnitude of the held icon is changed to the large size (changed from the default to Dekataima hold) are informed.

  FIGS. 163 (F8a) to (F20a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 163 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 163 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue timer hold display mode instead of the blue hold display mode when the hold is increased. The effect shown in FIG. 163 (F8a) is the same as that in FIG. 163 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, and therefore the description is omitted. I do.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F9a) shows a state where the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 163 (F9a), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the die is performed. Is increased by one rank to “3”, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll is increased by two ranks. When "5" is displayed, it is reported that the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the deck timer hold. It should be noted that the display mode of the decal timer suspension is a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is higher than the display mode of the red timer suspension. Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F10) to (F15).

  FIG. 163 (F16a) shows a state where the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F16a), the character of "continuous hit!" Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to "one more breath!" It is suggested that it becomes.

  However, after that, when the operation validity period elapses without the dice being rolled up from “3” to “5”, as shown in FIG. 163 (F17a), it is displayed along with the button image 136a. In addition, the character of “More breath!” Is switched to “Chance!”, And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, a state in which the number of dice rolled up by one rank from "1" to "3" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" is shown. At this time, the navigation character YM is displayed, but may be deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F18a), the dice showing the finally derived “3” is displayed at the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 163 (F19a), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (F20a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue timer hold display mode to the red timer hold display mode. That is, a state is shown in which the rank of the prefetch notice regarding the big hit is improved in a state where the prefetch notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is being performed. In other words, it can be said that a state is shown in which the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is changed to the look-ahead notice of another timer notice effect. Thereafter, for example, an effect is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F21) to (F22).

  Note that, in this production example, the state in which the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” is shown, but any of the mini-games shown so far in the present specification is shown. , The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be increased.

  FIGS. 164 (F8b) to (F20b) show another effect pattern following FIG. 163 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 163 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue timer hold display mode instead of the blue hold display mode when the hold is increased. The effect shown in FIG. 163 (F8b) is the same as that in FIG. 163 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, and thus the description is omitted. I do.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F9b) shows a state where the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 163 (F9b), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice Is increased by one rank to “3”, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll is increased by two ranks. Is "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode in which two bombs are displayed as one block from the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the bomb arranged on the left side is blue. It is notified that the bomb arranged on the right side will be ranked up to the double timer hold display mode which is a red display mode. When the hold icon is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, it is suggested that at least two timer announcement effects may be performed. Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F10) to (F15).

  FIG. 163 (F16b) shows a state where the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F16b), the character of "consecutive hits!" Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to "another breath!" It is suggested that it becomes.

  Thereafter, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F17b), the roll of the dice ranks up from “3” to “5” and is displayed along with the button image 136a. The character of “More breath!” Is switched to “I did it!” And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the number of dice rolled up to the highest rank of "5" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan Game", and the desired purpose has been achieved. At this time, the navigation character YM has been deleted, but may be kept displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F18b), the dice indicating the finally derived “5” is displayed in an enlarged manner at the center of the display screen, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F19b), the holding change animation is started at the first holding icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 may change. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (F20b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue timer hold display mode to the double timer hold display mode. That is, a state is shown in which the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the look-ahead notice is given that at least two timer notice effects are performed. That is, it is shown that the rank of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect is also improved. Thereafter, for example, an effect is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F21) to (F22). Thereafter, when the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 123 and the effects shown in FIGS. More than one timer announcement effect is performed. It should be noted that which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. In addition, even if the hold icon (or the change icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer notice effect may be executed only once.

  In this effect example, for example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, the roll of the dice is “1” without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is “5” which is 2 ranks up. If the result is a roll (if the diligence of the dice button 136 is repeatedly performed and there is a possibility that the roll of the dice may become “5”), corresponding to the double timer hold, the corresponding hold icon is displayed. In the corresponding symbol change display, the timer announcement effect may be performed at least twice, or in response to the derivation result, for example, when the die roll is “1”, In the symbol variation display, the timer announcement effect may be performed only once.

  Note that, in this production example, the state in which the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” is shown, but any of the mini-games shown so far in the present specification is shown. , The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be increased.

  FIGS. 164 (F8c) to (F20c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 163 (F7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (F8c), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is performed. Is started. At this time, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Then, it is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (F8c) shows a state where the timer notice effect has started. In this effect example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame-in animation, and is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, “30:00” is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. The countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is started thereafter.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F9c) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” has started. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is moved and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 may be moved and displayed before the “Yoshimune Cancan Game” starts, may be moved and displayed after the “Yoshimune Cancan Game” starts, or may be displayed as the “Yoshimune Cancan Game”. May be moved and displayed at the timing when "" starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (F9c), “27:60” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. That is, a state in which 2.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. The other effects are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (F9b), and a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the first timer notice display TM11 moves and displays the display position from the upper left corner to the upper right corner again when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts, but does not have to move. Thereafter, after the effect is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F10) to (F15), the effect shown in FIGS. 164 (F16c) to (F19c) is performed. In the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (F16c) to (F19c), the timer notice effect is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. The description is omitted because it is the same as FIGS. 164 (F16b) to (F19b).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (F20c), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the blue timer hold display mode. , The display mode changes to the double timer hold display mode, and the rank of the hold icon is increased. That is, it is shown that the look-ahead notice for the jackpot is ranked up, the look-ahead notice for at least two timer notice effects is performed, and the look-ahead notice for the timer notice effect is also ranked up. . Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in the timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00", or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be. Thereafter, for example, an effect is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 163 (F21) to (F22). Thereafter, when the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 123 and the effects shown in FIGS. More than one timer announcement effect is performed. It should be noted that which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. In addition, even if the hold icon (or the change icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer notice effect may be executed only once.

  As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the timer notice display is moved and displayed is shown, and as a result of the timer notice effect, an example in which a notice of the start of a new timer notice effect is given as a certain effect is given. It is shown.

  In this effect example, the effect of increasing the timer holding of the display mode of the bomb from one to a plurality was performed. For example, the display of the bomb included in the holding of the Yoshimune bomb was displayed as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being performed. The effect of increasing from one to three may be performed.

  FIGS. 164 (G1) to 165 (G22) are diagrams showing another effect pattern of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 163 (G1) to (G2) are the same as FIGS. 161 (E1) to (E2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 164 (G3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the number of reserved figures of the special figure 1 in the second reserved number display is “2”. . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in a display mode in which the panda icon PD is added together with the bomb display BD ″, and the look-ahead notice for the timer notice effect is given and the look-ahead notice for the big hit is given. It is functioning. The rank of the jackpot reliability when the panda icon PD is displayed is, for example, “2”, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is slightly higher. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (G4) to (G8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 164 (G4) to (G8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (E4) to (E8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (G9) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan Game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 164 (G9), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon remains the panda icon PD with the big hit reliability of “2”. When the number of the dice rolls up by one rank and becomes “3” without change, the display mode of the hold icon changes from the panda icon PD to the tonomiya icon TS, and the dice rolls up. If the rank is raised to "5" and the rank is changed to "5", it is reported that the display mode of the hold icon is to be upgraded from the panda icon PD to the Sabohani icon SH. Note that the rank of the jackpot reliability when the icon TS of the lord is displayed is, for example, “4”, and the jackpot reliability is higher than that of the panda icon PD. In addition, the rank of the jackpot reliability when the Sabohani icon SH is displayed is, for example, “infinity”, and the jackpot reliability is extremely high. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (G10) to 165 (G19) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 164 (G10) to 165 (G19) are the same as those in FIGS. 163 (F10) to (G19) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 164 (G11), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to overlap the remaining time meter MT, but is overlapped and displayed by the remaining time meter MT. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (G18), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to be overlapped with the rolled-out dice, but is displayed so as to overlap with the rolled-up dice. May be done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 165 (G20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ to the display mode of Savohani. Is shown. That is, although the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect is no longer displayed, it is shown that the rank of the look-ahead notice related to the big hit is improved.

  After that, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, and then, as shown in FIG. 165 (G21), the third stop is performed, the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 165 (G22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, a symbol variation display in which a Sabohani group announcement is performed without performing a timer announcement effect may be performed, or a timer announcement may be performed as illustrated in FIG. 73 and the like. An effect may be performed, and a symbol variation display in which a Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect may be performed. Also, the Savohani group notice to be performed may be a strong Savohani group notice or a weak Savohani group notice may be performed.

  In this effect example, by changing from the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ to the display mode of Savohani, the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer advance notice is changed to the look-ahead of the timer advance effect. Although the display mode was changed to a display mode other than the display mode of the advance notice, for example, the hold icon, which is the display mode of the blue timer hold, was changed to the red hold as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being played, so that the look-ahead advance notice of the timer preview effect was displayed. The display mode may be changed from a display mode to a display mode other than the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice of the timer advance effect, and the rank may be increased as the pre-read advance notice regarding the big hit.

  FIGS. 165 (H1) to 166 (H38) are diagrams showing an example of a timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. Note that FIGS. 165 (H1) to (H2) are the same as FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 165 (H3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area, and the number of hold of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. Is "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 is in a display mode including one bomb, and the character “TIMER” is added above. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "Timer is on hold" is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which a notice display of a timer notice effect (pre-read notice) is performed by displaying a hold icon in a timer hold display form which is a display form of a bomb.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H 6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 165 (H 7). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H9), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, the character “TIMER” displayed above the display of the bomb on the first hold icon h11 is switched to the timer display, and the timer announcement effect is started. “03:00” is displayed on the timer display displayed on the first hold icon h11, suggesting that a certain effect will be started three seconds after the countdown is started. I have. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “timer start” is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed three seconds later. Note that “timer start” may be displayed after the character “TIMER” in the first hold icon h11 is switched to “03:00”, or the first time after “timer start” is displayed. The character of "TIMER" in the hold icon h11 may be switched to "03:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 may be changed to "03:00" at the timing when "timer start" is displayed. May be switched to.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H10), the timer display shows “02:75”. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, the display of “timer start” displayed near the navigation character YM is switched to “attention to hold”, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H11), it is shown that the lord character YMN appears and shoots a bow toward the first hold icon h11. Further, the countdown of the timer display is continuing, and “00:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H12), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, an arrow released by the lord character YMN becomes the first hold icon h11. It is notified that a hit has been made, the hold change animation is started, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Note that the hold change animation may be started after the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer display may be set to “00:00” after the hold change animation starts, The hold change animation may be started at the timing when the display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (H13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one, and is displayed above it. Has the character "TIMER x 3" added. In addition, near the navigation character YM, characters of “timer increase” are displayed, and a state is shown in which a notice (pre-read notice) that three timer notice effects will be executed is performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, the number of executions of the timer notice effect, which is indicated by the hold icon, is increased as a certain effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 165 (H14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 165 (H15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H 16), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the medium symbol, and temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special figure display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode in which the three bombs are bundled is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that at least three timer announcement effects relating to the symbol change are executed. A change icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the notification.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H19), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started when seven seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-run will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variation icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are massed, the display of “TIMER × 3” is deleted, and the tip of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. A state is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character "something is displayed after 7 seconds" is displayed, and a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed after 7 seconds. Has been suggested. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may be changed after the first timer advance display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the change icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer advance display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at a timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H20), “06:36” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice TM11 is warned. Further, the length of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 is also reduced according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H21) shows a state where the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that a certain effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variation icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are bundled together indicates that the tip of the fuse wire of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse wire of the bomb disposed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H21). In addition, the character of "attention" is continuously displayed near the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H22), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer advance display TM12. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display is also continued in the first timer notice display TM11, and “04:95” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H22), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Some group announcement is confirmed when appears" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been reported that when the Sobohani character SBHN appears from the treasure chest, a strong Sabohani group announcement is made. In addition, you may make it notify that Sabohani group notice is performed including weak Sabohani group notice. In addition, when the Savo Hani character SBHN does not appear from the treasure box, the weak Savo Hani group notice is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect performed on the second timer notice display TM12. Alternatively, the Sabohani group announcement may not be performed (a certain effect is not executed, that is, the gaseous timer announcement effect is executed). In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “attention to the mini game” is displayed, and a warning about the mini game is given together with the timer announcement effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (H23), a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed is shown. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the character SBHN of Savohani appears from the inside, and the character “Success!” Is displayed near the character SBHN. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-ze-ze" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game has succeeded. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H23), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. "17:76" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (H24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer advance display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer advance display TM12 is displayed. The added icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the “pseudo-run”, and as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11, a pseudo-sequence effect can be performed as a certain effect. Has been suggested. In the two timer advance notices TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H24), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice TM11, and the second timer advance notice TM11 is displayed. "15:62" is displayed in the notice display TM12.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H25), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and when "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are bundled together. Bomb explodes and effects appear. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6” is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-re!” Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-repeated effect is to be performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the first timer notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be “00:00”, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H25).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 165 (H26), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. Also, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous production has been performed. The display of the replay icon RPL may be started after the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo ream after the display of the replay icon RPL is started. The change display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the second change display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 has changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side has been deleted. As described above, in this effect example, the bomb is reduced by one each time the timer notice effect is performed once. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 165 (H27), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (H27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H28) following FIG. 165 (H27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H29), “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the second timer announcement display TM12, the countdown continues, and “02:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (H29).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (H30), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are bundled together is displayed. The bomb on the left explodes, an effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the suspended icon display area is deleted, but the displayed state of the variable icon display area is maintained. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the second timer notice display TM12 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H31), a state in which the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed is shown. At this time, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL to inform that the Sabohani group notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 has been deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (H32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other, in the super-reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area has been deleted. Further, in this effect example, in correspondence with the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb that is the remaining one of the three, the “standby” is displayed together with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer announcement effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, a state is displayed in which the display of the fact that the timer notice effect is on standby is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H33), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the third timer notice display TM13 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect three seconds after the start of the countdown. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been deleted. Note that the replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer advance display TM13 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 166 (H34), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer advance display TM13. Is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown.

  After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H35) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (H36), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative pattern display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 166 (H37) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the change icon h0 is displayed again, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (H 38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this effect example, the timer notice effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is performed, but the number of times is not the same as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer announcement effect is executed or the maximum number of times the timer announcement effect can be executed.

  In this effect example, in FIG. 165 (H13), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode of three bombs. As shown in FIG. 166 (H13 ′), the character of the lord may be further displayed in a display mode (display mode of the Yoshimune triple bomb hold), that is, the display mode of the Yoshimune triple bomb hold is as described above. It is reported that the number of executions of the timer notice effect is larger than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and it can be said that the display mode is ranked higher than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In other words, it can be said that the holding icon (fluctuation icon) in the display mode of the character indicates that the timer announcement effect is executed a plurality of times.

  Further, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed by performing the timer notice effect, the display mode of one bomb is changed to the display mode of three bombs, but the display mode of each bomb is Is the same before and after the change, but the display mode of each bomb may be different before and after the change. For example, a round display portion (a portion excluding the fuse wire portion) included in the display mode of one bomb ) Before and after a certain effect is performed, from a default display mode (circular white display mode: normal timer hold display mode) to a display mode including a red hold display mode (triple red timer hold display mode) ), Or before and after a certain effect is performed, the display mode of the blue timer hold including the display mode of the blue hold is changed to the display mode of the triple red timer hold including the display mode of the red hold. Is also good.

  FIG. 166 (H7a) to FIG. 167 (H34a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 165 (H6). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 165 (H3), when the number of holdings is increased, the second holding icon h12 is displayed not as a single bomb but as a bunch of three bombs. It shall be displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 166 (H7a) to (H12a) are the same as those in the first holding icon h11 except that the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one block. 165 (H7) to the effect shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H13a), as a result of the hold change animation being performed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one bomb to one bomb Is displayed, and the character “TIMER” is added above the display mode. On the other hand, the display mode has changed to one bomb, but the color has changed from the default color (white) to red, and also has a function of a look-ahead notice regarding a big hit. That is, the advance notice display (read ahead notice) that the three timer advance effects are performed is changed to the advance notice display (preliminary notice) that the one timer advance effect is executed, Although the number of executions of the timer announcement effect suggested by the hold icon decreases, the reliability of the big hit is improved, and the rank is substantially improved. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 166 (H14a) to (H18a) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 166 (H14a) to (H18a) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 165 (H14) to (H18) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H19a), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, a decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, three treasure boxes BX1 to BX3 are arranged in a triangle shape, and the contents are displayed in each treasure box. That is, an icon of a timer notice, which is a display mode of a bomb, is displayed on the treasure box BX1, an icon of a bancho is displayed on the treasure box BX2, and an icon of Sabohani is displayed on the treasure box BX3. . In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “mini game start” is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H20a), an animation in which the treasure box is shuffled is started, and a display in which the three treasure boxes move in a ring at high speed is shown. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “selection” is displayed, and the user is prompted to operate the effect button 136 from the three treasure chests that move at high speed to select one of them.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H21a), the button image 136a is displayed at the upper left of the display screen together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has started, and to play the game. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the user. The display mode of the remaining time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the operation reception period.

  FIG. 166 (H22a) shows a state where the effect button 136 is operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation reception period. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H23a), a state is shown in which the treasure box BX3 of the three treasure boxes is selected and the treasure box BX3 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed to urge attention to the result of the mini game.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (H24a), the treasure chest BX3 is opened, and the appearance of the icon SBHN of Sabohani from inside is shown. That is, it is foreseen that a strong Sabohani group notice will be given. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "group notice" is displayed, which indicates that a Sabohani group notice will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H25a) following FIG. 166 (H24a), a state in which the timer notice effect has started is shown. Specifically, the character “TIMER” displayed above the display of the bomb on the fluctuation icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer announcement effect is started. "05:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, which indicates that a certain effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “timer activation” is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed after 5 seconds. Note that “timer activation” may be displayed after the character “TIMER” in the fluctuation icon h0 is switched to “05:00”, or “TIMER” in the fluctuation icon h0 after “timer activation” is displayed. May be switched to "05:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the change icon h0 may be switched to "05:00" at the timing when "timer activation" is displayed. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H26a), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, the countdown of the timer display is continuing, and “03:41” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (H26a). That is, a state in which 1.59 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display was started is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 167 (H27a), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (H28a), on the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Note that the countdown of the timer display is continuing, and “01:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (H28a).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (H29a), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the suspended icon display area is deleted, but the displayed state of the variable icon display area is maintained. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is shown.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H30a) shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). When the swordsman reach is developed, a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H31a) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (H32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is substantially at the center. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 167 (H33a), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5” is shown. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 167 (H34a), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect, the effect in which the number of executions of the notified timer notice effect is reduced is shown. . Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a mini game in which one of a plurality of options is selected includes an option for performing a timer notice effect. Also, in this effect example, it is shown that although the number of executions of the notified timer notice effect is reduced, the reliability of the big hit is improved and the contents of the notice are practically upgraded.

  167 (H24a ') to (H27a') show another effect pattern following FIG. 166 (H23a). However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the treasure chest BX2 of the three treasure chests is selected in FIG. 166 (H23a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H24a '), the treasure box BX2 is opened, and the appearance of the icon BCHO of the number one from the inside is shown. That is, it is predicted that the display mode of the change icon (or the hold icon) will be changed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character “icon change” is displayed, and a change in the display mode of the change icon (hold icon) is announced in advance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (H25a ′), a state in which the timer notice effect has started is shown. Specifically, the character “TIMER” displayed above the display of the bomb on the fluctuation icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer announcement effect is started. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 167 (H25a) (that is, unlike the case where the icon SBHN of Sabohani appears from the treasure chest), the timer display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 indicates “02: 00 "is displayed, indicating that a certain effect is started two seconds after the start of the countdown. That is, in this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is not a Sabohani group notice but a change effect of a fluctuating icon (hold icon). In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “timer activation” is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect performed two seconds later. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (H26a '), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decoration design display device 208 starts the hold change animation and the first hold animation. It is notified that the display mode of the icon h11 may change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (H27a ′), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the number, and a highly reliable notice display mode is achieved.

  Thus, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the initial value of the timer display displayed in the timer notice effect differs depending on the result selected in the mini game.

  In this effect example, for example, when the treasure chest BX1 is selected in FIG. 166 (H23a) and the icon of the timer notice appears, the fluctuating icon displayed in the bomb display mode ranks up, and the big hit The display mode changes to a display mode in which the reliability increases.

  Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, the display mode including the increase / decrease of the display of the bomb in the hold icon (the fluctuation icon) and the display mode including the display of the bomb are changed to the display mode of the bancho. Although the situation is shown, for example, the display mode may be changed with the increase or decrease of the display of the bomb on the hold icon (change icon). Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, a state is shown in which the icon is increased / decreased and the display mode of the icon is changed in the hold icon (variable icon). The increase / decrease of the notice icon (notice item) and the change of the display mode of the notice icon may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the timer announcement effect is performed when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed in the timer hold display mode, but when the hold icon (variable icon) is not displayed in the timer hold display mode (for example, The timer announcement effect may be performed even when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed according to the display mode of the bancho, the display mode of Sabohani, or the display mode of replay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that, as an effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect, a notification effect may be performed, and a chance-up effect may be performed. Here, the “announcement effect” is an effect indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit or that a reach effect (specific reach effect) may be performed. There is a notice etc. The "chance-up effect" is a specific effect that (1) is executed to improve the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display, and includes, for example, a pseudo continuous effect. Alternatively, (2) a notice effect, which is an effect that is executed in a specific mode to further improve the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display, for example, a notice effect of cut-in, In contrast to a normal mode displayed in a blue frame, a normal mode is displayed in a red frame (displayed in a chance-up display mode). In other words, the chance-up effect is an effect in which the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when executed than when it is not executed.

In the above description,
A game console provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 69 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a display of time (for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1).
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-ren, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 73 (9), a resurrection effect shown in FIG. Of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 76, or the effect of the change of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 76 (6) to (7)] may be started.
The certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 71 (5) to 71 (6), the timer Although the advance notice TM1 is displayed, it is deleted before the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00", and a certain effect is not performed.
The display of the timer display is started, and the certain effect is started in response to the display of the time being a certain time (for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” or the like). [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (9), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern by the pseudo run is performed. Etc.],
When the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the symbol variation display as compared with the case where the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. Easy to be,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  Conventionally, display effects on display means tend to be various. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this gaming table, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display means.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the start of the timer display can be expected to start a certain effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

  Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Also, the timer display may always include the display of time, or may not include the display of time.

  Further, it may be configured that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than the certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started. May be configured to be performed in some cases. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or that a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

  Further, it may be configured that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured in some cases.

  Further, it may be configured such that even after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may not be started, or even after the display of the timer display is started, The effect other than the above may not be started in some cases. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is not necessarily started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. May be configured in some cases.

  Further, the display of the timer display may be started, and only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the time reaching a certain time, or the display of the timer display may be started. The effect other than the certain effect may be started in response to the display of the time being a certain time. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started in response to the start of the timer display and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started and the time is displayed. May be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even if the display of a certain time occurs.

  Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time being at a certain time, or the display of the timer display may be started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than that the time display has reached a certain time.

  In addition, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, or the big hit symbol may not be definitely displayed. May be configured.

In addition, there is a case where the certain effect is started after the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. 69 (3) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 becomes “00:00” after the timer notification effect has started, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run starts. etc],
If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. As shown in (3) to (6), if the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 is erased before “00:00” after the fake timer notification effect is started, the pseudo-link is used. The second display of the decorative pattern is not started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the display of the timer display is started and when the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started without fail, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display may be started. A certain effect may be started later, except when the time display reaches a certain time.

  Further, if the display of the timer display is terminated after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started, When the display of the timer display ends after the display is started and before the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display is terminated after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, When the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started.

  Also, a certain effect may not be started only when the display of the timer display is completed after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, other than when the display of the timer display is ended, a certain effect may not be started.

Also, the “display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 83 (3) to 83 (9)].
When the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 83 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini-game, the display of the time is the certain display. It is configured such that the certain effect is started when the time is reached. [For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure chest image, it is shown in FIG. 83 (17). Thus, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the trend of the timer notice can be excited by the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be one capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or one capable of displaying a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display a mini-game display, or may not display a mini-game display.

  Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of the time may reach a certain time and an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may always be started, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, even when the first result is not derived, the display of the time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item [for example, a princess character HME displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 83 (10)].
The notice item may be displayed in accordance with the result of the display of the mini-game. [For example, in the mini-game shown in FIGS. 83 (5) to 83 (9), a princess When the character HME appears, the princess character HME is displayed as a preview item at the lower left of the display screen as shown in FIG. 83 (10)],
The notice item includes a display indicating that the certain effect is to be performed [for example, when the princess character HME is displayed as the notice item, it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.]. ,
After the display of the notice item is started, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. , After the princess character HME is displayed as a preview item, the second decorative pattern variation display is started by the pseudo run at the timing when the timer display in the timer preview display TM1A becomes “0:00”] ,
When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is not started [for example, in FIG. 84 (5) to FIG. In the illustrated mini-game, when a grandmother character BBA (10) appears from a treasure box image, a preview item is not displayed as shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display of the notice item may be noticed in some cases.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the start of a certain effect by the timer display can be recognized by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect can be excited during a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice item, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice item. In addition, the display means may always display the notice item, or may not display the notice item.

  In addition, it may be configured such that only the notice item is displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game, or that other than the notice item is displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. It may be configured as such. In addition, the configuration may be such that the notice item is always displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game, or may be configured such that the notice item may not be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. Good.

  The notice item may include only a display indicating that a certain effect is to be executed, or may include a display other than a display indicating that a certain effect is to be executed. In addition, the notice item may always include a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed, or may not include a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed.

  After the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of time may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The display of the time may reach a certain time and an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Also, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may always be started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, only after the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started, or other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

  Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the display of time may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may not be started, or when the notice item is not displayed, the time may be displayed. An effect other than a certain effect may not be started at a certain time. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not always be started, or when the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time may be sometime. A certain effect may be configured to be started at a certain time.

Further, it is configured such that after the display of the timer display is started, the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 83 (9), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 83 (14), before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts, as shown in FIG. , The result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the display result of the mini game.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the relevance between the timer display and the mini game can be impressed.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, before the display of the time display starts to change, a configuration other than the display result of the mini game may be derived. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

  Further, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the display result of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

  Further, only after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. Other than after the display, the display result of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, it is configured such that after the display of the time display starts to change, the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 79 (4), after the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1L is started, the timer display of the timer advance display TM1L becomes “0:00” at the timing shown in FIG. Before the is completed, the display result of the mini game is derived as shown in FIG. 79 (9)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the result of voting in the mini game.

  Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time may be configured. After the display starts to change, it may be configured such that other than the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the time display reaches a certain time. In addition, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time may be performed. After the start of the change, the display result of the mini game may not be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

  Further, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time may be configured. After the start of the change, the display result of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

  Further, the display result of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time only after the display of the display of the time starts to change, or the display of the display of the time may be configured. May be configured to derive the display result of the mini-game before the display of the time reaches a certain time other than after the start of the change.

Also, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (3) to 85 (4), the timer announcement effect Mini-game is started before the game starts),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, at the time when the display of the mini-game is started, it is not known whether or not the timer display is started, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini-game.

  Here, only the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display other than the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started. Display may also be started. In addition, the display of the mini-game may be started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini-game may not be started before the display of the timer display is started. Is also good.

  In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be performed other than before the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

  In addition, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display alone is started, or the display of the mini game is started before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

Also, a second result [for example, a result of the appearance of the icon BCF of the face-length face from the treasure chest image shown in FIG. 85 (8)] may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game,
The second result is a result that is not related to the certain effect. [For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (8), when the result of the appearance of the icon BCF of the face-length face from the treasure chest image is derived, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 86 (25) is not related to the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 85 (4), etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the display result of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

  Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or a result other than the second result may be derived as the result of the display of the mini game. Good. Also, the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

  Further, the second result may not be related to only a certain effect, or may be not related to effects other than the certain effect. Further, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

Further, a first notice [for example, an effect of a change in the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 76 (6) to (7) or the like] may be executed as the certain effect,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a timer display is displayed and expectation can be given that a prefetch notice is given.

  Here, only a first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be executed as a certain effect. Also, the first notice may be always executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, there is a case where a second notice [for example, a pseudo-ren etc.] is executed as the certain effect,
The second notice is a notice in which the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when executed than when not executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the timer display is displayed and the execution time of the symbol variation display is lengthened, so that it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit.

  Here, only a second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the second notice may be always executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the second notice may be that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be longer. Also, the second notice may be that the execution time of the symbol variation display is always longer when executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

In addition, a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 80 (35) or the like] may be executed as the certain effect.
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when executed than when it is not executed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a timer display is displayed and a sense of expectation can be given that a jackpot notice is performed.

  Here, only a third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the third notice may be always executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the third notice may be one in which only the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when executed than in the case where it is not executed, or executed when it is not executed. May be such that symbols other than the big hit symbol are more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display in the case where it is executed rather than the case where it is not executed, or in the case where it is executed than when it is not executed. There may be a case where the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, the third notice may be such that when executed, the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, or when executed, the big hit symbol may not be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be.

Also, there is a case where a fourth notice [for example, a resurrection effect shown in FIG. 77 (30)] is executed as the certain effect,
The fourth notice is a notice that informs of a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a timer display is displayed and a sense of expectation can be given to a big hit.

  Here, only a fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the fourth notice may be always executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

  Further, the fourth notice may be a notification that only a big hit is made, or a notification other than the big hit may be made. In addition, the fourth notice may be a message that always informs of a big hit, or may not notify a big hit.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying an error display without a ball [e.g., an error display ERR1 of a lower plate full condition shown in FIG. 119 (1)]
The ball empty error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state (for example, a lower dish full error state or the like),
The timer display may be overlapped with the ball empty error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the lower plate full error display ERR1. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to motivate the player to quickly cancel the full tank error state in order to see the effect displayed by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be one capable of displaying only the ball-out error display, or one capable of displaying a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball-drop error display, or may not display the ball-drop error display.

  In addition, the ball emptying error display may be displayed only in the full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the full tank error state. In addition, the ball emptying error display may be always displayed in the full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the full tank error state.

  Also, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball-drop error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with displays other than the ball-drop error display. You may. Further, the timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball-drop error display, or the timer display may not be overlapped with the ball-drop error display.

Further, the “timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 78 (3)].
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 76 (3)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
When the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode, the certain effect is configured to be easily started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where expectations can be given to the start of a certain effect depending on the mode of the timer display.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first, the player expects a certain effect to be performed by expecting the mini-game to be successful, but the timer display mode, which is being displayed halfway, is indirectly started earlier. In some cases, expectations can be given to the display result of the game. In other words, the effect (timer display) started later may function as a notice of the effect (mini-game or the like) started earlier to give the player interest.

  Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

  Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode, it may be configured such that only a certain effect is easily started, An effect other than a certain effect may be more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the timer display is displayed in the first mode, a certain effect may be configured to always start, The effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be configured to always start, or when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be performed. May not be started in some cases.

  The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or the timer display may be changed to the first mode after being displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started in the second mode, You may be comprised so that it may not change to a 1st aspect.

In addition, one of the plurality of types is a third type [for example, a timer display of “7:77” shown in FIG. 120A or a “99:99” , A rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 120 (g), etc.]
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to have expectations at the time of starting the timer display.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to be displayed in the third mode.

  Here, the third embodiment may be partially different from the first embodiment, or may be entirely different from the first embodiment.

  Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be entirely different from the second aspect.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured such that only the big hit symbol is displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The design other than the big hit symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The big hit symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol may be configured to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or other than when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also in the case of, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, a state that is different from the big hit game performed in response to the big hit symbol being fixedly displayed and is advantageous to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “ "First state").
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the timer display may increase the sense of expectation for the third mode.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the first state may be provided, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the second state is displayed. A state other than the one state may be provided. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be always provided, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state is displayed. May not be provided.

  Further, the first state may be provided only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. May be configured such that the first state is provided.

Also, "the first state is a probable change state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  It is to be noted that the probable change state may or may not be provided with the electric support state. Further, the probable change state may be a probable change state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probable change state (ST) in which the state ends when a certain number of symbol change displays are performed. Good.

  Further, instead of the probable change state, the power support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) may be used.

In addition, "the first state is a reservation extended villa,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, the reservation extended villa may be a reservation extended villa in which the probability of a large hit is determined, or may be a reservation extended villa in which a non-probable large hit is determined.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is definitely displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases in which the player can be expected even when the timer display does not reach a certain time.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display of the time is not changed in the symbol variation display, and only the timer display is deleted before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display other than the timer display is also erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, if the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may not be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the timer display is erased only before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased other than before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the time display is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Also, in cases other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is definitely displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display It may be configured as follows.

  Note that the timer display may be erased before the time display changes and reaches a certain time.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is determined. Is configured to be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, advantageous development may be expected even when a certain effect is not started.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. It may be configured, if the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time has reached a certain time, a certain effect is not started without a symbol other than the big hit symbol It may be configured to be displayed in a fixed manner. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is always confirmed and displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed May be configured.

  Also, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be done. Also, in cases other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  The time display may reach a certain time, a certain effect may be started, and the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed.

Further, the “first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, a timer display of“ 5:00 ”or the like),
The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a second time [for example, a timer display of “20:00” or the like],
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a third time [for example, a timer display of “7:77” or the like],
In the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time,
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

  Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time. The time may be a time other than the above time. Further, the first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time. A mode that may not be time may be used.

  Further, the second mode may be a mode in which the time displayed first in the timer display is only the second time, or the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time. It may be a mode that is also a time other than the time. Further, the second mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time. A mode that may not be time may be used.

  Further, the third mode may be a mode in which the time displayed first in the timer display is only the third time, or the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time. It may be a mode that is also a time other than the time. Further, the third mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is always the third time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the third time. A mode that may not be time may be used.

  Also, between the first time and the second time, the second time may be always longer, or the second time may not be longer.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from times other than the first time. Further, the third time may be always different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from times other than the second time. Further, the third time may be always different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

  Further, the third time may be a time that is displayed even when the first state is not provided, or may be a time that is always provided when the first state is provided. Alternatively, the time may be a time when the first state is not given when the first state is given.

In addition, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and a display below the decimal point can be displayed [for example, the timer notice display shown in FIG. The decimal display can be displayed on the timer display in TM1 etc.],
The display of the first time as a display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as a display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premium timer.

  Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to display only the display after the decimal point, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be configured to display the number of seconds and display other than the display after the decimal point. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds and may be configured to always display the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. May be configured to display the number of seconds and not to display the fractional part in some cases.

The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
The display of the second time as a display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premium timer.

Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and a display below the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. In the timer display in the display TM1, it is also possible to display decimal places, etc.],
The display of the first time as a display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
The display of the second time as a display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display performs a notice,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

In addition, it is provided with an effect display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG.
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
When the timer display is displayed on one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "first case [for example, any one of decorative symbol display device 208 and 7-segment display device SEG] , Etc., only when the timer notice is displayed] ”).)
When the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 114 (3) to (12)], the decorative symbol display device 208 And the like, when both the timer announcement effect and the timer announcement display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed] ”).
In the first case, it is configured that the certain effect may not be started,
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the start of a certain effect can be expected depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

  Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only effect display, or may be capable of executing display other than effect display. Further, the effect display means may always execute the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

  Further, the effect display means may be one capable of displaying only a timer display, or one capable of displaying a display other than a timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

  Also, in the first case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started, or in the first case, it may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Is also good. In the first case, a configuration may be such that a certain effect is not always started, or a certain effect may be started.

  In the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, in the second case, a configuration may be such that a certain effect is always started, or a certain effect may not be started.

  The case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means is better than the case where the timer display is displayed by only the display means of the effect display means and the display means. Ultimately, the big hit symbol may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, it is finally a big hit than when the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. You may be comprised so that a pattern may be confirmed and displayed easily.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means may be terminated halfway.

  Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and a certain effect is started when a certain time is reached in the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means. May be done.

In addition, the “timer display is a display in which the time display is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, a timer display of “00:00” shown in FIG. 69 (9) or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain time has been reached.

  Note that the certain time may include 0 including the decimal point, and may be, for example, a display of “0.00” or “00.00”, or “0:00” or “0:00”. "00:00" may be displayed.

In the above description,
A production means (for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.) capable of executing a timer production;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons;
A gaming table with
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 143 (9) to (13), if the timer display becomes “00:00” after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the pseudo continuous production is performed. Is started etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a bomb display mode illustrated in FIG. 143 (3)].
The second hold icon is a pre-reading notice hold icon,
The second holding icon is a holding icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol change display [for example, in FIG. 143 (3) to FIG. As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb indicates that the timer announcement effect is to be started in the next symbol change display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having features in the display means can be provided.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to know the contents of the effect (timer effect is performed) by the hold icon.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that if the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, It may be configured such that if the timer display reaches a certain time after the display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display has reached a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, the present invention may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display has reached a certain time after the timer display is started. However, the present invention may be configured so that a certain effect may be started in a case other than when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  In addition, the second hold icon may indicate only that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer icon may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than that the effect may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer icon may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the effect may not be suggested to be started.

  Hereinafter, "at least suggesting" includes not only implicitly suggesting but also explicitly notifying.

  In addition, the second hold icon, when displayed, the timer effect may necessarily start, for example, the timer effect may not start even if the second hold icon is displayed, For example, a fake second hold icon in which the timer effect is not started may be displayed, or after the second hold icon is displayed, a big hit occurs before the timer effect starts, and the big hit After the big hit game ends, the icon may become the hold icon in the default display mode and the timer effect may not be performed.

In addition, “the second holding icon is a holding icon indicating the content of the certain effect [for example, the holding icon in the bomb display mode is a certain effect as shown in FIG. 145 (8). Etc., suggesting that there may be pseudo-sequence productions]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the effect executed in the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetch notice.

  Here, the second hold icon may be one that can suggest only the contents of a certain effect, or may be one that can suggest other than the contents of a certain effect. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate the contents of a certain effect, or may not always indicate the contents of a certain effect.

In addition, the “second hold icon” is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are grouped as shown in FIG. 148 (3)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 148 (3) to 149 (23). As shown in the above, the holding icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are massed indicates that the timer announcement effect is to be started three times in the symbol variation display to be started next],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the display of one hold icon can give a sense of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the second display mode may indicate only that a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may indicate a plurality of timer effects during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. In addition, the second display mode may always indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the plurality of timer effects may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it does not indicate that the timer effect has started.

  Further, the second display mode may indicate that only a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the plurality of timer effects may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may indicate that an effect other than the timer effect is started.

  Further, the second display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

Further, the “second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode including one bomb shown in FIG. 143 (3)],
The first display mode is a display mode suggesting that at least one timer effect is started before the certain symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (9), the hold icon in the display mode composed of one bomb indicates that one timer notice effect is started in the next symbol change display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the number of times of the timer effect can be expected by the holding icon.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  Further, the first display mode may indicate only that one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. It may also indicate a thing other than that one timer effect is started until it is ended. In addition, the first display mode may necessarily indicate that one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. There may be a case where it does not indicate that one timer effect is started until the process is ended.

  In addition, the first display mode may indicate that only one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. It may indicate that an effect other than one timer effect is also started before the operation is ended.

  It should be noted that the second display mode may be configured to execute the timer effect more frequently than the first display mode.

  Also, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in pattern 2 than in pattern 1. You may be comprised so that it may be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

  Further, even in the first display mode, a plurality of timer effects may be started.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 153 (3)].
The third hold icon is a pre-reading notice hold icon,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The third holding icon is a holding icon on which a certain character [for example, a palace character or the like] is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of the certain symbol change display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 153 (3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of the big hit (super reach), and does not indicate that the timer notice production is started, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode for holding a Yoshimune bomb shown in FIG. 154 (3)].
The third display mode is a display mode that indicates that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIG. 154 (3) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the hold icon of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode including the character of the lord suggests that the timer announcement effect will be started in the next symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the expectation of the reliability of the prefetch notice can be given.

  Here, the third hold icon may display only a certain character, or may display something other than a certain character. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed or one in which a certain character may not be displayed.

  Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a symbol variation display. A display other than a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution may not be included. Further, the third hold icon may not necessarily include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may not include a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution.

  Further, the third hold icon may not include a display indicating only that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may not include a symbol variation display. It may not include a display indicating that there is a case where the timer effect is started during execution.

  Further, the third hold icon may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may not include a symbol variation display. A display indicating that the timer effect may be started other than during the execution may not be included.

  The second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Is also good. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the third display mode may indicate only that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may also indicate something other than the start of the timer effect during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition, the third display mode may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. May not indicate that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the third display mode may indicate that only the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may indicate that an effect other than the timer effect is also started during the execution of the symbol change display.

  Further, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may indicate that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the timer effect may be started in the symbol variation display before the certain symbol variation display is started. For example, a timer effect in which the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display prior to a certain symbol variation display. According to this, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the game while expecting that the timer effect is performed collectively in one symbol change display.

In addition, it is configured such that "information on the certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 148 (16), the replay icon RPL indicates that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and thereafter, may be able to watch the timer effect while imagining the contents of the certain effect.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to execute only the notification related to a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured to be able to execute information other than the information related to the certain effect performed by the timer effect. May be used. Further, the present invention may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured to not execute the information regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect. May be done.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a fluctuating icon [for example, fluctuating icon h0 or the like]
The second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be started to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as a "first change icon") in association with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (7) to FIG. 8 (8), the first holding icon h11 in a display mode in which three bombs are bundled together is displayed in the next symbol variation display. When started, it is displayed as a change icon h0 having the same display mode, etc.],
A display in which the display mode of the first variation icon changes in association with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first display [for example, FIG. 148 (9) to (16), a display mode in which three bombs are changed to a display mode in which two bombs are changed to a display mode in which two bombs are changed to a display mode is displayed. Is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 148 (8) to (16), when one timer notice effect is executed, three bombs are displayed as one lump. Change icon h0 changes to a display mode in which two bombs are united, etc.],
The first variation icon after the display mode has been changed by the first display is a variation icon that can indicate the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, As shown in FIG. 148 (16), the fluctuating icon h0 that has changed to a display mode in which two bombs are united indicates that the timer announcement effect is to be executed two more times, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the fluctuating icon can function as means for informing the number of times of the timer effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fluctuating icons, or may be capable of displaying other than fluctuating icons. Further, the display means may always display the changing icon, or may not display the changing icon.

  In addition, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured. The display may be configured such that the icon may be started to be displayed other than the first variable icon. Also, the second hold icon that was displayed as a hold icon may be configured to be always started to be displayed as a first change icon, or the second hold icon that was displayed as a hold icon, The display may not be started as the first variable icon.

  In addition, only the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed as the first change icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured. A configuration other than the icon may be configured to be displayed as the first variable icon in some cases.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the first display is displayed in association with execution of one timer effect during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or execution of a certain symbol variation display The display other than the first display may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect once. Also, the first display may be configured to be always displayed in association with the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display may be performed. It may be configured such that the first display may not be displayed in relation to the execution of the timer effect once.

  Further, the first display may be displayed in association with only one timer effect being executed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display may be performed. The first display may be configured to be displayed in association with a thing other than that one timer effect is executed.

  Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be one that can indicate only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, a value other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display may be suggested. Further, the first change icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may necessarily indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol change display, There may be a case where the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display is not suggested.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can indicate the time displayed when the timer display is started [for example, FIG. 158 (6) , A timer display is displayed above the hold icon in the bomb display mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to imagine the contents of a certain effect executed by suggesting the display of the initial value of the time in the timer display.

  Here, the second hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed only in a mode that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display may be performed. There may be a case where the time displayed at the start is displayed in a mode other than the mode in which the time can be suggested. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in a manner that suggests a time to be displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started. May not be displayed in a suggestable manner.

  In addition, the second hold icon may be displayed in a manner in which only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be displayed, or the display of the timer display may be started. There may be a case where a time other than the time displayed when the display is performed is displayed in a suggestable manner.

In addition, a plurality of timer effects (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of timer effects”) may be started simultaneously during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. , Two timer announcements have started simultaneously, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect according to the second timer notification display TM12 illustrated in FIG. 156 (17)].
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect according to the third timer notification display TM13 illustrated in FIG. 156 (17)].
Displayed when display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display [for example, second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 156 (17)]”) is started. And the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, “second timer display [for example, the third timer shown in FIG. 156 (17)]). The time (for example, 8 seconds ("08:00"), etc.) displayed when the display of "timer notice display TM13 etc.]" is started is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, a first effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 157 (19)) may be performed as the certain effect,
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, a second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 shown in FIG. 157 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where a plurality of certain effects (notifications) can be expected to be performed by combining timer effects.

  Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. In addition, a plurality of timer effects may always be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Also, only a plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or effects other than the plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

  Note that the start times of the plurality of timer effects may be shifted, and at least some of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may be overlapped.

  Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be always different times, It may be the same time.

  Further, when the first timer display has reached a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display has reached a certain time. An effect other than the first effect may be performed as a certain effect. Further, when the first timer display has reached a certain time, the first effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display has reached a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. In some cases, the first effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display has reached a certain time, or other than when the first timer display has reached a certain time. The first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, when the second timer display has reached a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display has reached a certain time. An effect other than the second effect may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, when the second timer display has reached a certain time, the second effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display has reached a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. In some cases, the second effect may not be performed.

  Further, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display has reached a certain time, or other than when the second timer display has reached a certain time. A second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  Further, the first effect and the second effect may be always different or may be the same.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball-drop error display [for example, a ball-drop error display shown in FIG. 141 (9 ″)).
The ball emptying error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (9 ″), when a lower dish full error occurs, a ball empty error occurs. Display is displayed],
It is configured such that one of the timer display and the ball error display may overlap with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the ball removing operation can be hastened by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be one capable of displaying only the ball-out error display, or one capable of displaying a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the ball-drop error display, or may be one that does not always display the ball-drop error display.

  In addition, the ball emptying error display may be displayed only in the full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the full tank error state. In addition, the ball emptying error display may be always displayed when the dish is full, or may not be displayed when the dish is full.

  In addition, one of the timer display and the ball drop error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball drop error display may be displayed. May be overlapped with a display other than the other display. Further, one of the timer display and the ball-drop error display may be configured to always overlap the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball-drop error display may be configured to be the other. You may be comprised so that it may not overlap with a display.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 121 (3) to (12)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect according to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 121 (5) to (7)]. ,
The first timer effect is performed after the display of the first timer display [eg, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 121 (3)] is started. The first effect (for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 121 (13)) may be started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, “00:00” or the like]. It is a composed effect,
The second timer effect is performed after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 121 (5)] is started. In response to the display indicating the time [for example, “00:00” or the like], the second effect [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 121 (8)] is started. Is a production that is configured to have
During the display of a certain decorative symbol change display, the period during which the first timer display is displayed (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 121 (3) to 121 (12)) and the second timer display are displayed. The displayed period [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 121 (5) to 121 (7)] overlaps (hereinafter, referred to as “first period [for example, to FIGS. 121 (5) to 121 (7)]). Period, etc.] ").)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  The conventional game console has room for improvement in the effect means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic in the effect means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the effect of a certain decorative symbol change display can be excited by performing the timer effect in an overlapping manner.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of timer effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of timer effects, or may not execute the plurality of types of timer effects.

  In addition, the first timer effect may be such that after the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect is started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time. It may be configured as a certain, other than the first effect in response to the first timer display has reached the first time after the display of the first timer display has started It may be configured such that an effect may also be started. Further, the first timer effect is such that the first effect is always started in response to the first timer display being at the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started in response to the first timer display having reached the first time after the display of the first timer display has been started. It may be configured as such.

  Further, the first timer effect may be such that after the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is started only in response to the first timer display reaching the first time. It may be configured as such, or the first timer display may be the first time after the display of the first timer display is started and the first timer display may be the first time. May be configured so that the production of the game may be started.

  Also, the first timer effect may be such that the first effect is started only after the display of the first timer display is started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time. It may be configured as such, or the first effect may be performed in response to the first timer display reaching the first time even after the display of the first timer display has started. It may be configured so that it may be started.

  Also, in the second timer effect, there is a case where only the second effect is started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as, or after the second timer display is started after the second timer display has reached the second time, other than the second effect It may be configured such that an effect may also be started. Also, the second timer effect is such that the second effect is always started in response to the second timer display being at the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display having reached the second time after the display of the second timer display has been started It may be configured as such.

  In addition, the second timer effect may be that the second effect is started only in response to the second timer display being at the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as, or the second timer display may be the second time after the display of the second timer display is started, other than that the second time has come to the second time. May be configured so that the production of the game may be started.

  Further, the second timer effect may be such that the second effect is started only after the display of the second timer display is started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time. It may be configured as such, or even after the display of the second timer display is started, the second effect is performed in response to the second timer display reaching the second time. It may be configured so that it may be started.

  In addition, during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display, it may be configured such that only the first period may occur, or during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display, a period other than the first period may be generated. May be configured to occur. In addition, the first period may be configured to always occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first period may not occur during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the first period may be generated only during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display, or the first period may be set other than during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display. It may be configured so that it may occur.

Further, it is configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a prefetch notice [ For example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (5) to (8), the second timer notice display TM12 of the timer notice effects according to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effects according to the second timer notice display TM12. Is an effect executed as a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display form of the pre-reading notice, etc.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the effect of a certain decorative design variable display can be enlivened by using the timer effect as a pre-reading notice.

  Here, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a pre-reading notice. And, it is configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as other than the prefetch notice. Is also good. Further, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is always executed as a prefetch notice, May be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed during the period is not executed as a pre-reading notice.

  Further, it may be configured such that only one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a prefetch notice. It may be configured such that an effect other than at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may also be executed as a prefetch notice. .

  Further, it may be configured such that one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a prefetch notice, It may be configured such that both the timer effects of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the period may be executed as a prefetch notice.

Also, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice relating to the certain decorative symbol change display, and the other is executed as a pre-read notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (3) to (13), the timer announcement effect of the first timer announcement display TM11 and the timer announcement effect of the second timer The timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11 is an effect for executing a pseudo continuous production which is an announcement of the symbol variation display, and the timer announcement effect according to the second timer advance display TM12 is a display mode of a hold icon. Effect to execute the change effect of
In the first period, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect which are being executed may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol change display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 123 (37), of the timer announcement effect according to the third timer advance display TM13 and the timer advance effect according to the fourth timer advance display TM14, the timer advance effect according to the third timer advance display TM13 is as follows. This is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as the notice effect, and the timer notice effect according to the fourth timer notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group notice as the notice effect. ],
There is a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed as a prefetch notice (hereinafter, referred to as a “first case”) [for example. As shown in FIG. 124 (3) to FIG. 124 (13), of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11 and the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12, the first timer advance display TM11 is displayed. The timer notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12 is an effect executed for starting the prefetch mode, and the like. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where it is possible to expect that the effect started later is targeted at the same decorative pattern change display as the target of the effect started earlier.

  Here, in the case where one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, and the other is executed only as a pre-read notice. May be performed, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is also executed as something other than a notice related to a certain decorative symbol change display, and the other is a look-ahead. It may be executed as something other than the notice. In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be always executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, and the other may be necessarily executed as a pre-read notice. However, there is a case where one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is not executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative symbol change display, and the other is not executed as a prefetch notice. Is also good.

  Also, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, Both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the period may be executed as other than a notice related to a certain decorative symbol change display. In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be necessarily executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, or may be executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect of the present invention may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display.

  In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed only as a pre-reading notice, or the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a non-prefetch notice. In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be necessarily executed as a prefetch notice, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period. There may be a case where both of the second timer effect and the second timer effect are not executed as the prefetch notice.

In the first case, the first effect [for example, the look-ahead mode shown in FIG. 124 (6)] may be started while the certain decorative pattern variation display is being displayed. Has been
In the first case, a decorative symbol variation display which is started after the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol variation display executed in a period shown in FIGS. 124 (2) to (10)]. During the display of the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol variable display executed during the period shown in FIGS. 124 (11) to (18)]”). The second effect [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 124 (13)] may be started in some cases.
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect according to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 124 (3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM11 shown in FIGS. 124 (3) to (13)] is the same ornamental symbol variation display started after the first ornamental symbol variation display [ 125 (19) to (29), for example, the decorative pattern variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 125 (19) to (29).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain decorative symbol change display can be expected to be the first decorative symbol change display as a pre-reading notice while enlivening a certain decorative symbol change display by a timer effect.

  Here, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, a certain decorative symbol An effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Also, in the first case, the first effect may be configured to always start during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display The first effect may not be started in some cases.

  In the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the certain decorative symbol variation may be started. The first effect may be started other than during the display. In addition, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative pattern variation display, or may be configured in a case other than the first case. It may be configured such that the first effect may be started during the display of the decorative design change display.

  Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decoration An effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. Also, in the first case, the second effect may be configured to always start during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display May be configured such that the second effect may not be started during the display of.

  Further, in the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative pattern variation display, or in the first case, the first decoration may be configured. The second effect may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. In addition, only in the first case, the second effect may be configured to be started during the display of the first decorative symbol change display, or may be configured in a case other than the first case, The second effect may be started while the first decorative symbol change display is being displayed.

  In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative design variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. May be executed, or may be executed as something other than the pre-reading notice for the same decorative design change display started after the first decorative design change display. In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative design variable display started after the first decorative design variable display. May be executed, or may not be executed as a pre-reading notice for the same decorative design change display started after the first decorative design change display.

Also, in the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, FIG. 124 (3) to FIG. An effect performed as a result of performing the timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. 13 (13) is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the panda, etc.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since one effect is a change on hold, it may be possible to expect that the other effect will be performed on the decorative design change display that is the target of the change on hold.

  Here, in the first case, either one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or in the first case, the first effect And the second effect may be effects in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  Note that a pre-reading notice other than the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be given.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, a change effect in the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 130 (9)].
The second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, a change effect in the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 130 (6)].
The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may further change by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. As a result of the timer notice effect of the one-timer notice display TM11, as an effect, an effect of changing the hold icon in the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the commander is performed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases in which a plurality of ranks of the hold icon can be raised by a timer effect.

  Here, the holding icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may further change only by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect of the second effect. The holding icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may further change by an effect other than the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may necessarily change by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect may be changed. There may be cases where the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one effect does not change by the other effect.

  Further, only the holding icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may further change by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect Other than the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by only one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect may be changed. The holding icon whose display mode has been changed by an effect other than one of the effects may further change by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the time according to the second timer effect being executed during the first period, The timing at which the second effect is started may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (5) to (13), a timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11. Is different from the timing at which the pseudo continuous production is started and the timing at which the change production of the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer preliminary production according to the second timer preliminary display TM12 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a variation may be given to the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

  Here, the timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect according to the second timer effect being executed during the first period is started. It may be configured so that only the timing to be performed may be different, the timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and The timing other than the timing at which the second effect according to the second timer effect is started may be different. Further, the timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect according to the second timer effect being executed during the first period are started. The timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period is started, and the second time that is being executed during the first period may be configured. The timing at which the second effect according to the timer effect is started may be the same.

In addition, it is configured such that a first notice icon [for example, a swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 126 (10) or the like as shown in FIG. 126 (10)] may be displayed as the first effect [for example, FIG. ) To (10) (FIGS. 128 (3) to (10)), as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, a swordsman character KNG is given as a certain effect. Is displayed, etc.],
When the first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 128 (3) to (10)] is executed as an advance notice regarding the certain decorative symbol change display. Is displayed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display [for example, the decorative design change display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 128 (2) to 129 (24)]. Thus, during the display of the certain decorative pattern change display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 129 (20) to (22)] is displayed. Is configured to get started,
When the first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 126 (3) to (10)] is executed as a pre-reading advance, the certain decorative symbol is executed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display [for example, the decorative design variable display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 126 (2) to (18)], the certain decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative design variation display started after the variation display [for example, the decorative design variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 127 (19) to (29)]. (For example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 127 (25) to 27 (27)) is started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is performed as a notice or a prefetch notice.

  In addition, if the second production is started first, the preliminary production corresponding to the first production icon will be the same as the second production, depending on whether the second production is a preliminary announcement or a pre-reading preliminary announcement. There is a case where it can be expected that the display will be started with the decorative design variable display.

  Here, it may be configured so that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, a configuration may be such that the first notice icon is always displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

  Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative design change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display, a certain decorative design change is displayed. During the display of the display, it may be configured such that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started, or the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative design change display, an effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is also started during the display of the certain decorative design change display. May be done. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative design change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display, a certain decorative design change is displayed. An effect according to the first notice icon may be started without fail during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative design change display, After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative design change display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started during the display of the certain decorative design change display. You may.

  Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative design change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display, a certain decorative design change is displayed. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to be started only during the display of the display, or the first timer effect may be executed as a notice related to a certain decorative pattern change display, After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative design change display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started in addition to the display of the certain decorative design change display. You may. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative design change display, a certain decorative design is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display. The effect according to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the change display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative design change display, In addition to the display after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative design change display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the certain decorative design change display. You may.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern change display, the first timer effect is started after the certain decorative pattern change display. During the display of the decorative design variation display, only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started, or when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display started after a certain decorative symbol variation display, other than the effect corresponding to the first announcement icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display The effect may be configured to be started. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern change display, the first timer effect is started after the certain decorative pattern change display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started without fail during the display of the decorative symbol change display, or if the first timer effect is executed as a pre-read notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon starts during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that is started after a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern change display, the first timer effect is started after the certain decorative pattern change display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the decorative symbol change display, or if the first timer effect is executed as a pre-read notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol change display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon other than during the display of the decorative symbol change display started after a certain decorative symbol change display May be configured to be started. Also, when the first timer effect is executed as a pre-reading advance notice, the first timer effect is started after a certain decorative design change display only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative design change display. The effect according to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the decorative symbol change display to be performed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol change display, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol change display started after a certain decorative symbol change display May be configured to be started.

In addition, it is configured such that a second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect,
In the case where the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol change display, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display, the certain timer pattern is displayed. During the display of the decorative pattern change display, the effect according to the second notice icon is configured to be started,
When the second timer effect is executed as a pre-reading advance notice, after the second advance notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative design change display, after the certain decorative design change display. During the display of the decorative design change display to be started, the effect according to the second notice icon is configured to be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

  In addition, when one of the first effect and the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative pattern change display, and the other is a pre-reading notice, a notice icon displayed as the first effect and a second notice icon are displayed. The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

Also, "It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini-games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game [for example, a treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 131 (15) to (18)).
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 131 (7) to (10)).
In the first mini game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 131 (3) or the like] becomes the first time [for example, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game whose result is derived before [for example, in the treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 131 (15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is “00:00”. The results have been derived before],
In the second mini game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 131 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, “00:00” etc.]. This is a mini game whose result is derived before [for example, in the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 131 (7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer advance display TM12 is “00:00”. The results have been derived before],
The first effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game. [For example, the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 131 (15) to (18) is successful. 132, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 132 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the first timer advance display TM11, etc.),
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini game [for example, the result of the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 131 (7) to (10) is successful. 131, the effect in which the hold icon shown in FIG. 131 (12) is changed to the display mode of the number is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the second timer advance display TM12. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where not only the time of the timer display is waited but also the result of the mini game can be noticed in the meantime.

  Here, only a plurality of types of mini-games may be configured to be executable, or a configuration other than a plurality of types of mini-games may be configured to be executable. Also, a configuration may be such that a plurality of types of mini-games are always executed, or a configuration may be such that a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed.

  Further, in the first mini game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. In the first mini game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time. May not be derived.

  The first mini-game may be such that the result is derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time. Alternatively, the result may be derived.

  In the second mini game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or the second mini game may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. In the second mini-game, the result may always be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time. May not be derived.

  In the second mini game, the result may be derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time. Alternatively, the result may be derived.

  Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may be configured as an effect according to a result other than the result of the first mini game. May be configured. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may not be an effect corresponding to the result of the first mini game. It may be configured as such.

  Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may be configured as an effect according to a result other than the result of the second mini game. May be configured. Also, the second effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may not be an effect corresponding to the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured as such.

  Note that the type of the mini game may be the same for the first timer effect and the second timer effect, or may be different. In addition, the configuration may be such that the start order and the type of the mini game are associated with each other.

  Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during the execution of the mini game. For example, when the mini game is successful, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed. May be performed.

In addition, it is configured that “the first effect is performed in the first mode when the result of the first mini game is the first result [for example, FIG. 131 (15) to FIG. When the result of the mini-game of the treasure chest shown in (18) is a result of success, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 132 (21) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect according to the first timer notice display TM11. Etc.),
When the result of the first mini game is a third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in a third mode [for example, FIGS. 133 (15) to (18). If the result of the mini-game of the treasure chest shown in FIG. 134 is a failure result, the loss effect shown in FIG. Etc.],
When the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second mode [for example, FIG. 131 (7) to FIG. 131 (10). If the result of the dice mini game shown in FIG. 131 is a success, the effect in which the hold icon shown in FIG. Performed as a result of a certain effect],
When the result of the second mini game is a fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in a fourth mode [for example, FIGS. 133 (7) to (10). If the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 133 is a failure result, the effect in which the hold icon shown in FIG. 133 (12) is changed to the panda display mode is the timer advance effect according to the second timer advance display TM12 Performed as a result of a certain effect],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect by the combination of the mini game and the timer effect is increased and the interest can be enhanced.

  Here, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the first result. In the case where one result is obtained, the first effect may be performed in an aspect other than the first aspect. Further, it may be configured such that when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect is always performed in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. May be configured so that the first effect may not be performed in the first mode when the result of (1) is obtained.

  Further, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, only the first effect may be performed in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the first result. In the case where the result of (1), the effect other than the first effect may be performed in the first mode. The first effect may be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode even in cases other than the case where the result is obtained.

  Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be performed only in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. May be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the third aspect when the result of (1) is obtained. In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be always performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. In such a case, the first effect may not be performed in the third mode.

  Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. In the case where the result of (1), the effect other than the first effect may be performed in the third mode. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game may be set to the third result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode even in cases other than the case where the result is obtained.

  In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect may be performed only in the second mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the second result. May be configured to be performed in a mode other than the second mode when the result of (1) is obtained. Further, it may be configured such that the second effect is always performed in the second mode when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second result. May be configured so that the second effect may not be performed in the second mode when the result of (1) is obtained.

  Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, only the second effect may be performed in the second mode, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second In the case where the result of is obtained, the effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode. Also, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game may be the second result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode in cases other than the case where the result is not obtained.

  In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. May be configured to be performed in a mode other than the fourth mode when the result of (1) is obtained. Further, it may be configured such that when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect is always performed in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. May be configured so that the second effect may not be performed in the fourth mode when the result of (1) is satisfied.

  In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. In the case where the result of is obtained, the effect other than the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode only when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini game may be configured to be the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode even in a case other than the case where the result is obtained.

Note that "One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a third mini-game,
When the result of the third mini game is a fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in a fifth mode,
When the result of the third mini game is a sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in a sixth mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

The time display [for example, “10:00” or the like] of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 137 (3)] is the first time. Is a display indicating the time until [for example, 10 seconds, etc.]
The time display of the first timer display is configured to be changed before the first time is reached. [For example, in FIG. 137 (3), the first display indicating “10:00” 137 (12) to (13) show that the time indicated on the timer display is added before “00:00” as shown in FIGS. 137 (12) to (13)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, it is possible to function as an effect that changes the mode of the first timer effect, thereby giving the player expectations.

  Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time, or may indicate the time other than the time until the first time. You may. In addition, the time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time, or may not indicate the time until the first time. You may.

  Further, the time display of the first timer display may be changed only before the time becomes the first time, or the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. You may be comprised so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be always changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before reaching the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display may be changed to the first time. May be configured to be changed before the time is reached.

Also, the time display of the second timer display is a display indicating a time until the second time,
The time display of the second timer display is configured to be changed before it becomes the second time,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player function as an effect that changes the mode of the second timer effect, thereby giving the player expectations.

  Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time, or may indicate the time other than the time until the second time. You may. Also, the time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time, or may not indicate the time until the second time. You may.

  Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed only before the time becomes the second time, or the time display of the second timer display becomes the second time. You may be comprised so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be always changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

  Further, it may be configured that only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before reaching the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display may also be changed to the second time display. May be configured to be changed before the time is reached.

In addition, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 121 (2) to 122 (22)], the first timer display [for example, FIG. 121 (3) shown in FIG. 121 (3)] may be the first time. For example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 121 (5)] may be the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display. [For example, in the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 121 (5), “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (7)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be performed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the first time in some cases. In addition, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be configured to be displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The first time may not be reached.

  Further, the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be configured to display the first timer other than during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured such that one timer display may be the first time.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be performed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time in some cases. In addition, the second timer display may be configured to always be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display, or the second timer display may be configured to display the second timer display during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display. The second time may not be reached.

  Further, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display, or the second timer display may be configured to display the second time other than during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

Also, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. ), The second timer notice display TM12 is started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (5), etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the start timing of the timer display is diversified, interest may be enhanced.

  Here, only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different from the timing. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started, or the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started. The timing at which the display of the timer display is started may be the same.

Also, "the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different [for example, As shown in FIG. 121 (3), when the display is started, “10:00” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed in FIG. 121 (5). As shown, “03:00” is displayed when the display is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance interest.

  Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. . Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first time display may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started.

Also, “the first time and the second time are the same time [for example,“ 00:00 ”etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the start timing of the effect may be easily recognized.

  Note that the first time and the second time may be different times.

Also, "the first time is 0,
The second time is 0;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the start timing of the effect can be more easily grasped.

  Note that the first time may be other than 0. Further, the second time may be other than zero.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display a ball-drop error display [for example, a ball-drop error display shown in FIG. 141 (9 ″)).
The ball emptying error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (9 ″), when a lower dish full error occurs, a ball empty error occurs. Display is displayed],
It is configured such that at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap with the ball missing error display [for example, FIG. 141 (9 ″)). As shown in the figure, the ball-drop error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the ball removing operation can be hastened by the timer display.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to display only the ball missing error display, or may be configured to be able to display a display other than the ball missing error display. Further, a configuration may be employed in which a ball-out error display is always displayed, or a configuration in which a ball-out error display is not always displayed.

  In addition, the ball emptying error display may be displayed only in the full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the full tank error state. In addition, the ball emptying error display may be always displayed when the dish is full, or may not be displayed when the dish is full.

  Further, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap only with the ball-off error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. At least one of the two timer displays may be overlapped with a display other than the ball-out error display in some cases. Further, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display is always overlapped with the no-ball error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display The display may be configured such that at least one of the displays may not be overlapped with the ball-out error display.

  Further, it may be configured such that only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap with the ball-out error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. May be configured such that both of the timer displays may overlap with the ball-out error display.

Also, "the effect means is a display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a timer production [for example, a timer notice production shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17)];
A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays,
The timer effect is a certain effect [for example, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 154 (17)] when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. This is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17), after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the timer display is “00:00” ", The Sabohani group notice will begin],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. F20), a pre-reading notice (previous notice of change) or the like using a holding icon in a display mode of holding a red timer shown in F20).
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a second advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 153 (3), or FIG. ), A pre-reading notice (previous notice of change), etc., using a hold icon in a display mode of red hold shown in FIG.
The first preview display is a display of a certain type of advance notice [for example, an advance notice display by displaying a lord character, or an advance notice display by changing a color of a holding icon displayed in a circle. 154] is included as a preview notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb hold composed of a lord character ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. 163 (F20), a red timer hold display including a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display],
The second preview display is a preview display that is displayed as a preview by including the display of the certain type of preview [for example, as illustrated in FIG. The hold icon (change icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. , The holding icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red holding including the display of the above indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as a “first display [for example, the holding of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb holding shown in FIG. 154 (3)]. 163 (F20), and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 163 (F20)].
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the expectation can be amplified at the start of the timer effect even if the degree of expectation of the big hit is the same.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the effect to be executed can be expected and enjoyed with the execution of the timer effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying anything other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the first notice display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the first notice display, or may be one that does not always display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the second notice display, or may be one that does not always display the second notice display.

  Also, the first notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the first notice display may be necessarily displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display. There may be a case that is not performed.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Further, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice, or may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice. There may be a case that is not performed.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Here, the “advance notice” is a concept that includes both the “advance notice” and the “read ahead notice”.

  Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. Is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Is also good.

  In addition, the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. Is also good.

  Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Also, the first notice display may include the first display without fail or may include the first display in some cases.

  Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Also, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display included in the first advance display and the display mode of the first display included in the second advance display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

In addition, the "display of the certain kind of notice is to display a notice by an icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a change icon,
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed in correspondence with the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (3), Yoshimune The hold icon (fluctuation icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding a bomb display to the character of the lord, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the hold icon and the change icon may be easy to identify the symbol change display, which is the target of the prefetch notice, so that the player can easily understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may be configured to include the icon and the icon. The display may include a display other than the first display to be displayed. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include an icon and a first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may be configured to include the icon and the corresponding display corresponding to the icon. May be configured without including the first display to be performed.

  The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the change icon.

  In addition, a pre-reading notice may be given by the change icon. That is, regardless of whether a certain type of notice is displayed on either the hold icon or the change icon, whether or not there is a change in the symbol change display at the start of the display (whether the hold is 1 or more or 0) ), The display of a certain type of advance notice by the change icon can be considered as a prefetch advance notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain kind of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice, but in the case of the symbol change display, When the holding is 0 and the start winning is made, the pre-reading is performed before the determination of the success or failure, and as a result, a certain kind of advance notice is displayed by the fluctuating icon, and in such a case, Then, in some cases, it can be said that the function is functioning not as the advance notice but as the advance notice.

In addition, the “first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. The hold icon (fluctuating icon) has a display mode in which a bomb display is integrally added to the lord character, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where a symbol variation display which is a target variation of a notice is easy to understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that only the icon and the first display are integrally displayed, or may be integrally displayed including the icon, the first display, and other displays. May be done. In addition, the first notice display may be such that the icon and the first display are always integrally displayed, or the icon and the first display may not be integrally displayed. Is also good.

In addition, the “first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the hold icon shown in FIG. And a display mode in which a bomb icon BD 'is arranged on the
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice by the icon and the added notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that only the icon and the first display are displayed separately, or may be separately displayed including the icon, the first display, and other displays. May be done. In addition, the first notice display may be such that the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. Is also good.

In addition, “the icon is configured to be displayable in a default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a default display mode (a circular white display mode). Etc.), etc.,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the icons may be configured to be displayed only in the default display mode, or the icons may be configured to be displayed in display modes other than the default display mode. Further, the configuration may be such that the icons are always displayed in the default display mode, or the icons may not be displayed in the default display mode.

Also, the display of the certain kind of advance notice is performed by the change in the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying in []
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, display of a certain type of notice may be displayed only by a change in the color of the icon, or display of a certain type of notice may be displayed by a change other than a change in the color of the icon. There may be. Also, display of a certain type of notice may be always displayed due to a change in the color of the icon, or display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to a change in the color of the icon. Good.

In addition, the “second notice display is a notice display that may include a display of a different kind of notice from the display of the certain kind of notice in advance. May hold the pseudo-ren icon or the Sabo-Hani icon, and perform a pre-reading notice of the pseudo-ren or the Sabo-Hani group notice],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations other than the timer effect.

  Here, the second notice display may include only a display of another kind of notice from the display of a certain kind of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain kind of notice. May be displayed in addition to the type of notice. In addition, the second notice may necessarily include a notice of a different type from that of a certain kind of notice, or may be a notice of a different kind from the kind of notice. May not be included in some cases.

Also, the display of the certain kind of notice is a display configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a round blue display mode shown in FIG. 163 (F9) or the like],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a round and red display mode shown in FIG. 163 (F9)].
When the display of the certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case of the display in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. It is composed of
When the display mode of the certain kind of notice in the first notice display is the same as the display form of the certain kind of notice in the second notice display (hereinafter, "first case [ For example, both the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold and the hold icon of the display mode of the red hold include a round red display, etc.] ”).
In the first case, when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, the timer effect is configured to be easily started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a display mode of a certain type of notice can give a sense of expectation to a big hit, and may also give a sense of expectation to start a timer effect. .

  Here, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be able to be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be a mode other than the one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured in some cases.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the first mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the first mode. There may be.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the second mode. There may be.

  Also, when a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, only the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. May be configured, and when a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, a certain symbol variation display other than the big hit symbol mode May be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode is surely displayed more easily in a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured in the case where the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display of the certain type is displayed in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display You may be comprised so that it may not be easy to confirm and display.

  Also, when a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed only in a certain symbol variation display. It is also possible to be configured to, in the case where the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where it is displayed in the first mode, a symbol variation display other than a certain symbol variation display May be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is easily confirmed and displayed.

  Also, only when a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. May be configured, and even if the display of a certain type of notice is not displayed in the second mode than in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display May be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  In addition, when a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode, the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. In addition, when a certain type of notice is displayed in the first mode, a big hit symbol may not be definitely displayed in a certain symbol change display.

  Further, the display mode of a certain kind of notice in the first notice display and the kind of notice of a certain kind of notice in the second notice display may be the same form only. The display mode of a certain type of notice in the first preview display and the display mode of a certain type of notice in the second preview display may be different from the same mode. . Further, the display mode of a certain type of notice in the first preview display and the display mode of a certain type of notice in the second preliminary display may always be the same. The display mode of a certain kind of notice in the first notice display and the notice form of a certain kind of notice in the second notice display may or may not be the same. .

  Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, it may be configured such that only the timer effect is easily started, In the first case, it may be configured such that effects other than the timer effect are more easily started when the first notice is displayed than when the second notice is displayed. Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be configured to be easily started, In the first case, the timer effect may be configured to be less likely to be started when the first advance display is displayed than when the second advance display is displayed.

  Only in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, it may be configured such that the timer effect is easily started, In other cases, the timer effect may be started more easily when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

  Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be started without fail. Further, in the first case, when the second notice display is displayed, the timer effect may not be necessarily started.

In addition, "after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display [see, for example, FIGS. 159 (B3) to (B7). As shown, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the display mode of the Yoshimune hold to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to change to the first notice display.

  Here, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed only to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed, The second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Also, after the second notice is displayed, the second notice may always change to the first notice, or after the second notice is displayed, the second notice may be displayed. The display may not change to the first notice display in some cases.

  Also, only after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display, or even after the second notice display is displayed, The second advance display may change to the first advance display.

Also, the display means may display a change effect display [for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 159 (B4) to (B5) or a roulette effect display shown in FIGS. 161 (E9) to 162 (E13). 163 (F9) to FIG. 163 (F18), a display of the Yoshimune Kankan game, a pending change animation, etc.].
When the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the change effect display may provide an expectation that the second notice display will change to the first notice display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the change effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the change effect display, or may be one that does not always display the change effect display.

  Further, when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or the second notice display may be performed. When the change effect display is displayed after is displayed, the second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Further, if the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may always change to the first notice display, or the second notice display is displayed. When the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display, the second notice display may not be changed to the first notice display.

  Also, only when the change effect display is displayed after the second advance display is displayed, the second advance display may change to the first advance display, or the second advance display may be performed. Even when the change effect display is not displayed after the display is displayed, the second advance display may change to the first advance display.

  The display mode of the hold icon of the target hold may be changed by a change effect display or the like on the hold icon of the hold different from the hold of the target.

The change effect display is a display including a mini game [for example, a display of the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 163 (F9) to (F18)].
As a result of the mini-game being performed, when a first result (for example, a display result or the like in which a die roll is “5”) is derived, the second notice display is replaced with the first notice display. Configured to change,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a mini-game is performed to give a sense of expectation to change to the first notice display.

  Here, the change effect display may include only the mini-game, or may include a display other than the mini-game. Further, the change effect display may include a mini-game, or may not include a mini-game.

  Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game being performed, the second preview display may be changed to only the first preview display, or the mini-game may be performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second advance display may be changed to a display other than the first advance display. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game being performed, the second preview display may always be changed to the first preview display, or the mini-game may be performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may not be changed to the first notice display in some cases.

  Further, the second preview display may be changed to the first preview display only when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game, or the mini-game may be executed. As a result, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display even when the first result is not derived.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a selected effect display [for example, a roulette effect display shown in FIGS. 161 (E9) to 162 (E13)].
The selected effect display is an effect display for selecting one of a plurality of options,
In some cases, one of the plurality of options includes a first option [for example, an icon for a timer notice illustrated in FIG. 161 (E9)].
The selected effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (E9), while the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue hold display mode. The display of the roulette effect has started, etc.],
As a result of the display of the selection effect display, when the first option is selected, the second advance display is changed to the first advance display [for example, FIG. As shown in E13) to (E14), when the timer notice icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 is changed from the blue hold display mode to the blue timer hold display. Changes to the aspect],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first option is selected in the selection effect display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the selected effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the selected effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the selected effect display, or may be one that does not always display the selected effect display.

  Also, one of the plurality of options may include only the first option, or one of the plurality of options may include an option other than the first option. Is also good. Further, one of the plurality of options may always include the first option, or one of the plurality of options may not include the first option.

  Also, only the selected effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or a display other than the selected effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display. Is also good. Also, the selected effect display may be always displayed during the display of the second notice display, or the selected effect display may not be displayed during the display of the second notice display.

  Also, the selected effect display may be displayed only during the display of the second notice display, or the selected effect display may be displayed during the display of a display other than the second notice display. You may.

In addition, there is a case where “one of the plurality of options includes a second option [for example, an icon of Sabohani shown in FIG. 161 (E9)],
As a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second preview display is changed to another display mode [for example, FIG. As shown in (E13a) to (E14a), when the icon of Savohani is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of Savohani. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the sense of expectation for the second notice display itself can be improved.

  Here, one of the plurality of options may include only the second option, or one of the plurality of options may include an option other than the second option. You may. Also, one of the plurality of options may necessarily include the second option, or one of the plurality of options may not include the second option.

  Further, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change only to another display mode, or the selection effect display May be configured so that when the second option is selected as a result, the display mode of the second preview display may change to a display mode other than another display mode. Further, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be necessarily changed to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be performed. As a result, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second preview display may not be changed to another display mode.

  Further, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when only the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be performed. May be configured so that even if an option other than the second option is selected, the display mode of the second preview display may change to another display mode.

Also, the display of the certain kind of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character like a shrine maiden shown in FIG. 153 (3)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the decoration effect may be improved in some cases.

  Here, a certain kind of notice may be displayed only by the character, or a certain kind of notice may be display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain kind of advance notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain kind of advance notice may be a display that does not include a character.

In addition, the "first display is a display indicating that the timer effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. The hold icon indicates that the bomb display is included, indicating that the timer announcement will start, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first display may make it possible to further increase the sense of expectation that the timer effect is started.

  Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is started, or may indicate that the timer effect is not started.

In the above description,
A production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a timer production [for example, a timer notice production shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17)];
A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays,
The timer effect is a certain effect [for example, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 154 (17)] when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. This is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17), after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the timer display is “00:00” ", The Sabohani group notice will begin],
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a first advance notice [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) or the like using a hold icon in a display mode of a blue timer hold shown in FIG. 162 (E12c ')). ,
One of the plurality of types of advance displays is a second advance display [for example, a pre-read advance notice (the advance notice of variation) or the like using a suspension icon in a red timer suspension display mode illustrated in FIG. 162 (E12c ″)). Yes,
The first preview display includes a display of a certain type of advance notice [for example, an advance notice due to a change in the color of a hold icon displayed in a round shape, etc.], and is displayed as a pre-read advance notice. [For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (E12c '), a hold icon (change icon) in a blue timer hold display mode including a round blue display is displayed in the corresponding symbol change display. Foretelling that it could be a big hit, etc.],
The second advance notice is an advance notice displayed as a pre-read advance notice by including the display of the certain kind of advance notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (E12c ″), a circular red display is displayed. , The hold icon (change icon) of the display mode of the red timer hold configured including the display of the possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, etc.],
The first notice display includes a display indicating that the timer effect is started [for example, a display of a fuse wire included in a hold icon of a display mode of a blue timer hold shown in FIG. 162 (E12c ') or the like]. Notice display,
The second notice display includes a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, display of a fuse wire included in a hold icon of a display mode of a red timer hold shown in FIG. 162 (E12c ″) or the like]. Notice display including
The display mode of the certain kind of notice in the first notice display and the display form of the certain kind of notice in the second notice display are different,
The initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started is a first time [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (E12c '), the hold icon is displayed. When displayed in the blue timer hold display mode, "10:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started is a second time [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (E12c ″), the hold icon Is displayed in the red timer hold display mode, "60:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The first time is longer than the second time is configured to be easily selected,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the expectation can be amplified at the start of the timer effect even if the degree of expectation of the big hit is the same.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the contents of the effect to be executed can be expected and enjoyed with the execution of the timer effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying anything other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the first notice display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the first notice display, or may be one that does not always display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the second notice display, or may be one that does not always display the second notice display.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only as a prefetch notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed by including a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as something other than the above. In addition, the first advance notice may be necessarily displayed as a pre-reading notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed by including a certain kind of notice. May not be displayed.

  Also, the first notice may be displayed as a pre-read notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. May be displayed as a prefetch notice. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed as a prefetch notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed without a certain kind of notice. May be displayed.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only as a prefetch notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed by including a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as something other than the above. In addition, the second advance notice may be necessarily displayed as a pre-read notice by including a certain kind of advance notice, or may be displayed by including a certain kind of advance notice. May not be displayed.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a pre-read notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. May be displayed as a prefetch notice. Further, the second advance notice may be displayed as a prefetch notice by always including a kind of advance notice, or may be displayed by not including a certain kind of advance notice. May be displayed.

  Further, the first notice display may include only a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display indicating that the timer effect is started. You may. Also, the first notice display may always include a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display indicating that the timer effect is started. There may be.

  The first notice display may include a display indicating that the timer effect is (always) started.

  Further, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display indicating that the timer effect is started. You may. In addition, the second notice display may include a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display indicating that the timer effect is started. There may be.

  The second notice display may include a display indicating that the timer effect is (always) started.

  Further, only a mode of displaying a certain type of advance notice in the first advance display and a mode of displaying a certain type of advance notice in the second advance display may be different, The mode of displaying a certain type of notice and the mode other than the manner of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice may be different. In addition, the mode of displaying a certain type of advance notice in the first advance notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of advance notice in the second advance notice display may be different from each other. The display mode of a certain type of advance notice may not be different from the display mode of a certain type of advance notice in the second advance notice display.

  The initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be only the first time or may be a time other than the first time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be always the first time or may not be the first time.

  The initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be only the second time or may be a time other than the second time. In addition, the initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be always the second time or may not be the second time.

  In addition, it may be configured such that only the first time is longer than the second time, and it may be configured such that the first time is longer than the second time. It may be configured to be easily selected. In addition, the first time may be configured to be always longer than the second time, or if the first time is not longer than the second time is selected. May be configured.

Also, "the certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of strong cut-in shown in FIG. 166 (H35)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed can be improved.

  Here, a certain effect may include only an announcement effect, or may include an effect other than the announcement effect. In addition, a certain effect may include a notice effect or may not include a notice effect.

In addition, the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 165 (H25) to (H26)].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when executed than when it is not executed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain effect is performed to improve a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Here, the certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include effects other than the chance-up effect. In addition, a certain effect may include a chance-up effect or may not include a chance-up effect.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a timer production [for example, a timer notice production shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17)];
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays;
A gaming table with
The timer effect is effected when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, group notice]]. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the notice of the strong Sabohani group is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. F20), a pre-reading notice (previous notice of change) or the like using a holding icon in a display mode of holding a red timer shown in F20).
The first preview display is a display of a certain type of advance notice [for example, an advance notice display by displaying a lord character, or an advance notice display by changing a color of a holding icon displayed in a circle. 154] is included as a preview notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb hold composed of a lord character ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. 163 (F20), a red timer hold display including a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as a “first display [for example, the holding of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb holding shown in FIG. 154 (3)]. 163 (F20), and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 163 (F20)].
An effect using a certain character [for example, a navigation character YM or the like shown in FIG. 163 (F9)] (hereinafter, referred to as a “first effect [for example, the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 163 (F9) to (F18)]) ]].), One of the plurality of types of advance notices displayed (hereinafter, a certain advance notice [for example, a blue reserve shown in FIG. 163 (F9)). 163) is displayed as the first advance notice display [for example, the first hold icon h11 or the like in the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 163 (F20)]. Are configured to
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the expectation can be amplified at the start of the timer effect even if the degree of expectation of the big hit is the same.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the effect to be executed can be expected and enjoyed with the execution of the timer effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying anything other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the first notice display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the first notice display, or may be one that does not always display the first notice display.

  Also, the first notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the first notice display may be necessarily displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display. There may be a case that is not performed.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Here, the “advance notice” is a concept that includes both the “advance notice” and the “read ahead notice”.

  Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. Is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Is also good.

  In addition, the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. Is also good.

  Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Also, the first notice display may include the first display without fail or may include the first display in some cases.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed only as the first notice display, Is executed, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed is always displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect is performed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which a certain advance display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first advance display.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect may be displayed. Is executed, a notice display other than a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as a first notice display.

  In addition, only when the first effect is executed, a certain advance display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as the first advance display, or the first effect may be configured. By performing an effect other than the above, it may be configured such that a certain advance display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first advance display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a pre-reading advance notice (the advance notice of the change) by a reserve icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension shown in FIG. 163 (F9), a pre-reading advance notice (the advance notice of the change), etc., using a suspension icon in a red suspension display mode],
The second preview display is a preview display that is displayed as a preview by including the display of the certain type of preview [for example, as illustrated in FIG. The hold icon (change icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. , The holding icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red holding including the display of the above indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
When the first effect is executed, the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display in some cases [for example, FIG. 163 (F9) to FIG. As shown in the same figure (F20), by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game, the first hold icon h11 of the displayed blue hold display mode changes to the red timer hold display mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, even if the pre-reading notice does not indicate the start of the timer effect, the first notice display may change to the first notice display when the first effect is executed. There is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice notices other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the second notice display, or may be one that does not always display the second notice display.

  Further, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice, or may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice. There may be a case that is not performed.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Here, the “advance notice” is a concept that includes both the “advance notice” and the “read ahead notice”.

  Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Also, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that the displayed second notice display may be changed only to the first notice display, or the first effect may be performed. The execution may be configured so that the displayed second notice display may be changed to a notice display other than the first notice display in some cases. Further, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that the displayed second notice display always changes to the first notice display, or the first effect is performed. Thus, the displayed second notice may not be changed to the first notice in some cases.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that only the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display, or the first effect may be performed. By being executed, a notice display other than the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display in some cases.

  In addition, only by performing the first effect, the second notice display that has been displayed may be configured to change to the first notice display, or may be configured other than the first effect May also be configured so that the displayed second preview display may be changed to the first preview display even when the effect of (i) is executed.

In addition, "the second notice display is a notice display that may include a display of another kind of notice different from the display of the certain kind of notice [for example, the display of the Yoshimune reservation shown in FIG. 153 (3)]. The hold icon (change icon) of the display mode may be displayed with an icon of Sabohani or an icon of replay added,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations other than the timer effect.

  Here, the second notice display may include only a display of another kind of notice from the display of a certain kind of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain kind of notice. May be displayed in addition to the type of notice. In addition, the second notice may necessarily include a notice of a different type from that of a certain kind of notice, or may be a notice of a different kind from the kind of notice. May not be included in some cases.

In addition, it is configured such that, by the execution of the first effect, the display mode of the displayed first preview display may be changed to the display mode of another first preview display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (F8a) to (F20a), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 of the displayed blue timer hold display mode is displayed in red. Change to the display mode of timer hold],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the first notice display can be expected to be upgraded.

  Here, when the first effect is executed, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to only the display mode of another first notice display in some cases. The display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of another first preview display by executing the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to the display mode of another first notice display by performing the first effect. By executing the first effect, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may not be changed to the display mode of another first notice display in some cases. .

  In addition, by performing the first effect, only the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. Also, when the first effect is executed, the display mode of the preview display other than the display mode of the displayed first preview display changes to the display mode of another first preview display. It may be configured so that there is.

  In addition, only by performing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. Also, by performing an effect other than the first effect, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. May be configured.

  Note that, by executing the first effect, the display mode of a certain type of notice among the displayed first notice displays may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed. May change, or both the display mode of the display of a certain type of notice and the display mode of the first display may change.

Also, the display of the certain kind of notice is a display configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of embodiments is a first embodiment [for example, a round blue embodiment or the like],
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [e.g., a round red embodiment].
The first advance notice display including the display of the certain kind of advance notice of the first aspect [for example, a suspension icon of a blue timer suspension display mode shown in FIG. 163 (F8a) or the like] is displayed. In the case where the first notice display [for example, a hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 163 (F20a) or the like] including the display of the certain kind of notice of the second mode is displayed. Is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display,
By the execution of the first effect, the display of the certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display may change from the first mode to the second mode. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (F8a) to (F20a), the first hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game. h11 changes to a display mode of red timer suspension],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that the upgrade has been made.

  Here, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be able to be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be a mode other than the one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured in some cases.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the first mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the first mode. There may be.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the second mode. There may be.

  In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the first mode is displayed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured so that only the big hit symbol mode is easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or the first mode including the display of a certain kind of advance notice of the first mode is included. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second mode is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, a symbol other than the big hit symbol mode is displayed in a certain symbol variation display The mode may also be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the first mode is displayed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or the first mode including the display of a certain kind of advance notice of the first mode is included. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second form is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is definitely displayed in the certain symbol change display. You may be comprised so that it may not be easy to be performed.

  In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the first mode is displayed. When displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed only in a certain symbol variation display, or the first mode including the display of a certain type of advance notice of the first mode may be included. When the first notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice of the second mode is displayed than in the case where the notice display is displayed, even in the symbol change display other than the certain symbol change display, The big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second form is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be always definitely displayed in a certain symbol change display. Good. Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first form is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol form is not necessarily definitely displayed in the certain symbol change display. .

  In addition, by performing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed only from the first form to the second form. May be performed, or by performing the first effect, the display of a certain type of advance notice in the displayed first advance notice is changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. It may be configured so that there is a case in which it is performed. Further, even when the first effect is executed, the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display is necessarily changed from the first form to the second form. Also, it is configured such that the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display does not change from the first form to the second form by the execution of the first effect. May be done.

  Also, by executing the first effect, there is a case where only the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first form to the second form. Also, by the execution of the first effect, the display other than the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice change from the first form to the second form. It may be configured in some cases.

  In addition, only when the first effect is executed, the display of a certain kind of notice in the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed from the first form to the second form. May be performed, or by performing an effect other than the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display changes from the first mode to the second mode. It may be configured so that there is a case in which it is performed.

  It should be noted that "the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect is included compared to the case where the first notice display of the first aspect including the display of the certain kind of advance notice is displayed. When the first notice display is displayed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The case where the second notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed is more than the case where the second notice display including the notice display is displayed. It is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. " Further, "a plurality of notices including the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect are displayed than a plurality of notice displays including the display of the notice of the certain kind of the first aspect are displayed. When the notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is configured to be more easily displayed in a certain symbol variation display. "

In addition, “The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started one or more times, for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) and FIG. 166 (H13 ′). The number of bombs included in the hold icon in the display style of the Yoshimune bomb hold suggests the number of times the timer notice production will start],
By the execution of the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of the first effect, and the first May be different in the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first preview display displayed after the execution of the first effect is performed. The number of bombs included in the bomb hold increased from one to three, suggesting the execution of one timer notice effect, but now suggesting the execution of three timer notice effects.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it can be expected to increase the timer effect.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the remaining guaranteed number of times of the timer effect may be easily notified.

  Here, the first display may be a display suggesting that only one or more timer effects may be started, or a case where one or more timer effects are started. It may be a display that suggests something other than that there is. In addition, the first display may be a display that always indicates that one or more timer effects may be started, or may be a case where one or more timer effects are started. It may be a display that may not suggest that there is.

  Further, by executing the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are executed. Only the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect may be different, or the first effect is performed by executing the first effect. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution and the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect was executed are Other than the suggested number of executions of the timer effect may be different. Further, by executing the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are executed. The number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first announcement display displayed after the first effect may be different, or by executing the first effect, the time before execution of the first effect The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed on the first time and the timer suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect was executed The number of executions of the effect may not be different.

  Also, only by the execution of the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect and the first effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of the first effect are reduced. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the execution may be different, or by performing an effect other than the first effect, The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first notice display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect was executed The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by one display may be different.

Also, "the first effect may be started during execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (F8c) to (F9c), during the execution of the timer notice effect, The game has started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the first effect is started by executing the timer effect.

  Here, only the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect, or an effect other than the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect. Further, the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may not be started during the execution of the timer effect.

  Further, the first effect may be started only during execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may be started other than during execution of the timer effect.

In addition, the "display of the certain kind of notice is to display a notice by an icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a change icon,
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed in correspondence with the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (3), Yoshimune The hold icon (floating icon) in the bomb hold display mode is configured by adding a bomb display to the hold icon (floating icon),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the hold icon and the change icon may be easy to identify the symbol change display, which is the target of the prefetch notice, so that the player can easily understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may be configured to include the icon and the icon. The display may include a display other than the first display to be displayed. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include an icon and a first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may be configured to include the icon and the corresponding display corresponding to the icon. May be configured without including the first display to be performed.

  The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the change icon.

  In addition, a pre-reading notice may be given by the change icon. That is, regardless of whether a certain type of notice is displayed on either the hold icon or the change icon, whether or not there is a change in the symbol change display at the start of the display (whether the hold is 1 or more or 0) ), The display of a certain type of advance notice by the change icon can be considered as a prefetch advance notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain kind of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice, but in the case of the symbol change display, When the holding is 0 and the start winning is made, the pre-reading is performed before the determination of the success or failure, and as a result, a certain kind of advance notice is displayed by the fluctuating icon, and in such a case, Then, in some cases, it can be said that the function is functioning not as the advance notice but as the advance notice.

In addition, the “first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) is such that the display of the bomb is integrally added to the hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the display mode of the lord character],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where a symbol variation display which is a target variation of a notice is easy to understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that only the icon and the first display are integrally displayed, or may be integrally displayed including the icon, the first display, and other displays. May be done. In addition, the first notice display may be such that the icon and the first display are always integrally displayed, or the icon and the first display may not be integrally displayed. Is also good.

In addition, the “first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the hold icon shown in FIG. Bomb icon BD 'is arranged above the hold icon (fluctuating icon)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice by the icon and the added notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that only the icon and the first display are displayed separately, or may be separately displayed including the icon, the first display, and other displays. May be done. In addition, the first notice display may be such that the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. Is also good.

In addition, “the icon is configured to be displayable in a default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a default display mode (a circular white display mode). Etc.), etc.,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the icons may be configured to be displayed only in the default display mode, or the icons may be configured to be displayed in display modes other than the default display mode. Further, the configuration may be such that the icons are always displayed in the default display mode, or the icons may not be displayed in the default display mode.

Also, the display of the certain kind of advance notice is performed by the change in the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying in []
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, display of a certain type of notice may be displayed only by a change in the color of the icon, or display of a certain type of notice may be displayed by a change other than a change in the color of the icon. There may be. Also, display of a certain type of notice may be always displayed due to a change in the color of the icon, or display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to a change in the color of the icon. Good.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect in which one of a plurality of results is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (F9), in the Yoshimune Kankan game,“ 1 ”of a dice is output. Either the "3" roll of the eye and the dice or the "5" roll of the dice is derived, etc.],
One of the plurality of results is a first result [for example, the result of “5” on the dice shown in FIG. 163 (F18)).
As a result of performing the first effect, when the first result is derived, the certain advance display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as the first advance display [for example, As shown in FIGS. 163 (F18) to (F20), when the roll of the dice becomes “5” in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the blue hold display mode to the red timer. Change to a suspended display mode],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the first result is derived.

  Here, the first effect may be such that only one result of the plurality of results is derived, or a result other than the one result of the plurality of results may be derived. You may. In addition, the first effect may be one in which one of the plurality of results is always derived, or one in which one of the plurality of results may not be derived. Good.

  In the first effect, only the first result may be derived, or a result other than the first result may be derived. In the first effect, the first result may be always derived, or the first effect may not be derived.

  Further, as a result of performing the first effect, when the first result is derived, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed only as the first notice display. When the first effect is performed and the first result is derived, a certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. Is also good. Further, when the first effect is performed and the first result is derived, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display. When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain advance display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first advance display.

  Further, as a result of performing the first effect, when the first result is derived, it may be configured such that only a certain notice display that has been displayed is displayed as the first notice display. When the first effect is performed and the first result is derived, a notice display other than a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. Good.

  In addition, only when the first result is performed, and only when the first result is derived, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as the first notice display. Even if the first effect is performed, even when the first result is other than the case where the first result is derived, a certain advance display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as the first advance display. Good.

Also, the display of the certain kind of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character like a shrine maiden shown in FIG. 153 (3)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the decoration effect may be improved in some cases.

  Here, a certain kind of notice may be displayed only by the character, or a certain kind of notice may be display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain kind of advance notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain kind of advance notice may be a display that does not include a character.

In addition, the "first display is a display indicating that the timer effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. The hold icon indicates that the bomb display is included, indicating that the timer announcement will start, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first display may make it possible to further increase the sense of expectation that the timer effect is started.

  Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is started, or may indicate that the timer effect is not started.

In the above description,
A production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a timer production [for example, a timer notice production shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17)];
A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays,
The timer effect is effected when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, group notice]]. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the notice of the strong Sabohani group is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. F20), a pre-reading notice (previous notice of change) or the like using a holding icon in a display mode of holding a red timer shown in F20).
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a second advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (the advance notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 153 (3), or FIG. ), A pre-reading notice (previous notice of change), etc., using a hold icon in a display mode of red hold shown in FIG.
The first preview display is a display of a certain type of advance notice [for example, an advance notice display by displaying a lord character, or an advance notice display by changing a color of a holding icon displayed in a circle. 154] is included as a preview notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb hold composed of a lord character ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. 163 (F20), a red timer hold display including a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display],
The second preview display is a preview display that is displayed as a preview by including the display of the certain type of preview [for example, as illustrated in FIG. The hold icon (change icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. , The holding icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red holding including the display of the above indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as a “first display [for example, the holding of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb holding shown in FIG. 154 (3)]. 163 (F20), and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 163 (F20)].
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
The certain effect is configured to be started in a state where the first notice display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 167 (H28a) to FIG. In the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the mode, the strong Sabohani group notice has been started, etc.],
By performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display in some cases [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. G9) to FIG. 165 (G20), the first hold icon h11 of the timer hold display mode to which the panda icon PD is added changes to the display mode of Sabohani as a result of the playing of the Yoshimune Kankan game. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the expectation can be amplified at the start of the timer effect even if the degree of expectation of the big hit is the same.

  Further, according to the gaming table, there is a case where the effect to be executed can be expected and enjoyed with the execution of the timer effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the first notice display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the first notice display, or may be one that does not always display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the second notice display, or may be one that does not always display the second notice display.

  Also, the first notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the first notice display may be necessarily displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display. There may be a case that is not performed.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Further, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a kind of notice. It may be displayed as an object. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice, or may be displayed as an advance notice by including a certain kind of advance notice. There may be a case that is not performed.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain kind of notice. May be performed.

  Here, the “advance notice” is a concept that includes both the “advance notice” and the “read ahead notice”.

  Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. Is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Is also good.

  In addition, the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. Is also good.

  Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Also, the first notice display may include the first display without fail or may include the first display in some cases.

  Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Also, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display included in the first advance display and the display mode of the first display included in the second advance display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect is started in a state where the first notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect may be configured in a state where the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to be started. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started in a state where the first notice display is displayed, or when a certain effect is not started in a state where the first notice display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be started only in a state where the first notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be performed in a state other than the state where the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to be started.

  Further, it may be configured such that, by performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed only as the second notice display, or a certain notice may be displayed. By performing the effect using the character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as a notice display other than the second notice display in some cases. In addition, by performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be always displayed as the second notice display, or a certain character may be used. It may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may not be displayed as the second notice display by executing the given effect.

  Further, it may be configured such that by performing an effect using a certain character, only the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display, or a certain notice may be displayed. By performing the effect using the character, a notice display other than the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display.

  Further, it may be configured that the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display only by performing an effect using a certain character, or The first notice display that has been displayed may also be displayed as the second notice display by performing an effect other than the effect using the character.

Also, "the certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of strong cut-in shown in FIG. 166 (H35)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed can be improved.

  Here, a certain effect may include only an announcement effect, or may include an effect other than the announcement effect. In addition, a certain effect may include a notice effect or may not include a notice effect.

In addition, the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 165 (H25) to (H26)].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when executed than when it is not executed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain effect is performed to improve a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Here, the certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include effects other than the chance-up effect. In addition, a certain effect may include a chance-up effect or may not include a chance-up effect.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a timer production [for example, a timer notice production shown in FIGS. 154 (9) to (17)];
A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays,
The timer effect is effected when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect [for example, strong sabohani shown in FIG. 154 (17)]). 162 (H12) or 166 (H12a) shown in FIG. 166 (H12a)].) For example, FIG. 154 (9) to FIG. 17), when the timer display becomes “00:00” after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a pre-reading advance notice (the advance notice) based on a reserve icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in FIG. 154 (3), and FIG. H3), a look-ahead notice (previous notice of change), etc., using a hold icon in the display mode of one bomb.
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a third advance notice display [for example, a look-ahead advance notice (previous advance notice) using a reserve icon in a display mode of Yoshimune suspension shown in FIG. 154 (18), or FIG. )), A preliminary look-ahead notice (previous notice of change), etc., using a hold icon in a display mode in which the three bombs are displayed as one block.
The second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 154 (3)] In the pre-reading notice (the fluctuation notice) using the reservation icon and the pre-reading notice (the fluctuation notice) using the reservation icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 165 (H3), at least one timer notice effect is started. Etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display that may be changed from the second notice display and displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect [for example, shown in FIG. 154 (18). The pre-reading advance notice (the advance notice) by the reserve icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune suspension and the advance notice (the advance notice) by the reserve icon in the display form in which the three bombs shown in FIG. , It is displayed changing in connection with the fact that the timer announcement effect was performed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to a change in the notice display while expecting a certain effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying anything other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the second notice display, or may be one that does not always display the second notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the third notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the third advance notice display, or may be one that does not always display the third advance notice display.

  Further, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or may include at least one timer effect. It may include a display other than a display suggesting that there is. Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or may include at least one timer effect. There may be a case where the display does not include a display indicating that there is.

  Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating only that at least one timer effect may be started, or may include a display indicating that at least one timer effect is started. It may include a display that suggests something other than a certain thing. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always indicates that at least one timer effect may be started, or may include a case where at least one timer effect is started. There may be a case that includes a display that does not suggest that there is.

  Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that only at least one timer effect may be started, or an effect other than at least one timer effect may be started. It may include a display indicating that there is a case where there is a case. Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that at least one timer effect is necessarily started, or may indicate that at least one timer effect may not be started. May be included.

  In addition, the third notice display may be changed from only the second notice display and may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect may be executed. In relation to this, the display may be changed from a preview display other than the second preview display. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by being always changed from the second notice display in relation to the execution of the timer effect, or may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect. Then, there may be a case where the message is displayed without changing from the second notice display.

  In addition, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display and may be displayed only in association with the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect may be executed. There may be a case where the display is changed from the second notice display in relation to other things.

  Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display in connection with the fact that only the timer effect has been executed, or may be an effect other than the timer effect. There may be a case where the display is changed from the second notice display in association with the execution.

In addition, the “second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect of the second number of times [for example, once] may be started [for example, FIG. The pre-reading advance notice (the advance notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in 3) and the advance notice (the advance notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 165 (H3) are at least. Etc., suggesting that one timer notice production will start],
The third notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started a third number of times (for example, 0 or 3 times) [for example, FIG. The pre-reading notice (suspension notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold shown in 18) does not have a bomb display, and does not function as a notice for performing a timer notice effect (that is, 0 times). 165 (H13), a pre-reading notice (previous notice of change) by a hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one lump as shown in FIG. 165 (H13). , Suggesting that at least three timer announcements will start],
The second number and the third number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, attention may be paid to a change in the number of times the timer effect is started.

  Here, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. The display may also include a display other than a display indicating that there is a case in which there is a case. Further, the second notice display may always include a display indicating that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. There may be a case where a display indicating that there is a case is not included.

  Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating only that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. It may include a display that suggests something other than the case. In addition, the second notice display may include a display that always indicates that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. It may include a display that may not indicate that there is a case.

  Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that only the second number of timer effects may be started, or may include an effect other than the second number of timer effects. It may include an indication that it may be started. In addition, the second notice display may include a display indicating that the second number of timer effects is necessarily started, or the second number of timer effects may not be started. May be included.

  Here, the third notice display may include only a display indicating that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. The display may also include a display other than a display indicating that there is a case in which there is a case. In addition, the third notice display may always include a display indicating that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. There may be a case where a display indicating that there is a case is not included.

  Further, the third notice display may include a display indicating only that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. It may include a display that suggests something other than the case. In addition, the third notice display may include a display that always indicates that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. It may include a display that may not indicate that there is a case.

  Further, the third notice display may include a display indicating that only the third number of timer effects may be started, or may include an effect other than the third number of timer effects. It may include an indication that it may be started. In addition, the third notice display may include a display indicating that the third number of timer effects is necessarily started, or the third number of timer effects may not be started. May be included.

  In addition, the second number and the third number may be always different numbers, or may be the same number.

In addition, "the certain effect [for example, the strong sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 154 (17), the pending change animation shown in FIG. 166 (H12a), etc.]" It is a production that changes to
The second number [eg, once or three times] is larger than the third number [eg, zero or one time],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the remaining number of timer effects while expecting a certain effect.

  Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be something. In addition, a certain effect may necessarily change from the second advance display to the third advance display, or may not change from the second advance display to the third advance display. You may.

  Also, the second number may always be greater than the third number, may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the third number. There may be cases.

Also, "the certain effect [for example, a change-hold animation shown in FIG. 165 (H12)] is an effect that changes from the second notice display to the third notice display.
The third number [e.g., three times] is greater than the second number [e.g., one time],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, as a result of a certain effect, an increase in the number of timer effects may be expected.

  In a certain effect, the timer display generally indicates a certain time at a predetermined timing such as a pseudo-run or cut-in. However, when the effect is used for changing the number of times of the timer effect itself, there are few timing restrictions. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the timing at which the timer display indicates a certain time (that is, the timing at which a certain effect can be started) can be given a variation, and the interest in the timer effect may be improved.

  Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be something. In addition, a certain effect may necessarily change from the second advance display to the third advance display, or may not change from the second advance display to the third advance display. You may.

  Further, the third number may always be larger than the second number, or the third number may be smaller than the second number. Further, the second number and the third number may be the same. For example, it is assumed that the timer effect is executed and the number is digested once, and as a certain effect, the timer effect is started once. You may perform what is called a HOLD effect, such as performing a suggestive display.

Also, the "second notice display is a notice display including a certain kind of notice display [for example, a bomb display or the like] is included. [For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (H7a), The hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the display mode including the display of the three bombs in the default color is a notice display in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display including the certain kind of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (H13a), a display including a display of a red bomb). The hold icon (fluctuation icon) of the mode displays a notice in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display, etc.],
The display of the certain kind of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a display of a bomb in a default color shown in FIG. 166 (H7a) or the like]
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, display of a red bomb shown in FIG. 166 (H13a) or the like]
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
Display of the certain kind of notice according to the third aspect from the second notice display including the indication of the certain kind of advance notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect 166 (H8a) to (H13a), a timer announcement effect is performed. As a result, the display changes from a hold icon including a display of three bombs in the default color to a hold icon including a display of a red bomb, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to rank up when changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed including a kind of notice other than the notice. It may be. In addition, the second notice may be displayed without necessarily including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed without including a certain kind of notice. It may be something.

  In addition, the third notice may be displayed including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed including a kind of notice other than the notice. It may be. Further, the third notice display may be displayed without necessarily including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed without including a certain kind of notice. It may be something.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than the one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or may be configured to not be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. May be configured so that

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the second mode. There may be.

  The display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the third mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the third mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the third mode, or may be configured to not be displayed in the third mode. There may be.

  Further, in association with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect May be configured to be changed and displayed only on the advance notice display, or may include a display of a certain kind of advance notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect. The present invention may be configured such that the display may change from the second advance display to an advance display other than the third advance display including the display of a certain type of advance according to the third aspect. Further, in association with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect May be configured to be always changed and displayed on the advance notice display, or the second advance notice including the display of a certain kind of advance notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect The present invention may be configured so that the display may be displayed without change from the display to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

  Further, in association with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice including only the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured to be displayed in a manner changed to the third notice display, or the second notice may include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect. The present invention may be configured so that the display may be changed from the second advance display to the third advance display including a display other than the display of a certain type of advance according to the third aspect. Further, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice always including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured to be displayed in a manner changed to the third notice display, or the second notice may include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect. The present invention may be configured so that the display may be changed from the second advance display to the third advance display that does not include the display of a certain type of advance according to the third aspect.

  Further, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, only the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured to be displayed in a manner changed to the third notice display, or the second notice may include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in association with the execution of the timer effect. The present invention may be configured so that the notice display other than the second notice display may be changed to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

  Further, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including only the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured to be displayed in a manner changed to the third notice display, or related to the execution of the timer effect, a display other than the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect. May be changed and displayed from the second notice display including the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. Also, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured so that it may be displayed by changing to the third notice display, and does not include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect related to the execution of the timer effect The present invention may be configured so that the display may be changed from the second notice display to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

  In addition, only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect to the second notice including the display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect It may be configured so that it may be changed to the third notice display and may be displayed, or in connection with other than the execution of the timer effect, a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect may be displayed. The present invention may be configured so that the display may be changed from the second notice display including the display to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

In addition, the “third notice display is a notice display including a notice display by icons [for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, etc.],
The third notice display is a change of the icon from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (H25a ') to (H27a'). In addition, the display mode of the timer notice has changed to the display mode of the number of the chiefs due to the execution of the timer notice effect, and the increase / decrease [for example, as shown in FIGS. 165 (H9) to (H13), The number of bombs has increased due to the notice effect, or the number of bombs has decreased due to the timer notice effect as shown in FIGS. 166 (H9a) to (H13a). , Etc.] is performed and displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give expectation to the change of the icon due to the performance of the timer.

  Here, the third notice display may include only the display of the notice by the icon, or may include the display other than the display of the notice by the icon. Further, the third notice display may include a notice display with icons or may not necessarily include a notice display with icons.

  Further, the third notice display may be such that at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the icon may be displayed by performing at least one of change and increase / decrease of the icon from the second notice display. Further, the third notice display may be such that at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is always performed from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect, and may be displayed. However, there may be a case where the icon is displayed without performing at least one of the change and the increase / decrease of the icon from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect.

  In addition, the third notice display may be such that at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display only in association with the execution of the timer effect. The icon may be changed and / or increased / decreased from the second notice display and displayed in association with a thing other than the execution of the timer effect.

  Note that the third advance notice display may be such that only the icon change is performed from the second advance notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect, and the third notice display is displayed. Further, the third notice display may be such that only the icon is increased from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect and displayed. Further, the third notice display may be such that only the icon is reduced from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect.

Also, "The icon is an icon displayed corresponding to a certain symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a sense of expectation for a certain symbol change display can be improved.

  Here, the icon may be displayed in correspondence with only a certain symbol change display, or may be displayed in correspondence with something other than a certain symbol change display. Further, the icon may be always displayed corresponding to a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed without corresponding to a certain symbol variation display.

In addition, “the icon is a hold icon, a change icon or a notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, it is configured such that the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol change display [for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (H8) to FIG. 166 (H38), one symbol During the execution of the fluctuation display, three timer announcement effects are executed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times during one symbol change display.

  Here, during the execution of one symbol change display, it may be configured to be able to execute only a plurality of timer effects, or during the execution of one symbol change display, effects other than the plurality of timer effects may be performed. It may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of timer effects during the execution of one symbol variation display, or when not performing the multiple timer effects during the execution of one symbol variation display It may be configured so that there is.

  In addition, a plurality of timer effects may be executed only during the execution of one symbol change display, and a plurality of timer effects may be executed even during a period other than one execution of the symbol change display. May be configured.

In addition, the “second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that at least one timer effect is started. [For example, the display form of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. In the pre-reading notice by the hold icon (the notice of the change) or the notice of the pre-reading by the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 165 (H3) (the notice of the change), at least one timer notice effect is started. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the second notice display may make it possible to further increase the sense of expectation that the timer effect will be started.

  Here, the second notice display may indicate only that at least one timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than that at least one timer effect is started. It may be something. In addition, the second notice display may always indicate that at least one timer effect is started, or may not indicate that at least one timer effect is started. It may be.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  FIG. 168 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in the present embodiment. FIG. 168A shows the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols that are not in the reach state but are lost. FIG. 2B is a timing chart for explaining a flow of a variable display of a decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a loss after the reach state is reached.

  In FIG. 168 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the start of the variation), the decorative symbol is first stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped secondly, and the decorative symbol is stopped thirdly. Shows the flow. In the following description, the stop order of the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but is not limited thereto. In addition, the first stop and the second stop may be performed at the same time depending on the advance notice (the advance notice of the change and the advance notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-run, or the like, or the first stop may be performed. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of the change to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are respectively referred to as "( 11) "in some cases. In the following description, as to the effects performed in the effect example in which the game is lost without entering the reach state, “FIG. XX (A (11) -1)” and “FIG. XX (A (11)- 2) "... May be used. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 168 (a), an effect that can be combined as various effects may be able to be performed in a period indicated by “(11)” (for example, a fake notice or the like). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or during the period from the third stop to the final stop, the pseudo-rendition production and announcement of a chance (stop ahead notice) by stopping the same color (same kind) design Sometimes you can. This is a concept that can be applied to each effect example of the embodiment described above.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows that, after the start of the variation display of the decoration symbol (the start of the variation), the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect, the decoration symbol is lost or a big hit. This shows the flow from the final stop in the manner described above until the big hit game ends. Here, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of “(1)”, and the period from the formation of the reach state to the shift to the SP reach is represented by the period of “(2)”. The period from the shift to SP reach until the result of the reach effect is derived is represented by the period of “(3)”, and the period from the result of the reach effect to the suspension of the determination is “(4)”. In some cases, the period from the final stop to the end of the big hit game can be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, as to the effects performed in the example of the effect in which the big hit or the loss occurs after the reach state is reached, “FIG. XX (A (2) -1)” and “FIG. XX (A (2 ) -2) "," FIG. XX (A (3) -1) "," FIG. XX (A (3) -2) "... In the description of the present embodiment, during the period of “(1)”, various notices including mini-games, pre-reading notices and the like, and effects such as pseudo-runs may be performed. During the period of “(2)”, , Normal reach or cut-in images may be displayed for advance notice, group notice, etc. During the period of “(3)”, chance increase notice during SP reach or notice by display of cut-in images may be performed. In the period of “(4)”, a swing fluctuation, a resurrection jackpot effect, a wipe display, and the like may be performed. In the period of “(5)”, an effect during a jackpot game is performed. There is a case where a certainty change notification or a reservation consecutive villa notification during the game is performed. In the above-described embodiment and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. In addition, it may be configured such that these notices and effects may be performed in combination, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect), Good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, portions described by the same branch numbers can be appropriately replaced.

  FIG. 169 to FIG. 191 are views showing in stages the effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 169 to 191, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 169 to 191, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 169 to FIG. 191 are diagrams illustrating stepwise examples of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 169 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 170 (A (4) -66) show how the timer announcement effect is executed during the big hit game in addition to the display of the variation of the decorative symbol. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -1), the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7” is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of the fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 169 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 169 (A (1) -1), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and these three reserved icons h11, h12, and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each of h13 is displayed in a default display mode (circular pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the reserved icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 169 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so that the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold of the special figure 2 is held. No icon is displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good. This is the same in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. Moving to the floating icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208, it is displayed as the floating icon h0, the second reserved icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first reserved icon h11, and the first reserved icon h11 is moved. , The third holding icon h13 moves to the display position of the second holding icon h12, and is displayed as the second holding icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -3), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal portion of less than 1 second.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -4), the first timer notice display TM11 displays " 09:75 "is displayed. That is, a state in which 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “timer activation” is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -5) shows a state in which the second timer announcement effect has started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which indicates that a certain effect will be started three seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal fraction of less than 1 second. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “09:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -5). In addition, a character of “attention” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning for the timer announcement effect is given.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer advance display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -6), the second timer advance display TM12 displays " 01:25 "is displayed. That is, a state in which 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display is also continued in the first timer notice display TM11, and “07:25” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -7), when the countdown in the second timer advance display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the navigation is performed. In the vicinity of the character YM, a character of "attention to hold" is displayed to alert the user to a change in hold, and a hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It is informed that aspects may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance display TM12 becomes "00:00". In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continuing, and “06:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display mode, and the word “TIMER” is displayed above it. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “change on hold” is displayed, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice that the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the bomb has been performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect according to the second timer notice display TM12, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon of the bomb display mode for notifying the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect is displayed. The state where the change effect of the mode is performed is shown. Note that the character display of “hold change” may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the character display of “hold change” has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of “hold change” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is still continuing, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -8). Note that the second timer notice display TM12 has been deleted. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -9), a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continued is shown, and FIG. At the timing shown in 9), “05:11” is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “stock” is displayed together with the bomb icon BOM, thereby notifying that a timer announcement effect may be started. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer notice effect is reported by the icon is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Yamaru” is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that the notice display by the timer notice effect may be further performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -10), “03:29” is displayed. In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which inspires a sense of which notice display is to be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -12), the timing at which the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes "00:00". A third stop is performed, and a replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-ream!” Is displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo-ream will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance display TM11 has been completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer advance display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance effects are overlapped, and one timer advance display (second timer advance display TM12) is functioning as a prefetch advance notice. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-run is performed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 has been deleted. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 has been erased, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo run may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo run is started. Then, the first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second decorative symbol change display by the pseudo run may be started at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -14), a state is shown in which the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-run. Then, a replay icon RPL is displayed below the bomb icon BOM displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character of "timer notice by SP development" is displayed, and a mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing to super reach is being started. Are also shown. In this effect example, when the mission is completed, the timer announcement effect is started, and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to expect that the timer announcement effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -19), a state in which normal reach is continuously performed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during the normal reach, and does not shift to the super reach. Is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss. In addition, a character “sorry” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. . At this time, the replay icon RPL is deleted. On the other hand, the bomb icon BOM is still displayed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the swing of the decorative symbol starts, the swing of the decorative symbol may start after the replay icon RPL is erased, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the swing fluctuation starts.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (4) -22), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol change display on the display device 212 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first holding icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change. That is, the notification that the timer announcement effect is started is notified by the change icon h0.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -24), in response to the display of the change icon h0, the character "stock activation" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and two timer announcement effects are produced. Are started at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been deleted. In other words, in this effect example, a state in which a plurality of timer announcement effects are started is displayed by displaying the icon BOM of one bomb or the change icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb. In addition, two timer announcement effects may be started after the character of “stock activation” is displayed, or the characters “stock activation” may be displayed after the two timer announcement effects are started, Two timer announcement effects may start at the timing when the character "stock activation" is displayed. In this effect example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. In the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 30 seconds elapse after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, in the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown, a certain effect is started. Suggests that In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds and 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Has been suggested to be initiated. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Is also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer advance display TM14 respectively start countdown (subtraction display). At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -25), the third timer advance "29:45" is displayed on the notice display TM13, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, a state in which 0.55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "timer attention" is displayed, and a warning for a timer announcement effect is given. Further, in this effect example, the change animation is started at the change icon h0, and it is notified that the display mode of the change icon h0 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -26), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 and the fourth timer advance display TM14 is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -26), the third timer advance display TM13 displays " 09:10 "is displayed, and" 29:15 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 169 (A (1) -27), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -27), "28" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. : 02 "is displayed, and" 08: 02 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -28), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (1) -28), "26" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. : 75 "is displayed, and" 06: 75 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -29), "25" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. : 23 "is displayed, and" 05:23 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -30), a state in which normal reach is started and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed is shown. Also, the character “Now is near” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer display in the fourth timer advance display TM14 may be “00:00” and the advance production may soon start. It is suggested that there is. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -30), "23" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. : 16 "is displayed, and" 03:16 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -31), a state in which normal reach is continuously performed is shown. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown is still continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -31), the third timer notice display TM13 displays " 21:80 "is displayed, and" 01:80 "is displayed in the fourth timer notice display TM14.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -32), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of Sabohani. The Sabohani group notice that SBHN will cross in large numbers will be given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -32), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character of “group occurrence” is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be regarded as an example of an effect. Incidentally, the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”, or the timer in the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be “00:00”, or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes “00:00”. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -32).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -33), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that it will develop into reach. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 has been deleted. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “18:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (2) -33).

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -34), a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other, developing into super reach (swordsman reach). At the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -34).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -35) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “timer attention” is displayed, and a warning is given to the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -35), "11:03" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A (3) -36), the timer notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display in the third timer notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. Is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (3) -37) following FIG. 169 (A (3) -36), the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is reduced, and the third timer advance display TM13 is displayed. Displays “03:00”. As described above, in this effect example, by changing the timer display while the countdown is being displayed, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect performed by the timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (3) -38). In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance effects overlap, and both of the timer advance displays (the third timer advance display TM13 and the fourth timer advance display TM14) are the symbol fluctuations during execution. A state in which the display functions as an advance notice (the advance notice of the change) is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (3) -39), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in a combination of the ornamental symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -40) shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Have been. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols with the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is longer than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variation display (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -42), a state in which a big hit start effect is performed is shown. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character MCK of the teacher Machiko in a wedding dress (Mr. Wedding Machiko) celebrates the jackpot with four copandas. Also, when the big hit start effect starts, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen to encourage the player to right-handed.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -43) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect for introducing an effect during a jackpot game is performed. In the first round, a character of “effect introduction from next round” is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, and the effect is notified.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -44) shows a state where the process has shifted to the second round. In the second round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed together with the icon of Sabohani, and then, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -45), Along with the demonstration of the strong Sabohani group notice, the word “Expect for the group notice!” Is displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice is explained.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -46) shows a state where the process has shifted to the third round. In the third round, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a bomb icon and a character display of “When it comes out ...”, and then, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -47). Along with the demonstration display of the timer notice effect, the character "Timer notice is activated" is displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -48) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this effect example, when the process proceeds to the fourth round, the character “attention!” Is displayed together with the character of the copanda, indicating that the timer notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a timer announcement effect is performed during the big hit game is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -49), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activation!" Characters are displayed to inform that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "03:00" indicating 3 seconds shorter than 29 seconds which is the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 234 in one round is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is performed. This suggests that a certain production starts three seconds after the start.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -50), the character of "timer activation!" Is deleted together with the character of the copanda, and the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Is enlarged while moving to. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -51), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -51). At the timing, “02:66” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -52), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -52). At the timing shown, “00:35” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -53), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) to 54), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -55), the character of "holding consecutive Chang fixed" is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending) It is notified that the display includes a symbol variation display that will be a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notification effect performed by the first big hit timer notification display TM21, a state is shown in which a held consecutive change notification effect is performed as a certain effect. Note that, instead of the appearance of the family crest character CMON, the family crest character 224E may be operated to notify the held consecutive chan.

  When the holding consecutive Chang announcement effect is completed in this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -56), the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "continue to the next land effect introduction" is displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect description which has been interrupted by the execution of the timer notice effect is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the reservation consecutive chan has been performed. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect starts in one round of the big hit game and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer notice effect is shown.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -57) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character "" when it comes out ... "together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -58). The character “NEXT” is displayed together with the replay icon with the character “NEXT”, and a description of the pseudo consecutive effect is given.

  FIG. 170 (A (5) -59) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

  In FIG. 170 (A (5) -60), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -61), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character CMON of the family crest appears again from above the display screen, and also the notification that the pending consecutive change is performed is performed. Have been done.

  FIG. 170 (A (1) -62) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (1) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display at 212 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special map 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (1) -64), the character CMON of the family crest descends from above the display screen, and is notified that the big hit has been confirmed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (A (1) -65), a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -66), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is executed during the big hit game is shown.

  Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a timer announcement effect is started during one round of the jackpot game, and a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect is being performed. Then, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a pending consecutive chan notification effect is being performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is performed and becomes “00:00”, a new timer notice effect may be started.

  Also, the display of the bomb icon BOM indicating that the timer notice effect starts, or the display of the hold icon in the bomb display mode may indicate that one timer notice effect starts, or may be indicated twice. There may be a case where the start of the above-mentioned timer notice effect is suggested.

  Further, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display in which the start is suspended, the above-described held consecutive chan notification effect is performed, but the symbol variation display is further performed. However, for example, it may be arranged to perform a held consecutive Chang announcement effect on the condition that it is determined by pre-reading that a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation without reach, a variation of simultaneous stop of all symbols, etc.) is executed, and Reservation continuous chunk notification of a limited form depending on the fluctuating time, the type of reach, or the like may be performed, or reservation continuous chann notification with a broad concept of a big hit may be performed.

  Also, in this example of the effect, the reservation consecutive chan notification effect was performed as a pre-reading notice in the special figure 1, but the same may be performed for the special figure 2.

  The effect content introduced by the effect explanation performed during the big hit game is not limited to the above, and may be other effect contents.

  Further, the round in which the timer announcement effect is started is not limited to the above-described one, and can be started in an appropriate round. Further, a plurality of timer announcement effects may be performed in one big hit.

  FIG. 171 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 171 (B (4) -36) show different effect patterns of the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (1) -1), the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7” is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of the fluctuation is shown. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (B (1) -1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 171 is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (a probable change state with electric support). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. In a reserved icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserved icon representing the reserved of the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, since the gaming state in FIG. 171 is the electric support state, a right-handing promotion display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 171 (B (1) -1), three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and these three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (circular, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default holding icon of Tokujin 2 is also a round holding icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

  FIG. 171 (B (1) -3) shows a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the number of reserves in the special figure 2 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon h23 of the special figure 2 is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the display of the number of reserved figures of the special figure 2 in the second reserved number display is “3”. . Here, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop at the same time, and the swing fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 2”. Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (1) -6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is displayed. The symbol change display on the display device 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon h23. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (1) -7), the character CMON of the family crest descends from above the display screen and is notified that the big hit has been determined. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 171 (B (4) -8), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the big hit decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Thereafter, a big hit occurs, and the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15) are shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -47). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 171 (B (5) -16) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this effect example, when the process proceeds to the fourth round, the character “attention!” Is displayed together with the character of the copanda, indicating that the timer notice effect is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -17), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activation!" Characters are displayed to inform that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. Unlike the timer display shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -49), "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, and the countdown is started. This suggests that a certain effect starts 30 seconds after the start.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -18), the character of "timer activation!" Is deleted together with the character of the co-panda, and the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen. Is enlarged while moving to. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -19), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -19). At the timing, “29:66” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -20), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -20). At the timing shown, “13:75” is displayed.

  FIG. 171 (B (5) -21) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifth round. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fourth round to the fifth round. In the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, “12:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -21).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -22), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -22). At the timing shown, “00:35” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -23), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) to 24), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -25), the character of “reserved consecutive chan determination” is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending) It is notified that the display includes a symbol variation display that will be a big hit.

  When the reservation consecutive Chang notification effect is completed in this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -26), the character of the copanda appears again and the character of “continue to the next round effect introduction” is displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect description which has been interrupted by the execution of the timer notice effect is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the reservation consecutive chan has been performed. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds of the jackpot game is shown.

  FIG. 171 (B (5) -27) shows a state where the process has shifted to the sixth round. In the sixth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character “" appears when ... appears along with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -28). The character “NEXT” is displayed together with the replay icon with the character “NEXT”, and a description of the pseudo consecutive effect is given. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect description is started is different from the effect example shown in FIG. That is, it is shown that the correspondence between the contents of the effect explanation and the round in which the effect explanation is performed may be different depending on the period in which the timer announcement effect is performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -29) to FIG. 171 (B (4) -36) are the same as those in FIG. 170 (A (5) -59) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. (A (4) -66), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 172 (C (5) -1) to FIG. 172 (C (4) -28) show other effect patterns of the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 172 (C (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (C (5) -1) to (C (5) -10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (C (5) -1) to (C (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -19). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -11), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -11). At the timing shown, “19:75” is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (C (5) -12) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifth round. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fourth round to the fifth round. In the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "18:86" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -13). At the timing shown, “07:21” is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (C (5) -14) shows a state where the process has shifted to the sixth round. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fifth round to the sixth round. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 may be performed from the fourth round to the sixth round. This is due to the difference in the digestion time of the round game depending on the skill of the player. In the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "04:21" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) to 16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -17), the character of “holding consecutive Chang confirmed” is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending) It is notified that the display includes a symbol variation display that will be a big hit.

  When the holding consecutive Chang announcement effect is completed in this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -18), the character of the copanda appears again and the character of "continue to the next round effect introduction" is displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect description which has been interrupted by the execution of the timer notice effect is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the reservation consecutive chan has been performed. As described above, in this effect example, even if the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is the same, the round being executed may be different when the countdown of the timer display ends. It is shown. The timing at which the countdown of the timer display ends and a certain effect starts is not limited to during the round, but may be, for example, an interval between rounds. In this case, a certain effect is performed at the interval between rounds. However, a certain effect may be started after the next round starts.

  FIG. 172 (C (5) -19) shows a state where the process has shifted to the seventh round. When the process proceeds to the seventh round, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs character display of "When the character comes out ..." along with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C (5) -20). The character “NEXT” is displayed together with the replay icon with the character “NEXT”, and a description of the pseudo consecutive effect is given. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer notice effect is performed for three rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect description is started is different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 170 and 171. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (C (5) -21) to (C (4) -28) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (C (5) -21) to (C (4) -28) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 173 (D (5) -1) to FIG. 173 (D (4) -17) show an effect pattern in which the timer notice is not executed during the big hit game. FIG. 173 (D (5) -1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -1) to FIG. 173 (C (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D (5) -1) to (D (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 173 (D (5) -7) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this effect example, it is shown that the timer announcement effect is not started even after the fourth round, and the effect explanation is being continued. That is, in the present example, when the fourth round is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "When the character comes out ..." along with the replay icon, and thereafter, FIG. 173 (D (5)-). As shown in 8), the character "NEXT" is displayed together with the replay icon with the character "NEXT", and a description of the pseudo continuous production is given. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer notice effect was not performed, the round in which the description of the pseudo continuous effect is performed is different from the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 170 to 172.

  FIG. 173 (D (5) -9) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

  In FIG. 173 (D (5) -10), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the grandfather V formation display is a display in a form in which four grandfather characters form a V formation. GYV is displayed, and a notification that a pending consecutive change is to be performed is being performed. That is, a state is shown in which the notification of the held consecutive chan is performed in a manner different from the appearance of the family crest character CMON. As shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11 '), a family crest character CMON may appear. Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -12) receives the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV, and displays the character of “another time” to generate a pending repetition chan. Is reported. After that, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 173 (D (1) -13) to FIG. 173 (D (4) -17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D (1) -13) to (D (4) -17) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, the hold consecutive change notification (display of the character CMON of the family crest) performed as a certain effect, and the hold consecutive effect as a separate effect from the timer notice effect. A state in which the mode is different from the notification of the Chan (display by the grandfather V formation display GYV) is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of the pending consecutive chunks. However, at least one of the modes of the pending consecutive Changs is shown in FIG. 31 (a) or FIG. 31 (b). In the case of a game board configuration, it may be a notification by a movable effect by a staging movable body, may be a notification by voice, may be a notification by a luminous body, or may be a part or all of these. The notification may be a combination of the above.

  FIG. 173 (E (5) -1) to FIG. 174 (E (1) -18) show other effect patterns of the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 173 (E (5) -1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), and shows a state where a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. However, in this effect example, it is assumed that three “decorations 2” have been hit together. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 173 (E (5) -1) to FIG. 174 (E (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (E (5) -1) to 174 (E (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (E (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 174 (E (5)) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), not the character CMON of the family crest but the character TDR of the first person wearing a school run (clothes) appears. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (E (5) -14), the display is changed to a mode in which the clothes of the number-long character TDR are torn and become naked, and the character "Probably changed" is displayed. It is notified that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is shifted to the special figure high probability general figure high probability (that is, the probable change state with the electric support). As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notification effect is performed by the first big hit timer notification display TM21 as a result, a certain variation notification effect is performed as a certain effect is shown. After that, the production description is continued in the above-described manner until the 16th round, which is the final round.

  FIG. 174 (E (5) -15) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a number icon TDRK is displayed, which indicates that the number character TDR has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of change has been made.

  In FIG. 174 (E (5) -16), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (E (5) -17), the character TDR with the number head appears again with the character display of "next time probable change", and the notification that the state is shifted to the probable change state is also performed here. ing.

  FIG. 174 (E (1) -18) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  In this effect example, as a result of the timer announcement effect, the certain change confirmation notification is performed as a certain effect. However, the certain change confirmation notification may be performed without the timer advance effect.

  FIG. 174 (F (5) -1) to FIG. 175 (F (1) -29) show other effect patterns of the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 174 (F (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. However, in this effect example, it is assumed that three “decorations 2” have been hit together. The big hit in this effect example is a rank-up bonus, and at the time of the big hit, it is a big hit that informs in which of the four rounds, the eight rounds, the 12 rounds, and the 16 rounds the big hit is difficult to recognize. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -1) to FIG. 174 (F (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (F (5) -1) to 174 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 174 (F (5)) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the lord character HSG appears, and the jackpot game has been started to determine whether the big hit game will be continued after the fifth round or finished in the fourth round. Have been. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -14), the character HSG of the lord is shown with a vivid expression, and the character "I'm still going on" is displayed. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, a state in which a round continuation effect is being performed is shown. Thus, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect by the first big hit timer notice display TM21 being performed, the round continuous effect is shown as a certain effect.

  FIG. 174 (F (5) -15) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "When the character comes out ..." along with the replay icon, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -16). The character “NEXT” is displayed together with the replay icon with the character “NEXT”, and a description of the pseudo consecutive effect is given.

  FIG. 174 (F (5) -17) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the eighth round. In this production example, when the game is shifted to the eighth round, the character of “attention!” Is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, and then, as shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -18), the character of “round continuation chance” Is displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is informed that in the eighth round, a round judge effect to start whether to continue after the ninth round or end at the eighth round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -19), a lord-like character HSG appears, and whether the big hit game continues after the ninth round or It is shown that a fantastic production has begun to end in the eighth round. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -20), the character HSG of the lord looks lively and the character "I'm still going on" is displayed, and the big hit game is played in the ninth round. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, a state in which a round continuation effect is being performed is shown. As described above, in this effect example, it is indicated that the round continuous effect may be performed without going through the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 174 (F (5) -21) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the ninth round. At the ninth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a timer notice display as an explanation display and a character display of “Timer display time...”, And thereafter, FIG. 174 (F (5) -22). As shown in ()), “77:77” is displayed as the initial value of the timer notice display, and the character “Ultra-Atsu” is displayed to explain the timer notice effect with extremely high reliability.

  FIG. 174 (F (5) -23) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the twelfth round. In this production example, when the game proceeds to the twelfth round, the character of “attention!” Is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, and then, as shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -24), the character of “round continuation chance” Is displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is informed that in the twelfth round, a round judge effect to start whether to continue after the thirteenth round or end at the twelfth round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -25), a lord-like character HSG appears, and whether the big hit game continues after the 13th round, It shows a state in which a stir effect has been started to determine whether the game will end in the 12th round. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (F (5) -26), the character HGS of the lord is displayed in a fluttering mode, the character of "Sorry!" Is displayed, and the big hit game is played for 12 rounds. It is notified that it will end with eyes. It may be notified that the resurrection effect is performed and that it will be continued after the 13th round.

  In FIG. 174 (F (5) -27), the twelfth round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (F (5) -28) subsequent to FIG. 174 (F (5) -27), the character “Next Right Right” is displayed, and after the big hit game is over. The transition to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (that is, the time reduction state) is notified.

  FIG. 175 (F (1) -29) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the time saving state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is performed during the big hit game, and as a result, a certain notification (such as a certainty change notification or a round continuation notification) advantageous to the player other than the notification of the held consecutive chan is given as a certain effect. What is happening is shown.

  In the above-described effect examples, a plurality of timer announcement effects of different types of effect may be performed in one big hit game. For example, in one big hit game, a first timer announcement effect is performed, and as a result, a notification of a held consecutive chan is performed as a certain effect, and then a second timer announcement effect is performed, and as a result, Probable change confirmation notification may be performed as an effect.

  FIG. 175 (G (5) -1) to FIG. 177 (G (5) -64) show an example of an effect in a case where a plurality of symbol variation displays that cause a big hit are included in the symbol variation display suspended for execution. ing. Note that FIG. 175 (G (5) -1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), and shows a state where a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (G (5) -1) to 175 (G (5) -21) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (G (5) -1) to 175 (G (5) -21) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -30). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 175 (G (5) -21), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 175 (G (5) -22), a state is shown in which the family crest character CMON does not appear and the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed. The display of the grandfather V formation display GYV is a display different from the display according to the character CMON of the family crest that appeared during the big hit game, that is, the event of the held consecutive Chang notified by the appearance of the character CMON of the family crest. Apart from that, it informs that the event of the pending consecutive chan occurs. In other words, it informs that the big hits of the triple chan including the big hits are determined. In this case, the crest character CMON may appear instead of the grandfather V formation display GYV. After that, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (G (1) -23) to (G (4) -27) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 175 (G (1) -23) to (G (4) -27) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (5) -28) following FIG. 175 (G (4) -27), a state in which a big hit start effect related to the big hit of the second consecutive chan is performed. Have been. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character MCK of Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four copandas. Also, in this effect example, when the jackpot start effect starts, the grandfather V icon GV is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the symbol change display that becomes a big hit in the symbol change display whose start is suspended is already present. It reports that one is included. The present big hit corresponds to the appearance of the character CMON of the family crest executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect executed in the previous big hit game. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (G (5) -29) to (G (5) -37) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 176 (G (5) -29) to FIG. 176 (G (5) -37) are different in that the grandfather V icon GV is displayed and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is different. 173 (D (5) -2) to (D (5) -10), and the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 176 (G (5) -37), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in this example of production, since the notification of the held consecutive chan has already been made by the display of the grandfather V icon GV, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (5) -38), the character of “one more time” is displayed. It is displayed and informs that a pending consecutive change will occur.

  FIG. 176 (G (1) -39) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -40), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -41), a state in which the timer announcement effect has started is shown. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain notice effect will be started five seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -42), "04:25" is displayed in the timer notice display TM11. That is, a state in which 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown is shown. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character “Pseudo-Length” is displayed, and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM11, it is suggested that the pseudo-learn may be performed. I have.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -43), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -43).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 176 (G (1) -44), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and “01:73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -44).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -45), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “00:52” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -45). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -46), the character “Continue!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous production is performed. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “00:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -46).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -47), the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed, and at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The character "Ikuze" is displayed on the screen, and the second decorative pattern change display by the pseudo-ren is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -48), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed, the timer notice display disappearance animation is performed to erase the timer notice display TM11. Is shown.

  However, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -49), not only is the timer notice display TM11 not deleted, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is added. 22:35 "is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the outer frame of the timer notice display TM11 changes to red, indicating that the timer display has been added. The timer notice display TM11 then returns to the default display mode, but the display mode may remain unchanged. As described above, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 176 (G (1) -48) is not a vanishing animation but a timer notice adding animation which is similar to the vanishing animation. . Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect has been started using the same timer notice display TM11. In this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer notice display. It should be noted that the timer notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -50), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation of the decorative pattern is being performed by the pseudo run is performed. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “20:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -50).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (1) -51), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -52), "18:50" is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -53) to FIG. 176 (G (1) -54), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “16:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -54).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -55), the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed during the execution of the normal reach, and a state in which the big hit confirmation is given is shown. At this time, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -55), "15:12" is displayed. Partly overlapped, it is said that it is more difficult to see than when the grandfather V formation display GYV is not displayed. The grandfather V formation display GYV may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11.

  Thereafter, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -56), instead of the Sabohani group notice, the Echigoya group is a notice effect of a mode in which a large number of Echigoya characters ECG are chased by the character of the lord. A state in which a notice is being given is shown. This Echigoya group notice is an example of the premier notice, and the appearance of the Echigoya group notice informs of the jackpot decision. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the fluctuating icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -56).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -57), a state is shown in which a capture cut-in image HBK is displayed, which shows that the character ECG of Echigoya is captured by a lord character. I have. A part of the timer notice display TM11 is partially overlapped by the captured cut-in image HBK, which makes it more difficult to view than the case where the captured cut-in image HBK is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image HBK of capture may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11. Also, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the navigation system will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (2) -57).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -58), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character, the main character, and the enemy swordsman confront each other in the SP reach (swordsman reach). . At this time, a character of “timer attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM11. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -58).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -59), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM11 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is also the same as that of the disappearing animation described above. That is, it can be said that the part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer advance display is the same as the part of the animation that erases the timer advance display. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -60), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM11 as a result of the timer display step-up animation. The mode is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM11B), showing a step-up state, and a state in which the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. In addition, the icon BCHO of the face number is added to the timer notice display TM11B in which the display mode is changed, to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. In the timer notice display TM11B, the countdown is being performed, and “4:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -60).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM11B becomes “0:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -61) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM11B in this effect example is a timer announcement effect that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain announcement effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (G (3) -62), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist of the hero defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in a combination of the ornamental symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 176 (G (4) -63), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Have been. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (G (5) -64) following FIG. 176 (G (4) -63), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decoration of the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Confirmed display is made by the combination of symbols. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, both the notification of the reserved consecutive chan performed in the timer announcement production and the notification of the reserved consecutive chan performed without using the timer announcement production are performed, and the generation of the reserved consecutive chan occurs twice. The state of notifying is shown.

  Also, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display is overlapped with another notice display and the visibility of at least a part of the timer notice display is reduced. The timer notice display may be overlapped by the effect movable body.

  Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the Echigoya group notice for notifying the big hit determination is performed instead of the Sabohani group notice.

  Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer announcement effect is performed not only during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 but also during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  FIG. 177 (H (5) -1) to FIG. 178 (H (1) -40) show that the button stock is performed in the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the big hit game. This shows a state in which a corresponding mini game is played. Note that FIG. 177 (H (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -1) to 177 (H (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -1) to 177 (H (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 177 (H (5)) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), the button image 136a appears instead of the family crest character CMON, and the character "x1 stock" is displayed, and the button effect is performed at least once during the big hit game. It is announced. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed by the timer announcement display TM21 during the first big hit, the button stock notice effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Have been. Note that the button image 136a is in a default display mode, and the reliability of the button effect is low. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -14), the character “× 1” is displayed at the upper left of the display screen along with the button icon, and the button effect is performed at least once. Informing.

  FIG. 177 (H (5) -15) shows a state where the process has shifted to the eighth round. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -16), the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, suggesting that the timer notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a plurality of timer announcement effects are performed during the big hit game is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -17), the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activation!" Characters are displayed to inform that the second timer announcement effect has started. Here, the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is a special display mode having higher reliability than the default display mode. In the second big hit timer notice display TM22, "05:55" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started after 5.55 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. I have. In this presentation example, the initial value of the timer display of the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is set to three "5", and the reliability of the addition of the privilege can be further increased. There are cases.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -18), the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the second big hit timer notice display TM22.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -19), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is continued, and shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -19). At the timing, “04:85” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -20), when the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) to 21), the vibration / rotation button image 136aV in which the button image vibrates / rotates appears, and the character “× 1 stock” is displayed. It is notified that the button effect is additionally performed at least once. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect performed by the second big hit timer notice display TM22, the button stock notice effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Have been. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV has higher reliability than the default display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -22), the vibration / rotation button icon is displayed below the button icon in the default display mode together with the character “× 1”. That the button effect is performed at least twice.

  FIG. 177 (H (5) -23) shows a state where the process has shifted to the twelfth round. Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -24) shows a state in which the mini-game of the button effect has been started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen, and when the “button PUSH” and “button PUSH” appear above the treasure box image BOX, the probability changes. Is displayed, and it is notified that the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a certain state when the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -25), a digestion animation showing a state in which the button icon of the default display mode that first appears among the two button icons is digested. After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -26), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a in the default display mode, the characters "press!" Are displayed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Has been prompted. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period. At the timing shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -26), the operation validity period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is thereafter started.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -27), the operation returns to FIG. 177 (H (5) -27). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -28), the face PND of the panda appears from the treasure box image BOX and the character of "chance" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. ing. However, since it is not denied that the privilege is provided by the appearance of the face PND of the panda, the reliability may be low, but the expectation for the provision of the privilege may still be maintained. Thereafter, when the mini-game of the button effect ends, the effect in the big hit game is restarted as shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -29).

  FIG. 178 (H (5) -30) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 14th round. Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -31) shows a state in which the second button effect mini-game has been started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed at the center of the display screen and the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 177 (H (5) -24). In addition to the icon of the bancho's face, the characters "with button PUSH" and "if it appears" are displayed, and when the bancho's face appears from the treasure box, the gaming state after the big hit game will be in a probable state Have been. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -31), the character of "last chance" is also displayed in response to the remaining one button icon being stocked. I have.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -32), a digestion animation indicating that the last remaining button icon is digested is performed, and thereafter, FIG. 178 (H (5) -32). As shown in 33), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and the characters "press!" Are displayed to urge the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the effect button 136 is also vibrating and rotating, but need not be. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period. At the timing shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -33), the operation validity period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is thereafter started.

  Thereafter, after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -34), the operation returns to FIG. 178 (H (5) -35). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure, the face TRF of the chief appears from the treasure box image BOX, and the character “Sure!” Is displayed, informing that the game will shift to the certain state after the end of the big hit game. Thereafter, when the mini-game of the button effect ends, the effect in the big hit game is restarted as shown in FIG. 178 (H (5) -36). At this time, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the icon TDRF of the bancho face is displayed together with the character of “next stochastic change”, informing that the game will shift to the stochastic change state after the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 178 (H (5) -37) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

  In FIG. 178 (H (5) -38), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. In this effect example, when the jackpot end effect is started, an animation is performed in which the character of the copanda and the icon TDRF of the longest face displayed at the lower left of the display screen are erased, and thereafter, FIG. 178 (H (5) As shown in) -39), the number character TDR appears along with the character display of "next stochastic change", and here also a notification that the state will be shifted to the stochastic change state is performed.

  FIG. 178 (H (1) -40) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the game has shifted to the certainty change state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer announcement effect, an effect of stocking the execution of a certain effect (mini-game of button effect) as a certain effect is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, a chance effect effect indicating that there is a possibility that some kind of privilege may be given as a certain effect is performed. .

  In this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, button stock is performed as a certain effect, and during the jackpot game, a mini-game of the button effect according to the number is performed. During the symbol change display after the end of the big hit game, a mini-game of a button effect corresponding to the button stock may be performed.

  In this effect example, the timer announcement effect is performed during the big hit game, and the button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result. However, the timer advance effect is displayed during the symbol change display before the start of the big hit game. The effect is started, the button stock effect related to the timer notice effect may be performed during the big hit game, or the timer notice effect is started during the big hit game, and the symbol change display executed after the big hit game is completed. A button stock effect related to the timer announcement effect may be performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect is started during the symbol change display before the start of the big hit game, the timer advance effect is continuously performed even during the big hit game, and thereafter, during the symbol change display executed after the big hit game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 178 (I (5) -1) to FIG. 179 (I (1) -31) show that the button stock is performed in the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks during the big hit game is reduced. This shows another effect pattern in which the corresponding mini game is performed. Note that FIG. 178 (I (5) -1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), and shows a state where a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 178 (I (5) -1) to FIG. 178 (I (5) -16) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (I (5) -1) to 178 (H (5) -16) are shown in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -1) to (H (5) -16). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (I (5) -17), the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is displayed at the center lower part of the display screen, and the character of "Timer activation!" This is displayed to inform that the second timer announcement effect has started. Here, the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is in a default display mode. In the second big hit timer notice display TM22, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect may be started when three seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (I (5) -18), the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the second big hit timer notice display TM22.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -19) subsequent to FIG. 178 (I (5) -18), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -19), “02:77” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -20), the disappearing animation is started during the countdown display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22, and the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is erased. Is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notification display TM22, it is notified that the notification that a certain effect will be performed is a false notification. In other words, the state is shown in which the timer announcement display TM22 during the second big hit is deleted during the countdown before “00:00” and a certain effect (button stock) is not performed. Can be.

  When the disappearance animation is completed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -21), the old woman character BBA appears and the character “Haihi Sorry” is displayed, and the timer announcement effect is a gaseous effect. And that the button stock has not been performed.

  FIG. 179 (I (5) -22) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the 14th round. Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -23) to FIG. 179 (I (5) -27) shows a state in which the mini-game of the button effect has been started. The effects shown in FIGS. 179 (I (5) -23) to (I (5) -27) are shown in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -24) to 178 (H (5) -28). Since it is performed in the same manner as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 179 (I (5) -28) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character of the copanda reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

  In FIG. 179 (I (5) -29), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. In this effect example, a situation is shown in which the character TDR of the clerk wearing a school run (clothes) appears instead of the jackpot end effect by the copanda. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -30), the display changes to a mode in which the clothes of the number-long character TDR are torn and becomes naked, and the character of "next time probable change" is displayed. In addition, it is notified that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is changed to the certain state. Note that, in this production example, the transition to the probable change state after the jackpot game is performed when the boss character TDR appears, but the probable transition state occurs when the boss character TDR appears. May not be determined, and it may be determined that the state shifts to the certain change state when the state is changed to a state in which the clothes break and become naked.

  FIG. 179 (I (1) -31) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the state has shifted to the certainty change state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect, an effect indicating the possibility of giving a privilege is performed, while a benefit advantageous to the player is provided. The effect (probable change confirmation effect) that indicates that the timer announcement effect is being performed is shown without being performed.

  Also, in this effect example, even if a timer announcement effect is performed in a single jackpot game, it is definitively notified that a benefit advantageous to the player is given without the timer announcement effect. This shows a state in which an effect is performed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the notification of the held consecutive chants and the confirmation change confirmation effect are performed without performing the timer announcement effect. Although the effect is configured to be more easily executed, it may be configured to be easier to execute the held consecutive notification.

  Also, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of performing the timer notice effect, and a mini-game of the button effect is performed as many as the number of stored buttons. For example, in the case where a mission of winning a plurality of balls at the second special figure starting port 232 is performed, if one ball or a predetermined number (for example, three balls) is won, a mini game of a button effect may be performed. .

  FIG. 179 (J (1) -1) to FIG. 181 (J (1) -67) show that the timer announcement effect started during the change display of the decorative symbol continues after the transition to the jackpot game, and It shows how a certain effect is performed during execution. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (J (1) -1) to 180 (J (4) -22) are shown in FIGS. 169 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -22). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display at 212 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Here, the first holding icon h11 that was the display mode of the bomb moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and becomes the variable icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change. That is, the notification that the timer announcement effect is started is notified by the change icon h0. The symbol variation display of this time is a symbol variation display that is a big hit, and the variation time is 30 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (1) -24), in response to the display of the change icon h0, the character "stock activation" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and two timer announcement effects are produced. Are started at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been deleted. In this effect example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are started simultaneously. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. In the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 90 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It suggests. That is, a state in which a time longer than the fluctuation time of the current symbol fluctuation display is set to the initial value of the timer display is shown. Further, in the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown, a certain effect is started. Suggests that In this effect example, since two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, a certain effect is provided both when 10 seconds and 90 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Has been suggested to be initiated. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may be started when 90 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Is also good. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 169 (A (1) -25) to (A (3) -34) and described above, FIGS. 180 (J (1) to 25) to (J (3)) The effect shown in -34) is performed. The effects shown in FIG. 180 (J (1) -25) to FIG. 180 (J (3) -34) are different from those in FIG. 169 except that the time indicated by the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is different. (A (1) -25) to (A (3) -34) in the figure, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (3) -35), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a displayed in FIG. 170 (A (3) -38) is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect, but in this example of the effect, the timer notice effect is displayed. Is displayed as an effect different from a certain effect that is executed as a result of the execution. That is, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed without performing the timer announcement effect. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and “68:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (3) -35).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (J (3) -36), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in a combination of the ornamental symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and “66:21” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (3) -36).

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (4) -37) shows that temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Have been. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Also, at this time, the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 has moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner. The third timer notice display TM13 may be moved by moving animation or by switching display. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and "64:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (4) -37).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (J (4) -38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "62:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (4) -38). Note that the countdown of the timer display may be temporarily interrupted during the decorative display of the decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -39), a state in which a big hit start effect is performed is shown. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character MCK of Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four copandas. Also, when the big hit start effect starts, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen to encourage the player to right-handed. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13, which has been performed before the current big hit game is started, is continuously performed after the big hit game is started. At the timing shown in J (5) -39), “62:11” is displayed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer announcement effect started during the symbol change display is continued even after shifting to the big hit game. Note that, in this effect example, the third timer notice display TM13 moves slightly downward at the timing when the big hit start effect is started.

  FIG. 180 (J (5) -40) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect for introducing an effect during a jackpot game is performed. In the first round, a character of “effect introduction from next round” is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, and the effect is notified. At this time, the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the copanda character appearing in the performance during the big hit game, and it is considered that a part of the third timer notice display TM13 is difficult to be visually recognized. It may overlap with the display TM13. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "60:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -40).

  FIG. 180 (J (5) -41) shows a state where the process has shifted to the second round. In the second round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed together with the icon of Sabohani, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -42), Along with the demonstration of the strong Sabohani group notice, the word “Expect for the group notice!” Is displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice is explained. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "44:24" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -42). Also, in FIG. 180 (J (5) -41) and FIG. 180 (J (5) -42), the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the character of Sabohani that appears in the description of the effect, and It is said that a part of the timer notice display TM13 is difficult to visually recognize. Here, the character of Sabohani appearing in the effect description may be overlapped with the third timer notice TM13.

  FIG. 180 (J (5) -43) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In the fourth round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -44), The character “NEXT” is displayed together with the replay icon with the character “NEXT”, and a description of the pseudo consecutive effect is given. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and “06:33” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -44). At least a part of the timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the replay icon, and a part of the third timer notice display TM13 is made difficult to visually recognize. Here, the replay icon may be overlapped with the third timer notice display TM13.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “01:00”, the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (J (5) -45). As the display moves to the lower center of the screen and is displayed on the front side of the replay icon, the remaining time in the timer display becomes easier to see.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -46) following FIG. 180 (J (5) -45). Then, a cut-in image (playing picture image) 565G of the play-painted old-fashioned character smoking a cigarette is displayed. At this time, the play image 565G is displayed on the back side of the third timer notice display TM13. Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -47), in the third timer notice display TM13, instead of the timer display, a character display of “probable change” is displayed. That is, a state in which the advance notice is displayed using the timer display area is shown.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -48), the third timer notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "Yes!" That is, it is informed that the state changes to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 181 (J (5) -48) shows a state where the transition from the fourth round to the fifth round is being performed during the performance of the play image 565G.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -49), in the third timer notice display TM13, the display is switched to the character display of "Is it that much?" May be given.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -50), the third timer notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of “NO!”. That is, it is notified that it is determined that some advantageous privilege is given to the player in addition to the probability change state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -51), in the third timer notice display TM13, the display is switched to the character display of "Atsu inside the hold", and the symbol whose execution is suspended is displayed in addition to the probable change state. It is informed that a symbol change display that becomes a big hit in the change display is included (that is, a reserved consecutive chan is generated). That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, the effect display by the play image 565G is performed as a certain effect.

  The production by the play image 565G is executed when the gaming state after the big hit game is in the surely changing state and the reserved consecutive chan is generated. May be executed only for

  When the production of the play image 565G is completed as described above, the oversized family crest character BCMN appears on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -52). The appearance of the character BCMN of the oversized family crest informs the shift to the probable change state and the occurrence of the pending consecutive chan.

  FIG. 181 (J (5) -53) shows a state where the process has shifted to the sixth round. When the game is shifted to the sixth round, the character TDR whose clothes have been broken appears, and is informed that the game will shift to the certainty changing state after the end of the big hit game. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that an oversized family crest character BCMN has appeared and notification of determination of the reserved consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. This effect is continuously performed as shown in FIGS. 181 (J (5) -53) to (J (5) -54) until the 16th round ends.

  In FIG. 181 (J (5) -55), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. In this effect example, even if the big hit end effect is started, the character TDR of the number leader is continuously displayed, and furthermore, the character of “next time probable change” is displayed, and a notification of transition to the probable change state is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character CMON of the family crest appears again from above the display screen, and the fact that the holding consecutive chan is performed is also notified. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -57), a state in which the character of “next probable change” displayed together with the number character TDR is switched to “next big hit” is shown. I have. Thereafter, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIGS. 181 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 181 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are shown in FIGS. 170 (A (1) -62) to (A (4) -66). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (J (5) -63), a state in which the jackpot start effect relating to the second jackpot by the holding consecutive chan is performed. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character MCK of Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four copandas.

  FIG. 181 (J (5) -64) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, the character TDR whose clothes have been torn has appeared from the first round, and it has been reported that this big hit is a probable big hit. This effect is continuously performed until the 16th round starts. As described above, the effect description may be given during the round game.

  FIG. 181 (J (5) -65) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the character "Probably big hit" is displayed in addition to the number-long character TDR to inform the user of the probability big hit.

  In FIG. 181 (J (5) -66), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. In this effect example, even if the big hit end effect is started, the character TDR of the number leader is continuously displayed, and furthermore, the character of “next time probable change” is displayed, and a notification of transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 181 (J (1) -67) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed over the symbol variation display and the big hit game is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display may be overlapped with another effect display, and at least a part of the display may be difficult to view.

  Further, in this effect example, a state is shown that suggests that a plurality of advantageous privileges are given in a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In addition, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a time longer than the fluctuation time that is the time for performing the symbol fluctuation display may be displayed as the initial value of the timer display.

  Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the initial value of the timer display is set so that the timer display is set to “00:00” during the big hit game by physically calculating, for example, The time indicated by the initial value of the timer display in the timer notice display is longer than the fluctuation time, and the shortest time in the jackpot game (for example, in the case of a pachinko machine with 16 rounds and 10 counts, when all the shot balls win the attacker, , At least about 1 minute and 30 seconds).

  In FIG. 181 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 182 (K (4) -30), the timer notice effect is started during the big hit game, but the timer notice effect does not end during the big hit game. 9 shows a state in which a certain effect related to the timer announcement effect is performed in the symbol change display started at the time of FIG. In addition, FIG. 181 (K (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 181 (K (5) -1) to (K (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 181 (K (5) -1) to (K (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 171 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 181 (K (5) -7) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifteenth round. In this effect example, when the game shifts to the fifteenth round, the character of “attention!” Is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, indicating that the timer notice effect is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (K (5) -8), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activation!" Characters are displayed to inform that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "40:00" is displayed as an initial value of the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 40 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. That is, in this effect example, the big hit game may end within 40 seconds after the countdown of the timer display starts, and a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect is performed during the big hit game. Indicates that it may not be possible. That is, when the big hit game is quickly consumed, a certain effect may not be performed during the big hit game.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (K (5) -9), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -10) following FIG. 181 (K (5) -9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -10), “39:52” is displayed.

  FIG. 182 (K (5) -11) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. In other words, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the 15th round to the 16th round. In the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, “24:33” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -11).

  In FIG. 182 (K (5) -12), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and “10:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -12). That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer announcement effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round ends and the big hit game ends. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -13), the character of “next power support” is displayed, and after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (ie, (Time-saving state). At the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (5) -13), “08:77” is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21.

  FIG. 182 (K (1) -14) shows a state in which the big hit game has been completed and the game has shifted to the power support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Note that in FIG. 182 (K (1) -14), there are two reservations in the special figure 2, and a first reservation icon h21 and a second reservation icon h22 are displayed. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued even after the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to the power support state, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (1)). At the timing shown in -14), "06:10" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21. In this effect example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen while being reduced.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. The icon is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “05:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -16), a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and FIG. At the timing shown in) -16), "03:00" is displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “timer attention” is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be executed as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 182 (K (1) -17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Further, in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown continues, and "01:06" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -17).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -18), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 1) to 19), the character CMON of the family crest appears so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and the character "Home Crest Advent" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the big hit is determined. The state where the notification is being performed is shown. That is, it is informed that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 has been deleted. At this time, it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed and is stopped and displayed at “decoration 5”. As described above, in this effect example, the timer announcement effect started during the big hit game is continued after the end of the big hit game, and is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect, a state in which a big hit confirmation notification is displayed by displaying a crest character CMON is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (1) -20), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the character "big hit" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit determination is notified. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (2) -21), the character "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Thereafter, the family crest character CMON is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 182 (K (2) -22) to (K (1) -23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the medium symbol is changing at a low speed. It is shown.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (2) -24) shows a state in which the Echigoya group notice is being performed. At this time, the character “Premier Appears” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the premiere notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (2) -25), a state in which the cut-in image HBK of capture is displayed is shown. Also, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the navigation system will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (3) -26), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (3) -27), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the content of the executed notice is notified. The display of today's cut-in image CI1a in this effect example is executed as a different effect from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (3) -28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the protagonist of the hero defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in a combination of the ornamental symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (K (4) -29) shows a state in which temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Have been. At this time, near the navigation character YM, the character "Ya-taze" is displayed, and it is reported that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (K (4) -30), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed during the big hit game and during the display of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game is shown.

  FIG. 182 (L (5) -1) to FIG. 183 (L (4) -30) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 181 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 182 (K (4) -30). Shows a pattern. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (L (5) -1) to 183 (L (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 181 (K (5) -1) to 182 (K (5) -10). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 183 (L (5) -11) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. In the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "12:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (L (5) -11).

  FIG. 183 (L (5) -12) shows a state where the 16th round is continuously performed. At this time, the state in which the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 has been completed and "00:00" is shown. In this production example, the digestion of the jackpot game in the 15th to 16th rounds takes a longer time than the production example shown in FIGS. 181 (K (5) -8) to 182 (K (5) -11). This shows that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed before the big hit game ends.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (L (5) -13), a family crest character CMON appears. That is, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed before the big hit game ends, and as a certain effect, the notification of the hold consecutive change by displaying the crest character CMON is performed. Is shown. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (L (5) -14), the character "Changing heat in hold" is displayed together with the family crest icon CMN, suggesting that the hold consecutive change is performed. ing.

  In FIG. 183 (L (5) -15), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (L (5) -16), in response to the notification of the held consecutive chan during the big hit game, the character of “next consecutive chan” is displayed, Here also, a notification that the pending consecutive change is performed is performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) are performed. In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30), the timer announcement effect was completed during the big hit game, and the notification of the pending consecutive chan was already performed. 172 (K (1) -14) to (K (4) -30), the timer announcement effect is not performed during the symbol change display. In other words, the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) are the same as those in FIG. 172 (K (1)-) except that the timer announcement effect is not performed. 14) to (K (4) -30), the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. Therefore, description of the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) will be omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, even if the content of the timer announcement effect is the same, the timer announcement effect is completed during the big hit game due to the difference in the progress of the game (the digestion speed of the big hit game). This indicates that the game may be completed during the symbol change display performed after the game.

  In FIG. 184 (M (1) -1) to FIG. 185 (M (11) -68), the timer notice effect is started during the symbol change display to be a big hit, but is started during and after the symbol change display. This shows that the timer announcement effect does not end even during the big hit game, and a certain effect relating to the timer announcement effect is performed in the symbol variation display started thereafter. The effects shown in FIGS. 184 (M (1) -1) to 185 (M (5) -42) are shown in FIGS. 179 (J (1) -1) to 180 (J (5) -42). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 185 (M (5) -43) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In the fourth round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed together with the replay icon, and the description of the pseudo continuous production is started. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -44), the description of the pseudo continuous production is interrupted, the character HSG of the lord who performed the thumb-up pose appears, and the “emergency notification!” Characters are displayed. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "09:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -44).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -45), the character “timer extension” is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. The state where the addition animation is started is shown. Thereby, the player may be able to have expectation that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is added.

  When the timer notice addition animation ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -46) shows a state in which the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is updated to “99:99”. Have been.

  FIG. 185 (M (5) -47) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the description of the interrupted pseudo-sequence production is restarted on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character display of "When the game comes out ..." is displayed together with the replay icon. As shown in M (5) -48), the character of "pseudo ream" is displayed together with the replay icon with the letter of "NEXT" to explain the pseudo rendition effect. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "90:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -48). However, the third timer notice display TM13 is at least partially overlapped with the pseudo-ren icon related to the description of the pseudo-sequence effect, and the third timer notice display TM13 is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 185 (M (5) -49) shows a state where the process has shifted to the ninth round. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -50), the character HSG of the lord who performed the thumb-up pose appears again, and the character of "urgent notification!" Is displayed. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "13:58" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -50). In addition, in FIG. 185 (M (5) -48) to FIG. 185 (M (5) -49), two game balls win in the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the fifth to ninth rounds. As a result, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 has increased by two.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -51), the character “timer extension” is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. The state where the addition animation is started is shown. Thereby, the player may be able to expect that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is further added.

  When the timer notice addition animation ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -52) shows that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is updated to a display indicating infinity. Have been. That is, a state is shown in which the timer display effect is extended by updating the timer display to a display indicating infinity. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is temporarily suspended.

  FIG. 185 (M (5) -53) shows a state where the process has shifted to the tenth round. The timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 remains unchanged from the display indicating infinity. This state is continued until the 16th round ends, as shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -54).

  In FIG. 185 (M (5) -55), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Also here, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 remains the display indicating infinity. Then, when the big hit end effect is started, the characters "Timer ..." are displayed to notify that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -56), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to “10:00”, and after the countdown of the timer display is restarted, 10 seconds. This suggests that a certain effect starts after the elapse of seconds. Also, at this time, the character of "next power support" is displayed, and it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time saving state). Actually, as will be described later, the gaming state after the jackpot game is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probable change state), but here, it is not notified that the state is a probable change state, It informs that it is a time saving state and shifts to a so-called latent state.

  FIG. 185 (M (11) -57) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is not restarted, and the display of "10:00" is still displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -58), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h21 and h22 of the special map 2 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h21 is changed to the changing icon display area. And the second holding icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h21 and displayed as the first holding icon h21. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not been started yet and remains at "10:00", but thereafter, the countdown starts.

  FIG. 185 (M (11) -59) shows a state where the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -59), "09:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, a state where 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was restarted is shown.

  In FIG. 185 (M (11) -59) to FIG. 185 (M (11) -60), two game balls are awarded in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserves in the special figure 2 is increased by two. It is shown. Here, both of the hold icons h22 and h23 of the special figure 2 are in a default display mode. In the third timer notice TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “07:44” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -60).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -61), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop at the same time, and fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -62), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, at this time, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -62).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is consumed, and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is displayed. The symbol change display on the display device 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon h23. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Also, at this time, the countdown of the timer display is continued in the third timer notice display TM13, and “02:54” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -63).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -64), the countdown in the third timer advance display TM13 has been completed, and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 has become “00:00”. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -65), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character of "confirmed change" is displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the certainty change notification is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -66), the third timer notice display TM13 is deleted, and the character “probably changing” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -67), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop at the same time, and fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”. Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -68), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the fixed decorative symbol combination of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed including the symbol change display performed before and after the big hit game is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the countdown of the timer display is temporarily stopped by performing a predetermined display (for example, display of infinity) during the execution of the timer notice effect, and then resumed.

  Also, in this effect example, a state in which the time indicated by the timer display is added during execution of the timer notice effect is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, a timer notice effect is provided in a pachinko machine having a game property in which there is a case where the game state after the end of the big hit game is not in a probable change state (so-called “latent”). A state in which a certain effect that is performed as a result of the execution is informed of a certain change state is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, when the timer announcement effect extends over the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after that, the display position of the timer announcement display is easily changed (is easily displayed by movement).

  In this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -55), displaying a long timer display (display of infinity) makes the contents of a certain effect more hopeful. It is shown that there are times when you can. This may allow the player to expect that a long timer display will be performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine capable of executing the small hitting game, such a timer announcement effect is configured not to be performed in the symbol variation display in which the small hit occurs, but to be performed in the symbol variation display in which the large hit is achieved. Is also good.

  FIGS. 186 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -11) show the timer announcement effects shown in FIGS. 184 (M (1) -1) to 185 (M (11) -68). This shows another effect pattern. In addition, FIG. 186 (N (5) -1) is a production following the production shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -54), and shows a state where the 16th round is completed and the big hit end production is started. Is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 186 (N (5) -1), the number of reservations is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 185 (M (5) -55). The number of reservations in the effect shown in 1) is 0 in Toku-zu 1 and 1 in Toku-zu 2.

  FIG. 186 (N (5) -1) shows a state in which the 16th round has ended and the big hit end effect has started. Also here, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 remains the display indicating infinity. Then, when the big hit end effect is started, the characters "Timer ..." are displayed to notify that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (5) -2), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to “30:00”, and the countdown of the timer display is resumed, and then the timer is displayed. This suggests that a certain effect starts after the elapse of seconds. Also, at this time, the character of "next power support" is displayed, and it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time saving state).

  FIG. 186 (N (11) -3) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is not restarted, and the display of "10:00" is still displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -4), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not been started yet, and remains at "30:00", but thereafter, the countdown starts.

  FIG. 186 (N (11) -5) shows a state in which the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -5), "29:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, a state where 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was restarted is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -6), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4—decoration 5—decoration 5”. Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 4−decoration 5−decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display is continued in the third timer notice display TM13, and "21:45" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -7). In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -7), the suspension is 0 in both of the special figures 1 and 2 and the apparatus enters a standby state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -8), a state is shown in which the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is performed in the standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -8), “20:19” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -9), the countdown in the third timer advance display TM13 is completed in the standby state, and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is “00:00”. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -10), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character "determination of change" is displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, even if the symbol variation display is not performed and the hold is also 0, if the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, a certain effect is notified as a certain effect. Is being performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (N (11) -11), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character “Probably changing” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

  186 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -13) show the timer announcement effects shown in FIGS. 186 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -11). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (O (5) -1) to (O (11) -8) are shown in FIGS. 186 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -8). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses from the standby state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -9) shows a state in which the customer waiting demo display is displayed. I have. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM13 is continued, and “14:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -9). At this time, the customer waiting demonstration display TM13 is overlapped with the timer notice display TM13, but the timer notice display TM13 may be overlapped with the customer waiting demonstration display TM13. In addition, the time from the standby state to the start of the customer waiting demonstration display is not limited to the above, and can be set to an appropriate time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer advance display TM13 is completed with the customer waiting demonstration displayed, and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13. Is shown as “00:00”. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -11), the display returns to the display indicating that the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed from the customer waiting demonstration display, and in the third timer notice display TM13, In the area where the timer display was displayed, the character of "determinate change" is displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time saving state but a probable change state. Thus, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the display returns to the display indicating the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the customer waiting demo display, A state in which a certainty change notification is performed as a certain effect is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -12), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "Probably changing" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

  Further, after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (O (99) -13) shows that the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed again.

  187 (P (5) -1) to (P (99) -12) show the timer announcement effects shown in FIGS. 186 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 187 (P (5) -1) to (P (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 186 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (P (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer advance display TM13 is completed in a state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is "00: 000 ", in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187 (P (99) -11), the character" Definite Change Confirmation "is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 with the customer waiting demonstration display displayed. You. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demonstration display, a certain change notification is performed as a certain effect while the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. Is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (P (99) -12), the third timer notice display TM13 is deleted while the customer waiting demonstration display is continuously displayed, and the upper center of the display screen is displayed. Is displayed, and it is notified that the gaming state is in the probable change state.

  187 (Q (5) -1) to (Q (11) -16) show the timer announcement effects shown in FIGS. 186 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 187 (Q (5) -1) to (Q (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 186 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (Q (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer advance display TM13 is completed in a state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer advance display TM13 is “00: 00, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187 (Q (99) -11), the start of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect is reserved, and the timer display is displayed. It waits in the state of “00:00”. That is, in this effect example, in the standby state, even if the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved. Is shown.

  After that, when the customer waiting demonstration display ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (Q (11) -12) shows a state in which the display returns to the display indicating the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, also in this case, the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 remains "00:00".

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started as shown in FIG. 187 (Q (11) -13), and the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 is displayed. The variable display is started. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (Q (11) -14), a change animation indicating that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes is started. As shown in 187 (Q (11) -15), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character of "confirmed change" is displayed in place of the timer display, and the current game state is not the time reduction state but the stable change state. It is reported that there was. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the start of the symbol variation display is waited, and the certain variation notification is performed as a certain effect. Is performed. In other words, when the timer display in the timer announcement effect becomes “00:00”, if the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, or if the decoration symbol is being displayed in the standby state in which the decoration symbol is stopped, the symbol change is performed. It can be said that it is indicated that a certain effect is being executed with a delay until the display is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (Q (11) -16), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character “Probably changing” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 188 (R (4) -25) show an effect pattern in which a mission is started during a big hit game and a timer announcement effect is started when the mission is achieved. Is shown. In addition, FIG. 188 (R (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three “decorations 2” are all in a big hit, and the number of reservations when a big hit occurs is 0 in special figure 1 and four in special figure 2 . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 188 (R (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 188 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 173 (E (5) -1) to (E (5) -6). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -7) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this production example, when the fourth round is started, a character KGG of a god with a cane appears, and characters of "emergency mission" and "let the electric chute win three balls" are displayed, and the mission production starts. To inform you. In this mission effect, the purpose of the mission is to allow three game balls to win to the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the big hit game, and when the mission is achieved, the timer notice effect is started. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -8), a mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, on the decorative design display device 208, the characters "Let's win three balls in the electric tuner" are displayed above the center of the display screen, and the characters "More three balls" are displayed below it. The remaining quota until the mission is achieved is displayed.

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -9) shows that the sixth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -9), one game ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to “two more balls”. .

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -10) shows that the seventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -10), since one more game ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to “one more ball”. I have.

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -11) shows that the tenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -11), one more game ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so that the mission has been achieved, and the characters "mission accomplished" are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -12), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the center of the display screen, and below it, "Expect in 30 seconds". Is displayed, indicating that the timer announcement effect due to the achievement of the mission has started. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "30:00" is displayed as an initial value of the timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -13). At the timing, “29:76” is displayed.

  FIG. 188 (R (5) -14) shows a state where the process has shifted to the eleventh round. Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -14), “12:92” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) to 16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -17), the character of “holding consecutive Chang fixed” is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending) It is notified that the display includes a symbol variation display that will be a big hit. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 188 (R (4) -25) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 188 (R (4) -25) are different from those in FIG. 29) to (B (4) -36), and the description is omitted.

  Note that, in this effect example, a mission effect in which a mission is achieved by a predetermined number of prizes in the special figure 2 starting port 242 during the big hit game is performed, but the mission achievement conditions are not limited to those described above. The mission may be achieved when there is a winning (over winning) of a game ball to the variable winning opening 234 exceeding a specified number (for example, 10) in one round. In this case, the mission may be achieved when the number of over-wins is a predetermined number (for example, three). Further, the mission may be achieved when the digestion speed of one round is within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds). In addition, the success of the button continuous hitting production, the long button press production, or the one-button press production may be used as a condition for achieving the mission. Further, the mini-game may be performed, and the result of the mini-game may be a certain result (for example, a result of success).

  FIG. 188 (S (5) -1) to FIG. 189 (S (4) -24) show another effect pattern in which a mission is started during a big hit game and a timer notice effect is started when the mission is achieved. Shows what is happening. The effects shown in FIGS. 188 (S (5) -1) to (S (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 188 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 189 (S (5) -10) following FIG. 188 (S (5) -9), a state in which the eleventh round is being performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -10), one more game ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "one more ball". I have.

  FIG. 189 (S (5) -11) shows that the fifteenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -11), one more game ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so that the mission has been achieved, and the characters "mission accomplished" are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -12), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the center of the display screen, and "Expect in 30 seconds" below. Is displayed, indicating that the timer announcement effect due to the achievement of the mission has started. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "30:00" is displayed as an initial value of the timer display, which indicates that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -13). At the timing, “29:76” is displayed.

  FIG. 189 (S (5) -14) shows a state where the 16th round is being performed. That is, a state in which the final round is being performed is shown. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is still continuing, and "15:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -14).

  In FIG. 189 (S (5) -15), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -15), "12:09" is displayed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer announcement effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round ends and the big hit game ends. In this effect example, when the big hit end effect starts, the display position of the first big hit timer notice display TM21 moves to the lower left corner of the display screen. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -16), the character of "next power support" is displayed, and after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (ie, (Time-saving state). At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (5) -16), "10:88" is displayed on the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  FIG. 189 (S (1) -17) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, in FIG. 189 (S (1) -17), there are four reservations in the special figure 2, and the first reservation icon h21 to the fourth reservation icon h24 are displayed. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues even after the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to the power support state, and FIG. 189 (S (1)). At the timing indicated by -17), "09:10" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21. Further, in this effect example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is moved and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol change display at 214 is started. Also, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special map 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the change icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon h23. It moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, and the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23 and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. Is done. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. Further, in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “08:85” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -19), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. Also, in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown is continuing, and “01:85” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -19).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -20), it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -21), the grandfather V formation display GYV appears so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. Have been. That is, it is informed that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 has been deleted. At this time, the right symbol still fluctuates at a low speed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer announcement effect started during the jackpot game due to the achievement of the mission continues after the end of the jackpot game, and the result of the timer announcement effect performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect to be executed, a state in which a big hit determination notification is performed by displaying a grandfather V formation display GYV is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (S (1) -22), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is set. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 189 (S (4) -23), the third stop is performed without performing the reach effect, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and “decoration 5—decoration”. The state where the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “5-decoration 5” is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (S (4) -24), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, depending on the timing at which the mission is achieved in the mission effect in the jackpot game, the timer announcement effect started during the jackpot game is performed over the symbol variation display started after the end of the jackpot game. Is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect mode differs depending on the time when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice effect started after the mission is completed. Specifically, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display that is started after the mission is completed is completed during the big hit game, a family crest character CMON appears and is not completed during the big hit game. Is completed during the symbol change display, the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed.

  FIG. 189 (T (5) -1) to FIG. 189 (T (4) -18) show that the mission is started during the big hit game, the mission fails, and the timer announcement effect is not started. The effects shown in FIGS. 189 (T (5) -1) to (T (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 188 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 189 (T (5) -10) shows that the 14th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (T (5) -10), one more game ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "one more ball". I have.

  FIG. 189 (T (5) -11) shows that the 16th round (final round) is being performed. It should be noted that the degree of achievement of the mission still has one more ball left in the special figure 2 starting port 242, and the display of the remaining quota until the completion of the mission remains "one more ball".

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (T (5) -12) shows a state when the 16th round is completed. However, since the mission of winning three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 242 could not be achieved by the end of the 16th round, the characters “Mission not achieved” and “Sorry” are displayed, and the timer notice production Is not started.

  In FIG. 189 (T (5) -13), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (T (5) -14), the character of "next power support" is displayed, and after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state (ie, (Time-saving state).

  In this production example, the timer announcement production was not started because the mission was not achieved, and as a result, the notification of the pending consecutive chan was not performed. However, in actuality, FIG. 188 (R (5) -1) to FIG. As in the effect example shown in FIG. (R (4) -25) and described above, the first variation of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the big hit is achieved. Therefore, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 189 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 189 (T (4) -18) are performed. That is, except for the fact that the family crest character CMON does not appear during the symbol variation display, the variation patterns of the decorative symbols are shown in FIGS. 188 (R (1) -21) to (R (4) -25) and described above. It will be done in the same way as you did. Therefore, the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (T (1) -15) to (T (4) -18) will be omitted.

  FIG. 190 (U (5) -1) to FIG. 190 (U (5) -6) show that an event occurs in which the number of songs that can be selected as a certain effect increases as a result of the timer announcement effect during the jackpot game. The situation is shown. Note that FIG. 190 (U (5) -1) is, for example, an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 170 (A (4) -41), in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. Is shown. However, in this effect example, it is assumed that three “decorations 2” have been hit together.

  FIG. 190 (U (5) -2) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, the effect explanation is not started, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the character of "timer activation" is displayed below it, and the timer notice effect is started. Notify that it was done. Here, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, which indicates that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (U (5) -3), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues and is shown in FIG. 190 (U (5) -3). At the timing, “09:77” is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 190 (U (5) -4), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) -5), a princess character appears, and in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, characters of "new song get" are displayed instead of the timer display. It has been reported that the lineup of songs played during a game increases. That is, it is reported that the lineup of songs that the player wants to play during the big hit game increases.

  FIG. 190 (U (5) -6) shows a state where the process has shifted to the second round. In the second round, the title of the tune to be added to the lineup is displayed in the first big hit timer notice display TM21. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the number of music pieces is increased as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of the pending consecutive chan or the notification of the probability of a big hit, etc. In addition to the effect of notifying or notifying the content directly related to the profit, the effect of giving a privilege for enhancing the effect of the effect, which is not related to the interest of the player, is shown.

  In this production example, the production of increasing the number of songs was performed as a production performed as a result of the timer announcement production, but for example, the production of increasing the premier production in which the restriction on the appearance is released is performed. An effect may be performed to increase the number of characters whose appearance is released.

  FIG. 190 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 190 (V (5) -14) show how a mission is started during a jackpot game and a certain privilege is notified when the mission is completed within the time limit. Is shown. Note that FIG. 190 (V (5) -1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 171 (B (4) -9), in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. I have. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three “decorations 2” are all in a big hit, and the number of reservations when a big hit occurs is 0 in special figure 1 and four in special figure 2 . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 188 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 190 (V (5) -7) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this production example, when the fourth round is started, a god character KGG with a cane appears, and the characters "Emergency mission" and "Let me win the electric chute within 30 seconds" are displayed, and the mission production starts. To be notified. In this mission effect, the purpose of the mission is to win one game ball to the special figure 2 starting port 232 within a predetermined time (30 seconds) after the start of the mission. Is configured to be started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188 (R (5) -8), a mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "Let me win the electric chute within 30 seconds" are displayed above the center of the display screen, and the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed below it. Is displayed on the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the character "30:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, and then the countdown of the timer display (timer subtraction) is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continued, and shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -9). At the timing, “29:76” is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (V (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -10), since one game ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the mission has been achieved, and the character “achieved!” Indicating that fact is displayed. The timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 indicates "13:44".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -11), in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the character of "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -11). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the crest character CMON appears. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -14), the character of “holding consecutive Chang fixed” is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending) It is notified that the display includes a symbol variation display that will be a big hit.

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display used in the timer notice effect may be used as the display indicating the remaining time of the mission.

  In this example, when the mission is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is stopped and the character CMON of the family crest is displayed. For example, even if the mission is completed, the family crest is displayed immediately. Is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 190 (V (5) -11 ') to (V (5) -14'), after the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character of the family crest CMON may be displayed.

  Specifically, FIG. 190 (V (5) -11 ′) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 190 (V (5) -10), and in this effect example, the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is shown. 190 (V (5) -11 ′), “13:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -11 ′). And, above the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the characters "Timer 0 ..." are displayed, suggesting that some effect (a certain effect) will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. are doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -12 '), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (5) -13 '), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (V (5) -14 '), the character of "reserved consecutive Chang confirmed" is displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol whose execution is suspended (pending) is displayed. It is notified that a symbol change display that becomes a big hit in the variable display is included.

  As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is continued as it is after the mission is completed, and when the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, a certain effect of the family crest is given. The figure shows a state in which the character CMON is displayed and a notification of occurrence of a pending consecutive change is made.

  FIGS. 191 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -11) show that the mission is started during the big hit game, the mission is not completed within the time limit, and no privilege is obtained. Is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 191 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 190 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -9). The description is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 191 (X (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In this production example, during execution of the game of the fifth round, no game ball wins in the special figure 2 starting port 232 after the mission starts, and the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed. The state where the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00” is shown. Therefore, the character "Sorry" is displayed above the first big hit timer notice display TM21 to inform that the mission has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (X (5) -11), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is erased, and the character of “Introduction from the next round” is displayed with the character of the copanda and the mission effect is performed. It is notified that the continuation of the production description that has been interrupted due to being performed will be started.

  As described above, in this effect example, if the mission has not been achieved before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the mission in the mission effect, the timer notice display is deleted without performing a certain effect. It is shown that the mission production ends.

  FIG. 191 (Y (5) -1) to FIG. 191 (Y (5) -3) show modifications of the effect following FIG. 190 (V (5) -10). In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 191 (Y (5) -1) to (Y (5) -3), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the progress of the game is performed. The display state can be changed according to, or the position can be changed by moving. Note that such a configuration is applicable to the other embodiments described above.

  FIG. 191 (Y (5) -1) shows a state where the fifth round is being performed. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 191 (Y (5) -1), since the mission has been achieved, the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display. . In addition, the character of "achieved!" Is displayed above the first big hit timer notice display TM21 to notify the achievement of the mission.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (Y (5) -2), the sub-display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 rises, and overlaps the substantially central front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where it is moving to the position is shown. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least partially overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state. Then, on the sub-display device 208S, a character of "super intense in hold" is displayed together with the character of the lord who rode on the motorcycle, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the hold consecutive Chang will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (Y (5) -3), a state in which the sub-display device 208S starts descending and returns to the reference position is shown. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is erased, and the character "Introduction from the next round" is displayed together with the character of the copanda, and the character is interrupted due to the mission effect being performed. It is notified that the continuation of the effect description is started.

  As described above, in this effect example, when a mission is achieved, a state in which a movable body such as the sub-display device 208S operates as a certain effect is shown.

  Note that, in this effect example, the sub-display device 208S has been described as an example of a movable body. However, for example, one or more of various effect movable bodies illustrated in FIG. 31 may be operated. Good.

  In this effect example, the purpose of the mission is to provide a predetermined number of prizes to the second special figure starting port 232, but the contents of the mini-game and the mission described above are applied to this effect example. It is also possible. Further, in addition to this, for example, the purpose of the mission may be to pass through an effecting gate that is arranged on a game board and through which a game ball can pass, or to hit the effect button 136 repeatedly or by long pressing. It may be configured to be achievable.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the effect movable bodies (for example, various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 31) are operated as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. Is also good. In this case, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00” and a certain effect moving body (first effect moving body) is operated, another effect moving object (second effect moving body) Is in operation, to avoid interference between the first production movable body and the second production movable body, after the operation of the second production movable body is completed, One effect movable body may be operated to delay the start of a certain effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the timer announcement effect, when the timer display in the timer announcement display becomes “00:00”, an effect predetermined as a certain effect is performed. When there are a plurality of effects and the timer display becomes “00:00”, a configuration may be provided in which one of the effects is selectively selected and executed, and for example, the timer display may be “00:00”. ", It is possible to select whether to perform the effect of the notification of the pending consecutive chan or the notification of the probability change, and the selected effect may be executed in some cases. In such a configuration, it is difficult to specify which privilege is to be notified even when the timer display is “00:00”, and thus it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the effect.

  In addition, the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect may be randomly selected from a plurality of types in accordance with conditions. Items that are not directly related to game benefits may be included, and in this case, the width of the timer effect may be expanded. In some cases, the appearance frequency of the timer announcement effect may be improved to reduce the value of the privilege.

  In addition, for example, when a lower plate full error occurs during the display of the timer notice display, the ball emptying display may be displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display. By doing so, attention is paid to whether or not the timer notice display indicates a certain time, so that the player may be able to promote the ball-pulling operation. The display example of the ball-less display can be applied to any of the display modes described above.

  Further, in the effect example in which the timer notice display overlaps with another effect display in the above-described embodiment, another effect display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. Further, in the effect example in which the other effect display overlaps the timer notice display in the above-described embodiment, the timer notice display may be configured to overlap the other effect display.

In the above description,
“Timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect according to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -55)], etc.) A gaming table provided with [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The timer effect is a display in which the timer display [eg, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -49) or the like shown in FIG. When [for example, “00:00” or the like] is reached, a certain effect [for example, a rendezvous consecutive Chang notification effect due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -54)] is started. It is a production configured to
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -55)). The timer announcement effect according to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where a timer effect can be expected even during a big hit game.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  During execution of the big hit game, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed, or during the execution of the big hit game, an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed. May be configured. Further, at least a part of the timer effect may be configured to be always performed during the execution of the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the big hit game. You may.

  Also, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect is performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be configured such that the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. Is also good.

  Note that only one of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed.

Also, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game [For example, as shown in FIG. 180 (J (1) -24) to FIG. 181 (J (5) -52), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed during the symbol change display of the big hit. The timer notice effect is started, and the effect display by the play image 565G as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to notice that the timer display indicates a certain time.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it is possible to give unexpectedness by generating a big hit before the timer display reaches a certain time, and another during the big hit with the timer effect started during the execution of the symbol variation display In some cases it is possible to give expectations to the score.

  Here, the timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display is configured to display a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the game other than the big hit game. It may be configured as such. In addition, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may always be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may not be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. .

  Also, only the timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Alternatively, a display other than the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured.

  Also, the timer display is displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be configured to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Also, a timer display may be displayed other than during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. It may be configured.

  In addition, a gaming machine may be characterized in that the timer effect is executed over the symbol variation display executed at least one of before the start of the big hit game and after the end of the big hit game and over the big hit game.

The timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 181 (K (5) -8) to FIG. 182 (K (1) -19), during the big hit game, the timer notice effect of the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed. When the start of the timer notice effect is performed, the effect of the big hit confirmation notification due to the appearance of the character CMON of the family crest as a certain effect is performed during the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game, and the like. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a timer display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice during a big hit in some cases.

  Here, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. Alternatively, a timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed other than during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. Is also good. Further, a timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the display may always be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the game, and the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed.

  Further, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. The timer display is also displayed during the execution of a game other than the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. You may.

  In addition, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. A display other than the timer display is also displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. Is also good.

In addition, “the timer effect is an effect that may be started when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. [For example, FIG. 188 (R (5) -7) to FIG. As shown in -12), when a mission of winning three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the big hit game is achieved, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is started, etc. ],
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, it is configured such that a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed [for example, As shown in FIGS. 189 (S (5) -12) to (S (5) -21), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is changed to the big hit game at the timing when the mission is achieved. Completed during the symbol variation display after the end, the timer display becomes "00:00", and during the symbol variation display, a big hit confirmation notification is performed by displaying the grandfather V formation display GYV, etc.],
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game [for example, FIG. 188 (R (5) -12)). As shown in FIG. 14 (R (5) -16), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed during the big hit game and the timer display becomes "00" at the timing when the mission is achieved. : 00 ”, and a notification of the held consecutive chan is displayed by displaying the crest character CMON during the jackpot game],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to motivate the user to start the timer effect.

  Here, the timer effect may start execution only when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or may start execution other than when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. It may be something that may be done. In addition, the timer effect may be one that always starts execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or that does not start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. There may be.

  Also, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed other than during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is ended according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved. Further, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, or a certain condition. May be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game ends in accordance with the timing at which is achieved.

  Further, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed only in accordance with the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is ended according to a timing other than the timing at which a certain condition is achieved.

  Further, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is displayed only during execution of the big hit game in accordance with the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, or according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed even during execution of a game other than the big hit game. Further, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed during the execution of the big hit game according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, or the big hit game is performed according to the timing at which a certain condition is achieved May not be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of.

  Further, it may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game only in accordance with the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, or may be configured to be a timing other than the timing at which a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game according to the timing.

In addition, “the certain effect, the effect indicating the game state after the big hit game ends (hereinafter,“ the eleventh effect [for example, FIG. 174 (E (5) -13)] to FIG. (5) -14), etc.] may be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 173 (E (5) -8) to 174 (E (5) -14). As described above, the appearance of the first character TDR as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect according to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 suggests that the game mode shifts to the certain change game state after the end of the big hit game. Etc.],
As the certain effect, an effect that informs that a symbol change display that is a big hit is included in the symbol change display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, a “twelfth effect [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) ) -54) to (FIG. 170 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -49)). As shown in FIG. (A (5) -55), when the character CMON of the family crest appears as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect according to the timer announcement display TM21 during the first big hit, the hold sequence is performed. Etc.]
The certain effect is an effect configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time [for example, FIG. 173 (D (5) -11) ′) And as shown in FIG. 179 (I (5) -29) to FIG. 179 (I (5) -30), the notification of the held consecutive chan and the bancho due to the appearance of the crest character CMON without the timer announcement effect being performed. May be notified of the transition to the probable change game state due to the appearance of the character TDR],
If the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the so-called reservation consecutive chan actually hits without notification, but the so-called probable change notification is important as the notification of the game state, so it is easier to understand during the execution of the jackpot game There is.

  Here, only an eleventh effect may be executed as a certain effect, or an effect other than the eleventh effect may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the eleventh effect may be always executed as a certain effect, or the eleventh effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

  Further, only a twelfth effect may be executed as a certain effect, or an effect other than the twelfth effect may be executed as a certain effect. Also, the twelfth effect may be always executed as a certain effect, or the twelfth effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured so that it may be executed even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time, or the timer display may display a certain time. It may be configured to be executed even in cases other than the case where the display is not shown. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be always executed even if the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time, or a timer display may be a display indicating a certain time. It may be configured so that even if it does not occur, it may not be executed.

  Also, only when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect, In addition to the case where the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. Further, when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect, If the timer display does not indicate a certain time during execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be more difficult to execute than the twelfth effect.

  Further, if the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be always executed, or the timer display may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. If the display does not indicate a certain time, the twelfth effect may not be executed.

In addition, “When the timer display is changed to a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter,“ first case [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -49)) to FIG. As shown in (A (5) -55), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is completed, the timer display becomes “00:00”, and the held continuous change notice effect is performed. Etc.]).
When the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, "second case [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11)), a timer announcement effect is performed. Etc., and the announcement of the pending consecutive chan announcement is performed without any effect.] ")
The certain effect in the first case is an effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter, “first effect [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -54)) to FIG. −55), the display of the crest character CMON shown in FIG.
The certain effect in the second case may be performed in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “second effect [for example, a V-formation shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11)). The display of the display GYV gives a notification of the notification of the held consecutive chan.] ”).
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -54) to FIG. The display of the character CMON of the family crest shown in FIG. (A (5) -55), the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11), and the effect of the notification of the held consecutive chan are also provided.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of a certain effect can be increased.

  Here, the certain effect in the first case may be only the first effect or an effect other than the first effect. In addition, a certain effect in the first case may be the first effect, or may not be the first effect.

  Further, the certain effect in the second case may be only the second effect, or may be an effect other than the second effect. In addition, a certain effect in the second case may be the second effect without exception, or may not be the second effect.

  Note that a certain effect in the first case and a certain effect in the second case may be the same effect (first effect or second effect).

  Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

  Also, the type suggested by performing the first production and the type suggested by performing the second production may be the same type or may be different types. Good.

In addition, it is configured such that “the timing at which the first effect can start is earlier than the timing at which the second effect can start [for example, FIG. 173 (D (5) -11)). (A (5) -54) to (A (5) -55) shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -55), which starts during the end of the jackpot production by the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. The display of the character CMON of the family crest indicates that the pending rendezvous notification is likely to be started during the round of the jackpot game],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, it is possible to expect a certain effect to be executed without passing through the timer effect in a rescue manner while expecting the appearance of the timer effect.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the time display may be long.

  Here, it may be configured such that the timing at which the first effect can be started is always earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started, or the timing at which the first effect can be started may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. It may be configured such that the timing at which the second effect can be started is always later.

  In addition, when the first effect is started, the second effect may not be started, or when the second effect is started, the first effect may not be started. May be done.

  In addition, the timing at which the second production can be started and the timing at which the first production can be started may be configured to be the same, or the first production may be more than the timing at which the second production can be started. May be configured such that the timing at which can be started is later.

Also, in the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11 ′)). In some cases, the notification of the held consecutive chan is performed by displaying the character CMON of the family crest without performing the timer announcement effect],
The timing at which the certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect in the first case, and the timing in the first mode as the second effect in the second case. The timing at which the effect is executed is different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -49) to (A (5) -54)), a certain event is executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. The held consecutive chan notification effect by displaying the crest character CMON as an effect is started during the round of the jackpot game, but does not go through the timer notice effect as shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11 '). Is displayed during the display of the crest character CMON, which is executed during the big hit end effect, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the first effect can be expected even if the timer effect is not started.

  Here, in the second case, only a certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect, or in the second case, the first effect may be performed as the second effect. In some cases, effects other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be necessarily performed in the first mode as the second effect, or in the second case, a certain effect in the first mode as the second effect. It may not be executed.

  In the second case, a certain effect may be performed only in the first mode as the second effect, or in the second case, a second effect other than the first mode may be performed. A certain effect may be executed in the mode described above.

  In the second case, a certain effect may be performed in the first mode only as the second effect, or in the second case, the first effect may be performed as an effect other than the second effect. A certain effect may be executed in the mode described above.

  Also, only in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect, or in other cases, the second effect may be performed as the second effect. A certain effect may be executed in one mode.

  Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect, and in the second case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the second effect Only the timing may be different, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first case as the first effect in the first case, and the timing at which the certain effect is executed as the second effect in the second case in the first case Timing other than the timing at which the effect is executed may be different. Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect, and in the second case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the second effect May be different, the timing at which a certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first case in the first case, and the timing at which the certain effect is executed as the second effect in the first case in the second case. The timing at which the effect is executed may be the same.

In addition, "the certain effect is a confirmed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is given [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -54) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -55)). As shown in FIG. 174), the display of the crest character CMON indicates that a pending consecutive change will occur, or FIG. 174 (E (5) -13) to FIG. 174 (E (5) -14). As shown in the figure, the appearance of the character TDR of the bancho informs the user of the certainty change decision],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain effect is performed so that it is possible to easily recognize what kind of privilege is given and play the game with peace of mind.

  Here, a certain effect may notify only that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may notify something other than that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may not notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. You may.

  In addition, as an advantage that is advantageous to the player, for example, a notification that includes one or two or more of a certainty change confirmation notification, a notification of the number of times saved, and a notification of the number of rounds up in a jackpot game, It is not limited to these.

In addition, “the certain effect is a fixed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is given [for example, in FIG. 170 (A (5) -54) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -55)). , The display of the character CMON of the family crest, the notification of the held consecutive chan announcement, etc.]
The confirmed effect is an effect that informs that a symbol variation display that is to be a big hit is included in a symbol variation display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended symbol variation display”),
In the case where the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the reserved symbol change display is one, the configuration is such that one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, in the case of notifying that one pending repetitive channel is generated, as shown in FIGS. 170 (A (5) -49) to (A (5) -55), the first A timer announcement effect according to the timer announcement display TM21 is performed, and as a result, a held consecutive chan announcement effect by displaying a crest character CMON is performed as shown in FIG. 173 (D (5) -11). , In the end of the jackpot production, the announcement of the held consecutive chan by the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV is performed],
When the number of symbol change displays to be a big hit included in the reserved symbol change display is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, in the case of informing that two reserved consecutive chan are to be generated, first, as shown in FIGS. 175 (G (5) -6) to (G (5) -16), A timer announcement effect according to the first timer announcement display TM21 is performed, and as a result, a held consecutive chan announcement effect by displaying a crest character CMON is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (G (5) -22). In addition, in the end of the big hit production, a holding rendezvous notification announcement by displaying the grandfather V formation display GYV etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to increase a sense of expectation when both the first effect and the second effect are executed, while eliminating the confusing effect of the effect.

  Here, a certain effect may notify only that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may notify something other than that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may not notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. You may.

  In addition, the confirmed effect may be a notification that only the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display, or the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display. It may also inform other things besides being there. In addition, the confirmed effect may be a signal that always indicates that the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display, or the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display. May not be notified.

  In addition, when the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the reserved symbol change display is one, only one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. May be performed, and when the number of the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, an effect other than one of the first effect and the second effect is executed. It may be configured in some cases. In addition, when the number of the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured to always execute one of the first production and the second production. Or, if the number of symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, the configuration may be such that one of the first production and the second production may not be performed. May be done.

  In addition, when the number of the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be performed. In the case where the number of the symbol change displays to be the big hits is one, the first effect may be executed without fail. In addition, when the number of the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be performed. In the case where the number of the symbol change display that becomes the big hit is one, the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail.

  In addition, when the number of the symbol change display that becomes the big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, the first effect may be configured not to be executed, or may be included in the reserved symbol variation display. When the number of symbol change displays that become a big hit is one, the second effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of symbol change displays to be a big hit included in the reserved symbol change display is two or more, it is configured that only the first effect and the second effect only may be executed. Or, if the number of symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, there is a case where an effect other than both the first effect and the second effect is performed It may be configured as such. In addition, when the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the reserved symbol change display is two or more, it may be configured to always execute both the first effect and the second effect. And, when the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it is configured so that both the first production and the second production may not be performed. Is also good.

  In addition, when the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the reserved symbol change display is two or more, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol change display When the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the above is two or more, the first effect may be executed without fail. In addition, when the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the hold symbol change display is two or more, it may be configured so that only the second effect may be executed, or the hold symbol change display In the case where the number of symbol change displays that become the big hits included in is two or more, the second effect may be executed without fail.

  In addition, when the number of symbol change display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, the first effect may be configured not to be executed, or may be included in the reserved symbol variation display. When the number of symbol change displays that become a big hit is two or more, the second effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of the symbol change display that becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol change display is one, only the first effect may be executed, or both the first effect and the second effect may be performed. It may not be executed.

  Further, in the case where the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the reserved symbol change display is two or more, the second effect may be more easily executed than the first effect, The first effect may be performed more easily than the second effect, or only the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect is executed. In some cases, the first effect and the second effect may not be executed.

  Further, when the first effect is performed, two or more reserved consecutive channels may be generated, and when the second effect is performed, only one reserved consecutive channel may be generated.

  In addition, in the case where a timer effect is performed and the first effect is started, two or more consecutive consecutive chunks are more likely to occur than when the first effect is started without the timer effect. Or, if the first effect is started without the timer effect, two or more pending consecutive chunks occur when the first effect is started after the timer effect is performed. You may make it easy.

  In addition, in the case where the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started, two or more pending consecutive chunks are more easily generated than when the second effect is started without performing the timer effect. Or, if the second effect is started without the timer effect, two or more consecutive consecutive chunks occur when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started. You may make it easy.

In addition, the "big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games [for example, 16 round games and the like],
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one of the round games [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 170 (A (5) -55)). ), The timer announcement effect according to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 may be started after the fourth round starts, and may be ended during the execution of the fourth round, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the timer effect can be surely shown during the big hit.

  Here, it may be constituted only by a jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted by including a jackpot game by one round game.

  Further, the timer effect may be executed only in one round game of the plurality of round games, or may be executed in other than the one round game of the plurality of round games. There may be some cases. Further, the timer effect may be always executed in one round game of a plurality of round games, or may not be executed in one round game of a plurality of round games. You may.

In addition, "the jackpot game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 171 (B (5) -17) to FIG. ) -25), the timer announcement effect according to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 may be performed from the fourth round to the fifth round, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained differently.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the timer effect can be enjoyed for a long time.

  Here, it may be constituted only by a jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted by including a jackpot game by one round game.

  In addition, the timer effect may be one that may be executed only over two or more round games out of a plurality of round games, or may be performed in addition to two or more round games out of a plurality of round games. May be executed astride. Further, the game may be always executed over two or more round games of the plurality of round games, or may not be executed over two or more round games of the plural round games. It may be.

In addition, “the timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract the display from the initial value to display the certain time [for example, FIG. 171 (B ( 5) -17) to (B (5) -23), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 displays "30:00" as an initial value of the timer display, and then displays "00:00". Countdown until it becomes "
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, “00:00” in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -23). Timer display, etc.]
A certain timer effect (hereinafter, “first timer effect [for example, FIG. 171 (B (5) -17)) to FIG. 171 (B (5) -25) or FIG. 172 (C (5) -8) to FIG. The timer display displayed during the execution of the timer announcement display of the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 shown in FIG. (B (5) -17)]) is executed during the first time as the initial value. A display indicating [for example, 30 seconds or the like] [for example, a timer display of “30:00” in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 171 (B (5) -17));
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a first round of the plurality of round games [for example, “2” or the like] [for example, FIG. In the cases shown in (5) -17) to (B (5) -25), the timer announcement effect of the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the fifth round. Etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second round game [for example, “3” or the like] of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. In the cases shown in (5) -8) to (C (5) -17), the timer announcement effect according to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed up to the sixth round. Etc.],
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
The first number is one or more times,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even with the same timer effect, the number of rounds to be straddled varies depending on the state of the game (winning of a game ball to a variable winning opening, the type of big hit, etc.), so that the variation of the effect may be increased in some cases.

  In addition, in the conventional game consoles, while the performance during the execution of the big hit game was mainly related to the round game, according to this game console, a timer effect performed according to the elapsed time is incorporated. This may increase the interest of the big hit game.

  Here, the timer display may be configured so that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed after the initial value is subtracted from the initial value after the initial value is displayed, or the initial value is displayed. The display may be configured to display a display other than a display indicating a certain time by being subtracted from the initial value later. Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed by being subtracted from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. May be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

  Further, the timer display may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by being subtracted from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Other than the above, a configuration may be employed in which a display indicating a certain time is displayed by being subtracted from the initial value.

  Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. In addition, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be.

  Also, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may indicate only the first time as an initial value, or may indicate a time other than the first time as an initial value. There may be. In addition, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may always indicate the first time as an initial value, or may not indicate the first time as an initial value. It may be.

  Further, the first timer effect may be one that may be executed only over the first number of round games out of the plurality of round games, or may be the first one of the plurality of round games. There may be a case where the game may be executed in addition to the number of round games. In addition, the first timer effect may be always executed over the first number of round games out of the plurality of round games, or may be executed over the first number of round games out of the plurality of round games. The game may not be executed over the round game.

  Further, the first timer effect may be one that may be executed only over a second number of round games out of a plurality of round games, or a second one of a plurality of round games. There may be a case where the game may be executed in addition to the number of round games. In addition, the first timer effect may be one that is always executed over a second number of round games out of a plurality of round games, or a second number of round games out of a plurality of round games. The game may not be executed over the round game.

  Also, the second number may be a number that is always greater than the first number, may be the same number as the first number, or may be a number less than the first number. There may be.

  Further, the first number of times may be one time or may be plural times.

  In addition, the round game is performed when either one of the elapse of time (e.g., 29 seconds) and a certain number (e.g., 10) of game balls winning a variable winning opening is satisfied. That's the end.

In addition, the “one round game is configured to end when a second time [for example, 29 seconds or the like] elapses,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value, subtract the display from the initial value, and display the certain time [for example, FIG. 170 (A (5)- 49) to (A (5) -53), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 displays "03:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and then becomes "00:00". Count down to
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:" in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -53). 00 "timer display etc.],
A display indicating a third time [for example, 3 seconds or the like] as the initial value [for example, the timer of “03:00” in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 170 (A (5) -49). Display etc.] may be displayed,
The third time is shorter than the second time;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the timer effect may be able to be executed during one round game.

  Here, one round game may be configured to end only when the second time has elapsed, or configured to end even when the second time has not elapsed. Is also good. In addition, one round game may be configured to always end when the second time elapses, or may be configured to not end when the second time elapses. .

  Further, the timer display may be configured such that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting the initial value from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. May be configured to display a display other than a display indicating a certain time by being subtracted from the initial value. Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed by being subtracted from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. May be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

  Further, the timer display may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by being subtracted from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Other than the above, a configuration may be employed in which a display indicating a certain time is displayed by being subtracted from the initial value.

  Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. In addition, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be.

  Further, only the third time may be displayed as an initial value, or a time other than the third time may be displayed as an initial value. Further, the third time may be always displayed as the initial value, or the third time may not be displayed as the initial value.

  Note that the third time may be always shorter than the second time, may be the same as the second time, or may be longer than the second time. .

Also, "When the timer effect is executed in one symbol change display (hereinafter," third case [for example, FIG. 169 (A (1) -24)] to FIG. 169 (A (2) -33) ") , A timer announcement effect is performed by the fourth timer announcement display TM14 that is started and ended in one symbol variation display, etc.]).
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding a symbol change display being executed [for example, the strong sabohani group shown in FIGS. 169 (A (2) -32) to (A (2) -33). Notice, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the timer effect may be increased, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, the configuration may be such that there is only the third case or there may be cases other than the third case. Further, the configuration may be such that the third case always exists, or may be configured such that there is no third case. Further, the configuration may be such that there is no third case.

  In addition, the certain effect in the third case may be an announcement effect relating to only the currently-executed symbol variation display, or may be an announcement effect relating to other than the currently-executed symbol variation display. In addition, the certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect that always relates to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice effect that may not relate to the symbol change display that is being executed.

  Note that the certain effect in the third case may be a prefetch notice.

Further, a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -8) to (H (5) -13]) can be executed. A game console provided with effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
After the timer display [eg, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -8) shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -8)) is started, the timer display shows a certain time. An effect configured to start a certain effect [for example, a button stock notification effect shown in FIG. 177 (H (5) -13) or the like] when [for example, “00:00” or the like] is reached. Yes,
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game [for example, in FIGS. 177 (H (5) -8) to (H (5) -13)). The timer announcement effect related to the first big hit timer announcement display TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
An effect (hereinafter, “third effect [for example, FIG. 177 (H (5) -24)) to FIG. 178 (H (5)) that suggests that a benefit advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the big hit game. ) -28), which is called a button production mini game, etc.]).
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more [for example, FIG. 177 (H (5) -24) to FIG. 178 (H (5 ) -28), the button production mini-game is executed when a button stock announcement production is performed as a certain production performed as a result of the timer announcement production, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where a timer effect can be expected even during a big hit game.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. The effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may be one that does not always execute the timer effect.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  During execution of the big hit game, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed, or during the execution of the big hit game, an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed. May be configured. Further, at least a part of the timer effect may be configured to be always performed during the execution of the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the big hit game. You may.

  Also, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect is performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be configured such that the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. Is also good.

  Also, it may be configured such that only the third effect is executed during the execution of the big hit game, or an effect other than the third effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured. Further, the third effect may be configured to be always executed during the execution of the big hit game, or the third effect may not be executed during the execution of the big hit game.

  Also, the third effect may be executed only during the execution of the big hit game, or the third effect may be executed during the execution of a game other than the big hit game. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, the third effect may be executed only when a certain effect is executed at least once, or may be executed when the certain effect is not executed at least once. In some cases, it may be executed. Further, the third effect may be always executed when a certain effect is executed at least once, or may be executed when a certain effect is executed at least once. There may be a case that is not performed.

  The third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed once, or may be executed when a certain effect is executed plural times. It may be something.

  Note that only one of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed.

Also, "the effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a visual effect can be improved in some cases.

  Here, the effect means may consist of only the display means, or may include means other than the display means. In addition, the effect means may necessarily include the display means or may not include the display means.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, an effect means capable of executing “timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect according to the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIGS. 184 (M (1) -24) to 185 (M (11) -65)]”. A gaming table provided with [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
After the timer display [eg, the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIG. 184 (M (1) -24) or the like] shown in FIG. 184 (M (1) -24) is started, the timer display shows a certain time [eg, , “00:00”, etc.], an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect [for example, probable change notification etc. shown in FIG. 185 (M (11) -65)]]”) is started. It is a composed effect,
At least a certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display performed during the period of FIG. 186 (N (11) -4) to FIG. 186 (N (11) -7))) ]]).), The period during which the new symbol variation display is not performed after the first symbol variation display is completed [e.g., FIG. 186 (N (11)- 8) to the standby state shown in FIG. 8 (N (11) -11), etc.].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table with multiple illuminated panels,
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a first illuminated panel [for example, a rear transparent member 703r or the like],
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a second illuminated panel [for example, a front-side transparent member 703f or the like],
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are arranged at a first interval (for example, 1 mm or the like) in the front-rear direction,
A first protrusion (for example, protrusions 703t1 to 703t5 shown in FIG. 24) for ensuring at least a space between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the first interval is the first projection. [For example, as shown in FIG. 24, the projections 703t1 to 703t5 are formed on the plate surface of the rear transmission member 703r toward the front, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the illuminated panel. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the illuminated panel can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the interval between the illumination panels, which tends to become narrow due to the warp of the illumination panel, can be maintained.

  Here, only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided, or an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be included. Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may always be provided, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may not be provided.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be arranged only at the first interval in the front-rear direction, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be arranged other than the first interval in the front-rear direction. May also be arranged. Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be always arranged at the first interval in the front-rear direction, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be arranged at the first interval in the front-rear direction. It may not be arranged.

  In addition, the first projection may be provided only on the first illumination panel to secure at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the first interval, or may be provided at the first interval. A first protrusion for ensuring at least an interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided in addition to the first illumination panel. Also, a first protrusion for ensuring at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the first interval may be always provided on the first illumination panel, or at the first interval. There may be a case where the first projection for ensuring at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is not provided on the first illumination panel.

  Further, a first protrusion for ensuring at least a distance between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the first interval may be provided on an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel, Only the first protrusion may be provided on the first illumination panel to ensure at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the interval of the first illumination panel, or the first illumination may be provided at the first interval. A projection other than the first projection for ensuring at least the interval between the panel and the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel.

  Also, a first protrusion may be provided on the first illuminated panel to secure at least only the interval between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel at the first interval, or may be provided at the first interval. A first protrusion for ensuring at least an interval other than the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel. In addition, the first projection may be provided on the first illumination panel to secure at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel only at the first interval, or other than the first interval. The first projection may be provided on the first illumination panel to secure at least the interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel at the interval of.

The first projection is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. [For example, as shown in FIG. 24, the projections 703t1 to 703t5 have Etc. are formed inside the outer edge of the member 703r],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, the distance between the illumination panels in the inner portion, which tends to be narrow due to the warp of the illumination panel, can be maintained.

  Here, only the first protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or the first protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. Other protrusions may be provided. Further, the first protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or the first protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. It may not be provided.

  Further, the first protrusion may be provided only at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or the first protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. A part may be provided.

  Further, the first protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the second illumination panel, or the first projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. One protrusion may be provided.

In addition, "the first illuminated panel is arranged behind the second illuminated panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, Etc.],
The first projection is provided on the front surface of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the projections 703t1 to 703t5 are formed on the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r. etc],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the range of the luminescent image displayed by the illumination panel may not be limited.

  Here, the first illumination panel may be arranged only behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may be arranged other than behind the second illumination panel. Further, the first illumination panel may be always arranged behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may not be arranged behind the second illumination panel.

  Also, only the first protrusion may be provided on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or a protrusion other than the first projection may be provided on the front surface of the first illumination panel. Also, the first projection may be provided on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or the first projection may not be provided on the front surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, the first projection may be provided only on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or the first projection may be provided other than on the front surface of the first illumination panel.

  The second illumination panel may be provided behind the first illumination panel, and the first projection may be provided on the front surface of the second illumination panel.

In addition, "game board [for example, game board 200 etc.]
Game components provided on the game board [for example, the production movable body 224, the stage 244, the production device 206, the warping device 242, the starting port unit, the attacker unit, etc. shown in FIG.
With
The first protrusion is overlapped by the game component [for example, as shown in FIG. 20, the first protrusion 703t1 is overlapped by the stage 244, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first protrusion can be made difficult to be seen by the player, and a decrease in the effect of the effect may be suppressed.

  Here, only the first protrusion may be overlapped by the game component, or protrusions other than the first protrusion may be overlapped by the game component. Also, the first protrusion may be always overlapped by the game component, or the first protrusion may not be overlapped by the game component.

  Further, the first protrusion may be overlapped only by the game component, or the first protrusion may be overlapped by a component other than the game component.

In addition, “the gaming component is a first movable body [for example, a production movable body 224 shown in FIG.
The first movable body located at the first position is moved to a first operation [for example, an operation of moving from an initial position to a position overlapping a front surface substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then returning to the initial position. Etc.]
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The first projection is overlapped by the first movable body located at the first position. [For example, as shown in FIG. 20, the third projection 703t3 is a rendering movable body located at an initial position. 224, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first protrusion may not be noticeable due to the operation of the first movable body.

  Here, the first movable body located at the first position may perform only the first operation, or the first movable body located at the first position may be other than the first operation. May also be performed. Further, the first movable body located at the first position may always execute the first operation, or the first movable body located at the first position may not execute the first operation. There may be.

  Further, only the first movable body located at the first position may perform the first operation, or a movable body other than the first movable body located at the first position may be the first movable body. May be performed. Further, the first movable body located only at the first position may perform the first operation, or the first movable body located at a position other than the first position may be the first movable body. An operation may be performed.

In addition, there is a case where an effect by at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. [For example, the emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE on the front transmission member 703f and the emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM on the rear transmission member 703r may be displayed together with the operation of the effect movable body 224] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where a dynamic effect can be achieved by a synergistic effect of the light emitting effect by the illumination panel and the effect by the first movable body.

  Here, there may be a case where only an effect by at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. However, even if there is a case where an effect other than an effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel is also performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. Good. In addition, the effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may be necessarily performed in relation to the first operation performed by the first movable body, The effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may not be performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the movable body.

  Further, there may be a case where an effect by at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is performed only in connection with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. Even if there is a case where an effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel is performed in relation to other than the fact that the first operation by the first movable body is performed Good.

  In addition, there may be a case where an effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel is performed in association with the execution of only the first operation by the first movable body. There may be a case where an effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel is performed in association with the execution of an operation other than the first operation by the first movable body. .

  In addition, there may be a case where an effect by only the first illumination panel is performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body, or the first operation by the first movable body. May be performed in connection with the execution of the second illumination panel alone, or the first operation may be performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. An effect may be performed by both the illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel.

In addition, “the game component is a decorative member [for example, a decorative member or the like provided in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.
The first protrusion is overlapped by the decoration member [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 20, the second protrusion 703t2 is overlapped by a decoration member provided in the rendering device 206, and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first protrusion may be able to be hidden by the decorative member in some cases.

  Here, only the first protrusion may be overlapped by the decoration member, or protrusions other than the first protrusion may be overlapped by the decoration member. Further, the first protrusion may be always overlapped by the decorative member, or the first protrusion may not be overlapped by the decorative member.

In addition, “the gaming component is a warp passage [for example, a warp device 242 shown in FIG.
The warp passage is a passage that guides game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from a warp entrance [e.g., the warp entrance 242a] to a warp exit [e.g., the warp exit 242b],
The first protrusion is overlapped by the warp passage [for example, as shown in FIG. 20, the fifth protrusion 703t5 is overlapped by the warping device 242, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first protrusion may be hidden by the warp passage.

  Here, the warp passage may be only a passage for guiding game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp entrance to the warp exit, or may be a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp entrance to the warp exit. May be included. Further, the warp passage may be a passage that guides game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp inlet to the warp outlet only, or may guide game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp inlet to the warp outlet. It may be a passage leading to the vehicle. Further, the warp passage may be a passage that always guides a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp inlet to the warp outlet, or a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp inlet to the warp outlet. A passage that may not be guided may be used.

  In addition, the warp passage may be a passage that guides only game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp inlet to the warp outlet, or a game ball other than the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board from the warp entrance. It may be a passage leading to the warp outlet. Further, the warp passage may be a passage that guides a game ball flowing only through the game area of the game board from the warp entrance to the warp exit, or a game ball flowing down an area other than the game area of the game board from the warp entrance. It may be a passage leading to the warp outlet.

  Further, only the first protrusion may be overlapped by the warp passage, or protrusions other than the first protrusion may be overlapped by the warp passage. In addition, the first protrusion may be always overlapped by the warp passage, or the first protrusion may not be overlapped by the warp passage.

  Further, the first protrusion may be overlapped only by the warp passage, or the first protrusion may be overlapped by other than the warp passage.

In addition, “display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] is provided,
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first projection may be inconspicuous by the display by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the game can be excited by a synergistic effect of the display effect by the display means and the light emission effect by the illumination panel.

  Here, only the first illumination panel may be provided in front of the display means, or an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel may be provided in front of the display means. Further, the first illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, the first illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means.

  Here, only the second illumination panel may be provided in front of the display means, or an illumination panel other than the second illumination panel may be provided in front of the display means. Further, the second illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, the second illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means.

In addition, “the length from the base end to the tip end of the first protrusion is a first length [for example, 1.2 mm or the like],
The first length is longer than the length of the first interval,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projections can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval.

In addition, “the length from the base end to the tip of the first protrusion is a second length [for example, 1 mm or the like],
The second length and the first interval length are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projection and the illuminated panel can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval. is there.

In addition, “a certain mounting board to which the light emitting means is mounted [for example, the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 shown in FIG.
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are each provided with a light emitting means [for example, an LED element mounted on the first LED substrate 704cb1 or an LED mounted on the second LED substrate 704cb2] mounted on the certain mounting substrate. Illuminated panel that can emit light by being irradiated with light from
At least a part of the certain mounting board is disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 21, two transmission members 703f, When 703r is attached to the glass unit frame 704, the front end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, etc.],
No light emitting means attached to the certain mounting substrate is arranged in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. The members 703f and 703r are attached to the glass unit frame 704, and the leading end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f and 703r. 703f, 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a certain mounting board can be held by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, and the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the illumination panel can be maintained.

  Here, the certain mounting board may be a board to which only the light emitting means is mounted, or may be a board to which other than the light emitting means is also mounted. In addition, a certain mounting substrate may be a substrate to which a light emitting unit is always mounted, or may be a substrate to which a light emitting unit may not be mounted.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of only emitting light by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate, respectively. An effect other than the light emission effect may be possible by irradiating light from light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. In addition, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each necessarily perform a light emission effect by being irradiated with light from a light emitting unit attached to a certain mounting substrate. There may be a case where the light emission effect is not possible due to the irradiation of the light from the light emitting means mounted on the mounting substrate.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of emitting light only by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board, respectively. Light emission effects may be provided by means other than irradiation of light from light emitting means attached to a certain attachment substrate.

  In addition, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of emitting light by being irradiated only with light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board, respectively. Light emission effects may be provided by irradiating light other than light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate.

  In addition, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of emitting light by being irradiated with light only from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board, respectively. Light emission may be possible by irradiating light from light emitting means other than the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of emitting light by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means attached to only a certain mounting substrate, respectively. Light emitting effects may be provided by irradiating light from light emitting means mounted on a substrate other than a certain mounting substrate.

  Further, at least a part of a certain mounting substrate may be arranged only in a gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel, or at least a part of the certain mounting substrate may be arranged in the first illuminated panel. And a gap other than the gap formed by the second illumination panel. Further, at least a part of a certain mounting substrate may be necessarily arranged in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or at least a part of the certain mounting substrate may be arranged in the first illumination panel. And may not be arranged in the gap formed by the second illumination panel.

  Further, only a part of a certain mounting board may be arranged in a gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel, or all of a certain mounting board may be arranged in the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May be arranged in a gap formed by the illuminated panel.

  Further, only a light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may not be disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided. The light emitting means other than the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may not be arranged in the gap formed by the panel. Further, the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may not necessarily be arranged in the gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, and the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be omitted. The light emitting means attached to a certain attachment substrate may be arranged in the gap formed by the panel.

  Further, the light emitting means attached to only a certain mounting substrate may not be disposed in the gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, and the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be omitted. The light emitting means attached to a substrate other than a certain attachment substrate may not be arranged in the gap formed by the panel.

  Further, a light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may not be disposed in a gap formed only by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, and the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be omitted. The light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may not be arranged in the gap formed by the illumination panel other than the panel.

Also, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are illumination panels that can emit light by guiding light from light-emitting means attached to the certain mounting board from an end. [For example, the two transmission members 703f and 703r receive light from the LED elements provided on the first LED substrate 704cb1 and the second LED substrate 704cb2 from the ends, respectively. In the cut pattern formed on each back surface, a luminescent image is displayed by reflecting toward the player side, etc.],
The certain mounting substrate has both a first surface (for example, a surface (front surface) on the player side) and a second surface (for example, a surface (rear surface) opposite to the player side). [E.g., the second LED board 704cb2 shown in FIG. 21 has LED elements arranged on both sides of the board].
The first surface is a surface opposite to the second surface,
The first illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the first surface from an end,
The second illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the second surface from an end,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where light can be emitted toward the illumination panel while maintaining the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the illumination panel.

  Here, the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are each capable of emitting light only by guiding light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end. Alternatively, an effect other than the light emission effect may be possible by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end. In addition, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be configured such that the light emission effect is always performed by guiding the light from the light emitting unit attached to a certain mounting board from the end. However, there may be a case where the light emission effect is not possible by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may each be capable of emitting light only by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end. Alternatively, a light emission effect may be provided by other than guiding light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end.

  In addition, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be capable of emitting light by guiding light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from only the end. Alternatively, a light emission effect may be achieved by guiding light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from other than the end.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be capable of emitting light by guiding light from only the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board from the end. Alternatively, a light emitting effect may be provided by guiding light from light emitting means other than the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate from the end.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be capable of emitting light by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached only to a certain mounting substrate from the end. Alternatively, a light emission effect may be provided by guiding light from the light emitting means attached to a substrate other than a certain attachment substrate from the end.

  Further, a certain mounting substrate may be one in which only the light emitting means is mounted on both the first surface and the second surface, or both the first surface and the second surface. May be attached to each other than the light emitting means. In addition, a certain mounting substrate may be one on which light emitting means is always mounted on both the first surface and the second surface, or may be a surface on both the first surface and the second surface. The light emitting means may not be attached to each.

  Further, the certain mounting substrate may be one in which the light emitting means is mounted only on both surfaces of the first surface and the second surface, or on both surfaces of the first surface and the second surface. In addition, a light emitting unit may be attached.

  In addition, the first illumination panel may be one that can only emit light by guiding light from the light emitting unit attached to the first surface from the end, or may be a first surface. An effect other than the light emission effect may be possible by guiding the light from the attached light emitting means from the end. Further, the first illumination panel may be one in which the light emission effect is always performed by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to the first surface from the end, or the first surface The light emission effect may not be performed by guiding the light from the attached light emitting means from the end.

  In addition, the first illumination panel may be capable of emitting light only by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to the first surface from the end portion, or may be capable of emitting light on the first surface. Light emission effects may be provided by other than guiding light from the attached light emitting means from the end. In addition, the first illumination panel may be capable of emitting light by guiding only light from the light emitting means attached to the first surface from the end portion, or may be capable of emitting light on the first surface. Light emitting effects may be provided by guiding light other than the light from the attached light emitting means from the end.

  In addition, the second illumination panel may be a panel that can only emit light by guiding light from the light emitting unit attached to the second surface from the end, or may be a second surface. An effect other than the light emission effect may be possible by guiding the light from the attached light emitting means from the end. In addition, the second illumination panel may be one in which the light emission effect is necessarily performed by guiding the light from the light emitting unit attached to the second surface from the end, or the second surface The light emission effect may not be performed by guiding the light from the attached light emitting means from the end.

  In addition, the second illumination panel may be capable of emitting light only by guiding the light from the light emitting means attached to the second surface from the end, or may be a second illumination panel. Light emission effects may be provided by other than guiding light from the attached light emitting means from the end. In addition, the second illumination panel may be capable of emitting light by guiding only the light from the light emitting means attached to the second surface from the end, or may be capable of emitting light on the second surface. Light emitting effects may be provided by guiding light other than the light from the attached light emitting means from the end.

In addition, “a first reflection groove [for example, a cut pattern or the like formed on the back surface of the front transmission member 703f] for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player side. ] Is provided on the rear surface of the first illuminated panel,
A second reflection groove [for example, a cut pattern formed on the back surface of the rear transmission member 703r] for reflecting light from the light emitting unit attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player side is provided. Provided on the rear surface of the second illuminated panel,
The light from the light emitting means mounted on the certain mounting substrate is reflected by the first reflection groove to form a first pattern [for example, a light emitting image of a heart mark pattern 703HE shown in FIG. 23A]. Is displayed,
The light from the light emitting means mounted on the certain mounting substrate is reflected by the second reflection groove to form a second pattern [for example, a light emitting image of a smile mark pattern 703SM shown in FIG. 23B). Is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, space saving may be possible.

  Here, a first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain attachment substrate toward the player may be provided only on the rear surface of the first illumination panel, or A first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate to the player side may be provided other than on the rear surface of the first illumination panel. Also, a first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel, There may be a case where the first reflection groove for reflecting the light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player is not provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  Also, only a first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel, or A reflection groove other than the first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, a first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain attachment substrate only toward the player side may be provided on a rear surface of the first illumination panel, A first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate in a direction other than the player side may be provided on a rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, a first reflection groove for reflecting only light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel, A first reflection groove for reflecting light other than light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, a first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached only to a certain attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on a rear surface of the first illumination panel, A first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a substrate other than the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, a second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain attachment substrate toward the player may be provided only on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, or A second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on a portion other than the rear surface of the second illumination panel. Also, a second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, A second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may not be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel.

  Also, only a second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, or A reflection groove other than the second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel.

  In addition, a second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward only the player side may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, A first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate in a direction other than the player side may be provided on a rear surface of the first illumination panel.

  In addition, a second reflection groove for reflecting only light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, or A second reflection groove for reflecting light other than light from the light emitting means attached to the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel.

  Further, a second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached only to a certain mounting substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel, or A second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a substrate other than the attachment substrate toward the player may be provided on the rear surface of the second illumination panel.

  Further, only the first pattern may be displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate being reflected by the first reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. The light other than the first pattern may be displayed by reflecting the light on the first reflection groove. Further, the first pattern may be always displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate being reflected by the first reflection groove, or the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate may be displayed. The first pattern may not be displayed due to the light reflected by the first reflection groove.

  Further, the first pattern may be displayed only by light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate being reflected by the first reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. The first pattern may be displayed in a manner other than that the light is reflected by the first reflection groove.

  Also, the first pattern may be displayed by reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate only on the first reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. The first pattern may be displayed by reflecting the light from the reflection grooves other than the first reflection groove.

  Also, the first pattern may be displayed by reflecting only the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board in the first reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board. The first pattern may be displayed by the light other than the light reflected by the first reflection groove.

  Further, the first pattern may be displayed by reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to only a certain mounting substrate by the first reflection groove, or may be attached to a substrate other than the certain mounting substrate. The first pattern may be displayed by reflecting light from the light emitting means on the first reflection groove.

  Further, only the second pattern may be displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board being reflected by the second reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board. The light other than the second pattern may be displayed by reflecting the light on the second reflection groove. Further, the second pattern may be always displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate being reflected by the second reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. The second pattern may not be displayed due to the light reflected by the second reflection groove.

  Further, the second pattern may be displayed only by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board being reflected by the second reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board. Alternatively, the second pattern may be displayed other than the fact that the light is reflected by the second reflection groove.

  Further, the second pattern may be displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate being reflected only by the second reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting substrate. The second pattern may be displayed by reflecting the light in the reflection grooves other than the second reflection groove.

  Further, the second pattern may be displayed by reflecting only the light from the light emitting means attached to a certain mounting board by the second reflection groove, or from the light emitting means attached to the certain mounting board. The second pattern may be displayed by reflecting the light other than the light in the second reflection groove.

  Further, the second pattern may be displayed by reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to only a certain mounting substrate by the second reflection groove, or may be attached to a substrate other than the certain mounting substrate. The second pattern may be displayed by the light from the light emitting means being reflected by the second reflection groove.

In addition, "a second projection for securing at least an interval between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel at the first interval [for example, a rear transparent member 703r shown in FIG. Rib 703u formed on the left edge or the lower edge, etc.]
The second protrusion is a protrusion different from the first protrusion,
The second protrusion is provided at a position to be an outer edge of one of the first and second illumination panels.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the distance between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be more reliably maintained.

  Here, the second projection may be provided only at a position which is one of the first and second illumination panels and is an outer edge, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel The illumination panel may be provided at a position other than the position that is the outer edge of the illumination panel. In addition, the second projection may be provided at a position that is one of the first and second illumination panels and the outer edge, and may be provided at a position that is an outer edge. There may be a case where one of the illumination panels is not provided at a position to be an outer edge.

  In addition, the second protrusion may be provided only at a position that is the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or may be provided only at a position that is the outer edge of the second illumination panel. , Both of the first and second illumination panels may be provided at positions that are outer edges.

  In addition, the second protrusion may be for securing an interval between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel at the first interval, or may be used for securing the first illuminated panel at an interval longer than the first interval. It may be for securing an interval between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel.

In addition, “the second protrusion is provided at a position that is invisible to the player [for example, as shown in FIG. 21, the rib 703 u is Etc., which are hidden and made difficult for the player to see]
The length of the outer circumference at the base end of the second protrusion is longer than the length of the outer circumference at the base end of the first protrusion,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the gap between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be able to be firmly maintained in a part invisible to the player.

  Here, only the second protrusion may be provided at a position where the player cannot visually recognize, or anything other than the second protrusion may be provided at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the second protrusion. In addition, the second protrusion may be provided at a position where the player cannot visually recognize, or the second protrusion may not be provided at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the second protrusion.

  In addition, the second protrusion may be provided only at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it, or the second protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position where the player cannot visually recognize the second protrusion.

In addition, the apparatus further includes a mounting member [for example, a glass frame unit 704 illustrated in FIG.
The attachment member is provided with a spacer [for example, a rib 704RB shown in FIG.
At least a part of the spacer is disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.] and the transmission members 703f and 703r.
A first screw hole is provided in the first illumination panel,
A second screw hole is provided in the second illumination panel,
A third screw hole is provided in the spacer,
When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole overlap,
By fixing a screw to the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are fixed to the mounting member,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be securely attached to the attachment member while maintaining a space between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel.

  Here, the attachment member may attach only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may attach anything other than the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. Good. In addition, the attachment member may be one that always attaches the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may be one that does not always attach the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. Good.

  Further, only the spacer may be provided on the mounting member, or anything other than the spacer may be provided on the mounting member. Further, a spacer may be provided on the mounting member, or a spacer may not be provided on the mounting member.

  The spacer may be formed integrally with the mounting member, or may be formed separately from the mounting member.

  Further, at least a part of the spacer may be arranged only in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the spacer may be arranged in the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May be arranged in addition to the gap formed by. Further, at least a part of the spacer may be necessarily disposed in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the spacer may be arranged in the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May not be arranged in the gap formed by

  Further, only a part of the spacer may be arranged in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or the whole of the spacer is formed by the first and second illuminated panels. May be arranged in a gap.

  Further, only the first screw hole may be provided in the first illumination panel, or a screw hole other than the first screw hole may be provided in the first illumination panel. Further, the first screw hole may be always provided in the first illumination panel, or the first screw hole may not be provided in the first illumination panel.

  Further, the first screw hole may be provided only in the first illumination panel, or the first screw hole may be provided in an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel.

  Further, the second illumination panel may be provided with only the second screw hole, or the second illumination panel may be provided with a screw hole other than the second screw hole. Also, the second screw panel may be provided with the second screw hole without fail, or the second screw panel may not be provided with the second screw hole.

  The second screw hole may be provided only in the second illumination panel, or the second screw hole may be provided in an illumination panel other than the second illumination panel.

  Further, only the third screw hole may be provided in the spacer, or a screw hole other than the third screw hole may be provided in the spacer. The spacer may be provided with the third screw hole, or the spacer may not be provided with the third screw hole.

  Further, a third screw hole may be provided only in the spacer, or a third screw hole may be provided in addition to the spacer.

  Further, when the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, only the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap, or the first illumination hole may be attached to the attachment member. When the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached, screw holes other than the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap. When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may always overlap, or the first illumination hole may be attached to the attachment member. When the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may not overlap.

  Further, when only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap with each other, or the attachment member may include the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole. When something other than the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel is attached, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap. Further, when the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached only to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap, or other than the attachment member. When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap.

  Further, the first and second illumination panels may be fixed only to the mounting member by inserting screws into the first and second screw holes, the second and third screw holes, or a screw. May be inserted into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole to fix the first and second illuminated panels to members other than the mounting member. Further, the first and second illumination panels may be fixed to the mounting member by inserting screws into the first, second, and third screw holes, or may be screwed. May be inserted through the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, so that the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may not be fixed to the mounting member.

  Further, by inserting a screw into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member, May be inserted through the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, so that anything other than the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may be fixed to the mounting member.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member only by inserting screws into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member by inserting the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel other than inserting the first illumination hole into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.];
Multiple illuminated panels,
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a first illuminated panel [for example, a rear transparent member 703r or the like],
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a second illuminated panel [for example, a front-side transparent member 703f or the like],
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are arranged at a first interval (for example, 1 mm or the like) in the front-rear direction,
A first projection [eg, a projection 703t2 shown in FIG. 24] for avoiding contact between the plate surface of the first illumination panel and the plate surface of the second illumination panel is provided on the first illumination panel. [For example, as shown in FIG. 24, the protrusion 703t2 is formed on the plate surface of the rear transmission member 703r toward the front, etc.],
A second protrusion for maintaining the distance between the plate surface of the first illumination panel and the plate surface of the second illumination panel at the first interval [for example, a rear transmission member shown in FIG. 21. Ribs 703u formed on the left edge and the lower edge of 703r] are provided on the first illumination panel,
The second protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position on the outer periphery of the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is disposed behind the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, a rear transmission member 703r is disposed behind a front transmission member 703f, and the like]. ,
The first protrusion is a protrusion provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel different from the second protrusion [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 24, the protrusion 703t2 Is formed on the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r, etc.],
The first protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the second protrusion 703 t 2 is provided on the entire surface of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The certain position is a position formed on the second illumination panel and behind a reflection groove for displaying a pattern [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 24, the protrusion 703t2 is Etc.], which is located behind the lens cut for displaying the heart mark pattern 703HE on the front transparent member 703f],
The certain position is a position that overlaps an image displayed on the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

Also, “display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.]
Multiple illuminated panels,
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a first illuminated panel [for example, a rear transparent member 703r or the like],
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a second illuminated panel [for example, a front-side transparent member 703f or the like],
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are arranged at a first interval (for example, 1 mm or the like) in the front-rear direction,
A first protrusion (eg, a protrusion 703t2 shown in FIG. 24) for avoiding contact between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel includes the first illuminated panel. [For example, the protrusion 703t2 shown in FIG. 24],
A second protrusion for maintaining the distance between the plate surface of the first illumination panel and the plate surface of the second illumination panel at the first interval [for example, a rear transmission member shown in FIG. 21. Ribs 703u formed on the left edge and the lower edge of 703r] are provided on the first illumination panel,
The second protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position on the outer periphery of the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is disposed behind the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, a rear transmission member 703r is disposed behind a front transmission member 703f, and the like]. ,
The first protrusion is a protrusion provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel different from the second protrusion [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 24, the protrusion 703t2 Is formed on the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r, etc.],
The first protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the second protrusion 703 t 2 is provided on the entire surface of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The certain position is a position formed in the first illumination panel and located in front of a reflection groove for displaying a pattern [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc., which are located in front of a lens cut for displaying a smile mark pattern 703SM on the rear transmission member 703r],
The certain position is a position that overlaps an image displayed on the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first projection is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the projection 703t2 is provided with the rear transmission member 703r. Etc. are formed inside the outer edge of the
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "game board [for example, game board 200 etc.]
Game components provided on the game board [for example, the production movable body 224, the stage 244, the production device 206, the warping device 242, the starting port unit, the attacker unit, etc. shown in FIG.
With
A third protrusion [for example, protrusions 703t1, 703t3 to 703t5 shown in FIG. 24] for avoiding contact between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel includes One illumination panel is provided [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the protrusions 703t1, 703t3 to 703t5 are formed on the plate surface of the rear transmission member 703r toward the front, etc.],
The third protrusion is a protrusion provided at a different position from the first protrusion,
The third protrusion is overlapped by the game component [for example, as shown in FIG. 20, the first protrusion 703t1 is overlapped by the stage 244, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming component is a first movable body [for example, a production movable body 224 shown in FIG.
The first movable body located at the first position is moved to a first operation [for example, an operation of moving from an initial position to a position overlapping a front surface substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then returning to the initial position. Etc.]
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The third projection is overlapped by the first movable body located at the first position. [For example, as shown in FIG. 20, the third projection 703t3 is a production movable body located at an initial position. 224, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, there is a case where an effect by at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body. [For example, the emission image of the heart mark pattern 703HE on the front transmission member 703f and the emission image of the smile mark pattern 703SM on the rear transmission member 703r may be displayed together with the operation of the effect movable body 224] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the game component is a decorative member [for example, a decorative member or the like provided in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.
The third protrusion is overlapped by the decorative member,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming component is a warp passage [for example, a warp device 242 shown in FIG.
The warp passage is a passage that guides game balls flowing down the game area of the game board from a warp entrance [e.g., the warp entrance 242a] to a warp exit [e.g., the warp exit 242b],
The third protrusion is overlapped by the warp passage [for example, as shown in FIG. 20, the fifth protrusion 703t5 is overlapped by the warp device 242, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the length from the base end to the tip end of the first protrusion is a first length [for example, 1.2 mm or the like],
The first length is longer than the length of the first interval,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the length from the base end to the tip of the first protrusion is a second length [for example, 1 mm or the like],
The second length and the first interval length are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “a certain mounting board to which the light emitting means is mounted [for example, the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 shown in FIG.
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are each provided with a light emitting means [for example, an LED element mounted on the first LED substrate 704cb1 or an LED mounted on the second LED substrate 704cb2] mounted on the certain mounting substrate. Illuminated panel that can emit light by being irradiated with light from
At least a part of the certain mounting board is disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 21, two transmission members 703f, When 703r is attached to the glass unit frame 704, the front end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, etc.],
No light emitting means attached to the certain mounting substrate is arranged in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. The members 703f and 703r are attached to the glass unit frame 704, and the leading end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched by the two transmitting members 703f and 703r. 703f, 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are illumination panels that can emit light by guiding light from light-emitting means attached to the certain mounting board from an end. [For example, the two transmission members 703f and 703r receive light from the LED elements provided on the first LED substrate 704cb1 and the second LED substrate 704cb2 from the ends, respectively. In the cut pattern formed on each back surface, a luminescent image is displayed by reflecting toward the player side, etc.],
The certain mounting substrate has both a first surface (for example, a surface (front surface) on the player side) and a second surface (for example, a surface (rear surface) opposite to the player side). [E.g., the second LED board 704cb2 shown in FIG. 21 has LED elements arranged on both sides of the board].
The first surface is a surface opposite to the second surface,
The first illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the first surface from an end,
The second illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the second surface from an end,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “a first reflection groove [for example, a cut pattern or the like formed on the back surface of the front transmission member 703f] for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player side. ] Is provided on the rear surface of the first illuminated panel,
A second reflection groove [for example, a cut pattern formed on the back surface of the rear transmission member 703r] for reflecting light from the light emitting unit attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player side is provided. Provided on the rear surface of the second illuminated panel,
The light from the light emitting means mounted on the certain mounting substrate is reflected by the first reflection groove to form a first pattern [for example, a light emitting image of a heart mark pattern 703HE shown in FIG. 23A]. Is displayed,
The light from the light emitting means mounted on the certain mounting substrate is reflected by the second reflection groove to form a second pattern [for example, a light emitting image of a smile mark pattern 703SM shown in FIG. 23B). Is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second protrusion is provided at a position that is invisible to the player [for example, as shown in FIG. 21, the rib 703 u is Etc., which are hidden and made difficult for the player to see]
The length of the outer circumference at the base end of the second protrusion is longer than the length of the outer circumference at the base end of the first protrusion,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the apparatus further includes a mounting member [for example, a glass frame unit 704 illustrated in FIG.
The attachment member is provided with a spacer [for example, a rib 704RB shown in FIG.
At least a part of the spacer is disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.] and the transmission members 703f and 703r.
A first screw hole is provided in the first illumination panel,
A second screw hole is provided in the second illumination panel,
A third screw hole is provided in the spacer,
When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole overlap,
By fixing a screw to the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are fixed to the mounting member,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
A fourth projection different from the first projection for avoiding contact between the plate surface of the first illumination panel and the plate surface of the second illumination panel [for example, a projection shown in FIG. 703t4 etc.] are provided on the first illuminated panel,
The fourth protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position that does not overlap with the reflection groove,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.];
A plurality of illumination panels [e.g., the front transmission member 703f and the rear transmission member 703r, etc.];
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a first illuminated panel [for example, a rear transparent member 703r or the like],
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a second illuminated panel [for example, a front-side transparent member 703f or the like],
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are arranged with a gap in the front-rear direction [for example, a 1 mm gap is provided between the front transmitting member 703f and the rear transmitting member 703r, etc. ],
A projection [for example, a projection 703t2 shown in FIG. 27] for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel is provided on the first illumination panel. [For example, as shown in FIG. 27, the protrusion 703t2 is formed on the plate surface of the rear transmission member 703r toward the front, etc.],
The first illumination panel is disposed behind the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, a rear transmission member 703r is disposed on the back side of the front transmission member 703f, etc.]. ,
The projection is provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the projection 703t2 is formed on the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r, etc. ],
The protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the second protrusion 703t2 is located at a position overlapping the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The certain position is a position that overlaps in the front-rear direction with an image displayed on the display means (for example, a decorative pattern or the like during the variable display or the stop display shown in FIG. 27),
At least a part of the outer shape of the first illumination panel and the outer shape of the second illumination panel are different [for example, as shown in FIG. 2 notch 700ct2, the outer shape is different from the rear transparent member 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the illuminated panel. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the illuminated panel can be realized.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the wrong installation of the two illumination panels in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, the interval between a plurality of illumination panels can be maintained by positively arranging the projections at positions overlapping with images such as decorative patterns and notice displays, and the illumination by the illumination panels can be maintained. In this case, the effect of the effect is not reduced, and at that time, the projection itself is not noticeable. Therefore, there is no possibility that interference fringes occur, and the effect of the effect can be suppressed in some cases.

  Here, the plurality of illumination panels may be configured by only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may further include an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. You may. In addition, the plurality of illumination panels may be configured with the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may not include one or both of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. There may be some.

  Further, the first illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means. Further, the first illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, the second illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means. In addition, the second illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, a projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided only on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may be provided in addition to the first illuminated panel. Further, a projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may not be provided on the first illuminated panel.

  Further, only the protrusion for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A part other than the protrusion for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may be provided on the first illuminated panel.

  Further, a protrusion only for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection may be provided on the first illuminated panel for a purpose other than to prevent the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel.

  Further, a projection for preventing only the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection may be provided on the first illuminated panel to prevent anything other than the plate surface and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel from coming into contact with each other.

  Also, only the first illumination panel may be arranged behind the second illumination panel, or a component other than the first illumination panel (such as an illumination panel) may be arranged behind the second illumination panel. Good. Further, the first illumination panel may be always arranged behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may not be arranged behind the second illumination panel.

  Further, the first illumination panel may be arranged only behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may be arranged other than behind the second illumination panel.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or the protrusion may be provided at a position other than a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel. Further, a projection may be provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or a projection may not be provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a position visible to the player in front view, or the protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position visible to the player in front view. In addition, the protrusion may be provided at a position visible to the player in front view, or may not be provided at a position visible to the player in front view.

  Further, at least a part of the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different. May be different from at least a part of the shape. Also, at least a part of the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different. May not be different at least in part.

  In addition, only a part of the outer shape of the first illumination panel and the outer shape of the second illumination panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illumination panel and the outer shape of the second illumination panel may be different. All of the shapes may be different. Further, at least a part of the shape other than the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the shape other than the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different.

Also, “first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel on the first illumination panel [for example, identification information 703rm in a mode in which an“ R ”character is displayed in a circle as shown in FIG. Etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may contribute to prevention of incorrect installation of the illumination panel.

  Here, only first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be given to the first illumination panel, or for identifying the first illumination panel to the first illumination panel. Identification information other than the first identification information may be provided. Further, the first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be always given to the first illumination panel, or the first illumination information for identifying the first illumination panel may be assigned to the first illumination panel. There may be cases where one piece of identification information is not provided.

  Further, the first identification information for identifying only the first illumination panel may be given to the first illumination panel, and the first illumination panel may also identify illumination panels other than the first illumination panel. May be added to the first identification information.

  Also, the first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be given only to the first illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may be identified other than the first illumination panel. May be given as the first identification information.

In addition, "the first identification information is attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is sometimes possible to prevent the identification information from being visually recognized by the player and the decoration effect from being impaired.

  Here, only the first identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from the front, or identification information other than the first identification information is also added to a position where the player is not visible from the front. May be. In addition, the first identification information may be always attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the first identification information may not be attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front. You may.

  In addition, the first identification information may be attached only to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the first identification information may be attached to a position other than the position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front. You may.

  In addition, the first identification information may be added to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front only, or the first identification information may be attached to a position where the player is not visible from other than the front. Good.

In addition, “the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel on the second illumination panel [for example, the identification information 703fm in a mode in which“ F ”is displayed in a circle as shown in FIG. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may contribute to prevention of incorrect installation of the illumination panel.

  Here, only the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be given to the second illumination panel, or the second illumination information for identifying the second illumination panel to the second illumination panel. Identification information other than the second identification information may be provided. Also, the first identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be always given to the second illumination panel, or the second identification information for identifying the first illumination panel to the second illumination panel. There may be cases where one piece of identification information is not provided.

  Further, the second identification information for identifying only the second illumination panel may be given to the second illumination panel, and the second illumination panel may also identify illumination panels other than the second illumination panel. Second identification information may be given.

  In addition, the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be given only to the second illumination panel, or the second illumination panel may be identified in addition to the second illumination panel. May be added.

Also, "the second identification information is attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is sometimes possible to prevent the identification information from being visually recognized by the player and the decoration effect from being impaired.

  Here, only the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from the front, or identification information other than the second identification information is also added to a position where the player is not visible from the front. May be. In addition, the second identification information may be always attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the second identification information may not be attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front. You may.

  In addition, the second identification information may be attached only to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the second identification information may be attached to a position other than the position where the player cannot visually recognize the device from the front. You may.

  In addition, the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from only the front, or the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from other than the front. Good.

In addition, "the certain position is a position formed on the second illumination panel and behind a reflection groove for displaying a pattern. [For example, as shown in FIG. 703t2 is located behind the lens cut for displaying the heart mark pattern 703HE on the front transparent member 703f],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the protrusion may become less noticeable due to the pattern, and a reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed while maintaining the function.

In addition, "the certain position is a position formed in the first illumination panel and located in front of a reflection groove for displaying a pattern. [For example, as shown in FIG. 703t2 is located in front of a lens cut for displaying a smile mark pattern 703SM on the rear transmission member 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the protrusion may become less noticeable due to the pattern, and a reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed while maintaining the function.

In addition, “an LED board including an LED for displaying a pattern on at least one of the first and second illumination panels [for example, a first LED board 704cbE1 shown in FIG. Second LED board 704cbE2, etc.]
At least a part of the LED board is located between the first and second illumination panels [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 27, two transmission members 703f and 703r are made of glass. When attached to the unit frame 704, the front end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched between the two transmitting members 703f and 703r, etc.],
The height [for example, 1 mm or 1.2 mm or the like] of the protrusion is equal to or greater than the thickness of the LED substrate [for example, 1 mm or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to emit light from the LED toward the illumination panel while maintaining the positional relationship between the LED and the illumination panel by holding the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel on the LED substrate. May be possible.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where contact between the illuminated panels (particularly, the outer peripheral position where the LED board enters) can be avoided even with the LED board.

  Here, at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may include only an LED board having an LED for displaying a pattern, or the first illuminated panel and the second A board other than the LED board provided with an LED for displaying a pattern on at least one of the two illumination panels may be provided. Also, at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided with an LED board having an LED for displaying a pattern on the illumination panel, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided. May not be provided with an LED board provided with an LED for displaying a pattern on at least one of the illumination panels.

  Further, an LED board having only an LED for displaying a pattern on at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided. An LED board may also be provided with an LED other than an LED for displaying a pattern on at least one of the illumination panels.

  Also, at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may include an LED board provided with an LED for displaying only a pattern, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel May be provided with an LED board provided with an LED for displaying other than a pattern on at least one of the illumination panels.

  Further, an LED board having an LED for displaying a pattern only on at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided. The illumination panel other than at least one illumination panel among the illumination panels may be provided with an LED substrate provided with an LED for displaying a pattern.

  It should be noted that an LED board provided with an LED for displaying a pattern only on one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided, or the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be provided. An LED board having an LED for displaying a pattern on both of the illumination panels may be provided.

  Further, at least a part of the LED board may be located only between the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the LED board may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. It may be located other than between. Further, at least a part of the LED board may be necessarily located between the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the LED board may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. It may not be located in between.

  Note that only a part of the LED board may be located between the first and second illuminated panels, or the entire LED board may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May be.

  Also, only the height of the protrusion may be equal to or greater than the thickness of the LED substrate, or the height other than the height of the protrusion may be equal to or greater than the thickness of the LED substrate. In addition, the height of the protrusion may be necessarily higher than the thickness of the LED substrate, or the height of the protrusion may not be higher than the thickness of the LED substrate. .

  Further, the height of the projection may be the same as the thickness of the LED substrate, or the height of the projection may be higher than the thickness of the LED substrate.

Also, a connector [for example, a first connector 704CE1 and a second connector 704CE2 shown in FIG. 27] for connecting a harness [eg, a harness HN shown in FIG. 27] to the LED board is provided on the LED board. ,
The LED board is a board provided with LEDs on both sides [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the first LED board 704cbE1 and the second LED board 704cbE2 each have LED elements arranged on both sides of the board, etc.] ,
When the LED provided on the first surface (for example, the surface (back surface) opposite to the player side) of the LED board emits light, a pattern is displayed on the first illumination panel [for example, FIG. As shown in, when the LED element 704LE2 attached to the back surface of the first LED board 704cbE1 or the LED element 704LE4 attached to the back face of the second LED board cbE2 emits light, a smile mark pattern 703SM is displayed on the rear transparent member 703r. Etc.],
When an LED provided on the back surface of the first surface of the LED substrate (hereinafter, referred to as a “second surface [for example, a surface (front surface) on the player side)]” emits light, the second illumination A pattern is displayed on the panel. [For example, as shown in FIG. 27, when the LED element 704LE1 attached to the surface of the first LED board 704cbE1 or the LED element 704LE3 attached to the surface of the second LED board cbE2 emits light, the transmission on the front side occurs. A heart mark pattern 703HE is displayed on the member 703f, etc.],
The connector is provided only on one of the first surface and the second surface. [For example, as shown in FIG. 27, in the first LED substrate 704cbE1 and the second LED substrate cbE2, only the rear surface is provided. The first connector CE1 and the second connector CE2 are provided, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the thickness in the front-rear direction may be suppressed to increase the degree of freedom in design.

  Here, a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided only on the LED board, or a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on a base other than the LED board. Further, a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be always provided on the LED board, or a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may not be provided on the LED board.

  Further, only the connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on the LED board, or anything other than the connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on the LED board.

  The harness may be electrically connected by directly connecting the LED board and the control board (for example, the first sub-board 160), or may be connected to the control board via a relay board.

  In addition, the LED substrate may be provided with only LEDs on both sides, or may be provided with something other than LEDs on both sides. In addition, the LED substrate may be provided with LEDs on both sides, or may not be provided with LEDs on both sides.

  Further, when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, only the pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, Other than the pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel. In addition, when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be always displayed on the first illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, The pattern may not be displayed on the first illumination panel.

  Further, when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed only on the first illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, The pattern may be displayed on an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel.

  When only the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel, or an LED other than the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate may be used. When light is emitted, a pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel.

  When the LED provided only on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel, or the LED provided on a surface other than the first surface of the LED substrate may be used. When light is emitted, a pattern may be displayed on the first illumination panel.

  When the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, only the pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, Other than the pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel. Also, when the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be necessarily displayed on the second illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, The pattern may not be displayed on the second illumination panel.

  Further, when the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed only on the second illumination panel, or when the LED provided on the first surface of the LED substrate emits light, The pattern may be displayed on an illumination panel other than the second illumination panel.

  When only the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel, or an LED other than the LED provided on the second surface of the LED substrate may be used. When light is emitted, a pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel.

  When the LED provided only on the second surface of the LED substrate emits light, a pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel, or the LED provided on the surface other than the second surface of the LED substrate may be used. When light is emitted, a pattern may be displayed on the second illumination panel.

In addition, the apparatus further includes a mounting member [for example, a glass frame unit 704 illustrated in FIG.
The attachment member is provided with a spacer [for example, a rib 704RB shown in FIG.
At least a part of the spacer is disposed in a gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.] and the transmission members 703f and 703r.
A first screw hole is provided in the first illumination panel,
A second screw hole is provided in the second illumination panel,
A third screw hole is provided in the spacer,
When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole overlap,
By fixing a screw to the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are fixed to the mounting member,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be securely attached to the attachment member while maintaining a space between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel.

  Here, the attachment member may attach only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may attach anything other than the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. Good. In addition, the attachment member may be one that always attaches the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may be one that does not always attach the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. Good.

  Further, only the spacer may be provided on the mounting member, or anything other than the spacer may be provided on the mounting member. Further, a spacer may be provided on the mounting member, or a spacer may not be provided on the mounting member.

  The spacer may be formed integrally with the mounting member, or may be formed separately from the mounting member.

  Further, at least a part of the spacer may be arranged only in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the spacer may be arranged in the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May be arranged in addition to the gap formed by. Further, at least a part of the spacer may be necessarily disposed in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the spacer may be arranged in the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May not be arranged in the gap formed by

  Further, only a part of the spacer may be arranged in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels, or the whole of the spacer is formed by the first and second illuminated panels. May be arranged in a gap.

  Further, only the first screw hole may be provided in the first illumination panel, or a screw hole other than the first screw hole may be provided in the first illumination panel. Further, the first screw hole may be always provided in the first illumination panel, or the first screw hole may not be provided in the first illumination panel.

  Further, the first screw hole may be provided only in the first illumination panel, or the first screw hole may be provided in an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel.

  Further, the second illumination panel may be provided with only the second screw hole, or the second illumination panel may be provided with a screw hole other than the second screw hole. Also, the second screw panel may be provided with the second screw hole without fail, or the second screw panel may not be provided with the second screw hole.

  The second screw hole may be provided only in the second illumination panel, or the second screw hole may be provided in an illumination panel other than the second illumination panel.

  Further, only the third screw hole may be provided in the spacer, or a screw hole other than the third screw hole may be provided in the spacer. The spacer may be provided with the third screw hole, or the spacer may not be provided with the third screw hole.

  Further, a third screw hole may be provided only in the spacer, or a third screw hole may be provided in addition to the spacer.

  Further, when the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, only the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap, or the first illumination hole may be attached to the attachment member. When the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached, screw holes other than the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap. When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may always overlap, or the first illumination hole may be attached to the attachment member. When the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may not overlap.

  Further, when only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap with each other, or the attachment member may include the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole. When something other than the one illumination panel and the second illumination panel is attached, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap. Further, when the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached only to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap, or other than the attachment member. When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole may overlap.

  Further, the first and second illumination panels may be fixed only to the mounting member by inserting screws into the first and second screw holes, the second and third screw holes, or a screw. May be inserted into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole to fix the first and second illuminated panels to members other than the mounting member. Further, the first and second illumination panels may be fixed to the mounting member by inserting screws into the first, second, and third screw holes, or may be screwed. May be inserted through the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, so that the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may not be fixed to the mounting member.

  Further, by inserting a screw into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member, May be inserted through the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, so that anything other than the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may be fixed to the mounting member.

  Further, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member only by inserting screws into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel may be fixed to the mounting member by inserting the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel other than inserting the first illumination hole into the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole.

In addition, “the protrusion is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the protrusion 703t2 is closer to the outer edge of the rear transmission member 703r. Is also formed inside, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the distance between the illumination panels in the inner portion, which tends to be narrow due to the warp of the illumination panel, can be maintained.

  Here, only the protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or anything other than the protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. You may. Further, the projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or the projection may not be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. You may.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or a protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. Good.

  Further, a projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the second illumination panel, or a projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. You may be.

In addition, "the length from the base end to the tip of the protrusion [e.g., 1. 2mm etc.] is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projections can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval.

In addition, "the length of the gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel [for example, 1 mm or the like] and the length from the base end to the tip of the projection [for example 1 mm or the like] Are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projection and the illuminated panel can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval. is there.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 193].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.];
A plurality of illumination panels [e.g., the front transmission member 703f and the rear transmission member 703r, etc.];
An LED board provided with a plurality of LEDs [for example, a first LED board 704cbE1 or a second LED board 704cbE2 shown in FIG. 27];
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a first illuminated panel [for example, a rear transparent member 703r or the like],
One of the plurality of illuminated panels is a second illuminated panel [for example, a front-side transparent member 703f or the like],
One LED of the plurality of LEDs is a first LED (for example, as shown in FIG. 27) for displaying a pattern (for example, a smile mark pattern 703SM shown in FIG. 27) on the first illumination panel. , An LED element 704LE2 attached to the back surface of the first LED board 704cbE1 and an LED element 704LE4 attached to the back face of the second LED board cbE2].
One of the plurality of LEDs is a second LED (for example, as shown in FIG. 27) for displaying a pattern (for example, a heart-shaped pattern 703HE shown in FIG. 27) on the second illumination panel. , An LED element 704LE1 attached to the surface of the first LED board 704cbE1 and an LED element 704LE3 attached to the surface of the second LED board cbE2].
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are arranged with a gap in the front-rear direction [for example, a 1 mm gap is provided between the front transmitting member 703f and the rear transmitting member 703r, etc. ],
A projection [for example, a projection 703t2 shown in FIG. 27] for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel is provided on the first illumination panel. [For example, as shown in FIG. 27, the protrusion 703t2 is formed on the plate surface of the rear transmission member 703r toward the front, etc.],
The first illumination panel is disposed behind the second illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, a rear transmission member 703r is disposed on the back side of the front transmission member 703f, etc.]. ,
The projection is provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the projection 703t2 is formed on the front surface of the rear transmission member 703r, etc. ],
The protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the second protrusion 703t2 is located at a position overlapping the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The certain position is a position that overlaps in the front-rear direction with an image displayed on the display means (for example, a decorative pattern or the like during the variable display or the stop display shown in FIG. 27),
The light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be different light emitting modes,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the illuminated panel. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the illuminated panel can be realized.

  Here, the LED board may be provided with only a plurality of LEDs, or may be provided with something other than the plurality of LEDs. Further, the LED substrate may be provided with a plurality of LEDs without exception, or may not be provided with a plurality of LEDs.

  In addition, the plurality of illumination panels may be configured with only the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may further include an illumination panel other than the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. Is also good. In addition, the plurality of illumination panels may be configured with the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, or may not include one or both of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. There may be some.

  Further, the first LED may be for displaying only a pattern on the first illumination panel, or may be for displaying something other than the pattern on the first illumination panel. . Further, the first LED may be one for always displaying the pattern on the first illumination panel, or may be one for not displaying the pattern on the first illumination panel.

  The second LED may be for displaying only a pattern on the second illumination panel, or may be for displaying something other than the pattern on the second illumination panel. . In addition, the second LED may be one for always displaying a pattern on the second illumination panel, or may be one for not displaying the pattern on the second illumination panel.

  Further, the first illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means. Further, the first illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the first illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, the second illumination panel may be provided only in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may be provided other than in front of the display means. In addition, the second illumination panel may be always provided in front of the display means, or the second illumination panel may not be provided in front of the display means.

  Further, a projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided only on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may be provided in addition to the first illuminated panel. Further, a projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may not be provided on the first illuminated panel.

  Further, only the protrusion for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A part other than the protrusion for preventing the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel may be provided on the first illuminated panel.

  Further, a protrusion only for preventing the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection may be provided on the first illuminated panel for a purpose other than to prevent the plate surface from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel.

  Further, a projection for preventing only the plate surface of the first illumination panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illumination panel may be provided on the first illumination panel, or the projection of the first illumination panel may be provided. A projection may be provided on the first illuminated panel to prevent anything other than the plate surface and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel from coming into contact with each other.

  Also, only the first illumination panel may be arranged behind the second illumination panel, or a component other than the first illumination panel (such as an illumination panel) may be arranged behind the second illumination panel. Good. Further, the first illumination panel may be always arranged behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may not be arranged behind the second illumination panel.

  Further, the first illumination panel may be arranged only behind the second illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may be arranged other than behind the second illumination panel.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or the protrusion may be provided at a position other than a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel. Further, a projection may be provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel, or a projection may not be provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a position visible to the player in front view, or the protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position visible to the player in front view. In addition, the protrusion may be provided at a position visible to the player in front view, or may not be provided at a position visible to the player in front view.

  Further, the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be only different light emitting modes, or the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED are different. There may be a case where the light emission mode is other than the mode. In addition, the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be necessarily different light emitting modes, or the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED are not different light emitting modes. There may be cases.

  Further, only the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be different light emitting modes, or the LED other than the light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be used. May be different light emission modes.

Also, "At least a part of the LED substrate is located between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel [for example, in the transmission section 700 shown in FIG. 27, two transmission members 703f, When 703r is attached to the glass unit frame 704, the leading end portions of the first LED board 704cb1 and the second LED board 704cb2 are sandwiched by the two transmission members 703f and 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to emit light from the LED toward the illumination panel while maintaining the positional relationship between the LED and the illumination panel by holding the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel on the LED substrate. May be possible.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where contact between the illuminated panels (particularly, the outer peripheral position where the LED board enters) can be avoided even with the LED board.

  Here, at least a part of the LED substrate may be located only between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel, or at least a part of the LED substrate may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. It may be located other than between. Further, at least a part of the LED board may be necessarily located between the first and second illuminated panels, or at least a part of the LED board may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. It may not be located in between.

  Note that only a part of the LED board may be located between the first and second illuminated panels, or the entire LED board may be located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel. May be.

Also, the first LED is provided on a first surface of the LED substrate [for example, a surface (rear surface) opposite to the player side),
The second LED is provided on a back surface of the first surface of the LED substrate (hereinafter, referred to as a “second surface [for example, a surface (front surface) or the like on the player side])”,
The LED substrate is a substrate in which the first surface is arranged to face the rear side of the game console,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the LED board is positioned between the two illuminated panels, so that the display of the pattern by the illuminated panel may be performed firmly without shifting the position of the LED.

  Here, only the first LED may be provided on the first surface of the LED substrate, or LEDs other than the first LED may be provided on the first surface of the LED substrate. In addition, the first LED may be provided on the first surface of the LED substrate, or the first LED may not be provided on the first surface of the LED substrate.

  Further, the first LED may be provided only on the first surface of the LED substrate, or the first LED may be provided on a surface other than the first surface of the LED substrate.

  Here, only the second LED may be provided on the second surface of the LED substrate, or LEDs other than the second LED may be provided on the second surface of the LED substrate. Further, the second LED may be provided on the second surface of the LED substrate, or the second LED may not be provided on the second surface of the LED substrate.

  In addition, the second LED may be provided only on the second surface of the LED substrate, or the second LED may be provided on a surface other than the second surface of the LED substrate.

  In addition, the LED substrate may be arranged such that only the first surface faces the rear side of the game console, or a surface other than the first surface is also positioned facing the rear side of the game console. It may be something. In addition, the LED substrate may be arranged such that the first surface always faces the back of the game console, or may not be arranged with the first surface facing the rear of the game console. It may be.

Also, a connector [for example, a first connector 704CE1 and a second connector 704CE2 shown in FIG. 27] for connecting a harness [eg, a harness HN shown in FIG. 27] to the LED board is provided on the LED board. ,
The connector is provided only on the first surface of the first surface and the second surface [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the first LED substrate 704cbE1 or the second LED substrate cbE2 has a rear surface. Only the first connector CE1 and the second connector CE2 are provided],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the thickness in the front-rear direction may be suppressed to increase the degree of freedom in design.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the wiring can be routed from the back side, so that the efficiency of the wiring work may be improved.

  Here, a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided only on the LED board, or a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on a base other than the LED board. Further, a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be always provided on the LED board, or a connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may not be provided on the LED board.

  Further, only the connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on the LED board, or anything other than the connector for connecting the harness to the LED board may be provided on the LED board.

  The harness may be electrically connected by directly connecting the LED board and the control board (for example, the first sub-board 160), or may be connected to the control board via a relay board.

In addition, "the certain position is a position formed on the second illumination panel and behind a reflection groove for displaying a pattern. [For example, as shown in FIG. 703t2 is located behind the lens cut for displaying the heart mark pattern 703HE on the front transparent member 703f],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the protrusion may become less noticeable due to the pattern, and a reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed while maintaining the function.

In addition, "the certain position is a position formed in the first illumination panel and located in front of a reflection groove for displaying a pattern. [For example, as shown in FIG. 703t2 is located in front of a lens cut for displaying a smile mark pattern 703SM on the rear transmission member 703r, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the protrusion may become less noticeable due to the pattern, and a reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed while maintaining the function.

In addition, “the outer shape of the first illumination panel and at least a part of the outer shape of the second illumination panel are different [for example, as shown in FIG. 700ct1 and the second notch 700ct2, and the outer shape is different from the rear transparent member 703r.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where two illumination panels can be prevented from being incorrectly assembled in the front-rear direction.

  Further, at least a part of the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different. May be different from at least a part of the shape. Also, at least a part of the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different. May not be different at least in part.

  In addition, only a part of the outer shape of the first illumination panel and the outer shape of the second illumination panel may be different, or the outer shape of the first illumination panel and the outer shape of the second illumination panel may be different. All of the shapes may be different. Further, at least a part of the shape other than the outer shape of the first illuminated panel and the shape other than the outer shape of the second illuminated panel may be different.

Also, “first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel on the first illumination panel [for example, identification information 703rm in a mode in which an“ R ”character is displayed in a circle as shown in FIG. Etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may contribute to prevention of incorrect installation of the illumination panel.

  Here, only first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be given to the first illumination panel, or for identifying the first illumination panel to the first illumination panel. Identification information other than the first identification information may be provided. Further, the first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be always given to the first illumination panel, or the first illumination information for identifying the first illumination panel may be assigned to the first illumination panel. There may be cases where one piece of identification information is not provided.

  Further, the first identification information for identifying only the first illumination panel may be given to the first illumination panel, and the first illumination panel may also identify illumination panels other than the first illumination panel. May be added to the first identification information.

  Also, the first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel may be given only to the first illumination panel, or the first illumination panel may be identified other than the first illumination panel. May be given as the first identification information.

In addition, "the first identification information is attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is sometimes possible to prevent the identification information from being visually recognized by the player and the decoration effect from being impaired.

  Here, only the first identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from the front, or identification information other than the first identification information is also added to a position where the player is not visible from the front. May be. In addition, the first identification information may be always attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the first identification information may not be attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front. You may.

  In addition, the first identification information may be attached only to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the first identification information may be attached to a position other than the position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front. You may.

  In addition, the first identification information may be added to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front only, or the first identification information may be attached to a position where the player is not visible from other than the front. Good.

In addition, “the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel on the second illumination panel [for example, the identification information 703fm in a mode in which“ F ”is displayed in a circle as shown in FIG. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may contribute to prevention of incorrect installation of the illumination panel.

  Here, only the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be given to the second illumination panel, or the second illumination information for identifying the second illumination panel to the second illumination panel. Identification information other than the second identification information may be provided. Also, the first identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be always given to the second illumination panel, or the second identification information for identifying the first illumination panel to the second illumination panel. There may be cases where one piece of identification information is not provided.

  Further, the second identification information for identifying only the second illumination panel may be given to the second illumination panel, and the second illumination panel may also identify illumination panels other than the second illumination panel. Second identification information may be given.

  In addition, the second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel may be given only to the second illumination panel, or the second illumination panel may be identified in addition to the second illumination panel. May be added.

Also, "the second identification information is attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is sometimes possible to prevent the identification information from being visually recognized by the player and the decoration effect from being impaired.

  Here, only the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from the front, or identification information other than the second identification information is also added to a position where the player is not visible from the front. May be. In addition, the second identification information may be always attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the second identification information may not be attached to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front. You may.

  In addition, the second identification information may be attached only to a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the front, or the second identification information may be attached to a position other than the position where the player cannot visually recognize the device from the front. You may.

  In addition, the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from only the front, or the second identification information may be added to a position where the player is not visible from other than the front. Good.

In addition, “the protrusion is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the protrusion 703t2 is closer to the outer edge of the rear transmission member 703r. Is also formed inside, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the distance between the illumination panels in the inner portion, which tends to be narrow due to the warp of the illumination panel, can be maintained.

  Here, only the protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or anything other than the protrusion may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. You may. Further, the projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or the projection may not be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. You may.

  Further, the protrusion may be provided only at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel, or a protrusion may be provided at a position other than the position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel. Good.

  Further, a projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the second illumination panel, or a projection may be provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel. You may be.

In addition, "the length from the base end to the tip of the protrusion [e.g., 1. 2mm etc.] is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projections can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval.

In addition, “the length of the gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel [eg, 1.2 mm or the like] and the length from the base end to the tip end of the projection [eg, 1 mm Etc.] are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel warp in a direction approaching each other, the projection and the illuminated panel can be reliably brought into contact with each other to maintain an appropriate interval. is there.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 193].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 229, other game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 192 to 229 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 192 to 229, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 229, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 192 to 229, some or all of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 to 191 can be applied in combination, and in the embodiment shown in FIGS. The fact that some or all of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 192 to 229 can be combined and applied is a technical matter that can be derived by a person skilled in the art by integrating all descriptions in this specification and the like. Obviously, for example, in the setting suggestion effect described later, it is needless to say that the effect using the transmission portion shown in FIGS. 14 to 30 or the effect of the transmission portion in the effect unique to the simultaneous fluctuation machine can be performed. Absent.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk of a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is also provided with a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is opened by pressing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage tray for detecting that the door with a ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 193) by the operation of the player, and a production button 136 that are built-in. A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 192 is provided with a lower plate full-state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 190 is provided.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 192, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 194.

  FIG. 193 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 192 viewed from the back side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when connected to a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 196). The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 196) for controlling the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 196) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 196) that performs the control processing related to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs the control processing related to the payout of the game ball ( A pay-out board case 172 for storing a pay-out board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 196) that performs a control process related to launching a ball, and a power control section 660 that supplies power to various electric game machines (see FIG. 196). A power supply housing a power supply board 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, a setting change mode in which any of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities can be set. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the configuration may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

  The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached so as to be visible to a store clerk. As shown in FIG. 203 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit seven-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit seven-segment LED on the right as a module. , The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is constituted by, for example, a red single-color LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided, for example, on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is provided on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch substrate 198 will be described later.

  FIG. 194 (a) is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction), and the left hand and the right hand may be referred to as left and right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction), and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 194, in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes called the front-back direction), the near side may be called front or front, and the back side may be called back or back.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The mounting structure of the game board 200 with respect to the main body 104 can adopt various structures. For example, the front view left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in front view (on the hinge portion 112 side). A structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 in a front view is pressed against the main body 104 and set by rotating the game board 200 about the center of rotation can be adopted. With such a structure, workability can be improved. There are cases.

  The game board 200 is a unit in which various components are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, a resin, and its surface (front) forms a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which the character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. At the lower right of the main body 201, a vibration sensor SR3 is provided. When the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, an error process (for example, notification by an image or sound, a game stop that disables the continuation of the game, and the like) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, an area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding a shot game ball.

  An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, a region inside the region through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game region 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which a game ball does not pass due to the presence of an effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of the effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124. As shown in FIG. 194 (b), the main control lamp board 254 has a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol. Display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, first special symbol holding lamp 218, second special symbol holding lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp RK, and electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as “Public symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “Special symbol”.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in this embodiment, are configured by two LEDs.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the general figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in the present embodiment, the first special figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

  The high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that a high-probability state is set. The electric support in-progress lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and that the electric tulip blade member 231a described later is in the electric support state in which it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in the big hitting game state, the probable change state, and the power support state, and that the player can benefit from the right-handed state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game relating to the jackpot when the jackpot has been hit.

  A predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226a, a general figure starting port 228, first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, and a big hit generating gate 252 are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a variable winning device 2340 is provided at a lower right portion of the game area 124.

  One or more general winning openings 226a are provided at appropriate places in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball and determines that the general winning opening 226a has been won, and drives the payout device 152 to award a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls. The ball is discharged to the upper plate 126. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning holes are provided, a ball may be detected by a different ball detection sensor, or each of the plurality of general winning holes may be provided. The ball paths for guiding the game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. In the case where a plurality of general winning ports are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball paths for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, each of them may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side, but a predetermined number (for example, one) of prizes is obtained when the ball is entered. In addition to paying out the ball, the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, two first special figure starting ports 230 and 231 are arranged vertically below the center of the game board 200. In the following description, for convenience, the first special figure starting port 230 provided above is referred to as “first special figure starting port (upper) 230”, and the first special figure starting port 231 provided below is referred to as “first special figure starting port 230”. It may be referred to as “first special figure starting port (lower) 231”. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are set as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 when right-handed. ing. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 perform the variable display of the other special figure, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure (such as this). A pachinko machine with a specific specification is sometimes called a "simultaneous fluctuation machine".)

  The first special figure starting port (lower) 231 is configured by an electric tulip (electric chewing), is disposed below the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and includes a blade member 231a that can be opened and closed right and left. When the wing member 231a is closed, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the prize-changing game is won and the tsutsugi display device 210 hits and stops displaying the symbol, the wing member 231a is moved for a predetermined time interval. It opens and closes in the number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are set as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is set as a prize ball. And the first special figure display device 212 starts the special figure changing game. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the general-purpose starting port 228 (by a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter a game ball into the general-purpose starting port 228 when left-handed. . Therefore, during left-handed play, there is no principle of winning the normal-floating game, and therefore, there is no principle that the blade member 231a opens and closes. On the other hand, when the player hits right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the general-purpose starting port 228, the blade member 231a may be opened and closed by winning the general-purpose variable game. That is, there is almost no possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 during the left-handing, but there is a possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 during the right-handing. It can be said that there is.

  Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a view for explaining the configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 195, the decoration member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

  The variable winning device 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted at a predetermined interval to the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. I have.

  The mounting base 2340a is provided with a rectangular opening substantially at the center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover this opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e standing upright from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decorative member 2340b has a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 in which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the rolling region SP1 is closed by a front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The first rolling area SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the opening. The shutter member 2351a is inclined slightly downward and forward from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 196). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state in which the shutter member 2351a has advanced forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the first rolling region SP1 is closed, and the first ball of the game ball is closed. When entry into the rolling area SP1 is prevented, and when it is in a state of retreating backward (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Ingress is allowed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i project rearward at substantially equal intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is increased. In the present embodiment, with this configuration, a plurality of game balls mainly staying on the shutter member 2351a by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds) can be simultaneously changed by the second variable. In some cases, it is possible to make the ball enter the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the shutter member 2351a.

  At a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is disposed, and enters the first rolling area SP1. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, the CPU 304 detects the winning in the second variable winning opening 235a and determines the number based on the winning (for example, 15 pieces). ) Is performed for paying out the prize balls. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of award balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, various game characteristics can be provided. May be able to.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is provided in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The ejection ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, for example, the number of game balls passed by the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are used to enter / exit the second variable winning opening 235a of the game ball. By monitoring outs, there are cases where illegal winnings can be monitored. An illegal act includes, for example, an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a rule (a so-called deca ball).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. In this case, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls, and the second special figure display device 214 starts a special figure changing game. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 when the player hits left due to the arrangement of the second special figure starting port 232, In such a case, it is possible to enter the ball with high frequency due to the arrangement of the surrounding nails. In addition. The second special figure starting port 232 may be provided downstream of the second variable winning port 235a.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction converting members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails are provided, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting port is provided. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win even to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod and The shot hammer passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by a hitting ball direction conversion member 236, a game nail, or the like, and a winning opening (a general winning opening 226a, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second winning opening 234a). The player wins the variable winning prize port 235a) or the starting port (the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 and the second special figure starting port 232). The player reaches the OUT port 240 without winning the prize, or only passing through the ordinary start port 228. In the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed on the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball reception port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including game balls ejected from the out port 240 and game balls that have won various winning ports) are received by the ejection ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

  The effect device 2 is arranged above the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged below the game region 124, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left and right sides, respectively. An effect device 5 described below is arranged behind each effect device 4. In the case of the present embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a are both closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter in the closed state. It suffices if it is difficult for game balls to enter.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in the program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two built-in counters). It is equipped with. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a bottom plate full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302 and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 and the 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, General Figure Hold Lamp 216, Special Figure 1 Hold Lamp 218, Special Figure 2 Hold Lamp 220, High Accuracy Medium Lamp RK, Electric Support Medium Lamp RD, Right-Handed Lamp RM, Round Display A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the pump RR and the like, a driving means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 231a of a first special figure starting port (lower) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving a door member 2341a of a first variable winning opening 234a and a shutter member 2351a of a second variable winning opening 235a as a special electric accessory is connected. are doing. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 or the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the sensor circuit 322 detects that the ball has been detected. Is output to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 231 at that timing, and stores the latched value corresponding to the special figure 1 Stored in a built-in counter value storage register. Similarly, when receiving a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number value generating circuit 318 also calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 via an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the game machine.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, a configuration in which the ROM 406 is provided in the basic circuit 402 may be employed. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect devices 2 to 5, etc., and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the rendering devices 2 to 5 and the like, and a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons constituting the rendering button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative design display device 208. 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, or the like) capable of maintaining a storage state even when the power is turned off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying the display regarding the big hit history can be held even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. Note that a RAM in which stored information is volatilized when the power is turned off may be used.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental game. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 receives prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When the sensor 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge unit Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 197 (a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is performed on condition that the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 or the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure variation game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 fluctuation display "(special figure fluctuation game). When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 197 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 197 (a) shows three types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure C". In FIG. 197 (a), a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” and “special symbol B”) are prepared as the special symbol stop symbol mode. The “special figure A” is a normal round winning symbol of six rounds (R). When the “special figure A” is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big hit gaming state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds. After the game is over, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. Also, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state where it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In the present embodiment, two types of big hit symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more big hit symbols may be prepared. In addition, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds may be prepared. Also, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether to make a big hit or a certain-variable big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. In the present embodiment, as described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure fluctuations between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The time is configured to be significantly different. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game in the normal state than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-floating fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it always falls off) in the general low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the general high-probability state (electric support state). ), It is increased to 100/100 (that is, always hit). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose fluctuating game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal-figure variation). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, the opening time of the blade member 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 in one opening is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (extending the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Furthermore, the blade members 231a are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of opening of the electric chew increases). For example, the blade member 231a that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and restarts for 2 seconds). Open). The probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 increases due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because a game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of prize balls in a big hit game, and the first variable prize port 234a or the second variable prize port 235a (these variable prize ports may be called "attackers"). This is because a decrease in the winning of the game ball to the player may cause a disadvantage to the player. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure change, the general figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either of the extension of the electric-chu opening period or the increase of the number of electric-chu opening times is performed with an increased probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231, the electric support state (time saving state) is set. Is also good. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 50 times, and the non-power Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support ("Tokuzu B") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state after the big hit game ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure C" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 197 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 197 (b), eight types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure h” are shown, and five kinds of special figures are big hit symbols (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 6R normal big hit design, and when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. Thereafter, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. “Tokuzu b” is a 6R probable big hit symbol, and when “Tokuzu b” is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state where it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. Then, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, the “special figure c” is a 3R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a real 1R big hit that can be expected to obtain a payout in one of the three rounds. The second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The “special figure d” is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit in which it is possible to expect to obtain a payout in all of the six rounds. The state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The “special figure e” is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit in which it is possible to expect to obtain a payout in all of the ten rounds. The state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols (“special figure f” and “special figure g”) are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. In the case of a small hit in the "special figure f", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens once for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol stops, and in the case of a small hit in the "special figure g". After the symbol stops, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a performs opening for 0.06 seconds 12 times. That is, when the small hit is made in the "special figure g", a larger number of game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a more easily than in the case where the small hit is made in the "special figure f". You can get the ball. Note that the opening time and the number of times of opening of the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Also, the small hit symbol may be one type. In the small hitting game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is obtained, a small value is obtained. The hit game ends, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous fluctuating machine, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the game shifts to the small hit game, a situation in which the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner may occur. . In this case, when the small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variable display of the special figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 2 is changed to the big hit game with a big hit, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable state, and when the special figure 2 is changed to the big hit with the big hit, the special figure 1 is changed and displayed. However, in this case, if a big hit occurs in one special map, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the error is displayed It will be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure h" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The ball has won the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230, the special figure 1 starting port (lower) or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 or the special figure 1 starting port ( Under the condition that the first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered in the lower part) or that the second starting port sensor has detected that a ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232, the decoration is performed. In each of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" →. In some cases, “decorative display of decorative symbols” that switches the display in the order of “9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, separately from the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the power support state in which the special figure 1 mainly performs the variable display, the decorative pattern is changed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probable change state in which the variable display is performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variable display is performed only on the fourth symbol or the second special figure display device 214 described later. In the probable change state, the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 is performed, but the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the fluctuating display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special figure display device 212.

  A mode other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R certain variable big hit in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the second special figure display device 214 notifies the 10R certain variable big hit in the certain variable state. In the case of notifying the big hit or the small hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three or more decorative patterns having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are displayed. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the 6R probable variable hit ("special figure B") is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the 10R probable variable hit (" In the case of confirming that it is a special figure e)), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying the lost symbol of “special figure C” or “special figure h”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display from the start of the “decorative symbol display” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as “decorative symbol variable display”). ). The variation display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

  FIG. 197 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. In this embodiment, there are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Primary symbol B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has passed through the general figure starting port 228, the general figure display device 210 alternately lights up and down two LEDs. "Variation display" (normal figure variation game). Then, after the elapse of the fluctuation time, one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 197 (d), a white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and a black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of the ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as the “floating display of the ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 196 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 196 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, a special figure design decision random number, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information in a set in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 196 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and WDT 314 , And setting of initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the voltage value of the power Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). In ()), the processing proceeds to the processing after step S113 to execute the initialization processing.

  If it is not determined to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is that the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that an operation has been performed). When the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the setting has been made (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

  When the setting change processing is executed, the 7-seg corresponding to the setting monitor in the accessory ratio / setting display 196 indicates “1” and flashes, indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed down, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed down while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates “6”. Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of the settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected. The setting is changed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is determined. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. Thereafter, after the setting is determined, the set value can be displayed again on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196. However, for example, the set value may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is made in six steps from setting 1 to 6, but the setting may be other than the six step setting, or the setting may not be changed. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is “1”. However, the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Is also good.

  If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side ( (Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

  In step S119, an initialization process is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example, The checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in all the areas (1) to the register of 1-byte configuration whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether or not the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) Executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In the initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in a transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command described later, in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 , To the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started at a predetermined cycle.

  On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in a RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 193. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 196 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (about once every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (set) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (do not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed about once every about 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 196 including various ball detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor presence / absence of the detection signals, and various data are stored in the RAM 308. It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. In the case of using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area immediately before the second detection provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the ball detection sensors, and this information is read out in the above-described previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals of the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 196 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) Is determined, the general winning opening 226a, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and the first special figure starting port ( Bottom) 231 and it is determined that a ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, or has passed the general figure starting port 228 or the big hit generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228, 252. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port (upper) sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 matches the above winning determination pattern information. Determines that there is a prize in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, that is, that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent prize in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is determined. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the following processing for winning the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is performed. Branch to subsequent processing without performing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated. Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99 is obtained, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. Is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various kinds of timers, including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a timer for measuring a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end production period, and the like. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to a winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 196 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicating that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state updating process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs included in the ordinary symbol display device 210 are alternately blinked. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes in addition to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 197 (d)) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 197 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, in the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The setting area is set to the normal operation state, and the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 231a of the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 is set to the blade member 231a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). Is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 231a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 231a, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure variable game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is ON, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating. In the ordinary figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 are not performed (the general figure state is not operating) and the general figure holding is held. When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general figure variable game is determined to be a win or a non-prize by random number lottery based on the random number random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made to determine whether a hit is made, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to obtain a general-purpose timer random value from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random number value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and preliminarily determines the stop symbol and the variation time before the hit / fail determination processing, and The result (prefetch result of special figure) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308.

  Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, and first, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state updating process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is used. ON / OFF drive control for repeating ON / OFF of the LED is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of times saved in the number of times saved storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a 3R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in a special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R big hit flag is on, and the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the general figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure e shown in FIG. 197 (b), the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the general figure probability variation flag is off. In this case, either the special map b or the special map d, the 6R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and if the general figure probability change flag is on, the special figure a and the 3R big hit flag are on. When the figure probability variation flag is also on, the ordinary figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure c, when the small hit flag is on, either the special figure f or the special figure g, or when the loss flag is on, Special figure h Perform LED turning on and off drive control of constituting a special symbol 2 display device 214 performs setting indicating that it is a special symbol 2 stop display of the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the 10R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure e), the 6R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure b, the special figure d), the 3R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure c), 6R Normally, any one of a big hit symbol (special symbol a), a small hit symbol (special symbol f, special symbol g), and a lost symbol (special symbol h) is confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuating machine, the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the fluctuating display of the special figure 2, but the fluctuating display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 and the missing symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be done. In addition, when the special figure 1 is displayed during the variable display of the special figure 2 and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. At the timing of the small hit symbol display, the progress of the variable display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. As a result, from the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol in the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time savings flag is on, the time savings flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the existence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generating gate 252. In the present embodiment, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided until the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252 after the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 until a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop hit is displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit may disappear.

  When the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update processing, the special figure 2 operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. Is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the game is displayed. In the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a) the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the second variable winning opening). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and a door opening time management provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the timer for use. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed in a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). A signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (10 rounds, 6 rounds, or 3 rounds in the illustrated embodiment) and starts at the end time, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of an effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect waiting period. In the present embodiment, if the general-figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 50 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. The time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special map probability change flag is set to ON, the probability change flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Further, the opening time of one opening of the pair of blade members 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is more likely to be longer in the high probability state of the normal figure than in the low probability state of the general figure (electric tube spread). . In addition, the pair of blade members 231a is more likely to open in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234a (second variable winning port 235a) during the jackpot game until the game balls enter the ball. FIG. 1 There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port (lower) 231 and the number of game balls (number of balls) that can be obtained during a big hit increases, thereby increasing gambling. Is to solve this. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is “1”, the number of balls to be played during the big hit game does not substantially increase. The time reduction flag may be kept on even during the game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 1.

  For example, in the special figure 1 state update process during the special figure 1 change display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is used. Lighting / light-off drive control for repeating the light-on and light-off of the LED is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of times saved in the number of times saved storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 6R big hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1-related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 6R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure B, when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and when the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A, When the losing flag is on, the driving of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled so as to be in the respective modes of the special figure C, and the special figure 1 stop display is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that indicate something. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure A), the 6R positive variable big hit symbol (special figure B), and the lost symbol (special figure C). Display. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 1, but the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 2 at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 1 and the unsuccessful symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time savings flag is on, the time savings flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generating gate 252. In the present embodiment, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 after the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 until a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop hit is displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit may disappear.

  When the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined prize production period ends (when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a (until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the first variable winning port 234a). ), A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 is provided. The information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area of the timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 1 state updating process that is repeated a predetermined number of times (six rounds in the present embodiment) for opening and closing the door member and starts at a timing when the door member ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol In order to set to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the display device 208 is displayed, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 indicates the effect standby period. Set information. In the present embodiment, if the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 50 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special map probability change flag is set to ON, the probability change flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is on, the special figure 1 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state updating process when the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the variable game of the special figure 2 is not performed, the state of the special figure 2 is inactive, and neither the special hit 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the big hit game, and the special game 2 is held. The first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are executed with the start condition that the number of the special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. . In the special drawing 1 related lottery process, the floating game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, and neither the special hit 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the big hit game, and the special game is held. The first special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area are executed with the start condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. . That is, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether the special figure 2 is in the variable game or not, and the special figure 2 indicates that the special figure 1 is in the variable game. Regardless of whether or not there is, it is configured to be able to start a variable game (simultaneous variable machine).

  The notification of the result of the judgment of the special figure fluctuating game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probable change state, the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is achieved. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower), and the normal game state and In the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is performed, and the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result. However, in the case where the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probable change state is a big hit, the special figure 2 starting is started in parallel with the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 or once. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is executed. In some cases. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state becomes a big hit, the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 and starting the special figure 2 Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the mouth 232 may be executed.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Is determined using the hit / fail judgment table stored in (1) to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the obtained special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main controller 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is similarly performed. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure state update processing and the special figure related lottery processing are performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 so that a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process and the floating game relating to the holding of the other special map may not be performed according to the state of one special map. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed, in the normal game state and the time saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed with respect to the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probable change state, the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the illustrated embodiment, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure change start command, special figure change stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2 A command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, which is a command for specifying whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is to be stopped and displayed first), a special figure start command, a special figure end command, a special winning opening opening Information that can specify the type of command, such as a command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command, and a setting command. , Bit 0 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is the special figure change start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the embodiment, when the special symbol change start command is set, stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the value includes various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, and loss flags, and in the case of the big hit round number specifying command, the number of big hit rounds is included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230, presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231, and special figure 2 start. The information includes presence / absence of winning in the mouth 232, presence / absence of winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the pre-read result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of pre-reads stored in the pre-read number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the pre-read result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, the information includes setting information.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data is selected by the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, and outlier flags stored in the RAM 308, and the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing. Information indicating the number of the timer, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game which is held, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various large hit flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. Information indicating the number of 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. Information indicating the number of 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the command information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, and advance notice information (prior advance notice information, false information) Advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In the timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  Next, it is used in the general figure related lottery processing (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 200 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the universal figure approval / disapproval determination table, and FIG. 200 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1.2 / acceptance determination table. FIG. 200 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table.

  The universal figure correct / non-permissible determination table shown in FIG. 200 (a) is a general figure correct / non-permissive determination table used at the time of general figure correct / non-permissible determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), when this pass / fail judgment table is used, there is no hit value in the ordinary low probability state, that is, the hit probability is 0%, and the ordinary probability is 0%. In the high probability state, the range that the random number can take is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In the low probability state (when the working hours are not working), a constant probability (for example, 1%) may be used. (For example, 1%).

  The special figure 1/2 hit / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 200 (b) is a table which is referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The record to be referred to is selected depending on whether the state is the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately / 199) as a result of the success / failure determination of the jackpot lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 2, the big hit is selected with the probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately / 192) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately / 180) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special maps 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability (about 1/175) of 375/65536 as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately / 174) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability (about 1/146) of 451/65536 as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately / 145) as a result of the success / failure determination of the jackpot lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately / 93) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special maps 1 and 2.

  Also, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6 and regardless of whether the state is the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1. The small hit is selected with a probability (approximately 1/10) of 6580/65536 as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in Toku-zu. Note that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1. Further, the probability of small hit may be made different for each setting.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the big hit probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the big hit probability in the special figure low probability state, but is regarded as almost the same. Is set to Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability differs depending on the setting. The bigger the setting is, the easier the big hit becomes, and the lower the setting is, the harder the big hit becomes. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the harder it is for a big hit to occur. However, when the state shifts to the probable change state, the number of occurrences of the small hit tends to be larger than that for the high setting, so that different game characteristics may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is set to be almost the same between the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any setting. Can be In the present embodiment, as the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state, for example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected. Accordingly, in the special figure high probability state, as described above, when the player hits right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232. A large number of operations can be performed, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is increased. In the present embodiment, in the special figure high probability state, it can be said that the frequency of occurrence of small hits is increased, and thus it may be referred to as “small hit rush”. Further, in the state where the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is four (full), the one time of the special figure 1 is longer than the time required to complete the symbol change display of all the special figures 2. Since the time required to complete the symbol variation display is longer, a big hit is hardly generated in the special figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, a fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, although the frequency of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability do not change when right-handed, the time until the result of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every ten minutes, even if the player hits right, it is substantially disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special figure low probability state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 580 seconds for the outlier and the small hit, but the fluctuation time for the big hit is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

  FIG. 200 (c) shows an example of the special figure determination distribution table. As described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol aspect of the special figure (see FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b)) is defined for each of the win / fail determination results.

  First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit determination is a big hit, one of “special figure A” and “special figure B” is selected. As described above, the "special figure A" is a 6R ordinary big hit with the first variable winning opening 234a opened, and the "special figure B" is a 6R certain variable big hit with the first variable winning opening 243a opened. Each selection rate is １ ／ regardless of the setting.

  Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit determination is a big hit, any one of “special figure a” to “special figure e” is selected. As described above, “special figure a” is a 6R ordinary big hit that the first variable winning opening 234a opens, “special figure b” is a 6R certain variable big hit that the first variable winning opening 234a opens, The special figure c is a 3R probability variable jackpot that the second variable winning opening 235a opens (2R out of 3Rs is a substantial 1R probability variable winning because the second variable winning port 235a opens short). , The second variable winning opening 235a is a 6R probability variable hit, and the "special figure e" is a 10R probability variable hit, the second variable winning opening 235a is opening. Regardless of the setting, the selection rates are 50/100 for “special figure a”, 2/100 for “special figure b”, 20/100 for “special figure c”, and 3/100 for “special figure d”. The “special figure e” is 25/100.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 hit determination is a small hit, one of “special figure f” and “special figure g” is selected. As described above, the "special figure f" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened once, and the "special figure g" is a second variable winning opening 235a in which the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened up to 12 times. It is a small hit that repeats. In the small hit, one opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is as short as 0.06 seconds, but as described above, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a stays. Since the structure is easy, a plurality of game balls can be entered by opening and closing the shutter member 2351a once. Therefore, in the special figure probable state, there is a case where the number of payouts between the big hits can be increased by generating many small hits (particularly, small hits in the “special figure g”).

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the big hit in the “special figure c” is substantially a 1R probability variable big hit, when the big hit in the “special figure c” occurs, the player is made to think that the small hit has occurred. May be able to.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 201A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S301 in FIG. 201A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Is performed.

  In step S313 following step S311, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, when the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the various lamps 442 and 452, the command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. I do.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S315, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 201B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 201C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 following step S341, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S319), and other update processing of random number values for effect And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 202A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S401 in FIG. 202A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S403 subsequent to step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative design display device 208) corresponding to the command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the VDP 516, the command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 202 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-controller main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 subsequent to step S441, other processing such as updating the effect random number value is performed.

  FIG. 202D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S455, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 determines the information of the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S457 subsequent to step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 203 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 203 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

  As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 includes the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor. YH), and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

  Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the number of game balls to be acquired (that is, safe balls) due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated (that is, the first during the big hit game). It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning. The ratio may be a ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls to be acquired (that is, safe balls) due to the operation of the accessory (that is, the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the first variable winning port 234 a, and the second variable winning port 234 a). 2) The number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning opening 235a and winning. The first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, and the second special figure starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 226a.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous character ratio, the two-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the continuous character ratio blinks and is displayed. Outputs a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output outside the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It should be noted that the output may be from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test of the gaming machine may be smoothly performed.

  Also, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, a two-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the accessory ratio blinks, and then the security signal (YH ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output outside the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but, for example, the emission color is changed. Is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 203B, eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and can read the position of each dip switch when the power is turned on, and change the appearance probability of the effect. For example, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion and the advance notice The appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204, an example of the variable display of the special figures 1 and 2 in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above will be described. Here, FIG. 204 (a) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 has a big hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation, and FIG. It is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation when special figure 2 is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which a big hit symbol is finally displayed. After that, at the timing of t11, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and reaches the timing of t12, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is changed. Be started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. Thereafter, when the symbol fluctuating time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t13 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol. Also at this time, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t14 is reached, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 that has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 2 (for example, 227 seconds) elapses and becomes the timing of t15, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, while the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is the remaining symbol change. Regardless of the time, the process ends when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the result of the hit determination is discarded, and the stop is displayed with the missing symbol. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t16 is reached, the big hit game is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t17 after the big hit game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended are respectively digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started at the same time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variation machine, when the big hit symbol is displayed in the variation display of one special figure, the result of the right / wrong determination of the other special figure is discarded, and the missing symbol is displayed. It has become so. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 on hold when a big hit in the special figure 2 includes the symbol variation display of the big hit, During the big hit game or in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which is started after the big hit game is ended, a big hit notice may be given.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 204 (b), the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is finally displayed. After that, at the timing of t21, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol, but the symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 2. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t22 is reached, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is changed Be started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol change time (for example, 580 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t23 comes, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily stopped at this timing. Thereafter, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t24 is reached, the small hit game is started. Actually, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses and the game shifts to the small hitting game state, the game shifts to the small hitting game through the standby state of the small hit start time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Strictly, after the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is set at the timing of t23, the timer decrement of the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is started in the next main controller timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, at the timing of t25 after the small hit game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. In practice, when the small hitting game ends, the small hitting game state ends after a standby state for a small hit end wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol variation time is resumed. Thereafter, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t26 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol. In the present embodiment, since the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game due to the occurrence of the small hit of the special figure 2, from the start to the end of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 The time actually taken is longer than the predetermined symbol fluctuation time (5 seconds), and more specifically, the small hitting game related to the small hitting ends after the small hitting occurs in the special figure 2. The time taken (interruption period) is the added time. That is, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 should have reached at the timing of t26 ', but the small hit has occurred. As a result, the result of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is postponed until the timing of t26. The symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the timing of t26, and thereafter, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of the t27 is reached, the symbol variation display is suspended. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, the game is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol in the special figure 2, and after the symbol display time elapses, the game shifts to the small hit game state, and a predetermined small hit start wait time has elapsed since the small hit game state started. The small hitting game is started after elapse of the small hitting game, and when the small hitting end wait time elapses after the small hitting game is over, the small hitting game state is configured to end. Either one of the small hit end wait times may not be provided, or both may not be provided.

  In this manner, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed in the variable display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the progress of the symbol variable display of the other special figure is temporarily stopped, and the small hit When the game ends, the progress resumes.

  In the present embodiment, an example of operating in the manner described above has been introduced. For example, a hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) stop> stop display weight (for example, 0.5 seconds)> hit (big hit, small hit) Hit) start weight (for example, 0.1 second for a small hit, several tens of seconds for a big hit (however, it may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or not). , Small hit) end weight (for example, 0.1 second for small hit, tens of seconds for big hit (however, it may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or not).) The operation may be performed. Here, "~ start weight" and "~ end weight" may be expressed as "~ interval", and a hit start effect and a hit end effect are performed in this time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, the progress of the special figure 1 variable display is interrupted. If the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the display of the special figure 1 during the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1, the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1 is not interrupted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205, in each of the symbol display devices (the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 205 (a) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation of each symbol display device in the normal game state, and FIG. 205 (b) shows each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the operation in.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (a), the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, at the timing of t41, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-design, but in the special figure 1, the design variation display is continuously performed, and the decoration design display device 208 also continues the variation display of the decoration design. Is displayed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t42 is reached, one of the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Be started. In the special figure 1, the symbol variation display is continuously performed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 continues to display the variation of the decoration symbol accordingly. Thereafter, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, and then, at the timing of t43, the special symbol 1 loses the symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are displayed by the swing fluctuation. At the timing of t44 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 has passed, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 that has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols that are out, and then at the timing of t45. In addition, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the lost decorative symbols displayed by the swing fluctuation. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t46 is reached, one of the reserved symbol change displays of the special figure 1 is consumed and the symbol change of the special figure 1 is exhausted. At the same time as the display is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1, and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Although the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, the variable display of the decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2 may be performed. For example, the variable display of the minimal pattern is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the fourth symbol whether or not the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being executed.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 205 (b), the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, and then, at the timing of t51, the special symbol 1 loses the symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are displayed with the swing fluctuation. In the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and reaches the timing of t52, one symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, when the symbol change time of the special figure 2 (for example, 580 seconds) elapses and the timing of t53 is reached, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily stopped at this timing. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the decorative symbols while the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. This may make it difficult for the player to understand that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 has been interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing of t54 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hitting game is started. Thereafter, during the small hitting game, after the swing fluctuation display is started with the combination of the decorative patterns at the outset, the original design fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 at t56. At the timing of ', the decorative design display device 208 starts a standing effect described later. In this case, the decorative symbol change display is displayed in accordance with the original symbol change time of the special figure 1, but the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the small hit game ends after the small hit occurs Until the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed, the timing until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed is postponed, so from the timing when the symbol fluctuation time of the original special figure 1 elapses to the time when the special figure 1 is actually stopped and displayed. During the period, the swing fluctuation display is continuously performed by the combination of the decorative patterns on the outside. Therefore, the player has an excessive expectation that the symbols will be delayed until the symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby deteriorating the interest of the game, and furthermore, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a fluctuating manner and may be a big hit. There are times when you let it. Therefore, in this embodiment, in such a case, there is a case where such a problem can be solved by causing the effect to be delayed. Thereafter, at the timing of t55 after the small hitting game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol variation time is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pause effect is continuously performed until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t56 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an outlying symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special effect 1 is stopped and displayed in the form of a lost symbol, and then the pause effect is completed. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t57 comes, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the special figure 1 The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, the decorative display of the decorative pattern displayed according to the special figure 1 variable display is continued. However, it is necessary to provide a period of time corresponding to the period from the time when the symbol fluctuating time of the original special figure 1 is reached to the time when the symbol is actually stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 so that the player is not bored. In some cases, it is possible to suppress a decrease in playability. In addition, the time to perform the staggered effect is the same as the time (interruption time) from when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol until the small hit game ends, but not the same time. It may be executed at least during a period relating to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening (second variable winning opening 235a) in the small hitting game. Further, a plurality of types of effects may be prepared for the pause effect, or only one type may be prepared. In addition, in the case of providing a set effect between a plurality of types, for example, the effect may be selected at random, or the type of the set effect may be changed during execution under certain conditions. More specifically, for example, the type of staging effect may be changed depending on whether or not a specific SP reach has been performed. Further, the timing at which the execution of the pause effect is started is not limited to the above, and may be started at an appropriate timing.For example, the pause effect may be started during the small hit game, The staging effect may be started before the small hit game starts.

  Next, the first setting suggestion effect execution process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 206 is a flowchart for describing the first setting suggestive effect execution processing. The first setting suggestion effect execution process is a process that is started, for example, when an out ball command is received from the main control unit 300. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the out ball command, and may be activated when a winning port winning command is received. In the present embodiment, when an out ball command or a winning opening winning command is received, a point (setting suggestion point) corresponding to the type is counted in the first sub control unit 400. For example, when the first sub control unit 400 receives an out ball command output from the main control unit 300 when a game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, the setting suggestion point is counted “1” and the variable winning opening is set. When the first sub control unit 400 receives a winning opening winning command output from the main control unit 300 when a game ball enters the (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a), the setting suggestion point. Are counted "10". Note that, even when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning opening winning command transmitted when the ball enters another winning opening, points corresponding to the winning opening may be counted. . In addition, the setting suggestion point is counted only when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the out ball command, and the setting suggestion point is not counted when the game ball wins in various winning holes. Good. Further, the points to be counted may be made different according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the count number by receiving the out ball command is set to “1”, while in the big hit game state, the count number is set to “10”. In the normal game state, the count number at the time of winning the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 230, which is easy to win in the normal game state, is reduced to increase the count number in the probability change state or the electric support state, or during the big hit game. In this example, the count at the time of winning the variable winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a) is reduced, and the count at the time of winning the variable winning opening during the small hit game is increased. You may. Alternatively, "1" may be counted when the out ball command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, a table for determining the count number for generating the first setting suggestive effect may be selected by customizing the player.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the setting suggestion point (P) stored in the RAM 408 is equal to or more than “3000” (step S501). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting suggestion point is equal to or more than “3000” (Step S501; Yes), it resets the value of the setting suggestion point (P) to “0” (Step S503), and then performs a suggestion effect execution lottery. The process is executed (Step S505). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the setting suggestion point is equal to or more than “3000”, that is, when it determines that it is less than “3000” (step S501; No), the CPU 404 ends this processing.

  In the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 performs a lottery on whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the setting is high. Specifically, a determination table corresponding to a preset set value from the settings 1 to 6 is read from the ROM 406, and a lottery is performed based on the read determination table to determine whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, determination tables corresponding to the settings 4 to 6 are prepared, and the occurrence probabilities are different from one another. For example, in setting 4, 1/4 and the first setting suggestion effect are likely to appear, in setting 5, 1/8 and the first setting suggestion effect are less likely to appear than in setting 4, and in setting 6, 1/16 and 1/16. The first setting suggestion effect is less likely to appear than setting 4 or setting 5. In this embodiment, the determination table corresponding to the setting 3 or less is not prepared, but may be prepared. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may appear only during a specific period. For example, when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power, a symbol change display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is performed. The first setting suggestion effect may appear only until the operation is performed. In such a configuration, the player may be able to recognize that the setting has been changed. Further, the appearance rate in each setting of the above-described first setting suggestive effect is merely an example, and the appearance rate can be set as appropriate.

  In the first setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (1e), the shoji is opened at the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the cigarette is displayed with the speech of “High setting!”. A Gol character GLG that smokes appears, corresponding to an effect that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high. The appearance position of the Gol character GLG differs depending on the appearance timing, but may be the same. Note that the content of the effect is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that any effect may be used as long as the effect at least indicates that the setting is high to the player.

  The CPU 404 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect as a result of the lottery in the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S507). When determining that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S507; YES), the CPU 404 executes an execution timing selection process (step S509). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S507; No), the process ends.

  The CPU 404 selects whether to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect or to start at another timing in the execution timing selection processing. For example, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is started promptly with a probability of 70%, and the first setting suggestion effect is started with the probability of 30% at the start of the next symbol change display. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the effect may be started immediately or may be started at a timing different from the execution determination timing.

  As a result of the selection in the execution timing selection process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect (step S511). If the CPU 404 does not determine to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect (step S511; No), the CPU 404 sets the start setting so that the first setting suggestion effect is executed at the start timing selected and determined in the execution timing selection process. Is performed (step S513), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is started immediately (step S511; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. (Step S515).

  When the CPU 404 determines that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; Yes), the CPU 404 performs a first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process of randomly selecting whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S515; Yes). Step S521). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; No), the CPU 404 determines whether the SP reach is being performed (step S517). When the CPU 404 determines that the SP reach is being performed (step S517; Yes), the first setting suggestion effect is performed after the start of the symbol variation display started after the SP reach is completed or after the start of the big hit start effect. After the start setting is performed so that is started (step S519), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that SP reach is being performed (step S517; No), the process of step S513 is performed, and then the process ends.

  In addition, as a result of performing the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery in the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process of step S521, the CPU 404 determines whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect effect (step S523). When the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S523; Yes), the CPU 404 performs start setting so that the first setting suggestion effect is started after the second setting suggestion effect ends ( Step S525), and ends this processing. That is, the execution period of the second setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect may be shifted to eliminate a period in which both are performed at the same time, thereby making it possible for the player to easily understand the effect.

  Next, the notice effect determination processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 207 is a flowchart illustrating the notice effect determination processing. The announcement effect determination process is performed when the main control unit 300 pre-reads that special (SP) reach is to be performed in the special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 199: step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. A prefetch result information command including information indicating that the execution of the SP reach is prefetched is transmitted from the control unit 300 to the first control unit 400, and after the first control unit 400 receives this, the next symbol variation display is displayed. This is a process to be started when such a symbol variation start command is received. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the description, when the SP reach is executed, the pre-read result information command including the information to that effect is transmitted. When the symbol variation display is prefetched, a prefetch result information command including information on the symbol variation display may be transmitted.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the prefetch flag has already been set in the RAM 408 (step S601). The prefetch flag is a flag that is set when a prefetch result information command is received from the main control unit 300, and is cleared when the prefetch notice ends.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; Yes), it determines whether the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603). The continuous announcement flag is a flag that is set while the continuous announcement is being executed, and is cleared when the continuous announcement ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

  When not determining that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603; No), the CPU 404 executes a continuous announcement lottery process (step S605). Specifically, a lottery is performed by using the continuous announcement selection table at the time of SP reach selection shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 209 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the continuous announcement selection table when SP reach is selected.

  In the continuous preview lottery process, when receiving a prefetch result information command including information that prefetches execution of SP reach, the CPU 404 refers to the continuous preview selection table at the time of SP reach selection shown in FIG. 209 (a). , A record to be used is selected depending on whether a big hit or a big hit occurs. In this continuous announcement lottery, the same table is selected regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, when a pre-read result information command including information that pre-reads that a jackpot SP reach (or a miss SP reach) is to be executed is received, a continuous notice is executed with the same probability regardless of the setting. It will be. Actually, since the jackpot probability differs between the settings, it can be said that the probability of occurrence of the continuous notice also differs between the settings as a whole, but it is read ahead that the jackpot SP reach is executed. It can also be said that the probability that the continuous notice is executed in the case where it is performed and the probability that the continuous notice is executed when the execution of the miss SP reach is prefetched are the same regardless of the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), when the CPU 404 receives a pre-read result information command including information that pre-reads that a big hit SP reach will be executed, the CPU 404 executes a continuous notice with a probability of 1/2. It is determined that the continuous notice is not executed with a probability of 1/2. Further, when the CPU 404 receives the prefetch result information command including the prefetched information that the out-of-SP reach is to be executed, the CPU 404 determines that the continuous notice is to be executed with a probability of 1/5, Is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  As a result of executing the continuous announcement lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement has been won (step S607). If it is determined that the continuous announcement has been won (step S607; Yes), the CPU 404 sets the continuous announcement flag (step S609), and then changes the combination of the decorative symbols to “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7”. (Step S611), and then the process proceeds to Step S623. Here, the combination of the chances of “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” is a combination of out-of-order decoration symbols, and is a combination of decoration symbols stopped and displayed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, there are a case where a continuous notice using a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is executed as a pre-read notice and a case where a stop is displayed in combination of chances when setting suggestion to be described later is performed.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S603 that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603; Yes), the process proceeds to step S611, and the combination of decorative symbols is set to the above-mentioned chance. .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines in step S607 that it has not won the execution of the continuous notice (step S607; No), the CPU 404 proceeds to the process of step S613, and the symbol variation display is turned 50 times after the power is turned on. It is determined whether it is the following (step S613). If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not stop display of a chance eye as a suggestive effect was performed in the previous symbol variation display. Is determined (step S615).

  If it is not determined that the suggestion effect has been executed in the previous symbol change display (step S615; No), the CPU 404 executes the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S617). Specifically, a lottery is performed using the SP-reach-selection-time setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. 209 (b). Here, FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table when SP reach is selected.

  In the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selected setting suggested effect selection table, reads a record corresponding to the selected setting, and determines whether to execute the suggested effect. Specifically, in the case of the settings 1 to 3, the suggestion effect is not executed, and in the case of the setting 4, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16, and the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 15/16. do not do. In the case of the setting 5, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/8, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the setting 6, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/4, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 3/4. Therefore, when the SP reach is executed and the execution lottery of the continuous announcement is omitted, the execution lottery of the suggestion effect may be performed, and the probability of the execution of the suggestion effect differs depending on the setting. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is not performed in the settings 1 to 3, and the suggestion effect is easily executed in the order of the setting 6> the setting 5> the setting 4. In addition, you may make it perform a suggestion effect also in the setting 1-3. In addition, the selectivity of the suggested effect is not limited to the above-described one, and can be appropriately set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on, a suggestion effect described later may be executed. It is configured not to run. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed on condition that the symbol variation display is within 50 rotations after the power is turned on. However, the period during which the suggestion effect can be executed may be appropriately set. Alternatively, the period in which the suggested effect can be executed may not be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop display of the chance eyes as the suggested effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the suggestion effect execution lottery is not performed in the next symbol variation display, so that the suggestion effect is not performed. This prevents the production from being performed continuously, which may cause the player to be discouraged that the production was not a continuous production, but may be set so high that a chance as a suggested production appears. In some cases, you can have expectations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the table is set so that the probability of executing the suggested effect changes according to the selected setting, but the setting is not changed when the setting is changed. The table may be set so that the suggested effect is more easily executed than in the case. Further, the table may be set so that the suggested effect is more easily executed when the setting is changed to the high setting than when the setting is not changed.

  As a result of executing the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the suggested effect has been won (step S619). If the CPU 404 determines that the proposed effect has been won (step S619; Yes), the CPU 404 sets the combination of the decorative patterns to be the combination of the chances of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” ( Step S621) and the process proceeds to step S623. In the present embodiment, as in the continuous announcement, as in the continuous announcement, stop display is performed with a combination of the decorative patterns of the “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” to identify either the continuous announcement or the suggestion effect. Although it is not possible, the player may be able to have some expectations.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines in step S613 that the symbol variation display is not more than 50 rotations after the power is turned on (step S613; No), the CPU 404 determines that the suggestion effect was executed in the previous symbol variation display. (Step S615; Yes), and if it is not determined that the execution of the suggested effect has been won (Step S619; No), the process proceeds to Step S623.

  Next, in step S623, the CPU 404 starts the symbol variation display this time in the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time, The fluctuation display result of FIG. 2 is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the result is to cause a small hit (step S623). The CPU 404 can determine, based on the special figure stop type command transmitted from the main controller 300, whether or not the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed while the special figure 1 is changing. It is possible to specify whether or not FIG. 1 is a small hit. If the CPU 404 determines that a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set in the RAM 408 (step S623). S625). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; No), the CPU 404 ends the announcement effect determination processing.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; Yes), the CPU 404 executes a prefetch advance notice lottery process (step S627). As shown in FIG. 205 (b), when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, the CPU 404 performs the initial display in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the wait-foreseeing preliminary lottery process. The delay effect is executed after the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, and it is determined whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice as the delay effect (the delay look-ahead notice effect). In the present embodiment, whether or not to perform the pre-reading advance notice is performed, for example, with a probability of 1/2. However, the pre-reading advance notice may be performed without fail.

  The CPU 404 determines whether or not the delayed prefetching advance notice lottery has been won as a result of performing the extended lookahead preliminary announcement lottery process (step S629). If the CPU 404 determines that the player has won the delayed look-ahead preliminary lottery (step S629; Yes), the type of the small hit (whether the small hit is performed in “special figure f” or the small hit in “special figure g”) is determined. After the setting is made so that the prefetch notice effect is executed (step S631), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S625, the CPU 404 does not determine that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; No), or, in step S629, does not determine that the prefetching preliminary lottery is won (step S629). ; No), the process proceeds to step S633, and it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633). When the CPU 404 determines that the current pattern variation display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; Yes), the CPU 404 is to give a presentation effect that does not include a notice, and to change the background and the like. The setting is made so that the stage change effect is executed (step S635). There is a case where a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 in the symbol fluctuation display including the SP reach and a long period is required until the SP reach is completed and the symbol is fixedly displayed, but if the swing fluctuation is continued during this period, In some cases, the player may have an unnecessary sense of expectation that the fluctuation will cause a big hit. In the present embodiment, in the case of performing a staging effect after performing the SP reach, by performing a stage change effect, it is possible to switch a disappointing feeling due to a shift in the SP reach, and to lose. In some cases, this can be easily recognized. It should be noted that, regarding the special figure 1, the contents of the design effect display may be different between the symbol change display that is out of position after the SP reach is executed and the design change display that is out of the box without the reach effect. In addition, a stage change effect may be performed after a result of executing a certain SP reach having a high jackpot reliability becomes incorrect. Further, in the case where it is out of place without a reach effect, a staggered effect may be performed so as not to involve a stage change. Also, if a certain SP reach is executed and it is missed, if it is not interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2, a stage change effect is performed, but a certain SP reach is executed and it becomes a miss. In such a case, if the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2, the effect is provided with a delay, but the stage change effect may not be accompanied. In addition, when a certain SP reach with a large hit reliability is executed and a loss occurs, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, a stage change effect is accompanied. The production may be performed for a long time.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; No), the CPU 404 sets so as to perform the normal pause effect as the pause effect ( Step S637).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous announcement flag is set (step S639). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the continuous announcement flag is set (Step S639; No), the CPU 404 clears the prefetch flag (Step S641), and ends the announcement effect determination processing. On the other hand, when determining that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S639; Yes), the CPU 404 ends the announcement effect determination process without executing the process of step S641.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the SP reach is prefetched (that is, when the specific variation time is selected in advance), the lottery of the continuous announcement effect and the lottery of the setting suggestion effect are performed. As described above, for the setting suggestion effect, the execution lottery may be performed even when it is pre-read that the other variable time has been selected, or the setting suggestion effect may be performed regardless of the result of the pre-reading. A lottery may be performed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is not won. It may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the history of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the history of the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed, for example, by operating the operation key unit 190 in the standby state. In this case, the history in which the continuous notice has been executed may not be distinguished from the history in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed. Further, the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed or the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the continuous announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the tables shown in FIGS. 209 (a) and (b). By doing so, the appearance rate of the continuous announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect may be changeable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is performed even when the execution of the out-of-service SP reach is pre-read, but the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is performed only when the execution of the big hit SP reach is pre-read. You may do so. According to this, since the continuous announcement effect is always executed, the jackpot is always achieved, so that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. On the other hand, if the chance eyes do not appear continuously, it is a setting suggestion effect. It may be understood that the interest in the game can be further enhanced. In addition, during a period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, a period from turning on the power to 50 rotations), a continuous announcement effect is provided in both the case where the execution of the jackpot SP reach is prefetched and the case where the execution of the off-SP reach is prefetched. In the period other than the period in which the execution lottery is performed and the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the period exceeding 50 rotations after the power is turned on), the continuous lottery effect execution lottery is performed only when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read. In a period in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the continuous announcement effect is executed, so that the big hit symbol mode may be finally displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read and the execution is out of the continuous announcement effect execution lottery, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is performed. Therefore, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the symbol variation display is executed 50 times, even if the display of the chance is suggested by the setting suggestion, the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed accidentally. There is. Therefore, even when the setting suggestion effect is executed, a sense of expectation of a big hit may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is suppressed from being continuously executed, but may be continuously executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect in the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed, the continuous announcement effect is displayed from the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed. Although it will be executed, the continuous announcement effect may be suppressed from being executed in the next symbol variation display after the setting suggestion effect has been executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a look-ahead flag and a small hit occurs in Tokujin Figure 2, there is a case where the delaying look-ahead preview effect is executed. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wait-for-read notice effect is performed while the type of the small hit is provided, but the wait-for-read notice effect may be performed for the same content regardless of the type of the small hit. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the contents of the effect are made different depending on whether the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach or not. Regardless of whether the SP reach is performed or not, the content of the staging effect may be the same.

  Next, the first time jackpot suggested effect selection process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 208 is a flowchart for describing the first-time-big-hit suggested effect selection process. The initial big hit suggestion effect selection process is a process executed when, for example, a special figure change start command indicating that a big change symbol display is started is received from the main control unit 300 in the normal gaming state. is there.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 reads the current setting value stored in the RAM 408 (Step S701).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (step S703). If the CPU 404 determines that it is a probability-change big hit, the CPU 404 refers to a first-time probability-change big-hit re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table stored in the ROM 406 (step S705). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, the CPU 404 refers to the initial normal jackpot re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. 209 (c) stored in the ROM 406 (step S707).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 selects a field to be used for the lottery from the referenced table and the current setting value read from the RAM 408, and determines the combination of the decorative symbol before the re-change and the combination of the decorative symbols after the re-change. A determination process is performed (step S709). More specifically, if the result of the present symbol variation display is a normal jackpot (for example, a jackpot in “Special Figure A”), the first normal jackpot re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table of FIG. If any one of the settings 1 to 3 is referred to, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 100%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration" 0-decoration 0 "(except for" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "), select any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations.

  If the setting is 4, the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 90%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed with a probability of 10% before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is referred to as “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 6−decoration 6−decoration 6”, and “decoration 8−decoration”. Any one of "8-decoration 8" is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 5, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 70%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 20%. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration" 8 ", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to" decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”, “decoration 6−decoration 6”. Any one of "decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" In addition to the selection, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%, that is, before the re-lottery. Of the jackpot decoration pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Decoration 5-Decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 6, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with the probability of 50%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed with the probability of 36% before and after the re-lottery. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration" 8), the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”, “decoration 6−decoration 6”. Any one of “decoration 6-decoration 6” and “decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8” In addition to the selection, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, before the re-lottery. Of the jackpot decoration pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Decoration 5-Decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. Note that there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is performed before and after the re-lottery.

  If the result of the symbol variation display this time is a probability change big hit (for example, "big hit" in "special figure B"), the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first chance change big hit re-lottery of FIG. In the case of any one of 1-3, the combination of the big hit decoration patterns before and after the re-change is changed with a probability of 70%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1"-"decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" (Except “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. Thereby, it may be possible to see the combination of the big hit decorative symbols and to notify that the game is shifted to the certain change state after the big hit game.

  If the setting is 4, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 60%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ("decoration Excluding "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. Also, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 2%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0”, “decoration 2—decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and change the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery to" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 8%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In this embodiment, before and after the re-lottery, by changing the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols by odd numbers to the combination of jackpot decoration symbols by even numbers, by performing a seemingly contradictory effect such as apparent rank down, it is possible to change to a definite state after the jackpot game In some cases, the expectation of the shift can be further increased. In addition, when the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols from the odd symbol to the even symbol is changed before and after the re-lottery effect, the setting suggestion may always be included. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is different, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, so that the player has four or more settings. You may be able to suggest that.

  In addition, if the setting is 5, the combination of the big hit decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 40% is not changed, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 4%. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 "and selecting the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery as" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 16%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "or" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 " The combination of the decorative patterns is set as “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 9-decoration 9”. −decoration 9 ”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set as“ decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5 ”. Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 6, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 20%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 6%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” and “decoration 2-decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and change the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery to" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". Also, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 30%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” and “decoration 2-decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 " The combination of the decorative patterns is set to “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Further, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 9-decoration 9”. −decoration 9 ”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set as“ decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5 ”. Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. Note that there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is performed before and after the re-lottery.

  In the stop decoration symbol determination process, when the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols before and after the re-lottery is determined using the table as described above, the CPU 404 stops the jackpot decoration symbol before the re-lottery and stops after the re-lottery. The data of the jackpot decoration pattern is set so as to be a combination of the determined jackpot decoration patterns (step S711).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 reads the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current setting value read from the RAM 408 (step S713). Specifically, if the current setting value is “4”, the CPU 404 reads the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4 shown in FIG. 210 (a), and the current setting value is “5”. If so, the payout number setting suggestion selection table for setting 5 shown in FIG. 210 (b) is read out, and if the current setting value is “6”, the payout number setting for setting 6 shown in FIG. 210 (c) Read the suggestion effect selection table. Normally, when a sharp number (number of drills) for every 2500, such as "2500 pt" or "5000 pt", is counted, a "number of drills display image" (to be described later) having a changed display mode is displayed ( For example, the display of the acquired total prize ball number is enlarged and displayed), and the player is notified of the fact. In the present embodiment, in addition to the drill number display image displayed by the drill number, The display mode may be changed even when a number other than the number of drills (for example, a number such as “4560” or “5550”) is used by using the above-mentioned number-of-balls-setting suggestion effect selection table. By making a simple display, it is suggested that the setting is high.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table will be described. FIG. 210 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting 4 payout number setting suggestive effect selection table, and FIG. 210 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the setting 5 payout number setting suggestive effect selection table. FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a set 6 payout number setting suggestive effect selection table. Although the number-of-ballshots setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 is not prepared, it may be prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), the set number of balls to be set setting suggestion effect selection table does not make a high setting suggestion based on the display mode of the total number of balls with a probability of 70%, and has a probability of 10% with a probability of 10%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "4560", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches “4440” and when the total number of balls reaches “4560”. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls to be played during the big hit game, and may be able to have a sense of expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more).

  As shown in FIG. 210 (b), the setting number payout number setting suggestion effect selection table does not perform the high setting suggestion by the display mode of the total payout number with a probability of 50% and the total payout number with a probability of 10%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "4560", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. With a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches “4440” and when the total number of balls reaches “4560”, and with a probability of 5%, the total number of balls The display mode of the total number of balls to be displayed is changed both when the number becomes “4440” and when the number becomes “5550”, and when the total number of balls becomes “4560” with a probability of 5%, In both cases when it becomes "5600" So that changing the display mode of the number of balls. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change of the display mode of the total number of balls to be played during the big hit game, and may be able to have an expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more, or setting 5 or more). .

  As shown in FIG. 210 (c), the setting 6 payout number setting suggestion effect selection table does not make a high setting suggestion in the display mode of the total payout number with a probability of 30%, and has a total payout rate of 20% with a probability of 20%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "5550", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches "4440" and when the total number of balls reaches "5550". With a probability of 15%, the total number of balls When the number becomes "6660", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "7777", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 15%. To As a result, the player feels a sense of incongruity in the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls to be played during the big hit game, and can have a sense of expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more, or setting 6). There are cases.

  The CPU 404 determines the change pattern of the display mode of the total number of balls using the number-of-balls setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current setting value as described above, and the display mode of the total number of balls using the determined change pattern. Is set to change (step S715), and then the first big hit suggestion effect selection process ends.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is set to be different by referring to a different table for each setting, but the high setting suggestion is performed at the same appearance rate regardless of the setting. Alternatively, the higher setting may make it easier for the high setting suggestion to appear, or conversely, the higher the setting may be, the less likely it is for the high setting suggestion to appear. In particular, even if the appearance rates are the same irrespective of the settings, the appearance rates may naturally differ because the big hit probability differs between the settings in the first place. Or, in the first place, the setting suggestion does not actually perform a false effect, so for example, if the setting is 1, the appearance rate is 0%, and the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is naturally set. It can be said that it changes with the difference. This can be applied to the setting suggestion effect described above, and it is needless to say that the setting suggestion effect described below can be applied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, in each of the symbol display devices (the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 211 (a) is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation of each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hitting game in the normal game state, and FIG. Is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation of each symbol display device when a small hit is made in a normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), in the special figure 2, the symbol change display with a small hit is performed, but in the special figure 1, a standby state is set. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol, and displays the symbol in a standby state. Thereafter, at the timing of t61, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. At the timing of t62 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hit game is started. During the small hit game, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing of t63, a lottery or the like for determining whether or not to make a big hit is performed, and then the symbol change of the special figure 1 is performed. The display is started, but since the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2 is in progress, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, but the state is immediately interrupted. Thereafter, when the small hitting game ends at the timing of t64, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted (substantially started). Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the original symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is approached, the swing variation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out, and then the pause effect is started at the timing of t65. . After that, at the timing of t66, when the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, and the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 with the off symbol. At the same time, the production effect is finished, and the stop decoration is displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and becomes the timing of t67, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is exhausted. The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the missing decoration symbols, and then at timing t68. In addition, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols which are displayed by the swing fluctuation. Thereafter, similarly, at the timing of t69 after the symbol display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Note that, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, there is a game property that recommends left-handing. Therefore, when a right strike is detected in the normal game state (for example, the passage of a game ball to the big hit generation gate 252 is detected), for example, a warning display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to urge the left strike. However, in the small hitting game state, a profit cannot be given to the player unless the player makes a right-handed hit, so that a display prompting a right-handed even in a short time is displayed. In such a case, if a warning display prompting left-handing is made immediately after the small hitting game state ends, the game willingness may decrease. In the present embodiment, after the small hitting game is over, a display urging left-handing is not displayed for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds). This period (period indicated by t64 to t70) may be referred to as a “leftward warning suppression period”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed, the right-handed operation is performed and the state is continued, and the left-handed warning suppression period elapses even when the symbol variation display is started a plurality of times. Until then, no warning is given to encourage left-handers.

  In this example, when a game ball wins in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 during the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2, the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts and the progress is interrupted. On the other hand, the decorative display corresponding to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the variable display of the decorative symbol may not be started until the small hitting game is completed. In this case, the execution time of the variation display of the decorative symbol may correspond to the symbol variation time of the special figure 1, and the staging effect may not be executed. Alternatively, an effect different from the delayed effect may be executed.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 211 (b), the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol at the timing of t71 before the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses. At this time, the progress of the special figure 1 during the variable display is temporarily suspended, and a suspension period is started. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the decorative symbols while the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. This may make it difficult for the player to understand that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 has been interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing of t72 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hit game is started. After that, even though the special figure 1 is the suspension period, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and thus may shift to SP reach at the timing of t73. That is, it can be said that a situation in which the SP reach effect is being performed during the small hit game can occur. Then, when the small hitting game ends at the timing of t74, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted. Since a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, a period shown from t74 to t75) from the timing of t74 is a left-handing warning suppression period, even if right-handing is continuously performed, if it is within the period, There is no warning to make a left strike. Note that, even if the left-handing warning suppression period has elapsed at the timing of t75, when right-handing is performed, a warning prompting left-handing is issued. As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, when a long symbol change time such as SP reach is selected, the small hit of the special figure 2 is displayed during the symbol change display of the special figure 1 being executed. Even if it occurs, it can be said that there is a case in which a warning urging left-handing is issued during the symbol change display of the special figure 1.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 212 is a view showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 212 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold lamp 216 are omitted from the drawings. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (a), a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not displayed here, a default background image described later is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Also, a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and the variable display and the stop display are performed in accordance with the decorative symbol which is largely displayed at the center of the display screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol) and also notifying the number of holdings. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Toku-zu 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, at the upper right of the display area, a symbol change notification area of special figure 1 is provided, and at the lower right, a symbol change notification area of special figure 2 is provided. It should be noted that a general-flag symbol change notification area and a general-figure reserved number display area may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 matches the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 is Is consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, for example, a large hit is stopped and displayed according to the result, and a small hit is displayed as “△”. Is stopped and displayed, and if it is off, it is stopped and displayed with "x". In addition, during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the design changing display area of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the design changing display area of the special figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the design change display and the stop display of the special figure 2. Changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the number-of-reserved-number display area, the advance notice and the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed are provided. May go.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 212 is a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lights of the to-draw 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 212 (a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. , Are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 212 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 212 is the normal game state (special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state). This is because a prize at the starting port 232 of the special figure 2 does not make much sense when the losing occurs or when a small hit occurs, is extremely long (for example, 580 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a reserved icon display area of a special figure in which a display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (the special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the display result of the special figure 1 is easily displayed as described above. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is the probable change state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state), On the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same or different. .

  In the present embodiment, the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the order of the change start on the special figure display device → the start of the change display of the fourth symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → the start of the change of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 212 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. No change has occurred in the pending icon or decorative design yet.

  In FIG. 212 (c), the movement animation of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has been started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and the second hold icon h11. The holding icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

  In FIG. 212 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 212 (e), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Floating display of decorative symbols has not been started. Note that when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 212 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 212 (g), an operation prompt notification image 136P for urging the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. The change display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize from the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 or the like that the special figure is changing. . The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 212 (h), the validity period has decreased, and in FIG. 212 (i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the validity period, as shown in FIG. 212 (j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, a character display of "Chance!" Is displayed on the right side of the main character image.

  In FIG. 212 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the display of the change in the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the apparatus enters the reach state as shown in FIG. Although the reach state entry notice image 2071 may be displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect which is a trigger for a notice of the currently performed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 212 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / number-of-reservations display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (o) shows the duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 may be not only an advance notice of entering a reach state but also an advance notice of developing to SP reach.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212.

  In FIG. 213 (p) following FIG. 212 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 213 (s). In FIG. 213 (s), the protagonist of the hero defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 213 (t), all of them are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / reserve count display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, a display of a setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 7 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4” is displayed. The background here may be non-display or a background image different from the background image. In addition, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are kept disappearing, and only the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbols are displayed. In addition, the variable display is continuously performed on any of the mini symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213 (v), the decoration pattern starts to change and display again with the display of the character “Re-lottery!”, And a re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3" or "decorative 7-decorative", which is a combination of decorative patterns that determine a big hit and a transition to a probable change state advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “decoration 7—decoration 7” is fueling the expectation that the final display will occur.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (w), the combination of the decorative patterns is determined to be the “variable 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” based on the jackpot “decorative 4−decorative 4−decorative 4”. This shows a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating this is displayed. At this time, an effect display EF1 in which stars flash around the decorative symbol after the stop is displayed, informing that the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbol combination has been ranked up.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 213 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for which the 6R certain-variable-big-hit has been determined is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 213 (x) is stopped and displayed with “「 ”, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of“ 777 ”. In FIG. 213 (x), the background is not displayed, but a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 213 (y), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big hit big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and a character of "Please hit right!" Is urged to right-hand. In the big hit game start effect shown in FIG. 213 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a big hit that satisfies some condition is satisfied (for example, only in the case of the first big hit after the power is turned on, only when a big hit of 5 or more chan occurs, The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only at the big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, only when the hit is 10R big hit).

  On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 213 (v), for example, as shown in FIG. 213 (w ′) to FIG. There is. In other words, there may be a case where the re-lottery is failed. However, in the present embodiment, even when the stop display is not performed in the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the probable change big hit is determined, for example, the promotion effect in the big hit effect can be given a sense of expectation. In some cases, expectations can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types. It may be changed, for example, in the order of re-lottery effect in the mode involving the action of the accessory> re-lottery effect by symbol change display by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed fluctuation> re-lottery effect by slow fluctuation The degree of expectation that the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns changes before and after the lottery may be set high. Note that the order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 214: is a figure which shows an example of the effect in a big hit game centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. In FIG. 214, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (a), after the 6R probability change big hit (in the effect, it is difficult to determine the normal hit or the probability change hit) in the symbol change display of the special figure 1. In this case, the state has shifted to the first round. In the first round, on the decorative design display device 208, the character "Congratulations!" Is displayed together with the character of Dr. Machiko on the center left side of the display screen, celebrating the big hit. In the case where it is determined that the winning pattern is a variable jackpot based on the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of the big hit (for example, the case of the big hit with the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”), As shown in FIG. 214 (a '), the characters "Congratulations!" Are displayed in place of the characters "Congratulations!", So that a large amount of balls to be obtained can be expected. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the number of hits from the first big hit (including small hits; sometimes referred to as “number of consecutive chans”) is displayed, and in the upper left corner, a big hit decoration when a big hit occurs The symbol "decoration 4" is displayed. In the upper center of the display screen, the current round number “1R” is displayed as a round number display, and below that, the number of prize balls acquired in the current jackpot game and the number acquired in the current jackpot game are displayed. “32/480 get!” Indicating the expected number of prize balls is displayed. That is, since four game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a after the start of the current big hit, the acquisition of the number of award balls of 32 is notified and the 480 prize balls of the present big hit are obtained. It is shown that the acquisition can be expected. In the lower right of the display screen, the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit is displayed, and this numerical value is equal to the number of the winning prize balls obtained in the big hit and the small hit. It is incremented (counted up) every time. Therefore, during the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot, the total acquired prize balls are not counted up until the jackpot ends, and remain at "0 pt". Each time a prize ball is acquired in a hit, the number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize may also be added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a specific general winning opening that can be won by right-handing may be further added. It may be.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows a state in which the third round game is being played. In the present embodiment, the combination of the jackpot symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” results in a jackpot, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the hit is a positive jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect for notifying whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit is performed. When the promotion effect is started, the character “Promotion Chance!” Is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to give a sense of expectation to the probability of a big hit. Note that the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, or the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is not performed when it is determined that the jackpot is a variable jackpot by the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of the big hit, but the promotion effect may be performed. , A setting suggestion may be included.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), a state in which the result of the promotion effect is displayed is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 214 (c), a state in which the promotion effect has been successful is shown, and the characters “promotion!” And “the next small hit RUSH rush” are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is reported that this big hit is a probable big hit. On the other hand, if the promotion effect has failed, the character "Sorry ..." is displayed as shown in FIG. 214 (c '). It should be noted that, by failing in the promotion effect, it may be possible to confirm that a normal jackpot has been established, or to have another promotion effect (for example, a reversal effect in the ending) to make sure that the change is still positive. You may not make it clear whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing shown in FIG. 214 (c), it is the third round, indicating that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 176 prize balls have been acquired. I have.

  FIG. 214 (d) shows a state in which the sixth round is over and a jackpot end effect is being performed. Note that the example shown in FIG. 214 (d) shows a state in which an effect that is determined to be a probable big hit is being performed. When the big hit end effect starts, a character of “small hit RUSH rush!” Is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the state will be shifted to the certainty changing state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state). Also, an animation is started in which the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed on the lower right of the display screen is counted up, and 480 prize balls acquired in the current big hit are added. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal jackpot is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 214 (d '), the characters "big hit end" and "hour saving rush!" Are displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (the special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In addition, the display indicating the total acquired prize ball count is performed in the same manner as when transitioning to the probable change state even when shifting to the electric support state, and the display of the total acquired prize ball number after the count up is displayed. Is displayed continuously until the power support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the display of the total number of winning prize balls may not be performed.

  In addition, you may make it change the expectation degree which succeeds in the promotion effect during a jackpot game by the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns at the time of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot ("decoration 3" or "decoration 7") Probable change confirmation)> A jackpot with an odd symbol other than "decoration 3" and "decoration 7"> It may be easy to succeed in the promotion promotion in the order of the jackpot with an even symbol.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of the effect in the probable change game state centering on the decorative symbol display device. In FIG. 215, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the big hit game relating to the first big hit has ended and the first symbol change display has started after shifting to the certain change state. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous fluctuating machine capable of simultaneously performing the symbol fluctuating display on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so that when the big hit game ends, the special figure Both the symbol variation display of No. 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 start almost simultaneously. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (a), the character "Small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect is continuously displayed, and the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. On the left side of the figure, there is shown a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At the lower right of the display screen, the animation of counting up the number of prize balls (480) obtained in the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot is continuously performed. In addition, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handed are displayed at the upper left.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 215 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 282 of the special map 2, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 215 (a), three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the reserved icons h21, h22, and h3 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Each of h23 is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 215 (a), in order to make it easy to see that the four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. This is because the variable display in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 215 (b), in the present embodiment, after the big hit game ends, the “small hit RUSH entry” displayed in the big hit game end effect until the four symbol change display of the special figure 2 ends. "!" Is displayed continuously, and the effect of making it appear that the game has smoothly transitioned to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "1". In addition, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed at "441" in accordance with this. In the special figure 1, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (b), the count-up animation in the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen has ended, and the game has been won in the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot. “0480 pt” indicating the number of award balls is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fourth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has started. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (c), there is no symbol change display on hold in the special figure 1 (that is, on hold 0), and the stop is displayed as a result of the loss. In addition, there is no symbol variation display that is suspended in the special figure 2 (that is, suspension 0). At the time of right strike, it is easy to win the second special figure starting port 242. Therefore, after the fourth symbol change display of the special figure 2 starts, for example, four game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 242. As shown in FIG. 215 (d), there is a case where four balls are reserved and the special figure 2 is reserved. That is, in FIG. 215 (d), four symbol change displays of the special figure 2 are reserved, and four reserved icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (e) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fourth symbol change display of the special figure 2 has ended. As shown in FIG. 215 (e), the character of "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect is still displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (e), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 9-decorative 6-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "2". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "962" in accordance with this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (f) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fifth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has started. After the big hit game ends, when the fifth symbol change display of the special figure 2 starts, the character of "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed from the big hit game end effect is erased, and the small hit RUSH is being displayed (that is, the probability change state). The character of “middle hit RUSH in” indicating “middle” is displayed above the display of the total number of winning prize balls. Also, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern, which has been displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen, moves to the center of the display screen and expands to the size normally displayed. In the present embodiment, this may make it possible to give a sense of expectation to the reserved consecutive chan. Thereafter, the display is performed in a similar manner until a big hit or a small hit is achieved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (g), a state in which the fifth symbol change display of the special figure 2 has ended after the big hit game has ended is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (g), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the departure, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 6−decoration 3−decoration 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (h) shows a state in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is performed. In this embodiment, the character "CHANCE!" Is displayed in place of the display of "small hit RUSH in progress" to notify that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. It should be noted that the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, or the symbol change "Chang!" May be always displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (i), the small hit symbol ("special symbol g") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed accordingly. . In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at “666” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (j) shows a state in which the small hit game has started. When the small hit game is started, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to notify that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that appears to be a small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive channels displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to "second time", and the fact that it is the second consecutive channel is notified. Also, at the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (k), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 winning balls are obtained. The character "15/150 get!" Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (l), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150 / 150get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed.

  After that, when the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 215 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters “RAT RUSH CONTINUE!”, The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, an animation in which the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen starts counting up and 150 prize balls acquired in the small hit game are added is shown. . As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game is not added during the small hit game, but is added after the symbol change display after the small hit game is started. ing. This may allow the player to concentrate on the game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (n) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game has ended. As shown in FIG. 215 (n), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), the "small hit RUSH continues!" Is displayed continuously, and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game (big hit game) is counted up to the display of the total acquired prize ball numbers. The effect is to make the transition to the probable state appear smooth. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (n), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (o) shows a state in which the small hit is completed and the second symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed. Even at this timing, the animation in which the display of the total number of acquired prize balls counts up continues. Then, after that, the animation of the count-up of the display of the total acquired prize balls ends at the timing shown in FIG. It is added and updated to “0630 pt”.

  Next, a first setting suggestion effect as an example of a high setting suggestion effect displayed with the detection of an out ball at least as a condition will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 216 is a diagram stepwise illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative symbol display device. This effect is a setting suggestion effect executed based on the first setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (1a) to (1e) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the normal game state. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (1a), the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (1b), the point gauge PTG is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character “CHANCE WITH GAUGE MAX” is displayed, and the expectation that setting suggestion may be made may be made. May be able to have. Thereafter, each time the game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, for example, one point is counted, and by prize in the first start winning opening (upper) 230, for example, five points are counted and the point is updated. It is shown that the gauge increases as the time is increased. Thereafter, when the points accumulate for a predetermined number (for example, 3000 pt), the gauge in the point gauge PTG indicates that the gauge is full, as shown in FIG. 216 (1d). Then, as shown in FIG. In the lower right part, a character GLG of a Gol smoking a cigarette appears along with the character of "high setting!", Indicating that "high setting!" In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the number is 4 or more, but the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the number is 2 or more or 3 or more. Is also good. If the first setting suggestion effect is not performed, the point gauge may not be displayed, or the point gauge may be displayed, but the first setting suggestion effect may not be performed. It may be. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. The point gauge PTG may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed when the points are almost full. Further, the points may be indicated by numerical values instead of the gauges. In this case, the numerical value may be always displayed, or may be displayed only when the number of sharp points becomes good (for example, 1000 points).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (2a) to (2b) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the big hit game state. In this effect example, in the big hit game state, for example, it is performed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (2a) shows a state in which a jackpot game that has shifted to a certain jackpot has been started. Thereafter, for example, each time a game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, for example, one point is counted, and each time a game ball passes through the first variable winning opening 234a, for example, twenty points are counted, Each time a game ball passes through the 2 special figure starting port 232, for example, 10 points are counted, and when the number of points reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the first setting suggestion effect in which is appeared is performed, which indicates that the setting is high. When the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game, the above-described point gauge PTG may be displayed. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. In the big hit game state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (3a) to (3b) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the probable change state. In this effect example, even in the probability change state, for example, it is performed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (3a), the decorative symbol is fluctuated, and the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that the decorative symbol is in the stable state is displayed on the right side of the display screen. It is displayed in the lower part. After that, when the points are added to reach a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 216 (3b), a first setting suggestion effect in which the GOL character GLG appears in the probable change state is performed, suggesting that the setting is high. May be. When the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the probable change state, the above-described point gauge PTG may be displayed. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. Further, in the probable change state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (4a) to (4b), neither the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 nor the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, there is no suspended symbol variation display, and the big hit. A state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in a standby state where the game state is shifted to a state other than the gaming state (small hitting gaming state) is shown. In this production example, in the customer waiting state (a state where the stop result of the decorative symbol is displayed, or a state where the customer waiting demonstration as shown in FIG. 216 (4a) is performed, for example, the number of points is a predetermined number. Specifically, a demonstration waiting for customers is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 216 (4a), and after that, for example, the player does not win any winning opening, but out. When the number of points reaches a predetermined number due to the passing of the game ball to the ball detection sensor SWout, as shown in FIG. 216 (4b), the first setting suggestion that the character GLG appears during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect When the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the customer waiting state, the above-described point gauge PTG is displayed. Further, the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and it is needless to say that the number of points can be set arbitrarily. There may be winning ports for which no mouth and points are added, or points may be added for every winning port, in which case, how many points are added for any winning port. The first setting suggestion effect may be executed only during the customer waiting state, or during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or the decorative symbol The first setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the stop display is displayed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the customer waiting state. .

  FIG. 216 (5a) to FIG. 216 (5c) show the operation when the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied during the SP reach. In this production example, when the points accumulate during SP reach and the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is delayed in order to concentrate the player on SP reach. I have. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 216 (5a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is performed, and a state in which the lord character and the swordsman character face each other is shown. At this timing, the points are accumulated, and the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (5b), a state in which the character of the lord wins and the decoration pattern fluctuates and fluctuates in a combination of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. However, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started even at the timing of FIG. 216 (5b). After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (5c), the process shifts from the SP reach effect to the default background image, and the decorative design is restored to the original size. The first setting suggestion effect in which the character GLG of the old Gol appears in a state of swinging and fluctuating by this. In the present embodiment, by doing so, the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed simultaneously, so that the problem of being unable to concentrate on the effect may be less likely to occur.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216 (5b ′), if the lord character is defeated and the decorative design fluctuates and fluctuates due to the combination of “decoration 4−decoration 3−decoration 4”, then As shown in FIG. 216 (5c ′), even after shifting from the SP reach effect to the default background image, the first setting suggestion effect is not started, and the next symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 216 (5d ′). After the start of the variable display, the first setting suggestion effect whose start has been suspended is started.

  In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach effect is completed so that the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed simultaneously. A setting suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, the start timing of the first setting suggestion effect that is executed after the SP reach effect has ended is not limited to the above, and it goes without saying that the first setting suggestion effect can be started at any timing.

  In addition, the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is delayed during the execution of the SP reach effect. In such a case, the start of the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be delayed. Also, the start of the setting suggestion effect may not be delayed, and these effects and the setting suggestion effect may be performed in an overlapping manner.

  FIG. 217 (1a) shows a state in which a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are simultaneously performed during execution of the jackpot game end effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (1a), when the big hit game end effect is started, a group of Sabohani appears, suggesting that the setting is high. The effect in which the Sabohani group appears may be referred to as a second setting suggestive effect. Then, when points accumulate during execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the character GLG of the Gol is displayed superimposed on the group of Sabohani, and a plurality of setting suggestion effects are displayed. Are sometimes performed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the character GLG of the grandfather Gol in the first setting suggestion effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the group of Sabohani in the second setting suggestion effect. It may be displayed.

  FIG. 217 (2a) to FIG. 217 (2b) show an example of an effect which is performed separately from the effect example shown in FIG. 217 (1a), and the second setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game end effect. In this state, if the points accumulate and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, avoid executing the second setting suggestion effect in a superimposed manner, and after the second setting suggestion effect ends. This shows a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (2a), when the big hit game end effect is started, a sabohani group may appear, suggesting that the setting is high. In this case, points may be accumulated and execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be determined. In this case, in the big hit game end effect, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 217 (2b), when the symbol variation display started after the big hit game ends is started. The grandfather character GLG is displayed, and a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is shown. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, if the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the start of the first setting suggestion effect is reserved until the second setting suggestion effect ends. You may do so.

  FIGS. 217 (3a) to 317 (3d) are diagrams illustrating a menu mode to which the player shifts by operating the operation key unit 190 or the effect button 136 in the standby state. In the present embodiment, the operation key unit 190 and the effect button 136 may be operated not only during the execution of the demonstration effect illustrated in FIG. 217 (3a) but also in a standby state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Thus, the mode can be shifted to the menu mode, but the mode may be shifted to the menu mode only during the execution of the demonstration effect.

  For example, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (3a), a menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (3b). On the menu screen, “member registration”, “password input”, “passcode issuance”, “volume / brightness setting”, and “setting suggestion setting” can be performed. “Member registration” is for registering in the database of customers managed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100. "Password input" allows the player to register the two-dimensional code or password downloaded from the maker here to the pachinko machine 100 with the past game history of the player. As a result, for example, a notice that does not normally appear may appear, or the reliability of the notice may change. “Password issuance” is to display the game history in the pachinko machine 100 in two-dimensional code or character code at the request of the player. The player can register the game history on the database by capturing the displayed two-dimensional code or character code with a portable terminal or the like and uploading the captured image to the manufacturer via the Internet. The “volume / brightness setting” adjusts the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 of the pachinko machine 100 and the brightness of the decorative design display device 208 and various decorative lamps by operating the operation key unit 190 by the player. can do.

  When the player operates the operation key unit 190 at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (3b) to operate “setting suggestion setting”, as shown in FIG. 217 (3c), the “setting suggestion effect customizing” screen is displayed. Transition. On the “setting suggestion effect customization” screen, the characters “Please select a game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect is easy to appear” are displayed, and the game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) is likely to appear is displayed as “ It can be selected from any of the normal game state, the "probable change state", the "electric support state", and the "big hit game". Note that other game states may be selectable. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (3c), the cursor is positioned on the item “easy to appear in normal times”, the item is highlighted, and the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear in the normal game state. The setting is shown. Note that two or more items may be selectable, or only one item may be selectable.

  When a game state in which the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear is selected as described above, as shown in FIG. 217 (3d), a type of setting suggestion effect that is likely to appear from a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects is selected. Can be done. Specifically, the setting is suggested by the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit, and the setting is suggested by the display of the number of the symbol change display between the big hits. One of the following is suggested from the start during the interval, the suggestion from the re-lottery at the time of the big hit, and the suggestion from the stop pattern. Alternatively, two or more can be selected. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (3d), a state is shown in which two suggestion effects of “suggest by number of balls” and “suggest by re-lottery” are set to be executable, and other setting suggestion effects appear. Not to be. In the present embodiment, the type of the setting suggestion effect that appears is set, but the appearance rate of each of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be set.

  Next, an example of a re-lottery effect performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 218 is a diagram stepwise illustrating an example of a re-lottery effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the decoration pattern is fluctuated and, as a result, swings and fluctuates in the combination of the decoration patterns of the “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1”. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the decorative symbol that has fluctuated starts to change at high speed, and when the re-lottery effect is successfully performed, it is confirmed that the probability change big hit is determined as shown in FIG. 218 (c). A combination of decorative patterns for the 6R probable jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” to be announced is derived, and the effect display in which the star flashes to make it easier to easily recognize and confirm that the probable change jackpot is confirmed. EF1 is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the probability has changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 218 (d), the display is confirmed and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of the 6R certain-change big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In accordance with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed as “777”, and “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. A stop display is shown, indicating a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect display is performed when the combination of the decorative symbols, which is a big hit but it is not clear whether or not it is the probability variable hit, is changed to the decorative pattern combination for definitely notifying that the probability is the big hit. The EF1 is displayed so that the promotion is recognized.

  On the other hand, if the re-lottery effect fails, as shown in FIG. 218 (c '), the combination of the big hit decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed again, and the fluctuation is performed. In this case, the effect display EF1 may be displayed. In this embodiment, the symbol is not changed in the re-lottery effect, and even if the symbol fails, the effect display EF1 is displayed. It is suggested. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is a jackpot. Note that setting suggestion may be included by displaying the effect display EF1. Thereafter, when the symbol change time elapses and the symbol stop display timing comes, as shown in FIG. 218 (d '), the display is fixedly displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1". At the same time, the mini symbol whose display is displayed at the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as “111”, and the symbol change during the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Is stopped and a big hit is indicated. In addition, when the effect display EF1 is displayed although there is no change in the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery effect, only the setting suggestion may be included. For example, although there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" jackpot, when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 1 is denied. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 4 or more is determined. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect with the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 6 is determined. A suggestion may be made, and conversely, the effect may be more pleasing to the player than a case where the promotion is not performed in the re-lottery.

  In the present embodiment, when the re-lottery effect fails, setting suggestion may be performed. Specifically, when the re-lottery fails, the normal operation is to make the same combination of decorative symbols displayed before and after the re-lottery, as shown in FIG. 218 (c ″). It is a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols for confirming that the probability change is a big hit, and may be a different symbol before and after the re-lottery. That is, the decoration pattern combination before the re-lottery was “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”. Combinations may be derived. In the present embodiment, setting suggestions may be made by making the big hit symbols different before and after the re-lottery. In this case, as shown by the symbol after the re-lottery, the effect suggests that the setting is 4 or more. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed even though the re-lottery effect has failed so that the player can feel uncomfortable so that the effect is a setting suggestive effect. . Note that the effect display EF1 may not be displayed, or when the effect display EF1 is displayed, it is a certain-variable big hit, for example, an effect that succeeds in the promotion in a big hit game is performed. It may include suggesting that When the effect display EF1 is not displayed, setting suggestion may not be included. Thereafter, when the symbol fluctuating time elapses and the timing of the symbol stop display is reached, as shown in FIG. 218 (d ''), the symbol is fixedly displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”. At the same time, the mini symbol whose display is displayed at the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as “444”, and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / number-of-reservations display area 284 shows “O”. Is stopped and a big hit is indicated. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the re-lottery effect fails, the setting effect may be suggested, so that the effect may be enhanced in some cases. It should be noted that a combination of the jackpot decorative pattern combination and the display of the effect display EF1 may be related to the setting suggestion. In the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed when the re-lottery is successful and when the setting is suggested, and the effect display EF1 is in the same mode. It may be. Further, when the effect indication EF1 is displayed and the setting is suggested, the setting may be a false setting suggestion. For example, the higher the setting, the easier the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is made, The lower the setting, the harder the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) may be. Further, in this effect example, the setting suggestion is performed by displaying the effect display EF1, but the setting suggestion may be performed by, for example, making the color or pattern of the symbol different from normal. , The sound output that is output when a big hit is made different from the normal one (usually "congratulations" is output, but in the case of setting suggestions, "chance" is output, etc.) May be performed. In addition, the setting suggestion may be performed using another probable change confirmation notification effect, and the setting suggestion may be performed by executing the probable change confirmation notification effect at a timing different from the normal execution timing. Alternatively, the setting change suggestion may be included in the probable change confirmation notification. In addition, setting suggestion may be made based on the effect content in the re-lottery effect, and for example, a display requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is different from a normal display (a different color and a different size from the normal display). In such a case, the setting suggestion may be included, or the setting suggestion may be performed when the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) for which an operation is required at the time of re-lottery is different from normal.

  Note that the setting suggestion in the re-lottery effect may be executed when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the setting suggestion may be made when the number of symbol fluctuation display times during the big hit is small, such as within 30 times from the previous big hit. Suggestions may be made. Further, for example, the date of the event in the game hall may be set using RTC (Real Time Clock), and the setting may be suggested on the date. Further, for example, the generation condition may be customized by the player on a setting screen that can be shifted during the demonstration effect, and the setting suggestion may be performed when the customized condition is satisfied. The above can be applied to the setting suggestion effects described above, and it is needless to say that the setting suggestion effects described below can also be applied.

  Next, an example of an effect related to the total number of acquired prize balls in the big hit game state executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 219 is a diagram stepwise illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit game state centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 219 (1a) to FIG. 219 (1d) show an example of a normally performed effect of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. FIG. 219 (1a) shows a state in which the hit from the first time to the eighth hit and the big hit game relating to the 10R certain-variable big hit in Toku-gu 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 219 (1a), the game has shifted to the eighth round, and since 74 gaming balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 1215 game balls in the big hit game "1110 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number-of-rounds display at the upper center of the display screen, indicating that the player has won the game, and that 1500 payouts can be expected in the jackpot game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, "8th" indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “1380 pt”, which is the total number of awarded balls acquired in the first to seventh big hit games and small hit games, is displayed. In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (1a), 2490 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 2010 prize balls have been obtained since the first jackpot game started, and 2505 total obtained prize balls with a good drill. You can say that you got the number. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when a sharp prize ball number (2500) is obtained, as shown in FIG. 219 (1b), an effect image including the character "2500pt Get !!" (Sometimes referred to as a “number-of-kills display image”) is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to congratulate the player on obtaining a prize ball. In addition, if the total winning prize balls count “2500 pt” in the process of counting up the display of the total winning prize balls after the jackpot game ends, a sharp number display image such as “Get 2500 pt !!” is displayed. It may be displayed.

  FIG. 219 (1c) shows a state in which the hit from the first time to the fifteenth hit and the big hit game relating to the 10R certain-variable big hit in Toku-gu 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 219 (1c), the process has shifted to 4R, and since 32 gaming balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 480 game balls are obtained in the big hit game. The character "480 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number of rounds display at the upper center of the display screen, indicating that there is a match, and that 1500 payouts can be expected in the big hit game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, “15th” indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “4510pt”, which is the total number of winning prize balls obtained in the first to fourteenth big hit games and small hit games, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (1c), 4990 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 5005 prize balls have been obtained since the first big hit game started, and a total of 5,000 well-acquired prize balls have been obtained. You can say that you got the number. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when a sharp prize ball number (for example, a prize ball number that is a multiple of 2500) is obtained, as shown in FIG. 219 (1d), “5000 pt get! Is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to congratulate the player on obtaining a prize ball. In addition, if the total winning prize balls count “5000 pt” in the process of counting up the display of the total winning prize balls after the jackpot game ends, a sharp number display image such as “5000 pt get!” Is displayed. It may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion using the drilling number display image is performed according to the decision in the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process in step S715 of the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit shown in FIG. Instead of the drilling number display image shown in 1d), as shown in FIG. 219 (1d '), setting suggestion may be made by changing the display mode of the character "5000". In this case, for example, since the display mode of “5000” related to the setting 5 changes, it is suggested that the setting is 5 or more. The mode of the setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting may be suggested by an audio output or a light emission mode of a lamp.

  FIG. 219 (2a) to FIG. 219 (2d) show an example of an effect in which a setting suggestion is made in relation to the display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. 219 (2a) to (2b) in FIG. 219 have the same effect contents as those in FIGS. 219 (1a) to (1b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 219 (2c) is a ninth hit from the first time, and shows a state in which a big hit game relating to the 10R certain-variable big hit in Toku-gu 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 219 (2c), the process has shifted to 2R, and since 11 gaming balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 165 game balls are obtained in the big hit game. The character "165 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number of rounds display in the upper center of the display screen, indicating that there is a match, and that 1500 payouts can be expected and required in the jackpot game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, “9th” indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “4380 pt”, which is the total number of awarded balls acquired in the first to eighth hits and small hits, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (2c), 4545 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 4560 prize balls have been obtained since the first big hit game started. In the present embodiment, for example, FIG. In the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process of step S715 in the first time jackpot suggestion effect selection process, it is determined that the total suggestion effect number is 4560 shots and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Is not a multiple of 2,500 shots, but the number-of-kills display image is not displayed, but the number-of-kills display image including the character “4560pt Get !!” is displayed as a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the setting is high due to the uncomfortable feeling of displaying the number-of-kill display image with the total number of winning prize balls other than the so-called number of kills. The drilling number display image as the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 219 (2d) suggests that the setting is 4 or more. When displaying the number-of-kills display image with the total number of winning prize balls other than the number-of-kills, and suggesting the setting, a display mode different from the normal number-of-kill display image (for example, a different number display mode). It may be easy to recognize that the setting suggestion is performed. The mode of the setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting may be suggested by an audio output or a light emission mode of a lamp.

  FIG. 220: is a figure which shows an example of the continuous announcement effect mainly on the decoration design display apparatus in steps.

  FIG. 220 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220A, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 220 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 220 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 220A, three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as that of the other reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display form of the pre-reading notice) may be performed by the pre-reading reserved icon.

  In FIG. 220 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is displayed with a deviation, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 220 (d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 again stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 3-decorative 5-decorative 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this example of the production, the display of the missing pattern in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is continuously performed, and the setting suggestion is suppressed from being continuously displayed. In some cases, it is possible to recognize that continuous announcements are being made instead of suggestions, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the big hit.

  In FIG. 220 (f), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 220 (g), the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 220 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. Note that the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , SP reach (swordsman reach). Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 220 (i) to (m) are performed. However, since the effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (o) to 213 (y) are performed, detailed description is omitted. I do.

  In this way, in the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 220, the continuous announcement effect in which the combination of the decorative patterns at the opportunity of “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” is performed continuously can increase the expectation of the big hit. May be possible.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decorative symbol change display mainly on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 221 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 221 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 221 is a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 221 (a), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as that of the other reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display form of the pre-reading notice) may be performed by the pre-reading reserved icon.

  In FIG. 221 (b), the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is displayed with a deviation, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 221 (d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this example of production, the display of the missing pattern in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is not continuous, and the player can recognize that the setting suggestion has been performed instead of the continuous notice, and expect the high setting. In some cases, the feeling can be given.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decorative symbol change display centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 222 (1a) to FIG. 222 (e) show an example of the effect of displaying the number of times of symbol change display during the big hit, that is, the number of big hit starts. In addition, the big hit start number in the present embodiment refers to a symbol variation display number from the end of the power support state which normally shifts after the big hit ends to the next big hit. In addition, it may be the symbol change display number from the end of the normal big hit to the next big hit (that is, it may include the symbol change display number in the electric support state).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 222 (1 a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 222 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. An area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 222 (1a), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 222 (1a), a big hit start number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 222 (1 a), the start number display during the big hit is displayed as “244 rotations after the big hit”, and after the power support state which shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit ends, the special figure 1 and FIG. This indicates that the symbol change display of the special figure 2 has been performed 244 times. In addition, in this embodiment, although the big hit start number display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

  In FIG. 222 (1b), the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the big hit start number display is counted by one, and the display is updated to "245 rotations after the big hit".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (1c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 222 (1d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the start number display during the big hit is counted by one, and the display is updated to “246 rotations after the big hit”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (1e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the start number display during the big hit is displayed in this manner. For example, the start number display during the big hit shown in FIG. 222 (1e) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. May be performed. That is, the number mode in the big hit start number display shown in FIG. 222 (1e ') is different from the normal display, and in this effect example, even number setting (any of setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6) is performed. ?). In this example, the setting suggestion of the even number setting is produced. However, for example, a combination of numbers that implies the current setting (for example, if the display mode is changed by 444 rotations, the setting 4 or more is suggested). By changing the display mode when the display mode changes at 555 rotation, which indicates that the setting is 5 or more, various settings can be suggested. It is to be noted that the setting suggestion by the display of the number of hits during the big hit indicates that, for example, the low setting tends to increase the number of symbol changes during the big hit, so that the low setting is more likely to appear (for example, in the case of setting 2 or 3). Then, a setting suggestion effect such as negating the setting 1 may be performed, so that the player is not bored.

  FIG. 222 (2a) to FIG. 222 (e) show an effect of displaying the remaining symbol change display times of the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) which shifts after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (2a), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 222 (2a), the special figure 1 is in a state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, while the special figure 2 is in a symbol change display state. In the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the corner, “x” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, but in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, "-" Indicating that the symbol variation is being displayed is displayed. In addition, in the electric support state, since the effect display mainly performing the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the effect related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 (variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed on the decorative symbol display device. Absent.

  Furthermore, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 222 (2a) is the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. An area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 222 (2a), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 222 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display count display in the electric support state is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 222 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display count display indicates "Electric support remaining eight times", and the remaining symbol variation display count until the end of the electrical support state may be eight. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol change display count display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

  In FIG. 222 (2b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the remaining symbol variation display count display is decremented by one, and the display is updated to "7 remaining electric support".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (2c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. It should be noted that two game balls have entered the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 until the current symbol change display is completed, so the reserved number of the special figure 1 is four.

  In FIG. 222 (2d), the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes h0, and the reserved icons located at the display positions of the second to fourth reserved icons h12 to h14 become the first to third reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1, respectively. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the remaining symbol change display count display is decremented by one, and the display is updated to “6 remaining electric support”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (2e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4−decoration 8−decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display count display is displayed in this manner. For example, the remaining symbol variation display count display shown in FIG. 222 (2e) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 222 (2e ′). A setting suggestion may be made. That is, the form of the numbers in the remaining symbol variation display count display shown in FIG. 222 (2e ') is different from the normal display, and this effect example suggests that the setting is 6. In this example of the effect, the setting suggestion of the setting 6 is directed. For example, a number suggesting the current setting (for example, if the display mode changes in the remaining 45 rotations, the setting 4 or 5 is suggested). However, when the display mode changes in the remaining 44 rotations, setting 4 or more is suggested, etc.), by changing the display mode, various mode setting suggestions can be performed.

  The mode of change of the display mode of the numbers is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the display mode may be changed by changing the color, size, and shape of the numbers, or the display mode may be changed by adding a character. By doing so, the setting may be suggested. In addition, for example, when the display “Electric support remaining six times” is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the remaining symbol variation display count display. Further, for example, when "246 rotations after the big hit" is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the big hit start number display. In addition, the number-of-big-hit start number display and the remaining symbol change display number display may be displayed only for a good number of times such as "10". The setting may be suggested by displaying the number of times (for example, “66”).

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the setting suggestion is performed by changing the display mode of the symbol variation display number and the display mode of the remaining symbol variation display number of the electronic support. The effect performed when the number of times is a specific number of times (for example, every five times) is performed when the number of times is different from the specific number of times (for example, the fourth time, etc.). Good. In addition, a specific effect may be performed at a specific number of times (for example, every five times), and setting suggestion may be performed by performing an effect different from the specific effect. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the effect of performing the setting suggestion with the remaining symbol variation display number of the electric support has been described. However, for example, in a so-called ST machine, the setting suggestion may be performed with the remaining symbol variation display number of the positive variation. Good.

  Next, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 223 (A) shows a state in which the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 1 is completed in the normal gaming state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in combination with the corresponding symbols. In the present embodiment, normally, the mini symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen are also stopped and displayed in the same symbol combination in accordance with the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 223). In the case where the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns out of the “decoration 4−decoration 1−decoration 7”, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at “417”.) In the effect example shown in FIG. The mini-design is “121” for the combination of the decorations of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and the setting 1 and the setting 2 are denied, that is, it is suggested that the setting is 3 or more. are doing. In addition, the display mode of the mini symbol is not limited to the above-described one. For example, when a mini symbol different from the combination of the decorative symbols is “456”, it may be suggested that the setting is 4 or more. Good. Alternatively, a high setting may be suggested by the frequency at which the combination of the decorative symbol and the result of the mini symbol do not match.

  FIG. 223 (B) shows another effect example of setting suggestion using a mini symbol. In this effect example, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols out of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at “1-1-panda”. For example, this shows a state in which setting suggestion for negating setting 1 is being performed. When a “panda” appears in the mini symbol, the symbol may be used as a high-setting symbol, such as setting 6 being determined, or may be used as a symbol indicating that a setting change has been made. You may.

  FIG. 223 (C-1) to FIG. 223 (C-2) show an example of an effect in the case of over-winning in the small hit game. That is, in the small hitting game according to the present embodiment, the small hitting game ends when ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a, but the game balls enter from the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a. It may take some time to pass through the prize count switch SW1 from the end. Therefore, winning of more than ten game balls (so-called over winning) may occur in the second variable winning opening 235a. In the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs in the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 223 (C-2), 165 prize balls are generated because 11 game balls have won, and “165 / 150get!” Indicating the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the small hit game is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. In the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs, a predetermined over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the number of prize balls for the over-prize may not be displayed. Further, the over-winning sound may not be output.

  In the present embodiment, setting suggestion may be performed when an over-winning prize occurs. For example, instead of the normal over-winning sound (voice output of “picone”) shown in FIG. 223 (C-2), as shown in FIG. 223 (C-2 ′) and FIG. In some cases, an over-winning sound including setting suggestions may be output. In the effect example shown in FIG. 223 (C-2 '), a normal over-winning sound is made another over-winning sound to indicate that the setting is high. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 223 (C-2 ″), for example, a sound “Sigoro ~” is output in place of the normal over-winning sound, suggesting that the setting is 4 or more. I have. In the present embodiment, a setting suggestion effect by voice output was performed as a suggestion effect performed at the time of the over-winning, but a high setting suggestion by changing a light emission pattern of a display or an image may be performed, for example. . Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect in the case of the over-winning in the small hitting game state has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the case of the over-winning in the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example of an effect in which the setting is suggested by an over winning sound has been described. For example, the opening sound of the variable winning opening output at the start of the round and the winning sound output at the time of winning the variable winning opening are described. For example, an unusual sound may be output to suggest the setting.

  In addition, when a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and a transition is made to a certain effect mode among the plurality of effect modes, a specific condition (for example, when the next symbol variation display after SP reach is performed is started) And the like, the setting may be made in some cases, and the setting may be suggested by shifting to a certain effect mode at a timing different from a specific condition. In addition, there may be a case where a transition is made to a look-ahead mode in which a specific reach effect is finally performed in advance, and in this case, setting suggestion is made by shifting to a look-ahead mode even when a specific reach effect is not performed. It may be performed. In a pachinko machine that produces a jackpot by displaying a combination of jackpot decoration patterns on any one of a plurality of activated lines, a specific activated line (for example, a center line) is used. In some cases, the combination of big hit decorative symbols may be displayed to suggest setting. Further, an effect (tutorial effect) for explaining when the setting suggestion is performed may or may not be performed. Further, the timing at which the setting suggestion is performed may be constantly notified, or the notification may be made when the timing at which the setting suggestion is approaching.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a standing effect with a focus on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 224 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the 49th symbol change display is performed in the power support state shifted after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. As in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variation machine in which both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed at the same time, when the symbol variation display is started, the number of remaining variations in the electric support state is reduced. Is decremented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the symbol change display is started 50 times after the power support state, the power support state ends, and the game mode shifts to the normal game state. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (a), the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit is the last symbol change display in the electric support state. For this reason, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character of "DENSO SAPOLAST" is displayed, and the fact is notified. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (a), both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are simultaneously performed. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time to be a small hit is 580 seconds.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 224 (a) is an electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the power support state, the display of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lights of the to-draw 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 224 (a), four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all of the four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 224 is the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), and thus the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is won. This is to cause the variable display of the special figure 1 to be executed many times.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (b) shows a state when the 49th symbol change display is completed for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 after the normal big hit game ends. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in this embodiment, after the end of the normal big hit game, the electric support state is continued until the symbol change display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started 50 times. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (b), the special figure 1 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decoration pattern is also a combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop display. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "417" in accordance with this. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game related to the normal big hit has ended and the 50th symbol change display has started in the special figure 1. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (c), the symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 2, and the number of the symbol variation display held is four (namely, retention 4). Further, in the special figure 1, there are three symbol variation displays which are suspended (that is, suspension 3). In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (c), when the 50th symbol variation display starts and the electric support state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state. More disadvantageous. Therefore, in the decorative design display device 208, the display of "right-handed" displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen disappears, and a left-handed suggestion of "return to left-handed!" Notification is performed. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (d) shows a state in which the jackpot game relating to the normal jackpot has been completed, the 51st symbol change display has been completed in the special figure 1, and the result of the loss has been displayed. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (d), the display is stopped at the combination of the symbols "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "541" in accordance with this. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 224 (e), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  FIG. 224 (f) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times, and the result of a certain symbol variation display is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (f), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 8—decoration 0—decoration 3”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is three, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is four. Hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (f), the special figure 2 continues to perform the symbol variation display with the small hit.

  In FIG. 224 (g), the reservation icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed respectively by the movement animation, and the suspension icon at the display position of the first suspension icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit still occurs is continuously performed.

  FIG. 224 (h) shows a state in which a transition has been made to SP reach after reaching reach. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (i), a state is shown in which the symbol variation display, which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds of the special figure 2, ends, and a small hit result (for example, “special figure f”) is derived. ing. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed until the small hit game relating to the small hit is completed, the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and substantially. The display is postponed by an amount corresponding to the interruption of the display of the symbol variation display result of the special figure 1. However, even if a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect of the decorative symbol change display according to the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (j), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (j), it is shown that the lord character is defeated by the swordsman character and is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, as shown in FIG. 224 (k), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 starts, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed. You. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in order to return to the default background image from SP reach, all are temporarily displayed except for the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Is shown.

  Thereafter, when the arrival of the initial symbol variation time (for example, 90 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, as shown in FIG. 224 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols. Then, when the initial symbol change time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (m) displays the characters “wait a little” together with the characters of the plurality of child pandas. A normal production effect is provided (normal production effect 1). The normal effect in which the character of the child panda appears appears when the “special figure f” is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1. The content of the staging effect is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 224 (n), the result of the loss is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4”. -Decoration 3-Decoration 4 is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative patterns at the outset, and the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "434" in accordance with the combination, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is two, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is three. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (n), the special figure 2 is still performing the symbol variation display. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure f” is displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, when another small hit result (for example, “special figure g”) is displayed and a small hit occurs, the staging effect shown in FIG. ) May be performed for a long time to produce the effect (normal effect 2 for a long time). In the case of a small hit, the same effect may be provided for the same content regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this effect example, if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 in which the SP reach is performed, for example, a special pause effect for the SP reach is performed as the pause effect. Alternatively, a stage change effect in which the background image changes may be performed together with or after the pause effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225, an example of a pre-reading notice effect that may be performed when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a wait-reading notice effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 225 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which the 50th symbol variation display is performed in the power support state shifted after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. That is, after the big hit game related to the normal big hit, the last symbol change display in the electric support state is displayed. For this reason, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character of "DENSO SAPOLAST" is displayed, and the fact is notified. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are the simultaneous variation machines capable of simultaneously displaying the symbol variation, the timing shown in FIG. In the figure, both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed at the same time. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time to be a small hit is 580 seconds.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 225 (a) is an electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the power support state, the display of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lights of the to-draw 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 225 (a), four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as the other reserved icons h11, h12, and h14 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display form of the pre-reading notice) may be performed by the pre-reading reserved icon. Note that FIGS. 225 (a) to (e) are the same as FIGS. 224 (a) to (e) except that the third hold in the special figure 1 is an object of prefetching. The description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (f), the symbol variation display which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds of the special figure 2 is finished, and a small hit result (for example, “special figure g”) is derived. The situation is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from the occurrence of the small hit to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and the special figure The display is postponed by an amount corresponding to the interruption of the display of the symbol variation display result of No. 1. However, even if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the effect of the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (g), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even during the small hit game. Then, when the small hitting game is over, as shown in FIG. 225 (h), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 starts, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed. You.

  Thereafter, when the arrival of the initial symbol variation time (for example, 9 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol> the right decorative symbol> the middle decorative symbol, and as a result, FIG. As shown in ()), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1”. Then, in this effect example, when the initial symbol change time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (j) displays a shoji on the entire display screen and releases the shoji. The character GLG who smokes cigarettes from the inside appears, and the character of "heat" is displayed, indicating that a pre-reading notice using a stall effect is being performed. The execution time of the wait pre-reading notice effect is a period from the time of the small hit to the end of the small hit game relating to the small hit (that is, the period in which the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted). . It should be noted that the execution time of the above-described wait-staging effect (the wait-ahead look-ahead announcement effect) does not necessarily need to coincide with the period during which the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Any time may be set as long as it corresponds to the suspended period. Also, the execution time of the pause effect (the delay look-ahead notice effect) is always performed for a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds, etc.) regardless of the period during which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Is also good. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 225 (k), the result of the loss is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays “decoration 4”. -Decoration 5-Decoration 1 is stopped and displayed at the combination of the outlying decorative symbols, and the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at "451" in accordance therewith, and the display result of the outlier is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is two, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is three. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (k), the special figure 2 is still performing the symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, when “special figure g” is displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the prefetching notice effect is provided while the contents shown in FIG. 225 (j) are provided. If the result of another small hit (for example, “special figure f”) is displayed in the special figure 2 and the small hit is made, the content is different from that shown in FIG. 225 (j). For example, as shown in FIG. 226 (j '), an effect in which the Savohani group appears as the delayed look-ahead preview effect may be performed. In addition, in the case of a small hit, the same effect may be provided for the same content regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this case, for example, the color of a certain character or character may be changed depending on the type of small hit. In addition, the reliability of the prefetch notice to be executed may be different depending on the type of the small hit. Further, the reliability of the pre-reading notice may differ depending on the type of the small hit and the content of the pre-reading notice to be executed.

  In FIG. 225 (l), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the special figure 2 is still performing the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 225 (m), the decorative symbol of “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (n), the decoration pattern of “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”. Is done. Also, at this time, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have been deleted, and only the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbols are displayed. In addition, the variable display is continuously performed on any of the mini symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (o), the decoration design starts to fluctuate again with the display of the character “Re-lottery !!”, and a re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3" or "decorative 7-decorative", which is a combination of decorative patterns that determine a big hit and a transition to a probable change state advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “decoration 7—decoration 7” is fueling the expectation that the final display will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (p), the state in which the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from the combination of the big hits of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” and the re-lottery effect has failed is shown. Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (q) is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. Further, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 225 (q) is stopped and displayed with “○”, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of “444”. In FIG. 225 (q), the background is not displayed, but a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 225 (r), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “Challenge big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit, and a character of “Please hit right!” Is displayed. He is pushing right.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, and the design variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In the case where there is a target and the pre-reading notice is performed based on this, the pre-reading notice is performed in a staggered effect, so that the player can enjoy the time until the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit In some cases, expectations can be given to In addition, in the case where the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed during the period shown in FIG. 225, a big hit may or may not occur. Further, in this effect example, the effect example in which the design change display of the special figure 1 in which the progress is interrupted by the special figure 2 being a small hit is out of order is shown, but the special figure 2 becomes the small hit. In the event that the symbol fluctuation display of Toku-zu 1 where the progress is interrupted due to this is a big hit, the pre-reading notice effect is not performed so long, that is, after the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol starts, Until the display in FIG. 1 is confirmed, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and when the result of the special figure 1 during the symbol change display becomes a large hit, a staggered effect is provided. After the swing fluctuation has started without executing the (preliminary preview notice production), the fluctuation is continued until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Effect) may be executed. Further, in this effect example, for example, a continuous notice as a pre-reading notice effect that is repeated a plurality of times, a pre-reading mode as a pre-read notice effect that continues a plurality of times, the execution is started earlier than the pre-reading notice effect, and these are started. There may be a case where the pre-reading notice effect is performed in a superimposed manner during the execution of the pre-read notice effect.

  Next, referring to FIG. 226 (a) to FIG. 226 (h), in the normal game state, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in which the special figure 2 is a big hit. An example of the effect will be described.

  FIG. 226 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (a), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 226 (a), the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed, but the special figure 2 is in a symbol change display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the reserved number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, and in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, the symbol change is being displayed. "-" Is displayed. The symbol change display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 226 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the holding icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 226 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 2.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (b), as shown in FIG. Then, symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (d), the decorative symbol during the variable display is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. The character "Preparing for big hit !!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen to notify that the display is in progress. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 is extremely long, about 10 minutes. In some cases, the player does not notice this and stops playing the game, which may be disadvantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as described above, for example, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit, The result of the symbol variation display in FIG. 2 is to be notified that a big hit has occurred. In addition, by using such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent unnecessary beating. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed for a moment, the display of "Preparing for the big hit !!" is performed. May surprise the player. Alternatively, the display of “Under preparation for a big hit !!” may be performed without starting the change display of the decorative symbol. In this case, the large decoration pattern is being prepared without the fluctuation display being once performed, so that it is possible to give an illusion as to whether or not the previous fluctuation has been continued, so that the user can feel as if he has obtained one hold. May be possible. At the timing shown in FIG. 226 (d), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one, and one reservation icon h11 is displayed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the undesignated symbol (“special figure C”), and the decorative symbols are also adjusted to “special figure 194-special figure 195- It is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Special figure 1". In addition, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed at "341" in accordance with the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed. In addition, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is still continued, and the display of the character “Preparing for big hit !!” is still continued.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (f), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is started. At this time, the decorative design is also starting to fluctuate according to the design fluctuating display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special map 2 is still continued, and the display of the character "Preparing for big hits !!" is still continued. For this reason, it may be possible to make it appear that a prefetch notice (continuous notice) is being performed.

  Thereafter, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (g), a state where the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Also, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and a stop display is performed with a missing symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols out of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and also stops and displays the mini symbol at "417" accordingly. I have. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (h), the character "Please hit right!" Is displayed together with the character "Challenge big hit" indicating that a big hit has occurred, and the player makes a right hand hit. This encourages the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the design change display of the special figure 1, the result of the design change display of the special figure 1 is discarded at that time, and the out-of-design is changed. Will be displayed. In addition, when there is a symbol change display suspended in the special figure 1, after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 2 is finished, the symbols are sequentially consumed. In the same manner, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the design change display of the special figure 2, the result of the design change display of the special figure 2 is discarded at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1, and the outlying pattern Will be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a simultaneous fluctuating machine has been described. However, the present invention is also applicable to other types of pachinko machines, for example, it is also possible to apply to a type 1 and type 2 mixer.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (1a) to (1h), an effect example in a case where a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the symbol change display of the special figure 2 in the probable change state will be described. 227, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 227 (1a) shows a state where the symbol variation display is being performed in the probability variation state. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously performing the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 Both of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed in parallel. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (1a), the total acquisition prize in which the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that it is during the small hit RUSH (that is, during the probability change state) is displayed as “0480 pt”. It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Also, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 227 (1a) is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 227 (1a), three reserved icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the three reserved icons h21, h22, Each of h23 is displayed in the default display mode (circular pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 227 (1a), the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines in order to make it easy to see that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 227 is a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state). This is because a large number of variable displays are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (1b), a state is shown in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol ("special figure C"). In accordance with this, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, "x" indicating that the display has been stopped and displayed with a lost symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol change display is still continued, and the decorative symbol is also changed and displayed according to the symbol change display of the special figure 2.

  After that, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (1c) shows that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. I have. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (1d), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (1d), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the departure, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 6−decoration 3−decoration 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is still continued.

  After that, one symbol change display of the special figure 2 which has been held is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. The character "The big hit is approaching!" Is displayed, and the notice of the big hit in the special map 1 is given. As a result, the player can recognize that a big hit has occurred, and may be able to further increase the sense of expectation for the big hit and prevent unnecessary hitting. In addition, you may make it change the display mode of the decorative symbol during the variable display and notify the big hit of the special figure 1 in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227 (1f), the decorative pattern during the variable display is moved to the upper right corner of the display screen and reduced and displayed, while the character "approaching big hit !!" is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (1g), a state where the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Also, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is discarded, and the stop display is performed with a missing symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols out of “decoration 0-decoration 3−decoration 4”, and also stops and displays the mini symbol at “034” accordingly. I have. After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (1h), the character "Please hit right!" Is displayed together with the character "Challenge big hit" indicating that a big hit has occurred, and the player makes a right-hand hit. This encourages the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the design change display of the special figure 2, the result of the design change display of the special figure 2 is discarded at that time, and the out-of-design is changed. Will be displayed. In addition, when there is a symbol change display suspended in the special figure 2, the special game is sequentially consumed after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 1 is completed. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 change display, the result of the special figure 1 display change display is discarded at the time when the special figure 2 hits the big hit. Will be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (2a) to (2e), an effect example in the case where a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 in the probable change state will be described. Note that, in this effect example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not suspended and the symbol variation display is not performed. As shown in FIG. 227 (2a), the decorative symbol display device 208 The display is in a standby state in which the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 227 (2a) shows a state where only the special figure 1 is displaying the symbol variation in the probable variation state. In the probable change state, unlike the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the decorative display is displayed in a fluctuating manner in accordance with the design fluctuating display of the special figure 2. Not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (2a), the total winning prize in which the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that it is during the small hit RUSH (that is, during the probability change state) is displayed as “0480pt”. It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Also, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 227 (2a) is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (2a), since there is no symbol change display which is suspended in the special figure 2, no suspension icon is displayed in the suspension icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 280 either. Also, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 1. Here, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 227 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because a large number of variable displays are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (2b), a state is shown in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol (“special figure C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, "x" indicating that the display has been stopped and displayed with a lost symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display has not been started yet, and the decorative symbols are also stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4."

  After that, one of the reserved symbol change displays of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (2c) shows that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. I have. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. In this effect example, after the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, no warning display regarding the big hit is performed, but the warning display may be performed.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (2d), the state where the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, since the symbols are still displayed in a stopped state, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (2e), the character "challenge big hit" indicating that the big hit has been displayed is displayed. In order to alert the player, there is a case where right-handing has not been performed, so that the character "Right-hand-out and pass through the big hit generation gate!" Is displayed to urge right-handing. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  Next, an example of the effect in the case where the small hits are held consecutively in the probability change game state will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 228 is a figure which shows an example of the effect regarding the display of the total acquired prize balls centering on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. In FIG. 228, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit have occurred, and the character "35th" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (a), a state in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed in the certainty change state is shown. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no held symbol change display. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), the character "during small hit RUSH" indicating that it is in the probable change state is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen, and below it. "12215pt" is displayed as the total winning prize ball number display, and 12215 prize balls are obtained by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a). Is shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 228 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 228 (a), four reserved icons h21, h22, h23 and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the four reserved icons h21 and h21 of the special figure 1 are displayed. h22, h23, and h24 are all displayed in a default display mode (a round, plain, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. Note that the first hold and the third hold are symbol change displays that are small hits, and in FIG. 228 (a), the first change that is a symbol change display that is a small hit is for convenience of explanation. Although the hatching icons h21 and h23 of the third special figure 2 are shown by hatching, actually, the same display mode as the other holding icons h22 and h24 of the special figure 2 (circular blank pattern and white Display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 228 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because the variable display in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (b), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the departure, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 6−decoration 3−decoration 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (c), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is performed is shown. In this embodiment, the character "CHANCE!" Is displayed in place of the display of "small hit RUSH in progress" to notify that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. It should be noted that the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, or the symbol change "Chang!" May be always displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d), the small hit symbol ("special symbol g") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed accordingly. . In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at “666” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (e) shows a state in which the small hit game has started. When the small hit game is started, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that appears to be a small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive channels displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to “36th”, and the user is notified that this is the 36th consecutive channel. Also, at the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (f), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 winning balls are obtained. The character “15/150 get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (g), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150 / 150get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed. Also, in this effect example, a small hit is included in the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2, which is reserved, and the character of "W-UP chance!" The information is displayed in a wrapped state, and the player is informed in advance that a pending consecutive change will occur.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 228 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "small" indicating that the probable change state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, in this example of the production, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not counted up, and the inverted display is performed. Has been notified. That is, the total number of acquired prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit remains “12215pt”. In addition, the character display of “W-UP chance!” Is also continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hitting game is not added during the small hitting game. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. This may allow the player to have a sense of expectation for the pending consecutive chan. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the count of the total acquired prize balls is not performed, the reverse display is performed to notify the fact, but the display may be performed in another display mode. For example, mosaic display may be performed to make it difficult to identify the current total number of acquired prize balls.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (i) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game has ended. As shown in FIG. 228 (i), in this embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), the "small hit RUSH continues!" Is continuously displayed, and the character "W-UP CHANCE!" Is also displayed continuously, so that the small hitting game is smoothly shifted to the stable state after the end of the small hitting game. I'm doing a production that looks like. At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (j) shows a state in which the small hit has been completed and the second symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a small hit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 228 (k), in this effect example, before all of the symbol variation displays held during the small hitting are exhausted, the decorative symbol that was displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed. Move to the center and zoom in. At this time, the decorative symbol during the variable display overlaps with the character “W-UP Chance!”, But the decorative symbol during the variable display may overlap with the character “W-UP Chance!”. . The display of the total number of winning prize balls is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (l), the small hit symbol ("special symbol g") is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. . In addition, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed at “888” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbols. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred. That is, a state in which a small-reserved consecutive chan is generated is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (m) shows a state in which the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game is being performed, and the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. The display is updated to "37th time" and the 37th consecutive channel is notified. In addition, at the upper left of the display screen, “decoration 8”, which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 8—decoration 8—decoration 8” has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (n), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and fifteen winning balls are obtained. Indicates that 165 prize balls have been obtained in addition to the number of prize balls obtained in the previous small hit, and that it is expected that 300 prize balls can be obtained in the current small hit in addition to the previous small hit. The letters “165/300 get!” Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. In other words, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls added to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous hit is notified. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (o), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and are obtained in the previous small hit. "300 / 300get!" Indicating that 300 prize balls are obtained by adding the 150 small balls and that 300 prize balls can be expected in this small hit together with the previous small hit. Is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 228 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen starts an animation of counting up, and shows that 300 prize balls acquired in two small hit games are added. Have been. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, after the first small hitting game is completed, the acquired number of prize balls is not added and displayed, and the second small hitting (ie, , The number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game related to the small hit game that has been held consecutively, and added together after the end of the small hit game. As a result, there is a case where the player can have a feeling of acquiring a large amount of prize balls. Thereafter, the display of the total number of winning prize balls is counted up as shown in FIGS. 215 (m) to (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. "12515pt" to which the number of prize balls has been added is displayed.

  Note that, in this production example, an example in which small hits are held consecutively is shown. However, for example, a 3R likelihood variable big hit or the like is also applied to a large hit that has the same appearance as a small hit. And the like may be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be difficult to distinguish between a big hit and a small hit, and the game may be sharpened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, an example of an effect in a case where a large hit has been made to a hold consecutive chan after a small hit in the probability changing game state will be described. FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect related to the display of the total acquired prize balls centering on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. 229, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit have occurred, and the character "35th" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (a), a state is shown in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed in the probable change state. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no held symbol change display. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), the character "during small hitting RUSH" indicating that it is in the probable change state is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen, and below it. "12215pt" is displayed as the total winning prize ball number display, and 12215 prize balls are obtained by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a). Is shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 229 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 229 (a), four reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the four reserved icons h21, h21, and h21 of the special figure 1 are displayed. h22, h23, and h24 are all displayed in a default display mode (a round, plain, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. The first hold is a symbol change display that becomes a small hit, and the third hold is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit. In FIG. 229 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first hold icon h21 that is a symbol change display that becomes a small hit is hatched, and the third hold icon h23 that is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit is displayed. Is shown with cross-hatching, but in fact, it has the same display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode) as the reserve icons h22 and h24 of the other special drawings 2. The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 229 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because the variable display in FIG. Hereafter, FIGS. 229 (a) to (f) are different from FIGS. 228 (a) to (f) except that the symbol variation display of the third special figure 2, which is held, becomes a big hit. ) Is the same as that of FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (g), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150 / 150get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed. Also, in this example of production, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2, which is on hold, includes a big hit, and the character "Large Bonus Super Heat!" The information is displayed in a wrapped state, and the player is informed in advance that a pending consecutive change will occur.

  After that, when the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 229 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “small variation” indicating that the probable change state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, in this example of the production, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not counted up, and the inverted display is performed. Has been notified. That is, the total number of acquired prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit remains “12215pt”. Further, the character display of "Large bonus super heat!" Is also displayed continuously. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hitting game is not added during the small hitting game. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. This may allow the player to have a sense of expectation for the pending consecutive chan.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game ends. As shown in FIG. 229 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), the "small hit RUSH continues!" Is displayed continuously, and the character of "Large bonus super heat!" Is also displayed continuously. And directing them to look like they are. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (j), it is shown that the small hit is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (k), in this effect example, before all of the symbol variation displays held during the small hitting are exhausted, the decorative symbol that was displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed. It moves to the center and is enlarged and displayed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern during the variable display overlaps with the character "Large bonus super heat!", But the decorative pattern during the variable display overlaps with the character "Large bonus super heat!" Is also good. The display of the total number of winning prize balls is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (l), the big hit symbol ("special figure e") is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, it is notified that the 10R certain change big hit of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is confirmed. The combination of the big hit decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "333" in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “停止” is stopped and displayed to indicate that a big hit has occurred. That is, a state in which a jackpot-reserved consecutive chan is generated is shown. Eventually, in FIG. 229 (m), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big chance big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and a series displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. The display of the number of chans is updated to “37th”, and it is notified that it is the 37th chan chan.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (n), a state in which the game of the first round is performed is shown. In the first round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Congratulations on Great Chance!" Along with the character of Dr. Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, and congratulates on the 10R probability change big hit. . And, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "decoration 3" which is a jackpot decoration pattern at the time of a jackpot is displayed. In the upper center of the display screen, a display of “1R” which is the current number of rounds is displayed as the number of rounds. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (n), two game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by opening the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 30 winning balls are obtained. In addition, it shows that 180 prize balls were acquired in addition to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous small hit, and that 1650 prize balls can be expected in the big hit in total including the previous small hit. The character “180 / 1650get!” Is displayed below the display of the number of rounds. In other words, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls added to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous hit is notified. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  FIG. 229 (o) shows a state in which the tenth round is completed due to ten game balls having entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the tenth round, and a big hit end effect is being performed. Since the big hit this time is a 10R positive change big hit, the character of "small hit RUSH continuation!" Indicating that the positive change state continues is displayed. In the big hit game of this time, in a certain round (for example, the third round), eleven game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a and an over-winning occurs. "1665 / 1650get!", Which indicates that 1650 prize balls can be obtained by adding up to 150 prize balls obtained at the same time, and that 1650 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this big hit together with the previous small hit. Characters are displayed at the top center of the display screen. That is, since the number of prize balls generated by over-winning is also included, the number of prize balls actually obtained is displayed more than the number of prize balls expected to be obtained in the previous small hit and the current big hit. Will be done. Note that the number of prize balls generated by over-winning may not be included. Also, at this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not performed.

  After that, when the big hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 229 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "small hit RUSH continue!" The display also shows that the decorative design is displayed small, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is counted up, and 1665 prize balls obtained in the previous small hit game and the current big hit game are added. Is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive champion occurs, the acquired number of award balls is not added and displayed after the first small hit game is completed, and the big hit 2 ( That is, the small hit game is added together with the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game relating to the big hit with the pending consecutive change. As a result, there is a case where the player can have a feeling of acquiring a large amount of prize balls. Thereafter, the display of the total number of awarded balls is counted up as shown in FIGS. 215 (m) to (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. 229 (q), 1665 pieces are added to “12215pt”. "13880 pt" to which the number of award balls is added is displayed. Note that, in this effect example, since the number of prize balls to be added is as large as 1665, it is shown that the animation is continued after the big hit game is completed, for example, during the execution of the ninth symbol change display. I have. In this case, even if the suspension of the four symbol change displays is exhausted, the small decorative symbols may be continuously displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen until the counting up of the total number of winning prize balls is completed. .

  In the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan is generated, the total number of prize balls obtained in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the previous hit (big hit / small hit) is displayed on the display of the total obtained prize balls. Instead of counting, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the later hit is counted and counted up after the end of the hit game related to the later hit. Therefore, if the next jackpot is promised by the probability change, the number of award balls won in the jackpot game related to the previous probability change jackpot will not be counted in the total acquired award ball number display, and the subsequent jackpot will not be counted. In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot is completed, the number of acquired prize balls may be collectively counted up to display the total acquired prize balls.

  Also, in this production example, an example in which two consecutive chans are generated during the reservation is described. After the hit game according to (small hit) is completed, the number of prize balls acquired in the series of the hit games may be collectively counted up to display the total acquired prize balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example of the effect of the small-reserved rendezvous chan and the example of the effect of the large-reservation retentive chan are described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. Because some combinations are common, for example, in the case of a big hit and a small hit, the effect on the display is performed in the same mode or a similar mode, and it is determined which hit has occurred. You may make it difficult. More specifically, for example, the effect in the case of a big hit is made as shown in FIG. 228 (l) to FIG. 229 (l) to (n) of FIG. 229, it is also possible to make the big hits (for example, the 3R probable big hit) appear to be consecutive.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chan occurs, the total acquired prize balls are counted up collectively. For example, when a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan occurs. In such a case, the count-up of the total number of winning prize balls may be permitted collectively. For example, when a certain number of consecutive chan (for example, 10 consecutive chan), a reserved consecutive chan is generated thereafter. In such a case, the total number of awarded balls may be counted up at a time, or a condition can be set by a player, and when the set condition is satisfied, the total number of awarded balls is counted up. May be performed collectively.

In the above description,
“Production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
When the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198, the setting is changed. By pressing the change button 194, any one of a plurality of settings can be set, etc.],
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means, for example, an out ball detecting means [for example, an out ball detecting sensor SWout or the like],
The out ball detecting means is means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered an out port [for example, the out port 240 or the like],
One of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestion effect [for example, a character of a Gol old man who opens a shoji and smokes a cigarette with a balloon of “High setting!” As shown in FIG. 216 (1e). GLG appears, a production that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high, etc.]
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a setting selected from the plurality of settings [for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (1e), the shoji is opened and “high setting!” The first setting suggestion effect that the character GLG of the Gol who smokes cigarettes with the balloon suggests that the setting is 4 or more],
The first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means [for example, in step S501 in FIG. 206, the game ball passes through at least the out ball detection sensor SWout. If the setting suggestion point (P) to be counted becomes 3000 or more, and the winning is done in the suggestive effect execution lottery, the condition is satisfied, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute the plurality of effects.

  Further, the plurality of game ball detecting means may detect only that the game ball has passed, or may detect something other than the game ball having passed. In addition, the plurality of game ball detection means may always detect that a game ball has passed, or may not detect that a game ball has passed.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, only one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. A setting other than any one of the settings may be selected. Further, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be always selected, or when a setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. In some cases, one of the settings may not be selected.

  In addition, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings that differ only in the jackpot probability may be selected, or when a setting change operation is received, a probability other than the jackpot probability may be selected. Any one of a plurality of different settings may be selected.

  Also, only when the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not received, at least. Any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected.

  Further, the out ball detecting means may detect only game balls that have entered the out mouth, or may detect game balls other than game balls that have entered the out mouth. Further, the out ball detecting means may always detect a game ball that has entered the out port, or may not detect a game ball that has entered the out port.

  In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may indicate only the setting selected from the plurality of settings, or may indicate the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may be. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be one that necessarily suggests a selected setting of a plurality of settings, or may not suggest a selected setting of a plurality of settings. There may be.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. May also be started. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect is not started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. There may be cases.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied. The production may be started.

  Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detection means, or may be satisfied in relation to a result other than the detection result of the out-ball detection means. It may be. Further, the first effect execution condition may be always satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means, or may not be satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means. There may be.

In addition, “the control means [for example, the main control unit 300 or the like] capable of starting one of the plurality of game states is provided,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), a power support state (a special figure low probability state). State high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state,
In the second game state, the first setting suggestion effect may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one of the plurality of game states, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. There may be. Further, the control means may always start one of the plurality of game states, or may not start one of the plurality of game states.

  The control means may be capable of starting only the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be capable of starting a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. You may. Further, the control means may always start the first game state and the second game state, or may not start the first game state and the second game state.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that is always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that may be more disadvantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state. Is also good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the first game state.

  Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the first game state. There may be.

  Also, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state. Is also good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the second game state.

  In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the second game state. There may be.

Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started during a period in which the symbol change display is not executed [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 216 (4b), the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the customer waiting demonstration effect. The production has started, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol change display is not executed, or other than the first setting suggestion effect during the period when the symbol change display is not executed. The production may also be started. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started without fail during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. Is also good.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only during a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed, or the first setting suggestion may be performed in a period other than the period in which the symbol variation display is not performed. The production may be started in some cases.

In addition, "one game ball detection means of the plurality of game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detecting means is provided in a certain area [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and the first special figure starting port. (Lower) 231, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the big hit generating gate 252, etc.].
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is established in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first game ball detecting means may detect only game balls that have entered a certain area, or may also detect game balls that have entered a region other than a certain area. Is also good. Further, the first game ball detecting means may be one that always detects a game ball that has entered a certain area, or may be one that does not always detect a game ball that has entered a certain area. Good.

  In addition, the first effect execution condition may be established only in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means, or may be a result other than the detection result of the first game ball detection means May also be established in connection with this. Further, the first effect execution condition may be established in connection with the detection result of the first game ball detecting means, or may be satisfied with the detection result of the first game ball detecting means. May not be established.

Also, there is a case where the first setting suggestion effect is started at a first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIG. At the point when the first setting suggestion effect is being performed, etc.),
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a second timing [for example, as shown in FIG. If the reach is in progress, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach is finished, etc.],
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing, or the first effect effect condition may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. An effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started at one timing. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of the first setting. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or in a case other than when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second effect may be performed when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. At the same time, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of the first setting. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing only when the first effect condition is satisfied, or when the first effect condition is not satisfied. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing.

  Further, the first timing and the second timing may be partially different timings, or the first timing and the second timing may be entirely different timings.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, a display of the Sabohani group shown in FIG. 217 (1a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
There is a case where both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 217 (1a), display of a Sabohani group and first setting suggestion effect And so on are performed at the same time],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than a certain effect. It may be something. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, there may be a case where only both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed, or other than both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. May also be in a state where the effect is also being executed. In addition, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be in a state in which both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed. There may be cases where there is no state.

Also, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, display of a Sabohani group shown in FIG. 217 (2a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
During the period when the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period [for example, a period during which the big hit end effect is executed]”), the first effect execution condition is set. If it is established, the first setting suggestion effect is started after the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 217 (2a) to (2b), a big hit end effect is executed. Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started in the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is started after the big hit end effect ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started other than during execution of a certain effect. There may be. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period (a period during which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed), the first setting suggestion effect is provided after the certain period has elapsed. May be started, or if the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed. When the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be performed in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started after the certain period has elapsed.

  Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started even after the certain period has elapsed. Further, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. Even in cases other than when the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed.

Also, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, display of a Sabohani group shown in FIG. 217 (2a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (eg, a period in which the big hit end effect is executed), the first setting suggestion is performed. Direction does not start,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than a certain effect. It may be something. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, if the first performance execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, only the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggested effect is being executed, an effect other than the first setting suggested effect may not be started. In addition, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not necessarily be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may be started.

  Further, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect does not have to be started even when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied during a certain period when the suggestion effect is being executed. In addition, when the first performance suggestion condition is satisfied only during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect may not be started even when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period other than the period in which the suggestion effect is sometimes executed.

In addition, it is provided with "achievement suggesting means [for example, display by a point gauge PTG shown in FIG. 216 (1a)] indicating at least the achievement of the first effect execution condition.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the achievement degree suggesting means may indicate only the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition, or may indicate a degree other than the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition. Further, the achievement level suggesting means may be a means that always suggests the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition, or may be one that does not always suggest the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition. .

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
When the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198, the setting is changed. By pressing the change button 194, any one of a plurality of settings can be set, etc.],
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect [for example, a number display image shown in FIG. 219 (1b)].
The first notification effect is an effect including at least information on a game (for example, display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first jackpot),
The first notification effect is an effect that may include a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings. [For example, the character “4560pt Get !!” shown in FIG. 219 (2d) is displayed. The display of the number-of-kills display image includes that the setting is 4 or more],
The first notification effect is an effect that may not include a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings [for example, the characters “2000 pt get!” Shown in FIG. 219 (2b)). , The total number of winning prize balls is made more prominent by displaying the drilling number display image including
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first notification effect may include a setting suggestion, and the first notification effect may be noticed in some cases.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may be one that does not always execute the plurality of effects.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, only one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. A setting other than any one of the settings may be selected. Further, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be always selected, or when a setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. In some cases, one of the settings may not be selected.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having only the big hit probability may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, the probability other than the big hit probability may be selected. Any one of a plurality of different settings may be selected. Also, only when the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not received, at least. Any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected.

  Further, the first notification effect may include only the notification regarding the game, or may include notification other than the notification regarding the game. In addition, the first notification effect may include information about a game, or may not include information about a game.

  In addition, the first notification effect may include only a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may include a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. Some of them may be included. In addition, the first notification effect may include a hint regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings, or may not include a hint regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings. There may be something.

  Further, the first notification effect may be an effect that may not include only the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may be other than the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. The effect may not be included. In addition, the first notification effect may be an effect that does not necessarily include the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may include the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. There may be a certain production.

In addition, “the first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner that can identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. [For example, the drilling number display illustrated in FIG. 219 (2d)] The image is displayed when the total number of winning prize balls reaches 2000, 3000, etc., whereas the image is displayed when the total number of award balls is not the number of drills, such as the character “Get 4560pt !!”. Display makes it possible to recognize that it is a setting suggestion],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be one that may be executed only in a manner that can identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. It may be executed in a mode other than the identifiable mode. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or may be a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. May not be executed.

  It should be noted that the first notification effect may not be able to identify that a suggestion regarding the setting is included. Further, the first notification effect executed at the first timing may include a suggestion regarding the setting.

Also, in the first case [for example, when the total number of acquired prize balls is 2000, etc.], the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is started [for example, in FIG. 219 (1b)). As shown in the figure, a drilling number display image of “2000 pt get!” Is displayed, etc.],
The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started in the first case,
In the second case [for example, when the total number of acquired prize balls is 4,560], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, in FIG. 219 (2d)). As shown, a drilling number display image including a setting suggestion of “4560 pt get!” Is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the suggestion of the setting can be expected depending on the timing at which the first notification effect is executed.

  Here, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may be started, or the effect other than the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may be started. May be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be always started in the first case, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may not start in the first case. There may be.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the first case, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed in a case other than the first case. May be started.

  In addition, in the first case, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, or in the first case, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting. May not be started. Also, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may not necessarily be started, or the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in the first case. May be the case.

  In addition, the first notification effect in which the suggestion regarding the setting is included only in the first case does not have to be started, and the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting also in the case other than the first case. The production need not be started.

  In addition, in the second case, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case, the effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be included. May also be started. Also, in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be necessarily started, or in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Is also good.

  In addition, the first notification effect in which the suggestion regarding the setting is included only in the second case may be started, or the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting also in the case other than the second case. The production may be started in some cases. Also, in the second case, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be included. May be started.

Also, "the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not be started, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case. The production other than the above need not be started. Further, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not necessarily be started, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may be performed. May be started.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include only the setting suggestion in the second case may not be started, and the first case that does not include the suggestion other than the setting suggestion in the second case. The notification effect does not have to be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting only in the second case may not be started, and the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is also included in the case other than the second case. May not be started.

In addition, a certain condition [for example, winning in an execution lottery, being within a specific number of revolutions (for example, 30 revolutions) after the end of a big hit, being a specific day of the week, a condition set by a player, and the like] is The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case that has been established is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied may be started, or the suggestion regarding the setting may be included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. An effect other than the first notification effect to be performed may also be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied may be started, or the suggestion regarding the setting may be included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect may not be started.

  In addition, in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. May also be started. Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, or the setting may be performed in a case other than the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. A first notification effect including a suggestion may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting does not have to be started, and in the second case, When a certain condition is not satisfied, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting does not necessarily have to be started, and in the second case, When a certain condition is not satisfied, a first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, or the second case may be performed. If a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started only when a certain condition is not satisfied, or in the second case, The first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting may not be started in cases other than the case where the condition is not satisfied.

In addition, “the first notification effect is an effect related to at least a jackpot [for example, the total number of winning prize balls, a re-drawing effect when a jackpot occurs, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be related to only the big hit or may be related to other than the big hit. In addition, the first notification effect may always be related to the jackpot or may not be related to the jackpot.

In addition, in the first notification effect, a suggestion regarding a selected setting among the plurality of settings is made in accordance with a display mode of a number [for example, as shown in FIG. Setting suggestions by changing the display format of numbers in, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a sense of incongruity is given by direct use of a timing or a number, and attention can be paid to a suggestion regarding setting.

  Here, in the first notification effect, only the indication regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, the display mode of the numbers may indicate the plurality of settings. Suggestions other than those related to the selected one of the settings may also be made. In addition, in the first notification effect, the indication regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be necessarily performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers. In some cases, no suggestion may be made regarding the selected setting.

  In addition, in the first notification effect, the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be performed only by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, it may be more than the display mode of the numbers. Suggestions may be made regarding the selected setting from the plurality of settings. In addition, only in the first notification effect, the indication regarding the setting selected from the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the effect other than the first notification effect, the display mode of the numbers May suggest a setting selected from among the plurality of settings.

In addition, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed differs depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings. As shown in, the execution lottery is performed based on the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table provided for each setting, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, only the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is performed may be different, or depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings. The probability other than the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different. Also, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different, or depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may not be different.

  In addition, depending on the setting selected from the plurality of settings, the probability that only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed may be different, or by the setting selected from the plurality of settings, The probability that an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different. Also, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed may be different, or according to the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different.

  Further, only depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting is executed may be different, or the setting may be different from the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. Depending on the setting, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different.

Also, “one of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect [for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG.
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again [for example, FIG. As shown in a) to (d) of the drawing, the re-lottery effect is temporarily stopped at the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 1−decoration 1”, and the decoration pattern is again displayed in a variable manner. Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ".
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as “a large jackpot game” which indicates that there is a possibility of being in a first advantageous state [for example, a power support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state or the like) after the big hit game is over). First jackpot result [for example, a combination of a jackpot decoration pattern such as “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” that indicates that there is usually a possibility of a jackpot. ]] Is displayed once, and then becomes a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high-probability general-purpose low-probability state) or the like after the big hit game ends). (For example, a combination of a jackpot decoration pattern that notifies that the probability is fixed, such as “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) (hereinafter referred to as “third case”). ").
In the re-lottery effect, the first jackpot result [for example, a combination of a jackpot decoration pattern of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or the like] is displayed once and then the first jackpot result [for example, "Combination of jackpot decoration patterns of" decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.] (hereinafter referred to as" fourth case ").
In the re-lottery effect, the first notification effect [for example, display of the effect display EF shown in FIG. 218 (c) or FIG.
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion regarding the setting. [For example, as illustrated in FIG. 218 (c), in the re-lottery effect, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1 ”To“ decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”, the effect display EF displayed when the promotion is successful informs that the design has been promoted, etc.],
The first notification effect performed in the fourth case includes a suggestion regarding the setting [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 218 (c ″), in the re-lottery effect, “decoration 1-decoration 1- The effect display EF displayed when the promotion fails from “decoration 1” to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” includes an effect of setting suggestion]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the re-lottery effect, the third case (the first jackpot result (the result of the jackpot indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first advantageous state) is displayed once, and then the first advantageous state is displayed. (A case of displaying a jackpot result notifying that a second advantageous state is obtained), or a case other than the third case in the re-lottery effect. In the re-lottery effect, there may be a third case, or in the re-lottery effect, there may be no third case.

  In the re-lottery effect, there may be only the fourth case (a case where the first jackpot result is displayed once and then the first jackpot result is displayed again). There may be cases other than the case. In the re-lottery effect, there may be a fourth case, or in the re-lottery effect, there may be no fourth case.

  Further, in the re-lottery effect, only the first notification effect may be executed, or in the re-lottery effect, an effect other than the first notification effect may be executed. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may not be executed in the re-lottery effect. Also, the first notification effect may be executed only in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may be executed in an effect other than the re-lottery effect.

  In addition, the first notification effect performed in the third case may not include only the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the third case may be different from the suggestion regarding the setting. Suggestions need not be included. In addition, the first notification effect performed in the third case does not necessarily include the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the third case includes the suggestion regarding the setting. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification effect that is performed only in the third case may not include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect that is also performed in a case other than the third case may be the same as the setting of the setting. May not be included.

  Further, the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include only the suggestion regarding the setting, or the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting. May also be included. Further, the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may necessarily include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include the suggestion regarding the setting. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification effect executed only in the fourth case may include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed even in cases other than the fourth case may be related to the setting. Suggestions may be included.

In addition, “an effect of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying a total acquired prize ball number [for example, a display of the total acquired prize ball number shown in FIG.
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display of the total prize ball number acquired in at least the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect performed in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize ball number,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number [for example, 2000 or the like], the first notification effect [for example, as shown in FIG. Including a drill number display image such as "2000 pt get!"
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number [for example, 4560 or the like], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, FIG. (Including display including a drill number display image such as “4560 pt get!”) Shown in (2d)],
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize balls, or may be executed in the effect other than the effect of displaying the total acquired prize balls. You may. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in the effect of displaying the total number of acquired prize balls, or may not be executed in the effect of displaying the total number of acquired prize balls. .

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. The effect other than the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the number may be started. In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. There may be a case where the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the first notification effect is not started.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, a first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. A first notification effect that does not include any suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting when indicating that the number is a number may be started. In addition, only when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. The first notification effect that does not include the suggestion about the setting may be started in a case other than the case where the number indicates the number.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May indicate a second number, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may always be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the second number. There may be a case where the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the number is not started.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May indicate a second number, a first notification effect including a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting may be started only when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May also be started in a case other than the case where the second notification number indicates the second number.

  In addition, the first number and the second number may be partially different numbers, or may be entirely different numbers.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying the decorative symbol variable display;
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
A variable time determining means [for example, a CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 or the like] for determining a variable time of the first symbol variable display;
Notice means (for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.) capable of executing a plurality of notices;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display in accordance with the symbol variable display on the graphic display device 212],
The attacker is capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, the “special figure g” is displayed. In the case where the small win has occurred after the stop display, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes a maximum of 12 times is executed],
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker sets the second symbol variation display according to the result of the second symbol variation display. When the state is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case where the special figure display device 214 becomes a small hit in the “special figure g” and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed, etc.] ”).
One notice of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice effect at a time shown in FIG. 225 (j)].
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice that is executed during the display of the decorative design variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 1 ”is performed during the swing fluctuation of the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts],
In the first case, a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state [for example, a period from the start to the end of the small hit game as shown in FIG. 205 (b)]. (Hereinafter, a certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), the interruption period after the original symbol variation time has elapsed (for example, The first notice may be executed in a period such as a period corresponding to a period until the small hitting game is completed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notice means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic of the notice means can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the decorative symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always display the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the attacker may be such that only the game ball can win, or may be something other than the game ball. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the variation time determining means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may determine the variation time other than the variation time of the first symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the change time determining means may always determine the change time of the first symbol change display, or may not always determine the change time of the first symbol change display. .

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing notices other than the plurality of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute the plurality of notices.

  Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be simultaneously executed, or a symbol other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed. The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or may be the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display. A display other than the display may be displayed. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or may display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display. May not be displayed.

  Further, the attacker may be capable of changing the state only from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of changing the state according to the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may be changeable from the first state to a state other than the second state. In addition, the attacker may always change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display, or may change the first state according to the result of the second symbol change display. The state may not change from the state to the second state.

  Further, the second state may be such that only the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state, or something other than the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state. There may be. In the second state, the game ball may be easier to win the attacker than the first state, or the game ball may not be easier to win the attacker than the first state. It may be.

  In the first case (in the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker operates the second symbol variation display in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display). Only the second case) or there may be cases other than the first case. Also, the first case may be present, or the first case may not exist.

  The first notice may be executed only during the display of the decorative design change display, or may be displayed other than during the display of the decorative design change display. In addition, the first notice may be always executed during the display of the decorative design change display, or may be executed in some cases during the display of the decorative design change display.

  In the first case, only a first notice may be executed in a certain period (a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state), or in the first case, In a certain period, a notice other than the first notice may be executed. Also, in the first case, the first notice may be always executed in a certain period, or in the first case, the first notice may not be executed in a certain period. .

  Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only during a certain period, or in the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period other than a certain period. It may be executed. In addition, the first notice may be executed in a certain period only in the first case, or the first notice may be executed in a certain period in a case other than the first case. It may be executed.

In addition, “the certain period is a period that is started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol change display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Is started at a timing later than the timing at which the small hit symbol such as "Tokuzu g" is displayed in Tokuji 2]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the certain period may be started only after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or may be a timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. May be started other than after. In addition, a certain period may be necessarily started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or may be a timing that is more than the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. Some may not be started later.

In addition, “the control means [for example, CPU304 etc. in main control part 300] which can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state is a first time [for example, 5 seconds or the like],
In the first gaming state, at least the attacker changes the state to the second state. The result of the second symbol changing display is displayed as the second changing time [for example, 580 seconds. Etc.]
The second variation time is longer than the first variation time,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is difficult to determine the timing of the prefetching advance notice by grasping the contents of the decorative symbol variation display executed in relation to the variation of the first symbol variation display. In some cases, starting after derivation of can give the player expectations without disturbing the player.

  Here, the control means may be controllable only to one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. May be something. Further, the control means may control the game state to one of the plurality of game states, or may not control the game state to one of the plurality of game states. Is also good.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  The second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state alone, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, the fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state may be only the first fluctuating time or may be other than the first fluctuating time. . Also, the fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state may be the first fluctuating time, or may not be the first fluctuating time. Good.

  Further, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that at least the attacker changes to the second status in the first gaming state is displayed may be only the second variation time. , A variable time other than the second variable time. In addition, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that at least the attacker changes the state to the second status in the first game state is displayed may be the second variation time. May not be the second fluctuation time.

In addition, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 225 (c), in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the symbol variable display on the first special figure display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the normal gaming state, the second feature variation display is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the symbol variable display on the graphic display device 214],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation display In addition, a display other than the decorative design change display may be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in correspondence with the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be performed. Correspondingly, the decorative design change display may not be displayed.

  In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, other than the execution of the first symbol variation display. May be displayed in response to the execution of.

  Also, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed corresponding to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display The display other than the decorative design change display need not be displayed in correspondence with. Also, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily be displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display May be displayed in response to the above.

  Also, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed only in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display The decorative design change display may not be displayed corresponding to the execution other than the above.

Also, in the case of the first case, the case where the first notice for the first symbol variation display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state is executed may be executed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 225 (a) to FIG. 225 (j), the wait-for-reading advance notice effect is suspended when the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2. Look-ahead announcement effect for the pattern variation display of Toku-zu 1
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, there may be a case where only the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the state of the attacker changes to the second state is executed. However, in the first case, even if a notice other than the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. Good. Further, in the first case, the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes the state to the second state may be always executed, or the first notice may be executed. In this case, there may be a case where the first notice for the suspended first symbol change display is not executed when the attacker changes the state to the second state.

  Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only for the first symbol variation display held at the time when the state of the attacker changes to the second state. In the first case, the first notice may be executed for a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state. Is also good. Also, only in the first case, the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. However, even in cases other than the first case, even if the first notice for the first symbol variation display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. Good.

In addition, "The first notice is not a notice relating to the first symbol change display being executed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. It is not a notice effect on the symbol change display of Toku-zu 1 which was interrupted due to a small hit in Toku-zu 2 etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice may not be a notice concerning only the first symbol change display being executed, nor may be a notice concerning a symbol change display other than the first symbol change display being executed. In addition, the first notice may not necessarily be a notice regarding the first symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that may be related to the first symbol change display being executed.

Further, in the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the period is After the end, the first symbol change display is resumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 225 (f) to 225 (h), a small hit in the special figure 2 and a small hit game related to the small hit Is executed, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed when the small hitting game ends. Restart, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. Only the first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. And the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display may be resumed after the period ends. In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the second symbol variation display is stopped. One symbol variation display may be restarted without fail, or in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. It may be displayed and the first symbol change display may not restart after the period ends.

  In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and only after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, in a period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. It may be displayed, and the first symbol change display may be restarted even after the period has ended. Also, in the first case, only during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the first symbol variation display is stopped. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or, in the first case, the first symbol variation display is interrupted but the decorative symbol variation display is also performed during a period other than the period in which the attacker is in the second state. It may be displayed continuously, and the first symbol change display may be restarted after the period ends.

  Also, only in the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, and in cases other than the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is performed. May be displayed continuously, and the first symbol change display may be resumed after the period ends.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, the big hit notice of the special map 2 in which the character" preparing big hit !! "shown in FIG. 226 (d) is displayed). And
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit [for example, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d), when the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display to be a big hit on the second special figure display device 214, The jackpot notice of the special figure 2 in which the character "Preparing for the big hit!"
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to urge the player to stop firing during a useless period in which the big hit lottery is not performed for a long time.

  Here, the second notice may relate to only the second symbol variation display being executed, or may relate to a symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display being executed. Good. Further, the second notice may be always related to the second symbol change display being executed, or may be one that may not relate to the second symbol change display being executed.

  Further, the second notice may be started only when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in the jackpot, There may be a case where the first symbol variation display may be started in a case other than the case where the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which results in a big hit. In addition, the second notice may be always started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in the jackpot, or the result of the jackpot may be obtained. May not be started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second notice may be started when the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit, There may be a case where the first symbol variation display is started even when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display that results in the big hit.

Further, the second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (d) to FIG. The special jackpot notice of special figure 2 is given across the symbol change display of special figure 1 of the times],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to show a pre-reading notice.

  Here, only the second notice may be executed over the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or the first symbol variation display executed over a plurality of times may be executed. Then, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may be necessarily executed over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times, or the second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times. The notice may not be executed in some cases.

  In addition, the second notice may be executed only over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times, or a symbol other than the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times may be performed. The second notice may be executed over the variable display.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Control means (for example, CPU 304 or the like in the control unit 300) capable of controlling to one of a plurality of game states,
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state in accordance with the result of the game. [For example, the "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, resulting in a small hit. In such a case, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes up to 12 times is executed],
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize ball number display [for example, the total winning prize ball number displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. Display etc.]
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display indicating a total prize ball number acquired by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods that are advantageous to the player including the second game state [for example, The display of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed from the initial jackpot to the normal jackpot until the power support state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game relating to the ordinary jackpot ends,
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the game balls are transferred to the attacker. There is a case where the number of prize balls according to the winning number is added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 215 (j) to FIG. The awarded ball count is not counted in the display of the total number of awarded balls during the small hitting game, but is counted up after the small hitting game, etc.],
In the second game state, if a certain condition [for example, a pending consecutive champion] is satisfied, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. Even in this case, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Is added to the total acquired award ball number display after the second state is completed and the second state is completed, and the unacquired award ball number corresponding to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired award ball number display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (e) to (q), when the small hits are held consecutively, even if the small hitting game related to the first small hit ends, the first hit The number of prize balls won in the small hit game is not added to the total winning prize ball display even after the first small hit game ends. After the second small hit game related to the small hits, which is a reserved consecutive chan, the total number of prize balls obtained by adding the number of prize balls acquired in the first small hit game and the second small hit game is calculated. Counting up on the display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the control means may be controllable only to one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. May be something. Further, the control means may control the game state to one of the plurality of game states, or may not control the game state to one of the plurality of game states. Is also good.

  Further, the attacker may be such that only the game ball can be won, or something other than the game ball may be able to win. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display the plurality of displays.

  Further, the attacker may be capable of changing only the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or may be a state other than the second state from the first state according to the result of the game. The state may also be changeable. In addition, the attacker may always change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or may not change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game. There may be.

  Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball is more likely to win only the attacker than in the first state, or a state in which the game ball is easier to win other than the attacker than the first state. You may. Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state, or a state in which the game ball does not easily win the attacker than the first state. There may be.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  In addition, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which only the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state, or the second gaming state is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state. It may be a gaming state. Also, the second gaming state may be a gaming state where the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state, or the attacker is less likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state. In some cases, the game state may be used.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. The number of awarded balls may be added to only the total acquired awarded ball number display, and may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more gaming balls enter the attacker. In the case of winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the display other than the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is finished, Good. Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. The awarded ball count may be added to the total acquired award ball count display, or may be displayed, or in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. In some cases, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may not be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. May be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls other than the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed. Is also good.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, after the second state ends, only the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, even if the prize ball number according to the winning number other than the winning number of the game ball to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is completed, and displayed. Good.

  In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker only after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed even in cases other than after the end of the second state. Good.

  Also, in the second game state, only when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even in cases other than winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the completion of the second state, it may be displayed. Good.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends is reduced. The corresponding prize ball number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and may be displayed, or even in a game state other than the second game state, the attacker may be in the second state and may have one or more When the game ball wins the attacker, the prize ball number corresponding to the winning number of the game ball to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is completed and displayed. Is also good.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, only the addition of the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker to the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be also carried out other than the addition of the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker. Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls that have not been added according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, If the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state After the second state has been completed, there may be a case where the addition of the non-addition amount of prize balls of the total number of acquired prize balls numeral corresponding to the winning number of game balls into the attacker is not performed.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added in accordance with the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added only to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls number of display other than the total acquisition Prize counts display corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, only the prize balls not yet added in accordance with the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second state after is completed, may be performed is added to the non-added content of the award total winning prize sphere other than the number of winning balls of the number of balls numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won only to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the other attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends Only after that, the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state Other than after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, only when a certain condition is satisfied, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or a certain condition in the second game state. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the game to the attacker is completed after the second state is over, except in the case where The number of prize balls according to the number of balls won is not added to the total winning prize ball display, and then the attacker And it is after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied only in the second game state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the second After the state is over, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state is changed. After the end, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or a game state other than the second game state Also, in the case where a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the attacker is not terminated after the completion of the second state. Is not added to the total winning prize ball display according to the number of game balls winning After the second state is completed in the second state, the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display. .

In addition, "The result of the game is a result of the symbol variation display,
The certain condition is that when the attacker transitions from the first state to the second state, the result of the symbol variation display that is suspended for execution indicates that the attacker is in the second state. A condition that contains a result that changes state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "if the certain condition is satisfied, the result of the symbol change display suspended for execution includes a result that the attacker changes the state to the second state. At least, a display that suggests that this is the case (hereinafter, a “reserved consecutive channel suggestion display [for example, a display of“ W-UP Chance! ”Shown in FIG. 228 (g)” or a display of “Large Bonus Super Heat!” Shown in FIG. 229 (g)) ”Etc.] is displayed.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when a certain condition is satisfied, the display of the suggestion of the pending consecutive chunks (the result of the symbol variation display of which the execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes the state to the second state). May be displayed only, or if a certain condition is satisfied, a display other than the display of the suggestions for the consecutive linked channels may be displayed. In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of the pending consecutive chunks may be always displayed, or if a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of the pending consecutive chunks may not be displayed. There may be.

  In addition, only when a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of pending consecutive chunks may be displayed. You may.

In addition, the "hold pending chunk suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and started the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 29 (h) and FIGS. 229 (g) to (h), the display of “W-UP chance!” And the display of “Large bonus super heat!” Etc. are displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display has started after the display has ended]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the symbol change display is started while the pending consecutive change suggestion display is being displayed, so that it may be possible to make it appear that the next hit comes immediately.

  Here, the hold consecutive chunk suggestion display may be displayed continuously only after the attacker finishes the second state and the symbol variation display is started, or the attacker may display the attacker in the second state. It may be displayed continuously after the end and the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the hold consecutive chunk suggestion display may be such that the attacker is always displayed continuously after the second state is finished and the symbol variation display is started, or the attacker is in the second state. There may be a case where the display is not continued even after the symbol variation display is started after finishing.

Also, "the second state is a state of both the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
One display of the plurality of displays is a decorative design change display,
There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state is the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state [for example, shown in FIG. 197 (c)]. As described above, a combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” and “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” may be displayed when a big hit occurs, or when a small hit occurs. Etc. may also be displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state may be the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state, or the big hit game state And the result other than the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hitting game state may be the same. In addition, the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state may be the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state, or the shift to the big hit game state. There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display to be performed is not the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display to shift to the small hitting game state.

In addition, "a decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the operation mode of the attacker [for example, as shown in FIG. 194 (a) and FIG. 195, the second variable winning. The mouth 235a is located on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and is difficult for a player to visually recognize.
In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the operation mode of the attacker is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of hit in the open mode of the attacker.

  Here, the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that only the operation mode of the attacker is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker and other than the operation mode of the attacker. The operation mode may also be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to make the operation mode of the attacker difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to change the operation mode of the attacker. May not be considered difficult to view.

  Further, only the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or a member other than the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to operate the attacker. May be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the decorative member may be arranged only on the front side of the attacker to make the operation mode of the attacker difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decorative member may be arranged other than the front side of the attacker to change the operation mode of the attacker. It may be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, only the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the mode other than the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state. In addition, the operation mode of the attacker may be always different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the operation mode of the attacker may not be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

  The operation mode of the attacker may be different only in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the attack mode may be different in the game state other than the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In addition, in the second gaming state, the decoration is performed in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 228 (h), a display mode in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper right portion of the display screen]. There is a case where the symbol variation display is displayed,
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which a decorative symbol is largely displayed in a central portion of the display screen as illustrated in FIG. 228 (a)]. May be displayed,
The size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, a period during which the symbol variation display is suspended when the second state is terminated (hereinafter referred to as "a certain period [e.g., , Etc.), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but when the certain condition is satisfied. Displays the decorative symbol variation display in the second display mode even during the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution of the symbol variation display that becomes a hit (small hit / big hit), the decorative symbol is displayed larger in the center portion of the display screen, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, a case where it is possible to make the appearance of a continuous chunk immediately by displaying a big hit symbol when a big hit is suddenly displayed in a case where a big hit is made inconspicuous when holding a continuous chunk. There is.

  Here, in the second gaming state, the decorative design variation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, and in the second gaming state, decorations may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. The symbol variation display may be displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be always displayed in the first display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed in the first display mode. There may be.

  In addition, only in the second game state, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the first display mode, or in a game state other than the second game state, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the first display mode. A variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be always displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode. There may be.

  In addition, only in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in a gaming state other than the second gaming state, the decorative symbol may be displayed in the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed.

  Further, the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than only the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, or the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the second display mode. The size may be smaller than the size other than the size of the decorative pattern in the aspect. In addition, the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, and the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is the second display mode. May not be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in.

  Further, only the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, and the size other than the decorative pattern in the first display mode may also be smaller in the second display mode. It may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern.

  In the second game state, during a certain period (period during which the symbol variation display is being executed when the second state is completed), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode. However, if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, only the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, In the period, the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in the first display mode. However, if a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, other than the decorative pattern variation display in the second display mode. The display may also be displayed. In addition, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the certain period is satisfied, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but a certain condition is satisfied. In such a case, the decorative design variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In addition, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the certain period is satisfied, The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. In this case, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In addition, in the second game state, in a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but only when a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. In any case other than the above case, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, but if only certain conditions are satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode. Even when the condition is satisfied or during a certain period, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode.

  Also, in the second game state, during a certain period, only the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative pattern change display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, a display other than the decorative pattern change display is also displayed in the first display mode for a certain period. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed only in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, for a certain period, the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. If the following condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode only for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in the first display mode in a period other than a certain period in the second game state. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or even in a game state other than the second game state, for a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, If a certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls according to the above is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, after the second state ends, the attacker then enters the second state and the second state After the end of the state, the total winning prize is not added to the total winning prize ball display until the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of the game ball to the attacker is added. The display mode of the ball number display is changed to another display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (h) to 228 (o), a prize acquired in the first small hitting game for holding consecutive chants. As long as the number of balls is not added to the total winning prize ball display, the color of the total winning prize ball display is inverted. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the prize ball according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the number is not added to the total winning prize ball number display, after the second state is completed, the attacker then becomes the second state, and after the second state is completed, the game proceeds to the attacker. In the period until the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode only. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends may be changed. If the corresponding prize ball count is not added to the total winning prize ball count display, after the second state ends, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls that have not been added according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until the display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to a display mode other than another display mode. Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the Until the number of prize balls not yet added according to the winning number of game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display must be changed to another display mode Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may not be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the Until the addition of the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won to the total acquired prize ball number display is performed, only the display form of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display form. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period up to, the display mode of the display other than the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode only during the period until the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode even in a period other than the period up to.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state is completed, and only after the second state ends, the attacker The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode in a period until the prize ball number not added according to the winning number of the game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, Even after the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until the display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. Only when the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state ends, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state ends, and then the attacker The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode in a period until the prize ball number not added according to the winning number of the game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. The second state ends even if the number of prize balls After that, after the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display May be changed to another display mode during the period until the display is performed.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
A variable time determining means [for example, a CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 or the like] for determining a variable time of the first symbol variable display;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
First control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 and the like] capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means;
A second control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling at least the display unit;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
After the small hit symbol [for example, “special figure f” or “special figure g” or the like] is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, it is possible to shift to the small hitting game state [for example, the second special figure] When the "special figure f" or the "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the display device 214 and a small hit occurs, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed is executed],
When the small hitting game state is set in the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol change display to the elapse of the change time determined by the change time determining means (hereinafter, "in some cases [for example, As shown in FIG. 205 (b), during the period from the start of the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 to the stop display, the second special figure display device 214 displays a small hit with “special figure g”. And the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed to enter a small hitting game state] ”).
In the certain case, a state in which the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display is interrupted in a period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game state (hereinafter, " [For example, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), during the period from the occurrence of a small hit in the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, the symbol in the special figure 1 The progress of the variable display is interrupted (interrupted state) etc.],
One display of the plurality of displays is a first notice display [for example, a display of a pre-reading notice effect at a time shown in FIG. 225 (j) or FIG. 226 (j ')]
The first notice display may be displayed in connection with the certain state [for example, the display of the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed in association with the suspension state, etc. ],
The second control means is means for performing control according to a command from the first control means,
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, a certain command transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information and It is determined whether or not the first notice display is displayed in association with the special figure stop type command etc. [For example, in the case of a small hit with “special figure g”, it is shown in FIG. 225 (j). The display of the wait-foreseeing advance notice is displayed, and in the case of a small hit in the “special figure f”, the display of the wait-foreseeing advance notice effect shown in FIG. 226 (j ′) is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. . Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the variation time determination means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may also determine the variation time of the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Is also good. In addition, the change time determining means may always determine the change time of the first symbol change display, or may not always determine the change time of the first symbol change display. .

  In addition, the variation time determination means may determine the variation time of the second symbol variation display, or may determine the variation time of the normal symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of displays.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of controlling only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may be other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. The means may also be controllable. Further, the first control means may be one that always controls the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or does not control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. There may be some cases.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of controlling only the display means, or may be capable of controlling means other than the display means. In addition, the second control means may control the display means without fail or may not control the display means.

  Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be simultaneously executed, or a symbol other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed. The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  Further, after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, it may be possible to shift only to the small hit game state, or the small hit symbol may be displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. It may be possible to shift to a game state other than the small hitting game state later. In addition, the small hitting game state may be always shifted after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit symbol may be displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed as the result of the second symbol change display. There may be cases where the game does not shift to the hit game state.

  Also, it may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. It may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state other than after.

  In addition, there may be only a certain case (a case where the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the execution of the first symbol change display is started to when the change time determined by the change time determining means elapses). However, there may be cases other than a certain case. In addition, there may be a certain case, or there may not be a certain case.

  In addition, in a certain state (the period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol in the certain case to the end of the small hit game state, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol change display is interrupted. State) or a state other than a certain state. In addition, a certain state may always be achieved, or a certain state may not be achieved.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may display the first advance notice display without fail, or may not display the first advance notice display in some cases.

  Further, only the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state. Is also good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may not be displayed in relation to a certain state.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a state other than a certain state. You may.

  Further, the second control means may perform only control according to a command from the first control means, or may perform control other than control according to a command from the first control means. It may be. Further, the second control means may always perform control according to a command from the first control means, or may not perform control according to a command from the first control means. It may be something.

  Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when execution of the first symbol change display is started. May be determined, and other than the first notice display in relation to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol change display is started May be determined as well. Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when execution of the first symbol change display is started. May be always determined, or the first notice display related to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol change display is started It may not be determined whether or not is displayed.

In addition, "a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display [for example," special figure C "indicating a loss, etc.] is displayed for a certain time [for example, t21 in FIG. 204 (b). The symbol is continuously displayed in a period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1 which is a period of t22.
After starting the display of the certain symbol [for example, “special figure C” indicating a loss, etc.] representing the result of the first symbol change display, the certain time [eg, t21 to t21 in FIG. 204 (b)] Even if the small hitting game state is reached during a period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1, which is a period of t22, the measurement of the certain time is not interrupted.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, if the time of the loss is extended, the unfortunate feeling is emphasized, and the time until the start of the next symbol change display is also increased, so that the feeling may not be switched. However, there are cases where such a problem can be solved.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the symbol variation display can be started immediately after the small hitting game is completed, so that the symbol is not fluctuating and a certain period of time can be shortened for entertaining.

  Further, according to this gaming table, if a small hit occurs during the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is lengthened (that is, the ratio of the total In some cases, the player may be able to entertain the player (since the ratio of fluctuations increases).

  Here, only a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time, or A symbol other than a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time. In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. In some cases, a certain symbol may not be displayed continuously during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time.

  In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed only during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period other than the period from when the display of the symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display is started until a certain time elapses.

  Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from when only a certain symbol representing a result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to a lapse of a certain time.

  Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing only the result of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be displayed continuously during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time.

  In addition, even if the small hitting game state occurs during a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, only a certain time measurement is performed. May not be interrupted, or may be in the small hitting game state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time. The measurement of a time other than a certain time may not be interrupted. In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, the measurement of a certain time is not performed. Even if it is not necessarily interrupted, even if it is in the small hitting gaming state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display until a certain time elapses The measurement of a certain time may be interrupted.

  Also, the measurement of a certain time is interrupted only when the small hitting game state is set in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time. It may not be necessary, or even in a case other than the case of entering the small hitting gaming state in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol fluctuation display to the elapse of a certain time. The measurement of a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set only during a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of entering the small hitting gaming state in a period other than the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display is started to when only a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display until a time other than a certain time elapses. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing only the result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the first symbol change display until a certain time elapses Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

Also, the second control means may be configured to perform the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation by the certain command (for example, a special figure stop type command or the like) received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. It is a means that can specify which of the symbol variation displays is to be stopped and displayed first,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of specifying only whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or may be a second command by a certain command. It may also be possible to specify other than whether the result of the symbol variation display is a small hit. Further, the second control means may always specify whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second symbol variation may be determined by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not the display result is a small hit.

Also, the second control means displays the small hit symbol as a result of the second symbol variation display by the certain command [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information]. It is a means that can specify whether or not
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of specifying only whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display by a certain command, or may be specified by a certain command. It may also be possible to specify other than whether or not a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. Further, the second control means may always specify whether a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display by a certain command, or may be a second command by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the symbol variation display.

Also, a plurality of types of the small hit symbols [for example, “special figure g” in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times, “special figure f” in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc.] are displayed. Is possible,
It is possible to shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hitting symbol [for example, in the case of a small hit in the “special figure g”, a small hitting game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times. State, and when a small hit occurs in the “special figure f”, the state shifts to a small hitting game state in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed once.
The display mode of the first advance notice display is determined according to the type of the shifted small hitting game state [for example, in the case of a small hit in “special figure g”, the look-ahead wait is performed as shown in FIG. 225 (j). When a notice is displayed and a small hit is made with the "special figure f", a display of a wait-reading notice effect as shown in FIG. 226 (j ') is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed, or a symbol other than a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed. In addition, a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of small hit symbols may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be possible to shift only to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol. . Further, the game may always shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or may not always shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol.

  In addition, it may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state according to only the type of the small hit symbol, or to be able to shift to the small hitting game state according to something other than the type of the small hit symbol.

  Further, only the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or other than the display mode of the first notice display according to the type of the transferred small hit game state. May be determined. In addition, the display mode of the first notice display may be always determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state. It may not be determined.

  Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be determined only according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or the first notice display may be determined according to other than the type of the transferred small hit game state. May be determined.

Also, the "first notice display is, in the certain case, a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first design change display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started. [For example, the display of the wait-for-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 225 (j) is directed to the symbol variation display related to the first suspension of the special figure 1).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice display is, in some cases, only the display of the pre-reading notice related to the information of the first design change display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started. It may be, in some cases, there is also a display other than the display of the look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Is also good. Further, in some cases, the first preview display is a display of a pre-reading advance notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display, which is always held when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the display may be a display other than the display of the pre-reading notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. There may be.

  Also, the first notice display is a display of the pre-read notice related to the information of the first design change display suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started only in certain cases. It may be a display of a pre-reading notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started even in a case other than a certain case. Is also good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is an effect display [for example, an effect display related to a variation display of a decorative pattern shown in FIGS. 224 (f) to (n)], and the like.
The display of the effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 224 (f), in the normal game state, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 Decorative symbols are displayed according to the display, etc.],
Even in the certain state, the effect display proceeds without interruption [for example, as shown in FIG. 224 (i) to FIG. 224 (k), in the normal game state, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 Even after that, even during the period until the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the effect display related to the variable display of the decorative symbol is progressing without interruption, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the display of the effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol change display, or the display other than the display of the effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol change display. May be started. In addition, the display of the effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or the display of the effect display may not be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display. There may be.

  In addition, the display of the effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol change display, or the display of the effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of the first symbol change display. May be started.

  In addition, even in a certain state, only the effect display may proceed without interruption, and even in a certain state, display other than the effect display may proceed without interruption. In addition, even when a certain state occurs, the effect display may always proceed without interruption, and even in a certain state, the effect display may not proceed without interruption.

  Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption only when a certain state is reached, or may proceed without interruption even in cases other than the certain state. Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption even when only a certain state occurs, or the effect display may proceed without interruption even when the state becomes other than a certain state.

In addition, "the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in the certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change, and the case of not being in the certain state The time from the start of the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation is the same [for example, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display according to FIG. 1 to the start of the swing variation is the same regardless of whether a small hit occurs or does not occur in the special figure 2 etc.],
When the certain decorative symbol change display in the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period of the above, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern according to the pattern fluctuation display of the special figure 1, the fluctuation display is performed. 225 (j) may be displayed as a wait-reading notice effect as shown in FIG. 225 (j).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by swing fluctuation, and the certain time in a certain state Only the time from the start of the decorative pattern change display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change may be the same, or a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state From the start to the start of display of the result of a certain decorative pattern variation display by shaking fluctuation, and the time of starting a certain decorative pattern variation display after starting a certain decorative pattern variation display when it does not become a certain state The time other than the time until the start of displaying the result by the fluctuation may be the same. Also, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state to the start of display of the result of a certain decorative pattern change display by swing fluctuation, and a certain decoration in a certain state The time from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the display of the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation may be always the same, or a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state The time from the start to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative design change display by shaking change, and the result of a certain decorative design change display from the start of a certain decorative design change display when it does not enter a certain state May not be the same until the start of display due to fluctuations.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the above, only the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state is started, the result of the certain decorative pattern change display is fluctuated. May be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed in addition to the first notice display. In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, the first notice display may be displayed without fail, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation The first notice display may not be displayed during the period until the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only when the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative design variable display is started in a certain state, the result of the certain decorative design variable display is fluctuated. , The first notice display may be displayed in a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, only after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, the first symbol variation display is stopped until the first symbol variation display is stopped. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative pattern change display starts in a certain state, the result of the certain decorative pattern change display fluctuates. In addition to the display after the display, the first notice display may be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, only when a certain decorative symbol change display in a certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or even when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is not started, a certain decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in a period from when the result is displayed as swing fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol change display in a case where only a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol change display by shaking change, the first symbol change display is displayed until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol change display in a state other than a certain state starts, a result of a certain decorative pattern change display The first notice display may be displayed in a period from when is displayed as swing fluctuation until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation, the first symbol variation display is displayed. In the period until the stop display, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 225 (j), a display of a preset look ahead notice effect may be displayed as a display of the wait effect displayed after the fluctuation display, etc.],
When the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, there is no case where the first notice display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, an advanced player may be able to understand that the first notice display is displayed so that the symbol change display does not cause a resurrection jackpot.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when the first notice display is displayed during the execution of the continuous notice performed over a plurality of symbol change displays, the symbol change display to be pre-read is displayed in the symbol change display. Since it is known that there is no display, it may be possible to concentrate on the next symbol change display and thereafter.

  Here, in the case where the result of the decorative symbol change display in a certain state is a loss result, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change. In the period up to, only the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of loss, decorative design change display May be displayed in a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped after the result of the above is displayed as the swing variation. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed without fail, or when the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the result of the decorative design change display is fluctuated. , The first notice display may not be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only during the period of the first notice display may be displayed, or, if the result of the decorative design variation display in a certain state is a result of the loss, the decorative design variation display The first notice display may be displayed in a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after the result is displayed by the fluctuation change.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed with the swing variation. In the period up to, the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the decorative design change display The first notice display may be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result is displayed by the fluctuation change.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing fluctuation, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or the decorative design change display in a certain state other than the case where the result of the decorative design change display is not a result of the decorative design change display may be displayed. The first notice display may be displayed during a period from when the display result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, only the first notice display may not be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative design change display After the result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation, in a period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may not always be displayed, and if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the result of the decorative design change display fluctuates. The first notice display may be displayed in a period after the change is displayed and before the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only during the period, the first notice display may not be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, the decorative design change display The first notice display may not be displayed during a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after the result is displayed as the fluctuation change.

  Also, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, the first symbol variation display is stopped only after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation. In the period until the first notice display may not be displayed, or when the decorative pattern change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative pattern change display The first notice display may not be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result of (1) is displayed with the fluctuation.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may not be displayed, or the decorative design change display in a certain state may be a case other than the case of the big hit result. The first notice display may not be displayed during a period after the display result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

When the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display is always started after the certain state is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case where the display of the wait-foreseeing advance notice effect is displayed as the display of the wait-for-effect effect, the wait-foreseeing advance notice effect is started after the suspension period is started, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started only after the display of the first notice display is necessarily in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed. May be started even after the display of the first notice display has necessarily reached a certain state. Further, when the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be always started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed, The display of the first notice display may not always be started after a certain state is displayed.

  Also, when the first notice display is displayed, only the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is displayed, or when the first notice display is displayed. Alternatively, the display other than the first notice display may be started after a certain state has been reached.

  Also, only when the first advance notice is displayed, the first advance notice may be started after the display of the first advance notice is always in a certain state, or when the first advance notice is not displayed. In this case as well, the display may be started after the display of the first notice display has necessarily reached a certain state.

  When only the first notice is displayed, the display of the first notice may always be started after a certain state is displayed, or a display other than the first notice may be displayed. In such a case, the display may be started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of displays is a second notice display [for example, an effect display in a pre-reading mode or the like],
The second notice display is a notice display different from the first notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The second notice display may be different from the first notice display in part, or may be entirely different notice displays.

In addition, "the second notice display is a pre-read notice display,
The second preview display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of times of the first symbol variation display [for example, the effect display in the pre-reading mode is displayed over a plurality of times of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 Etc.],
The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the second notice display may be only a pre-read notice display, or may be a display other than the pre-read notice display.Also, the second notice display may always be a pre-read notice display. Alternatively, there may be cases where the pre-reading notice is not displayed.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only over a plurality of first symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. May be displayed. In addition, the second notice display may be always displayed over the first symbol variation display a plurality of times, or may not be displayed across the first symbol variation display a plurality of times. It may be something.

  Also, only the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display. May be. Also, the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or the first notice display may not be displayed during the display of the second notice display. Good.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only during the display of the second notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed while the display other than the second notice display is displayed. May have been done.

Also, "if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, only the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or a certain state. In the case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display. In addition, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not always be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. Even in cases other than when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied only in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and other than the certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied also in the state described above, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Also, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "It is possible to control to one of a plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
In the first game state, at least the small hit symbol is displayed, which is longer than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means [for example, 5 seconds or the like]. The length of the fluctuation time [for example, 580 seconds or the like] of the second symbol fluctuation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be possible to control only one of a plurality of game states, or to control a game state other than one of the plurality of game states. You may. Further, the game state may be always controlled to one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to one of the plurality of game states.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  The second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state alone, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, the change time of the second symbol change display in which at least the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. Only the length may be longer, or at least the small hit symbol will be displayed longer than the length of the variable time of the first symbol variable display determined by the variable time determining means in the first gaming state. The length other than the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display may be longer. Further, the change time of the second symbol change display in which at least the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. The length may be always longer, and at least the small hit symbol is displayed, compared to the length of the variable time of the first symbol variable display determined by the variable time determining means in the first game state. There may be cases where the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display is not longer.

  Also, the change time of the second symbol change display in which only the small hit symbol is displayed, rather than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. The length may be longer, and a symbol other than the small hit symbol is displayed than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first game state. The length of the change time of the second symbol change display may be longer.

In the small hitting game state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed. [For example, as shown in FIG. Is easier to win the second variable winning opening 235a, etc.],
In the first gaming state, when the small hitting symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, a certain state after the small hitting gaming state ends. In the period [for example, 30 seconds or the like], a display for prompting the player to make a left-hand operation is not displayed [for example, as shown in 20 (a), in the normal game state, for 30 seconds after the small hitting game ends, Even if you make a right-handed hit, you will not see a warning prompting you to turn left, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the small hitting game state, only the right-handed player may be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed player. May be advantageous to In addition, in the small hitting game state, right-handed may be always more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and in the small hitting game state, right-handed is less advantageous than left-handed for the player. There may be.

  Also, only in the small hitting game state, right-handed may be more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and even in a game state other than the small hitting game state, right-handed may be more advantageous than left-handed. May be advantageous to

  Further, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, It is not necessary to display only a display that prompts the player to make a left hit, or in the first game state, when a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, During a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display other than a display urging the player to make a left-hand operation may not be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, A display that prompts the player to make a left hit may not always be displayed, or in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, During a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display for urging the player to make a left hit may be displayed.

  Also, in the first gaming state, if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, only in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends. In the case where the display for prompting the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, or in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, Even during a period other than a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display urging the player to make a left-handed operation may not be displayed.

  Also, in the first gaming state, only when a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, for a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, A display that prompts the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, or in the first game state, except when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state. Alternatively, a display that prompts the player to make a leftward hit may not be displayed for a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

  In addition, only in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, The display for prompting the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, and even in a game state other than the first game state, the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, and the state shifts to the small hit game state. In such a case, a display that prompts the player to make a left-hand operation may not be displayed for a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In the following, additional information including what has been described so far will be added.

(Appendix 1)
A game console equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started may change,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1,
In the case where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by:

  Here, the display mode of the first display may change even if the second display is not displayed. The display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein
The image display unit is a unit configured from a plurality of image display units,
One image display unit of the plurality of image display units is a first image display unit,
One image display unit of the plurality of image display units is a second image display unit,
The second image display means is configured to be located in front of the first image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
By the second image display means where the second display is displayed, the first image display means may be overlapped,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4,
Also when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display from the second display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, wherein
When the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit than when it is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The third display is an effect display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7,
With directing movable means,
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of operation of the plurality of types of operation is a staging operation,
The certain effect is an effect operation by an effect movable means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and the operation other than the effect operation includes, for example, an operation at the time of turning on the power, an initial position return operation, or a retreat operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, one provided on a frame (front door).

(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 9, wherein
When the certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit than when it does not occur,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 10,
A hot staging display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 14)
A game console equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during the reach,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first timing”).
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the display period of the period display is not limited to the reach period, and may be a change period or a big hit. Further, even during the reach, the information may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 14, wherein
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing at which the third effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball-drop error, a notification indicating the firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the prepaid card, a light emission by the LED, an effect operation by the accessory May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15, wherein
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol change”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 16, wherein
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “losing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
It is configured such that the frequency of the third effect display is higher in the big hit symbol change than in the loss symbol change,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 17, wherein
With directing movable means,
The production movable means is a means that may perform a production operation,
During the display of the third effect display, there is a case where the electromotive movable means performs the effect operation,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 18, wherein
After the period display has been hidden, the period display is in a state that is easily visible,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 19,
The period display is hidden until a period during the reach ends.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 21,
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timing”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, a portion that reports a chance up in response to a reach may be fixed, such that a chance up is reported three times whenever a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs. Alternatively, the same reach may be used. In such a case, the notification of the chance up may be changed so that the notification is performed three times and the notification is performed only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timings” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying much,” or may be easier to lose. Also, the likelihood of a big hit need not vary depending on the number of times that the timing has been notified. In addition, the larger the number of chance-ups, the greater the chance of a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the greater the chance of a big hit.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 14 to 22,
The image display unit is a unit configured from a plurality of image display units,
One image display unit of the plurality of image display units is a first image display unit,
One image display unit of the plurality of image display units is a second image display unit,
The first image display unit is an image display unit that may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform a staging operation,
By the second image display means, at least part of the period display may be overlapped,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 23,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 25)
A game console equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during the reach,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first timing”).
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 26)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 27)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One display of the time display is the second display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 26 to 28,
The first display is a display in which a display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, or the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 26 to 29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there is the first display and the second display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, wherein
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer notice display is a display that notifies the time until the first effect display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 32)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
The first type of display is an operation validity period display,
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, wherein
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period,
From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 34)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 26 to 33,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 35)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is being performed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is being performed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 36)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed at a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed at a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 37,
When the countdown display is displayed, it always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 37,
Ultimately, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed when the display is changed to the second display mode than when displayed in the first display mode.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 40)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 39,
The start and end of the countdown display are performed within the period of one symbol change display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 42)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 41,
During the movement of the countdown display, the time notification by the countdown display is continued,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 43)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 41,
During the movement of the countdown display, suspending the time notification by the countdown display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 44)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown display,
After the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0, the countdown display is configured to be erased.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 45)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 45,
It may not change to the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 46,
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is a first display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 48)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 51)
A game console having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display that notifies the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the second display may be started,
Before the first timing is displayed after the first display is started, the first display may be deleted,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 52)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started to be displayed,
During the display of the third display, the first display is deleted,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 53)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 52,
The third display is a notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 54)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the third display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 55)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 52 to 54,
Equipped with a production movable means that can execute multiple types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
During the display of the third display, the first operation may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 55,
After the first display is deleted, the first display is configured to be displayed again,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 57)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Notes 51 to 55,
After the first display is deleted, the first display is configured not to be displayed until the certain period elapses.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 58)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed until the certain period elapses,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 59)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 58,
The certain period is a period during which super reach is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the fourth display may be started.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 60,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 62)
A game console having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification that the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display,
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 63)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 64)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed at a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed at a second display size,
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 64,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 66)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 67)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 65,
Rather than the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, the case where the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier to finally display the big hit symbol,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 68)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 67,
The display of the first display is started during the execution of one symbol change display, and is terminated.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 68,
The first display is a display where the display position may change,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table that does.

(Appendix 71)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
The display position of the first display changes by the moving display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 74,
The timing notification is a notification that the timing indicating that the certain effect has been performed is displayed by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 74 or 75,
After the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, after the second display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be deleted.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 77,
The display unit is a unit configured from a plurality of display units,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 80)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A1)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter display,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
If the first meter display has changed from the first state to the third state, than if the first meter display has not changed from the first state to the third state. , High expectations of big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , High expectations of big hits,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A2)
In the gaming table described in Supplementary Note A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A3)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A1 or A2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display that is started to be displayed in the fourth state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first meter display, the case where the display is started in the second state, the higher the expectation of a big hit than when the display is started in the first state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by the first icon being displayed a first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by the first icon being displayed a second number of times,
The second number is a number less than the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A6,
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a state of a display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the sixth state is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A8)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a state of a display that indicates that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of a display indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed,
If the fifth state is displayed than the second state, the jackpot display is easier to be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A8,
One of the plurality of effects is a pseudo continuous effect,
The pseudo consecutive notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo consecutive notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A10)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A9,
One of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation unit,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A11)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A12)
A game console having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in a period in which the reach effect display is performed,
The period display is a display that notifies the first timing during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing during which the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
The notice display is a display that gives notice that the first timing is notified by the period display,
Before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display, the notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A13)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
As the cursor display moves from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. Is composed of
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,
By the cursor display reaching the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A14)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed,
The chance up display is a display that informs that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A15)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A14,
The period display is a display that may perform a moving display.
A game console whose head is that.

(Appendix A16)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A17)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A15 or A16,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
A big hit is finally obtained (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the preview display is displayed in the first display mode. The symbol mode is easily confirmed and displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A19)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A18,
When the notice is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, compared with the case where the preview display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to start,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A20)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A21)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A20,
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defmeter),
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
The case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol mode than the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A22)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A21,
Depending on the display mode of the preview display, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A23)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A21 or A22,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the fourth display mode when the preview display is displayed in the second display mode than when the preview display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A24)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode when the preview display is displayed in the first display mode than when the preview display is displayed in the second display mode. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A25)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A24,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display,
The notice display is a first notice display,
By the second notice display, it may be announced that the first notice display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A26)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A25,
The symbol change display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the one in which the first preview display is notified by the second preview display is not performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A27)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A26,
When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed finally when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A28)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A29)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A30)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A29,
By being notified that the reach effect display is displayed by the preview display, it is foreseen that the period display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A31)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A30,
The notice display may be performed in the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A32)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A31,
The notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A33)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32,
The notice display is also displayed while the symbol stop display is being performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A34)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32,
The notice display is not displayed during a period in which the symbol stop display is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A35)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A34,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A36)
The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A37)
A game console with display means,
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display,
The first display is a display that informs the timing when a certain effect may be started,
The display means is a means in which the A-th display may be displayed as a certain effect,
At the timing when the A-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as “A-th timing”), the A-th display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the certain effect may be the A-th display. Further, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A37,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the A-th display may be displayed in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, a timing at which the A-th display is started is notified
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A39)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A38,
The period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, the B-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A40)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A37,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the A-th display is displayed,
As time elapses, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the A-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A41)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A40,
When the A-th timing comes, the A-th display may be displayed,
When the A-th timing comes, the A-th display may not be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A42)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A40,
When the A-th timing comes, the A-th display is always displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A43)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A42,
The display unit is a unit that may display a second display,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A44)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A43,
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A44,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A46)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A44,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display, the moving display may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A47)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A46,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the A-th display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A48)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A47,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, the first display is not displayed, and the first display is displayed in an area overlapping at least a part of the area where the first display was displayed. A display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A49)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A48,
The display unit is a unit configured from a plurality of image display units,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side than the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means,
The A-th display is displayed by the second image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A50)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A49,
The second image display unit is a unit that may perform a staging operation,
When the first display is displayed by the first image display means, the second image display means may perform the first-stage effect operation when the A-th timing comes. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A51)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A50,
Equipped with operating means,
The A-th display is a display related to the operation unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A52)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A51,
The display means is a means in which the C-th display may be displayed as a certain effect,
At the timing when the C-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as “C-th timing”), the C-th display may be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A53)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A52,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A54)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A52,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A55)
A game console with display means,
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display,
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A56)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A55,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”).
According to the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A57)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A56,
The period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A58)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A55,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display that notifies the certain timing,
As time elapses, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A59)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A58,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A60)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A58,
When the certain timing comes, the certain performance is always started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A61)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A60,
The display unit is a unit that may display a second display,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A62)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A61,
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A63)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A62,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A64)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A62,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display, the moving display may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A65)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A64,
In the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation display, display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A66)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A65,
According to the elapse of time in a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the first display is configured to change,
In the second symbol change display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol change display, it is configured so that the display mode of the first display does not change,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A67)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A65,
According to the elapse of time in a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the first display is configured to change,
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A68)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is not changed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A68)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be performed. is there,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A69)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A65,
The display unit is a unit that may display a second display,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol change display. The second display may be always displayed in the first symbol change display.

(Appendix A70)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A69,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A71)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A69,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A72)
A game console with display means,
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”),
Depending on the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change,
Before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed in accordance with the elapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice display may be performed by the first display. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A73)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A72,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, the certain timing is notified,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A74)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A73,
The period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A75)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A72,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display that notifies the certain timing,
As time elapses, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A76)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A75,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A77)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A75,
When the certain timing comes, the certain performance is always started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A78)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A77,
The display unit is a unit that may display a second display,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A79)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A78,
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A79,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A81)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A79,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display, the moving display may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A82)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A81,
The notice display is a display for giving a notice of time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A83)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A82,
Equipped with operating means,
The notice display is a display related to the operation unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A84)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A83,
After the notice display is performed, the time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A85)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A84,
Before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed in accordance with the elapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice display is always performed by the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A86)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A85,
When the first display is displayed, a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the elapse of time until the certain effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A87)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A86,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A88)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A86,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A89)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means in which the first display may be displayed,
The first display is a display for notifying a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”).
The display means is a means in which a second display may be displayed,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
A plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of second displays”) may be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A90)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A89,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, the certain timing is notified,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A91)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A90,
The period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A91)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A89,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display that notifies the certain timing,
As time elapses, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A92)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A91,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A93)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A91,
When the certain timing comes, the certain performance is always started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A94)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A93,
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A95)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A94,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A96)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A94,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be configured to change,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display, the moving display may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A97)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A96,
When the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A98)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A96,
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A99)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A98,
The second display is a display in preparation,
The indications of the plurality of brothers are a plurality of preparation indications,
One display of the plurality of preparation displays is a first preparation display,
One display of the plurality of preparation displays is a second preparation display,
The first preparation display is a display displayed earlier than the second preparation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A100)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) corresponding to the first preparation display is displayed,
After the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) corresponding to the second preparation display is displayed,
The first timer display is configured to be displayed earlier than the second timer display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays.

(Appendix A101)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) corresponding to the first preparation display is displayed,
After the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) corresponding to the second preparation display is displayed,
The first timer display may be displayed earlier than the second timer display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A102)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A101,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A103)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A101,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A104)
A game console with display means,
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display,
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started,
Depending on the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change,
Before a change in at least a part of the display mode of the first display is performed according to a lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice may be given,
The notice is a notice that gives notice that a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is to be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A105)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A104,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”),
During a change in at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A106)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A105,
The period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A107)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A104,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”).
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A108)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A104 to A107,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A109)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A104 to A107,
When the certain timing comes, the certain performance is always started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A110)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A109,
The display unit is a unit that may display a second display,
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A111)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A110,
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A111,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A113)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A111,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display, the moving display may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A114)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A113,
The notice is a notice display by the first display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note A115)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to A114,
Before a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, a false notice may be performed,
Even if the false notice is performed, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A116)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to A115,
Before a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to a lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice is provided,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A117)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A116,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A118)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A116,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A119)
A gaming table provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
During the execution of the big hit game, at least a part of the timer effect is configured to be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A120)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A119,
The jackpot game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be performed in one round game,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A121)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A119,
The jackpot game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be performed over two or more round games.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A122)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by being displayed subtracted from the initial value after displaying the initial value,
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating a time when the timer display becomes 0,
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer effect”) indicates a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect may be executed over a first number of round games,
The first timer effect may be executed over a second number of round games,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
The first number is one or more times,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A123)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
One round game is configured to end when the first time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by being displayed subtracted from the initial value after displaying the initial value,
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating a time when the timer display becomes 0,
A second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A124)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A123,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first case”),
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the timer display indicates a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as a “second case”),
The certain effect in the first case is an effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect”),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “second effect”),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A125)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A124,
It is configured such that the timing at which the second effect can be started is easier than the timing at which the first effect can be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A126)
A game console described in Supplementary Note A124 or A125,
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case,
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is executed is different from the timing at which the second effect is executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A127)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Notes A119 to A126,
The certain effect is a confirmed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is given.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A128)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A127, which quotes any one of Supplementary Notes A124 to A126,
The confirmed effect is an effect that informs that the symbol change display that will be a big hit is included in the hold,
In the case where the number of the symbol change display that becomes a big hit included in the hold is one, it is configured such that there is a case where one of the first effect and the second effect is executed. ,
In the case where the number of symbol change displays that become big hits included in the hold is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A129)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A124 to A126,
The certain effect is an effect indicating that a benefit advantageous to the player may be provided,
The second production is more likely to be given a benefit that is advantageous to the player than the first production,
The first effect may be performed as a confirmed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is provided (hereinafter, referred to as a “first case”),
The first effect may not be the confirmed effect (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”),
The second effect is a confirmed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is provided,
The second case is configured so that the second effect is more easily executed than the first case,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A130)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A129,
The timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Have been
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A131)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A130,
The timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “third case”),
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A132)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A119,
The timer display is configured to be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and to become a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. Yes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A133)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A132,
The timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition regarding a game is achieved,
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is finished, it is configured such that the display indicating the certain time may be displayed,
It is configured such that a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game according to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A134)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Notes A119, A132, or A133,
As the certain effect, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as an “eleventh effect”) indicating a game state after the end of the big hit game may be executed,
As the certain effect, there may be a case where an effect that notifies that a symbol change display that will be a big hit is included in the hold (hereinafter, referred to as a “twelfth effect”) is performed,
The certain effect is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time,
If the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A135)
A gaming table provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the jackpot game,
An effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth effect”) indicating that a benefit advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the big hit game is configured to be executed in some cases,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A136)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A135,
The effect means is a display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A137)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A136,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A138)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A137,
The certain time is a time when the remaining time of the timer indicates 0,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A139)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A138,
The certain effect is an effect that can be executed even in an interval during execution of the big hit game,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A140)
A gaming table provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
A timer effect is performed at least during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed during a period in which a new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display ends,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A141)
Display means;
Operating means;
A gaming table with
The display unit is a unit that may display an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation unit,
The display unit is a unit that may display a timer display,
The timer display is a display that gives advance notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed,
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the display of the timer display changes as time elapses until the operation display is displayed,
After the timer display is displayed, the operation display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A142)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A141,
As the timer display, a first timer display may be displayed,
Since the change of the display of at least a part of the first timer display is started, when the first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed,
As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed,
Since the change of the display of at least a part of the second timer display is started, when the second time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed,
The second time is longer than the first time,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A143)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A141 or A142,
A second operating means,
The operating means is a first operating means,
The operation display is a first operation display,
The display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed,
The second operation display is a display related to the second operation means,
During the display of the timer display, when a certain time elapses until the operation display is displayed, the second operation display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A144)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A141 to A143,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A145)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A141 to A144,
In the case where the display mode is changed in accordance with the elapse of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A146)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A141 to A145,
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed,
The notice display is a display that gives notice that the timer notice is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A147)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A141 to A146,
Whether the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed or the lost symbol pattern is finally displayed is determined by the big hit determination performed at the time of starting the change of the symbol,
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number obtained when a game ball enters the starting port provided in the game board,
The probability of being determined as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit probability”) is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A148)
A gaming table with a plurality of illuminated panels,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a first illumination panel,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a second illumination panel,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are provided at a first interval in the front-rear direction,
The first illumination panel is provided with a first projection projecting between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
The first protrusion is provided at a portion of the first illumination panel excluding an outer periphery,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A149)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A148,
The first illuminated panel is an illuminated panel provided behind the second illuminated panel,
The first projection is provided on a front surface of the first illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A150)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A148 or A149,
Equipped with game parts,
A plurality of the first protrusions are provided on the first illumination panel,
At least one of the first protrusions is overlapped by the gaming component at the front;
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A151)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A150,
The game component is a movable body,
The movable body may execute a first operation,
The front of the protrusion is overlapped with the movable body before the first operation is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A152)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A151,
Display means,
The first illumination panel is an illumination panel provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is an illumination panel provided in front of the display means,
There is a case where an effect by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel is performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the movable body,
A display related to the execution of the first operation by the movable body is displayed on the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A153)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A152,
The protrusion amount of the protrusion is a first length,
The first length is longer than the length of the first interval,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A154)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A152,
The protrusion amount of the protrusion is a first length,
The first length is the same as the length of the first interval,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A155)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A148 to A154,
A substrate provided with light emitting means,
The plurality of illuminated panels are capable of emitting light by light emitted from the light emitting unit,
At least a portion of the substrate is located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is not located between the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A156)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A155,
The plurality of illuminated panels are capable of performing the light emission effect by light from the lateral direction emitted from the light emitting unit,
The substrate is provided with one or more,
The first illumination panel is capable of performing the light emission by light emitted from the light emitting means provided on the first surface of the substrate,
The second illumination panel is capable of performing the light emission by light emitted from the light emitting unit provided on the second surface of the substrate,
The first surface is a rear surface of the substrate,
The second surface is a front surface of the substrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A157)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A156,
The first illumination panel is provided with a second projection projecting between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
The second projection is a projection provided on the outer periphery of at least one of the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A158)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A157,
The second protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position invisible to a player,
The bottom area of the second projection is larger than the bottom area of the first projection,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A159)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A158,
A mounting portion to which the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached,
The mounting portion has a first portion that contacts a front side of the first illumination panel, a second portion that contacts a rear side of the second illumination panel, and a boss,
By being screwed to the boss, the first illumination panel, the second illumination panel, and the mounting portion are fixed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A160)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A159,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A161)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A148 to A159,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A171)
Display means;
Multiple illuminated panels,
A gaming table with
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a first illumination panel,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a second illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are arranged at a first interval in the front-rear direction,
A first projection is provided on the first illuminated panel to avoid contact between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate of the second illuminated panel,
A second projection is provided on the first illuminated panel to maintain the distance between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel at the first distance,
The second protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position on the outer periphery of the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The first illuminated panel is arranged behind the second illuminated panel,
The first projection is a projection provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel different from the second projection,
The first protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view,
The certain position is a position formed on the second illumination panel, a position behind a reflection groove for displaying a pattern,
The certain position is a position that overlaps an image displayed on the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A172)
Display means;
Multiple illuminated panels,
A gaming table with
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a first illumination panel,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a second illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are arranged at a first interval in the front-rear direction,
A first projection is provided on the first illuminated panel to avoid contact between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate of the second illuminated panel,
A second projection is provided on the first illuminated panel to maintain the distance between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate surface of the second illuminated panel at the first distance,
The second protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position on the outer periphery of the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The first illuminated panel is arranged behind the second illuminated panel,
The first projection is a projection provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel different from the second projection,
The first protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view,
The certain position is a position formed in the first illumination panel, a position in front of a reflection groove for displaying a pattern,
The certain position is a position that overlaps an image displayed on the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A173)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A171 or A172,
The first projection is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A174)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A171 to A173,
Game board,
Game parts provided on the game board,
With
A third protrusion is provided on the first illuminated panel to avoid contact between the plate surface of the first illuminated panel and the plate of the second illuminated panel,
The third protrusion is a protrusion provided at a different position from the first protrusion,
The third protrusion is overlapped by the game component,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A175)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A174,
The game component is a first movable body,
The first movable body located at a first position may perform a first operation,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The third protrusion is overlapped by the first movable body located at the first position,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A176)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A175,
In some cases, an effect by at least one of the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel may be performed in association with the execution of the first operation by the first movable body,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A177)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A174,
The game component is a decorative member,
The third protrusion is overlapped by the decorative member,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A178)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A174,
The game component is a warp passage,
The warp passage is a passage that guides a game ball flowing down a game area of the game board from a warp inlet to a warp outlet,
The third protrusion is overlapped by the warp passage;
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A179)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A171 to A178,
The length from the proximal end to the distal end of the first projection is a first length,
The first length is longer than the length of the first interval,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A180)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A171 to A178,
The length from the proximal end to the distal end of the first protrusion is a second length,
The second length and the first interval length are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A181)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A171 to A180,
A certain mounting substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are illuminated panels capable of emitting light by being illuminated with light from light emitting means attached to the certain mounting board, respectively.
At least a portion of the certain mounting substrate is disposed in a gap formed by the first and second illuminated panels,
In the gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel, no light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate is arranged.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A182)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note A181,
The first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel are illuminated panels capable of emitting light by guiding light from the light emitting means attached to the certain mounting board from an end, respectively.
The certain mounting substrate is a mounting substrate to which the light emitting means is mounted on both surfaces of the first surface and the second surface, respectively.
The first surface is a surface opposite to the second surface,
The first illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the first surface from an end,
The second illuminated panel is an illuminated panel capable of emitting light by guiding light from a light emitting unit attached to the second surface from an end,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A183)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A181 or A182,
A first reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player is provided on a rear surface of the first illumination panel,
A second reflection groove for reflecting light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate toward the player is provided on a rear surface of the second illumination panel,
The first pattern is displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate being reflected by the first reflection groove,
A second pattern is displayed by the light from the light emitting means attached to the certain attachment substrate being reflected by the second reflection groove,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A184)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A171 to A183,
The second protrusion is provided at a position that cannot be visually recognized by a player,
The length of the outer circumference at the base end of the second protrusion is longer than the length of the outer circumference at the base end of the first protrusion,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A185)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A171 to A184,
An attachment member for attaching the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
The mounting member is provided with a spacer,
At least a portion of the spacer is disposed in a gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel,
A first screw hole is provided in the first illumination panel,
A second screw hole is provided in the second illumination panel,
A third screw hole is provided in the spacer,
When the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are attached to the attachment member, the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole overlap,
By fixing a screw to the first screw hole, the second screw hole, and the third screw hole, the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are fixed to the mounting member,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix A186)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A171 to A185,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A fourth protrusion different from the first protrusion for avoiding contact between the plate surface of the first illumination panel and the plate surface of the second illumination panel is provided on the first illumination panel. Has been
The fourth protrusion is a protrusion provided at a position that does not overlap with the reflection groove,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B1)
・ Pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Providing effect means ・ Providing a plurality of game ball detecting means ・ At least at the time of execution related to the detection result of the out ball detecting means A game console that may execute a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as “first setting suggestion effect”).

(Appendix B2)
-A control means capable of starting one of a plurality of game states is provided.-A first setting suggestion effect may be executed in a first game state (for example, a normal state).-A second game state. A game console that may execute the first setting suggestion effect during a big hit or during an electric support.

(Appendix B3)
-A game console where the first setting suggestion effect may be executed during the period when the symbol variation display is not being executed (during the demonstration or customization setting, when simply firing but not winning).

(Appendix B4)
-A game console that is provided with another game ball detecting means for a starting port, a general winning opening, etc.-The first setting suggestive effect may be executed in consideration of these detection results.

(Appendix B5)
When the condition for executing the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed at the first timing (for example, immediately) after the condition is satisfied. When the condition for executing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect is performed at a second timing after the condition is satisfied (for example, by judging the next fluctuation or the condition of the effect content). In some cases, a game console where the first timing and the second timing are different.

(Appendix B6)
A second setting suggestion effect with a fixed timing (for example, ending of a big hit game) can be executed. A game console that may be executed in duplicate with the second setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix B7)
・ A game console where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect overlap.

(Appendix B8)
・ A game console where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect do not overlap.

(Appendix B9)
・ The second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, ending of big hit game) can be executed. ・ If the timing overlaps with the second setting suggestion effect, delay or execute the first setting suggestion effect. Not a gaming table.

(Appendix B10)
-A game console equipped with a means of informing about the timing of execution of the first setting suggestive effect.

(Appendix B11)
-A pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.-Includes a production means that can execute a first notification effect.-The first notification device can execute at least information on a game. The first notification effect is a game console that may be executed with setting suggestions.

(Appendix B12)
A game console where it may be possible to identify whether the first notification effect has been notified including setting suggestions.

  It should be noted that there may be cases where the identification is not possible. The first notification effect executed at the following first timing may include a setting suggestion.

(Appendix B13)
・ The first notification effect is executed at the first timing when setting suggestion is not included. ・ The first notification effect is executed at the second timing different from the first timing when setting suggestion is included. Gaming table to be played.

(Appendix B14)
-The first notification effect is a game console that is at least a performance related to big hits.

(Appendix B15)
-A game console that can identify that the setting suggestion is included in the first notification effect due to the different display mode of the numbers.

(Appendix B16)
A game console on which a first notification effect including a setting suggestion is executed at a second timing when a certain condition is satisfied.

(Appendix B17)
-A gaming table with a difference in appearance rate when the first notification effect includes setting suggestions.

(Appendix B18)
・ A game console where re-lottery can be executed.

(Appendix B19)
A game console capable of displaying the number of drills (for example, display every "5000").

(Appendix B21)
・ Pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Equipped with an effect means capable of executing a re-lottery effect ・ The game state after the end of the jackpot may be the first game state -The game state after the end of the big hit may be the second game state-The re-lottery effect is an effect at least indicating that the second game state is started as the game state after the end of the big hit-Re-lottery effect A gaming table where settings are suggested in a pattern.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic as a production means.

  The distribution differs depending on the distribution such as slow fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, frame advance fluctuation, and dropping of the role of re-lottery, and may function as a setting guess.

(Appendix B22)
-Decorative symbol fluctuation display can be displayed-If the symbol (fixed symbol) derived by the re-lottery effect is the first decorative symbol, the first gaming state or the second gaming state starts after the big hit game ends When the confirmed symbol is the second decorative symbol (the first case), the second game state is started after the big hit game ends. In the first case, the second game state is set after the big hit game ends. Is performed (the effect at the time of promotion from "444" to "777" or "777" to "777")
-In the case of a re-lottery effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol (temporary symbol) and the fixed symbol become the first decorative symbol (a plurality of types such as "222" → "444", "444" → "444"). There is a case where the effect is performed (the second case). ・ The re-drawing effect in the second case includes the setting suggestion (if not performed, the setting suggestion is not included).
Game console.

(Appendix B23)
-If the confirmed symbol is the first decorative symbol, the promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game.-There are multiple types of the first decorative symbol (A and B), and the promotion effect is successful when A <B. The re-lottery effect when the temporary symbol is B and the confirmed symbol is A is a game console that includes setting suggestions.

  In some cases, expectation can be given to the change of the design itself.

(Appendix B24)
・ In the case of B → A, execute the first effect (downgrade-like, but promotion is ignored by the first effect)
Game console.

  In some cases, discomfort can be associated with game value.

(Appendix B25)
In the case of A → A, the first effect may or may not be executed.If the first effect is executed, the second game state is started after the end of the big hit game. When the effect is not executed, the gaming table in which the first gaming state or the second gaming state is started after the end of the big hit game.

(Appendix B26)
・ The fixed design may be related to the setting suggestion (the fixed design “444” where the first effect was performed → the setting 4 or more, etc.)
Game console.

(Appendix B31)
-Simultaneous variation machine-Attacker may perform opening / closing operation with respect to special figure 2 fluctuation during special figure 1 fluctuation-A game console that provides advance notice in decorative design fluctuation display at least during the period related to attacker opening / closing operation.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the notice means.

(Appendix B32)
-A game console where the pre-reading notice is started after the fluctuation stop of Toku-zu 2.

(Appendix B33)
-The fluctuation of the special figure 2 (at least the small hit fluctuation) is longer than the longest fluctuation of the special figure 1.-A game console where the pre-reading notice is started after the symbol is once derived with the decorative symbol.

  Since it is difficult to determine the timing of the pre-reading notice by grasping the contents of the decorative design change display executed in relation to the change of the special figure 1, the player starts without deriving the decorative design without disturbing. In some cases, you can have expectations.

(Appendix B34)
The pre-reading notice is a game console that is executed in association with the suspension of the special figure 1 which is suspended at the start of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which overlaps the timing at which the opening / closing operation of the attacker due to the small hit is started.

(Appendix B35)
-A look-ahead notice is a game console that does not include a notice about the change of the special figure 1 being executed and targets the change after the next.

(Appendix B36)
-During the opening / closing period of the attacker, the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is interrupted (genuine special-figure fluctuation), and only the decorative design fluctuation display fluctuates.

  From the viewpoint of a special figure, the pre-reading notice may be executed during a certain period after resuming after being interrupted during the opening / closing period of the attacker.

(Appendix B37)
・ Special figure 2 big hit notice at the start of special figure 1 fluctuation after special figure 2 fluctuation start (accurate)
・ A game console that may straddle a plurality of special figure 1 fluctuations.

  However, there are cases where it can be shown as a pre-reading notice.

  In some cases, it may be possible to prompt the user to stop firing during a useless period in which the jackpot is not performed over a long period of time (if one is a jackpot, the other is a non-lottery (losing confirmation)).

(Appendix B38)
-The above two irregular phenomena usually fluctuate mainly in Toku-zu 1 during normal times.

(Appendix B41)
A display means for adding and displaying the number of prize balls acquired in a state advantageous to the player (during a first gaming state: for example, during a small hit rush); and a hitting game occurs during the first gaming state. In some cases, the number of prize balls may not be added and displayed at the same time after the hit game is completed, and the additional display may be performed collectively after the hit game has been completed. A game console that does not perform the addition display when the game has been performed (for example, pending consecutive chan) and performs the addition display collectively after the next hit game is completed.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic display means.

  Three or more consecutive chans may be used.

  The condition other than the reserved consecutive chan may be a probable change (including the next big hit decision).

(Appendix B42)
-A certain condition is a pending consecutive champ.

(Appendix B43)
-A game console that starts to change while displaying the pending consecutive change suggestion display.

  In some cases, it may be possible to start fluctuations during the suggestion of the pending repetition and make a hit immediately.

(Appendix B44)
-The hit includes the big hit and the small hit.-The decorative symbol change display is possible.-The gaming table where the combination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol may stop at the same combination.

  Specific symbols (for example, “333” or “777”) may be omitted.

(Appendix B45)
-The attacker has a decorative member on the front side of the opening / closing member.-A big hit includes a long open time, and a small hit is a game console with a short open time and a large number of open times.

  Depending on the type of the hit, it may be difficult to identify the combination of the opening of the big hit or the small hit attacker and the symbol.

(Appendix B46)
-There is a first display mode and a second display mode for the change of the decorative symbol in the first game state.-The size of the decorative symbol during the change is the first display mode> the second display mode. The change related to the hold after the end is performed in at least the second display mode (for example, a change for four holds or until the addition display is completed).
-If the fluctuation is not performed during the period in which the fluctuation is performed in the second display mode, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a size corresponding to the second display mode, and if a hit occurs, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode. A gaming table.

  In some cases, the off-going portion of the reserved consecutive chan is made inconspicuous and suddenly a big hit symbol is displayed to make it seem immediately that the consecutive consecutive chan is performed.

(Appendix B47)
-The period in which the display mode of the numbers in the prize ball display is not the addition display (period during which the suggestion of the pending consecutive chan is being executed) is different from the others (for example, mosaic, different colors, etc.).
Game console.

(Appendix B51)
・ Minimum configuration of simultaneous fluctuating machine ・ Preliminary display related to suspension of measurement of fluctuation time of special figure A due to small hit of special figure B ・ The contents of the preliminary display are sent from the main at the start of special figure A fluctuation A gaming table determined in relation to certain information to be played.

For example, in a game state in which the special figure A is the main game (for example, the special figure height, the normal figure height), the special figure A starts to change while the special figure B has a small hit, and the symbol stop of the special figure A is stopped. It is not before the B small hit design stop (Appendix B52)
The sub is a game table that can specify whether one of the special map A and the special map B is stopped first or whether the special map B is a small hit.

(Appendix B53)
・ There are multiple types of small hits (Pakapaka is different / long / short)
・ Some information includes presence / absence and type of small hits. ・ Sub is a game console that determines the content of the notice display according to the type of small hits in certain information.

  There is a different notice display depending on the small hit type, and as a pre-read notice, for example, the frequency of displaying red and the degree of expectation may be different.

(Appendix B54)
-The notice display is a gaming table based on the pre-reading notice regarding the special figure A and the suspension information at the time of starting the change of the special figure A.

(Appendix B55)
-A game console where the effect display starts in response to the start of the change of the special figure A.-Even if the measurement of the change time of the special figure A is interrupted, the effect display does not interrupt.

(Appendix B56)
A configuration of a normal variable display (for example, a display of a certain combination of decorative symbols is shake-displayed → confirmed display) -A gaming table in which a display of a certain combination of decorative symbols is shake-displayed before the notice display is displayed.

(Appendix B57)
・ In the case of a loss, swing fluctuation → notice display → confirmation display (same / different from normal confirmation display) ・ In the case of big hit, swing fluctuation → no notice → confirmation display (same / different from normal confirmation display) .

  In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from being mistaken as to whether a continuation of the swing fluctuation may cause a resurrection jackpot.

  The content of the notice display may be different between the case of the SP reach and the loss.

  The production stage may be changed after the SP reach has a very high expectation (for example, the sorry zone).

  It is also possible to make it as follows: Do not miss → Notice display 1 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off → Notice display 2 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off (when there is no small hit) → Stage change may be made , SP reach 2 off → notification display 2 → stage change may be performed.

(Appendix B58)
-When a notice is displayed, a game console that always starts after the end of the small hit in Toku-zu B.

(Appendix B59)
-A game console that does not display a notice when the special figure A starts changing during the special figure B small hit.

(Appendix B60)
-When the special figure A starts to change during the special figure B small hit change, a gaming table where the new special figure B small hit change does not start during the special figure A change.

(Appendix B61)
・ Special figure B is hit during small change of special figure A ・ For a predetermined period after small figure B small hit, right-handed can be returned to left-handed and no notification is given ・ During one special figure A change, right A game console that can be returned to left-handed when hit and can be in three states of notifying, not performing, and performing.

(Appendix B71)
Production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One game ball detecting means of the plurality of game ball detecting means is an out ball detecting means,
The out ball detecting means is means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered the out mouth,
One of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestion effect,
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect at least indicating a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B72)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B71,
Control means capable of starting one of the plurality of game states is provided,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B73)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B71 or B72,
The execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started during a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B74)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B73,
One game ball detection means of the plurality of game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detection means is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered a certain winning opening,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is established in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B75)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B74,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B76)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
It may be in a state where both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B77)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, “a certain period”), after the certain period has elapsed, Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B78)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B79)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B71 to B78,
With achievement degree suggesting means at least suggesting the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B81)
A game console equipped with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect,
The first notification effect is an effect including at least a notification about the game,
The first notification effect is an effect that may include an indication of a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B82)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B81,
The first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner that can identify that the setting suggestion is included,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B83)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B81 or B82,
Execution of the first notification effect, which does not include the suggestion of the setting in the first case, is started,
The execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting in the first case is not started,
In the second case, execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B84)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B83,
The execution of the first notification effect not including the suggestion of the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B85)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B83 or B84,
In the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B86)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B81 to B85,
The first notification effect is an effect related to at least a jackpot,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B87)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B81 to B86,
In the first notification effect, suggestion of a setting selected from the plurality of settings is performed by a display mode of numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B88)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B81 to B87,
Depending on the setting selected from the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is executed is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B89)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B81 to B88,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as “first jackpot result”) indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first advantageous state is displayed once, and then the first advantageous state is displayed. There is also a case where the result of the big hit that informs the second advantageous state is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “third case”),
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is once displayed and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth case").
The first notification effect may be executed in the re-lottery effect,
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion of the setting,
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes an indication of the setting,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B90)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B81 to B88,
One of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls,
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display of the total prize ball number acquired in at least the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect performed in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize ball number,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates that it is a second number, execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B91)
First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
Attackers that can win game balls,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining a fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuation display,
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices;
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
During the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker responds to the second symbol variation display according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases in which there is a second state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
One notice of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice that is executed during the display of the decorative design change display,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B92)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B91,
The certain period is a period started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol change display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B93)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B91 or B92,
A control unit that can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
A result is displayed in which at least the attacker changes the state to the second state, rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first game state. The variation time length of the second symbol variation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B94)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B93,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B95)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B91 to B94,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed for the first symbol change display being held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B96)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B91 to B95,
The first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol change display being executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B97)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B91 to B96,
In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, The first symbol change display resumes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B98)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B91 to B97,
One notice of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B99)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B98,
The second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed plural times,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B100)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B91 to B99,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B101)
Control means controllable to one of a plurality of game states;
Attackers that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to a result of the game,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize ball number display,
The total winning prize ball number display means that after the state transition from the first game state to the second game state, the attacker wins the prize during the state transition to the first game state. This is a display that shows the total number of prize balls acquired.
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the game balls are transferred to the attacker. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the winning number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, After the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state. After the second state is completed, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B102)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B101,
The result of the game is a result of the symbol variation display,
The certain condition is that when the attacker transitions from the first state to the second state, the result of the symbol variation display that is suspended for execution indicates that the attacker is in the second state. A condition that contains a result that changes state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B103)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B102,
In the case where the certain condition is satisfied, at least that the result of the symbol change display of which execution is suspended includes a result that the attacker changes the state to the second state is included. A suggestion display (hereinafter, referred to as a “reserved reunion suggestion display”) is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B104)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B103,
The pending consecutive Chang suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and started the symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B105)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B101 to B104,
The second state is a state of both the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
One display of the plurality of displays is a decorative design change display,
There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B106)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B105,
A decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and the operation mode of the attacker is difficult to be visually recognized by a player,
In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the operation mode of the attacker is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B107)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B105 or B106,
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode,
In the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a second display mode,
The size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is held when the second state is completed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period”), the first display mode is used. Displaying the decorative symbol variation display, if the certain condition is satisfied, even during the certain period, display the decorative symbol variation display in the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B108)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B101 to B107,
Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the number of game balls winning the attacker depends on the winning number of the game balls. In the case where the number of prize balls is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, after the second state ends, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state becomes The display of the total acquired prize ball number during a period until the addition of the unacquired prize ball number corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the attacker to the total acquired prize ball number display is completed. Changing the display mode of to another display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B109)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B101 to B108,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B111)
First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Attackers that can win game balls,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining a fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuation display,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
Main control means capable of at least controlling the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means,
Sub-control means at least capable of controlling the display means,
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
The attacker is capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display is a small hit,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
In the period from when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started to when the variation time determined by the variation time determining means elapses, the result of the second symbol variation display is the small hit. The attacker may be in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) according to
In the first case, the period from when the result of the second symbol variation display becomes the small hit until the period when the attacker is in the second state passes, the first symbol variation display is performed. A state in which the progress of the fluctuation time is interrupted (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain state”),
One of the plurality of displays is a first notice display,
The first notice display may be displayed in association with the certain state,
The first notice display is a display displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
The sub-control unit is a unit that performs control according to a command from the main control unit,
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, a display mode of the first notice display is determined in relation to a certain command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B112)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B111,
The sub-control means determines which of the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display is first stopped and displayed by the certain command received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. Is a means that can identify
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B113)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B111 or B112,
The sub-control unit is a unit that can specify whether the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by the certain command,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B114)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B111 to B113,
There are a plurality of types of the small hits in which the aspect of the second state is different,
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the small hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B115)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B111 to B114,
The first notice display is, in the first case, a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol change display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started. Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B116)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B111 to B115,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern change display,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
Even when the certain state is reached, the decorative pattern change display is continuously displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B117)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B116,
The time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in the certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change, and the certain time in the certain state not being set. The time from the start of the decorative pattern change display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by the swing change is the same,
When the certain decorative symbol change display in the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B118)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B116 or B117,
In the case where the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a loss result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, the first notice may be displayed,
When the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, there is no case where the first notice display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B119)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B111 to B118,
When the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display is always started after the certain state is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B120)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B111 to B119,
In a case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B121)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B111 to B120,
A control unit that can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
A result is displayed in which at least the attacker changes the state to the second state, rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first game state. The variation time length of the second symbol variation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B122)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B121,
By hitting right, it is easy to win game balls to the attacker,
In the first gaming state, when the second symbol change display is the small hit and the attacker is in the second state, a certain period after the second state ends Now, do not display a message to prompt the player to turn left,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B131)
A game console equipped with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
After the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the first game state,
After the end of the big hit game, it may transition to the second game state,
The second gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state,
The re-lottery effect is an effect that may at least suggest transitioning to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the re-lottery effect, there may be included an indication regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of the effect means.

(Appendix B132)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B131,
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as a “first jackpot result”) indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first gaming state is displayed once, and then the second gaming state is displayed. May be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a "third case") to notify that a big hit
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is once displayed and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth case").
In the fourth case, the game may shift to the first game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the fourth case, the game may shift to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the third case, after the end of the big hit game, transition to the second game state,
In the third case, the first effect is performed,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be performed,
The first effect performed in the third case is an effect suggesting that the game is shifted to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
The first effect performed in the fourth case is an effect including a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B133)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B132,
In the fourth case, in the big hit game, there may be a promotion effect of whether or not to shift to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
As a result of the first jackpot, a combination of the first decorative symbols may be displayed,
As a result of the first jackpot, a combination of second decorative symbols may be displayed,
The combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol is a combination of different decorative symbols,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative symbols is once displayed after the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed, the second game after the end of the big hit game in the promotion effect when the combination of the second decorative symbols is displayed. It is easy to be notified that the state will change,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after the combination is once displayed with the combination of the second decorative symbols, a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings is displayed. included,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it can be expected that the combination of the big hit symbols changes.

(Appendix B134)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note B133,
In the fourth case, the first effect is performed when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after once displayed in the combination of the second decorative symbols,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where discomfort can be associated with a game value.

(Appendix B135)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B133 or B134,
In the fourth case, there is a case where the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after being once displayed in the combination of the first decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth case”),
There is a case where the first effect is executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as a “sixth case”),
There is a case where the first effect is not executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as a “seventh case”),

In the sixth case, transition to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the seventh case, the game may shift to the first game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the seventh case, the game may shift to the valley game state after the end of the big hit game,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix B136)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B133 to B135,
In the fourth case, there is a case where the combination of the decorative symbols finally confirmed and displayed is a suggestion regarding the setting,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In addition, what is described as the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a variable display of the symbol (more specifically, a special figure), and the description that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is the symbol (the more Specifically, a stop display of a special figure) may be used.

  In addition, the above “may be” may be replaced with “always on”, “always on”, or “always on”. It may be replaced with "always OO".

  FIG. 230 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 230, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium fired from the firing means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the firing means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, the total number of balls held, and the like) and other information is provided below the game area 902 on the front of the gaming table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 192 are not provided.

  In addition, an embodiment in which the above-described display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 192 or the like may be adopted, and further, the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. May be used. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a continuous tapping operation, or a long-pressing operation on the touch panel. May be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation on the touch panel is performed in a state in which is continuously touched. Further, the configuration may be such that the long-pressing automatic continuous tapping function is not enabled. Further, in some effects, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the touch-and-hold automatic continuous tapping function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, or may be configured to activate more or less effects. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects by a continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when performing with the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may be configured not to be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured to be small. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 230 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball to pay out the ball. May be performed by credit.

  Next, a slot machine (turning machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 231 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 231 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001, three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 231) are stored. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal interval in an appropriate number, and this belt-shaped member is stuck to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed other than the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly irradiated. In the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided, and the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 1014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines, in which a rightward prize line and a rightward prize line are added, are valid as a prize line. The number of the winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, a right horizontal winning line, Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be made effective as winning lines. Hereinafter, the activated pay line may be referred to as an activated line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert medals) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three sheets. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two sheets are inserted. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, notifies that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the insertion includes both. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are configured by 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the start lever 1035 is operated by operating the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing down and removing medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 allows an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of a player), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various types of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decoration lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game device). Side).

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visually recognizable by a player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 which issues a receipt describing a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 5C, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the information and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 2B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data obtaining unit that obtains data related to the game through a mobile phone line, A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 13C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data relating to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data relating to the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. A home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 3D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and a data ( A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine is executed in a pseudo manner for a home game machine. In this case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a rock ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is a component included only in each of the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, and the supplementary notes described above, the component is replaced with the other embodiment, the example, or the like. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders application, the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, and the additional notes, etc., are included in other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even when applied to examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like, it can be realized as one coherent technical idea.

100 pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 effect button 206 effect device 208 decorative symbol display device 212 first special figure display device 214 second special figure display device 224 effect movable body 242 warp device 246 shielding device 300 main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Gaming board lamp 542 Gaming frame lamp 700 Transmissive part 703f, 703r Transmissive member 703t1 to 703t5 Projection 703u Rib 703HE Heart mark pattern 703SM Smile mark pattern 704 Glass unit frame 704cb1, 704cbE1 First LED board 704b 2LED board 704RB Rib 713a-715a Lens cut

Claims (16)

Display means;
Multiple illuminated panels,
An LED substrate provided with a plurality of LEDs,
A gaming table with
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a first illumination panel,
One illumination panel of the plurality of illumination panels is a second illumination panel,
One of the plurality of LEDs is a first LED for displaying a pattern on the first illumination panel,
One of the plurality of LEDs is a second LED for displaying a pattern on the second illumination panel,
The first illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The second illumination panel is provided in front of the display means,
The first illumination panel and the second illumination panel are arranged with a gap in the front-rear direction,
A projection for preventing the plate surface of the first illuminated panel from contacting the plate surface of the second illuminated panel is provided on the first illuminated panel,
The first illuminated panel is arranged behind the second illuminated panel,
The projection is provided at a certain position on the front surface of the first illumination panel,
The protrusion is provided at a position visible to the player in front view,
The certain position is a position that overlaps the image displayed on the display means in the front-back direction,
The light emitting mode of the first LED and the light emitting mode of the second LED may be different light emitting modes,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
At least a part of the LED board is located between the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
The first LED is provided on a first surface of the LED substrate,
The second LED is provided on a back surface of the first surface of the LED substrate (hereinafter, referred to as a “second surface”),
The LED substrate is a substrate in which the first surface is arranged to face the rear side of the game console,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 3,
A connector for connecting a harness to the LED board is provided on the LED board,
The connector is provided only on the first surface of the first surface and the second surface,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The certain position is a position formed on the second illumination panel, a position behind a reflection groove for displaying a pattern,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The certain position is a position formed in the first illumination panel and located in front of a reflection groove for displaying a pattern.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
At least a part of the shape of the outer shape in the first illuminated panel and the shape of the outer shape in the second illuminated panel are different,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The first illumination panel is provided with first identification information for identifying the first illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 8,
The first identification information is attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
Second identification information for identifying the second illumination panel is attached to the second illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 10,
The second identification information is attached to a position where the player is not visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The protrusion is provided at a position inside the outer edge of the first illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The length from the base end to the tip of the projection is longer than the length of the gap formed by the first illumination panel and the second illumination panel,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The length of the gap formed by the first illuminated panel and the second illuminated panel is the same as the length from the base end to the tip of the protrusion.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.